[Title 29 CFR ]
[Code of Federal Regulations (annual edition) - July 1, 2013 Edition]
[From the U.S. Government Printing Office]
[[Page i]]
Title 29
Labor
________________________
Part 1926
Revised as of July 1, 2013
Containing a codification of documents of general
applicability and future effect
As of July 1, 2013
Published by the Office of the Federal Register
National Archives and Records Administration as a
Special Edition of the Federal Register
[[Page ii]]
U.S. GOVERNMENT OFFICIAL EDITION NOTICE
Legal Status and Use of Seals and Logos
The seal of the National Archives and Records Administration
(NARA) authenticates the Code of Federal Regulations (CFR) as
the official codification of Federal regulations established
under the Federal Register Act. Under the provisions of 44
U.S.C. 1507, the contents of the CFR, a special edition of the
Federal Register, shall be judicially noticed. The CFR is
prima facie evidence of the original documents published in
the Federal Register (44 U.S.C. 1510).
It is prohibited to use NARA's official seal and the stylized Code
of Federal Regulations logo on any republication of this
material without the express, written permission of the
Archivist of the United States or the Archivist's designee.
Any person using NARA's official seals and logos in a manner
inconsistent with the provisions of 36 CFR part 1200 is
subject to the penalties specified in 18 U.S.C. 506, 701, and
1017.
Use of ISBN Prefix
This is the Official U.S. Government edition of this publication
and is herein identified to certify its authenticity. Use of
the 0-16 ISBN prefix is for U.S. Government Printing Office
Official Editions only. The Superintendent of Documents of the
U.S. Government Printing Office requests that any reprinted
edition clearly be labeled as a copy of the authentic work
with a new ISBN.
U . S . G O V E R N M E N T P R I N T I N G O F F I C E
------------------------------------------------------------------
U.S. Superintendent of Documents Washington, DC
20402-0001
http://bookstore.gpo.gov
Phone: toll-free (866) 512-1800; DC area (202) 512-1800
[[Page iii]]
Table of Contents
Page
Explanation................................................. v
Title 29:
SUBTITLE B--Regulations Relating to Labor (Continued)
Chapter XVII--Occupational Safety and Health
Administration, Department of Labor (Continued) 5
Finding Aids:
Table of CFR Titles and Chapters........................ 685
Alphabetical List of Agencies Appearing in the CFR...... 705
List of CFR Sections Affected........................... 715
[[Page iv]]
----------------------------
Cite this Code: CFR
To cite the regulations in
this volume use title,
part and section number.
Thus, 29 CFR 1926.1 refers
to title 29, part 1926,
section 1.
----------------------------
[[Page v]]
EXPLANATION
The Code of Federal Regulations is a codification of the general and
permanent rules published in the Federal Register by the Executive
departments and agencies of the Federal Government. The Code is divided
into 50 titles which represent broad areas subject to Federal
regulation. Each title is divided into chapters which usually bear the
name of the issuing agency. Each chapter is further subdivided into
parts covering specific regulatory areas.
Each volume of the Code is revised at least once each calendar year
and issued on a quarterly basis approximately as follows:
Title 1 through Title 16.................................as of January 1
Title 17 through Title 27..................................as of April 1
Title 28 through Title 41...................................as of July 1
Title 42 through Title 50................................as of October 1
The appropriate revision date is printed on the cover of each
volume.
LEGAL STATUS
The contents of the Federal Register are required to be judicially
noticed (44 U.S.C. 1507). The Code of Federal Regulations is prima facie
evidence of the text of the original documents (44 U.S.C. 1510).
HOW TO USE THE CODE OF FEDERAL REGULATIONS
The Code of Federal Regulations is kept up to date by the individual
issues of the Federal Register. These two publications must be used
together to determine the latest version of any given rule.
To determine whether a Code volume has been amended since its
revision date (in this case, July 1, 2013), consult the ``List of CFR
Sections Affected (LSA),'' which is issued monthly, and the ``Cumulative
List of Parts Affected,'' which appears in the Reader Aids section of
the daily Federal Register. These two lists will identify the Federal
Register page number of the latest amendment of any given rule.
EFFECTIVE AND EXPIRATION DATES
Each volume of the Code contains amendments published in the Federal
Register since the last revision of that volume of the Code. Source
citations for the regulations are referred to by volume number and page
number of the Federal Register and date of publication. Publication
dates and effective dates are usually not the same and care must be
exercised by the user in determining the actual effective date. In
instances where the effective date is beyond the cut-off date for the
Code a note has been inserted to reflect the future effective date. In
those instances where a regulation published in the Federal Register
states a date certain for expiration, an appropriate note will be
inserted following the text.
OMB CONTROL NUMBERS
The Paperwork Reduction Act of 1980 (Pub. L. 96-511) requires
Federal agencies to display an OMB control number with their information
collection request.
[[Page vi]]
Many agencies have begun publishing numerous OMB control numbers as
amendments to existing regulations in the CFR. These OMB numbers are
placed as close as possible to the applicable recordkeeping or reporting
requirements.
PAST PROVISIONS OF THE CODE
Provisions of the Code that are no longer in force and effect as of
the revision date stated on the cover of each volume are not carried.
Code users may find the text of provisions in effect on any given date
in the past by using the appropriate List of CFR Sections Affected
(LSA). For the convenience of the reader, a ``List of CFR Sections
Affected'' is published at the end of each CFR volume. For changes to
the Code prior to the LSA listings at the end of the volume, consult
previous annual editions of the LSA. For changes to the Code prior to
2001, consult the List of CFR Sections Affected compilations, published
for 1949-1963, 1964-1972, 1973-1985, and 1986-2000.
``[RESERVED]'' TERMINOLOGY
The term ``[Reserved]'' is used as a place holder within the Code of
Federal Regulations. An agency may add regulatory information at a
``[Reserved]'' location at any time. Occasionally ``[Reserved]'' is used
editorially to indicate that a portion of the CFR was left vacant and
not accidentally dropped due to a printing or computer error.
INCORPORATION BY REFERENCE
What is incorporation by reference? Incorporation by reference was
established by statute and allows Federal agencies to meet the
requirement to publish regulations in the Federal Register by referring
to materials already published elsewhere. For an incorporation to be
valid, the Director of the Federal Register must approve it. The legal
effect of incorporation by reference is that the material is treated as
if it were published in full in the Federal Register (5 U.S.C. 552(a)).
This material, like any other properly issued regulation, has the force
of law.
What is a proper incorporation by reference? The Director of the
Federal Register will approve an incorporation by reference only when
the requirements of 1 CFR part 51 are met. Some of the elements on which
approval is based are:
(a) The incorporation will substantially reduce the volume of
material published in the Federal Register.
(b) The matter incorporated is in fact available to the extent
necessary to afford fairness and uniformity in the administrative
process.
(c) The incorporating document is drafted and submitted for
publication in accordance with 1 CFR part 51.
What if the material incorporated by reference cannot be found? If
you have any problem locating or obtaining a copy of material listed as
an approved incorporation by reference, please contact the agency that
issued the regulation containing that incorporation. If, after
contacting the agency, you find the material is not available, please
notify the Director of the Federal Register, National Archives and
Records Administration, 8601 Adelphi Road, College Park, MD 20740-6001,
or call 202-741-6010.
CFR INDEXES AND TABULAR GUIDES
A subject index to the Code of Federal Regulations is contained in a
separate volume, revised annually as of January 1, entitled CFR Index
and Finding Aids. This volume contains the Parallel Table of Authorities
and Rules. A list of CFR titles, chapters, subchapters, and parts and an
alphabetical list of agencies publishing in the CFR are also included in
this volume.
[[Page vii]]
An index to the text of ``Title 3--The President'' is carried within
that volume.
The Federal Register Index is issued monthly in cumulative form.
This index is based on a consolidation of the ``Contents'' entries in
the daily Federal Register.
A List of CFR Sections Affected (LSA) is published monthly, keyed to
the revision dates of the 50 CFR titles.
REPUBLICATION OF MATERIAL
There are no restrictions on the republication of material appearing
in the Code of Federal Regulations.
INQUIRIES
For a legal interpretation or explanation of any regulation in this
volume, contact the issuing agency. The issuing agency's name appears at
the top of odd-numbered pages.
For inquiries concerning CFR reference assistance, call 202-741-6000
or write to the Director, Office of the Federal Register, National
Archives and Records Administration, 8601 Adelphi Road, College Park, MD
20740-6001 or e-mail [email protected].
SALES
The Government Printing Office (GPO) processes all sales and
distribution of the CFR. For payment by credit card, call toll-free,
866-512-1800, or DC area, 202-512-1800, M-F 8 a.m. to 4 p.m. e.s.t. or
fax your order to 202-512-2104, 24 hours a day. For payment by check,
write to: US Government Printing Office - New Orders, P.O. Box 979050,
St. Louis, MO 63197-9000.
ELECTRONIC SERVICES
The full text of the Code of Federal Regulations, the LSA (List of
CFR Sections Affected), The United States Government Manual, the Federal
Register, Public Laws, Public Papers of the Presidents of the United
States, Compilation of Presidential Documents and the Privacy Act
Compilation are available in electronic format via www.ofr.gov. For more
information, contact the GPO Customer Contact Center, U.S. Government
Printing Office. Phone 202-512-1800, or 866-512-1800 (toll-free). E-
mail, [email protected].
The Office of the Federal Register also offers a free service on the
National Archives and Records Administration's (NARA) World Wide Web
site for public law numbers, Federal Register finding aids, and related
information. Connect to NARA's web site at www.archives.gov/federal-
register.
The e-CFR is a regularly updated, unofficial editorial compilation
of CFR material and Federal Register amendments, produced by the Office
of the Federal Register and the Government Printing Office. It is
available at www.ecfr.gov.
Charles A. Barth,
Director,
Office of the Federal Register.
July 1, 2013.
[[Page ix]]
THIS TITLE
Title 29--Labor is composed of nine volumes. The parts in these
volumes are arranged in the following order: Parts 0-99, parts 100-499,
parts 500-899, parts 900-1899, part 1900-Sec. 1910.999, part 1910.1000-
end of part 1910, parts 1911-1925, part 1926, and part 1927 to end. The
contents of these volumes represent all current regulations codified
under this title as of July 1, 2013.
The OMB control numbers for title 29 CFR part 1910 appear in Sec.
1910.8. For the convenience of the user, Sec. 1910.8 appears in the
Finding Aids section of the volume containing Sec. 1910.1000 to the
end.
Subject indexes appear following the occupational safety and health
standards (part 1910).
For this volume, Jonn V. Lilyea was Chief Editor. The Code of
Federal Regulations publication program is under the direction of
Michael L. White, assisted by Ann Worley.
[[Page 1]]
TITLE 29--LABOR
(This book contains part 1926)
--------------------------------------------------------------------
SUBTITLE B--Regulations Relating to Labor (Continued)
Part
chapter xvii--Occupational Safety and Health Administration,
Department of Labor (Continued)........................... 1926
[[Page 3]]
Subtitle B--Regulations Relating to Labor (Continued)
[[Page 5]]
CHAPTER XVII--OCCUPATIONAL SAFETY AND HEALTH ADMINISTRATION, DEPARTMENT
OF LABOR (CONTINUED)
--------------------------------------------------------------------
Part Page
1926 Safety and health regulations for
construction............................ 7
[[Page 7]]
PART 1926_SAFETY AND HEALTH REGULATIONS FOR CONSTRUCTION--Table of Contents
Subpart A_General
Sec.
1926.1 Purpose and scope.
1926.2 Variances from safety and health standards.
1926.3 Inspections--right of entry.
1926.4 Rules of practice for administrative adjudications for
enforcement of safety and health standards.
1926.5 OMB control numbers under the Paperwork Reduction Act.
1926.6 Incorporation by reference.
Subpart B_General Interpretations
1926.10 Scope of subpart.
1926.11 Coverage under section 103 of the act distinguished.
1926.12 Reorganization Plan No. 14 of 1950.
1926.13 Interpretation of statutory terms.
1926.14 Federal contract for ``mixed'' types of performance.
1926.15 Relationship to the Service Contract Act; Walsh-Healey Public
Contracts Act.
1926.16 Rules of construction.
Subpart C_General Safety and Health Provisions
1926.20 General safety and health provisions.
1926.21 Safety training and education.
1926.22 Recording and reporting of injuries. [Reserved]
1926.23 First aid and medical attention.
1926.24 Fire protection and prevention.
1926.25 Housekeeping.
1926.26 Illumination.
1926.27 Sanitation.
1926.28 Personal protective equipment.
1926.29 Acceptable certifications.
1926.30 Shipbuilding and ship repairing.
1926.32 Definitions.
1926.33 Access to employee exposure and medical records.
1926.34 Means of egress.
1926.35 Employee emergency action plans.
Subpart D_Occupational Health and Environmental Controls
1926.50 Medical services and first aid.
1926.51 Sanitation.
1926.52 Occupational noise exposure.
1926.53 Ionizing radiation.
1926.54 Nonionizing radiation.
1926.55 Gases, vapors, fumes, dusts, and mists.
1926.56 Illumination.
1926.57 Ventilation.
1926.58 [Reserved]
1926.59 Hazard communication.
1926.60 Methylenedianiline.
1926.61 Retention of DOT markings, placards and labels.
1926.62 Lead.
1926.64 Process safety management of highly hazardous chemicals.
1926.65 Hazardous waste operations and emergency response.
1926.66 Criteria for design and construction of spray booths.
Subpart E_Personal Protective and Life Saving Equipment
1926.95 Criteria for personal protective equipment.
1926.96 Occupational foot protection.
1926.97-1926.98 [Reserved]
1926.100 Head protection.
1926.101 Hearing protection.
1926.102 Eye and face protection.
1926.103 Respiratory protection.
1926.104 Safety belts, lifelines, and lanyards.
1926.105 Safety nets.
1926.106 Working over or near water.
1926.107 Definitions applicable to this subpart.
Subpart F_Fire Protection and Prevention
1926.150 Fire protection.
1926.151 Fire prevention.
1926.152 Flammable liquids.
1926.153 Liquefied petroleum gas (LP-Gas).
1926.154 Temporary heating devices.
1926.155 Definitions applicable to this subpart.
Subpart G_Signs, Signals, and Barricades
1926.200 Accident prevention signs and tags.
1926.201 Signaling.
1926.202 Barricades.
1926.203 Definitions applicable to this subpart.
Subpart H_Materials Handling, Storage, Use, and Disposal
1926.250 General requirements for storage.
1926.251 Rigging equipment for material handling.
1926.252 Disposal of waste materials.
Subpart I_Tools_Hand and Power
1926.300 General requirements.
1926.301 Hand tools.
1926.302 Power-operated hand tools.
1926.303 Abrasive wheels and tools.
1926.304 Woodworking tools.
1926.305 Jacks--lever and ratchet, screw, and hydraulic.
1926.306 Air receivers.
1926.307 Mechanical power-transmission apparatus.
[[Page 8]]
Subpart J_Welding and Cutting
1926.350 Gas welding and cutting.
1926.351 Arc welding and cutting.
1926.352 Fire prevention.
1926.353 Ventilation and protection in welding, cutting, and heating.
1926.354 Welding, cutting, and heating in way of preservative coatings.
Subpart K_Electrical
General
1926.400 Introduction.
1926.401 [Reserved]
Installation Safety Requirements
1926.402 Applicability.
1926.403 General requirements.
1926.404 Wiring design and protection.
1926.405 Wiring methods, components, and equipment for general use.
1926.406 Specific purpose equipment and installations.
1926.407 Hazardous (classified) locations.
1926.408 Special systems.
1926.409-1926.415 [Reserved]
Safety-Related Work Practices
1926.416 General requirements.
1926.417 Lockout and tagging of circuits.
1926.418-1926.430 [Reserved]
Safety-Related Maintenance and Environmental Considerations
1926.431 Maintenance of equipment.
1926.432 Environmental deterioration of equipment.
1926.433-1926.440 [Reserved]
Safety Requirements for Special Equipment
1926.441 Batteries and battery charging.
1926.442-1926.448 [Reserved]
Definitions
1926.449 Definitions applicable to this subpart.
Subpart L_Scaffolds
1926.450 Scope, application and definitions applicable to this subpart.
1926.451 General requirements.
1926.452 Additional requirements applicable to specific types of
scaffolds.
1926.453 Aerial lifts.
1926.454 Training requirements.
Appendix A to Subpart L--Scaffold Specifications
Appendix B to Subpart L--Criteria for Determining the Feasibility of
Providing Safe Access and Fall Protection for Scaffold
Erectors and Dismantlers [Reserved]
Appendix C to Subpart L--List of National Consensus Standards
Appendix D to Subpart L--List of Training Topics for Scaffold Erectors
and Dismantlers [Reserved]
Appendix E to Subpart L--Drawings and Illustrations
Subpart M_Fall Protection
1926.500 Scope, application, and definitions applicable to this subpart.
1926.501 Duty to have fall protection.
1926.502 Fall protection systems criteria and practices.
1926.503 Training requirements.
Appendix A to Subpart M--Determining Roof Widths
Appendix B to Subpart M--Guardrail Systems
Appendix C to Subpart M--Personal Fall Arrest Systems
Appendix D to Subpart M--Positioning Device Systems
Appendix E to Subpart M--Sample Fall Protection Plans
Subpart N_Helicopters, Hoists, Elevators, and Conveyors
1926.550 [Reserved]
1926.551 Helicopters.
1926.552 Material hoists, personnel hoists, and elevators.
1926.553 Base-mounted drum hoists.
1926.554 Overhead hoists.
1926.555 Conveyors.
Subpart O_Motor Vehicles, Mechanized Equipment, and Marine Operations
1926.600 Equipment.
1926.601 Motor vehicles.
1926.602 Material handling equipment.
1926.603 Pile driving equipment.
1926.604 Site clearing.
1926.605 Marine operations and equipment.
1926.606 Definitions applicable to this subpart.
Subpart P_Excavations
1926.650 Scope, application, and definitions applicable to this subpart.
1926.651 Specific excavation requirements.
1926.652 Requirements for protective systems.
Appendix A to Subpart P--Soil Classification
Appendix B to Subpart P--Sloping and Benching
Appendix C to Subpart P--Timber Shoring for Trenches
Appendix D to Subpart P--Aluminum Hydraulic Shoring for Trenches
Appendix E to Subpart P--Alternatives to Timber Shoring
[[Page 9]]
Appendix F to Subpart P--Selection of Protective Systems
Subpart Q_Concrete and Masonry Construction
1926.700 Scope, application, and definitions applicable to this subpart.
1926.701 General requirements.
1926.702 Requirements for equipment and tools.
1926.703 Requirements for cast-in-place concrete.
1926.704 Requirements for precast concrete.
1926.705 Requirements for lift-slab construction operations.
1926.706 Requirements for masonry construction.
Appendix A to Subpart Q--References to Subpart Q of Part 1926
Subpart R_Steel Erection
1926.750 Scope.
1926.751 Definitions.
1926.752 Site layout, site-specific erection plan and construction
sequence.
1926.753 Hoisting and rigging.
1926.754 Structural steel assembly.
1926.755 Column anchorage.
1926.756 Beams and columns.
1926.757 Open web steel joists.
1926.758 Systems-engineered metal buildings.
1926.759 Falling object protection.
1926.760 Fall protection.
1926.761 Training.
Appendix A to Subpart R--Guidelines for establishing the components of a
site-specific erection plan: Non-Mandatory Guidelines for
Complying with Sec. 1926.752(e)
Appendix B to Subpart R [Reserved]
Appendix C to Subpart R--Illustrations of bridging terminus points: Non-
Mandatory Guidelines for Complying with Sec. 1926.757(a)(10)
and Sec. 1926.757(c)(5)
Appendix D to Subpart R--Illustration of the use of control lines to
demarcate controlled decking zones (CDZs): Non-Mandatory
Guidelines for Complying with Sec. 1926.760(c)(3)
Appendix E to Subpart R--Training: Non-Mandatory Guidelines for
Complying with Sec. 1926.761
Appendix F to Subpart R--Perimeter columns: Non-Mandatory Guidelines for
Complying with Sec. 1926.756(e) To Protect the Unprotected
Side or Edge of a Walking/Working Surface
Appendix G to Subpart R--Fall protection systems criteria and practices
from Sec. 1926.502: Non-Mandatory Guidelines for Complying
with Complying with Sec. 1926.760(d)
Appendix H to Subpart R--Double connections: Illustration of a clipped
end connection and a staggered connection: Non-Mandatory
Guidelines for Complying with Complying with Sec.
1926.756(c)(1)
Subpart S_Underground Construction, Caissons, Cofferdams and Compressed
Air
1926.800 Underground construction.
1926.801 Caissons.
1926.802 Cofferdams.
1926.803 Compressed air.
1926.804 Definitions applicable to this subpart.
Appendix A to Subpart S--Decompression Tables
Subpart T_Demolition
1926.850 Preparatory operations.
1926.851 Stairs, passageways, and ladders.
1926.852 Chutes.
1926.853 Removal of materials through floor openings.
1926.854 Removal of walls, masonry sections, and chimneys.
1926.855 Manual removal of floors.
1926.856 Removal of walls, floors, and material with equipment.
1926.857 Storage.
1926.858 Removal of steel construction.
1926.859 Mechanical demolition.
1926.860 Selective demolition by explosives.
Subpart U_Blasting and the Use of Explosives
1926.900 General provisions.
1926.901 Blaster qualifications.
1926.902 Surface transportation of explosives.
1926.903 Underground transportation of explosives.
1926.904 Storage of explosives and blasting agents.
1926.905 Loading of explosives or blasting agents.
1926.906 Initiation of explosive charges--electric blasting.
1926.907 Use of safety fuse.
1926.908 Use of detonating cord.
1926.909 Firing the blast.
1926.910 Inspection after blasting.
1926.911 Misfires.
1926.912 Underwater blasting.
1926.913 Blasting in excavation work under compressed air.
1926.914 Definitions applicable to this subpart.
Subpart V_Power Transmission and Distribution
1926.950 General requirements.
1926.951 Tools and protective equipment.
1926.952 Mechanical equipment.
1926.953 Material handling.
[[Page 10]]
1926.954 Grounding for protection of employees.
1926.955 Overhead lines.
1926.956 Underground lines.
1926.957 Construction in energized substations.
1926.958 External load helicopters.
1926.959 Lineman's body belts, safety straps, and lanyards.
1926.960 Definitions applicable to this subpart.
Subpart W_Rollover Protective Structures; Overhead Protection
1926.1000 Rollover protective structures (ROPS) for material handling
equipment.
1926.1001 Minimum performance criteria for rollover protective
structures for designated scrapers, loaders, dozers, graders,
and crawler tractors.
1926.1002 Protective frames (roll-over protective structures, known as
ROPS) for wheel-type agricultural and industrial tractors used
in construction.
1926.1003 Overhead protection for operators of agricultural and
industrial tractors used in construction.
Appendix A to Subpart W--Figures W-14 through W-28
Subpart X_Stairways and Ladders
1926.1050 Scope, application, and definitions applicable to this
subpart.
1926.1051 General requirements.
1926.1052 Stairways.
1926.1053 Ladders.
1926.1054-1926.1059 [Reserved]
1926.1060 Training requirements.
Appendix A to Subpart X--Ladders
Subpart Y_Diving
General
1926.1071 Scope and application.
1926.1072 Definitions.
Personnel Requirements
1926.1076 Qualifications of dive team.
General Operations Procedures
1926.1080 Safe practices manual.
1926.1081 Pre-dive procedures.
1926.1082 Procedures during dive.
1926.1083 Post-dive procedures.
Specific Operations Procedures
1926.1084 SCUBA diving.
1926.1085 Surface-supplied air diving.
1926.1086 Mixed-gas diving.
1926.1087 Liveboating.
Equipment Procedures and Requirements
1926.1090 Equipment.
Recordkeeping
1926.1091 Recordkeeping requirements.
Appendix A to Subpart Y--Examples of Conditions Which May Restrict or
Limit Exposure to Hyperbaric Conditions
Appendix B to Subpart Y--Guidelines for Scientific Diving
Subpart Z_Toxic and Hazardous Substances
1926.1100 [Reserved]
1926.1101 Asbestos.
1926.1102 Coal tar pitch volatiles; interpretation of term.
1926.1103 13 carcinogens (4-Nitrobiphenyl, etc.).
1926.1104 alpha-Naphthylamine.
1926.1105 [Reserved]
1926.1106 Methyl chloromethyl ether.
1926.1107 3,3'-Dichlorobenzidiene (and its salts).
1926.1108 bis-Chloromethyl ether.
1926.1109 beta-Naphthylamine.
1926.1110 Benzidine.
1926.1111 4-Aminodiphenyl.
1926.1112 Ethyleneimine.
1926.1113 beta-Propiolactone.
1926.1114 2-Acetylaminofluorene.
1926.1115 4-Dimethylaminoazobenzene.
1926.1116 N-Nitrosodimethylamine.
1926.1117 Vinyl chloride.
1926.1118 Inorganic arsenic.
1926.1126 Chromium (VI).
1926.1127 Cadmium.
1926.1128 Benzene.
1926.1129 Coke oven emissions.
1926.1144 1,2-dibromo-3-chloropropane.
1926.1145 Acrylonitrile.
1926.1147 Ethylene oxide.
1926.1148 Formaldehyde.
1926.1152 Methylene chloride.
Subparts AA-BB [Reserved]
Subpart CC_Cranes and Derricks in Construction
1926.1400 Scope.
1926.1401 Definitions.
1926.1402 Ground conditions.
1926.1403 Assembly/Disassembly--selection of manufacturer or employer
procedures.
1926.1404 Assembly/Disassembly--general requirements (applies to all
assembly and disassembly operations).
1926.1405 Disassembly--additional requirements for dismantling of booms
and jibs (applies to both the use of manufacturer procedures
and employer procedures).
1926.1406 Assembly/Disassembly--employer procedures--general
requirements.
1926.1407 Power line safety (up to 350 kV)--assembly and disassembly.
1926.1408 Power line safety (up to 350 kV)--equipment operations.
[[Page 11]]
1926.1409 Power line safety (over 350 kV).
1926.1410 Power line safety (all voltages)--equipment operations closer
than the Table A zone.
1926.1411 Power line safety--while traveling.
1926.1412 Inspections.
1926.1413 Wire rope--inspection.
1926.1414 Wire rope--selection and installation criteria.
1926.1415 Safety devices.
1926.1416 Operational aids.
1926.1417 Operation.
1926.1418 Authority to stop operation.
1926.1419 Signals--general requirements.
1926.1420 Signals--radio, telephone or other electronic transmission of
signals.
1926.1421 Signals--voice signals--additional requirements.
1926.1422 Signals--hand signal chart.
1926.1423 Fall protection.
1926.1424 Work area control.
1926.1425 Keeping clear of the load.
1926.1426 Free fall and controlled load lowering.
1926.1427 Operator qualification and certification.
1926.1428 Signal person qualifications.
1926.1429 Qualifications of maintenance & repair employees.
1926.1430 Training.
1926.1431 Hoisting personnel.
1926.1432 Multiple-crane/derrick lifts--supplemental requirements.
1926.1433 Design, construction and testing.
1926.1434 Equipment modifications.
1926.1435 Tower cranes.
1926.1436 Derricks.
1926.1437 Floating cranes/derricks and land cranes/derricks on barges.
1926.1438 Overhead & gantry cranes.
1926.1439 Dedicated pile drivers.
1926.1440 Sideboom cranes.
1926.1441 Equipment with a rated hoisting/lifting capacity of 2,000
pounds or less.
1926.1442 Severability.
Appendix A to Subpart CC of Part 1926--Standard Hand Signals
Appendix B to Subpart CC of Part 1926--Assembly/Disassembly--Sample
Procedures for Minimizing the Risk of Unintended Dangerous
Boom Movement
Appendix C to Subpart CC of Part 1926--Operator Certification--Written
Examination--Technical Knowledge Criteria
Appendix A to Part 1926--Designations for General Industry Standards
Incorporated Into Body of Construction Standards
Source: 44 FR 8577, Feb. 9, 1979; 44 FR 20940, Apr. 6, 1979, unless
otherwise noted.
Editorial Note: At 44 FR 8577, Feb. 9, 1979, and corrected at 44 FR
20940, Apr. 6, 1979, OSHA reprinted without change the entire text of 29
CFR part 1926 together with certain General Industry Occupational Safety
and Health Standards contained in 29 CFR part 1910, which have been
identified as also applicable to construction work. This republication
developed a single set of OSHA regulations for both labor and management
forces within the construction industry.
Subpart A_General
Authority: 40 U.S.C. 333; 29 U.S.C. 653, 655, 657; Secretary of
Labor's Order No. 12-71 (36 FR 8754), 8-76 (41 FR 25059), 9-83 (48 FR
35736), 6-96 (62 FR 111), 5-2007 (72 FR 31160), 4-2010 (75 FR 55355), or
1-2012 (77 FR 3912), as applicable; and 29 CFR part 1911.
Sec. 1926.1 Purpose and scope.
(a) This part sets forth the safety and health standards promulgated
by the Secretary of Labor under section 107 of the Contract Work Hours
and Safety Standards Act. The standards are published in subpart C of
this part and following subparts.
(b) Subpart B of this part contains statements of general policy and
interpretations of section 107 of the Contract Work Hours and Safety
Standards Act having general applicability.
Sec. 1926.2 Variances from safety and health standards.
(a) Variances from standards which are, or may be, published in this
part may be granted under the same circumstances whereunder variances
may be granted under section 6(b)(A) or 6(d) of the Williams-Steiger
Occupational Safety and Health Act of 1970 (29 U.S.C. 65). The
procedures for the granting of variances and for related relief under
this part are those published in part 1905 of this title.
(b) Any requests for variances under this section shall also be
considered requests for variances under the Williams-Steiger
Occupational Safety and Health Act of 1970, and any requests for
variances under Williams-Steiger Occupational Safety and Health Act with
respect to construction safety or health standards shall be considered
to be also variances under the Construction Safety Act. Any variance
from a construction safety or health standard which is contained in this
part and which is incorporated by reference in part 1910 of this title
shall be deemed a variance from the standard under both the Construction
Safety Act and the
[[Page 12]]
Williams-Steiger Occupational Safety and Health Act of 1970.
Sec. 1926.3 Inspections--right of entry.
(a) It shall be a condition of each contract which is subject to
section 107 of the Contract Work Hours and Safety Standards Act that the
Secretary of Labor or any authorized representative shall have a right
of entry to any site of contract performance for the following purposes:
(1) To inspect or investigate the matter of compliance with the
safety and health standards contained in subpart C of this part and
following subparts; and
(2) To carry out the duties of the Secretary under section 107(b) of
the Act.
(b) For the purpose of carrying out his investigative duties under
the Act, the Secretary of Labor may, by agreement, use with or without
reimbursement the services, personnel, and facilities of any State or
Federal agency. Any agreements with States under this section shall be
similar to those provided for under the Walsh-Healey Public Contracts
Act under 41 CFR part 50-205.
Sec. 1926.4 Rules of practice for administrative adjudications for
enforcement of safety and health standards.
(a) The rules of practice for administrative adjudications for the
enforcement of the safety and health standards contained in subpart C of
this part and the following subparts shall be the same as those
published in part 6 of this title with respect to safety and health
violations of the Service Contract Act of 1965 (69 Stat. 1035), except
as provided in paragraph (b) of this section.
(b) In the case of debarment, the findings required by section
107(d) of the Act shall be made by the hearing examiner or the Assistant
Secretary of Labor for Occupational Safety and Health, as the case may
be. Whenever, as provided in section 107(d)(2), a contractor requests
termination of debarment before the end of the 3-year period prescribed
in that section, the request shall be filed in writing with the
Assistant Secretary of Labor for Occupational Safety and Health who
shall publish a notice in the Federal Register that the request has been
received and afford interested persons an opportunity to be heard upon
the request, and thereafter the provisions of part 6 of this title shall
apply with respect to prehearing conferences, hearings and related
matters, and decisions and orders.
Sec. 1926.5 OMB control numbers under the Paperwork Reduction Act.
The following sections or paragraphs each contain a collection of
information requirement which has been approved by the Office of
Management and Budget under the control number listed.
------------------------------------------------------------------------
OMB
29 CFR citation control
No.
------------------------------------------------------------------------
1926.33..................................................... 1218-0065
1926.50..................................................... 1218-0093
1926.52..................................................... 1218-0048
1926.53..................................................... 1218-0103
1926.59..................................................... 1218-0072
1926.60..................................................... 1218-0183
1926.62..................................................... 1218-0189
1926.64..................................................... 1218-0200
1926.65..................................................... 1218-0202
1926.103.................................................... 1218-0099
1926.200.................................................... 1218-0132
1926.250.................................................... 1218-0093
1926.251.................................................... 1218-0233
1926.403.................................................... 1218-0130
1926.404.................................................... 1218-0130
1926.405.................................................... 1218-0130
1926.407.................................................... 1218-0130
1926.408.................................................... 1218-0130
1926.453(a)(2).............................................. 1218-0216
1926.502.................................................... 1218-0197
1926.503.................................................... 1218-0197
1926.550(a)(1).............................................. 1218-0115
1926.550(a)(2).............................................. 1218-0115
1926.550(a)(4).............................................. 1218-0115
1926.550(a)(6).............................................. 1218-0113
1926.550(a)(11)............................................. 1218-0054
1926.550(a)(16)............................................. 1218-0115
1926.550(b)(2).............................................. 1218-0232
1926.550(g)................................................. 1218-0151
1926.552.................................................... 1218-0231
1926.652.................................................... 1218-0137
1926.703.................................................... 1218-0095
1926.800.................................................... 1218-0067
1926.803.................................................... 1218-0067
1926.900.................................................... 1218-0217
1926.903.................................................... 1218-0227
1926.1080................................................... 1218-0069
1926.1081................................................... 1218-0069
1926.1083................................................... 1218-0069
1926.1090................................................... 1218-0069
1926.1091................................................... 1218-0069
1926.1101................................................... 1218-0134
1926.1103................................................... 1218-0085
1926.1104................................................... 1218-0084
1926.1106................................................... 1218-0086
1926.1107................................................... 1218-0083
1926.1108................................................... 1218-0087
1926.1109................................................... 1218-0089
1926.1110................................................... 1218-0082
[[Page 13]]
1926.1111................................................... 1218-0090
1926.1112................................................... 1218-0080
1926.1113................................................... 1218-0079
1926.1114................................................... 1218-0088
1926.1115................................................... 1218-0044
1926.1116................................................... 1218-0081
1926.1117................................................... 1218-0010
1926.1118................................................... 1218-0104
1926.1126................................................... 1218-0252
1926.1127................................................... 1218-0186
1926.1128................................................... 1218-0129
1926.1129................................................... 1218-0128
1926.1144................................................... 1218-0101
1926.1145................................................... 1218-0126
1926.1147................................................... 1218-0108
1926.1148................................................... 1218-0145
1926.1402................................................... 1218-0261
1926.1403................................................... 1218-0261
1926.1404................................................... 1218-0261
1926.1406................................................... 1218-0261
1926.1407................................................... 1218-0261
1926.1408................................................... 1218-0261
1926.1409................................................... 1218-0261
1926.1410................................................... 1218-0261
1926.1411................................................... 1218-0261
1926.1412................................................... 1218-0261
1926.1413................................................... 1218-0261
1926.1414................................................... 1218-0261
1926.1417................................................... 1218-0261
1926.1423................................................... 1218-0261
1926.1424................................................... 1218-0261
1926.1427................................................... 1218-0261
1926.1428................................................... 1218-0261
1926.1431................................................... 1218-0261
1926.1433................................................... 1218-0261
1926.1434................................................... 1218-0261
1926.1435................................................... 1218-0261
1926.1436................................................... 1218-0261
1926.1437................................................... 1218-0261
1926.1441................................................... 1218-0261
------------------------------------------------------------------------
[61 FR 5509, Feb. 13, 1996, as amended at 63 FR 3814, Jan. 27, 1998; 63
FR 13340, Mar. 19, 1998; 63 FR 17094, Apr. 8, 1998; 64 FR 18810, Apr.
16, 1999; 71 FR 38086, July 5, 2006; 75 FR 68430, Nov. 8, 2010]
Sec. 1926.6 Incorporation by reference.
(a) The standards of agencies of the U.S. Government, and
organizations which are not agencies of the U.S. Government which are
incorporated by reference in this part, have the same force and effect
as other standards in this part. Only the mandatory provisions (i.e.,
provisions containing the word ``shall'' or other mandatory language) of
standards incorporated by reference are adopted as standards under the
Occupational Safety and Health Act. The locations where these standards
may be examined are as follows:
(1) Offices of the Occupational Safety and Health Administration,
U.S. Department of Labor, Frances Perkins Building, Washington, DC
20210.
(2) The Regional and Field Offices of the Occupational Safety and
Health Administration, which are listed in the U.S. Government Manual.
(b) The materials listed in paragraphs (g) through (ff) of this
section are incorporated by reference in the corresponding sections
noted as they exist on the date of the approval, and a notice of any
change in these materials will be published in the Federal Register.
These incorporations by reference were approved by the Director of the
Federal Register in accordance with 5 U.S.C. 552(a) and 1 CFR part 51.
(c) Copies of standards listed in this section and issued by private
standards organizations are available for purchase from the issuing
organizations at the addresses or through the other contact information
listed below for these private standards organizations. In addition,
these standards are available for inspection at the National Archives
and Records Administration (NARA). For information on the availability
of these standards at NARA, telephone: 202-741-6030, or go to http://
www.archives.gov/federal--register/code--of--federal--regulations/ibr--
locations.html. Also, the standards are available for inspection at any
Regional Office of the Occupational Safety and Health Administration
(OSHA), or at the OSHA Docket Office, U.S. Department of Labor, 200
Constitution Avenue, NW., Room N-2625, Washington, DC 20210; telephone:
202-693-2350 (TTY number: 877-889-5627).
(d)-(f) [Reserved]
(g) The following material is available for purchase from the
American Conference of Governmental Industrial Hygienists (ACGIH), 1330
Kemper Meadow Drive, Cincinnati, OH 45240; telephone: 513-742-6163; fax:
513-742-3355; e-mail: [email protected]; Web site: http://www.acgih.org:
(1) Threshold Limit Values of Airborne Contaminants for 1970, 1970,
IBR approved for Sec. 1926.55(a) and appendix A of Sec. 1926.55.
(h) The following material is available for purchase from the
American National Standards Institute (ANSI), 25 West 43rd Street,
Fourth Floor, New York, NY 10036; telephone: 212-642-4900; fax: 212-302-
1286; e-mail: [email protected]; Web site: http://www.ansi.org/.
[[Page 14]]
(1) ANSI A10.3-1970, Safety Requirements for Explosive-Actuated
Fastening Tools, IBR approved for Sec. 1926.302(e).
(2) ANSI A10.4-1963, Safety Requirements for Workmen's Hoists, IBR
approved for Sec. 1926.552(c).
(3) ANSI A10.5-1969, Safety Requirements for Material Hoists, IBR
approved for Sec. 1926.552(b).
(4) ANSI A11.1-1965 (R1970), Practice for Industrial Lighting, IBR
approved for Sec. 1926.56(b).
(5) ANSI A17.1-1965, Elevators, Dumbwaiters, Escalators, and Moving
Walks, IBR approved for Sec. 1926.552(d).
(6) ANSI A17.1a-1967, Elevators, Dumbwaiters, Escalators, and Moving
Walks Supplement, IBR approved for Sec. 1926.552(d).
(7) ANSI A17.1b-1968, Elevators, Dumbwaiters, Escalators, and Moving
Walks Supplement, IBR approved for Sec. 1926.552(d).
(8) ANSI A17.1c-1969, Elevators, Dumbwaiters, Escalators, and Moving
Walks Supplement, IBR approved for Sec. 1926.552(d).
(9) ANSI A17.1d-1970, Elevators, Dumbwaiters, Escalators, and Moving
Walks Supplement, IBR approved for Sec. 1926.552(d).
(10) ANSI A17.2-1960, Practice for the Inspection of Elevators
(Inspector's Manual), IBR approved for Sec. 1926.552(d).
(11) ANSI A17.2a-1965, Practice for the Inspection of Elevators
(Inspector's Manual) Supplement, IBR approved for Sec. 1926.552(d).
(12) ANSI A17.2b-1967, Practice for the Inspection of Elevators
(Inspector's Manual) Supplement, IBR approved for Sec. 1926.552(d).
(13) ANSI A92.2-1969, Vehicle Mounted Elevating and Rotating Work
Platforms, IBR approved for Sec. Sec. 1926.453(a) and 1926.453(b).
(14) ANSI B7.1-1970, Safety Code for the Use, Care, and Protection
of Abrasive Wheels, IBR approved for Sec. Sec. 1926.57(g), 1926.303(b),
1926.303(c), and 1926.303(d).
(15) ANSI B20.1-1957, Safety Code for Conveyors, Cableways, and
Related Equipment, IBR approved for Sec. 1926.555(a).
(16) ANSI B56.1-1969, Safety Standards for Powered Industrial
Trucks, IBR approved for Sec. 1926.602(c).
(17) ANSI J6.1-1950 (R1971), Rubber Insulating Line Hose, IBR
approved for Sec. 1926.951(a).
(18) ANSI J6.2-1950 (R1971), Rubber Insulating Hoods, IBR approved
for Sec. 1926.951(a).
(19) ANSI J6.4-1971, Rubber Insulating Blankets, IBR approved for
Sec. 1926.951(a).
(20) ANSI J6.5-1971, Rubber Insulating Sleeves, IBR approved for
Sec. 1926.951(a).
(21) ANSI J6.6-1971, Rubber Insulating Gloves, IBR approved for
Sec. 1926.951(a).
(22) ANSI J6.7-1935 (R1971), Rubber Matting for Use Around Electric
Apparatus, IBR approved for Sec. 1926.951(a).
(23) ANSI O1.1-1961, Safety Code for Woodworking Machinery, IBR
approved for Sec. 1926.304(f).
(24) ANSI Z35.1-1968, Specifications for Accident Prevention Signs,
IBR approved for Sec. 1926.200(i).
(25) ANSI Z35.2-1968, Specifications for Accident Prevention Tags,
IBR approved for Sec. 1926.200(i).
(26) ANSI Z49.1-1967, Safety in Welding and Cutting, IBR approved
for Sec. 1926.350(j).
(27) ANSI Z87.1-1968, Practice for Occupational and Educational Eye
and Face Protection, IBR approved for Sec. 1926.102(a).
(28) American National Standards Institute (ANSI) Z89.1-2009,
American National Standard for Industrial Head Protection, approved
January 26, 2009; IBR approved for Sec. 1926.100(b)(1)(i). Copies of
ANSI Z89.1-2009 are available for purchase only from the International
Safety Equipment Association, 1901 North Moore Street, Arlington, VA
22209-1762; telephone: 703-525-1695; fax: 703-528-2148; Web site:
www.safetyequipment.org.
(29) American National Standards Institute (ANSI) Z89.1-2003,
American National Standard for Industrial Head Protection; IBR approved
for Sec. 1926.100(b)(1)(ii). Copies of ANSI Z89.1-2003 are available
for purchase only from the International Safety Equipment Association,
1901 North Moore Street, Arlington, VA 22209-1762; telephone: 703-525-
1695; fax: 703-528-2148; Web site: www.safetyequipment.org.
[[Page 15]]
(30) American National Standards Institute (ANSI) Z89.1-1997,
American National Standard for Personnel Protection--Protective Headwear
for Industrial Workers--Requirements; IBR approved for Sec.
1926.100(b)(1)(iii). Copies of ANSI Z89.1-1997 are available for
purchase only from the International Safety Equipment Association, 1901
North Moore Street, Arlington, VA 22209-1762; telephone: 703-525-1695;
fax: 703-528-2148; Web site: www.safetyequipment.org.
(i) [Reserved]
(j) The following material is available for purchase from the
American Society for Testing and Materials (ASTM), ASTM International,
100 Barr Harbor Drive, PO Box C700, West Conshohocken, PA, 19428-2959;
telephone: 610-832-9585; fax: 610-832-9555; e-mail: [email protected];
Web site: http://www.astm.org/:
(1) ASTM A370-1968, Methods and Definitions for Mechanical Testing
and Steel Products, IBR approved for Sec. 1926.1001(f).
(2) ASTM B117-1964, 50 Hour Test, IBR approved for Sec.
1926.959(a).
(3) ASTM D56-1969, Standard Method of Test for Flash Point by the
Tag Closed Tester, IBR approved for Sec. 1926.155(i).
(4) ASTM D93-1969, Standard Method of Test for Flash Point by the
Pensky Martens Closed Tester, IBR approved for Sec. 1926.155(i).
(5) ASTM D323-1958 (R1968), Standard Method of Test for Vapor
Pressure of Petroleum Products (Reid Method), IBR approved for Sec.
1926.155(m).
(k) The following material is available for purchase from the
American Society of Agricultural and Biological Engineers (ASABE), 2950
Niles Road, St. Joseph, MI 49085; telephone: 269-429-0300; fax: 269-429-
3852; e-mail: [email protected]; Web site: http://www.asabe.org/:
(1) ASAE R313.1-1971, Soil Cone Penetrometer, reaffirmed 1975, IBR
approved for Sec. 1926.1002(e).
(l) The following material is available for purchase from the
American Society of Mechanical Engineers (ASME), Three Park Avenue, New
York, NY 10016; telephone: 1-800-843-2763; fax: 973-882-1717; e-mail:
[email protected]; Web site: http://www.asme.org/:
(1) ASME B30.2-2005, Overhead and Gantry Cranes (Top Running Bridge,
Single or Multiple Girder, Top Running Trolley Hoist), issued Dec. 30,
2005 (``ASME B30.2-2005''), IBR approved for Sec. 1926.1438(b).
(2) ASME B30.5-2004, Mobile and Locomotive Cranes, issued Sept. 27,
2004 (``ASME B30.5-2004''), IBR approved for Sec. Sec. 1926.1414(b);
1926.1414(e); 1926.1433(b).
(3) ASME B30.7-2001, Base-Mounted Drum Hoists, issued Jan. 21, 2002
(``ASME B30.7-2001''), IBR approved for Sec. 1926.1436(e).
(4) ASME B30.14-2004, Side Boom Tractors, issued Sept. 20, 2004
(``ASME B30.14-2004''), IBR approved for Sec. 1926.1440(c).
(5) ASME Boiler and Pressure Vessel Code, Section VIII, 1968, IBR
approved for Sec. Sec. 1926.152(i), 1926.306(a), and 1926.603(a).
(6) ASME Power Boilers, Section I, 1968, IBR approved for Sec.
1926.603(a).
(m) The following material is available for purchase from the
American Welding Society (AWS), 550 N.W. LeJeune Road, Miami, Florida
33126; telephone: 1-800-443-9353; Web site: http://www.aws.org/:
(1) AWS D1.1/D1.1M:2002, Structural Welding Code--Steel, 18th ed.,
ANSI approved Aug. 31, 2001 (``AWS D1.1/D1.1M:2002''), IBR approved for
Sec. 1926.1436(c).
(2) ANSI/AWS D14.3-94, Specification for Welding Earthmoving and
Construction Equipment, ANSI approved Jun. 11, 1993 (``ANSI/AWS D14.3-
94''), IBR approved for Sec. 1926.1436(c).
(n) The following material is available for purchase from the
British Standards Institution (BSI), 389 Chiswick High Road, London, W4
4AL, United Kingdom; telephone: +44 20 8996 9001; fax: +44 20 8996 7001;
e-mail: [email protected]; Web site: http://www.bsigroup.com/:
(1) BS EN 13000:2004, Cranes--Mobile Cranes, published Jan. 4, 2006
(``BS EN 13000:2004''), IBR approved for Sec. 1926.1433(c).
(2) BS EN 14439:2006, Cranes--Safety--Tower Cranes, published Jan.
31, 2007 (``BS EN 14439:2006''), IBR approved for Sec. 1926.1433(c).
(o) The following material is available for purchase from the Bureau
of
[[Page 16]]
Reclamation, United States Department of the Interior, 1849 C Street,
NW., Washington DC 20240; telephone: 202-208-4501; Web site: http://
www.usbr.gov/:
(1) Safety and Health Regulations for Construction, Part II, Sept.
1971, IBR approved for Sec. 1926.1000(f).
(p) The following material is available for purchase from the
California Department of Industrial Relations, 455 Golden Gate Avenue,
San Francisco CA 94102; telephone: (415) 703-5070; e-mail:
[email protected]; Web site: http://www.dir.ca.gov/:
(1) Construction Safety Orders, IBR approved for Sec. 1926.1000(f).
(q)-(t) [Reserved]
(u) The following material is available for purchase from the
Federal Highway Administration, United States Department of
Transportation, 1200 New Jersey Ave., SE., Washington, DC 20590;
telephone: 202-366-4000; Web site: http://www.fhwa.dot.gov/:
(1) Manual on Uniform Traffic Control Devices, Millennium Edition,
Dec. 2000, IBR approved for Sec. Sec. 1926.200(g), 1926.201(a), and
1926.202.
(v) The following material is available for purchase from the
General Services Administration (GSA), 1800 F Street, NW., Washington,
DC 20405; telephone: (202) 501-0800; Web site: http://www.gsa.gov/:
(1) QQ-P-416, Federal Specification Plating Cadmium
(Electrodeposited), IBR approved for Sec. 1926.104(e).
(w) The following material is available for purchase from the
Institute of Makers of Explosives (IME), 1120 19th Street, NW., Suite
310, Washington, DC 20036; telephone: 202-429-9280; fax: 202-429-9280;
e-mail: [email protected]; Web site: http://www.ime.org/:
(1) IME Pub. No. 2, American Table of Distances for Storage of
Explosives, Jun. 5, 1964, IBR approved for Sec. 1926.914(a).
(2) IME Pub. No. 20, Radio Frequency Energy--A Potential Hazard in
the Use of Electric Blasting Caps, Mar. 1968, IBR approved for Sec.
1926.900(k).
(x) The following material is available for purchase from the
International Organization for Standardization (ISO), 1, ch. de la Voie-
Creuse, Case postale 56, CH-1211 Geneva 20, Switzerland; telephone: +41
22 749 01 11; fax: +41 22 733 34 30; Web site: http://www.iso.org/:
(1) ISO 11660-1:2008(E), Cranes--Access, guards and restraints--Part
1: General, 2d ed., Feb. 15, 2008 (``ISO 11660-1:2008(E)''), IBR
approved for Sec. 1926.1423(c).
(2) ISO 11660-2:1994(E), Cranes--Access, guards and restraints--Part
2: Mobile cranes, 1994 (``ISO 11660-2:1994(E)''), IBR approved for Sec.
1926.1423(c).
(3) ISO 11660-3:2008(E), Cranes--Access, guards and restraints--Part
3: Tower cranes, 2d ed., Feb. 15, 2008 (``ISO 11660-3:2008(E)''), IBR
approved for Sec. 1926.1423(c).
(y) The following material is available for purchase from the
National Fire Protection Association (NFPA), 1 Batterymarch Park,
Quincy, MA 02169; telephone: 617-770-3000; fax: 617-770-0700; Web site:
http://www.nfpa.org/:
(1) NFPA 10A-1970, Maintenance and Use of Portable Fire
Extinguishers, IBR approved for Sec. 1926.150(c).
(2) NFPA 13-1969, Standard for the Installation of Sprinkler
Systems, IBR approved for Sec. 1926.152(d).
(3) NFPA 30-1969, The Flammable and Combustible Liquids Code, IBR
approved for Sec. 1926.152(c).
(4) NFPA 80-1970, Standard for Fire Doors and Windows, Class E or F
Openings, IBR approved for Sec. 1926.152(b).
(5) NFPA 251-1969, Standard Methods of Fire Test of Building
Construction and Material, IBR approved for Sec. Sec. 1926.152(b) and
1926.155(f).
(6) NFPA 385-1966, Standard for Tank Vehicles for Flammable and
Combustible Liquids, IBR approved for Sec. 1926.152(g).
(z) [Reserved]
(aa) The following material is available for purchase from the Power
Crane and Shovel Association (PCSA), 6737 W. Washington Street, Suite
2400, Milwaukee, WI 53214; telephone: 1-800-369-2310; fax: 414-272-1170;
Web site: http://www.aem.org/CBC/ProdSpec/PCSA/:
(1) PCSA Std. No. 1, Mobile Crane and Excavator Standards, 1968, IBR
approved for Sec. 1926.602(b).
(2) PCSA Std. No. 2, Mobile Hydraulic Crane Standards, 1968 (``PCSA
Std. No. 2 (1968)''), IBR approved for Sec. Sec. 1926.602(b),
1926.1433(a), and 1926.1501(a).
[[Page 17]]
(3) PCSA Std. No. 3, Mobile Hydraulic Excavator Standards, 1969, IBR
approved for Sec. 1926.602(b).
(bb)-(cc) [Reserved]
(dd) The following material is available for purchase from the
Society of Automotive Engineers (SAE), 400 Commonwealth Drive,
Warrendale, PA 15096; telephone: 1-877-606-7323; fax: 724-776-0790; Web
site: http://www.sae.org/:
(1) SAE 1970 Handbook, IBR approved for Sec. 1926.602(b).
(2) SAE 1971 Handbook, IBR approved for Sec. 1926.1001(h).
(3) SAE J166-1971, Trucks and Wagons, IBR approved for Sec.
1926.602(a).
(4) SAE J168-1970, Protective Enclosures--Test Procedures and
Performance Requirements, IBR approved for Sec. 1926.1002(a).
(5) SAE J185 (reaf. May 2003), Access Systems for Off-Road Machines,
reaffirmed May 2003 (``SAE J185 (May 1993)''), IBR approved for Sec.
1926.1423(c).
(6) SAE J236-1971, Self-Propelled Graders, IBR approved for Sec.
1926.602(a).
(7) SAE J237-1971, Front End Loaders and Dozers, IBR approved for
Sec. 126.602(a).
(8) SAE J319b-1971, Self-Propelled Scrapers, IBR approved for Sec.
1926.602(a).
(9) SAE J320a-1971, Minimum Performance Criteria for Roll-Over
Protective Structure for Rubber-Tired, Self-Propelled Scrapers, IBR
approved for Sec. 1926.1001(h).
(10) SAE J321a-1970, Fenders for Pneumatic-Tired Earthmoving Haulage
Equipment, IBR approved for Sec. 1926.602(a).
(11) SAE J333a-1970, Operator Protection for Agricultural and Light
Industrial Tractors, IBR approved for Sec. 1926.602(a).
(11) SAE J386-1969, Seat Belts for Construction Equipment, IBR
approved for Sec. 1926.602(a).
(12) SAE J394-1971, Minimum Performance Criteria for Roll-Over
Protective Structure for Rubber-Tired Front End Loaders and Robber-Tired
Dozers, IBR approved for Sec. 1926.1001(h).
(13) SAE J395-1971, Minimum Performance Criteria for Roll-Over
Protective Structure for Crawler Tractors and Crawler-Type Loaders, IBR
approved for Sec. 1926.1001(h).
(14) SAE J396-1971, Minimum Performance Criteria for Roll-Over
Protective Structure for Motor Graders, IBR approved for Sec.
1926.1001(h).
(15) SAE J397-1969, Critical Zone Characteristics and Dimensions for
Operators of Construction and Industrial Machinery, IBR approved for
Sec. 1926.1001(f).
(16) SAE J743a-1964, Tractor Mounted Side Boom, 1964 (``SAE J743a-
1964''), IBR approved for Sec. 1926.1501(a).
(17) SAE J959-1966, Lifting Crane Wire-Rope Strength Factors, 1966
(``SAE J959-1966''), IBR approved for Sec. 1926.1501(a).
(18) SAE J987 (rev. Jun. 2003), Lattice Boom Cranes--Method of Test,
revised Jun. 2003 (``SAE J987 (Jun. 2003)''), IBR approved for Sec.
1926.1433(c).
(19) SAE J1063 (rev. Nov. 1993), Cantilevered Boom Crane
Structures--Method of Test, revised Nov. 1993 (``SAE J1063 (Nov.
1993)''), IBR approved for Sec. 1926.1433(c).
(ee) The following material is available for purchase from the
United States Army Corps of Engineers, 441 G Street, NW., Washington, DC
20314; telephone: 202-761-0011; e-mail: [email protected];
Web site: http://www.usace.army.mil/:
(1) EM-385-1-1, General Safety Requirements, Mar. 1967, IBR approved
for Sec. 1926.1000(f).
(ff) The following material is available for purchase from standards
resellers such as the Document Center Inc., 111 Industrial Road, Suite
9, Belmont, CA 94002; telephone: 650-591-7600; fax: 650-591-7617; e-
mail: [email protected]; Web site: http://www.document-
center.com/:
(1) ANSI B15.1-1953 (R1958), Safety Code for Mechanical Power-
Transmission Apparatus, revised 1958, IBR approved for Sec. Sec.
1926.300(b)(2) and 1926.1501(a).
(2) ANSI B30.2.0-1967, Safety Code for Overhead and Gantry Cranes,
approved May 4, 1967, IBR approved for Sec. 1926.1501(d).
(3) ANSI B30.5-1968, Crawler, Locomotive, and Truck Cranes, approved
Dec. 16, 1968, IBR approved for Sec. Sec. 1926.1433(a), 1926.1501(a),
and 1926.1501(b).
[[Page 18]]
(4) ANSI B30.6-1969, Safety Code for Derricks, approved Dec. 18,
1967, IBR approved for Sec. 1926.1501(e).
[75 FR 48130, Aug. 9, 2010, as amended at 77 FR 37600, June 22, 2012]
Effective Date Note: At 78 FR 35567, June 13, 2013, Sec. 1926.6 was
amended by revising paragraph (h)(24); redesignating paragraphs (h)(27)
through (h)(30) as (h)(31) through (h)(34) and paragraph (u)(1) as
(u)(2); adding paragraphs (h)(27) through (h)(30), and (u)(1); and
revising newly redesignated paragraph (u)(2), effective Sept. 11, 2013.
For the convenience of the user, the added and revised text is set forth
as follows:
Sec. 1926.6 Incorporation by reference.
* * * * *
(h) * * *
(24) ANSI Z35.1-1968, Specifications for Accident Prevention Signs;
IBR approved for Sec. 1926.200(b), (c), and 1 (i). Copies available for
purchase from the IHS Standards Store, 15 Inverness Way East, Englewood,
CO 80112; telephone: 1-877-413-5184; Web site: www.global.ihs.com.
* * * * *
(27) USA Z53.1-1967 (also referred to as ANSI Z53.1-1967), Safety
Color Code for Marking Physical Hazards, ANSI approved October 9, 1967;
IBR approved for Sec. 1926.200(c). Copies available for purchase from
the IHS Standards Store, 15 Inverness Way East, Englewood, CO 80112;
telephone: 1-877-413-5184; Web site: www.global.ihs.com.
(28) ANSI Z535.1-2006(R2011), Safety Colors, reaffirmed July 19,
2011; IBR approved for Sec. 1926.200(c). Copies available for purchase
from the International Safety Equipment Association, 1901 North Moore
Street, Arlington, VA 22209-1762; telephone: 703-525-1695; fax: 703-528-
2148; Web site: www.safetyequipment.org.
(29) ANSI Z535.2-2011, Environmental and Facility Safety Signs,
published September 15, 2011; IBR approved for Sec. 1926.200(b), (c),
and (i). Copies available for purchase from the International Safety
Equipment Association, 1901 North Moore Street, Arlington, VA 22209-
1762; telephone: 703-525-1695; fax: 703-528-2148; Web site:
www.safetyequipment.org.
(30) ANSI Z535.5-2011, Safety Tags and Barricade Tapes (for
Temporary Hazards), published September 15, 2011, including Errata,
November 14, 2011; IBR approved for Sec. 1926.200(h) and (i). Copies
available for purchase from the International Safety Equipment
Association, 1901 North Moore Street, Arlington, VA 22209-1762;
telephone: 703-525-1695; fax: 703-528-2148; Web site:
www.safetyequipment.org.
* * * * *
(u) * * *
(1) Manual on Uniform Traffic Control Devices (MUTCD), Part VI,
Standards and Guides for Traffic Controls for Street and Highway
Construction, Maintenance, Utility, and Incident Management Operation,
1988 Edition, Revision 3, September 3, 1993; IBR approved for Sec. Sec.
1926.200(g), 1926.201(a), and 1926.202. Electronic copies of the MUTCD,
1988 Edition, Revision 3, are available for downloading at http://
www.osha.gov/doc/highway--workzones/mutcd/index.html.
(2) Manual on Uniform Traffic Control Devices (MUTCD), Millennium
Edition, Dec. 2000; IBR approved for Sec. Sec. 1926.200(g)),
1926.201(a), and 1926.202. Electronic copies of the MUTCD 2000 are
available for downloading at http://mutcd.fhwa.dot.gov/kno-millennium--
12.18.00.htm.
* * * * *
Subpart B_General Interpretations
Authority: Sec. 107, Contract Work Hours and Safety Standards Act
(Construction Safety Act) (40 U.S.C. 333).
Sec. 1926.10 Scope of subpart.
(a) This subpart contains the general rules of the Secretary of
Labor interpreting and applying the construction safety and health
provisions of section 107 of the Contract Work Hours and Safety
Standards Act (83 Stat. 96). Section 107 requires as a condition of each
contract which is entered into under legislation subject to
Reorganization Plan Number 14 of 1950 (64 Stat. 1267), and which is for
construction, alteration, and/or repair, including painting and
decorating, that no contractor or subcontractor contracting for any part
of the contract work shall require any laborer or mechanic employed in
the performance of the contract to work in surroundings or under working
conditions which are unsanitary, hazardous, or dangerous to his health
or safety, as determined under construction safety and health standards
promulgated by the Secretary by regulation.
[[Page 19]]
Sec. 1926.11 Coverage under section 103 of the act distinguished.
(a) Coverage under section 103. It is important to note that the
coverage of section 107 differs from that for the overtime requirements
of the Contract Work Hours and Safety Standards Act. The application of
the overtime requirements is governed by section 103, which subject to
specific exemptions, includes: (1) Federal contracts requiring or
involving the employment of laborers or mechanics (thus including, but
not limited to, contracts for construction), and (2) contracts assisted
in whole or in part by Federal loans, grants, or guarantees under any
statute ``providing wage standards for such work.'' The statutes
``providing wage standards for such work'' include statutes for
construction which require the payment of minimum wages in accordance
with prevailing wage findings by the Secretary of Labor in accordance
with the Davis-Bacon Act. A provision to section 103 excludes from the
overtime requirements work where the Federal assistance is only in the
form of a loan guarantee or insurance.
(b) Coverage under section 107. To be covered by section 107 of the
Contract Work Hours and Safety Standards Act, a contract must be one
which (1) is entered into under a statute that is subject to
Reorganization Plan No. 14 of 1950 (64 Stat. 1267); and (2) is for
``construction, alteration, and/or repair, including painting and
decorating.''
Sec. 1926.12 Reorganization Plan No. 14 of 1950.
(a) General provisions. Reorganization Plan No. 14 of 1950 relates
to the prescribing by the Secretary of Labor of ``appropriate standards,
regulations, and procedures'' with respect to the enforcement of labor
standards under Federal and federally assisted contracts which are
subject to various statutes subject to the Plan. The rules of the
Secretary of Labor implementing the Plan are published in part 5 of this
title. Briefly, the statutes subject to the Plan include the Davis-Bacon
Act, including its extension to Federal-aid highway legislation subject
to 23 U.S.C. 113, and other statutes subject to the Plan by its original
terms, statutes by which the Plan is expressly applied, such as the
Contract Work Hours Standards Act by virtue of section 104(d) thereof.
(b) The Plan. (1) The statutes subject to Reorganization Plan No. 14
of 1950 are cited and briefly described in the remaining paragraphs of
this section. These descriptions are general in nature and not intended
to convey the full scope of the work to be performed under each statute.
The individual statutes should be resorted to for a more detailed scope
of the work.
(2) Federal-Aid Highway Acts. The provisions codified in 23 U.S.C.
113 apply to the initial construction, reconstruction, or improvement
work performed by contractors or subcontractors on highway projects on
the Federal-aid systems, the primary and secondary, as well as their
extensions in urban areas, and the Interstate System, authorized under
the highway laws providing for the expenditure of Federal funds upon the
Federal-aid system. As cited in 41 Op. A.G. 488, 496, the Attorney
General ruled that the Federal-Aid Highway Acts are subject to
Reorganization Plan No. 14 of 1950.
(3) National Housing Act (12 U.S.C. 1713, 1715a, 1715e, 1715k,
1715l(d)(3) and (4), 1715v, 1715w, 1715x, 1743, 1747, 1748, 1748h-2,
1750g, 1715l(h)(1), 1715z(j)(1), 1715z-1, 1715y(d), Subchapter 1x-A and
1x-B, 1715z-7). This act covers construction which is financed with
assistance by the Federal Government through programs of loan and
mortgage insurance for the following purposes:
(i) Rental Housing--Section 1713 provides mortgage and insurance on
rental housing of eight or more units and on mobile-home courts.
(ii) Section 1715a--Repealed.
(iii) Cooperative Housing--Section 1715e authorizes mortgage
insurance on cooperative housing of five or more units as well as
supplementary loans for improvement of repair or resale of memberships.
(iv) Urban Renewal Housing--Section 1715k provides mortgage
insurance on single family or multifamily housing in approved urban
renewal areas.
(v) Low or Moderate Income Housing--Section 1715L(d) (3) and (4)
insures mortgages on low-cost single family or multifamily housing.
[[Page 20]]
(vi) Housing for Elderly--Section 1715v provides mortgage insurance
on rental housing for elderly or handicapped persons.
(vii) Nursing Homes--Section 1715w authorizes mortgage insurance on
nursing home facilities and major equipment.
(viii) Experimental Housing--Section 1715x provides mortgage
insurance on single family or multifamily housing with experimental
design of materials.
(ix) War Housing Insurance--Section 1743 not active.
(x) Yield Insurance--Section 1747 insures investment returns on
multifamily housing.
(xi) Armed Services Housing--Section 1748b to assist in relieving
acute shortage and urgent need for family housing at or in areas
adjacent to military installations.
(xii) Defense Housing for Impacted Areas--Section 1748h-2 provides
mortgage insurance on single family or multifamily housing for sale or
rent primarily to military or civilian personnel of the Armed Services,
National Aeronautics and Space Administration, or Atomic Energy
Commission.
(xiii) Defense Rental Housing--Section 1750g provides for mortgage
insurance in critical defense housing areas.
(xiv) Rehabilitation--Section 1715L (h)(1) provides mortgage
insurance for nonprofit organizations to finance the purchase and
rehabilitation of deteriorating or substandard housing for subsequent
resale to low-income home purchasers. There must be located on the
property five or more single family dwellings of detached, semidetached,
or row construction.
(xv) Homeowner Assistance--Section 1715Z(j)(1) authorizes mortgage
insurance to nonprofit organizations or public bodies or agencies
executed to finance sale of individual dwellings to lower income
individuals or families. Also includes the rehabilitation of such
housing if it is deteriorating or substandard for subsequent resale to
lower income home purchasers.
(xvi) Rental Housing Assistance--Section 1715Z-1 authorizes mortgage
insurance and interest reduction payments on behalf of owners of rental
housing projects designed for occupancy by lower income families.
Payments are also authorized for certain State or locally aided
projects.
(xvii) Condominium Housing--Section 1715y(d) provides mortgage
insurance on property purchased for the development of building sites.
This includes waterlines and water supply installations, sewer lines and
sewage disposal installations, steam, gas, and electrical lines and
installations, roads, streets, curbs, gutters, sidewalks, storm drainage
facilities, and other installations or work.
(xviii) Group Medical Practice Facilities--Subchapter LX-B
authorizes mortgage insurance for the financing of construction and
equipment, of facilities for group practice of medicine, optometry, or
dentistry.
(xix) Nonprofit Hospitals--1715z-7 authorizes mortgage insurance to
cover new and rehabilitated hospitals, including initial equipment.
(4) Hospital Survey and Construction Act, as amended by the Hospital
and Medical Facilities Amendments of 1964 (42 U.S.C. 291e). The
provisions of this Act cover construction contracts made by State or
local authorities or private institutions under Federal grant-in-aid
programs for the construction of hospitals and other medical facilities.
(5) Federal Airport Act (49 U.S.C. 1114(b)). The act provides grant-
in-aid funds for airport construction limited to general site
preparation runways, taxiways, aprons, lighting appurtenant thereto, and
fire, rescue, and maintenance buildings. The act excludes construction
intended for use as a public parking facility for passenger automobiles
and the cost of construction of any part of an airport building except
such of those buildings or parts of buildings to house facilities or
activities directly related to the safety of persons at the airport.
(6) Housing Act of 1949 (42 U.S.C. 1459). Construction contracts
awarded by local authorities financed with the assistance of loans and
grants from the Federal Government. The construction programs are for
slum clearance and urban renewal which includes rehabilitation grants,
neighborhood development programs, neighborhood renewal plans, community
renewal, demolition projects, and assistance for blighted areas. See the
Housing Act of 1964,
[[Page 21]]
paragraph (b)(21) of this section, concerning financial assistance for
low-rent housing for domestic farm labor.
(7) School Survey and Construction Act of 1950 (20 U.S.C. 636). This
act provides for a Federal grant-in-aid program to assist in the
construction of schools in federally affected areas.
(8) Defense Housing & Community Facilities & Services Act of 1951
(42 U.S.C. 1592i). Inactive Program.
(9) United States Housing Act of 1937 (42 U.S.C. 1416). This statute
covers the construction of low-rent public housing and slum clearance
projects awarded by local authorities. These projects are financed with
the assistance of loans and grants from the Federal Government. The slum
clearance is the demolition and removal of buildings from any slum area
to be used for a low-rent housing project.
(10) Federal Civil Defense Act of 1950 (50 U.S.C. App. 2281). This
act provides for Federal assistance to the several States and their
political subdivisions in the field of civil defense which includes
procurement, construction, leasing, or renovating of materials and
facilities.
(11) Delaware River Basin Compact (sec. 15.1, 75 Stat. 714). This
joint resolution creates, by intergovernmental compact between the
United States, Delaware, New Jersey, New York, and Pennsylvania, a
regional agency for planning, conservation, utilization, development,
management and control of the water and related sources of the Delaware
River.
(12) Cooperative Research Act (20 U.S.C. 332a(c)). This act provides
Federal grants to a university, college, or other appropriate public or
nonprofit private agency or institution for part or all of the cost of
constructing a facility for research or for research and related
purposes. Research and related purposes means research, research
training, surveys, or demonstrations in the field of education, or the
dissemination of information derived therefrom, or all of such
activities, including (but without limitation) experimental schools,
except that such term does not include research, research training,
surveys, or demonstrations in the field of sectarian instruction or the
dissemination of information derived therefrom. Construction includes
new buildings, and the acquisition, expansion, remodeling, replacement,
and alteration of existing buildings and the equipping of new buildings
and existing buildings.
(13) Health Professions Educational Assistance Act of 1963 (42
U.S.C. 292d (c)(4), 293a(c)(5)). The provisions of this act provide for
grants to assist public and nonprofit medical, dental, and similar
schools for the construction, expansion, or renovation of teaching
facilities.
(14) Mental Retardation Facilities Construction Act (42 U.S.C.
295(a)(2)(D), 2662(5), 2675(a)(5)). This act authorizes Federal
financial assistance in the construction of centers for research on
mental retardation and related aspects of human development, of
university-affiliated facilities for the mentally retarded and of
facilities for the mentally retarded.
(15) Community Mental Health Centers Act (42 U.S.C. 2685(a)(5)).
This act authorizes Federal grants for the construction of public and
other nonprofit community mental health centers.
(16) Higher Education Facilities Act of 1963 (20 U.S.C. 753). This
act authorizes the grant or loan of Federal funds to assist public and
other nonprofit institutions of higher education in financing the
construction, rehabilitation, or improvement of academic and related
facilities in undergraduate and graduate schools.
(17) Vocational Educational Act of 1963 (20 U.S.C. 35f). This act
provides for Federal grants to the various States for construction of
area vocational education school facilities.
(18) Library Services and Construction Act (20 U.S.C. 355e(a)(4)).
This act provides for Federal assistance to the various States for the
construction of public libraries.
(19) Urban Mass Transportation Act of 1954 (49 U.S.C. 1609). This
act provides for grants and loans to assist States and local public
bodies and agencies thereof in financing the acquisition, construction,
reconstruction, and improvement of facilities and equipment for use, by
operation or lease or otherwise, in mass transportation service in urban
areas and in coordinating such
[[Page 22]]
service with highway and other transportation in such areas.
(20) Economic Opportunity Act of 1964 (42 U.S.C. 2947). This act
covers construction which is financed with assistance of the Federal
Government for the following purposes:
(i) Authorizes Federal assistance for construction of projects,
buildings and works which will provide young men and women in rural and
urban residential centers with education, vocational training, and
useful work experience (Title I).
(ii) Authorizes financial assistance for construction work planned
and carried out at the community level for antipoverty programs (Title
II):
(a) Authorizes loans to low income rural families by assisting them
to acquire or improve real estate or reduce encumbrances or erect
improvements thereon, and to participate in cooperative associations
and/or to finance nonagricultural enterprises which will enable such
families to supplement their income (Title III);
(b) Authorizes loans to local cooperative associations furnishing
essential processing, purchasing, or marketing services, supplies, or
facilities predominantly to low-income rural families (Title III);
(c) Authorizes financial assistance to States, political
subdivisions of States, public and nonprofit agencies, institutions,
organizations, farm associations, or individuals in establishing
housing, sanitation, education, and child day-care programs for migrants
and other seasonally employed agricultural employees and their families
(Title III).
(iii) Authorizes loans or guarantees loans to small businesses for
construction work (Title IV).
(iv) Authorizes the payment of the cost of experimental, pilot, or
demonstration projects to foster State programs providing construction
work experience or training for unemployed fathers and needy people
(Title V).
(21) Housing Act of 1964 (42 U.S.C. 1486(f); 42 U.S.C. 1452b(e)).
Provides financial assistance for low-rent housing for domestic farm
labor. The Act further provides for loans, through public or private
agencies, where feasible, to owners or tenants of property in urban
renewal areas to finance rehabilitation required to conform the property
to applicable code requirements or carry out the objectives of the urban
renewal plan for the area.
(22) The Commercial Fisheries Research and Development Act of 1964
(16 U.S.C. 779e(b)). This Act authorizes financial assistance to State
agencies for construction projects designed for the research and
development of the commercial fisheries resources of the Nation.
(23) The Nurse Training Act of 1964 (42 U.S.C. 296a(b)(5)). This act
provides for grants to assist in the construction of new facilities for
collegiate, associate degree, and diploma schools of nursing, or
replacement or rehabilitation of existing facilities of such schools.
(24) Elementary and Secondary Education Act of 1965 (20 U.S.C. 241i,
848). The purpose of the act is to provide financial assistance to local
educational agencies serving areas with concentrations of children from
low-income families for construction in connection with the expansion or
improvement of their educational programs.
(25) Federal Water Pollution Control Act, as amended by the Water
Quality Act of 1965 (3 U.S.C. 466e(g)). Provides for financial
assistance to States or municipalities for construction of facilities in
connection with the prevention and control of water pollution. This
includes projects that will control the discharge into any waters of
untreated or inadequately treated sewage.
(26) Appalachian Regional Development Act of 1965 (40 U.S.C. App.
402). Authorizes Federal assistance in the construction of an
Appalachian development highway system; construction of multicounty
demonstration health facilities, hospitals, regional health, diagnostic
and treatment centers, and other facilities for health; seal and fill
voids in abandoned mines and to rehabilitate strip mine areas;
construction of school facilities for vocational education; and to
assist in construction of sewage treatment works.
(27) National Technical Institute for the Deaf Act (20 U.S.C.
684(b)(5)). Provides for financial assistance for institutions of higher
education for the establishment, construction, including equipment and
operation, of a National Institution for the Deaf.
[[Page 23]]
(28) Housing Act of 1959 (12 U.S.C. 1701(q)(c)(3)). This act
authorizes loans to nonprofit corporations to be used for the
construction of housing and related facilities for elderly families.
Also, the provisions of the act provide for rehabilitation, alteration,
conversion or improvement of existing structures which are otherwise
inadequate for proposed dwellings used by such families.
(29) College Housing Act of 1950, as amended (12 U.S.C. 1749a(f)).
This act provides for Federal loans to assist educational institutions
in providing housing and other educational facilities for students and
faculties.
(30) Housing and Urban Development Act of 1965 (42 U.S.C. 1500c-3,
3107). This act provides for Federal assistance for the following
purposes:
(i) Grants to States and local public bodies to assist in any
construction work to be carried out under the open-space land and urban
beautification provisions contained therein. It provides for parks and
recreation areas, conservation of land and other natural resources, and
historical and scenic purposes.
(ii) Grants to local public bodies and agencies to finance specific
projects for basic public water facilities (including works for the
storage, treatment, purification, and distribution of water), and for
basic public sewer facilities (other than ``treatment works'' as defined
in the Federal Water Pollution Control Act).
(iii) Grants to any local public body or agency to assist in
financing neighborhood facilities. These facilities must be necessary
for carrying out a program of health, recreational, social, or similar
community service and located so as to be available for the use of the
area's low or moderate income residents.
(31) National Foundation on the Arts and the Humanities Act of 1965
(20 U.S.C. 954(k)). The act establishes the ``National Foundation on the
Arts and the Humanities'' which may provide matching grants to groups
(nonprofit organizations and State and other public organizations) and
to individuals engaged in creative and performing arts for the entire
range of artistic activity, including construction of necessary
facilities.
(32) Public Works and Economic Development Act of 1965 (42 U.S.C.
3222). This act provides for Federal assistance for the following
purposes:
(i) Grants for the acquisition or development of land or
improvements for public works or development facility usage in
redevelopment areas. It authorizes loans to assist in financing the
purchase or development of land for public works which will assist in
the creation of long-term employment opportunities in the area.
(ii) Loans for the purchase or development of land and facilities
(including machinery and equipment) for industrial or commercial usage
within redevelopment areas; guarantee of loans for working capital made
to private borrowers by private lending institutions in connection with
direct loan projects; and to contract to pay to, or on behalf of,
business entities locating in redevelopment areas, a portion of the
interest costs which they incur in financing their expansions from
private sources.
(iii) Loans and grants to create economic development centers within
designated county economic development districts.
(33) High-Speed Ground Transportation Study (40 U.S.C. 1636(b)).
This act provides for financial assistance for construction activities
in connection with research and development of different forms of high-
speed ground transportation and demonstration projects relating to
intercity rail passenger service.
(34) Heart Disease, Cancer and Stroke Amendments of 1965 (42 U.S.C.
299(b)(4)). This act provides for grants to public or nonprofit private
universities, medical schools, research, institutions, hospitals, and
other public and nonprofit agencies and institutions, or associations
thereof to assist in construction and equipment of facilities in
connection with research, training, demonstration of patient care,
diagnostic and treatment related to heart disease, cancer, stroke, and
other major diseases.
(35) Mental Retardation Facilities and Community Mental Health
Centers Construction Act Amendments of 1965 (20 U.S.C. 618(g)). These
provisions provide
[[Page 24]]
for grants to institutions of higher education for construction of
facilities for research or for research and related purposes relating to
education for mentally retarded, hard of hearing, deaf, speech impaired,
visually handicapped, seriously emotionally disturbed, crippled, or
other health impaired children who by reason thereof require special
education.
(36) Vocational Rehabilitation Act Amendments of 1965 (29 U.S.C.
41a(b)(4)). This act authorizes grants to assist in meeting the costs of
construction of public or other nonprofit workshops and rehabilitation
facilities.
(37) Clean Air and Solid Waste Disposal Acts (42 U.S.C. 3256). This
act provides for financial assistance to public (Federal, State,
interstate, or local) authorities, agencies, and institutions, private
agencies and institutions, and individuals in the construction of
facilities for solid-waste disposal. The term construction includes the
installation of initial equipment.
(38) Medical Library Assistance Act of 1965 (42 U.S.C. 280b-
3(b)(3)). This act provides for grants to public or private non-profit
agencies or institutions for the cost of construction of medical library
facilities.
(39) Veterans Nursing Home Care Act (38 U.S.C. 5035(a)(8)). The
construction industry health and safety standards do not apply to this
act since it is not subject to Reorganization Plan No. 14 of 1950.
(40) National Capital Transportation Act of 1965 (40 U.S.C.
682(b)(4)). This act provides for Federal assistance to the National
Capital Transportation Agency for construction of a rail rapid transit
system and related facilities for the Nation's Capital.
(41) Alaska Centennial--1967 (80 Stat. 82). The program under this
legislation has expired.
(42) Model Secondary School for the Deaf Act (80 Stat. 1028). This
act provides for funds to establish and operate, including construction
and initial equipment of new buildings, expansion, remodeling, and
alteration of existing buildings and equipment thereof, a model
secondary school for the deaf to serve the residents of the District of
Columbia and nearby States.
(43) Allied Health Professions Personnel Training Act of 1966 (42
U.S.C. 295h(b)(2)(E)). This act provides for grants to assist in the
construction of new facilities for training centers for allied health
professions, or replacement or rehabilitation of existing facilities for
such centers.
(44) Demonstration Cities and Metropolitan Development Act of 1966
(42 U.S.C. 3310; 12 U.S.C. 1715c; 42 U.S.C. 1416). This act provides for
Federal assistance for the following purposes:
(i) Grants to assist in the construction, rehabilitation,
alteration, or repair of residential property only if such residential
property is designed for residential use for eight or more families to
enable city demonstration agencies to carry out comprehensive city
demonstration programs (42 U.S.C. 3310).
(ii) Amends the National Housing Act (12 U.S.C. 1715c) and the
Housing Act of 1937 (42 U.S.C. 1416). See these acts for coverage.
(45) Air Quality Act of 1967 (42 U.S.C. 1857j-3). This act provides
for Federal assistance to public or nonprofit agencies, institutions,
and organizations and to individuals, and contracts with public or
private agencies, institutions, or persons for construction of research
and development facilities and demonstration plants relating to the
application of preventing or controlling discharges into the air of
various types of pollutants.
(46) Elementary and Secondary Education Amendments of 1967 (Title
VII--Bilingual Education Act) (20 U.S.C. 880b-6). This act provides for
Federal assistance to local educational agencies or to an institution of
higher education applying jointly with a local educational agency for
minor remodeling projects in connection with bilingual education
programs to meet the special needs of children with limited English-
speaking ability in the United States.
(47) Vocational Rehabilitation Amendments of 1967 (29 U.S.C.
42a(c)(3)). This act authorizes Federal assistance to any public or
nonprofit private agency or organization for the construction of a
center for vocational rehabilitation of handicapped individuals who are
both deaf and blind which shall be known as the National Center for
Deaf-Blind Youths and Adults. Construction
[[Page 25]]
includes new buildings and expansion, remodeling, alteration and
renovation of existing buildings, and initial equipment of such new,
newly acquired, expanded, remodeled, altered, or renovated buildings.
(48) National Visitor Center Facilities Act of 1968 (40 U.S.C. 808).
This act authorizes agreements and leases with the owner of property in
the District of Columbia known as Union Station for the use of all or a
part of such property for a national visitor center to be known as the
National Visitor Center. The agreements and leases shall provide for
such alterations of the Union Station Building as necessary to provide
adequate facilities for visitors. They also provide for the construction
of a parking facility, including necessary approaches and ramps.
(49) Juvenile Delinquency Prevention and Control Act of 1968 (42
U.S.C. 3843). This act provides for Federal grants to State, county,
municipal, or other public agency or combination thereof for the
construction of facilities to be used in connection with rehabilitation
services for the diagnosis, treatment, and rehabilitation of delinquent
youths and youths in danger of becoming delinquent.
(50) Housing and Urban Development Act of 1968 (including New
Communities Act of 1968) (42 U.S.C. 3909). This act provides for Federal
assistance for the following purposes:
(i) Guarantees, and commitments to guarantee, the bonds, debentures,
notes, and other obligations issued by new community developers to help
finance new community development projects.
(ii) Amends section 212(a) of the National Housing Act, adding
section 236 for ``Rental Housing for Lower Income Families'' and section
242 ``Mortgage Insurance for Nonprofit Hospitals'' thereto.
(51) Public Health Service Act Amendment (Alcoholic and Narcotic
Addict Rehabilitation Amendments of 1968) (42 U.S.C. 2681, et seq.).
This act provides for grants to a public and nonprofit private agency or
organization for construction projects consisting of any facilities
(including post-hospitalization treatment facilities for the prevention
and treatment of alcoholism or treatment of narcotic addicts.)
(52) Vocational Education Amendments of 1968 (20 U.S.C. 1246). This
act provides for grants to States for the construction of area
vocational education school facilities. The act further provides grants
to public educational agencies, organizations, or institutions for
construction of residential schools to provide vocational education for
the purpose of demonstrating the feasibility and desirability of such
schools. The act still further provides grants to State boards, to
colleges and universities, to public educational agencies, organizations
or institutions to reduce the cost of borrowing funds for the
construction of residential schools and dormitories.
(53) Postal Reorganization Act (39 U.S.C. 410(d)(2)). This Act
provides for construction, modification, alteration, repair, and other
improvements of postal facilities located in leased buildings.
(54) Airport and Airway Development Act of 1970 (Pub. L. 91-258,
section 52(b)(7)). This Act provides for Federal financial assistance to
States and localities for the construction, improvement, or repair of
public airports.
(55) (i) Public Law 91-230. This Act provides for federal financial
assistance to institutions of higher learning for the construction of a
National Center on Educational Media and Materials for the Handicapped.
The program under this statute expires on July 1, 1971. Public Law 91-
230, section 662(1).
(ii) Education of the Handicapped Act (20 U.S.C. 12326, 1404(a)).
This Act provides for financial assistance to States for construction,
expansion, remodeling, or alteration of facilities for the education of
handicapped children at the preschool, elementary school, and secondary
school levels.
(56) Housing and Urban Development Act of 1970 (Pub. L. 91-609,
section 707(b)). This Act provides for grants to States and local public
agencies to help finance the development of open-space or other land in
urban areas for open-space uses. This Act becomes effective on July 1,
1971.
(57) Developmental Disabilities Services and Facilities Construction
Amendments of 1970 (Pub. L. 91-517, section 135(a)(5)).
[[Page 26]]
This Act authorizes grants to States for construction of facilities for
the provision of services to persons with developmental disabilities who
are unable to pay for such services.
(58) Rail Passenger Service Act of 1970 (Pub. L. 91-518, section
405(d)). This statute provides that the National Railroad Passenger
Corporation may construct physical facilities necessary to intercity
rail passenger operations within the basic national rail passenger
system designated by the Secretary of Transportation.
(c) VA and FHA housing. In the course of the legislative development
of section 107, it was recognized that section 107 would not apply to
housing construction for which insurance was issued by the Federal
Housing Authority and Veterans' Administration for individual home
ownership. Concerning construction under the National Housing Act,
Reorganization Plan No. 14 of 1950 applies to construction which is
subject to the minimum wage requirements of section 212(a) thereof (12
U.S.C. 1715c).
Sec. 1926.13 Interpretation of statutory terms.
(a) The terms construction, alteration, and repair used in section
107 of the Act are also used in section 1 of the Davis-Bacon Act (40
U.S.C. 276a), providing minimum wage protection on Federal construction
contracts, and section 1 of the Miller Act (40 U.S.C. 270a), providing
performance and payment bond protection on Federal construction
contracts. Similarly, the terms contractor and subcontractor are used in
those statutes, as well as in Copeland (Anti-Kickback) Act (40 U.S.C.
276c) and the Contract Work Hours and Safety Standards Act itself, which
apply concurrently with the Miller Act and the Davis-Bacon Act on
Federal construction contracts and also apply to most federally assisted
construction contracts. The use of the same or identical terms in these
statutes which apply concurrently with section 107 of the Act have
considerable precedential value in ascertaining the coverage of section
107.
(b) It should be noted that section 1 of the Davis-Bacon Act limits
minimum wage protection to laborers and mechanics ``employed directly''
upon the ``site of the work.'' There is no comparable limitation in
section 107 of the Act. Section 107 expressly requires as a self-
executing condition of each covered contract that no contractor or
subcontractor shall require ``any laborer or mechanic employed in the
performance of the contract to work in surroundings or under working
conditions which are unsanitary, hazardous, or dangerous to his health
or safety'' as these health and safety standards are applied in the
rules of the Secretary of Labor.
(c) The term subcontractor under section 107 is considered to mean a
person who agrees to perform any part of the labor or material
requirements of a contract for construction, alteration or repair. Cf.
MacEvoy Co. v. United States, 322 U.S. 102, 108-9 (1944). A person who
undertakes to perform a portion of a contract involving the furnishing
of supplies or materials will be considered a ``subcontractor'' under
this part and section 107 if the work in question involves the
performance of construction work and is to be performed: (1) Directly on
or near the construction site, or (2) by the employer for the specific
project on a customized basis. Thus, a supplier of materials which will
become an integral part of the construction is a ``subcontractor'' if
the supplier fabricates or assembles the goods or materials in question
specifically for the construction project and the work involved may be
said to be construction activity. If the goods or materials in question
are ordinarily sold to other customers from regular inventory, the
supplier is not a ``subcontractor.'' Generally, the furnishing of
prestressed concrete beams and prestressed structural steel would be
considered manufacturing; therefore a supplier of such materials would
not be considered a ``subcontractor.'' An example of material supplied
``for the specific project on a customized basis'' as that phrase is
used in this section would be ventilating ducts, fabricated in a shop
away from the construction job site and specifically cut for the project
according to design specifications. On the other hand, if a contractor
buys standard size nails from a foundry, the foundry would not be a
[[Page 27]]
covered ``subcontractor.'' Ordinarily a contract for the supplying of
construction equipment to a contractor would not, in and of itself, be
considered a ``subcontractor'' for purposes of this part.
Sec. 1926.14 Federal contract for ``mixed'' types of performance.
(a) It is the intent of the Congress to provide safety and health
protection of Federal, federally financed, or federally assisted
construction. See, for example, H. Report No. 91-241, 91st Cong., first
session, p. 1 (1969). Thus, it is clear that when a Federal contract
calls for mixed types of performance, such as both manufacturing and
construction, section 107 would apply to the construction. By its
express terms, section 107 applies to a contract which is ``for
construction, alteration, and/or repair.'' Such a contract is not
required to be exclusively for such services. The application of the
section is not limited to contracts which permit an overall
characterization as ``construction contracts.'' The text of section 107
is not so limited.
(b) When the mixed types of performances include both construction
and manufacturing, see also Sec. 1926.15(b) concerning the relationship
between the Walsh-Healey Public Contracts Act and section 107.
Sec. 1926.15 Relationship to the Service Contract Act; Walsh-Healey Public
Contracts Act.
(a) A contract for ``construction'' is one for nonpersonal service.
See, e.g., 41 CFR 1-1.208. Section 2(e) of the Service Contract Act of
1965 requires as a condition of every Federal contract (and bid
specification therefor) exceeding $2,500, the ``principal purpose'' of
which is to furnish services to the United States through the use of
``service employees,'' that certain safety and health standards be met.
See 29 CFR part 1925, which contains the Department rules concerning
these standards. Section 7 of the Service Contract Act provides that the
Act shall not apply to ``any contract of the United States or District
of Columbia for construction, alteration, and/or repair, including
painting and decorating of public buildings or public works.'' It is
clear from the legislative history of section 107 that no gaps in
coverage between the two statutes are intended.
(b) The Walsh-Healey Public Contracts Act requires that contracts
entered into by any Federal agency for the manufacture or furnishing of
materials, supplies, articles, and equipment in any amount exceeding
$10,000 must contain, among other provisions, a requirement that ``no
part of such contract will be performed nor will any of the materials,
supplies, articles or equipment to be manufactured or furnished under
said contract be manufactured or fabricated in any plants, factories,
buildings, or surroundings or under working conditions which are
unsanitary or hazardous or dangerous to the health and safety of
employees engaged in the performance of said contract.'' The rules of
the Secretary concerning these standards are published in 41 CFR part
50-204, and express the Secretary of Labor's interpretation and
application of section 1(e) of the Walsh-Healey Public Contracts Act to
certain particular working conditions. None of the described working
conditions are intended to deal with construction activities, although
such activities may conceivably be a part of a contract which is subject
to the Walsh-Healey Public Contracts Act. Nevertheless, such activities
remain subject to the general statutory duty prescribed by section 1(e).
Section 103(b) of the Contract Work Hours and Safety Standards Act
provides, among other things, that the Act shall not apply to any work
required to be done in accordance with the provisions of the Walsh-
Healey Public Contracts Act.
Sec. 1926.16 Rules of construction.
(a) The prime contractor and any subcontractors may make their own
arrangements with respect to obligations which might be more
appropriately treated on a jobsite basis rather than individually. Thus,
for example, the prime contractor and his subcontractors may wish to
make an express agreement that the prime contractor or one of the
subcontractors will provide all required first-aid or toilet facilities,
thus relieving the subcontractors from the actual, but not
[[Page 28]]
any legal, responsibility (or, as the case may be, relieving the other
subcontractors from this responsibility). In no case shall the prime
contractor be relieved of overall responsibility for compliance with the
requirements of this part for all work to be performed under the
contract.
(b) By contracting for full performance of a contract subject to
section 107 of the Act, the prime contractor assumes all obligations
prescribed as employer obligations under the standards contained in this
part, whether or not he subcontracts any part of the work.
(c) To the extent that a subcontractor of any tier agrees to perform
any part of the contract, he also assumes responsibility for complying
with the standards in this part with respect to that part. Thus, the
prime contractor assumes the entire responsibility under the contract
and the subcontractor assumes responsibility with respect to his portion
of the work. With respect to subcontracted work, the prime contractor
and any subcontractor or subcontractors shall be deemed to have joint
responsibility.
(d) Where joint responsibility exists, both the prime contractor and
his subcontractor or subcontractors, regardless of tier, shall be
considered subject to the enforcement provisions of the Act.
Subpart C_General Safety and Health Provisions
Authority: Sec. 3704, Contract Work Hours and Safety Standards Act
(40 U.S.C. 333); secs. 4, 6, and 8, Occupational Safety and Health Act
of 1970 (29 U.S.C. 653, 655, 657); Secretary of Labor's Order No. 12-71
(36 FR 8754), 8-76 (41 FR 25059), 9-83 (48 FR 35736), 6-96 (62 FR 111),
or 5-2007 (72 FR 31160) as applicable; and 29 CFR part 1911.
Sec. 1926.20 General safety and health provisions.
(a) Contractor requirements. (1) Section 107 of the Act requires
that it shall be a condition of each contract which is entered into
under legislation subject to Reorganization Plan Number 14 of 1950 (64
Stat. 1267), as defined in Sec. 1926.12, and is for construction,
alteration, and/or repair, including painting and decorating, that no
contractor or subcontractor for any part of the contract work shall
require any laborer or mechanic employed in the performance of the
contract to work in surroundings or under working conditions which are
unsanitary, hazardous, or dangerous to his health or safety.
(b) Accident prevention responsibilities. (1) It shall be the
responsibility of the employer to initiate and maintain such programs as
may be necessary to comply with this part.
(2) Such programs shall provide for frequent and regular inspections
of the job sites, materials, and equipment to be made by competent
persons designated by the employers.
(3) The use of any machinery, tool, material, or equipment which is
not in compliance with any applicable requirement of this part is
prohibited. Such machine, tool, material, or equipment shall either be
identified as unsafe by tagging or locking the controls to render them
inoperable or shall be physically removed from its place of operation.
(4) The employer shall permit only those employees qualified by
training or experience to operate equipment and machinery.
(c) The standards contained in this part shall apply with respect to
employments performed in a workplace in a State, the District of
Columbia, the Commonwealth of Puerto Rico, the Virgin Islands, American
Samoa, Guam, Trust Territory of the Pacific Islands, Wake Island, Outer
Continental Shelf lands defined in the Outer Continental Shelf Lands
Act, Johnston Island, and the Canal Zone.
(d) (1) If a particular standard is specifically applicable to a
condition, practice, means, method, operation, or process, it shall
prevail over any different general standard which might otherwise be
applicable to the same condition, practice, means, method, operation, or
process.
(2) On the other hand, any standard shall apply according to its
terms to any employment and place of employment in any industry, even
though particular standards are also prescribed for the industry to the
extent that none of such particular standards applies.
[[Page 29]]
(e) In the event a standard protects on its face a class of persons
larger than employees, the standard shall be applicable under this part
only to employees and their employment and places of employment.
(f) Compliance duties owed to each employee--(1) Personal protective
equipment. Standards in this part requiring the employer to provide
personal protective equipment (PPE), including respirators and other
types of PPE, because of hazards to employees impose a separate
compliance duty with respect to each employee covered by the
requirement. The employer must provide PPE to each employee required to
use the PPE, and each failure to provide PPE to an employee may be
considered a separate violation.
(2) Training. Standards in this part requiring training on hazards
and related matters, such as standards requiring that employees receive
training or that the employer train employees, provide training to
employees, or institute or implement a training program, impose a
separate compliance duty with respect to each employee covered by the
requirement. The employer must train each affected employee in the
manner required by the standard, and each failure to train an employee
may be considered a separate violation.
[44 FR 8577, Feb. 9, 1979; 44 FR 20940, Apr. 6, 1979, as amended at 58
FR 35078, June 30, 1993; 73 FR 75588, Dec. 12, 2008]
Sec. 1926.21 Safety training and education.
(a) General requirements. The Secretary shall, pursuant to section
107(f) of the Act, establish and supervise programs for the education
and training of employers and employees in the recognition, avoidance
and prevention of unsafe conditions in employments covered by the act.
(b) Employer responsibility. (1) The employer should avail himself
of the safety and health training programs the Secretary provides.
(2) The employer shall instruct each employee in the recognition and
avoidance of unsafe conditions and the regulations applicable to his
work environment to control or eliminate any hazards or other exposure
to illness or injury.
(3) Employees required to handle or use poisons, caustics, and other
harmful substances shall be instructed regarding the safe handling and
use, and be made aware of the potential hazards, personal hygiene, and
personal protective measures required.
(4) In job site areas where harmful plants or animals are present,
employees who may be exposed shall be instructed regarding the potential
hazards, and how to avoid injury, and the first aid procedures to be
used in the event of injury.
(5) Employees required to handle or use flammable liquids, gases, or
toxic materials shall be instructed in the safe handling and use of
these materials and made aware of the specific requirements contained in
subparts D, F, and other applicable subparts of this part.
(6)(i) All employees required to enter into confined or enclosed
spaces shall be instructed as to the nature of the hazards involved, the
necessary precautions to be taken, and in the use of protective and
emergency equipment required. The employer shall comply with any
specific regulations that apply to work in dangerous or potentially
dangerous areas.
(ii) For purposes of paragraph (b)(6)(i) of this section, confined
or enclosed space means any space having a limited means of egress,
which is subject to the accumulation of toxic or flammable contaminants
or has an oxygen deficient atmosphere. Confined or enclosed spaces
include, but are not limited to, storage tanks, process vessels, bins,
boilers, ventilation or exhaust ducts, sewers, underground utility
vaults, tunnels, pipelines, and open top spaces more than 4 feet in
depth such as pits, tubs, vaults, and vessels.
Sec. 1926.22 Recording and reporting of injuries. [Reserved]
Sec. 1926.23 First aid and medical attention.
First aid services and provisions for medical care shall be made
available by the employer for every employee covered by these
regulations. Regulations prescribing specific requirements for first
aid, medical attention, and
[[Page 30]]
emergency facilities are contained in subpart D of this part.
Sec. 1926.24 Fire protection and prevention.
The employer shall be responsible for the development and
maintenance of an effective fire protection and prevention program at
the job site throughout all phases of the construction, repair,
alteration, or demolition work. The employer shall ensure the
availability of the fire protection and suppression equipment required
by subpart F of this part.
Sec. 1926.25 Housekeeping.
(a) During the course of construction, alteration, or repairs, form
and scrap lumber with protruding nails, and all other debris, shall be
kept cleared from work areas, passageways, and stairs, in and around
buildings or other structures.
(b) Combustible scrap and debris shall be removed at regular
intervals during the course of construction. Safe means shall be
provided to facilitate such removal.
(c) Containers shall be provided for the collection and separation
of waste, trash, oily and used rags, and other refuse. Containers used
for garbage and other oily, flammable, or hazardous wastes, such as
caustics, acids, harmful dusts, etc. shall be equipped with covers.
Garbage and other waste shall be disposed of at frequent and regular
intervals.
Sec. 1926.26 Illumination.
Construction areas, aisles, stairs, ramps, runways, corridors,
offices, shops, and storage areas where work is in progress shall be
lighted with either natural or artificial illumination. The minimum
illumination requirements for work areas are contained in subpart D of
this part.
Sec. 1926.27 Sanitation.
Health and sanitation requirements for drinking water are contained
in subpart D of this part.
Sec. 1926.28 Personal protective equipment.
(a) The employer is responsible for requiring the wearing of
appropriate personal protective equipment in all operations where there
is an exposure to hazardous conditions or where this part indicates the
need for using such equipment to reduce the hazards to the employees.
(b) Regulations governing the use, selection, and maintenance of
personal protective and lifesaving equipment are described under subpart
E of this part.
Sec. 1926.29 Acceptable certifications.
(a) Pressure vessels. Current and valid certification by an
insurance company or regulatory authority shall be deemed as acceptable
evidence of safe installation, inspection, and testing of pressure
vessels provided by the employer.
(b) Boilers. Boilers provided by the employer shall be deemed to be
in compliance with the requirements of this part when evidence of
current and valid certification by an insurance company or regulatory
authority attesting to the safe installation, inspection, and testing is
presented.
(c) Other requirements. Regulations prescribing specific
requirements for other types of pressure vessels and similar equipment
are contained in subparts F and O of this part.
Sec. 1926.30 Shipbuilding and ship repairing.
(a) General. Shipbuilding, ship repairing, alterations, and
maintenance performed on ships under Government contract, except naval
ship construction, is work subject to the Act.
(b) Applicable safety and health standards. For the purpose of work
carried out under this section, the safety and health regulations in
part 1915 of this title, Shipyard Employment, shall apply.
[44 FR 8577, Feb. 9, 1979; 44 FR 20940, Apr. 6, 1979, as amended at 61
FR 9249, Mar. 7, 1996]
Sec. 1926.32 Definitions.
The following definitions shall apply in the application of the
regulations in this part:
(a) Act means section 107 of the Contract Work Hours and Safety
Standards Act, commonly known as the Construction Safety Act (86 Stat.
96; 40 U.S.C. 333).
[[Page 31]]
(b) ANSI means American National Standards Institute.
(c) Approved means sanctioned, endorsed, accredited, certified, or
accepted as satisfactory by a duly constituted and nationally recognized
authority or agency.
(d) Authorized person means a person approved or assigned by the
employer to perform a specific type of duty or duties or to be at a
specific location or locations at the jobsite.
(e) Administration means the Occupational Safety and Health
Administration.
(f) Competent person means one who is capable of identifying
existing and predictable hazards in the surroundings or working
conditions which are unsanitary, hazardous, or dangerous to employees,
and who has authorization to take prompt corrective measures to
eliminate them.
(g) Construction work. For purposes of this section, Construction
work means work for construction, alteration, and/or repair, including
painting and decorating.
(h) Defect means any characteristic or condition which tends to
weaken or reduce the strength of the tool, object, or structure of which
it is a part.
(i) Designated person means ``authorized person'' as defined in
paragraph (d) of this section.
(j) Employee means every laborer or mechanic under the Act
regardless of the contractual relationship which may be alleged to exist
between the laborer and mechanic and the contractor or subcontractor who
engaged him. ``Laborer and mechanic'' are not defined in the Act, but
the identical terms are used in the Davis-Bacon Act (40 U.S.C. 276a),
which provides for minimum wage protection on Federal and federally
assisted construction contracts. The use of the same term in a statute
which often applies concurrently with section 107 of the Act has
considerable precedential value in ascertaining the meaning of ``laborer
and mechanic'' as used in the Act. Laborer generally means one who
performs manual labor or who labors at an occupation requiring physical
strength; mechanic generally means a worker skilled with tools. See 18
Comp. Gen. 341.
(k) Employer means contractor or subcontractor within the meaning of
the Act and of this part.
(l) Hazardous substance means a substance which, by reason of being
explosive, flammable, poisonous, corrosive, oxidizing, irritating, or
otherwise harmful, is likely to cause death or injury.
(m) Qualified means one who, by possession of a recognized degree,
certificate, or professional standing, or who by extensive knowledge,
training, and experience, has successfully demonstrated his ability to
solve or resolve problems relating to the subject matter, the work, or
the project.
(n) Safety factor means the ratio of the ultimate breaking strength
of a member or piece of material or equipment to the actual working
stress or safe load when in use.
(o) Secretary means the Secretary of Labor.
(p) SAE means Society of Automotive Engineers.
(q) Shall means mandatory.
(r) Should means recommended.
(s) Suitable means that which fits, and has the qualities or
qualifications to meet a given purpose, occasion, condition, function,
or circumstance.
[44 FR 8577, Feb. 9, 1979; 44 FR 20940, Apr. 6, 1979, as amended at 58
FR 35078, June 30, 1993]
Sec. 1926.33 Access to employee exposure and medical records.
Note: The requirements applicable to construction work under this
section are identical to those set forth at Sec. 1910.1020 of this
chapter.
[61 FR 31431, June 20, 1996]
Sec. 1926.34 Means of egress.
(a) General. In every building or structure exits shall be so
arranged and maintained as to provide free and unobstructed egress from
all parts of the building or structure at all times when it is occupied.
No lock or fastening to prevent free escape from the inside of any
building shall be installed except in mental, penal, or corrective
institutions where supervisory personnel is continually on duty and
effective provisions are made to remove occupants in case of fire or
other emergency.
[[Page 32]]
(b) Exit marking. Exits shall be marked by a readily visible sign.
Access to exits shall be marked by readily visible signs in all cases
where the exit or way to reach it is not immediately visible to the
occupants.
(c) Maintenance and workmanship. Means of egress shall be
continually maintained free of all obstructions or impediments to full
instant use in the case of fire or other emergency.
[58 FR 35083, June 30, 1993]
Sec. 1926.35 Employee emergency action plans.
(a) Scope and application. This section applies to all emergency
action plans required by a particular OSHA standard. The emergency
action plan shall be in writing (except as provided in the last sentence
of paragraph (e)(3) of this section) and shall cover those designated
actions employers and employees must take to ensure employee safety from
fire and other emergencies.
(b) Elements. The following elements, at a minimum, shall be
included in the plan:
(1) Emergency escape procedures and emergency escape route
assignments;
(2) Procedures to be followed by employees who remain to operate
critical plant operations before they evacuate;
(3) Procedures to account for all employees after emergency
evacuation has been completed;
(4) Rescue and medical duties for those employees who are to perform
them;
(5) The preferred means of reporting fires and other emergencies;
and
(6) Names or regular job titles of persons or departments who can be
contacted for further information or explanation of duties under the
plan.
(c) Alarm system. (1) The employer shall establish an employee alarm
system which complies with Sec. 1926.159.
(2) If the employee alarm system is used for alerting fire brigade
members, or for other purposes, a distinctive signal for each purpose
shall be used.
(d) Evacuation. The employer shall establish in the emergency action
plan the types of evacuation to be used in emergency circumstances.
(e) Training. (1) Before implementing the emergency action plan, the
employer shall designate and train a sufficient number of persons to
assist in the safe and orderly emergency evacuation of employees.
(2) The employer shall review the plan with each employee covered by
the plan at the following times:
(i) Initially when the plan is developed,
(ii) Whenever the employee's responsibilities or designated actions
under the plan change, and
(iii) Whenever the plan is changed.
(3) The employer shall review with each employee upon initial
assignment those parts of the plan which the employee must know to
protect the employee in the event of an emergency. The written plan
shall be kept at the workplace and made available for employee review.
For those employers with 10 or fewer employees the plan may be
communicated orally to employees and the employer need not maintain a
written plan.
[58 FR 35083, June 30, 1993]
Subpart D_Occupational Health and Environmental Controls
Authority: Section 107 of the Contract Work Hours and Safety
Standards Act (40 U.S.C. 3704); Sections 4, 6, and 8 of the Occupational
Safety and Health Act of 1970 (29 U.S.C. 653, 655, and 657); and
Secretary of Labor's Order No. 12-71 (36 FR 8754), 8-76 (41 FR 25059),
9-83 (48 FR 35736), 1-90 (55 FR 9033), 6-96 (62 FR 111), 3-2000 (65 FR
50017), 5-2002 (67 FR 65008), 5-2007 (72 FR 31159), 4-2010 (75 FR
55355), or 1-2012 (77 FR 3912) as applicable; and 29 CFR part 1911.
Sections 1926.58, 1926.59, 1926.60, and 1926.65 also issued under 5
U.S.C. 553 and 29 CFR part 1911.
Section 1926.61 also issued under 49 U.S.C. 1801-1819 and 6 U.S.C.
553.
Section 1926.62 also issued under section 1031 of the Housing and
Community Development Act of 1992 (42 U.S.C. 4853).
Section 1926.65 also issued under section 126 of the Superfund
Amendments and Reauthorization Act of 1986, as amended (reprinted at 29
U.S.C.A. 655 Note), and 5 U.S.C. 553.
Sec. 1926.50 Medical services and first aid.
(a) The employer shall insure the availability of medical personnel
for advice and consultation on matters of occupational health.
[[Page 33]]
(b) Provisions shall be made prior to commencement of the project
for prompt medical attention in case of serious injury.
(c) In the absence of an infirmary, clinic, hospital, or physician,
that is reasonably accessible in terms of time and distance to the
worksite, which is available for the treatment of injured employees, a
person who has a valid certificate in first-aid training from the U.S.
Bureau of Mines, the American Red Cross, or equivalent training that can
be verified by documentary evidence, shall be available at the worksite
to render first aid.
(d)(1) First aid supplies shall be easily accessible when required.
(2) The contents of the first aid kit shall be placed in a
weatherproof container with individual sealed packages for each type of
item, and shall be checked by the employer before being sent out on each
job and at least weekly on each job to ensure that the expended items
are replaced.
(e) Proper equipment for prompt transportation of the injured person
to a physician or hospital, or a communication system for contacting
necessary ambulance service, shall be provided.
(f) In areas where 911 is not available, the telephone numbers of
the physicians, hospitals, or ambulances shall be conspicuously posted.
(g) Where the eyes or body of any person may be exposed to injurious
corrosive materials, suitable facilities for quick drenching or flushing
of the eyes and body shall be provided within the work area for
immediate emergency use.
Appendix A to Sec. 1926.50--First aid Kits (Non-Mandatory)
First aid supplies are required to be easily accessible under
paragraph Sec. 1926.50(d)(1). An example of the minimal contents of a
generic first aid kit is described in American National Standard (ANSI)
Z308.1-1978 ``Minimum Requirements for Industrial Unit-Type First-aid
Kits''. The contents of the kit listed in the ANSI standard should be
adequate for small work sites. When larger operations or multiple
operations are being conducted at the same location, employers should
determine the need for additional first aid kits at the worksite,
additional types of first aid equipment and supplies and additional
quantities and types of supplies and equipment in the first aid kits.
In a similar fashion, employers who have unique or changing first-
aid needs in their workplace may need to enhance their first-aid kits.
The employer can use the OSHA 300 log, OSHA 301 log, or other reports to
identify these unique problems. Consultation from the local fire/rescue
department, appropriate medical professional, or local emergency room
may be helpful to employers in these circumstances. By assessing the
specific needs of their workplace, employers can ensure that reasonably
anticipated supplies are available. Employers should assess the specific
needs of their worksite periodically and augment the first aid kit
appropriately.
If it is reasonably anticipated employees will be exposed to blood
or other potentially infectious materials while using first-aid
supplies, employers should provide personal protective equipment (PPE).
Appropriate PPE includes gloves, gowns, face shields, masks and eye
protection (see ``Occupational Exposure to Blood borne Pathogens'', 29
CFR 1910.1030(d)(3)) (56 FR 64175).
[44 FR 8577, Feb. 9, 1979; 44 FR 20940, Apr. 6, 1979, as amended at 49
FR 18295, Apr. 30, 1984; 58 FR 35084, June 30, 1993; 61 FR 5510, Feb.
13, 1996; 63 FR 33469, June 18, 1998; 76 FR 80740, Dec. 27, 2011]
Sec. 1926.51 Sanitation.
(a) Potable water. (1) An adequate supply of potable water shall be
provided in all places of employment.
(2) Portable containers used to dispense drinking water shall be
capable of being tightly closed, and equipped with a tap. Water shall
not be dipped from containers.
(3) Any container used to distribute drinking water shall be clearly
marked as to the nature of its contents and not used for any other
purpose.
(4) The common drinking cup is prohibited.
(5) Where single service cups (to be used but once) are supplied,
both a sanitary container for the unused cups and a receptacle for
disposing of the used cups shall be provided.
(6) Potable water means water that meets the standards for drinking
purposes of the State or local authority having jurisdiction, or water
that meets the quality standards prescribed by the U.S. Environmental
Protection Agency's National Primary Drinking Water Regulations (40 CFR
part 141).
[[Page 34]]
(b) Nonpotable water. (1) Outlets for nonpotable water, such as
water for industrial or firefighting purposes only, shall be identified
by signs meeting the requirements of subpart G of this part, to indicate
clearly that the water is unsafe and is not to be used for drinking,
washing, or cooking purposes.
(2) There shall be no cross-connection, open or potential, between a
system furnishing potable water and a system furnishing nonpotable
water.
(c) Toilets at construction jobsites. (1) Toilets shall be provided
for employees according to the following table:
Table D-1
------------------------------------------------------------------------
Number of employees Minimum number of facilities
------------------------------------------------------------------------
20 or less............................. 1.
20 or more............................. 1 toilet seat and 1 urinal per
40 workers.
200 or more............................ 1 toilet seat and 1 urinal per
50 workers.
------------------------------------------------------------------------
(2) Under temporary field conditions, provisions shall be made to
assure not less than one toilet facility is available.
(3) Job sites, not provided with a sanitary sewer, shall be provided
with one of the following toilet facilities unless prohibited by local
codes:
(i) Privies (where their use will not contaminate ground or surface
water);
(ii) Chemical toilets;
(iii) Recirculating toilets;
(iv) Combustion toilets.
(4) The requirements of this paragraph (c) for sanitation facilities
shall not apply to mobile crews having transportation readily available
to nearby toilet facilities.
(d) Food handling. (1) All employees' food service facilities and
operations shall meet the applicable laws, ordinances, and regulations
of the jurisdictions in which they are located.
(2) All employee food service facilities and operations shall be
carried out in accordance with sound hygienic principles. In all places
of employment where all or part of the food service is provided, the
food dispensed shall be wholesome, free from spoilage, and shall be
processed, prepared, handled, and stored in such a manner as to be
protected against contamination.
(e) Temporary sleeping quarters. When temporary sleeping quarters
are provided, they shall be heated, ventilated, and lighted.
(f) Washing facilities. (1) The employer shall provide adequate
washing facilities for employees engaged in the application of paints,
coating, herbicides, or insecticides, or in other operations where
contaminants may be harmful to the employees. Such facilities shall be
in near proximity to the worksite and shall be so equipped as to enable
employees to remove such substances.
(2) General. Washing facilities shall be maintained in a sanitary
condition.
(3) Lavatories. (i) Lavatories shall be made available in all places
of employment. The requirements of this subdivision do not apply to
mobile crews or to normally unattended work locations if employees
working at these locations have transportation readily available to
nearby washing facilities which meet the other requirements of this
paragraph.
(ii) Each lavatory shall be provided with hot and cold running
water, or tepid running water.
(iii) Hand soap or similar cleansing agents shall be provided.
(iv) Individual hand towels or sections thereof, of cloth or paper,
air blowers or clean individual sections of continuous cloth toweling,
convenient to the lavatories, shall be provided.
(4) Showers. (i) Whenever showers are required by a particular
standard, the showers shall be provided in accordance with paragraphs
(f)(4) (ii) through (v) of this section.
(ii) One shower shall be provided for each 10 employees of each sex,
or numerical fraction thereof, who are required to shower during the
same shift.
(iii) Body soap or other appropriate cleansing agents convenient to
the showers shall be provided as specified in paragraph (f)(3)(iii) of
this section.
(iv) Showers shall be provided with hot and cold water feeding a
common discharge line.
(v) Employees who use showers shall be provided with individual
clean towels.
(g) Eating and drinking areas. No employee shall be allowed to
consume food or beverages in a toilet room nor in any area exposed to a
toxic material.
[[Page 35]]
(h) Vermin control. Every enclosed workplace shall be so
constructed, equipped, and maintained, so far as reasonably practicable,
as to prevent the entrance or harborage of rodents, insects, and other
vermin. A continuing and effective extermination program shall be
instituted where their presence is detected.
(i) Change rooms. Whenever employees are required by a particular
standard to wear protective clothing because of the possibility of
contamination with toxic materials, change rooms equipped with storage
facilities for street clothes and separate storage facilities for the
protective clothing shall be provided.
[44 FR 8577, Feb. 9, 1979; 44 FR 20940, Apr. 6, 1979, as amended at 58
FR 35084, June 30, 1993; 76 FR 33611, June 8, 2011]
Sec. 1926.52 Occupational noise exposure.
(a) Protection against the effects of noise exposure shall be
provided when the sound levels exceed those shown in Table D-2 of this
section when measured on the A-scale of a standard sound level meter at
slow response.
(b) When employees are subjected to sound levels exceeding those
listed in Table D-2 of this section, feasible administrative or
engineering controls shall be utilized. If such controls fail to reduce
sound levels within the levels of the table, personal protective
equipment as required in subpart E, shall be provided and used to reduce
sound levels within the levels of the table.
(c) If the variations in noise level involve maxima at intervals of
1 second or less, it is to be considered continuous.
(d)(1) In all cases where the sound levels exceed the values shown
herein, a continuing, effective hearing conservation program shall be
administered.
Table D-2--Permissible Noise Exposures
------------------------------------------------------------------------
Sound level
Duration per day, hours dBA slow
response
------------------------------------------------------------------------
8.......................................................... 90
6.......................................................... 92
4.......................................................... 95
3.......................................................... 97
2.......................................................... 100
1\1/2\..................................................... 102
1.......................................................... 105
\1/2\...................................................... 110
\1/4\ or less.............................................. 115
------------------------------------------------------------------------
(2)(i) When the daily noise exposure is composed of two or more
periods of noise exposure of different levels, their combined effect
should be considered, rather than the individual effect of each.
Exposure to different levels for various periods of time shall be
computed according to the formula set forth in paragraph (d)(2)(ii) of
this section.
(ii) Fe = (T1/L1)+(T2/L2)+ [middot] [middot] [middot] +
(Tn/Ln)
Where:
Fe = The equivalent noise exposure factor.
T = The period of noise exposure at any essentially constant level.
L = The duration of the permissible noise exposure at the constant level
(from Table D-2).
If the value of Fe exceeds unity (1) the exposure exceeds
permissible levels.
(iii) A sample computation showing an application of the formula in
paragraph (d)(2)(ii) of this section is as follows. An employee is
exposed at these levels for these periods:
110 db A \1/4\ hour.
100 db A \1/2\ hour.
90 db A 1\1/2\ hours.
Fe = (\1/4\/\1/2\)+(\1/2\/2)+(1\1/2\/8)
Fe = 0.500+0.25+0.188
Fe = 0.938
Since the value of Fe does not exceed unity, the exposure is
within permissible limits.
(e) Exposure to impulsive or impact noise should not exceed 140 dB
peak sound pressure level.
Sec. 1926.53 Ionizing radiation.
(a) In construction and related activities involving the use of
sources of ionizing radiation, the pertinent provisions of the Nuclear
Regulatory Commission's Standards for Protection Against Radiation (10
CFR part 20), relating to protection against occupational radiation
exposure, shall apply.
(b) Any activity which involves the use of radioactive materials or
X-rays,
[[Page 36]]
whether or not under license from the Nuclear Regulatory Commission,
shall be performed by competent persons specially trained in the proper
and safe operation of such equipment. In the case of materials used
under Commission license, only persons actually licensed, or competent
persons under direction and supervision of the licensee, shall perform
such work.
(c)-(r) [Reserved]
Note: The requirements applicable to construction work under
paragraphs (c) through (r) of this section are identical to those set
forth at paragraphs (a) through (p) of Sec. 1910.1096 of this chapter.
[44 FR 8577, Feb. 9, 1979; 44 FR 20940, Apr. 6, 1979, as amended at 61
FR 5510, Feb. 13, 1996; 61 FR 31431, June 20, 1996]
Sec. 1926.54 Nonionizing radiation.
(a) Only qualified and trained employees shall be assigned to
install, adjust, and operate laser equipment.
(b) Proof of qualification of the laser equipment operator shall be
available and in possession of the operator at all times.
(c) Employees, when working in areas in which a potential exposure
to direct or reflected laser light greater than 0.005 watts (5
milliwatts) exists, shall be provided with antilaser eye protection
devices as specified in subpart E of this part.
(d) Areas in which lasers are used shall be posted with standard
laser warning placards.
(e) Beam shutters or caps shall be utilized, or the laser turned
off, when laser transmission is not actually required. When the laser is
left unattended for a substantial period of time, such as during lunch
hour, overnight, or at change of shifts, the laser shall be turned off.
(f) Only mechanical or electronic means shall be used as a detector
for guiding the internal alignment of the laser.
(g) The laser beam shall not be directed at employees.
(h) When it is raining or snowing, or when there is dust or fog in
the air, the operation of laser systems shall be prohibited where
practicable; in any event, employees shall be kept out of range of the
area of source and target during such weather conditions.
(i) Laser equipment shall bear a label to indicate maximum output.
(j) Employees shall not be exposed to light intensities above:
(1) Direct staring: 1 micro-watt per square centimeter;
(2) Incidental observing: 1 milliwatt per square centimeter;
(3) Diffused reflected light: 2\1/2\ watts per square centimeter.
(k) Laser unit in operation should be set up above the heads of the
employees, when possible.
(l) Employees shall not be exposed to microwave power densities in
excess of 10 milliwatts per square centimeter.
Sec. 1926.55 Gases, vapors, fumes, dusts, and mists.
(a) Exposure of employees to inhalation, ingestion, skin absorption,
or contact with any material or substance at a concentration above those
specified in the ``Threshold Limit Values of Airborne Contaminants for
1970'' of the American Conference of Governmental Industrial Hygienists,
shall be avoided. See appendix A to this section.
(b) To achieve compliance with paragraph (a) of this section,
administrative or engineering controls must first be implemented
whenever feasible. When such controls are not feasible to achieve full
compliance, protective equipment or other protective measures shall be
used to keep the exposure of employees to air contaminants within the
limits prescribed in this section. Any equipment and technical measures
used for this purpose must first be approved for each particular use by
a competent industrial hygienist or other technically qualified person.
Whenever respirators are used, their use shall comply with Sec.
1926.103.
(c) Paragraphs (a) and (b) of this section do not apply to the
exposure of employees to airborne asbestos, tremolite, anthophyllite, or
actinolite dust. Whenever any employee is exposed to airborne asbestos,
tremolite, anthophyllite, or actinolite dust, the requirements of Sec.
1910.1101 or Sec. 1926.58 of this title shall apply.
(d) Paragraphs (a) and (b) of this section do not apply to the
exposure of employees to formaldehyde. Whenever
[[Page 37]]
any employee is exposed to formaldehyde, the requirements of Sec.
1910.1048 of this title shall apply.
Appendix A to Sec. 1926.55--1970 American Conference of Governmental
Industrial Hygienists' Threshold Limit Values of Airborne Contaminants
Threshold Limit Values of Airborne Contaminants for Construction
----------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------
mg/m Skin
Substance CAS No. \d\ ppm \a\ \3,b\ Designation
----------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------
Abate; see Temephos........................................
Acetaldehyde............................................... 75-07-0 200 360 --
Acetic acid................................................ 64-19-7 10 25 --
Acetic anhydride........................................... 108-24-7 5 20 --
Acetone.................................................... 67-64-1 1000 2400 --
Acetonitrile............................................... 75-05-8 40 70 --
2-Acetylaminofluorine; see Sec. 1926.1114................ 53-96-3
Acetylene.................................................. 74-86-2 E
Acetylene dichloride; see 1,2-Dichloroethylene.............
Acetylene tetrabromide..................................... 79-27-6 1 14 --
Acrolein................................................... 107-02-8 0.1 0.25 --
Acrylamide................................................. 79-06-1 -- 0.3 X
Acrylonitrile; see Sec. 1926.1145........................ 107-13-1
Aldrin..................................................... 309-00-2 -- 0.25 X
Allyl alcohol.............................................. 107-18-6 2 5 X
Allyl chloride............................................. 107-05-1 1 3 --
Allyl glycidyl ether (AGE)................................. 106-92-3 (C)10 (C)45 --
Allyl propyl disulfide..................................... 2179-59-1 2 12 --
alpha-Alumina.............................................. 1344-28-1
Total dust............................................... .............. -- ....... --
Respirable fraction...................................... .............. -- ....... --
Alundum; see alpha-Alumina.................................
4-Aminodiphenyl; see Sec. 1926.1111...................... 92-67-1
2-Aminoethanol; see Ethanolamine...........................
2-Aminopyridine............................................ 504-29-0 0.5 2 --
Ammonia.................................................... 7664-41-7 50 35 --
Ammonium sulfamate......................................... 7773-06-0
Total dust............................................... .............. -- 15 --
Respirable fraction...................................... .............. -- 5 --
n-Amyl acetate............................................. 628-63-7 100 525 --
sec-Amyl acetate........................................... 626-38-0 125 650 --
Aniline and homologs....................................... 62-53-3 5 19 X
Anisidine (o-, p-isomers).................................. 29191-52-4 -- 0.5 X
Antimony and compounds (as Sb)............................. 7440-36-0 -- 0.5 --
ANTU (alpha Naphthylthiourea).............................. 86-88-4 -- 0.3 --
Argon...................................................... 7440-37-1 E
Arsenic, inorganic compounds (as As); see Sec. 1926.1118. 7440-38-2 -- -- --
Arsenic, organic compounds (as As)......................... 7440-38-2 -- 0.5 --
Arsine..................................................... 7784-42-1 0.05 0.2 --
Asbestos; see 1926.58......................................
Azinphos-methyl............................................ 86-50-0 -- 0.2 X
Barium, soluble compounds (as Ba).......................... 7440-39-3 -- 0.5 --
Benzene \g\; see Sec. 1926.1128.......................... 71-43-2
Benzidine; see Sec. 1926.1110............................ 92-87-5
p-Benzoquinone; see Quinone................................
Benzo(a)pyrene; see Coal tar pitch volatiles...............
Benzoyl peroxide........................................... 94-36-0 -- 5 --
Benzyl chloride............................................ 100-44-7 1 5 --
Beryllium and beryllium compounds (as Be).................. 7440-41-7 -- 0.002 --
[[Page 38]]
Biphenyl; see Diphenyl.....................................
Bisphenol A; see Diglycidyl ether..........................
Boron oxide................................................ 1303-86-2
Total dust............................................... .............. -- 15 --
Boron tribromide........................................... 10294-33-4 1 10 --
Boron trifluoride.......................................... 7637-07-2 (C)1 (C)3 --
Bromine.................................................... 7726-95-6 0.1 0.7 --
Bromine pentafluoride...................................... 7789-30-2 0.1 0.7 --
Bromoform.................................................. 75-25-2 0.5 5 X
Butadiene (1,3-Butadiene); see 29 CFR 1910.1051; 29 CFR 106-99-0 STEL 1 ....... --
1910.19(l)................................................ ppm/5
ppm
Butanethiol; see Butyl mercaptan...........................
2-Butanone (Methyl ethyl ketone)........................... 78-93-3 200 590 --
2-Butoxyethanol............................................ 111-76-2 50 240 X
n-Butyl-acetate............................................ 123-86-4 150 710 --
sec-Butyl acetate.......................................... 105-46-4 200 950 --
tert-Butyl acetate......................................... 540-88-5 200 950 --
n-Butyl alcohol............................................ 71-36-3 100 300 --
sec-Butyl alcohol.......................................... 78-92-2 150 450 --
tert-Butyl alcohol......................................... 75-65-0 100 300 --
Butylamine................................................. 109-73-9 (C)5 (C)15 X
tert-Butyl chromate (as CrO3); see 1926.1126 \n\........... 1189-85-1
n-Butyl glycidyl ether (BGE)............................... 2426-08-6 50 270 --
Butyl mercaptan............................................ 109-79-5 0.5 1.5 --
p-tert-Butyltoluene........................................ 98-51-1 10 60 --
Cadmium (as Cd); see 1926.1127............................. 7440-43-9
Calcium carbonate.......................................... 1317-65-3
Total dust............................................... .............. -- ....... --
Respirable fraction...................................... .............. -- ....... --
Calcium oxide.............................................. 1305-78-8 -- 5 --
Calcium sulfate............................................ 7778-18-9
Total dust............................................... .............. -- 15 --
Respirable fraction...................................... .............. -- 5 --
Camphor, synthetic......................................... 76-22-2 -- 2 --
Carbaryl (Sevin)........................................... 63-25-2 -- 5 --
Carbon black............................................... 1333-86-4 -- 3.5 --
Carbon dioxide............................................. 124-38-9 5000 9000 --
Carbon disulfide........................................... 75-15-0 20 60 X
Carbon monoxide............................................ 630-08-0 50 55 --
Carbon tetrachloride....................................... 56-23-5 10 65 X
Cellulose.................................................. 9004-34-6
Total dust............................................... .............. -- ....... --
Respirable fraction...................................... .............. -- ....... --
Chlordane.................................................. 57-74-9 -- 0.5 X
Chlorinated camphene....................................... 8001-35-2 -- 0.5 X
Chlorinated diphenyl oxide................................. 55720-99-5 -- 0.5 --
Chlorine................................................... 7782-50-5 1 3 --
Chlorine dioxide........................................... 10049-04-4 0.1 0.3
Chlorine trifluoride....................................... 7790-91-2 (C)0.1 (C)0.4 --
Chloroacetaldehyde......................................... 107-20-0 (C)1 (C)3 --
a-Chloroacetophenone (Phenacyl chloride)................... 532-27-4 0.05 0.3 --
Chlorobenzene.............................................. 108-90-7 75 350 --
o-Chlorobenzylidene malononitrile.......................... 2698-41-1 0.05 0.4 --
Chlorobromomethane......................................... 74-97-5 200 1050 --
2-Chloro-1,3-butadiene; see beta-Chloroprene...............
Chlorodiphenyl (42% Chlorine) (PCB)........................ 53469-21-9 -- 1 X
Chlorodiphenyl (54% Chlorine) (PCB)........................ 11097-69-1 -- 0.5 X
[[Page 39]]
1-Chloro,2,3-epoxypropane; see Epichlorohydrin.............
2-Chloroethanol; see Ethylene chlorohydrin.................
Chloroethylene; see Vinyl chloride.........................
Chloroform (Trichloromethane).............................. 67-66-3 (C)50 (C)240 --
bis(Chloromethyl) ether; see Sec. 1926.1108.............. 542-88-1
Chloromethyl methyl ether; see Sec. 1926.1106............ 107-30-2
1-Chloro-1-nitropropane.................................... 600-25-9 20 100 --
Chloropicrin............................................... 76-06-2 0.1 0.7 --
beta-Chloroprene........................................... 126-99-8 25 90 X
Chromium (II) compounds....................................
(as Cr).................................................. 7440-47-3 -- 0.5 --
Chromium (III) compounds...................................
(as Cr).................................................. 7440-47-3 -- 0.5 --
Chromium (VI) compounds; See 1926.1126 \o\.................
Chromium metal and insol. salts (as Cr).................... 7440-47-3 -- 1 --
Chrysene; see Coal tar pitch volatiles.....................
Coal tar pitch volatiles (benzene soluble fraction), 65996-93-2 -- 0.2 --
anthracene, BaP, phenanthrene, acridine, chrysene, pyrene.
Cobalt metal, dust, and fume (as Co)....................... 7440-48-4 -- 0.1 --
Coke oven emissions; see Sec. 1926.1129..................
Copper..................................................... 7440-50-8
Fume (as Cu)............................................. .............. -- 0.1 --
Dusts and mists (as Cu).................................. .............. -- 1 --
Corundum; see Emery........................................
Cotton dust (raw).......................................... .............. -- 1
Crag herbicide (Sesone).................................... 136-78-7
Total dust............................................... .............. -- ....... --
Respirable fraction...................................... .............. -- ....... --
Cresol, all isomers........................................ 1319-77-3 5 22 X
Crotonaldehyde............................................. 123-73-9; 2 6
4170-30-3
Cumene..................................................... 98-82-8 50 245 X
Cyanides (as CN)........................................... Varies with -- 5 X
Compound
Cyanogen................................................... 460-19-5 10 -- --
Cyclohexane................................................ 110-82-7 300 1050 --
Cyclohexanol............................................... 108-93-0 50 200 --
Cyclohexanone.............................................. 108-94-1 50 200 --
Cyclohexene................................................ 110-83-8 300 1015 --
Cyclonite.................................................. 121-82-4 -- 1.5 X
Cyclopentadiene............................................ 542-92-7 75 200 --
DDT, see Dichlorodiphenyltrichloroethane...................
DDVP, see Dichlorvos.......................................
2,4-D (Dichlorophenoxyacetic acid)......................... 94-75-7 -- 10 --
Decaborane................................................. 17702-41-9 0.05 0.3 X
Demeton (Systox)........................................... 8065-48-3 -- 0.1 X
Diacetone alcohol (4-Hydroxy-4-methyl-2-pentanone)......... 123-42-2 50 240 --
1,2-Diaminoethane; see Ethylenediamine.....................
Diazomethane............................................... 334-88-3 0.2 0.4 --
Diborane................................................... 19287-45-7 0.1 0.1 --
1,2-Dibromo-3-chloropropane (DBCP); see Sec. 1926.1144... 96-12-8 ....... ....... --
[[Page 40]]
1,2-Dibromoethane; see Ethylene dibromide..................
Dibutyl phosphate.......................................... 107-66-4 1 5 --
Dibutyl phthalate.......................................... 84-74-2 -- 5 --
Dichloroacetylene.......................................... 7572-29-4 (C)0.1 (C)0.4 --
o-Dichlorobenzene.......................................... 95-50-1 (C)50 (C)300 --
p-Dichlorobenzene.......................................... 106-46-7 75 450 --
3,3'-Dichlorobenzidine; see Sec. 1926.1107............... 91-94-1
Dichlorodifluoromethane.................................... 75-71-8 1000 4950 --
1,3-Dichloro-5,5-dimethyl hydantoin........................ 118-52-5 -- 0.2 --
Dichlorodiphenyltrichloroethane (DDT)...................... 50-29-3 -- 1 X
1,1-Dichloroethane......................................... 75-34-3 100 400 --
1,2-Dichloroethane; see Ethylene dichloride................
1,2-Dichloroethylene....................................... 540-59-0 200 790 --
Dichloroethyl ether........................................ 111-44-4 (C)15 (C)90 X
Dichloromethane; see Methylene chloride....................
Dichloromonofluoromethane.................................. 75-43-4 1000 4200 --
1,1-Dichloro-1-nitroethane................................. 594-72-9 (C)10 (C)60 --
1,2-Dichloropropane; see Propylene dichloride..............
Dichlorotetrafluoroethane.................................. 76-14-2 1000 7000 --
Dichlorvos (DDVP).......................................... 62-73-7 -- 1 X
Dieldrin................................................... 60-57-1 -- 0.25 X
Diethylamine............................................... 109-89-7 25 75 --
2-Diethylaminoethanol...................................... 100-37-8 10 50 X
Diethylene triamine........................................ 111-40-0 (C)10 (C)42 X
Diethyl ether; see Ethyl ether.............................
Difluorodibromomethane..................................... 75-61-6 100 860 --
Diglycidyl ether (DGE)..................................... 2238-07-5 (C)0.5 (C)2.8 --
Dihydroxybenzene; see Hydroquinone.........................
Diisobutyl ketone.......................................... 108-83-8 50 290 --
Diisopropylamine........................................... 108-18-9 5 20 X
4-Dimethylaminoazobenzene; see Sec. 1926.1115............ 60-11-7
Dimethoxymethane; see Methylal.............................
Dimethyl acetamide......................................... 127-19-5 10 35 X
Dimethylamine.............................................. 124-40-3 10 18 --
Dimethylaminobenzene; see Xylidine.........................
Dimethylaniline (N,N-Dimethylaniline)...................... 121-69-7 5 25 X
Dimethylbenzene; see Xylene................................
Dimethyl-1,2-dibromo- 2,2-dichloroethyl phosphate.......... 300-76-5 -- 3 --
Dimethylformamide.......................................... 68-12-2 10 30 X
2,6-Dimethyl-4-heptanone; see Diisobutyl ketone............
1,1-Dimethylhydrazine...................................... 57-14-7 0.5 1 X
Dimethylphthalate.......................................... 131-11-3 -- 5 --
Dimethyl sulfate........................................... 77-78-3 1 5 X
Dinitrobenzene (all isomers)............................... .............. ....... 1 X
(ortho).................................................. 528-29-0
(meta)................................................... 99-65-0
(para)................................................... 100-25-4
Dinitro-o-cresol........................................... 534-52-1 -- 0.2 X
Dinitrotoluene............................................. 25321-14-6 -- 1.5 X
Dioxane (Diethylene dioxide)............................... 123-91-1 100 360 X
Diphenyl (Biphenyl)........................................ 92-52-4 0.2 1 --
Diphenylamine.............................................. 122-39-4 -- 10 --
Diphenylmethane diisocyanate; see Methylene bisphenyl
isocyanate................................................
[[Page 41]]
Dipropylene glycol methyl ether............................ 34590-94-8 100 600 X
Di-sec octyl phthalate (Di-(2-ethylhexyl) phthalate)....... 117-81-7 -- 5 --
Emery...................................................... 12415-34-8
Total dust............................................... .............. -- ....... --
Respirable fraction...................................... .............. -- ....... --
Endosulfan................................................. 115-29-7 -- 0.1 X
Endrin..................................................... 72-20-8 -- 0.1 X
Epichlorohydrin............................................ 106-89-8 5 19 X
EPN........................................................ 2104-64-5 -- 0.5 X
1,2-Epoxypropane; see Propylene oxide......................
2,3-Epoxy-1-propanol; see Glycidol.........................
Ethane..................................................... 74-84-0 E
Ethanethiol; see Ethyl mercaptan...........................
Ethanolamine............................................... 141-43-5 3 6 --
2-Ethoxyethanol (Cellosolve)............................... 110-80-5 200 740 X
2-Ethoxyethyl acetate (Cellosolve acetate)................. 111-15-9 100 540 X
Ethyl acetate.............................................. 141-78-6 400 1400 --
Ethyl acrylate............................................. 140-88-5 25 100 X
Ethyl alcohol (Ethanol).................................... 64-17-5 1000 1900 --
Ethylamine................................................. 75-04-7 10 18 --
Ethyl amyl ketone (5-Methyl-3-heptanone)................... 541-85-5 25 130 --
Ethyl benzene.............................................. 100-41-4 100 435 --
Ethyl bromide.............................................. 74-96-4 200 890 --
Ethyl butyl ketone (3-Heptanone)........................... 106-35-4 50 230 --
Ethyl chloride............................................. 75-00-3 1000 2600 --
Ethyl ether................................................ 60-29-7 400 1200 --
Ethyl formate.............................................. 109-94-4 100 300 --
Ethyl mercaptan............................................ 75-08-1 0.5 1 --
Ethyl silicate............................................. 78-10-4 100 850 --
Ethylene................................................... 74-85-1 E
Ethylene chlorohydrin...................................... 107-07-3 5 16 X
Ethylenediamine............................................ 107-15-3 10 25 --
Ethylene dibromide......................................... 106-93-4 (C)25 (C)190 X
Ethylene dichloride (1,2-Dichloroethane)................... 107-06-2 50 200 --
Ethylene glycol dinitrate.................................. 628-96-6 (C)0.2 (C)1 X
Ethylene glycol methyl acetate; see Methyl cellosolve
acetate...................................................
Ethyleneimine; see Sec. 1926.1112........................ 151-56-4
Ethylene oxide; see Sec. 1926.1147....................... 75-21-8
Ethylidene chloride; see 1,1-Dichloroethane................
N-Ethylmorpholine.......................................... 100-74-3 20 94 X
Ferbam..................................................... 14484-64-1
Total dust............................................... .............. -- 15 --
Ferrovanadium dust......................................... 12604-58-9 -- 1 --
Fibrous Glass..............................................
Total dust............................................... .............. ....... ....... --
Respirable fraction...................................... .............. -- ....... --
Fluorides (as F)........................................... Varies with -- 2.5 --
compound
Fluorine................................................... 7782-41-4 0.1 0.2 --
Fluorotrichloromethane (Trichlorofluoromethane)............ 75-69-4 1000 5600 --
Formaldehyde; see Sec. 1926.1148......................... 50-00-0
Formic acid................................................ 64-18-6 5 9 --
Furfural................................................... 98-01-1 5 20 X
Furfuryl alcohol........................................... 98-00-0 50 200 --
[[Page 42]]
Gasoline................................................... 8006-61-9 ....... A \3\ --
Glycerin (mist)............................................ 56-81-5
Total dust............................................... .............. -- ....... --
Respirable fraction...................................... .............. -- ....... --
Glycidol................................................... 556-52-5 50 150 --
Glycol monoethyl ether; see 2-Ethoxyethanol................
Graphite, natural, respirable dust......................... 7782-42-5 (\2\) (\2\) (\2\)
Graphite, synthetic........................................
Total dust............................................... .............. -- ....... --
Respirable fraction...................................... .............. -- ....... --
Guthion; see Azinphos methyl...............................
Gypsum..................................................... 13397-24-5
Total dust............................................... .............. -- ....... --
Respirable fraction...................................... .............. -- ....... --
Hafnium.................................................... 7440-58-6 -- 0.5 --
Helium..................................................... 7440-59-7 E
Heptachlor................................................. 76-44-8 -- 0.5 X
Heptane (n-Heptane)........................................ 142-82-5 500 2000 --
Hexachloroethane........................................... 67-72-1 1 10 X
Hexachloronaphthalene...................................... 1335-87-1 -- 0.2 X
n-Hexane................................................... 110-54-3 500 1800 --
2-Hexanone (Methyl n-butyl ketone)......................... 591-78-6 100 410 --
Hexone (Methyl isobutyl ketone)............................ 108-10-1 100 410 --
sec-Hexyl acetate.......................................... 108-84-9 50 300 --
Hydrazine.................................................. 302-01-2 1 1.3 X
Hydrogen................................................... 1333-74-0 E
Hydrogen bromide........................................... 10035-10-6 3 10 --
Hydrogen chloride.......................................... 7647-01-0 (C)5 (C)7 --
Hydrogen cyanide........................................... 74-90-8 10 11 X
Hydrogen fluoride (as F)................................... 7664-39-3 3 2 --
Hydrogen peroxide.......................................... 7722-84-1 1 1.4 --
Hydrogen selenide (as Se).................................. 7783-07-5 0.05 .02 --
Hydrogen sulfide........................................... 7783-06-4 10 15 --
Hydroquinone............................................... 123-31-9 -- 2 --
Indene..................................................... 95-13-6 10 45 --
Indium and compounds (as In)............................... 7440-74-6 -- 0.1 --
Iodine..................................................... 7553-56-2 (C)0.1 (C)1 --
Iron oxide fume............................................ 1309-37-1 -- 10 --
Iron salts (soluble) (as Fe)............................... Varies with -- 1 --
compound
Isoamyl acetate............................................ 123-92-2 100 525 --
Isoamyl alcohol (primary and secondary).................... 123-51-3 100 360 --
Isobutyl acetate........................................... 110-19-0 150 700 --
Isobutyl alcohol........................................... 78-83-1 100 300 --
Isophorone................................................. 78-59-1 25 140 --
Isopropyl acetate.......................................... 108-21-4 250 950 --
Isopropyl alcohol.......................................... 67-63-0 400 980 --
Isopropylamine............................................. 75-31-0 5 12 --
Isopropyl ether............................................ 108-20-3 500 2100 --
Isopropyl glycidyl ether (IGE)............................. 4016-14-2 50 240 --
Kaolin..................................................... 1332-58-7
Total dust............................................... .............. -- ....... --
Respirable fraction...................................... .............. -- ....... --
Ketene..................................................... 463-51-4 0.5 0.9 --
Lead, inorganic (as Pb); see 1926.62....................... 7439-92-1
Limestone.................................................. 1317-65-3
Total dust............................................... .............. -- ....... --
Respirable fraction...................................... .............. -- ....... --
Lindane.................................................... 58-89-9 -- 0.5 X
Lithium hydride............................................ 7580-67-8 -- 0.025 --
[[Page 43]]
L.P.G. (Liquefied petroleum gas)........................... 68476-85-7 1000 1800
Magnesite.................................................. 546-93-0
Total dust............................................... .............. -- ....... --
Respirable fraction...................................... .............. -- ....... --
Magnesium oxide fume....................................... 1309-48-4
Total particulate........................................ .............. 15 -- --
Malathion.................................................. 121-75-5
Total dust............................................... .............. -- 15 X
Maleic anhydride........................................... 108-31-6 0.25
Manganese compounds (as Mn)................................ 7439-96-5 -- (C)5 --
Manganese fume (as Mn)..................................... 7439-96-5 -- (C)5 --
Marble..................................................... 1317-65-3
Total dust............................................... .............. -- ....... --
Respirable fraction...................................... .............. -- ....... --
Mercury (aryl and inorganic)(as Hg)........................ 7439-97-6 ....... 0.1 X
Mercury (organo) alkyl compounds (as Hg)................... 7439-97-6 -- 0.01 X
Mercury (vapor) (as Hg).................................... 7439-97-6 -- 0.1 X
Mesityl oxide.............................................. 141-79-7 25 100 --
Methane.................................................... 74-82-8 E
Methanethiol; see Methyl mercaptan.........................
Methoxychlor............................................... 72-43-5
Total dust............................................... .............. -- 15 --
2-Methoxyethanol (Methyl cellosolve)....................... 109-86-4 25 80 X
2-Methoxyethyl acetate (Methyl cellosolve acetate)......... 110-49-6 25 120 X
Methyl acetate............................................. 79-20-9 200 610 --
Methyl acetylene (Propyne)................................. 74-99-7 1000 1650 --
Methyl acetylene-propadiene mixture (MAPP)................. .............. 1000 1800 --
Methyl acrylate............................................ 96-33-3 10 35 X
Methylal (Dimethoxy-methane)............................... 109-87-5 1000 3100 --
Methyl alcohol............................................. 67-56-1 200 260 --
Methylamine................................................ 74-89-5 10 12 --
Methyl amyl alcohol; see Methyl isobutyl carbinol..........
Methyl n-amyl ketone....................................... 110-43-0 100 465 --
Methyl bromide............................................. 74-83-9 (C)20 (C)80 X
Methyl butyl ketone; see 2-Hexanone........................
Methyl cellosolve; see 2-Methoxyethanol....................
Methyl cellosolve acetate; see 2-Methoxyethyl acetate......
Methylene chloride; see Sec. 1910.1052...................
Methyl chloroform (1,1,1-Trichloroethane).................. 71-55-6 350 1900 --
Methylcyclohexane.......................................... 108-87-2 500 2000 --
Methylcyclohexanol......................................... 25639-42-3 100 470 --
o-Methylcyclohexanone...................................... 583-60-8 100 460 X
Methylene chloride......................................... 75-09-2 500 1740 --
Methylenedianiline (MDA)................................... 101-77-9
Methyl ethyl ketone (MEK); see 2-Butanone..................
Methyl formate............................................. 107-31-3 100 250 --
Methyl hydrazine (Monomethyl hydrazine).................... 60-34-4 (C)0.2 (C)0.35 X
Methyl iodide.............................................. 74-88-4 5 28 X
Methyl isoamyl ketone...................................... 110-12-3 100 475 --
Methyl isobutyl carbinol................................... 108-11-2 25 100 X
Methyl isobutyl ketone; see Hexone.........................
Methyl isocyanate.......................................... 624-83-9 0.02 0.05 X
Methyl mercaptan........................................... 74-93-1 0.5 1 --
[[Page 44]]
Methyl methacrylate........................................ 80-62-6 100 410 --
Methyl propyl ketone; see 2-Pentanone......................
Methyl silicate............................................ 681-84-5 (C)5 (C)30 --
alpha-Methyl styrene....................................... 98-83-9 (C)100 (C)480 --
Methylene bisphenyl isocyanate (MDI)....................... 101-68-8 (C)0.02 (C)0.2 --
Mica; see Silicates........................................
Molybdenum (as Mo)......................................... 7439-98-7
Soluble compounds........................................ .............. -- 5 --
Insoluble compounds......................................
Total dust.............................................. .............. -- 15 --
Monomethyl aniline......................................... 100-61-8 2 9 X
Monomethyl hydrazine; see Methyl hydrazine.................
Morpholine................................................. 110-91-8 20 70 X
Naphtha (Coal tar)......................................... 8030-30-6 100 400 --
Naphthalene................................................ 91-20-3 10 50 --
alpha-Naphthylamine; see Sec. 1926.1104.................. 134-32-7
beta-Naphthylamine; see Sec. 1926.1109................... 91-59-8 ....... ....... --
Neon....................................................... 7440-01-9 E
Nickel carbonyl (as Ni).................................... 13463-39-3 0.001 0.007 --
Nickel, metal and insoluble compounds (as Ni).............. 7440-02-0 -- 1 --
Nickel, soluble compounds (as Ni).......................... 7440-02-0 -- 1 --
Nicotine................................................... 54-11-5 -- 0.5 X
Nitric acid................................................ 7697-37-2 2 5 --
Nitric oxide............................................... 10102-43-9 25 30 --
p-Nitroaniline............................................. 100-01-6 1 6 X
Nitrobenzene............................................... 98-95-3 1 5 X
p-Nitrochlorobenzene....................................... 100-00-5 -- 1 X
4-Nitrodiphenyl; see Sec. 1926.1103...................... 92-93-3
Nitroethane................................................ 79-24-3 100 310 --
Nitrogen................................................... 7727-37-9 E
Nitrogen dioxide........................................... 10102-44-0 (C)5 (C)9 --
Nitrogen trifluoride....................................... 7783-54-2 10 29 --
Nitroglycerin.............................................. 55-63-0 (C)0.2 (C)2 X
Nitromethane............................................... 75-52-5 100 250 --
1-Nitropropane............................................. 108-03-2 25 90 --
2-Nitropropane............................................. 79-46-9 25 90 --
N-Nitrosodimethylamine; see Sec. 1926.1116............... 62-79-9 ....... ....... --
Nitrotoluene (all isomers)................................. .............. 5 30 X
o-isomer................................................. 88-72-2;
m-isomer................................................. 99-08-1;
p-isomer................................................. 99-99-0
Nitrotrichloromethane; see Chloropicrin....................
Nitrous oxide.............................................. 10024-97-2 E
Octachloronaphthalene...................................... 2234-13-1 -- 0.1 X
Octane..................................................... 111-65-9 400 1900 --
Oil mist, mineral.......................................... 8012-95-1 -- 5 --
Osmium tetroxide (as Os)................................... 20816-12-0 -- 0.002 --
Oxalic acid................................................ 144-62-7 -- 1 --
Oxygen difluoride.......................................... 7783-41-7 0.05 0.1 --
Ozone...................................................... 10028-15-6 0.1 0.2 --
Paraquat, respirable dust.................................. 4685-14-7; -- 0.5 X
1910-42-5;
2074-50-2
Parathion.................................................. 56-38-2 -- 0.1 X
Particulates not otherwise regulated.......................
Total dust organic and inorganic......................... .............. -- 15 --
PCB; see Chlorodiphenyl (42% and 54% chlorine).............
Pentaborane................................................ 19624-22-7 0.005 0.01 --
[[Page 45]]
Pentachloronaphthalene..................................... 1321-64-8 -- 0.5 X
Pentachlorophenol.......................................... 87-86-5 -- 0.5 X
Pentaerythritol............................................ 115-77-5
Total dust............................................... .............. -- ....... --
Respirable fraction...................................... .............. -- ....... --
Pentane.................................................... 109-66-0 500 1500 --
2-Pentanone (Methyl propyl ketone)......................... 107-87-9 200 700 --
Perchloroethylene (Tetrachloroethylene).................... 127-18-4 100 670 --
Perchloromethyl mercaptan.................................. 594-42-3 0.1 0.8 --
Perchloryl fluoride........................................ 7616-94-6 3 13.5 --
Petroleum distillates (Naphtha)(Rubber Solvent)............ .............. ....... A \3\ --
Phenol..................................................... 108-95-2 5 19 X
p-Phenylene diamine........................................ 106-50-3 -- 0.1 X
Phenyl ether, vapor........................................ 101-84-8 1 7 --
Phenyl ether-biphenyl mixture, vapor....................... .............. 1 7 --
Phenylethylene; see Styrene................................
Phenyl glycidyl ether (PGE)................................ 122-60-1 10 60 --
Phenylhydrazine............................................ 100-63-0 5 22 X
Phosdrin (Mevinphos)....................................... 7786-34-7 -- 0.1 X
Phosgene (Carbonyl chloride)............................... 75-44-5 0.1 0.4 --
Phosphine.................................................. 7803-51-2 0.3 0.4 --
Phosphoric acid............................................ 7664-38-2 -- 1 --
Phosphorus (yellow)........................................ 7723-14-0 -- 0.1 --
Phosphorus pentachloride................................... 10026-13-8 -- 1 --
Phosphorus pentasulfide.................................... 1314-80-3 -- 1 --
Phosphorus trichloride..................................... 7719-12-2 0.5 3 --
Phthalic anhydride......................................... 85-44-9 2 12 --
Picric acid................................................ 88-89-1 -- 0.1 X
Pindone (2-Pivalyl-1,3-indandione)......................... 83-26-1 -- 0.1 --
Plaster of Paris........................................... 26499-65-0
Total dust............................................... .............. -- ....... --
Respirable fraction...................................... .............. -- ....... --
Platinum (as Pt)........................................... 7440-06-4
Metal.................................................... .............. -- -- --
Soluble salts............................................ .............. -- 0.002 --
Polytetrafluoroethylene decomposition products............. .............. ....... A \2\
Portland cement............................................ 65997-15-1
Total dust............................................... .............. -- 15 --
Respirable fraction...................................... .............. 5 ....... --
Propane.................................................... 74-98-6 E
Propargyl alcohol.......................................... 107-19-7 1 -- X
beta-Propriolactone; see Sec. 1926.1113.................. 57-57-8
n-Propyl acetate........................................... 109-60-4 200 840 --
n-Propyl alcohol........................................... 71-23-8 200 500 --
n-Propyl nitrate........................................... 627-13-4 25 110 --
Propylene dichloride....................................... 78-87-5 75 350 --
Propylene imine............................................ 75-55-8 2 5 X
Propylene oxide............................................ 75-56-9 100 240 --
Propyne; see Methyl acetylene..............................
Pyrethrum.................................................. 8003-34-7 -- 5 --
Pyridine................................................... 110-86-1 5 15 --
Quinone.................................................... 106-51-4 0.1 0.4 --
RDX; see Cyclonite.........................................
Rhodium (as Rh), metal fume and insoluble compounds........ 7440-16-6 -- 0.1 --
Rhodium (as Rh), soluble compounds......................... 7440-16-6 -- 0.001 --
Ronnel..................................................... 299-84-3 -- 10 --
Rotenone................................................... 83-79-4 -- 5 --
Rouge......................................................
[[Page 46]]
Total dust............................................... .............. -- ....... --
Respirable fraction...................................... .............. -- ....... --
Selenium compounds (as Se)................................. 7782-49-2 -- 0.2 --
Selenium hexafluoride (as Se).............................. 7783-79-1 0.05 0.4 --
Silica, amorphous, precipitated and gel.................... 112926-00-8 (\2\) (\2\) (\2\)
Silica, amorphous, diatomaceous earth, containing less than 61790-53-2 (\2\) (\2\) (\2\)
1% crystalline silica.....................................
Silica, crystalline cristobalite, respirable dust.......... 14464-46-1 (\2\) (\2\) (\2\)
Silica, crystalline quartz, respirable dust................ 14808-60-7 (\2\) (\2\) (\2\)
Silica, crystalline tripoli (as quartz), respirable dust... 1317-95-9 (\2\) (\2\) (\2\)
Silica, crystalline tridymite, respirable dust............. 15468-32-3 (\2\) (\2\) (\2\)
Silica, fused, respirable dust............................. 60676-86-0 (\2\) (\2\) (\2\)
Silicates (less than 1% crystalline silica)................
Mica (respirable dust)................................... 12001-26-2 (\2\) (\2\) (\2\)
Soapstone, total dust.................................... .............. (\2\) (\2\) (\2\)
Soapstone, respirable dust............................... .............. (\2\) (\2\) (\2\)
Talc (containing asbestos); use asbestos limit; see
1926.58.................................................
Talc (containing no asbestos), respirable dust........... 14807-96-6 (\2\) (\2\) (\2\)
Tremolite, asbestiform; see 1926.58......................
Silicon carbide............................................ 409-21-2
Total dust............................................... .............. -- ....... --
Respirable fraction...................................... .............. -- ....... --
Silver, metal and soluble compounds (as Ag)................ 7440-22-4 -- 0.01 --
Soapstone; see Silicates...................................
Sodium fluoroacetate....................................... 62-74-8 -- 0.05 X
Sodium hydroxide........................................... 1310-73-2 -- 2 --
Starch..................................................... 9005-25-8
Total dust............................................... .............. -- ....... --
Respirable fraction...................................... .............. -- ....... --
Stibine.................................................... 7803-52-3 0.1 0.5 --
Stoddard solvent........................................... 8052-41-3 200 1150 --
Strychnine................................................. 57-24-9 -- 0.15 --
Styrene.................................................... 100-42-5 (C)100 (C)420 --
Sucrose.................................................... 57-50-1
Total dust............................................... .............. -- ....... --
Respirable fraction...................................... .............. -- ....... --
Sulfur dioxide............................................. 7446-09-5 5 13 --
Sulfur hexafluoride........................................ 2551-62-4 1000 6000 --
Sulfuric acid.............................................. 7664-93-9 -- 1 --
Sulfur monochloride........................................ 10025-67-9 1 6 --
Sulfur pentafluoride....................................... 5714-22-7 0.025 0.25 --
Sulfuryl fluoride.......................................... 2699-79-8 5 20 --
Systox, see Demeton........................................
2,4,5-T (2,4,5-trichlorophenoxyacetic acid)................ 93-76-5 -- 10 --
Talc; see Silicates--......................................
Tantalum, metal and oxide dust............................. 7440-25-7 -- 5 --
TEDP (Sulfotep)............................................ 3689-24-5 -- 0.2 X
Teflon decomposition products.............................. .............. ....... A2
Tellurium and compounds (as Te)............................ 13494-80-9 -- 0.1 --
Tellurium hexafluoride (as Te)............................. 7783-80-4 0.02 0.2 --
Temephos................................................... 3383-96-8
Total dust............................................... .............. -- ....... --
[[Page 47]]
Respirable fraction...................................... .............. -- ....... --
TEPP (Tetraethyl pyrophosphate)............................ 107-49-3 -- 0.05 X
Terphenyls................................................. 26140-60-3 (C)1 (C)9 --
1,1,1,2-Tetrachloro-2,2-difluoroethane..................... 76-11-9 500 4170 --
1,1,2,2-Tetrachloro-1,2-difluoroethane..................... 76-12-0 500 4170 --
1,1,2,2-Tetrachloroethane.................................. 79-34-5 5 35 X
Tetrachloroethylene; see Perchloroethylene.................
Tetrachloromethane; see Carbon tetrachloride...............
Tetrachloronaphthalene..................................... 1335-88-2 -- 2 X
Tetraethyl lead (as Pb).................................... 78-00-2 -- 0.1 X
Tetrahydrofuran............................................ 109-99-9 200 590 --
Tetramethyl lead, (as Pb).................................. 75-74-1 -- 0.15 X
Tetramethyl succinonitrile................................. 3333-52-6 0.5 3 X
Tetranitromethane.......................................... 509-14-8 1 8 --
Tetryl (2,4,6-Trinitrophenylmethylnitramine)............... 479-45-8 -- 1.5 X
Thallium, soluble compounds (as Tl)........................ 7440-28-0 -- 0.1 X
Thiram..................................................... 137-26-8 -- 5 --
Tin, inorganic compounds (except oxides) (as Sn)........... 7440-31-5 -- 2 --
Tin, organic compounds (as Sn)............................. 7440-31-5 -- 0.1 --
Tin oxide (as Sn).......................................... 21651-19-4 -- -- --
Total dust............................................... .............. -- ....... --
Respirable fraction...................................... .............. -- ....... --
Titanium dioxide........................................... 13463-67-7
Total dust............................................... .............. -- ....... --
Toluene.................................................... 108-88-3 200 750 --
Toluene-2,4-diisocyanate (TDI)............................. 584-84-9 (C)0.02 (C)0.14 --
o-Toluidine................................................ 95-53-4 5 22 X
Toxaphene; see Chlorinated camphene........................
Tremolite; see Silicates...................................
Tributyl phosphate......................................... 126-73-8 -- 5 --
1,1,1-Trichloroethane; see Methyl chloroform...............
1,1,2-Trichloroethane...................................... 79-00-5 10 45 X
Trichloroethylene.......................................... 79-01-6 100 535 --
Trichloromethane; see Chloroform...........................
Trichloronaphthalene....................................... 1321-65-9 -- 5 X
1,2,3-Trichloropropane..................................... 96-18-4 50 300 --
1,1,2-Trichloro-1,2,2-trifluoroethane...................... 76-13-1 1000 7600 --
Triethylamine.............................................. 121-44-8 25 100 --
Trifluorobromomethane...................................... 75-63-8 1000 6100 --
Trimethyl benzene.......................................... 25551-13-7 25 120 --
2,4,6-Trinitrophenol; see Picric acid......................
2,4,6-Trinitrophenylmethylnitramine; see Tetryl............
2,4,6-Trinitrotoluene (TNT)................................ 118-96-7 -- 1.5 X
Triorthocresyl phosphate................................... 78-30-8 -- 0.1 --
Triphenyl phosphate........................................ 115-86-6 -- 3 --
Tungsten (as W)............................................ 7440-33-7
Insoluble compounds...................................... .............. -- 5 --
Soluble compounds........................................ .............. -- 1 --
Turpentine................................................. 8006-64-2 100 560 --
Uranium (as U)............................................. 7440-61-1
Soluble compounds........................................ .............. -- 0.2 --
Insoluble compounds...................................... .............. -- 0.2 --
Vanadium................................................... 1314-62-1
Respirable dust (as V2 O5)............................... .............. -- (C)0.5 --
Fume (as V2 O5).......................................... .............. -- (C)0.1 --
Vegetable oil mist.........................................
[[Page 48]]
Total dust............................................... .............. -- ....... --
Respirable fraction...................................... .............. -- ....... --
Vinyl benzene; see Styrene.................................
Vinyl chloride; see Sec. 1926.1117....................... 75-01-4
Vinyl cyanide; see Acrylonitrile...........................
Vinyl toluene.............................................. 25013-15-4 100 480 --
Warfarin................................................... 81-81-2 -- 0.1 --
Xylenes (o-, m-, p-isomers)................................ 1330-20-7 100 435 --
Xylidine................................................... 1300-73-8 5 25 X
Yttrium.................................................... 7440-65-5 -- 1 --
Zinc chloride fume......................................... 7646-85-7 -- 1 --
Zinc oxide fume............................................ 1314-13-2 -- 5 --
Zinc oxide................................................. 1314-13-2
Total dust............................................... .............. -- 15 --
Respirable fraction...................................... .............. -- 5 --
Zirconium compounds (as Zr)................................ 7440-67-7 -- 5
----------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------
Mineral Dusts
SILICA:
Crystalline
Quartz. Threshold Limit calculated from the formula.............. 250 (k)
----------------------------------------------
%SiO2+5
Cristobalite.....................................................
Amorphous, including natural diatomaceous earth................ 20
SILICATES (less than 1% crystalline silica)
Mica........................................................... 20
Portland cement................................................ 50
Soapstone...................................................... 20
Talc (non-asbestiform)......................................... 20
Talc (fibrous), use asbestos limit............................. --
Graphite (natural)............................................... 15
----------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------
Inert or Nuisance Particulates: (m) 50 (or 15 mg/m\3\ whichever is the smaller)
of total dust <1% SiO2
[Inert or Nuisance Dusts includes all mineral, inorganic, and
organic dusts as indicated by examples in TLV's appendix D]
Conversion factors.............................................
mppcf x 35.3 = million particles per cubic meter = particles per
c.c.
----------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------
Footnotes
\1\ [Reserved]
\2\ See Mineral Dusts Table.
\3\ Use Asbestos Limit Sec. 1926.58.
\4\ See 1926.58.
* The PELs are 8-hour TWAs unless otherwise noted; a (C) designation denotes a ceiling limit.
** As determined from breathing-zone air samples.
\a\ Parts of vapor or gas per million parts of contaminated air by volume at 25 [deg]C and 760 torr.
\b\ Milligrams of substance per cubic meter of air. When entry is in this column only, the value is exact; when
listed with a ppm entry, it is approximate.
\c\ [Reserved]
\d\ The CAS number is for information only. Enforcement is based on the substance name. For an entry covering
more than one metal compound, measured as the metal, the CAS number for the metal is given--not CAS numbers
for the individual compounds.
\e-f\ [Reserved]
\g\ For sectors excluded from Sec. 1926.1128 the limit is 10 ppm TWA.
\h-i\ [Reserved]
\j\ Millions of particles per cubic foot of air, based on impinger samples counted by light-field techniques.
\k\ The percentage of crystalline silica in the formula is the amount determined from airborne samples, except
in those instances in which other methods have been shown to be applicable.
\l\ [Reserved]
\m\ Covers all organic and inorganic particulates not otherwise regulated. Same as Particulates Not Otherwise
Regulated.
\n\ If the exposure limit in Sec. 1926.1126 is stayed or is otherwise not in effect, the exposure limit is a
ceiling of 0.1 mg/m\3\.
[[Page 49]]
\o\ If the exposure limit in Sec. 1926.1126 is stayed or is otherwise not in effect, the exposure limit is 0.1
mg/m\3\ (as CrO3) as an 8-hour TWA.
The 1970 TLV uses letter designations instead of a numerical value as follows:
A \1\ [Reserved]
A \2\ Polytetrafluoroethylene decomposition products. Because these products decompose in part by hydrolysis in
alkaline solution, they can be quantitatively determined in air as fluoride to provide an index of exposure.
No TLV is recommended pending determination of the toxicity of the products, but air concentrations should be
minimal.
A \3\ Gasoline and/or Petroleum Distillates. The composition of these materials varies greatly and thus a single
TLV for all types of these materials is no longer applicable. The content of benzene, other aromatics and
additives should be determined to arrive at the appropriate TLV.
E Simple asphyxiants. The limiting factor is the available oxygen which shall be at least 19.5% and be within
the requirements addressing explosion in part 1926.
[39 FR 22801, June 24, 1974, as amended at 51 FR 37007, Oct. 17, 1986;
52 FR 46312, Dec. 4, 1987; 58 FR 35089, June 30, 1993; 61 FR 9249, 9250,
Mar. 7, 1996; 61 FR 56856, Nov. 4, 1996; 62 FR 1619, Jan. 10, 1997; 71
FR 10381, Feb. 28, 2006; 71 FR 36009, June 23, 2006]
Sec. 1926.56 Illumination.
(a) General. Construction areas, ramps, runways, corridors, offices,
shops, and storage areas shall be lighted to not less than the minimum
illumination intensities listed in Table D-3 while any work is in
progress:
Table D-3--Minimum Illumination Intensities in Foot-Candles
------------------------------------------------------------------------
Foot-candles Area or operation
------------------------------------------------------------------------
5...................................... General construction area
lighting.
3...................................... General construction areas,
concrete placement, excavation
and waste areas, accessways,
active storage areas, loading
platforms, refueling, and
field maintenance areas.
5...................................... Indoors: warehouses, corridors,
hallways, and exitways.
5...................................... Tunnels, shafts, and general
underground work areas:
(Exception: minimum of 10 foot-
candles is required at tunnel
and shaft heading during
drilling, mucking, and
scaling. Bureau of Mines
approved cap lights shall be
acceptable for use in the
tunnel heading.)
10..................................... General construction plant and
shops (e.g., batch plants,
screening plants, mechanical
and electrical equipment
rooms, carpenter shops,
rigging lofts and active
storerooms, barracks or living
quarters, locker or dressing
rooms, mess halls, and indoor
toilets and workrooms).
30..................................... First aid stations,
infirmaries, and offices.
------------------------------------------------------------------------
(b) Other areas. For areas or operations not covered above, refer to
the American National Standard A11.1-1965, R1970, Practice for
Industrial Lighting, for recommended values of illumination.
Sec. 1926.57 Ventilation.
(a) General. Whenever hazardous substances such as dusts, fumes,
mists, vapors, or gases exist or are produced in the course of
construction work, their concentrations shall not exceed the limits
specified in Sec. 1926.55(a). When ventilation is used as an
engineering control method, the system shall be installed and operated
according to the requirements of this section.
(b) Local exhaust ventilation. Local exhaust ventilation when used
as described in (a) shall be designed to prevent dispersion into the air
of dusts, fumes, mists, vapors, and gases in concentrations causing
harmful exposure. Such exhaust systems shall be so designed that dusts,
fumes, mists, vapors, or gases are not drawn through the work area of
employees.
(c) Design and operation. Exhaust fans, jets, ducts, hoods,
separators, and all necessary appurtenances, including refuse
receptacles, shall be so designed, constructed, maintained and operated
as to ensure the required protection by maintaining a volume and
velocity of exhaust air sufficient to gather dusts, fumes, vapors, or
gases from said equipment or process, and to convey them to suitable
points of safe disposal, thereby preventing their dispersion in harmful
quantities into the atmosphere where employees work.
(d) Duration of operations. (1) The exhaust system shall be in
operation continually during all operations which it is designed to
serve. If the employee remains in the contaminated zone, the system
shall continue to operate after the cessation of said operations, the
length of time to depend upon the individual circumstances and
effectiveness of the general ventilation system.
(2) Since dust capable of causing disability is, according to the
best medical opinion, of microscopic size, tending to remain for hours
in suspension in still air, it is essential that the exhaust system be
continued in operation
[[Page 50]]
for a time after the work process or equipment served by the same shall
have ceased, in order to ensure the removal of the harmful elements to
the required extent. For the same reason, employees wearing respiratory
equipment should not remove same immediately until the atmosphere seems
clear.
(e) Disposal of exhaust materials. The air outlet from every dust
separator, and the dusts, fumes, mists, vapors, or gases collected by an
exhaust or ventilating system shall discharge to the outside atmosphere.
Collecting systems which return air to work area may be used if
concentrations which accumulate in the work area air do not result in
harmful exposure to employees. Dust and refuse discharged from an
exhaust system shall be disposed of in such a manner that it will not
result in harmful exposure to employees.
(f) Abrasive blasting--(1) Definitions applicable to this
paragraph--(i) Abrasive. A solid substance used in an abrasive blasting
operation.
(ii) Abrasive-blasting respirator. A respirator constructed so that
it covers the wearer's head, neck, and shoulders to protect the wearer
from rebounding abrasive.
(iii) Blast cleaning barrel. A complete enclosure which rotates on
an axis, or which has an internal moving tread to tumble the parts, in
order to expose various surfaces of the parts to the action of an
automatic blast spray.
(iv) Blast cleaning room. A complete enclosure in which blasting
operations are performed and where the operator works inside of the room
to operate the blasting nozzle and direct the flow of the abrasive
material.
(v) Blasting cabinet. An enclosure where the operator stands outside
and operates the blasting nozzle through an opening or openings in the
enclosure.
(vi) Clean air. Air of such purity that it will not cause harm or
discomfort to an individual if it is inhaled for extended periods of
time.
(vii) Dust collector. A device or combination of devices for
separating dust from the air handled by an exhaust ventilation system.
(viii) Exhaust ventilation system. A system for removing
contaminated air from a space, comprising two or more of the following
elements (A) enclosure or hood, (B) duct work, (C) dust collecting
equipment, (D) exhauster, and (E) discharge stack.
(ix) Particulate-filter respirator. An air purifying respirator,
commonly referred to as a dust or a fume respirator, which removes most
of the dust or fume from the air passing through the device.
(x) Respirable dust. Airborne dust in sizes capable of passing
through the upper respiratory system to reach the lower lung passages.
(xi) Rotary blast cleaning table. An enclosure where the pieces to
be cleaned are positioned on a rotating table and are passed
automatically through a series of blast sprays.
(xii) Abrasive blasting. The forcible application of an abrasive to
a surface by pneumatic pressure, hydraulic pressure, or centrifugal
force.
(2) Dust hazards from abrasive blasting. (i) Abrasives and the
surface coatings on the materials blasted are shattered and pulverized
during blasting operations and the dust formed will contain particles of
respirable size. The composition and toxicity of the dust from these
sources shall be considered in making an evaluation of the potential
health hazards.
(ii) The concentration of respirable dust or fume in the breathing
zone of the abrasive-blasting operator or any other worker shall be kept
below the levels specified in Sec. 1926.55 or other pertinent sections
of this part.
(iii) Organic abrasives which are combustible shall be used only in
automatic systems. Where flammable or explosive dust mixtures may be
present, the construction of the equipment, including the exhaust system
and all electric wiring, shall conform to the requirements of American
National Standard Installation of Blower and Exhaust Systems for Dust,
Stock, and Vapor Removal or Conveying, Z33.1-1961 (NFPA 91-1961), and
subpart S of this part. The blast nozzle shall be bonded and grounded to
prevent the build up of static charges. Where flammable or explosive
dust mixtures may be present, the abrasive blasting enclosure, the
ducts, and the dust collector shall be constructed with loose panels or
explosion venting areas, located on
[[Page 51]]
sides away from any occupied area, to provide for pressure relief in
case of explosion, following the principles set forth in the National
Fire Protection Association Explosion Venting Guide. NFPA 68-1954.
(3) Blast-cleaning enclosures. (i) Blast-cleaning enclosures shall
be exhaust ventilated in such a way that a continuous inward flow of air
will be maintained at all openings in the enclosure during the blasting
operation.
(A) All air inlets and access openings shall be baffled or so
arranged that by the combination of inward air flow and baffling the
escape of abrasive or dust particles into an adjacent work area will be
minimized and visible spurts of dust will not be observed.
(B) The rate of exhaust shall be sufficient to provide prompt
clearance of the dust-laden air within the enclosure after the cessation
of blasting.
(C) Before the enclosure is opened, the blast shall be turned off
and the exhaust system shall be run for a sufficient period of time to
remove the dusty air within the enclosure.
(D) Safety glass protected by screening shall be used in observation
windows, where hard deep-cutting abrasives are used.
(E) Slit abrasive-resistant baffles shall be installed in multiple
sets at all small access openings where dust might escape, and shall be
inspected regularly and replaced when needed.
(1) Doors shall be flanged and tight when closed.
(2) Doors on blast-cleaning rooms shall be operable from both inside
and outside, except that where there is a small operator access door,
the large work access door may be closed or opened from the outside
only.
(4) Exhaust ventilation systems. (i) The construction, installation,
inspection, and maintenance of exhaust systems shall conform to the
principles and requirements set forth in American National Standard
Fundamentals Governing the Design and Operation of Local Exhaust
Systems, Z9.2-1960, and ANSI Z33.1-1961.
(a) When dust leaks are noted, repairs shall be made as soon as
possible.
(b) The static pressure drop at the exhaust ducts leading from the
equipment shall be checked when the installation is completed and
periodically thereafter to assure continued satisfactory operation.
Whenever an appreciable change in the pressure drop indicates a partial
blockage, the system shall be cleaned and returned to normal operating
condition.
(ii) In installations where the abrasive is recirculated, the
exhaust ventilation system for the blasting enclosure shall not be
relied upon for the removal of fines from the spent abrasive instead of
an abrasive separator. An abrasive separator shall be provided for the
purpose.
(iii) The air exhausted from blast-cleaning equipment shall be
discharged through dust collecting equipment. Dust collectors shall be
set up so that the accumulated dust can be emptied and removed without
contaminating other working areas.
(5) Personal protective equipment. (i) Employers must use only
respirators approved by NIOSH under 42 CFR part 84 for protecting
employees from dusts produced during abrasive-blasting operations.
(ii) Abrasive-blasting respirators shall be worn by all abrasive-
blasting operators:
(A) When working inside of blast-cleaning rooms, or
(B) When using silica sand in manual blasting operations where the
nozzle and blast are not physically separated from the operator in an
exhaust ventilated enclosure, or
(C) Where concentrations of toxic dust dispersed by the abrasive
blasting may exceed the limits set in Sec. 1926.55 or other pertinent
sections of this part and the nozzle and blast are not physically
separated from the operator in an exhaust-ventilated enclosure.
(iii) Properly fitted particulate-filter respirators, commonly
referred to as dust-filter respirators, may be used for short,
intermittent, or occasional dust exposures such as cleanup, dumping of
dust collectors, or unloading shipments of sand at a receiving point
when it is not feasible to control the dust by enclosure, exhaust
ventilation, or other means. The respirators used must be approved by
NIOSH under 42 CFR part 84 for protection against the specific type of
dust encountered.
[[Page 52]]
(iv) A respiratory protection program as defined and described in
Sec. 1926.103, shall be established wherever it is necessary to use
respiratory protective equipment.
(v) Operators shall be equipped with heavy canvas or leather gloves
and aprons or equivalent protection to protect them from the impact of
abrasives. Safety shoes shall be worn to protect against foot injury
where heavy pieces of work are handled.
(A) Safety shoes shall conform to the requirements of American
National Standard for Men's Safety-Toe Footwear, Z41.1-1967.
(B) Equipment for protection of the eyes and face shall be supplied
to the operator when the respirator design does not provide such
protection and to any other personnel working in the vicinity of
abrasive blasting operations. This equipment shall conform to the
requirements of Sec. 1926.102.
(6) Air supply and air compressors. Air for abrasive-blasting
respirators must be free of harmful quantities of dusts, mists, or
noxious gases, and must meet the requirements for supplied-air quality
and use specified in 29 CFR 1910.134(i).
(7) Operational procedures and general safety. Dust shall not be
permitted to accumulate on the floor or on ledges outside of an
abrasive-blasting enclosure, and dust spills shall be cleaned up
promptly. Aisles and walkways shall be kept clear of steel shot or
similar abrasive which may create a slipping hazard.
(8) Scope. This paragraph applies to all operations where an
abrasive is forcibly applied to a surface by pneumatic or hydraulic
pressure, or by centrifugal force. It does not apply to steam blasting,
or steam cleaning, or hydraulic cleaning methods where work is done
without the aid of abrasives.
(g) Grinding, polishing, and buffing operations--(1) Definitions
applicable to this paragraph--
(i) Abrasive cutting-off wheels. Organic-bonded wheels, the
thickness of which is not more than one forty-eighth of their diameter
for those up to, and including, 20 inches (50.8 cm) in diameter, and not
more than one-sixtieth of their diameter for those larger than 20 inches
(50.8 cm) in diameter, used for a multitude of operations variously
known as cutting, cutting off, grooving, slotting, coping, and jointing,
and the like. The wheels may be ``solid'' consisting of organic-bonded
abrasive material throughout, ``steel centered'' consisting of a steel
disc with a rim of organic-bonded material moulded around the periphery,
or of the ``inserted tooth'' type consisting of a steel disc with
organic-bonded abrasive teeth or inserts mechanically secured around the
periphery.
(ii) Belts. All power-driven, flexible, coated bands used for
grinding, polishing, or buffing purposes.
(iii) Branch pipe. The part of an exhaust system piping that is
connected directly to the hood or enclosure.
(iv) Cradle. A movable fixture, upon which the part to be ground or
polished is placed.
(v) Disc wheels. All power-driven rotatable discs faced with
abrasive materials, artificial or natural, and used for grinding or
polishing on the side of the assembled disc.
(vi) Entry loss. The loss in static pressure caused by air flowing
into a duct or hood. It is usually expressed in inches of water gauge.
(vii) Exhaust system. A system consisting of branch pipes connected
to hoods or enclosures, one or more header pipes, an exhaust fan, means
for separating solid contaminants from the air flowing in the system,
and a discharge stack to outside.
(viii) Grinding wheels. All power-driven rotatable grinding or
abrasive wheels, except disc wheels as defined in this standard,
consisting of abrasive particles held together by artificial or natural
bonds and used for peripheral grinding.
(ix) Header pipe (main pipe). A pipe into which one or more branch
pipes enter and which connects such branch pipes to the remainder of the
exhaust system.
(x) Hoods and enclosures. The partial or complete enclosure around
the wheel or disc through which air enters an exhaust system during
operation.
(xi) Horizontal double-spindle disc grinder. A grinding machine
carrying two power-driven, rotatable, coaxial, horizontal spindles upon
the inside
[[Page 53]]
ends of which are mounted abrasive disc wheels used for grinding two
surfaces simultaneously.
(xii) Horizontal single-spindle disc grinder. A grinding machine
carrying an abrasive disc wheel upon one or both ends of a power-driven,
rotatable single horizontal spindle.
(xiii) Polishing and buffing wheels. All power-driven rotatable
wheels composed all or in part of textile fabrics, wood, felt, leather,
paper, and may be coated with abrasives on the periphery of the wheel
for purposes of polishing, buffing, and light grinding.
(xiv) Portable grinder. Any power-driven rotatable grinding,
polishing, or buffing wheel mounted in such manner that it may be
manually manipulated.
(xv) Scratch brush wheels. All power-driven rotatable wheels made
from wire or bristles, and used for scratch cleaning and brushing
purposes.
(xvi) Swing-frame grinder. Any power-driven rotatable grinding,
polishing, or buffing wheel mounted in such a manner that the wheel with
its supporting framework can be manipulated over stationary objects.
(xvii) Velocity pressure (vp). The kinetic pressure in the direction
of flow necessary to cause a fluid at rest to flow at a given velocity.
It is usually expressed in inches of water gauge.
(xviii) Vertical spindle disc grinder. A grinding machine having a
vertical, rotatable power-driven spindle carrying a horizontal abrasive
disc wheel.
(2) Application. Wherever dry grinding, dry polishing or buffing is
performed, and employee exposure, without regard to the use of
respirators, exceeds the permissible exposure limits prescribed in Sec.
1926.55 or other pertinent sections of this part, a local exhaust
ventilation system shall be provided and used to maintain employee
exposures within the prescribed limits.
(3) Hood and branch pipe requirements. (i) Hoods connected to
exhaust systems shall be used, and such hoods shall be designed,
located, and placed so that the dust or dirt particles shall fall or be
projected into the hoods in the direction of the air flow. No wheels,
discs, straps, or belts shall be operated in such manner and in such
direction as to cause the dust and dirt particles to be thrown into the
operator's breathing zone.
(ii) Grinding wheels on floor stands, pedestals, benches, and
special-purpose grinding machines and abrasive cutting-off wheels shall
have not less than the minimum exhaust volumes shown in Table D-57.1
with a recommended minimum duct velocity of 4,500 feet per minute in the
branch and 3,500 feet per minute in the main. The entry losses from all
hoods except the vertical-spindle disc grinder hood, shall equal 0.65
velocity pressure for a straight takeoff and 0.45 velocity pressure for
a tapered takeoff. The entry loss for the vertical-spindle disc grinder
hood is shown in figure D-57.1 (following paragraph (g) of this
section).
Table D-57.1--Grinding and Abrasive Cutting-Off Wheels
------------------------------------------------------------------------
Minimum
Wheel exhaust
Wheel diameter, inches (cm) width, volume
inches (feet\3\/
(cm) min.)
------------------------------------------------------------------------
To 9 (22.86).................................... 1\1/2\ 220
(3.81)
Over 9 to 16 (22.86 to 40.64)................... 2 (5.08) 390
Over 16 to 19 (40.64 to 48.26).................. 3 (7.62) 500
Over 19 to 24 (48.26 to 60.96).................. 4 (10.16) 610
Over 24 to 30 (60.96 to 76.2)................... 5 (12.7) 880
Over 30 to 36 (76.2 to 91.44)................... 6 (15.24) 1,200
------------------------------------------------------------------------
For any wheel wider than wheel diameters shown in Table D-57.1, increase
the exhaust volume by the ratio of the new width to the width shown.
Example: If wheel width = 4\1/2\ inches (11.43 cm),
then 4.5/4 x 610 = 686 (rounded to 690).
(iii) Scratch-brush wheels and all buffing and polishing wheels
mounted on floor stands, pedestals, benches, or special-purpose machines
shall have not less than the minimum exhaust volume shown in Table D-
57.2.
Table D-57.2--Buffing and Polishing Wheels
------------------------------------------------------------------------
Minimum
Wheel exhaust
Wheel diameter, inches (cm) width, volume
inches cm) (feet\3\/
min.)
------------------------------------------------------------------------
To 9 (22.86).................................... 2 (5.08) 300
Over 9 to 16 (22.86 to 40.64)................... 3 (7.62) 500
Over 16 to 19 (40.64 to 48.26).................. 4 (10.16) 610
Over 19 to 24 (48.26 to 60.96).................. 5 (12.7) 740
Over 24 to 30 (60.96 to 76.2)................... 6 (15.24) 1,040
Over 30 to 36 (76.2 to 91.44)................... 6 (15.24) 1,200
------------------------------------------------------------------------
[[Page 54]]
(iv) Grinding wheels or discs for horizontal single-spindle disc
grinders shall be hooded to collect the dust or dirt generated by the
grinding operation and the hoods shall be connected to branch pipes
having exhaust volumes as shown in Table D-57.3.
Table D-57.3--Horizontal Single-Spindle Disc Grinder
------------------------------------------------------------------------
Exhaust
volume
Disc diameter, inches (cm) (ft.\3\/
min.)
------------------------------------------------------------------------
Up to 12 (30.48)............................................ 220
Over 12 to 19 (30.48 to 48.26).............................. 390
Over 19 to 30 (48.26 to 76.2)............................... 610
Over 30 to 36 (76.2 to 91.44)............................... 880
------------------------------------------------------------------------
(v) Grinding wheels or discs for horizontal double-spindle disc
grinders shall have a hood enclosing the grinding chamber and the hood
shall be connected to one or more branch pipes having exhaust volumes as
shown in Table D-57.4.
Table D-57.4--Horizontal Double-Spindle Disc Grinder
------------------------------------------------------------------------
Exhaust
volume
Disc diameter, inches (cm) (ft.\3\/
min.)
------------------------------------------------------------------------
Up to 19 (48.26)............................................ 610
Over 19 to 25 (48.26 to 63.5)............................... 880
Over 25 to 30 (63.5 to 76.2)................................ 1,200
Over 30 to 53 (76.2 to 134.62).............................. 1,770
Over 53 to 72 (134.62 to 182.88)............................ 6,280
------------------------------------------------------------------------
(vi) Grinding wheels or discs for vertical single-spindle disc
grinders shall be encircled with hoods to remove the dust generated in
the operation. The hoods shall be connected to one or more branch pipes
having exhaust volumes as shown in Table D-57.5.
Table D-57.5--Vertical Spindle Disc Grinder
------------------------------------------------------------------------
One-half or more Disc not covered
of disc covered ------------------
------------------
Disc diameter, inches (cm) Exhaust Exhaust
Number foot Number foot\3\/
\1\ \3\/ \1\ min.
min.
------------------------------------------------------------------------
Up to 20 (50.8).................... 1 500 2 780
Over 20 to 30 (50.8 to 76.2)....... 2 780 2 1,480
Over 30 to 53 (76.2 to 134.62)..... 2 1,770 4 3,530
Over 53 to 72 (134.62 to 182.88)... 2 3,140 5 6,010
------------------------------------------------------------------------
\1\ Number of exhaust outlets around periphery of hood, or equal
distribution provided by other means.
(vii) Grinding and polishing belts shall be provided with hoods to
remove dust and dirt generated in the operations and the hoods shall be
connected to branch pipes having exhaust volumes as shown in Table D-
57.6.
Table D-57.6--Grinding and Polishing Belts
------------------------------------------------------------------------
Exhaust
volume
Belts width, inches (cm) (ft.\3\/
min.)
------------------------------------------------------------------------
Up to 3 (7.62).............................................. 220
Over 3 to 5 (7.62 to 12.7).................................. 300
Over 5 to 7 (12.7 to 17.78)................................. 390
Over 7 to 9 (17.78 to 22.86)................................ 500
Over 9 to 11 (22.86 to 27.94)............................... 610
Over 11 to 13 (27.94 to 33.02).............................. 740
------------------------------------------------------------------------
(viii) Cradles and swing-frame grinders. Where cradles are used for
handling the parts to be ground, polished, or buffed, requiring large
partial enclosures to house the complete operation, a minimum average
air velocity of 150 feet per minute shall be maintained over the entire
opening of the enclosure. Swing-frame grinders shall also be exhausted
in the same manner as provided for cradles. (See fig. D-57.3)
(ix) Where the work is outside the hood, air volumes must be
increased as shown in American Standard Fundamentals Governing the
Design and Operation of Local Exhaust Systems, Z9.2-1960 (section 4,
exhaust hoods).
(4) Exhaust systems. (i) Exhaust systems for grinding, polishing,
and buffing operations should be designed in accordance with American
Standard Fundamentals Governing the Design and Operation of Local
Exhaust Systems, Z9.2-1960.
(ii) Exhaust systems for grinding, polishing, and buffing operations
shall be tested in the manner described in American Standard
Fundamentals Governing the Design and Operation of Local Exhaust
Systems, Z9.2-1960.
(iii) All exhaust systems shall be provided with suitable dust
collectors.
(5) Hood and enclosure design. (i) (A) It is the dual function of
grinding and abrasive cutting-off wheel hoods to protect the operator
from the hazards of bursting wheels as well as to provide a means for
the removal of dust and dirt generated. All hoods shall be not less in
structural strength than specified in
[[Page 55]]
the American National Standard Safety Code for the Use, Care, and
Protection of Abrasive Wheels, B7.1-1970.
(B) Due to the variety of work and types of grinding machines
employed, it is necessary to develop hoods adaptable to the particular
machine in question, and such hoods shall be located as close as
possible to the operation.
(ii) Exhaust hoods for floor stands, pedestals, and bench grinders
shall be designed in accordance with figure D-57.2. The adjustable
tongue shown in the figure shall be kept in working order and shall be
adjusted within one-fourth inch (0.635 cm) of the wheel periphery at all
times.
(iii) Swing-frame grinders shall be provided with exhaust booths as
indicated in figure D-57.3.
(iv) Portable grinding operations, whenever the nature of the work
permits, shall be conducted within a partial enclosure. The opening in
the enclosure shall be no larger than is actually required in the
operation and an average face air velocity of not less than 200 feet per
minute shall be maintained.
(v) Hoods for polishing and buffing and scratch-brush wheels shall
be constructed to conform as closely to figure D-57.4 as the nature of
the work will permit.
(vi) Cradle grinding and polishing operations shall be performed
within a partial enclosure similar to figure D-57.5. The operator shall
be positioned outside the working face of the opening of the enclosure.
The face opening of the enclosure should not be any greater in area than
that actually required for the performance of the operation and the
average air velocity into the working face of the enclosure shall not be
less than 150 feet per minute.
(vii) Hoods for horizontal single-spindle disc grinders shall be
constructed to conform as closely as possible to the hood shown in
figure D-57.6. It is essential that there be a space between the back of
the wheel and the hood, and a space around the periphery of the wheel of
at least 1 inch (2.54 cm) in order to permit the suction to act around
the wheel periphery. The opening on the side of the disc shall be no
larger than is required for the grinding operation, but must never be
less than twice the area of the branch outlet.
(viii) Horizontal double-spindle disc grinders shall have a hood
encircling the wheels and grinding chamber similar to that illustrated
in figure D-57.7. The openings for passing the work into the grinding
chamber should be kept as small as possible, but must never be less than
twice the area of the branch outlets.
(ix) Vertical-spindle disc grinders shall be encircled with a hood
so constructed that the heavy dust is drawn off a surface of the disc
and the lighter dust exhausted through a continuous slot at the top of
the hood as shown in figure D-57.1.
(x) Grinding and polishing belt hoods shall be constructed as close
to the operation as possible. The hood should extend almost to the belt,
and 1-inch (2.54 cm) wide openings should be provided on either side.
Figure D-57.8 shows a typical hood for a belt operation.
[[Page 56]]
[GRAPHIC] [TIFF OMITTED] TC30OC91.000
Figure D-57.1--Vertical Spindle Disc Grinder Exhaust Hood and Branch
Pipe Connections
----------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------
Dia. D inches (cm) Exhaust E Volume
------------------------------------------------------------------------------ Exhausted at
4,500 ft/min Note
Min. Max. No Pipes Dia. ft\3\/min
----------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------
20 (50.8) 1 4\1/4\ 500 When one-half or
(10.795) more of the disc
can be hooded,
use exhaust
ducts as shown
at the left.
Over 20 (50.8)............... 30 (76.2) 2 4 (10.16) 780
Over 30 (76.2)............... 72 (182.88) 2 6 (15.24) 1,770
Over 53 (134.62)............. 72 (182.88) 2 8 (20.32) 3,140
----------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------
20 (50.8) 2 4 (10.16) 780 When no hood can
be used over
disc, use
exhaust ducts as
shown at left.
Over 20 (50.8)............... 20 (50.8) 2 4 (10.16) 780
Over 30 (76.2)............... 30 (76.2) 2 5\1/2\ (13.97) 1,480
Over 53 (134.62)............. 53 (134.62) 4 6 (15.24) 3,530
72 (182.88) 5 7 (17.78) 6,010
----------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------
Entry loss=1.0 slot velocity pressure + 0.5 branch velocity pressure.
Minimum slot velocity=2,000 ft/min--\1/2\-inch (1.27 cm) slot width.
[[Page 57]]
[GRAPHIC] [TIFF OMITTED] TC30OC91.001
Figure D-57.2--Standard Grinder Hood
----------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------
Wheel dimension, inches (centimeters)
------------------------------------------------------------------------------------- Exhaust Volume of
Diameter outlet, inches air at
--------------------------------------------------------------------- Width, Max (centimeters) 4,500 ft/
Min= d Max= D E min
----------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------
9 (22.86) 1\1/2\ (3.81) 3 220
Over 9 (22.86)...................................... 16 (40.64) 2 (5.08) 4 390
Over 16 (40.64)..................................... 19 (48.26) 3 (7.62) 4\1/2\ 500
Over 19 (48.26)..................................... 24 (60.96) 4 (10.16) 5 610
Over 24 (60.96)..................................... 30 (76.2) 5 (12.7) 6 880
Over 30 (76.2)...................................... 36 (91.44) 6 (15.24) 7 1,200
----------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------
Entry loss = 0.45 velocity pressure for tapered takeoff 0.65 velocity pressure for straight takeoff.
[[Page 58]]
[GRAPHIC] [TIFF OMITTED] TC30OC91.002
Figure D-57.3--A Method of Applying an Exhaust Enclosure to Swing-Frame
Grinders
Note: Baffle to reduce front opening as much as possible
[[Page 59]]
[GRAPHIC] [TIFF OMITTED] TC30OC91.003
Figure D-57.4
Standard Buffing and Polishing Hood
----------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------
Wheel dimension, inches (centimeters)
------------------------------------------------------------------------------------- Exhaust Volume of
Diameter outlet, inches air at
--------------------------------------------------------------------- Width, Max E 4,500 ft/
Min= d Max= D min
----------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------
9 (22.86) 2 (5.08) 3\1/2\ (3.81) 300
Over 9 (22.86)...................................... 16 (40.64) 3 (5.08) 4 500
Over 16 (40.64)..................................... 19 (48.26) 4 (11.43) 5 610
Over 19 (48.26)..................................... 24 (60.96) 5 (12.7) 5\1/2\ 740
Over 24 (60.96)..................................... 30 (76.2) 6 (15.24) 6\1/2\ 1.040
Over 30 (76.2)...................................... 36 (91.44) 6 (15.24) 7 1.200
----------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------
Entry loss = 0.15 velocity pressure for tapered takeoff; 0.65 velocity pressure for straight takeoff.
[[Page 60]]
[GRAPHIC] [TIFF OMITTED] TC30OC91.004
Figure D-57.5--Cradle Polishing or Grinding Enclosure
Entry loss = 0.45 velocity pressure for tapered takeoff
[[Page 61]]
[GRAPHIC] [TIFF OMITTED] TC30OC91.005
Figure D-57.6--Horizontal Single-Spindle Disc Grinder Exhaust Hood and
Branch Pipe Connections
------------------------------------------------------------------------
Dia D, inches (centimeters) Volume
------------------------------------------------ Exhaust E, exhausted
dia. at 4,500 ft/
Min. Max. inches min ft\3\/
(cm) min
------------------------------------------------------------------------
12 (30.48) 3 (7.6) 220
Over 12 (30.48)................ 19 (48.26) 4 (10.16) 390
Over 19 (48.26)................ 30 (76.2) 5 (12.7) 610
Over 30 (76.2)................. 36 (91.44) 6 (15.24) 880
------------------------------------------------------------------------
Note: If grinding wheels are used for disc grinding purposes, hoods must
conform to structural strength and materials as described in 9.1.
Entry loss = 0.45 velocity pressure for tapered takeoff.
[[Page 62]]
[GRAPHIC] [TIFF OMITTED] TC30OC91.006
Figure D-57.7--Horizontal Double-Spindle Disc Grinder Exhaust Hood and
Branch Pipe Connections
----------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------
Disc dia. inches (centimeters) Exhaust E Volume
---------------------------------------------------------------------------- exhaust at
4,500 ft/ Note
Min. Max. No Pipes Dia. min. ft\3\/
min
----------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------
19 (48.26) 1 5 610
Over 19 (48.26)................ 25 (63.5) 1 6 880 When width ``W''
permits, exhaust ducts
should be as near
heaviest grinding as
possible.
Over 25 (63.5)................. 30 (76.2) 1 7 1,200
Over 30 (76.2)................. 53 (134.62) 2 6 1,770
Over 53 (134.62)............... 72 (182.88) 4 8 6,280
----------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------
Entry loss = 0.45 velocity pressure for tapered takeoff.
[[Page 63]]
[GRAPHIC] [TIFF OMITTED] TC30OC91.007
Figure D-57.8--A Typical Hood for a Belt Operation
Entry loss = 0.45 velocity pressure for tapered takeoff
------------------------------------------------------------------------
Exhaust
Belt width W. inches (centimeters) volume.
ft.\1\/min
------------------------------------------------------------------------
Up to 3 (7.62).............................................. 220
3 to 5 (7.62 to 12.7)....................................... 300
5 to 7 (12.7 to 17.78)...................................... 390
7 to 9 (17.78 to 22.86)..................................... 500
9 to 11 (22.86 to 27.94).................................... 610
11 to 13 (27.94 to 33.02)................................... 740
------------------------------------------------------------------------
Minimum duct velocity = 4,500 ft/min branch, 3,500 ft/min main.
Entry loss = 0.45 velocity pressure for tapered takeoff; 0.65 velocity
pressure for straight takeoff.
(6) Scope. This paragraph (g), prescribes the use of exhaust hood
enclosures and systems in removing dust, dirt, fumes, and gases
generated through the grinding, polishing, or buffing of ferrous and
nonferrous metals.
(h) Spray finishing operations--(1) Definitions applicable to this
paragraph--(i) Spray-finishing operations. Spray-finishing operations
are employment of methods wherein organic or inorganic materials are
utilized in dispersed form for deposit on surfaces to be coated,
treated, or cleaned. Such methods of deposit may involve either
automatic, manual, or electrostatic deposition but do not include metal
spraying or metallizing, dipping, flow coating, roller coating,
tumbling, centrifuging, or spray washing and degreasing as conducted in
self-contained washing and degreasing machines or systems.
(ii) Spray booth. Spray booths are defined and described in Sec.
1926.66(a). (See sections 103, 104, and 105 of the Standard for Spray
Finishing Using Flammable and Combustible Materials, NFPA No. 33-1969).
(iii) Spray room. A spray room is a room in which spray-finishing
operations not conducted in a spray booth are performed separately from
other areas.
(iv) Minimum maintained velocity. Minimum maintained velocity is the
velocity of air movement which must be maintained in order to meet
minimum specified requirements for health and safety.
(2) Location and application. Spray booths or spray rooms are to be
used to enclose or confine all operations. Spray-finishing operations
shall be located as provided in sections 201 through 206 of the Standard
for Spray Finishing Using Flammable and Combustible Materials, NFPA No.
33-1969.
(3) Design and construction of spray booths. (i) Spray booths shall
be designed and constructed in accordance with Sec. 1926.66(b) (1)
through (4) and (6) through (10) (see sections 301-304 and 306-310 of
the Standard for Spray Finishing Using Flammable and Combustible
Materials, NFPA No. 33-1969), for general construction specifications.
For a more detailed discussion of fundamentals relating to this subject,
see ANSI Z9.2-1960
(A) Lights, motors, electrical equipment, and other sources of
ignition shall conform to the requirements of Sec. 1926.66(b)(10) and
(c). (See section 310 and chapter 4 of the Standard for Spray Finishing
Using Flammable and Combustible Materials NFPA No. 33-1969.)
(B) In no case shall combustible material be used in the
construction of a
[[Page 64]]
spray booth and supply or exhaust duct connected to it.
(ii) Unobstructed walkways shall not be less than 6\1/2\ feet (1.976
m) high and shall be maintained clear of obstruction from any work
location in the booth to a booth exit or open booth front. In booths
where the open front is the only exit, such exits shall be not less than
3 feet (0.912 m) wide. In booths having multiple exits, such exits shall
not be less than 2 feet (0.608 m) wide, provided that the maximum
distance from the work location to the exit is 25 feet (7.6 m) or less.
Where booth exits are provided with doors, such doors shall open outward
from the booth.
(iii) Baffles, distribution plates, and dry-type overspray
collectors shall conform to the requirements of Sec. 1926.66(b) (4) and
(5). (See sections 304 and 305 of the Standard for Spray Finishing Using
Flammable and Combustible Materials, NFPA No. 33-1969.)
(A) Overspray filters shall be installed and maintained in
accordance with the requirements of Sec. 1926.66(b)(5), (see section
305 of the Standard for Spray Finishing Using Flammable and Combustible
Materials, NFPA No. 33-1969), and shall only be in a location easily
accessible for inspection, cleaning, or replacement.
(B) Where effective means, independent of the overspray filters, are
installed which will result in design air distribution across the booth
cross section, it is permissible to operate the booth without the
filters in place.
(iv) (A) For wet or water-wash spray booths, the water-chamber
enclosure, within which intimate contact of contaminated air and
cleaning water or other cleaning medium is maintained, if made of steel,
shall be 18 gage or heavier and adequately protected against corrosion.
(B) Chambers may include scrubber spray nozzles, headers, troughs,
or other devices. Chambers shall be provided with adequate means for
creating and maintaining scrubbing action for removal of particulate
matter from the exhaust air stream.
(v) Collecting tanks shall be of welded steel construction or other
suitable non-combustible material. If pits are used as collecting tanks,
they shall be concrete, masonry, or other material having similar
properties.
(A) Tanks shall be provided with weirs, skimmer plates, or screens
to prevent sludge and floating paint from entering the pump suction box.
Means for automatically maintaining the proper water level shall also be
provided. Fresh water inlets shall not be submerged. They shall
terminate at least one pipe diameter above the safety overflow level of
the tank.
(B) Tanks shall be so constructed as to discourage accumulation of
hazardous deposits.
(vi) Pump manifolds, risers, and headers shall be adequately sized
to insure sufficient water flow to provide efficient operation of the
water chamber.
(4) Design and construction of spray rooms. (i) Spray rooms,
including floors, shall be constructed of masonry, concrete, or other
noncombustible material.
(ii) Spray rooms shall have noncombustible fire doors and shutters.
(iii) Spray rooms shall be adequately ventilated so that the
atmosphere in the breathing zone of the operator shall be maintained in
accordance with the requirements of paragraph (h)(6)(ii) of this
section.
(iv) Spray rooms used for production spray-finishing operations
shall conform to the requirements for spray booths.
(5) Ventilation. (i) Ventilation shall be provided in accordance
with provisions of Sec. 1926.66(d) (see chapter 5 of the Standard for
Spray Finishing Using Flammable or Combustible Materials, NFPA No. 33-
1969), and in accordance with the following:
(A) Where a fan plenum is used to equalize or control the
distribution of exhaust air movement through the booth, it shall be of
sufficient strength or rigidity to withstand the differential air
pressure or other superficially imposed loads for which the equipment is
designed and also to facilitate cleaning. Construction specifications
shall be at least equivalent to those of paragraph (h)(5)(iii) of this
section.
(B) [Reserved]
(ii) Inlet or supply ductwork used to transport makeup air to spray
booths or surrounding areas shall be constructed of noncombustible
materials.
[[Page 65]]
(A) If negative pressure exists within inlet ductwork, all seams and
joints shall be sealed if there is a possibility of infiltration of
harmful quantities of noxious gases, fumes, or mists from areas through
which ductwork passes.
(B) Inlet ductwork shall be sized in accordance with volume flow
requirements and provide design air requirements at the spray booth.
(C) Inlet ductwork shall be adequately supported throughout its
length to sustain at least its own weight plus any negative pressure
which is exerted upon it under normal operating conditions.
(iii) [Reserved]
(A) Exhaust ductwork shall be adequately supported throughout its
length to sustain its weight plus any normal accumulation in interior
during normal operating conditions and any negative pressure exerted
upon it.
(B) Exhaust ductwork shall be sized in accordance with good design
practice which shall include consideration of fan capacity, length of
duct, number of turns and elbows, variation in size, volume, and
character of materials being exhausted. See American National Standard
Z9.2-1960 for further details and explanation concerning elements of
design.
(C) Longitudinal joints in sheet steel ductwork shall be either
lock-seamed, riveted, or welded. For other than steel construction,
equivalent securing of joints shall be provided.
(D) Circumferential joints in ductwork shall be substantially
fastened together and lapped in the direction of airflow. At least every
fourth joint shall be provided with connecting flanges, bolted together,
or of equivalent fastening security.
(E) Inspection or clean-out doors shall be provided for every 9 to
12 feet (2.736 to 3.648 m) of running length for ducts up to 12 inches
(0.304 m) in diameter, but the distance between cleanout doors may be
greater for larger pipes. (See 8.3.21 of American National Standard
Z9.1-1951.) A clean-out door or doors shall be provided for servicing
the fan, and where necessary, a drain shall be provided.
(F) Where ductwork passes through a combustible roof or wall, the
roof or wall shall be protected at the point of penetration by open
space or fire-resistive material between the duct and the roof or wall.
When ducts pass through firewalls, they shall be provided with automatic
fire dampers on both sides of the wall, except that three-eighth-inch
steel plates may be used in lieu of automatic fire dampers for ducts not
exceeding 18 inches (45.72 cm) in diameter.
(G) Ductwork used for ventilating any process covered in this
standard shall not be connected to ducts ventilating any other process
or any chimney or flue used for conveying any products of combustion.
(6) Velocity and air flow requirements. (i) Except where a spray
booth has an adequate air replacement system, the velocity of air into
all openings of a spray booth shall be not less than that specified in
Table D-57.7 for the operating conditions specified. An adequate air
replacement system is one which introduces replacement air upstream or
above the object being sprayed and is so designed that the velocity of
air in the booth cross section is not less than that specified in Table
D-57.7 when measured upstream or above the object being sprayed.
Table D-57.7--Minimum Maintained Velocities Into Spray Booths
----------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------
Airflow velocities, f.p.m.
Operating conditions for objects Crossdraft, f.p.m. ----------------------------------------
completely inside booth Design Range
----------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------
Electrostatic and automatic airless Negligible................. 50 large booth............. 50-75
operation contained in booth without
operator.
........................... 100 small booth............ 75-125
Air-operated guns, manual or automatic.... Up to 50................... 100 large booth............ 75-125
----------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------
........................... 150 small booth............ 125-175
Air-operated guns, manual or automatic.... Up to 100.................. 150 large booth............ 125-175
----------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------
........................... 200 small booth............ 150-250
----------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------
Notes:
[[Page 66]]
(1) Attention is invited to the fact that the effectiveness of the spray booth is dependent upon the
relationship of the depth of the booth to its height and width.
(2) Crossdrafts can be eliminated through proper design and such design should be sought. Crossdrafts in excess
of 100fpm (feet per minute) should not be permitted.
(3) Excessive air pressures result in loss of both efficiency and material waste in addition to creating a
backlash that may carry overspray and fumes into adjacent work areas.
(4) Booths should be designed with velocities shown in the column headed ``Design.'' However, booths operating
with velocities shown in the column headed ``Range'' are in compliance with this standard.
(ii) In addition to the requirements in paragraph (h)(6)(i) of this
section the total air volume exhausted through a spray booth shall be
such as to dilute solvent vapor to at least 25 percent of the lower
explosive limit of the solvent being sprayed. An example of the method
of calculating this volume is given below.
Example: To determine the lower explosive limits of the most common
solvents used in spray finishing, see Table D-57.8. Column 1 gives the
number of cubic feet of vapor per gallon of solvent and column 2 gives
the lower explosive limit (LEL) in percentage by volume of air. Note
that the quantity of solvent will be diminished by the quantity of
solids and nonflammables contained in the finish.
To determine the volume of air in cubic feet necessary to dilute the
vapor from 1 gallon of solvent to 25 percent of the lower explosive
limit, apply the following formula:
Dilution volume required per gallon of solvent=4 (100-LEL) (cubic feet
of vapor per gallon)/ LEL
Using toluene as the solvent.
(1) LEL of toluene from Table D-57.8, column 2, is 1.4 percent.
(2) Cubic feet of vapor per gallon from Table D-57.8, column 1, is
30.4 cubic feet per gallon.
(3) Dilution volume required =
4 (100-1.4) 30.4/ 1.4=8,564 cubic feet.
(4) To convert to cubic feet per minute of required ventilation,
multiply the dilution volume required per gallon of solvent by the
number of gallons of solvent evaporated per minute.
Table D-57.8--Lower Explosive Limit of Some Commonly Used Solvents
------------------------------------------------------------------------
Lower
Cubic feet explosive
per gallon limit in
of vapor percent by
Solvent of liquid volume of
at 70 air at 70
[deg]F [deg]F
(21.11 (21.11
[deg]C). [deg]C)
------------------------------------------------------------------------
Column 1 Column 2
Acetone......................................... 44.0 2.6
Amyl Acetate (iso).............................. 21.6 \1\ 1.0
Amyl Alcohol (n)................................ 29.6 1.2
Amyl Alcohol (iso).............................. 29.6 1.2
Benzene......................................... 36.8 \1\ 1.4
Butyl Acetate (n)............................... 24.8 1.7
Butyl Alcohol (n)............................... 35.2 1.4
Butyl Cellosolve................................ 24.8 1.1
Cellosolve...................................... 33.6 1.8
Cellosolve Acetate.............................. 23.2 1.7
Cyclohexanone................................... 31.2 \1\ 1.1
1,1 Dichloroethylene............................ 42.4 5.9
1,2 Dichloroethylene............................ 42.4 9.7
Ethyl Acetate................................... 32.8 2.5
Ethyl Alcohol................................... 55.2 4.3
Ethyl Lactate................................... 28.0 \1\ 1.5
Methyl Acetate.................................. 40.0 3.1
Methyl Alcohol.................................. 80.8 7.3
Methyl Cellosolve............................... 40.8 2.5
Methyl Ethyl Ketone............................. 36.0 1.8
Methyl n-Propyl Ketone.......................... 30.4 1.5
Naphtha (VM&P) (76[deg]Naphtha)................. 22.4 0.9
Naphtha (100[deg]Flash) Safety Solvent--Stoddard 23.2 1.0
Solvent........................................
Propyl Acetate (n).............................. 27.2 2.8
Propyl Acetate (iso)............................ 28.0 1.1
Propyl Alcohol (n).............................. 44.8 2.1
Propyl Alcohol (iso)............................ 44.0 2.0
Toluene......................................... 30.4 1.4
Turpentine...................................... 20.8 0.8
Xylene (o)...................................... 26.4 1.0
------------------------------------------------------------------------
\1\ At 212 [deg]F (100 [deg]C).
(iii)(A) When an operator is in a booth downstream of the object
being sprayed, an air-supplied respirator or other type of respirator
approved by NIOSH under 42 CFR part 84 for the material being sprayed
should be used by the operator.
(B) Where downdraft booths are provided with doors, such doors shall
be closed when spray painting.
(7) Make-up air. (i) Clean fresh air, free of contamination from
adjacent industrial exhaust systems, chimneys, stacks, or vents, shall
be supplied to a spray booth or room in quantities equal to the volume
of air exhausted through the spray booth.
(ii) Where a spray booth or room receives make-up air through self-
closing doors, dampers, or louvers, they shall be fully open at all
times when the booth or room is in use for spraying. The velocity of air
through such doors,
[[Page 67]]
dampers, or louvers shall not exceed 200 feet per minute. If the fan
characteristics are such that the required air flow through the booth
will be provided, higher velocities through the doors, dampers, or
louvers may be used.
(iii) (A) Where the air supply to a spray booth or room is filtered,
the fan static pressure shall be calculated on the assumption that the
filters are dirty to the extent that they require cleaning or
replacement.
(B) The rating of filters shall be governed by test data supplied by
the manufacturer of the filter. A pressure gage shall be installed to
show the pressure drop across the filters. This gage shall be marked to
show the pressure drop at which the filters require cleaning or
replacement. Filters shall be replaced or cleaned whenever the pressure
drop across them becomes excessive or whenever the air flow through the
face of the booth falls below that specified in Table D-57.7.
(iv) (A) Means for heating make-up air to any spray booth or room,
before or at the time spraying is normally performed, shall be provided
in all places where the outdoor temperature may be expected to remain
below 55 [deg]F. (12.77 [deg]C.) for appreciable periods of time during
the operation of the booth except where adequate and safe means of
radiant heating for all operating personnel affected is provided. The
replacement air during the heating seasons shall be maintained at not
less than 65 [deg]F. (18.33 [deg]C.) at the point of entry into the
spray booth or spray room. When otherwise unheated make-up air would be
at a temperature of more than 10 [deg]F. below room temperature, its
temperature shall be regulated as provided in section 3.6.3 of ANSI
Z9.2-1960.
(B) As an alternative to an air replacement system complying with
the preceding section, general heating of the building in which the
spray room or booth is located may be employed provided that all
occupied parts of the building are maintained at not less than 65
[deg]F. (18.33 [deg]C.) when the exhaust system is in operation or the
general heating system supplemented by other sources of heat may be
employed to meet this requirement.
(C) No means of heating make-up air shall be located in a spray
booth.
(D) Where make-up air is heated by coal or oil, the products of
combustion shall not be allowed to mix with the make-up air, and the
products of combustion shall be conducted outside the building through a
flue terminating at a point remote from all points where make-up air
enters the building.
(E) Where make-up air is heated by gas, and the products of
combustion are not mixed with the make-up air but are conducted through
an independent flue to a point outside the building remote from all
points where make-up air enters the building, it is not necessary to
comply with paragraph (h)(7)(iv)(F) of this section.
(F) Where make-up air to any manually operated spray booth or room
is heated by gas and the products of combustion are allowed to mix with
the supply air, the following precautions must be taken:
(1) The gas must have a distinctive and strong enough odor to warn
workmen in a spray booth or room of its presence if in an unburned state
in the make-up air.
(2) The maximum rate of gas supply to the make-up air heater burners
must not exceed that which would yield in excess of 200 p.p.m. (parts
per million) of carbon monoxide or 2,000 p.p.m. of total combustible
gases in the mixture if the unburned gas upon the occurrence of flame
failure were mixed with all of the make-up air supplied.
(3) A fan must be provided to deliver the mixture of heated air and
products of combustion from the plenum chamber housing the gas burners
to the spray booth or room.
(8) Scope. Spray booths or spray rooms are to be used to enclose or
confine all spray finishing operations covered by this paragraph (h).
This paragraph does not apply to the spraying of the exteriors of
buildings, fixed tanks, or similar structures, nor to small portable
spraying apparatus not used repeatedly in the same location.
(i) Open surface tanks--(1) General. (i) This paragraph applies to
all operations involving the immersion of materials in liquids, or in
the vapors of such liquids, for the purpose of cleaning or altering the
surface or adding to
[[Page 68]]
or imparting a finish thereto or changing the character of the
materials, and their subsequent removal from the liquid or vapor,
draining, and drying. These operations include washing, electroplating,
anodizing, pickling, quenching, dying, dipping, tanning, dressing,
bleaching, degreasing, alkaline cleaning, stripping, rinsing, digesting,
and other similar operations.
(ii) Except where specific construction specifications are
prescribed in this section, hoods, ducts, elbows, fans, blowers, and all
other exhaust system parts, components, and supports thereof shall be so
constructed as to meet conditions of service and to facilitate
maintenance and shall conform in construction to the specifications
contained in American National Standard Fundamentals Governing the
Design and Operation of Local Exhaust Systems, Z9.2-1960.
(2) Classification of open-surface tank operations. (i) Open-surface
tank operations shall be classified into 16 classes, numbered A-1 to D-
4, inclusive.
(ii) Determination of class. Class is determined by two factors,
hazard potential designated by a letter from A to D, inclusive, and rate
of gas, vapor, or mist evolution designated by a number from 1 to 4,
inclusive (for example, B.3).
(iii) Hazard potential is an index, on a scale of from A to D,
inclusive, of the severity of the hazard associated with the substance
contained in the tank because of the toxic, flammable, or explosive
nature of the vapor, gas, or mist produced therefrom. The toxic hazard
is determined from the concentration, measured in parts by volume of a
gas or vapor, per million parts by volume of contaminated air (p.p.m.),
or in milligrams of mist per cubic meter of air (mg./m.\3\), below which
ill effects are unlikely to occur to the exposed worker. The
concentrations shall be those in Sec. 1926.55 or other pertinent
sections of this part.
(iv) The relative fire or explosion hazard is measured in degrees
Fahrenheit in terms of the closed-cup flash point of the substance in
the tank. Detailed information on the prevention of fire hazards in dip
tanks may be found in Dip Tanks Containing Flammable or Combustible
Liquids, NFPA No. 34-1966, National Fire Protection Association. Where
the tank contains a mixture of liquids, other than organic solvents,
whose effects are additive, the hygienic standard of the most toxic
component (for example, the one having the lowest p.p.m. or mg./m.\3\)
shall be used, except where such substance constitutes an
insignificantly small fraction of the mixture. For mixtures of organic
solvents, their combined effect, rather than that of either
individually, shall determine the hazard potential. In the absence of
information to the contrary, the effects shall be considered as
additive. If the sum of the ratios of the airborne concentration of each
contaminant to the toxic concentration of that contaminant exceeds
unity, the toxic concentration shall be considered to have been
exceeded. (See Note A to paragraph (i)(2)(v) of this section.)
(v) Hazard potential shall be determined from Table D-57.9, with the
value indicating greater hazard being used. When the hazardous material
may be either a vapor with a threshold limit value (TLV) in p.p.m. or a
mist with a TLV in mg./m.3, the TLV indicating the greater
hazard shall be used (for example, A takes precedence over B or C; B
over C; C over D).
Note A:
(c1/TLV1)+(c2/
TLV2)+(c3/TLV3)+; . . . (cN/
TLVN)1
Where:
c = Concentration measured at the operation in p.p.m.
Table D-57.9--Determination of Hazard Potential
------------------------------------------------------------------------
Toxicity group
--------------------------------------
Hazard potential Gas or
vapor Mist (mg./ Flash point in
(p.p.m.) m\3\) degrees F. (C.)
------------------------------------------------------------------------
A................................ 0-10 0-0.1 ...............
B................................ 11-100 0.11-1.0 Under 100
(37.77)
C................................ 101-500 1.1-10 100 200 (37.77-
93.33)
D................................ Over 500 Over 10 Over 200
(93.33)
------------------------------------------------------------------------
(vi) Rate of gas, vapor, or mist evolution is a numerical index, on
a scale of from 1 to 4, inclusive, both of the relative capacity of the
tank to produce gas, vapor, or mist and of the
[[Page 69]]
relative energy with which it is projected or carried upwards from the
tank. Rate is evaluated in terms of
(A) The temperature of the liquid in the tank in degrees Fahrenheit;
(B) The number of degrees Fahrenheit that this temperature is below
the boiling point of the liquid in degrees Fahrenheit;
(C) The relative evaporation of the liquid in still air at room
temperature in an arbitrary scale--fast, medium, slow, or nil; and
(D) The extent that the tank gases or produces mist in an arbitrary
scale--high, medium, low, and nil. (See Table D-57.10, Note 2.) Gassing
depends upon electrochemical or mechanical processes, the effects of
which have to be individually evaluated for each installation (see Table
D-57.10, Note 3).
(vii) Rate of evolution shall be determined from Table D-57.10. When
evaporation and gassing yield different rates, the lowest numerical
value shall be used.
Table D-57.10--Determination of Rate of Gas, Vapor, or Mist Evolution \1\
----------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------
Liquid
Rate temperature, Degrees below Relative Gassing \3\
[deg]F. (C.) boiling point evaporation \2\
----------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------
1............................... Over 200 (93.33) 0-20 Fast.............. High.
2............................... 150-200 (65.55- 21-50 Medium............ Medium.
93.33)
3............................... 94-149 (34.44-65) 51-100 Slow.............. Low.
4............................... Under 94 (34.44) Over 100 Nil............... Nil.
----------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------
\1\ In certain classes of equipment, specifically vapor degreasers, an internal condenser or vapor level
thermostat is used to prevent the vapor from leaving the tank during normal operation. In such cases, rate of
vapor evolution from the tank into the workroom is not dependent upon the factors listed in the table, but
rather upon abnormalities of operating procedure, such as carryout of vapors from excessively fast action,
dragout of liquid by entrainment in parts, contamination of solvent by water and other materials, or improper
heat balance. When operating procedure is excellent, effective rate of evolution may be taken as 4. When
operating procedure is average, the effective rate of evolution may be taken as 3. When operation is poor, a
rate of 2 or 1 is indicated, depending upon observed conditions.
\2\ Relative evaporation rate is determined according to the methods described by A. K. Doolittle in Industrial
and Engineering Chemistry, vol. 27, p. 1169, (3) where time for 100-percent evaporation is as follows: Fast: 0-
3 hours; Medium: 3-12 hours; Slow: 12-50 hours; Nil: more than 50 hours.
\3\ Gassing means the formation by chemical or electrochemical action of minute bubbles of gas under the surface
of the liquid in the tank and is generally limited to aqueous solutions.
(3) Ventilation. Where ventilation is used to control potential
exposures to workers as defined in paragraph (i)(2)(iii) of this
section, it shall be adequate to reduce the concentration of the air
contaminant to the degree that a hazard to the worker does not exist.
Methods of ventilation are discussed in American National Standard
Fundamentals Governing the Design and Operation of Local Exhaust
Systems, Z9.2-1960.
(4) Control requirements. (i) Control velocities shall conform to
Table D-57.11 in all cases where the flow of air past the breathing or
working zone of the operator and into the hoods is undisturbed by local
environmental conditions, such as open windows, wall fans, unit heaters,
or moving machinery.
(ii) All tanks exhausted by means of hoods which
(A) Project over the entire tank;
(B) Are fixed in position in such a location that the head of the
workman, in all his normal operating positions while working at the
tank, is in front of all hood openings; and
(C) Are completely enclosed on at least two sides, shall be
considered to be exhausted through an enclosing hood.
(D) The quantity of air in cubic feet per minute necessary to be
exhausted through an enclosing hood shall be not less than the product
of the control velocity times the net area of all openings in the
enclosure through which air can flow into the hood.
[[Page 70]]
Table D-57.11--Control Velocities in Feet Per Minute (f.p.m.) for Undisturbed Locations
----------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------
Enclosing hood Canopy hood \2\
------------------------ Lateral -----------------------
Class One open Two open exhaust Three open Four open
side sides \1\ sides sides
----------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------
B-1 and A-2......................................... 100 150 150 Do not use Do not use
A-3 \2\, B-1, B-2, and C-1.......................... 75 100 100 125 175
A-3, C-2, and D-1 \3\............................... 65 90 75 100 150
B-4 \2\, C-3, and D-2 \3\........................... 50 75 50 75 125
A-4, C-4, D-3 \3\, and D-4 \4\...................... .......... .......... .......... .......... ..........
----------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------
\1\ See Table D-57.12 for computation of ventilation rate.
\2\ Do not use canopy hood for Hazard Potential A processes.
\3\ Where complete control of hot water is desired, design as next highest class.
\4\ General room ventilation required.
(iii) All tanks exhausted by means of hoods which do not project
over the entire tank, and in which the direction of air movement into
the hood or hoods is substantially horizontal, shall be considered to be
laterally exhausted. The quantity of air in cubic feet per minute
necessary to be laterally exhausted per square foot of tank area in
order to maintain the required control velocity shall be determined from
Table D-57.12 for all variations in ratio of tank width (W) to tank
length $(L). The total quantity of air in cubic feet per minute required
to be exhausted per tank shall be not less than the product of the area
of tank surface times the cubic feet per minute per square foot of tank
area, determined from Table D-57.12.
(A) For lateral exhaust hoods over 42 inches (1.06 m) wide, or where
it is desirable to reduce the amount of air removed from the workroom,
air supply slots or orifices shall be provided along the side or the
center of the tank opposite from the exhaust slots. The design of such
systems shall meet the following criteria:
(1) The supply air volume plus the entrained air shall not exceed 50
percent of the exhaust volume.
(2) The velocity of the supply airstream as it reaches the effective
control area of the exhaust slot shall be less than the effective
velocity over the exhaust slot area.
Table D-57.12--Minimum Ventilation Rate in Cubic Feet of Air Per Minute Per Square Foot of Tank Area for Lateral
Exhaust
----------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------
C.f.m. per sq. ft. to maintain required minimum velocities
at following ratios (tank width (W)/tank length (L)).
Required minimum control velocity, f.p.m. (from \1,2\
Table D-57.11) -----------------------------------------------------------
0.0-0.09 0.1-0.24 0.25-0.49 0.5-0.99 1.0-2.0
----------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------
Hood along one side or two parallel sides of tank when one hood is against a wall or baffle. \2\
Also for a manifold along tank centerline. \3\
----------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------
50.................................................. 50 60 75 90 100
75.................................................. 75 90 110 130 150
100................................................. 100 125 150 175 200
150................................................. 150 190 225 260 300
----------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------
Hood along one side or two parallel sides of free standing tank not against wall or baffle.
----------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------
50.................................................. 75 90 100 110 125
75.................................................. 110 130 150 170 190
100................................................. 150 175 200 225 250
150................................................. 225 260 300 340 375
----------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------
\1\ It is not practicable to ventilate across the long dimension of a tank whose ratio W/L exceeds 2.0.
It is undesirable to do so when W/L exceeds 1.0. For circular tanks with lateral exhaust along up to \1/2\ the
circumference, use W/L=1.0; for over one-half the circumference use W/L=0.5.
\2\ Baffle is a vertical plate the same length as the tank, and with the top of the plate as high as the tank is
wide. If the exhaust hood is on the side of a tank against a building wall or close to it, it is perfectly
baffled.
\3\ Use W/2 as tank width in computing when manifold is along centerline, or when hoods are used on two parallel
sides of a tank.
Tank Width (W) means the effective width over which the hood must pull air to operate (for example, where the
hood face is set back from the edge of the tank, this set back must be added in measuring tank width). The
surface area of tanks can frequently be reduced and better control obtained (particularly on conveyorized
systems) by using covers extending from the upper edges of the slots toward the center of the tank.
[[Page 71]]
(3) The vertical height of the receiving exhaust hood, including any
baffle, shall not be less than one-quarter the width of the tank.
(4) The supply airstream shall not be allowed to impinge on
obstructions between it and the exhaust slot in such a manner as to
significantly interfere with the performance of the exhaust hood.
(5) Since most failure of push-pull systems result from excessive
supply air volumes and pressures, methods of measuring and adjusting the
supply air shall be provided. When satisfactory control has been
achieved, the adjustable features of the hood shall be fixed so that
they will not be altered.
(iv) All tanks exhausted by means of hoods which project over the
entire tank, and which do not conform to the definition of enclosing
hoods, shall be considered to be overhead canopy hoods. The quantity of
air in cubic feet per minute necessary to be exhausted through a canopy
hood shall be not less than the product of the control velocity times
the net area of all openings between the bottom edges of the hood and
the top edges of the tank.
(v) The rate of vapor evolution (including steam or products of
combustion) from the process shall be estimated. If the rate of vapor
evolution is equal to or greater than 10 percent of the calculated
exhaust volume required, the exhaust volume shall be increased in equal
amount.
(5) Spray cleaning and degreasing. Wherever spraying or other
mechanical means are used to disperse a liquid above an open-surface
tank, control must be provided for the airborne spray. Such operations
shall be enclosed as completely as possible. The inward air velocity
into the enclosure shall be sufficient to prevent the discharge of spray
into the workroom. Mechanical baffles may be used to help prevent the
discharge of spray. Spray painting operations are covered by paragraph
(h) of this section.
(6) Control means other than ventilation. Tank covers, foams, beads,
chips, or other materials floating on the tank surface so as to confine
gases, mists, or vapors to the area under the cover or to the foam,
bead, or chip layer; or surface tension depressive agents added to the
liquid in the tank to minimize mist formation, or any combination
thereof, may all be used as gas, mist, or vapor control means for open-
surface tank operations, provided that they effectively reduce the
concentrations of hazardous materials in the vicinity of the worker
below the limits set in accordance with paragraph (i)(2) of this
section.
(7) System design. (i) The equipment for exhausting air shall have
sufficient capacity to produce the flow of air required in each of the
hoods and openings of the system.
(ii) The capacity required in paragraph (i)(7)(i) of this section
shall be obtained when the airflow producing equipment is operating
against the following pressure losses, the sum of which is the static
pressure:
(A) Entrance losses into the hood.
(B) Resistance to airflow in branch pipe including bends and
transformations.
(C) Entrance loss into the main pipe.
(D) Resistance to airflow in main pipe including bends and
transformations.
(E) Resistance of mechanical equipment; that is, filters, washers,
condensers, absorbers, etc., plus their entrance and exit losses.
(F) Resistance in outlet duct and discharge stack.
(iii) Two or more operations shall not be connected to the same
exhaust system where either one or the combination of the substances
removed may constitute a fire, explosion, or chemical reaction hazard in
the duct system. Traps or other devices shall be provided to insure that
condensate in ducts does not drain back into any tank.
(iv) The exhaust system, consisting of hoods, ducts, air mover, and
discharge outlet, shall be designed in accordance with American National
Standard Fundamentals Governing the Design and Operation of Local
Exhaust Systems, Z9.2-1960, or the manual, Industrial Ventilation,
published by the American Conference of Governmental Industrial
Hygienists 1970. Airflow and pressure loss data provided by the
manufacturer of any air cleaning device shall be included in the design
calculations.
[[Page 72]]
(8) Operation. (i) The required airflow shall be maintained at all
times during which gas, mist, or vapor is emitted from the tank, and at
all times the tank, the draining, or the drying area is in operation or
use. When the system is first installed, the airflow from each hood
shall be measured by means of a pitot traverse in the exhaust duct and
corrective action taken if the flow is less than that required. When the
proper flow is obtained, the hood static pressure shall be measured and
recorded. At intervals of not more than 3 months operation, or after a
prolonged shutdown period, the hoods and duct system shall be inspected
for evidence of corrosion or damage. In any case where the airflow is
found to be less than required, it shall be increased to the required
value. (Information on airflow and static pressure measurement and
calculations may be found in American National Standard Fundamental
Governing the Design and Operation of Local Exhaust Systems, Z9.2-1960,
or in the manual, Industrial Ventilation, published by the American
Conference of Governmental Industrial Hygienists.)
(ii) The exhaust system shall discharge to the outer air in such a
manner that the possibility of its effluent entering any building is at
a minimum. Recirculation shall only be through a device for contaminant
removal which will prevent the creation of a health hazard in the room
or area to which the air is recirculated.
(iii) A volume of outside air in the range of 90 percent to 110
percent of the exhaust volume shall be provided to each room having
exhaust hoods. The outside air supply shall enter the workroom in such a
manner as not to be detrimental to any exhaust hood. The airflow of the
makeup air system shall be measured on installation. Corrective action
shall be taken when the airflow is below that required. The makeup air
shall be uncontaminated.
(9) Personal protection. (i) All employees working in and around
open-surface tank operations must be instructed as to the hazards of
their respective jobs, and in the personal protection and first aid
procedures applicable to these hazards.
(ii) All persons required to work in such a manner that their feet
may become wet shall be provided with rubber or other impervious boots
or shoes, rubbers, or wooden-soled shoes sufficient to keep feet dry.
(iii) All persons required to handle work wet with a liquid other
than water shall be provided with gloves impervious to such a liquid and
of a length sufficient to prevent entrance of liquid into the tops of
the gloves. The interior of gloves shall be kept free from corrosive or
irritating contaminants.
(iv) All persons required to work in such a manner that their
clothing may become wet shall be provided with such aprons, coats,
jackets, sleeves, or other garments made of rubber, or of other
materials impervious to liquids other than water, as are required to
keep their clothing dry. Aprons shall extend well below the top of boots
to prevent liquid splashing into the boots. Provision of dry, clean,
cotton clothing along with rubber shoes or short boots and an apron
impervious to liquids other than water shall be considered a
satisfactory substitute where small parts are cleaned, plated, or acid
dipped in open tanks and rapid work is required.
(v) Whenever there is a danger of splashing, for example, when
additions are made manually to the tanks, or when acids and chemicals
are removed from the tanks, the employees so engaged shall be required
to wear either tight-fitting chemical goggles or an effective face
shield. See Sec. 1926.102.
(vi) When, during the emergencies specified in paragraph (i)(11)(v)
of this section, employees must be in areas where concentrations of air
contaminants are greater than the limits set by paragraph (i)(2)(iii) of
this section or oxygen concentrations are less than 19.5 percent, they
must use respirators that reduce their exposure to a level below these
limits or that provide adequate oxygen. Such respirators must also be
provided in marked, quickly-accessible storage compartments built for
this purpose when the possibility exists of accidental release of
hazardous concentrations of air contaminants. Respirators must be
approved by NIOSH under 42 CFR part 84, selected
[[Page 73]]
by a competent industrial hygienist or other technically-qualified
source, and used in accordance with 29 CFR 1926.103.
(vii) Near each tank containing a liquid which may burn, irritate,
or otherwise be harmful to the skin if splashed upon the worker's body,
there shall be a supply of clean cold water. The water pipe (carrying a
pressure not exceeding 25 pounds (11.325 kg)) shall be provided with a
quick opening valve and at least 48 inches (1.216 m) of hose not smaller
than three-fourths inch, so that no time may be lost in washing off
liquids from the skin or clothing. Alternatively, deluge showers and eye
flushes shall be provided in cases where harmful chemicals may be
splashed on parts of the body.
(viii) Operators with sores, burns, or other skin lesions requiring
medical treatment shall not be allowed to work at their regular
operations until so authorized by a physician. Any small skin abrasions,
cuts, rash, or open sores which are found or reported shall be treated
by a properly designated person so that chances of exposures to the
chemicals are removed. Workers exposed to chromic acids shall have a
periodic examination made of the nostrils and other parts of the body,
to detect incipient ulceration.
(ix) Sufficient washing facilities, including soap, individual
towels, and hot water, shall be provided for all persons required to use
or handle any liquids which may burn, irritate, or otherwise be harmful
to the skin, on the basis of at least one basin (or its equivalent) with
a hot water faucet for every 10 employees. See Sec. 1926.51(f).
(x) Locker space or equivalent clothing storage facilities shall be
provided to prevent contamination of street clothing.
(xi) First aid facilities specific to the hazards of the operations
conducted shall be readily available.
(10) Special precautions for cyanide. Dikes or other arrangements
shall be provided to prevent the possibility of intermixing of cyanide
and acid in the event of tank rupture.
(11) Inspection, maintenance, and installation. (i) Floors and
platforms around tanks shall be prevented from becoming slippery both by
original type of construction and by frequent flushing. They shall be
firm, sound, and of the design and construction to minimize the
possibility of tripping.
(ii) Before cleaning the interior of any tank, the contents shall be
drained off, and the cleanout doors shall be opened where provided. All
pockets in tanks or pits, where it is possible for hazardous vapors to
collect, shall be ventilated and cleared of such vapors.
(iii) Tanks which have been drained to permit employees to enter for
the purposes of cleaning, inspection, or maintenance may contain
atmospheres which are hazardous to life or health, through the presence
of flammable or toxic air contaminants, or through the absence of
sufficient oxygen. Before employees shall be permitted to enter any such
tank, appropriate tests of the atmosphere shall be made to determine if
the limits set by paragraph (i)(2)(iii) of this section are exceeded, or
if the oxygen concentration is less than 19.5 percent.
(iv) If the tests made in accordance with paragraph (i)(11)(iii) of
this section indicate that the atmosphere in the tank is unsafe, before
any employee is permitted to enter the tank, the tank shall be
ventilated until the hazardous atmosphere is removed, and ventilation
shall be continued so as to prevent the occurrence of a hazardous
atmosphere as long as an employee is in the tank.
(v) If, in emergencies, such as rescue work, it is necessary to
enter a tank which may contain a hazardous atmosphere, suitable
respirators, such as self-contained breathing apparatus; hose mask with
blower, if there is a possibility of oxygen deficiency; or a gas mask,
selected and operated in accordance with paragraph (i)(9)(vi) of this
section, shall be used. If a contaminant in the tank can cause
dermatitis, or be absorbed through the skin, the employee entering the
tank shall also wear protective clothing. At least one trained standby
employee, with suitable respirator, shall be present in the nearest
uncontaminated area. The standby employee must be able to communicate
with the employee in the tank and be able to haul him out of the tank
with a lifeline if necessary.
[[Page 74]]
(vi) Maintenance work requiring welding or open flame, where toxic
metal fumes such as cadmium, chromium, or lead may be evolved, shall be
done only with sufficient local exhaust ventilation to prevent the
creation of a health hazard, or be done with respirators selected and
used in accordance with paragraph (i)(9)(vi) of this section. Welding,
or the use of open flames near any solvent cleaning equipment shall be
permitted only after such equipment has first been thoroughly cleared of
solvents and vapors.
(12) Vapor degreasing tanks. (i) In any vapor degreasing tank
equipped with a condenser or vapor level thermostat, the condenser or
thermostat shall keep the level of vapors below the top edge of the tank
by a distance at least equal to one-half the tank width, or at least 36
inches (0.912 m), whichever is shorter.
(ii) Where gas is used as a fuel for heating vapor degreasing tanks,
the combustion chamber shall be of tight construction, except for such
openings as the exhaust flue, and those that are necessary for supplying
air for combustion. Flues shall be of corrosion-resistant construction
and shall extend to the outer air. If mechanical exhaust is used on this
flue, a draft diverter shall be used. Special precautions must be taken
to prevent solvent fumes from entering the combustion air of this or any
other heater when chlorinated or fluorinated hydrocarbon solvents (for
example, trichloroethylene, Freon) are used.
(iii) Heating elements shall be so designed and maintained that
their surface temperature will not cause the solvent or mixture to
decompose, break down, or be converted into an excessive quantity of
vapor.
(iv) Tanks or machines of more than 4 square feet (0.368 m\2\) of
vapor area, used for solvent cleaning or vapor degreasing, shall be
equipped with suitable cleanout or sludge doors located near the bottom
of each tank or still. These doors shall be so designed and gasketed
that there will be no leakage of solvent when they are closed.
(13) Scope. (i) This paragraph (i) applies to all operations
involving the immersion of materials in liquids, or in the vapors of
such liquids, for the purpose of cleaning or altering their surfaces, or
adding or imparting a finish thereto, or changing the character of the
materials, and their subsequent removal from the liquids or vapors,
draining, and drying. Such operations include washing, electroplating,
anodizing, pickling, quenching, dyeing, dipping, tanning, dressing,
bleaching, degreasing, alkaline cleaning, stripping, rinsing, digesting,
and other similar operations, but do not include molten materials
handling operations, or surface coating operations.
(ii) Molten materials handling operations means all operations,
other than welding, burning, and soldering operations, involving the
use, melting, smelting, or pouring of metals, alloys, salts, or other
similar substances in the molten state. Such operations also include
heat treating baths, descaling baths, die casting stereotyping,
galvanizing, tinning, and similar operations.
(iii) Surface coating operations means all operations involving the
application of protective, decorative, adhesive, or strengthening
coating or impregnation to one or more surfaces, or into the interstices
of any object or material, by means of spraying, spreading, flowing,
brushing, roll coating, pouring, cementing, or similar means; and any
subsequent draining or drying operations, excluding open-tank
operations.
[44 FR 8577, Feb. 9, 1979; 44 FR 20940, Apr. 6, 1979, as amended at 58
FR 35099, June 30, 1993; 61 FR 9250, Mar. 3, 1996; 63 FR 1295, Jan. 8,
1998]
Sec. 1926.58 [Reserved]
Sec. 1926.59 Hazard communication.
Note: The requirements applicable to construction work under this
section are identical to those set forth at Sec. 1910.1200 of this
chapter.
[61 FR 31431, June 20, 1996]
Sec. 1926.60 Methylenedianiline.
(a) Scope and application. (1) This section applies to all
construction work as defined in 29 CFR 1910.12(b), in which there is
exposure to MDA, including but not limited to the following:
[[Page 75]]
(i) Construction, alteration, repair, maintenance, or renovation of
structures, substrates, or portions thereof, that contain MDA;
(ii) Installation or the finishing of surfaces with products
containing MDA;
(iii) MDA spill/emergency cleanup at construction sites; and
(iv) Transportation, disposal, storage, or containment of MDA or
products containing MDA on the site or location at which construction
activities are performed.
(2) Except as provided in paragraphs (a)(7) and (f)(5) of this
section, this section does not apply to the processing, use, and
handling of products containing MDA where initial monitoring indicates
that the product is not capable of releasing MDA in excess of the action
level under the expected conditions of processing, use, and handling
which will cause the greatest possible release; and where no ``dermal
exposure to MDA'' can occur.
(3) Except as provided in paragraph (a)(7) of this section, this
section does not apply to the processing, use, and handling of products
containing MDA where objective data are reasonably relied upon which
demonstrate the product is not capable of releasing MDA under the
expected conditions of processing, use, and handling which will cause
the greatest possible release; and where no ``dermal exposure to MDA''
can occur.
(4) Except as provided in paragraph (a)(7) of this section, this
section does not apply to the storage, transportation, distribution or
sale of MDA in intact containers sealed in such a manner as to contain
the MDA dusts, vapors, or liquids, except for the provisions of 29 CFR
1910.1200 and paragraph (e) of this section.
(5) Except as provided in paragraph (a)(7) of this section, this
section does not apply to materials in any form which contain less than
0.1% MDA by weight or volume.
(6) Except as provided in paragraph (a)(7) of this section, this
section does not apply to ``finished articles containing MDA.''
(7) Where products containing MDA are exempted under paragraphs
(a)(2) through (a)(6) of this section, the employer shall maintain
records of the initial monitoring results or objective data supporting
that exemption and the basis for the employer's reliance on the data, as
provided in the recordkeeping provision of paragraph (o) of this
section.
(b) Definitions. For the purpose of this section, the following
definitions shall apply:
Action level means a concentration of airborne MDA of 5 ppb as an
eight (8)-hour time-weighted average.
Assistant Secretary means the Assistant Secretary of Labor for
Occupational Safety and Health, U.S. Department of Labor, or designee.
Authorized person means any person specifically authorized by the
employer whose duties require the person to enter a regulated area, or
any person entering such an area as a designated representative of
employees for the purpose of exercising the right to observe monitoring
and measuring procedures under paragraph (p) of this section, or any
other person authorized by the Act or regulations issued under the Act.
Container means any barrel, bottle, can, cylinder, drum, reaction
vessel, storage tank, commercial packaging or the like, but does not
include piping systems.
Decontamination area means an area outside of but as near as
practical to the regulated area, consisting of an equipment storage
area, wash area, and clean change area, which is used for the
decontamination of workers, materials, and equipment contaminated with
MDA.
Dermal exposure to MDA occurs where employees are engaged in the
handling, application or use of mixtures or materials containing MDA,
with any of the following non-airborne forms of MDA:
(i) Liquid, powdered, granular, or flaked mixtures containing MDA in
concentrations greater than 0.1% by weight or volume; and
(ii) Materials other than ``finished articles'' containing MDA in
concentrations greater than 0.1% by weight or volume.
Director means the Director of the National Institute for
Occupational Safety and Health, U.S. Department of
[[Page 76]]
Health and Human Services, or designee.
Emergency means any occurrence such as, but not limited to,
equipment failure, rupture of containers, or failure of control
equipment which results in an unexpected and potentially hazardous
release of MDA.
Employee exposure means exposure to MDA which would occur if the
employee were not using respirators or protective work clothing and
equipment.
Finished article containing MDA is defined as a manufactured item:
(i) Which is formed to a specific shape or design during
manufacture;
(ii) Which has end use function(s) dependent in whole or part upon
its shape or design during end use; and
(iii) Where applicable, is an item which is fully cured by virtue of
having been subjected to the conditions (temperature, time) necessary to
complete the desired chemical reaction.
Historical monitoring data means monitoring data for construction
jobs that meet the following conditions:
(i) The data upon which judgments are based are scientifically sound
and were collected using methods that are sufficiently accurate and
precise;
(ii) The processes and work practices that were in use when the
historical monitoring data were obtained are essentially the same as
those to be used during the job for which initial monitoring will not be
performed;
(iii) The characteristics of the MDA-containing material being
handled when the historical monitoring data were obtained are the same
as those on the job for which initial monitoring will not be performed;
(iv) Environmental conditions prevailing when the historical
monitoring data were obtained are the same as those on the job for which
initial monitoring will not be performed; and
(v) Other data relevant to the operations, materials, processing, or
employee exposures covered by the exception are substantially similar.
The data must be scientifically sound, the characteristics of the MDA
containing material must be similar and the environmental conditions
comparable.
4,4'Methylenedianiline or MDA means the chemical; 4,4'-
diaminodiphenylmethane, Chemical Abstract Service Registry number 101-
77-9, in the form of a vapor, liquid, or solid. The definition also
includes the salts of MDA.
Regulated Areas means areas where airborne concentrations of MDA
exceed or can reasonably be expected to exceed, the permissible exposure
limits, or where ``dermal exposure to MDA'' can occur.
STEL means short term exposure limit as determined by any 15-minute
sample period.
(c) Permissible exposure limits. The employer shall assure that no
employee is exposed to an airborne concentration of MDA in excess of ten
parts per billion (10 ppb) as an 8-hour time-weighted average and a STEL
of one hundred parts per billion (100 ppb).
(d) Communication among employers. On multi-employer worksites, an
employer performing work involving the application of MDA or materials
containing MDA for which establishment of one or more regulated areas is
required shall inform other employers on the site of the nature of the
employer's work with MDA and of the existence of, and requirements
pertaining to, regulated areas.
(e) Emergency situations--(1) Written plan. (i) A written plan for
emergency situations shall be developed for each construction operation
where there is a possibility of an emergency. The plan shall include
procedures where the employer identifies emergency escape routes for his
employees at each construction site before the construction operation
begins. Appropriate portions of the plan shall be implemented in the
event of an emergency.
(ii) The plan shall specifically provide that employees engaged in
correcting emergency conditions shall be equipped with the appropriate
personal protective equipment and clothing as required in paragraphs (i)
and (j) of this section until the emergency is abated.
(iii) The plan shall specifically include provisions for alerting
and evacuating affected employees as well as the applicable elements
prescribed in 29 CFR 1910.38 and 29 CFR 1910.39, ``Emergency action
plans'' and ``Fire prevention plans,'' respectively.
[[Page 77]]
(2) Alerting employees. Where there is the possibility of employee
exposure to MDA due to an emergency, means shall be developed to
promptly alert employees who have the potential to be directly exposed.
Affected employees not engaged in correcting emergency conditions shall
be evacuated immediately in the event that an emergency occurs. Means
shall also be developed for alerting other employees who may be exposed
as a result of the emergency.
(f) Exposure monitoring--(1) General. (i) Determinations of employee
exposure shall be made from breathing zone air samples that are
representative of each employee's exposure to airborne MDA over an eight
(8) hour period. Determination of employee exposure to the STEL shall be
made from breathing zone air samples collected over a 15 minute sampling
period.
(ii) Representative employee exposure shall be determined on the
basis of one or more samples representing full shift exposure for each
shift for each job classification in each work area where exposure to
MDA may occur.
(iii) Where the employer can document that exposure levels are
equivalent for similar operations in different work shifts, the employer
shall only be required to determine representative employee exposure for
that operation during one shift.
(2) Initial monitoring. Each employer who has a workplace or work
operation covered by this standard shall perform initial monitoring to
determine accurately the airborne concentrations of MDA to which
employees may be exposed unless:
(i) The employer can demonstrate, on the basis of objective data,
that the MDA-containing product or material being handled cannot cause
exposures above the standard's action level, even under worst-case
release conditions; or
(ii) The employer has historical monitoring or other data
demonstrating that exposures on a particular job will be below the
action level.
(3) Periodic monitoring and monitoring frequency. (i) If the
monitoring required by paragraph (f)(2) of this section reveals employee
exposure at or above the action level, but at or below the PELs, the
employer shall repeat such monitoring for each such employee at least
every six (6) months.
(ii) If the monitoring required by paragraph (f)(2) of this section
reveals employee exposure above the PELs, the employer shall repeat such
monitoring for each such employee at least every three (3) months.
(iii) Employers who are conducting MDA operations within a regulated
area can forego periodic monitoring if the employees are all wearing
supplied-air respirators while working in the regulated area.
(iv) The employer may alter the monitoring schedule from every three
months to every six months for any employee for whom two consecutive
measurements taken at least 7 days apart indicate that the employee
exposure has decreased to below the PELs but above the action level.
(4) Termination of monitoring. (i) If the initial monitoring
required by paragraph (f)(2) of this section reveals employee exposure
to be below the action level, the employer may discontinue the
monitoring for that employee, except as otherwise required by paragraph
(f)(5) of this section.
(ii) If the periodic monitoring required by paragraph (f)(3) of this
section reveals that employee exposures, as indicated by at least two
consecutive measurements taken at least 7 days apart, are below the
action level the employer may discontinue the monitoring for that
employee, except as otherwise required by paragraph (f)(5) of this
section.
(5) Additional monitoring. The employer shall institute the exposure
monitoring required under paragraphs (f)(2) and (f)(3) of this section
when there has been a change in production process, chemicals present,
control equipment, personnel, or work practices which may result in new
or additional exposures to MDA, or when the employer has any reason to
suspect a change which may result in new or additional exposures.
(6) Accuracy of monitoring. Monitoring shall be accurate, to a
confidence level of 95 percent, to within plus or minus 25 percent for
airborne concentrations of MDA.
(7) Employee notification of monitoring results. (i) The employer
must, as soon
[[Page 78]]
as possible but no later than 5 working days after the receipt of the
results of any monitoring performed under this section, notify each
affected employee of these results either individually in writing or by
posting the results in an appropriate location that is accessible to
employees.
(ii) The written notification required by paragraph (f)(7)(i) of
this section shall contain the corrective action being taken by the
employer or any other protective measures which have been implemented to
reduce the employee exposure to or below the PELs, wherever the PELs are
exceeded.
(8) Visual monitoring. The employer shall make routine inspections
of employee hands, face and forearms potentially exposed to MDA. Other
potential dermal exposures reported by the employee must be referred to
the appropriate medical personnel for observation. If the employer
determines that the employee has been exposed to MDA the employer shall:
(i) Determine the source of exposure;
(ii) Implement protective measures to correct the hazard; and
(iii) Maintain records of the corrective actions in accordance with
paragraph (o) of this section.
(g) Regulated areas--(1) Establishment--(i) Airborne exposures. The
employer shall establish regulated areas where airborne concentrations
of MDA exceed or can reasonably be expected to exceed, the permissible
exposure limits.
(ii) Dermal exposures. Where employees are subject to ``dermal
exposure to MDA'' the employer shall establish those work areas as
regulated areas.
(2) Demarcation. Regulated areas shall be demarcated from the rest
of the workplace in a manner that minimizes the number of persons
potentially exposed.
(3) Access. Access to regulated areas shall be limited to authorized
persons.
(4) Personal protective equipment and clothing. Each person entering
a regulated area shall be supplied with, and required to use, the
appropriate personal protective clothing and equipment in accordance
with paragraphs (i) and (j) of this section.
(5) Prohibited activities. The employer shall ensure that employees
do not eat, drink, smoke, chew tobacco or gum, or apply cosmetics in
regulated areas.
(h) Methods of compliance--(1) Engineering controls and work
practices and respirators. (i) The employer shall use one or any
combination of the following control methods to achieve compliance with
the permissible exposure limits prescribed by paragraph (c) of this
section:
(A) Local exhaust ventilation equipped with HEPA filter dust
collection systems;
(B) General ventilation systems;
(C) Use of workpractices; or
(D) Other engineering controls such as isolation and enclosure that
the Assistant Secretary can show to be feasible.
(ii) Wherever the feasible engineering controls and work practices
``which can be instituted are not sufficient to reduce employee exposure
to or below the PELs, the employer shall use them to reduce employee
exposure to the lowest levels achievable by these controls and shall
supplement them by the use of respiratory protective devices which
comply with the requirements of paragraph (i) of this section.
(2) Special Provisions. For workers engaged in spray application
methods, respiratory protection must be used in addition to feasible
engineering controls and work practices to reduce employee exposure to
or below the PELs.
(3) Prohibitions. Compressed air shall not be used to remove MDA,
unless the compressed air is used in conjunction with an enclosed
ventilation system designed to capture the dust cloud created by the
compressed air.
(4) Employee rotation. The employer shall not use employee rotation
as a means of compliance with the exposure limits prescribed in
paragraph (c) of this section.
(5) Compliance program. (i) The employer shall establish and
implement a written program to reduce employee exposure to or below the
PELs by means of engineering and work practice controls, as required by
paragraph (h)(1) of this section, and by use of respiratory protection
where permitted under this section.
[[Page 79]]
(ii) Upon request this written program shall be furnished for
examination and copying to the Assistant Secretary, the Director,
affected employees and designated employee representatives. The employer
shall review and, as necessary, update such plans at least once every 12
months to make certain they reflect the current status of the program.
(i) Respiratory protection--(1) General. For employees who use
respirators required by this section, the employer must provide each
employee an appropriate respirator that complies with the requirements
of this paragraph. Respirators must be used during:
(i) Periods necessary to install or implement feasible engineering
and work-practice controls.
(ii) Work operations, such as maintenance and repair activities and
spray-application processes, for which engineering and work-practice
controls are not feasible.
(iii) Work operations for which feasible engineering and work-
practice controls are not yet sufficient to reduce employee exposure to
or below the PELs.
(iv) Emergencies.
(2) Respirator program. The employer must implement a respiratory
protection program in accordance with Sec. 1910.134 (b) through (d)
(except (d)(1)(iii)), and (f) through (m), which covers each employee
required by this section to use a respirator.
(3) Respirator selection. (i) Employers must:
(A) Select, and provide to employees, the appropriate respirators
specified in paragraph (d)(3)(i)(A) of 29 CFR 1910.134.
(B) Provide HEPA filters for powered and non-powered air-purifying
respirators.
(C) For escape, provide employees with one of the following
respirator options: Any self-contained breathing apparatus with a full
facepiece or hood operated in the positive-pressure or continuous-flow
mode; or a full facepiece air-purifying respirator.
(D) Provide a combination HEPA filter and organic vapor canister or
cartridge with air-purifying respirators when MDA is in liquid form or
used as part of a process requiring heat.
(ii) An employee who cannot use a negative-pressure respirator must
be given the option of using a positive-pressure respirator, or a
supplied-air respirator operated in the continuous-flow or pressure-
demand mode.
(j) Protective work clothing and equipment--(1) Provision and use.
Where employees are subject to dermal exposure to MDA, where liquids
containing MDA can be splashed into the eyes, or where airborne
concentrations of MDA are in excess of the PEL, the employer shall
provide, at no cost to the employee, and ensure that the employee uses,
appropriate protective work clothing and equipment which prevent contact
with MDA such as, but not limited to:
(i) Aprons, coveralls or other full-body work clothing;
(ii) Gloves, head coverings, and foot coverings; and
(iii) Face shields, chemical goggles; or
(iv) Other appropriate protective equipment which comply with 29 CFR
1910.133.
(2) Removal and storage. (i) The employer shall ensure that, at the
end of their work shift, employees remove MDA-contaminated protective
work clothing and equipment that is not routinely removed throughout the
day in change areas provided in accordance with the provisions in
paragraph (k) of this section.
(ii) The employer shall ensure that, during their work shift,
employees remove all other MDA-contaminated protective work clothing or
equipment before leaving a regulated area.
(iii) The employer shall ensure that no employee takes MDA-
contaminated work clothing or equipment out of the decontamination
areas, except those employees authorized to do so for the purpose of
laundering, maintenance, or disposal.
(iv) MDA-contaminated work clothing or equipment shall be placed and
stored and transported in sealed, impermeable bags, or other closed
impermeable containers.
(v) Containers of MDA-contaminated protective work clothing or
equipment which are to be taken out of decontamination areas or the
workplace for cleaning, maintenance, or disposal,
[[Page 80]]
shall bear labels warning of the hazards of MDA.
(3) Cleaning and replacement. (i) The employer shall provide the
employee with clean protective clothing and equipment. The employer
shall ensure that protective work clothing or equipment required by this
paragraph is cleaned, laundered, repaired, or replaced at intervals
appropriate to maintain its effectiveness.
(ii) The employer shall prohibit the removal of MDA from protective
work clothing or equipment by blowing, shaking, or any methods which
allow MDA to re-enter the workplace.
(iii) The employer shall ensure that laundering of MDA-contaminated
clothing shall be done so as to prevent the release of MDA in the
workplace.
(iv) Any employer who gives MDA-contaminated clothing to another
person for laundering shall inform such person of the requirement to
prevent the release of MDA.
(v) The employer shall inform any person who launders or cleans
protective clothing or equipment contaminated with MDA of the
potentially harmful effects of exposure.
(4) Visual Examination. (i) The employer shall ensure that
employees' work clothing is examined periodically for rips or tears that
may occur during performance of work.
(ii) When rips or tears are detected, the protective equipment or
clothing shall be repaired and replaced immediately.
(k) Hygiene facilities and practices--(1) General. (i) The employer
shall provide decontamination areas for employees required to work in
regulated areas or required by paragraph (j)(1) of this section to wear
protective clothing. Exception: In lieu of the decontamination area
requirement specified in paragraph (k)(1)(i) of this section, the
employer may permit employees engaged in small scale, short duration
operations, to clean their protective clothing or dispose of the
protective clothing before such employees leave the area where the work
was performed.
(ii) Change areas. The employer shall ensure that change areas are
equipped with separate storage facilities for protective clothing and
street clothing, in accordance with 29 CFR 1910.141(e).
(iii) Equipment area. The equipment area shall be supplied with
impermeable, labeled bags and containers for the containment and
disposal of contaminated protective clothing and equipment.
(2) Shower area. (i) Where feasible, shower facilities shall be
provided which comply with 29 CFR 1910.141(d)(3) wherever the
possibility of employee exposure to airborne levels of MDA in excess of
the permissible exposure limit exists.
(ii) Where dermal exposure to MDA occurs, the employer shall ensure
that materials spilled or deposited on the skin are removed as soon as
possible by methods which do not facilitate the dermal absorption of
MDA.
(3) Lunch Areas. (i) Whenever food or beverages are consumed at the
worksite and employees are exposed to MDA the employer shall provide
clean lunch areas were MDA levels are below the action level and where
no dermal exposure to MDA can occur.
(ii) The employer shall ensure that employees wash their hands and
faces with soap and water prior to eating, drinking, smoking, or
applying cosmetics.
(iii) The employer shall ensure that employees do not enter lunch
facilities with contaminated protective work clothing or equipment.
(l) Communication of hazards to employees--(1) Hazard communication.
The employer shall include Methylenedianiline (MDA) in the program
established to comply with the Hazard Communication Standard (HCS)
(Sec. 1910.1200). The employer shall ensure that each employee has
access to labels on containers of MDA and safety data sheets, and is
trained in accordance with the provisions of HCS and paragraph (l)(3) of
this section. The employer shall ensure that at least the following
hazards are addressed: Cancer; liver effects; and skin sensitization.
(2) Signs and labels-- (i) Signs. (A) The employer shall post and
maintain legible signs demarcating regulated areas and entrances or
access-ways to regulated areas that bear the following legend:
DANGER
MDA
[[Page 81]]
MAY CAUSE CANCER
CAUSES DAMAGE TO THE LIVER
RESPIRATORY PROTECTION AND PROTECTIVE CLOTHING MAY BE REQUIRED IN THIS
AREA
AUTHORIZED PERSONNEL ONLY
(B) Prior to June 1, 2016, employers may use the following legend in
lieu of that specified in paragraph (l)(2)(i)(A) of this section:
DANGER
MDA
MAY CAUSE CANCER
LIVER TOXIN
AUTHORIZED PERSONNEL ONLY
RESPIRATORS AND PROTECTIVE CLOTHING MAY BE REQUIRED TO BE WORN IN THIS
AREA
(ii) Labels. (A) The employer shall ensure that labels or other
appropriate forms of warning are provided for containers of MDA within
the workplace. The labels shall comply with the requirements of Sec.
1910.1200(f) and shall include at least the following information for
pure MDA and mixtures containing MDA:
DANGER
CONTAINS MDA
MAY CAUSE CANCER
CAUSES DAMAGE TO THE LIVER
(B) Prior to June 1, 2015, employers may include the following
information workplace labels in lieu of the labeling requirements in
paragraph (l)(2)(ii)(A) of this section:
(1) For Pure MDA:
DANGER
CONTAINS MDA
MAY CAUSE CANCER
LIVER TOXIN
(2) For mixtures containing MDA:
DANGER
CONTAINS MDA
CONTAINS MATERIALS WHICH MAY CAUSE CANCER
LIVER TOXIN
(3) Information and training. (i) The employer shall provide
employees with information and training on MDA, in accordance with 29
CFR 1910.1200(h), at the time of initial assignment and at least
annually thereafter.
(ii) In addition to the information required under 29 CFR 1910.1200,
the employer shall:
(A) Provide an explanation of the contents of this section,
including appendices A and B of this section, and indicate to employees
where a copy of the standard is available;
(B) Describe the medical surveillance program required under
paragraph (n) of this section, and explain the information contained in
appendix C of this section; and
(C) Describe the medical removal provision required under paragraph
(n) of this section.
(4) Access to training materials. (i) The employer shall make
readily available to all affected employees, without cost, all written
materials relating to the employee training program, including a copy of
this regulation.
(ii) The employer shall provide to the Assistant Secretary and the
Director, upon request, all information and training materials relating
to the employee information and training program.
(m) Housekeeping. (1) All surfaces shall be maintained as free as
practicable of visible accumulations of MDA.
(2) The employer shall institute a program for detecting MDA leaks,
spills, and discharges, including regular visual inspections of
operations involving liquid or solid MDA.
(3) All leaks shall be repaired and liquid or dust spills cleaned up
promptly.
(4) Surfaces contaminated with MDA may not be cleaned by the use of
compressed air.
(5) Shoveling, dry sweeping, and other methods of dry clean-up of
MDA may be used where HEPA filtered vacuuming and/or wet cleaning are
not feasible or practical.
(6) Waste, scrap, debris, bags, containers, equipment, and clothing
contaminated with MDA shall be collected and disposed of in a manner to
prevent the re-entry of MDA into the workplace.
(n) Medical surveillance--(1) General. (i) The employer shall make
available a medical surveillance program for employees exposed to MDA
under the following circumstances:
(A) Employees exposed at or above the action level for 30 or more
days per year;
(B) Employees who are subject to dermal exposure to MDA for 15 or
more days per year;
[[Page 82]]
(C) Employees who have been exposed in an emergency situation;
(D) Employees whom the employer, based on results from compliance
with paragraph (f)(8) of this section, has reason to believe are being
dermally exposed; and
(E) Employees who show signs or symptoms of MDA exposure.
(ii) The employer shall ensure that all medical examinations and
procedures are performed by or under the supervision of a licensed
physician at a reasonable time and place, and provided without cost to
the employee.
(2) Initial examinations. (i) Within 150 days of the effective date
of this standard, or before the time of initial assignment, the employer
shall provide each employee covered by paragraph (n)(1)(i) of this
section with a medical examination including the following elements:
(A) A detailed history which includes:
(1) Past work exposure to MDA or any other toxic substances;
(2) A history of drugs, alcohol, tobacco, and medication routinely
taken (duration and quantity); and
(3) A history of dermatitis, chemical skin sensitization, or
previous hepatic disease.
(B) A physical examination which includes all routine physical
examination parameters, skin examination, and examination for signs of
liver disease.
(C) Laboratory tests including:
(1) Liver function tests and (2) Urinalysis.
(D) Additional tests as necessary in the opinion of the physician.
(ii) No initial medical examination is required if adequate records
show that the employee has been examined in accordance with the
requirements of this section within the previous six months prior to the
effective date of this standard or prior to the date of initial
assignment.
(3) Periodic examinations. (i) The employer shall provide each
employee covered by this section with a medical examination at least
annually following the initial examination. These periodic examinations
shall include at least the following elements:
(A) A brief history regarding any new exposure to potential liver
toxins, changes in drug, tobacco, and alcohol intake, and the appearance
of physical signs relating to the liver, and the skin;
(B) The appropriate tests and examinations including liver function
tests and skin examinations; and
(C) Appropriate additional tests or examinations as deemed necessary
by the physician.
(ii) If in the physician's opinion the results of liver function
tests indicate an abnormality, the employee shall be removed from
further MDA exposure in accordance with paragraph (n)(9) of this
section. Repeat liver function tests shall be conducted on advice of the
physician.
(4) Emergency examinations. If the employer determines that the
employee has been exposed to a potentially hazardous amount of MDA in an
emergency situation under paragraph (e) of this section, the employer
shall provide medical examinations in accordance with paragraphs (n)(3)
(i) and (ii) of this section. If the results of liver function testing
indicate an abnormality, the employee shall be removed in accordance
with paragraph (n)(9) of this section. Repeat liver function tests shall
be conducted on the advice of the physician. If the results of the tests
are normal, tests must be repeated two to three weeks from the initial
testing. If the results of the second set of tests are normal and on the
advice of the physician, no additional testing is required.
(5) Additional examinations. Where the employee develops signs and
symptoms associated with exposure to MDA, the employer shall provide the
employee with an additional medical examination including liver function
tests. Repeat liver function tests shall be conducted on the advice of
the physician. If the results of the tests are normal, tests must be
repeated two to three weeks from the initial testing. If the results of
the second set of tests are normal and on the advice of the physician,
no additional testing is required.
(6) Multiple physician review mechanism. (i) If the employer selects
the initial physician who conducts any medical examination or
consultation provided to an employee under this section, and the
employee has signs or symptoms of occupational exposure to
[[Page 83]]
MDA (which could include an abnormal liver function test), and the
employee disagrees with the opinion of the examining physician, and this
opinion could affect the employee's job status, the employee may
designate an appropriate and mutually acceptable second physician:
(A) To review any findings, determinations or recommendations of the
initial physician; and
(B) To conduct such examinations, consultations, and laboratory
tests as the second physician deems necessary to facilitate this review.
(ii) The employer shall promptly notify an employee of the right to
seek a second medical opinion after each occasion that an initial
physician conducts a medical examination or consultation pursuant to
this section. The employer may condition its participation in, and
payment for, the multiple physician review mechanism upon the employee
doing the following within fifteen (15) days after receipt of the
foregoing notification, or receipt of the initial physician's written
opinion, whichever is later:
(A) The employee informing the employer that he or she intends to
seek a second medical opinion, and
(B) The employee initiating steps to make an appointment with a
second physician.
(iii) If the findings, determinations, or recommendations of the
second physician differ from those of the initial physician, then the
employer and the employee shall assure that efforts are made for the two
physicians to resolve any disagreement.
(iv) If the two physicians have been unable to quickly resolve their
disagreement, then the employer and the employee through their
respective physicians shall designate a third physician:
(A) To review any findings, determinations, or recommendations of
the prior physicians; and
(B) To conduct such examinations, consultations, laboratory tests,
and discussions with the prior physicians as the third physician deems
necessary to resolve the disagreement of the prior physicians.
(v) The employer shall act consistent with the findings,
determinations, and recommendations of the second physician, unless the
employer and the employee reach a mutually acceptable agreement.
(7) Information provided to the examining physician. (i) The
employer shall provide the following information to the examining
physician:
(A) A copy of this regulation and its appendices;
(B) A description of the affected employee's duties as they relate
to the employee's potential exposure to MDA;
(C) The employee's current actual or representative MDA exposure
level;
(D) A description of any personal protective equipment used or to be
used; and
(E) Information from previous employment related medical
examinations of the affected employee.
(ii) The employer shall provide the foregoing information to a
second physician under this section upon request either by the second
physician, or by the employee.
(8) Physician's written opinion. (i) For each examination under this
section, the employer shall obtain, and provide the employee with a copy
of, the examining physician's written opinion within 15 days of its
receipt. The written opinion shall include the following:
(A) The occupationally pertinent results of the medical examination
and tests;
(B) The physician's opinion concerning whether the employee has any
detected medical conditions which would place the employee at increased
risk of material impairment of health from exposure to MDA;
(C) The physician's recommended limitations upon the employee's
exposure to MDA or upon the employee's use of protective clothing or
equipment and respirators; and
(D) A statement that the employee has been informed by the physician
of the results of the medical examination and any medical conditions
resulting from MDA exposure which require further explanation or
treatment.
(ii) The written opinion obtained by the employer shall not reveal
specific findings or diagnoses unrelated to occupational exposures.
(9) Medical removal--(i) Temporary medical removal of an employee--
(A)
[[Page 84]]
Temporary removal resulting from occupational exposure. The employee
shall be removed from work environments in which exposure to MDA is at
or above the action level or where dermal exposure to MDA may occur,
following an initial examination (paragraph (n)(2) of this section),
periodic examinations (paragraph (n)(3) of this section), an emergency
situation (paragraph (n)(4) of this section), or an additional
examination (paragraph (n)(5) of this section) in the following
circumstances:
(1) When the employee exhibits signs and/or symptoms indicative of
acute exposure to MDA; or
(2) When the examining physician determines that an employee's
abnormal liver function tests are not associated with MDA exposure but
that the abnormalities may be exacerbated as a result of occupational
exposure to MDA.
(B) Temporary removal due to a final medical determination. (1) The
employer shall remove an employee from work having an exposure to MDA at
or above the action level or where the potential for dermal exposure
exists on each occasion that a final medical determination results in a
medical finding, determination, or opinion that the employee has a
detected medical condition which places the employee at increased risk
of material impairment to health from exposure to MDA.
(2) For the purposes of this section, the phrase ``final medical
determination'' shall mean the outcome of the physician review mechanism
used pursuant to the medical surveillance provisions of this section.
(3) Where a final medical determination results in any recommended
special protective measures for an employee, or limitations on an
employee's exposure to MDA, the employer shall implement and act
consistent with the recommendation.
(ii) Return of the employee to former job status. (A) The employer
shall return an employee to his or her former job status:
(1) When the employee no longer shows signs or symptoms of exposure
to MDA, or upon the advice of the physician.
(2) When a subsequent final medical determination results in a
medical finding, determination, or opinion that the employee no longer
has a detected medical condition which places the employee at increased
risk of material impairment to health from exposure to MDA.
(B) For the purposes of this section, the requirement that an
employer return an employee to his or her former job status is not
intended to expand upon or restrict any rights an employee has or would
have had, absent temporary medical removal, to a specific job
classification or position under the terms of a collective bargaining
agreement.
(iii) Removal of other employee special protective measure or
limitations. The employer shall remove any limitations placed on an
employee or end any special protective measures provided to an employee
pursuant to a final medical determination when a subsequent final
medical determination indicates that the limitations or special
protective measures are no longer necessary.
(iv) Employer options pending a final medical determination. Where
the physician review mechanism used pursuant to the medical surveillance
provisions of this section, has not yet resulted in a final medical
determination with respect to an employee, the employer shall act as
follows:
(A) Removal. The employer may remove the employee from exposure to
MDA, provide special protective measures to the employee, or place
limitations upon the employee, consistent with the medical findings,
determinations, or recommendations of the physician who has reviewed the
employee's health status.
(B) Return. The employer may return the employee to his or her
former job status, and end any special protective measures provided to
the employee, consistent with the medical findings, determinations, or
recommendations of any of the physicians who have reviewed the
employee's health status, with two exceptions:
(1) If the initial removal, special protection, or limitation of the
employee resulted from a final medical determination which differed from
the findings, determinations, or recommendations of the initial
physician; or
(2) The employee has been on removal status for the preceding six
[[Page 85]]
months as a result of exposure to MDA, then the employer shall await a
final medical determination.
(v) Medical removal protection benefits--(A) Provisions of medical
removal protection benefits. The employer shall provide to an employee
up to six (6) months of medical removal protection benefits on each
occasion that an employee is removed from exposure to MDA or otherwise
limited pursuant to this section.
(B) Definition of medical removal protection benefits. For the
purposes of this section, the requirement that an employer provide
medical removal protection benefits means that the employer shall
maintain the earnings, seniority, and other employment rights and
benefits of an employee as though the employee had not been removed from
normal exposure to MDA or otherwise limited.
(C) Follow-up medical surveillance during the period of employee
removal or limitations. During the period of time that an employee is
removed from normal exposure to MDA or otherwise limited, the employer
may condition the provision of medical removal protection benefits upon
the employee's participation in follow-up medical surveillance made
available pursuant to this section.
(D) Workers' compensation claims. If a removed employee files a
claim for workers' compensation payments for a MDA-related disability,
then the employer shall continue to provide medical removal protection
benefits pending disposition of the claim. To the extent that an award
is made to the employee for earnings lost during the period of removal,
the employer's medical removal protection obligation shall be reduced by
such amount. The employer shall receive no credit for workers'
compensation payments received by the employee for treatment-related
expenses.
(E) Other credits. The employer's obligation to provide medical
removal protection benefits to a removed employee shall be reduced to
the extent that the employee receives compensation for earnings lost
during the period of removal either from a publicly or employer-funded
compensation program, or receives income from employment with any
employer made possible by virtue of the employee's removal.
(F) Employees who do not recover within the 6 months of removal. The
employer shall take the following measures with respect to any employee
removed from exposure to MDA:
(1) The employer shall make available to the employee a medical
examination pursuant to this section to obtain a final medical
determination with respect to the employee;
(2) The employer shall assure that the final medical determination
obtained indicates whether or not the employee may be returned to his or
her former job status, and, if not, what steps should be taken to
protect the employee's health;
(3) Where the final medical determination has not yet been obtained,
or once obtained indicates that the employee may not yet be returned to
his or her former job status, the employer shall continue to provide
medical removal protection benefits to the employee until either the
employee is returned to former job status, or a final medical
determination is made that the employee is incapable of ever safely
returning to his or her former job status; and
(4) Where the employer acts pursuant to a final medical
determination which permits the return of the employee to his or her
former job status despite what would otherwise be an unacceptable liver
function test, later questions concerning removing the employee again
shall be decided by a final medical determination. The employer need not
automatically remove such an employee pursuant to the MDA removal
criteria provided by this section.
(vi) Voluntary removal or restriction of an employee. Where an
employer, although not required by this section to do so, removes an
employee from exposure to MDA or otherwise places limitations on an
employee due to the effects of MDA exposure on the employee's medical
condition, the employer shall provide medical removal protection
benefits to the employee equal to that required by paragraph (n)(9)(v)
of this section.
(o) Recordkeeping--(1) Objective data for exempted operations. (i)
Where the employer has relied on objective data
[[Page 86]]
that demonstrate that products made from or containing MDA are not
capable of releasing MDA or do not present a dermal exposure problem
under the expected conditions of processing, use, or handling to exempt
such operations from the initial monitoring requirements under paragraph
(f)(2) of this section, the employer shall establish and maintain an
accurate record of objective data reasonably relied upon in support of
the exemption.
(ii) The record shall include at least the following information:
(A) The product qualifying for exemption;
(B) The source of the objective data;
(C) The testing protocol, results of testing, and/or analysis of the
material for the release of MDA;
(D) A description of the operation exempted and how the data support
the exemption; and
(E) Other data relevant to the operations, materials, processing, or
employee exposures covered by the exemption.
(iii) The employer shall maintain this record for the duration of
the employer's reliance upon such objective data.
(2) Historical monitoring data. (i) Where the employer has relied on
historical monitoring data that demonstrate that exposures on a
particular job will be below the action level to exempt such operations
from the initial monitoring requirements under paragraph (f)(2) of this
section, the employer shall establish and maintain an accurate record of
historical monitoring data reasonably relied upon in support of the
exception.
(ii) The record shall include information that reflect the following
conditions:
(A) The data upon which judgments are based are scientifically sound
and were collected using methods that are sufficiently accurate and
precise;
(B) The processes and work practices that were in use when the
historical monitoring data were obtained are essentially the same as
those to be used during the job for which initial monitoring will not be
performed;
(C) The characteristics of the MDA-containing material being handled
when the historical monitoring data were obtained are the same as those
on the job for which initial monitoring will not be performed;
(D) Environmental conditions prevailing when the historical
monitoring data were obtained are the same as those on the job for which
initial monitoring will not be performed; and
(E) Other data relevant to the operations, materials, processing, or
employee exposures covered by the exception.
(iii) The employer shall maintain this record for the duration of
the employer's reliance upon such historical monitoring data.
(3) The employer may utilize the services of competent organizations
such as industry trade associations and employee associations to
maintain the records required by this section.
(4) Exposure measurements. (i) The employer shall keep an accurate
record of all measurements taken to monitor employee exposure to MDA.
(ii) This record shall include at least the following information:
(A) The date of measurement;
(B) The operation involving exposure to MDA;
(C) Sampling and analytical methods used and evidence of their
accuracy;
(D) Number, duration, and results of samples taken;
(E) Type of protective devices worn, if any; and
(F) Name, social security number, and exposure of the employees
whose exposures are represented.
(iii) The employer shall maintain this record for at least thirty
(30) years, in accordance with 29 CFR 1910.33.
(5) Medical surveillance. (i) The employer shall establish and
maintain an accurate record for each employee subject to medical
surveillance by paragraph (n) of this section, in accordance with 29 CFR
1910.33.
(ii) The record shall include at least the following information:
(A) The name and social security number of the employee;
(B) A copy of the employee's medical examination results, including
the medical history, questionnaire responses, results of any tests, and
physician's recommendations.
(C) Physician's written opinions;
[[Page 87]]
(D) Any employee medical complaints related to exposure to MDA; and
(E) A copy of the information provided to the physician as required
by paragraph (n) of this section.
(iii) The employer shall ensure that this record is maintained for
the duration of employment plus thirty (30) years, in accordance with 29
CFR 1910.33.
(iv) A copy of the employee's medical removal and return to work
status.
(6) Training records. The employer shall maintain all employee
training records for one (1) year beyond the last date of employment.
(7) Availability. (i) The employer, upon written request, shall make
all records required to be maintained by this section available to the
Assistant Secretary and the Director for examination and copying.
(ii) The employer, upon request, shall make any exposure records
required by paragraphs (f) and (n) of this section available for
examination and copying to affected employees, former employees,
designated representatives, and the Assistant Secretary, in accordance
with 29 CFR 1910.33(a)-(e) and (g)-(i).
(iii) The employer, upon request, shall make employee medical
records required by paragraphs (n) and (o) of this section available for
examination and copying to the subject employee, anyone having the
specific written consent of the subject employee, and the Assistant
Secretary, in accordance with 29 CFR 1910.33.
(8) Transfer of records. The employer shall comply with the
requirements concerning transfer of records set forth in 29 CFR
1910.1020(h).
(ii) Whenever the employer ceases to do business and there is no
successor employer to receive and retain the records for the prescribed
period, the employer shall notify the Director at least 90 days prior to
disposal and, upon request, transmit them to the Director.
(p) Observation of monitoring--(1) Employee observation. The
employer shall provide affected employees, or their designated
representatives, an opportunity to observe the measuring or monitoring
of employee exposure to MDA conducted pursuant to paragraph (f) of this
section.
(2) Observation procedures. When observation of the measuring or
monitoring of employee exposure to MDA requires entry into areas where
the use of protective clothing and equipment or respirators is required,
the employer shall provide the observer with personal protective
clothing and equipment or respirators required to be worn by employees
working in the area, assure the use of such clothing and equipment or
respirators, and require the observer to comply with all other
applicable safety and health procedures.
(q) Appendices. The information contained in appendices A, B, C, and
D of this section is not intended, by itself, to create any additional
obligations not otherwise imposed by this standard nor detract from any
existing obligation.
Appendix A to Sec. 1926.60--Substance Data Sheet, for 4-4'
Methylenedianiline
Note: The requirements applicable to construction work under this
appendix A are identical to those set forth in appendix A to Sec.
1910.1050 of this chapter.
Appendix B to Sec. 1926.60--Substance Technical Guidelines, MDA
Note: The requirements applicable to construction work under this
appendix B are identical to those set forth in appendix B to Sec.
1910.1050 of this chapter.
Appendix C to Sec. 1926.60--Medical Surveillance Guidelines for MDA
Note: The requirements applicable to construction work under this
appendix C are identical to those set forth in appendix C to Sec.
1910.1050 of this chapter.
Appendix D to Sec. 1926.60--Sampling and Analytical Methods for MDA
Monitoring and Measurement Procedures
Note: The requirements applicable to construction work under this
appendix D are identical to those set forth in appendix D to Sec.
1910.1050 of this chapter.
[57 FR 35681, Aug. 10, 1992, as amended at 57 FR 49649, Nov. 3, 1992; 61
FR 5510, Feb. 13, 1996; 61 FR 31431, June 20, 1996; 63 FR 1296, Jan. 8,
1998; 69 FR 70373, Dec. 6, 2004; 70 FR 1143, Jan. 5, 2005; 71 FR 16674,
Apr. 3, 2006; 71 FR 50191, Aug. 24, 2006; 73 FR 75588, Dec. 12, 2008; 76
FR 33611, June 8, 2011; 77 FR 17889, Mar. 26, 2012]
[[Page 88]]
Sec. 1926.61 Retention of DOT markings, placards and labels.
Note: The requirements applicable to construction work under this
section are identical to those set forth at Sec. 1910.1201 of this
chapter.
[61 FR 31432, June 20, 1996]
Sec. 1926.62 Lead.
(a) Scope. This section applies to all construction work where an
employee may be occupationally exposed to lead. All construction work
excluded from coverage in the general industry standard for lead by 29
CFR 1910.1025(a)(2) is covered by this standard. Construction work is
defined as work for construction, alteration and/or repair, including
painting and decorating. It includes but is not limited to the
following:
(1) Demolition or salvage of structures where lead or materials
containing lead are present;
(2) Removal or encapsulation of materials containing lead;
(3) New construction, alteration, repair, or renovation of
structures, substrates, or portions thereof, that contain lead, or
materials containing lead;
(4) Installation of products containing lead;
(5) Lead contamination/emergency cleanup;
(6) Transportation, disposal, storage, or containment of lead or
materials containing lead on the site or location at which construction
activities are performed, and
(7) Maintenance operations associated with the construction
activities described in this paragraph.
(b) Definitions.
Action level means employee exposure, without regard to the use of
respirators, to an airborne concentration of lead of 30 micrograms per
cubic meter of air (30 [micro]g/m\3\) calculated as an 8-hour time-
weighted average (TWA).
Assistant Secretary means the Assistant Secretary of Labor for
Occupational Safety and Health, U.S. Department of Labor, or designee.
Competent person means one who is capable of identifying existing
and predictable lead hazards in the surroundings or working conditions
and who has authorization to take prompt corrective measures to
eliminate them.
Director means the Director, National Institute for Occupational
Safety and Health (NIOSH), U.S. Department of Health and Human Services,
or designee.
Lead means metallic lead, all inorganic lead compounds, and organic
lead soaps. Excluded from this definition are all other organic lead
compounds.
This section means this standard.
(c) Permissible exposure limit. (1) The employer shall assure that
no employee is exposed to lead at concentrations greater than fifty
micrograms per cubic meter of air (50 [micro]g/m\3\) averaged over an 8-
hour period.
(2) If an employee is exposed to lead for more than 8 hours in any
work day the employees' allowable exposure, as a time weighted average
(TWA) for that day, shall be reduced according to the following formula:
Allowable employee exposure (in [micro]g/m\3\) = 400 divided by hours
worked in the day.
(3) When respirators are used to limit employee exposure as required
under paragraph (c) of this section and all the requirements of
paragraphs (e)(1) and (f) of this section have been met, employee
exposure may be considered to be at the level provided by the protection
factor of the respirator for those periods the respirator is worn. Those
periods may be averaged with exposure levels during periods when
respirators are not worn to determine the employee's daily TWA exposure.
(d) Exposure assessment--(1) General. (i) Each employer who has a
workplace or operation covered by this standard shall initially
determine if any employee may be exposed to lead at or above the action
level.
(ii) For the purposes of paragraph (d) of this section, employee
exposure is that exposure which would occur if the employee were not
using a respirator.
(iii) With the exception of monitoring under paragraph (d)(3), where
monitoring is required under this section, the employer shall collect
personal samples representative of a full shift including at least one
sample for each job classification in each work area either for each
shift or for the shift with the highest exposure level.
[[Page 89]]
(iv) Full shift personal samples shall be representative of the
monitored employee's regular, daily exposure to lead.
(2) Protection of employees during assessment of exposure. (i) With
respect to the lead related tasks listed in paragraph (d)(2)(i) of this
section, where lead is present, until the employer performs an employee
exposure assessment as required in paragraph (d) of this section and
documents that the employee performing any of the listed tasks is not
exposed above the PEL, the employer shall treat the employee as if the
employee were exposed above the PEL, and not in excess of ten (10) times
the PEL, and shall implement employee protective measures prescribed in
paragraph (d)(2)(v) of this section. The tasks covered by this
requirement are:
(A) Where lead containing coatings or paint are present: Manual
demolition of structures (e.g, dry wall), manual scraping, manual
sanding, heat gun applications, and power tool cleaning with dust
collection systems;
(B) Spray painting with lead paint.
(ii) In addition, with regard to tasks not listed in paragraph
(d)(2)(i), where the employee has any reason to believe that an employee
performing the task may be exposed to lead in excess of the PEL, until
the employer performs an employee exposure assessment as required by
paragraph (d) of this section and documents that the employee's lead
exposure is not above the PEL the employer shall treat the employee as
if the employee were exposed above the PEL and shall implememt employee
protective measures as prescribed in paragraph (d)(2)(v) of this
section.
(iii) With respect to the tasks listed in paragraph (d)(2)(iii) of
this section, where lead is present, until the employer performs an
employee exposure assessment as required in paragraph (d) of this
section, and documents that the employee performing any of the listed
tasks is not exposed in excess of 500 [micro]g/m\3\, the employer shall
treat the employee as if the employee were exposed to lead in excess of
500 [micro]g/m\3\ and shall implement employee protective measures as
prescribed in paragraph (d)(2)(v) of this section. Where the employer
does establish that the employee is exposed to levels of lead below 500
[micro]g/m\3\, the employer may provide the exposed employee with the
appropriate respirator prescribed for such use at such lower exposures,
in accordance with Table 1 of this section. The tasks covered by this
requirement are:
(A) Using lead containing mortar; lead burning
(B) Where lead containing coatings or paint are present: rivet
busting; power tool cleaning without dust collection systems; cleanup
activities where dry expendable abrasives are used; and abrasive
blasting enclosure movement and removal.
(iv) With respect to the tasks listed in paragraph (d)(2)(iv) of
this section, where lead is present, until the employer performs an
employee exposure assessment as required in paragraph (d) of this
section and documents that the employee performing any of the listed
tasks is not exposed to lead in excess of 2,500 [micro]g/m\3\ (50xPEL),
the employer shall treat the employee as if the employee were exposed to
lead in excess of 2,500 [micro]g/m\3\ and shall implement employee
protective measures as prescribed in paragraph (d)(2)(v) of this
section. Where the employer does establish that the employee is exposed
to levels of lead below 2,500 [micro]g/m3, the employer may provide the
exposed employee with the appropriate respirator prescribed for use at
such lower exposures, in accordance with Table I of this section.
Interim protection as described in this paragaraph is required where
lead containing coatings or paint are present on structures when
performing:
(A) Abrasive blasting,
(B) Welding,
(C) Cutting, and
(D) Torch burning.
(v) Until the employer performs an employee exposure assessment as
required under paragraph (d) of this section and determines actual
employee exposure, the employer shall provide to employees performing
the tasks described in paragraphs (d)(2)(i), (d)(2)(ii), (d)(2)(iii),
and (d)(2)(iv) of this section with interim protection as follows:
(A) Appropriate respiratory protection in accordance with paragraph
(f) of this section.
[[Page 90]]
(B) Appropriate personal protective clothing and equipment in
accordance with paragraph (g) of this section.
(C) Change areas in accordance with paragraph (i)(2) of this
section.
(D) Hand washing facilities in accordance with paragraph (i)(5) of
this section.
(E) Biological monitoring in accordance with paragraph (j)(1)(i) of
this section, to consist of blood sampling and analysis for lead and
zinc protoporphyrin levels, and
(F) Training as required under paragraph (l)(1)(i) of this section
regarding 29 CFR 1926.59, Hazard Communication; training as required
under paragraph (1)(2)(iii) of this section, regarding use of
respirators; and training in accordance with 29 CFR 1926.21, Safety
training and education.
(3) Basis of initial determination. (i) Except as provided under
paragraphs (d)(3)(iii) and (d)(3)(iv) of this section the employer shall
monitor employee exposures and shall base initial determinations on the
employee exposure monitoring results and any of the following, relevant
considerations:
(A) Any information, observations, or calculations which would
indicate employee exposure to lead;
(B) Any previous measurements of airborne lead; and
(C) Any employee complaints of symptoms which may be attributable to
exposure to lead.
(ii) Monitoring for the initial determination where performed may be
limited to a representative sample of the exposed employees who the
employer reasonably believes are exposed to the greatest airborne
concentrations of lead in the workplace.
(iii) Where the employer has previously monitored for lead
exposures, and the data were obtained within the past 12 months during
work operations conducted under workplace conditions closely resembling
the processes, type of material, control methods, work practices, and
environmental conditions used and prevailing in the employer's current
operations, the employer may rely on such earlier monitoring results to
satisfy the requirements of paragraphs (d)(3)(i) and (d)(6) of this
section if the sampling and analytical methods meet the accuracy and
confidence levels of paragraph (d)(10) of this section.
(iv) Where the employer has objective data, demonstrating that a
particular product or material containing lead or a specific process,
operation or activity involving lead cannot result in employee exposure
to lead at or above the action level during processing, use, or
handling, the employer may rely upon such data instead of implementing
initial monitoring.
(A) The employer shall establish and maintain an accurate record
documenting the nature and relevancy of objective data as specified in
paragraph (n)(4) of this section, where used in assessing employee
exposure in lieu of exposure monitoring.
(B) Objective data, as described in paragraph (d)(3)(iv) of this
section, is not permitted to be used for exposure assessment in
connection with paragraph (d)(2) of this section.
(4) Positive initial determination and initial monitoring. (i) Where
a determination conducted under paragraphs (d) (1), (2) and (3) of this
section shows the possibility of any employee exposure at or above the
action level the employer shall conduct monitoring which is
representative of the exposure for each employee in the workplace who is
exposed to lead.
(ii) Where the employer has previously monitored for lead exposure,
and the data were obtained within the past 12 months during work
operations conducted under workplace conditions closely resembling the
processes, type of material, control methods, work practices, and
environmental conditions used and prevailing in the employer's current
operations, the employer may rely on such earlier monitoring results to
satisfy the requirements of paragraph (d)(4)(i) of this section if the
sampling and analytical methods meet the accuracy and confidence levels
of paragraph (d)(10) of this section.
(5) Negative initial determination. Where a determination, conducted
under paragraphs (d) (1), (2), and (3) of this section is made that no
employee is exposed to airborne concentrations of lead at or above the
action level the employer shall make a written record of such
determination. The record shall
[[Page 91]]
include at least the information specified in paragraph (d)(3)(i) of
this section and shall also include the date of determination, location
within the worksite, and the name and social security number of each
employee monitored.
(6) Frequency. (i) If the initial determination reveals employee
exposure to be below the action level further exposure determination
need not be repeated except as otherwise provided in paragraph (d)(7) of
this section.
(ii) If the initial determination or subsequent determination
reveals employee exposure to be at or above the action level but at or
below the PEL the employer shall perform monitoring in accordance with
this paragraph at least every 6 months. The employer shall continue
monitoring at the required frequency until at least two consecutive
measurements, taken at least 7 days apart, are below the action level at
which time the employer may discontinue monitoring for that employee
except as otherwise provided in paragraph (d)(7) of this section.
(iii) If the initial determination reveals that employee exposure is
above the PEL the employer shall perform monitoring quarterly. The
employer shall continue monitoring at the required frequency until at
least two consecutive measurements, taken at least 7 days apart, are at
or below the PEL but at or above the action level at which time the
employer shall repeat monitoring for that employee at the frequency
specified in paragraph (d)(6)(ii) of this section, except as otherwise
provided in paragraph (d)(7) of this section. The employer shall
continue monitoring at the required frequency until at least two
consecutive measurements, taken at least 7 days apart, are below the
action level at which time the employer may discontinue monitoring for
that employee except as otherwise provided in paragraph (d)(7) of this
section.
(7) Additional exposure assessments. Whenever there has been a
change of equipment, process, control, personnel or a new task has been
initiated that may result in additional employees being exposed to lead
at or above the action level or may result in employees already exposed
at or above the action level being exposed above the PEL, the employer
shall conduct additional monitoring in accordance with this paragraph.
(8) Employee notification. (i) The employer must, as soon as
possible but no later than 5 working days after the receipt of the
results of any monitoring performed under this section, notify each
affected employee of these results either individually in writing or by
posting the results in an appropriate location that is accessible to
employees.
(ii) Whenever the results indicate that the representative employee
exposure, without regard to respirators, is at or above the PEL the
employer shall include in the written notice a statement that the
employees exposure was at or above that level and a description of the
corrective action taken or to be taken to reduce exposure to below that
level.
(9) Accuracy of measurement. The employer shall use a method of
monitoring and analysis which has an accuracy (to a confidence level of
95%) of not less than plus or minus 25 percent for airborne
concentrations of lead equal to or greater than 30 [micro]g/m\3\.
(e) Methods of compliance--(1) Engineering and work practice
controls. The employer shall implement engineering and work practice
controls, including administrative controls, to reduce and maintain
employee exposure to lead to or below the permissible exposure limit to
the extent that such controls are feasible. Wherever all feasible
engineering and work practices controls that can be instituted are not
sufficient to reduce employee exposure to or below the permissible
exposure limit prescribed in paragraph (c) of this section, the employer
shall nonetheless use them to reduce employee exposure to the lowest
feasible level and shall supplement them by the use of respiratory
protection that complies with the requirements of paragraph (f) of this
section.
(2) Compliance program. (i) Prior to commencement of the job each
employer shall establish and implement a written compliance program to
achieve compliance with paragraph (c) of this section.
[[Page 92]]
(ii) Written plans for these compliance programs shall include at
least the following:
(A) A description of each activity in which lead is emitted; e.g.
equipment used, material involved, controls in place, crew size,
employee job responsibilities, operating procedures and maintenance
practices;
(B) A description of the specific means that will be employed to
achieve compliance and, where engineering controls are required
engineering plans and studies used to determine methods selected for
controlling exposure to lead;
(C) A report of the technology considered in meeting the PEL;
(D) Air monitoring data which documents the source of lead
emissions;
(E) A detailed schedule for implementation of the program, including
documentation such as copies of purchase orders for equipment,
construction contracts, etc.;
(F) A work practice program which includes items required under
paragraphs (g), (h) and (i) of this section and incorporates other
relevant work practices such as those specified in paragraph (e)(5) of
this section;
(G) An administrative control schedule required by paragraph (e)(4)
of this section, if applicable;
(H) A description of arrangements made among contractors on multi-
contractor sites with respect to informing affected employees of
potential exposure to lead and with respect to responsibility for
compliance with this section as set-forth in Sec. 1926.16.
(I) Other relevant information.
(iii) The compliance program shall provide for frequent and regular
inspections of job sites, materials, and equipment to be made by a
competent person.
(iv) Written programs shall be submitted upon request to any
affected employee or authorized employee representatives, to the
Assistant Secretary and the Director, and shall be available at the
worksite for examination and copying by the Assistant Secretary and the
Director.
(v) Written programs must be revised and updated at least annually
to reflect the current status of the program.
(3) Mechanical ventilation. When ventilation is used to control lead
exposure, the employer shall evaluate the mechanical performance of the
system in controlling exposure as necessary to maintain its
effectiveness.
(4) Administrative controls. If administrative controls are used as
a means of reducing employees TWA exposure to lead, the employer shall
establish and implement a job rotation schedule which includes:
(i) Name or identification number of each affected employee;
(ii) Duration and exposure levels at each job or work station where
each affected employee is located; and
(iii) Any other information which may be useful in assessing the
reliability of administrative controls to reduce exposure to lead.
(5) The employer shall ensure that, to the extent relevant,
employees follow good work practices such as described in appendix B of
this section.
(f) Respiratory protection--(1) General. For employees who use
respirators required by this section, the employer must provide each
employee an appropriate respirator that complies with the requirements
of this paragraph. Respirators must be used during:
(i) Periods when an employee's exposure to lead exceeds the PEL.
(ii) Work operations for which engineering and work-practice
controls are not sufficient to reduce employee exposures to or below the
PEL.
(iii) Periods when an employee requests a respirator.
(iv) Periods when respirators are required to provide interim
protection of employees while they perform the operations specified in
paragraph (d)(2) of this section.
(2) Respirator program. (i) The employer must implement a
respiratory protection program in accordance with Sec. 1910.134(b)
through (d) (except (d)(1)(iii)), and (f) through (m), which covers each
employee required by this section to use a respirator.
(ii) If an employee has breathing difficulty during fit testing or
respirator use, the employer must provide the employee with a medical
examination in accordance with paragraph (j)(3)(i)(B) of this section to
determine whether or
[[Page 93]]
not the employee can use a respirator while performing the required
duty.
(3) Respirator selection. (i) Employers must:
(A) Select, and provide to employees, the appropriate respirators
specified in paragraph (d)(3)(i)(A) of 29 CFR 1910.134.
(B) Provide employees with a full facepiece respirator instead of a
half mask respirator for protection against lead aerosols that may cause
eye or skin irritation at the use concentrations.
(C) Provide HEPA filters for powered and non-powered air-purifying
respirators.
(ii) The employer must provide a powered air-purifying respirator
when an employee chooses to use such a respirator and it will provide
adequate protection to the employee.
(g) Protective work clothing and equipment--(1) Provision and use.
Where an employee is exposed to lead above the PEL without regard to the
use of respirators, where employees are exposed to lead compounds which
may cause skin or eye irritation (e.g. lead arsenate, lead azide), and
as interim protection for employees performing tasks as specified in
paragraph (d)(2) of this section, the employer shall provide at no cost
to the employee and assure that the employee uses appropriate protective
work clothing and equipment that prevents contamination of the employee
and the employee's garments such as, but not limited to:
(i) Coveralls or similar full-body work clothing;
(ii) Gloves, hats, and shoes or disposable shoe coverlets; and
(iii) Face shields, vented goggles, or other appropriate protective
equipment which complies with Sec. 1910.133 of this chapter.
(2) Cleaning and replacement. (i) The employer shall provide the
protective clothing required in paragraph (g)(1) of this section in a
clean and dry condition at least weekly, and daily to employees whose
exposure levels without regard to a respirator are over 200 [micro]g/
m\3\ of lead as an 8-hour TWA.
(ii) The employer shall provide for the cleaning, laundering, and
disposal of protective clothing and equipment required by paragraph
(g)(1) of this section.
(iii) The employer shall repair or replace required protective
clothing and equipment as needed to maintain their effectiveness.
(iv) The employer shall assure that all protective clothing is
removed at the completion of a work shift only in change areas provided
for that purpose as prescribed in paragraph (i)(2) of this section.
(v) The employer shall assure that contaminated protective clothing
which is to be cleaned, laundered, or disposed of, is placed in a closed
container in the change area which prevents dispersion of lead outside
the container.
(vi) The employer shall inform in writing any person who cleans or
launders protective clothing or equipment of the potentially harmful
effects of exposure to lead.
(vii)(A) The employer shall ensure that the containers of
contaminated protective clothing and equipment required by paragraph
(g)(2)(v) of this section are labeled as follows:
DANGER: CLOTHING AND EQUIPMENT CONTAMINATED WITH LEAD. MAY DAMAGE
FERTILITY OR THE UNBORN CHILD. CAUSES DAMAGE TO THE CENTRAL NERVOUS
SYSTEM. DO NOT EAT, DRINK OR SMOKE WHEN HANDLING. DO NOT REMOVE DUST BY
BLOWING OR SHAKING. DISPOSE OF LEAD CONTAMINATED WASH WATER IN
ACCORDANCE WITH APPLICABLE LOCAL, STATE, OR FEDERAL REGULATIONS.
(B) Prior to June 1, 2015, employers may include the following
information on bags or containers of contaminated protective clothing
and equipment required by paragraph (g)(2)(v) in lieu of the labeling
requirements in paragraph (g)(2)(vii)(A) of this section:
Caution: Clothing contaminated with lead. Do not remove dust by blowing
or shaking. Dispose of lead contaminated wash water in accordance with
applicable local, state, or federal regulations.
(viii) The employer shall prohibit the removal of lead from
protective clothing or equipment by blowing, shaking, or any other means
which disperses lead into the air.
[[Page 94]]
(h) Housekeeping--(1) All surfaces shall be maintained as free as
practicable of accumulations of lead.
(2) Clean-up of floors and other surfaces where lead accumulates
shall wherever possible, be cleaned by vacuuming or other methods that
minimize the likelihood of lead becoming airborne.
(3) Shoveling, dry or wet sweeping, and brushing may be used only
where vacuuming or other equally effective methods have been tried and
found not to be effective.
(4) Where vacuuming methods are selected, the vacuums shall be
equipped with HEPA filters and used and emptied in a manner which
minimizes the reentry of lead into the workplace.
(5) Compressed air shall not be used to remove lead from any surface
unless the compressed air is used in conjunction with a ventilation
system designed to capture the airborne dust created by the compressed
air.
(i) Hygiene facilities and practices. (1) The employer shall assure
that in areas where employees are exposed to lead above the PEL without
regard to the use of respirators, food or beverage is not present or
consumed, tobacco products are not present or used, and cosmetics are
not applied.
(2) Change areas. (i) The employer shall provide clean change areas
for employees whose airborne exposure to lead is above the PEL, and as
interim protection for employees performing tasks as specified in
paragraph (d)(2) of this section, without regard to the use of
respirators.
(ii) The employer shall assure that change areas are equipped with
separate storage facilities for protective work clothing and equipment
and for street clothes which prevent cross-contamination.
(iii) The employer shall assure that employees do not leave the
workplace wearing any protective clothing or equipment that is required
to be worn during the work shift.
(3) Showers. (i) The employer shall provide shower facilities, where
feasible, for use by employees whose airborne exposure to lead is above
the PEL.
(ii) The employer shall assure, where shower facilities are
available, that employees shower at the end of the work shift and shall
provide an adequate supply of cleansing agents and towels for use by
affected employees.
(4) Eating facilities. (i) The employer shall provide lunchroom
facilities or eating areas for employees whose airborne exposure to lead
is above the PEL, without regard to the use of respirators.
(ii) The employer shall assure that lunchroom facilities or eating
areas are as free as practicable from lead contamination and are readily
accessible to employees.
(iii) The employer shall assure that employees whose airborne
exposure to lead is above the PEL, without regard to the use of a
respirator, wash their hands and face prior to eating, drinking, smoking
or applying cosmetics.
(iv) The employer shall assure that employees do not enter lunchroom
facilities or eating areas with protective work clothing or equipment
unless surface lead dust has been removed by vacuuming, downdraft booth,
or other cleaning method that limits dispersion of lead dust.
(5) Hand washing facilities. (i) The employer shall provide adequate
handwashing facilities for use by employees exposed to lead in
accordance with 29 CFR 1926.51(f).
(ii) Where showers are not provided the employer shall assure that
employees wash their hands and face at the end of the work-shift.
(j) Medical surveillance--(1) General. (i) The employer shall make
available initial medical surveillance to employees occupationally
exposed on any day to lead at or above the action level. Initial medical
surveillance consists of biological monitoring in the form of blood
sampling and analysis for lead and zinc protoporphyrin levels.
(ii) The employer shall institute a medical surveillance program in
accordance with paragraphs (j)(2) and (j)(3) of this section for all
employees who are or may be exposed by the employer at or above the
action level for more than 30 days in any consecutive 12 months;
(iii) The employer shall assure that all medical examinations and
procedures are performed by or under the supervision of a licensed
physician.
[[Page 95]]
(iv) The employer shall make available the required medical
surveillance including multiple physician review under paragraph
(j)(3)(iii) without cost to employees and at a reasonable time and
place.
(2) Biological monitoring--(i) Blood lead and ZPP level sampling and
analysis. The employer shall make available biological monitoring in the
form of blood sampling and analysis for lead and zinc protoporphyrin
levels to each employee covered under paragraphs (j)(1)(i) and (ii) of
this section on the following schedule:
(A) For each employee covered under paragraph (j)(1)(ii) of this
section, at least every 2 months for the first 6 months and every 6
months thereafter;
(B) For each employee covered under paragraphs (j)(1) (i) or (ii) of
this section whose last blood sampling and analysis indicated a blood
lead level at or above 40 [micro]g/dl, at least every two months. This
frequency shall continue until two consecutive blood samples and
analyses indicate a blood lead level below 40 [micro]g/dl; and
(C) For each employee who is removed from exposure to lead due to an
elevated blood lead level at least monthly during the removal period.
(ii) Follow-up blood sampling tests. Whenever the results of a blood
lead level test indicate that an employee's blood lead level is at or
above the numerical criterion for medical removal under paragraph
(k)(1)(i) of this section, the employer shall provide a second (follow-
up) blood sampling test within two weeks after the employer receives the
results of the first blood sampling test.
(iii) Accuracy of blood lead level sampling and analysis. Blood lead
level sampling and analysis provided pursuant to this section shall have
an accuracy (to a confidence level of 95 percent) within plus or minus
15 percent or 6 [micro]g/dl, whichever is greater, and shall be
conducted by a laboratory approved by OSHA.
(iv) Employee notification. (A) Within five working days after the
receipt of biological monitoring results, the employer shall notify each
employee in writing of his or her blood lead level; and
(B) The employer shall notify each employee whose blood lead level
is at or above 40 [micro]g/dl that the standard requires temporary
medical removal with Medical Removal Protection benefits when an
employee's blood lead level is at or above the numerical criterion for
medical removal under paragraph (k)(1)(i) of this section.
(3) Medical examinations and consultations--(i) Frequency. The
employer shall make available medical examinations and consultations to
each employee covered under paragraph (j)(1)(ii) of this section on the
following schedule:
(A) At least annually for each employee for whom a blood sampling
test conducted at any time during the preceding 12 months indicated a
blood lead level at or above 40 [micro]g/dl;
(B) As soon as possible, upon notification by an employee either
that the employee has developed signs or symptoms commonly associated
with lead intoxication, that the employee desires medical advice
concerning the effects of current or past exposure to lead on the
employee's ability to procreate a healthy child, that the employee is
pregnant, or that the employee has demonstrated difficulty in breathing
during a respirator fitting test or during use; and
(C) As medically appropriate for each employee either removed from
exposure to lead due to a risk of sustaining material impairment to
health, or otherwise limited pursuant to a final medical determination.
(ii) Content. The content of medical examinations made available
pursuant to paragraph (j)(3)(i)(B)-(C) of this section shall be
determined by an examining physician and, if requested by an employee,
shall include pregnancy testing or laboratory evaluation of male
fertility. Medical examinations made available pursuant to paragraph
(j)(3)(i)(A) of this section shall include the following elements:
(A) A detailed work history and a medical history, with particular
attention to past lead exposure (occupational and non-occupational),
personal habits (smoking, hygiene), and past gastrointestinal,
hematologic, renal, cardiovascular, reproductive and neurological
problems;
[[Page 96]]
(B) A thorough physical examination, with particular attention to
teeth, gums, hematologic, gastrointestinal, renal, cardiovascular, and
neurological systems. Pulmonary status should be evaluated if
respiratory protection will be used;
(C) A blood pressure measurement;
(D) A blood sample and analysis which determines:
(1) Blood lead level;
(2) Hemoglobin and hematocrit determinations, red cell indices, and
examination of peripheral smear morphology;
(3) Zinc protoporphyrin;
(4) Blood urea nitrogen; and,
(5) Serum creatinine;
(E) A routine urinalysis with microscopic examination; and
(F) Any laboratory or other test relevant to lead exposure which the
examining physician deems necessary by sound medical practice.
(iii) Multiple physician review mechanism. (A) If the employer
selects the initial physician who conducts any medical examination or
consultation provided to an employee under this section, the employee
may designate a second physician:
(1) To review any findings, determinations or recommendations of the
initial physician; and
(2) To conduct such examinations, consultations, and laboratory
tests as the second physician deems necessary to facilitate this review.
(B) The employer shall promptly notify an employee of the right to
seek a second medical opinion after each occasion that an initial
physician conducts a medical examination or consultation pursuant to
this section. The employer may condition its participation in, and
payment for, the multiple physician review mechanism upon the employee
doing the following within fifteen (15) days after receipt of the
foregoing notification, or receipt of the initial physician's written
opinion, whichever is later:
(1) The employee informing the employer that he or she intends to
seek a second medical opinion, and
(2) The employee initiating steps to make an appointment with a
second physician.
(C) If the findings, determinations or recommendations of the second
physician differ from those of the initial physician, then the employer
and the employee shall assure that efforts are made for the two
physicians to resolve any disagreement.
(D) If the two physicians have been unable to quickly resolve their
disagreement, then the employer and the employee through their
respective physicians shall designate a third physician:
(1) To review any findings, determinations or recommendations of the
prior physicians; and
(2) To conduct such examinations, consultations, laboratory tests
and discussions with the prior physicians as the third physician deems
necessary to resolve the disagreement of the prior physicians.
(E) The employer shall act consistent with the findings,
determinations and recommendations of the third physician, unless the
employer and the employee reach an agreement which is otherwise
consistent with the recommendations of at least one of the three
physicians.
(iv) Information provided to examining and consulting physicians.
(A) The employer shall provide an initial physician conducting a medical
examination or consultation under this section with the following
information:
(1) A copy of this regulation for lead including all Appendices;
(2) A description of the affected employee's duties as they relate
to the employee's exposure;
(3) The employee's exposure level or anticipated exposure level to
lead and to any other toxic substance (if applicable);
(4) A description of any personal protective equipment used or to be
used;
(5) Prior blood lead determinations; and
(6) All prior written medical opinions concerning the employee in
the employer's possession or control.
(B) The employer shall provide the foregoing information to a second
or third physician conducting a medical examination or consultation
under this section upon request either by the second or third physician,
or by the employee.
[[Page 97]]
(v) Written medical opinions. (A) The employer shall obtain and
furnish the employee with a copy of a written medical opinion from each
examining or consulting physician which contains only the following
information:
(1) The physician's opinion as to whether the employee has any
detected medical condition which would place the employee at increased
risk of material impairment of the employee's health from exposure to
lead;
(2) Any recommended special protective measures to be provided to
the employee, or limitations to be placed upon the employee's exposure
to lead;
(3) Any recommended limitation upon the employee's use of
respirators, including a determination of whether the employee can wear
a powered air purifying respirator if a physician determines that the
employee cannot wear a negative pressure respirator; and
(4) The results of the blood lead determinations.
(B) The employer shall instruct each examining and consulting
physician to:
(1) Not reveal either in the written opinion or orally, or in any
other means of communication with the employer, findings, including
laboratory results, or diagnoses unrelated to an employee's occupational
exposure to lead; and
(2) Advise the employee of any medical condition, occupational or
nonoccupational, which dictates further medical examination or
treatment.
(vi) Alternate physician determination mechanisms. The employer and
an employee or authorized employee representative may agree upon the use
of any alternate physician determination mechanism in lieu of the
multiple physician review mechanism provided by paragraph (j)(3)(iii) of
this section so long as the alternate mechanism is as expeditious and
protective as the requirements contained in this paragraph.
(4) Chelation. (i) The employer shall assure that any person whom he
retains, employs, supervises or controls does not engage in prophylactic
chelation of any employee at any time.
(ii) If therapeutic or diagnostic chelation is to be performed by
any person in paragraph (j)(4)(i) of this section, the employer shall
assure that it be done under the supervision of a licensed physician in
a clinical setting with thorough and appropriate medical monitoring and
that the employee is notified in writing prior to its occurrence.
(k) Medical removal protection--(1) Temporary medical removal and
return of an employee--(i) Temporary removal due to elevated blood lead
level. The employer shall remove an employee from work having an
exposure to lead at or above the action level on each occasion that a
periodic and a follow-up blood sampling test conducted pursuant to this
section indicate that the employee's blood lead level is at or above 50
[micro]g/dl; and,
(ii) Temporary removal due to a final medical determination. (A) The
employer shall remove an employee from work having an exposure to lead
at or above the action level on each occasion that a final medical
determination results in a medical finding, determination, or opinion
that the employee has a detected medical condition which places the
employee at increased risk of material impairment to health from
exposure to lead.
(B) For the purposes of this section, the phrase final medical
determination means the written medical opinion on the employees' health
status by the examining physician or, where relevant, the outcome of the
multiple physician review mechanism or alternate medical determination
mechanism used pursuant to the medical surveillance provisions of this
section.
(C) Where a final medical determination results in any recommended
special protective measures for an employee, or limitations on an
employee's exposure to lead, the employer shall implement and act
consistent with the recommendation.
(iii) Return of the employee to former job status. (A) The employer
shall return an employee to his or her former job status:
(1) For an employee removed due to a blood lead level at or above 50
[micro]g/dl when two consecutive blood sampling tests indicate that the
employee's blood lead level is below 40 [micro]g/dl;
(2) For an employee removed due to a final medical determination,
when a
[[Page 98]]
subsequent final medical determination results in a medical finding,
determination, or opinion that the employee no longer has a detected
medical condition which places the employee at increased risk of
material impairment to health from exposure to lead.
(B) For the purposes of this section, the requirement that an
employer return an employee to his or her former job status is not
intended to expand upon or restrict any rights an employee has or would
have had, absent temporary medical removal, to a specific job
classification or position under the terms of a collective bargaining
agreement.
(iv) Removal of other employee special protective measure or
limitations. The employer shall remove any limitations placed on an
employee or end any special protective measures provided to an employee
pursuant to a final medical determination when a subsequent final
medical determination indicates that the limitations or special
protective measures are no longer necessary.
(v) Employer options pending a final medical determination. Where
the multiple physician review mechanism, or alternate medical
determination mechanism used pursuant to the medical surveillance
provisions of this section, has not yet resulted in a final medical
determination with respect to an employee, the employer shall act as
follows:
(A) Removal. The employer may remove the employee from exposure to
lead, provide special protective measures to the employee, or place
limitations upon the employee, consistent with the medical findings,
determinations, or recommendations of any of the physicians who have
reviewed the employee's health status.
(B) Return. The employer may return the employee to his or her
former job status, end any special protective measures provided to the
employee, and remove any limitations placed upon the employee,
consistent with the medical findings, determinations, or recommendations
of any of the physicians who have reviewed the employee's health status,
with two exceptions.
(1) If the initial removal, special protection, or limitation of the
employee resulted from a final medical determination which differed from
the findings, determinations, or recommendations of the initial
physician or;
(2) If the employee has been on removal status for the preceding
eighteen months due to an elevated blood lead level, then the employer
shall await a final medical determination.
(2) Medical removal protection benefits--(i) Provision of medical
removal protection benefits. The employer shall provide an employee up
to eighteen (18) months of medical removal protection benefits on each
occasion that an employee is removed from exposure to lead or otherwise
limited pursuant to this section.
(ii) Definition of medical removal protection benefits. For the
purposes of this section, the requirement that an employer provide
medical removal protection benefits means that, as long as the job the
employee was removed from continues, the employer shall maintain the
total normal earnings, seniority and other employment rights and
benefits of an employee, including the employee's right to his or her
former job status as though the employee had not been medically removed
from the employee's job or otherwise medically limited.
(iii) Follow-up medical surveillance during the period of employee
removal or limitation. During the period of time that an employee is
medically removed from his or her job or otherwise medically limited,
the employer may condition the provision of medical removal protection
benefits upon the employee's participation in follow-up medical
surveillance made available pursuant to this section.
(iv) Workers' compensation claims. If a removed employee files a
claim for workers' compensation payments for a lead-related disability,
then the employer shall continue to provide medical removal protection
benefits pending disposition of the claim. To the extent that an award
is made to the employee for earnings lost during the period of removal,
the employer's medical removal protection obligation shall be reduced by
such amount. The employer shall receive no credit for workers'
compensation payments received by the employee for treatment- related
expenses.
[[Page 99]]
(v) Other credits. The employer's obligation to provide medical
removal protection benefits to a removed employee shall be reduced to
the extent that the employee receives compensation for earnings lost
during the period of removal either from a publicly or employer-funded
compensation program, or receives income from employment with another
employer made possible by virtue of the employee's removal.
(vi) Voluntary removal or restriction of an employee. Where an
employer, although not required by this section to do so, removes an
employee from exposure to lead or otherwise places limitations on an
employee due to the effects of lead exposure on the employee's medical
condition, the employer shall provide medical removal protection
benefits to the employee equal to that required by paragraph (k)(2) (i)
and (ii) of this section.
(l) Communication of hazards.--(1) General. (i) Hazard
communication. The employer shall include lead in the program
established to comply with the Hazard Communication Standard (HCS)
(Sec. 1910.1200). The employer shall ensure that each employee has
access to labels on containers of lead and safety data sheets, and is
trained in accordance with the provisions of HCS and paragraph (l) of
this section. The employer shall ensure that at least the following
hazards are addressed:
(A) Reproductive/developmental toxicity;
(B) Central nervous system effects;
(C) Kidney effects;
(D) Blood effects; and
(E) Acute toxicity effects.
(ii) The employer shall train each employee who is subject to
exposure to lead at or above the action level on any day, or who is
subject to exposure to lead compounds which may cause skin or eye
irritation (e.g., lead arsenate, lead azide), in accordance with the
requirements of this section. The employer shall institute a training
program and ensure employee participation in the program.
(iii) The employer shall provide the training program as initial
training prior to the time of job assignment or prior to the start up
date for this requirement, whichever comes last.
(iv) The employer shall also provide the training program at least
annually for each employee who is subject to lead exposure at or above
the action level on any day.
(2) Training program. The employer shall assure that each employee
is trained in the following:
(i) The content of this standard and its appendices;
(ii) The specific nature of the operations which could result in
exposure to lead above the action level;
(iii) The purpose, proper selection, fitting, use, and limitations
of respirators;
(iv) The purpose and a description of the medical surveillance
program, and the medical removal protection program including
information concerning the adverse health effects associated with
excessive exposure to lead (with particular attention to the adverse
reproductive effects on both males and females and hazards to the fetus
and additional precautions for employees who are pregnant);
(v) The engineering controls and work practices associated with the
employee's job assignment including training of employees to follow
relevant good work practices described in appendix B of this section;
(vi) The contents of any compliance plan in effect;
(vii) Instructions to employees that chelating agents should not
routinely be used to remove lead from their bodies and should not be
used at all except under the direction of a licensed physician; and
(viii) The employee's right of access to records under 29 CFR
1910.20.
(3) Access to information and training materials. (i) The employer
shall make readily available to all affected employees a copy of this
standard and its appendices.
(ii) The employer shall provide, upon request, all materials
relating to the employee information and training program to affected
employees and their designated representatives, and to the Assistant
Secretary and the Director.
(m) Signs--(1) General. (i) The employer shall post the following
warning
[[Page 100]]
signs in each work area where an employee's exposure to lead is above
the PEL.
DANGER
LEAD WORK AREA
MAY DAMAGE FERTILITY OR THE UNBORN CHILD
CAUSES DAMAGE TO THE CENTRAL NERVOUS SYSTEM
DO NOT EAT, DRINK OR SMOKE IN THIS AREA
(ii) The employer shall ensure that no statement appears on or near
any sign required by this paragraph (m) that contradicts or detracts
from the meaning of the required sign.
(iii) The employer shall ensure that signs required by this
paragraph (m) are illuminated and cleaned as necessary so that the
legend is readily visible.
(iv) The employer may use signs required by other statutes,
regulations or ordinances in addition to, or in combination with, signs
required by this paragraph (m).
(v) Prior to June 1, 2016, employers may use the following legend in
lieu of that specified in paragraph (m)(1)(i) of this section:
WARNING
LEAD WORK AREA
POISON
NO SMOKING OR EATING
(n) Recordkeeping--(1) Exposure assessment. (i) The employer shall
establish and maintain an accurate record of all monitoring and other
data used in conducting employee exposure assessments as required in
paragraph (d) of this section.
(ii) Exposure monitoring records shall include:
(A) The date(s), number, duration, location and results of each of
the samples taken if any, including a description of the sampling
procedure used to determine representative employee exposure where
applicable;
(B) A description of the sampling and analytical methods used and
evidence of their accuracy;
(C) The type of respiratory protective devices worn, if any;
(D) Name, social security number, and job classification of the
employee monitored and of all other employees whose exposure the
measurement is intended to represent; and
(E) The environmental variables that could affect the measurement of
employee exposure.
(iii) The employer shall maintain monitoring and other exposure
assessment records in accordance with the provisions of 29 CFR 1910.33.
(2) Medical surveillance. (i) The employer shall establish and
maintain an accurate record for each employee subject to medical
surveillance as required by paragraph (j) of this section.
(ii) This record shall include:
(A) The name, social security number, and description of the duties
of the employee;
(B) A copy of the physician's written opinions;
(C) Results of any airborne exposure monitoring done on or for that
employee and provided to the physician; and
(D) Any employee medical complaints related to exposure to lead.
(iii) The employer shall keep, or assure that the examining
physician keeps, the following medical records:
(A) A copy of the medical examination results including medical and
work history required under paragraph (j) of this section;
(B) A description of the laboratory procedures and a copy of any
standards or guidelines used to interpret the test results or references
to that information;
(C) A copy of the results of biological monitoring.
(iv) The employer shall maintain or assure that the physician
maintains medical records in accordance with the provisions of 29 CFR
1910.33.
(3) Medical removals. (i) The employer shall establish and maintain
an accurate record for each employee removed from current exposure to
lead pursuant to paragraph (k) of this section.
(ii) Each record shall include:
(A) The name and social security number of the employee;
(B) The date of each occasion that the employee was removed from
current exposure to lead as well as the corresponding date on which the
employee was returned to his or her former job status;
(C) A brief explanation of how each removal was or is being
accomplished; and
[[Page 101]]
(D) A statement with respect to each removal indicating whether or
not the reason for the removal was an elevated blood lead level.
(iii) The employer shall maintain each medical removal record for at
least the duration of an employee's employment.
(4) Objective data for exemption from requirement for initial
monitoring. (i) For purposes of this section, objective data are
information demonstrating that a particular product or material
containing lead or a specific process, operation, or activity involving
lead cannot release dust or fumes in concentrations at or above the
action level under any expected conditions of use. Objective data can be
obtained from an industry-wide study or from laboratory product test
results from manufacturers of lead containing products or materials. The
data the employer uses from an industry-wide survey must be obtained
under workplace conditions closely resembling the processes, types of
material, control methods, work practices and environmental conditions
in the employer's current operations.
(ii) The employer shall maintain the record of the objective data
relied upon for at least 30 years.
(5) Availability. The employer shall make available upon request all
records required to be maintained by paragraph (n) of this section to
affected employees, former employees, and their designated
representatives, and to the Assistant Secretary and the Director for
examination and copying.
(6) Transfer of records. (i) Whenever the employer ceases to do
business, the successor employer shall receive and retain all records
required to be maintained by paragraph (n) of this section.
(ii) The employer shall also comply with any additional requirements
involving the transfer of records set forth in 29 CFR 1910.1020(h).
(o) Observation of monitoring--(1) Employee observation. The
employer shall provide affected employees or their designated
representatives an opportunity to observe any monitoring of employee
exposure to lead conducted pursuant to paragraph (d) of this section.
(2) Observation procedures. (i) Whenever observation of the
monitoring of employee exposure to lead requires entry into an area
where the use of respirators, protective clothing or equipment is
required, the employer shall provide the observer with and assure the
use of such respirators, clothing and equipment, and shall require the
observer to comply with all other applicable safety and health
procedures.
(ii) Without interfering with the monitoring, observers shall be
entitled to:
(A) Receive an explanation of the measurement procedures;
(B) Observe all steps related to the monitoring of lead performed at
the place of exposure; and
(C) Record the results obtained or receive copies of the results
when returned by the laboratory.
(p) Appendices. The information contained in the appendices to this
section is not intended by itself, to create any additional obligations
not otherwise imposed by this standard nor detract from any existing
obligation.
Appendix A to Sec. 1926.62--Substance Data Sheet for Occupational
Exposure to Lead
I. Substance Identification
A. Substance: Pure lead (Pb) is a heavy metal at room temperature
and pressure and is a basic chemical element. It can combine with
various other substances to form numerous lead compounds.
B. Compounds covered by the standard: The word lead when used in
this interim final standard means elemental lead, all inorganic lead
compounds and a class of organic lead compounds called lead soaps. This
standard does not apply to other organic lead compounds.
C. Uses: Exposure to lead occurs in several different occupations in
the construction industry, including demolition or salvage of structures
where lead or lead-containing materials are present; removal or
encapsulation of lead-containing materials, new construction,
alteration, repair, or renovation of structures that contain lead or
materials containing lead; installation of products containing lead. In
addition, there are construction related activities where exposure to
lead may occur, including transportation, disposal, storage, or
containment of lead or materials containing lead on construction sites,
and maintenance operations associated with construction activities.
D. Permissible exposure: The permissible exposure limit (PEL) set by
the standard is 50 micrograms of lead per cubic meter of air (50
[micro]g/m\3\), averaged over an 8-hour workday.
[[Page 102]]
E. Action level: The interim final standard establishes an action
level of 30 micrograms of lead per cubic meter of air (30 [micro]g/
m\3\), averaged over an 8-hour workday. The action level triggers
several ancillary provisions of the standard such as exposure
monitoring, medical surveillance, and training.
II. Health Hazard Data
A. Ways in which lead enters your body. When absorbed into your body
in certain doses, lead is a toxic substance. The object of the lead
standard is to prevent absorption of harmful quantities of lead. The
standard is intended to protect you not only from the immediate toxic
effects of lead, but also from the serious toxic effects that may not
become apparent until years of exposure have passed. Lead can be
absorbed into your body by inhalation (breathing) and ingestion
(eating). Lead (except for certain organic lead compounds not covered by
the standard, such as tetraethyl lead) is not absorbed through your
skin. When lead is scattered in the air as a dust, fume respiratory
tract. Inhalation of airborne lead is generally the most important
source of occupational lead absorption. You can also absorb lead through
your digestive system if lead gets into your mouth and is swallowed. If
you handle food, cigarettes, chewing tobacco, or make-up which have lead
on them or handle them with hands contaminated with lead, this will
contribute to ingestion. A significant portion of the lead that you
inhale or ingest gets into your blood stream. Once in your blood stream,
lead is circulated throughout your body and stored in various organs and
body tissues. Some of this lead is quickly filtered out of your body and
excreted, but some remains in the blood and other tissues. As exposure
to lead continues, the amount stored in your body will increase if you
are absorbing more lead than your body is excreting. Even though you may
not be aware of any immediate symptoms of disease, this lead stored in
your tissues can be slowly causing irreversible damage, first to
individual cells, then to your organs and whole body systems.
B. Effects of overexposure to lead--(1) Short term (acute)
overexposure. Lead is a potent, systemic poison that serves no known
useful function once absorbed by your body. Taken in large enough doses,
lead can kill you in a matter of days. A condition affecting the brain
called acute encephalopathy may arise which develops quickly to
seizures, coma, and death from cardiorespiratory arrest. A short term
dose of lead can lead to acute encephalopathy. Short term occupational
exposures of this magnitude are highly unusual, but not impossible.
Similar forms of encephalopathy may, however, arise from extended,
chronic exposure to lower doses of lead. There is no sharp dividing line
between rapidly developing acute effects of lead, and chronic effects
which take longer to acquire. Lead adversely affects numerous body
systems, and causes forms of health impairment and disease which arise
after periods of exposure as short as days or as long as several years.
(2) Long-term (chronic) overexposure. Chronic overexposure to lead
may result in severe damage to your blood-forming, nervous, urinary and
reproductive systems. Some common symptoms of chronic overexposure
include loss of appetite, metallic taste in the mouth, anxiety,
constipation, nausea, pallor, excessive tiredness, weakness, insomnia,
headache, nervous irritability, muscle and joint pain or soreness, fine
tremors, numbness, dizziness, hyperactivity and colic. In lead colic
there may be severe abdominal pain. Damage to the central nervous system
in general and the brain (encephalopathy) in particular is one of the
most severe forms of lead poisoning. The most severe, often fatal, form
of encephalopathy may be preceded by vomiting, a feeling of dullness
progressing to drowsiness and stupor, poor memory, restlessness,
irritability, tremor, and convulsions. It may arise suddenly with the
onset of seizures, followed by coma, and death. There is a tendency for
muscular weakness to develop at the same time. This weakness may
progress to paralysis often observed as a characteristic ``wrist drop''
or ``foot drop'' and is a manifestation of a disease to the nervous
system called peripheral neuropathy. Chronic overexposure to lead also
results in kidney disease with few, if any, symptoms appearing until
extensive and most likely permanent kidney damage has occurred. Routine
laboratory tests reveal the presence of this kidney disease only after
about two-thirds of kidney function is lost. When overt symptoms of
urinary dysfunction arise, it is often too late to correct or prevent
worsening conditions, and progression to kidney dialysis or death is
possible. Chronic overexposure to lead impairs the reproductive systems
of both men and women. Overexposure to lead may result in decreased sex
drive, impotence and sterility in men. Lead can alter the structure of
sperm cells raising the risk of birth defects. There is evidence of
miscarriage and stillbirth in women whose husbands were exposed to lead
or who were exposed to lead themselves. Lead exposure also may result in
decreased fertility, and abnormal menstrual cycles in women. The course
of pregnancy may be adversely affected by exposure to lead since lead
crosses the placental barrier and poses risks to developing fetuses.
Children born of parents either one of whom were exposed to excess lead
levels are more likely to have birth defects, mental retardation,
behavioral disorders or die during the first year of childhood.
Overexposure to lead also disrupts the blood-forming system resulting in
decreased
[[Page 103]]
hemoglobin (the substance in the blood that carries oxygen to the cells)
and ultimately anemia. Anemia is characterized by weakness, pallor and
fatigability as a result of decreased oxygen carrying capacity in the
blood.
(3) Health protection goals of the standard. Prevention of adverse
health effects for most workers from exposure to lead throughout a
working lifetime requires that a worker's blood lead level (BLL, also
expressed as PbB) be maintained at or below forty micrograms per
deciliter of whole blood (40 [micro]g/dl). The blood lead levels of
workers (both male and female workers) who intend to have children
should be maintained below 30 [micro]g/dl to minimize adverse
reproductive health effects to the parents and to the developing fetus.
The measurement of your blood lead level (BLL) is the most useful
indicator of the amount of lead being absorbed by your body. Blood lead
levels are most often reported in units of milligrams (mg) or micrograms
([micro]g) of lead (1 mg=1000 [micro]g) per 100 grams (100g), 100
milliliters (100 ml) or deciliter (dl) of blood. These three units are
essentially the same. Sometime BLLs are expressed in the form of mg% or
[micro]g%. This is a shorthand notation for 100g, 100 ml, or dl.
(References to BLL measurements in this standard are expressed in the
form of [micro]g/dl.)
BLL measurements show the amount of lead circulating in your blood
stream, but do not give any information about the amount of lead stored
in your various tissues. BLL measurements merely show current absorption
of lead, not the effect that lead is having on your body or the effects
that past lead exposure may have already caused. Past research into
lead-related diseases, however, has focused heavily on associations
between BLLs and various diseases. As a result, your BLL is an important
indicator of the likelihood that you will gradually acquire a lead-
related health impairment or disease.
Once your blood lead level climbs above 40 [micro]g/dl, your risk of
disease increases. There is a wide variability of individual response to
lead, thus it is difficult to say that a particular BLL in a given
person will cause a particular effect. Studies have associated fatal
encephalopathy with BLLs as low as 150 [micro]g/dl. Other studies have
shown other forms of diseases in some workers with BLLs well below 80
[micro]g/dl. Your BLL is a crucial indicator of the risks to your
health, but one other factor is also extremely important. This factor is
the length of time you have had elevated BLLs. The longer you have an
elevated BLL, the greater the risk that large quantities of lead are
being gradually stored in your organs and tissues (body burden). The
greater your overall body burden, the greater the chances of substantial
permanent damage. The best way to prevent all forms of lead-related
impairments and diseases--both short term and long term--is to maintain
your BLL below 40 [micro]g/dl. The provisions of the standard are
designed with this end in mind.
Your employer has prime responsibility to assure that the provisions
of the standard are complied with both by the company and by individual
workers. You, as a worker, however, also have a responsibility to assist
your employer in complying with the standard. You can play a key role in
protecting your own health by learning about the lead hazards and their
control, learning what the standard requires, following the standard
where it governs your own actions, and seeing that your employer
complies with provisions governing his or her actions.
(4) Reporting signs and symptoms of health problems. You should
immediately notify your employer if you develop signs or symptoms
associated with lead poisoning or if you desire medical advice
concerning the effects of current or past exposure to lead or your
ability to have a healthy child. You should also notify your employer if
you have difficulty breathing during a respirator fit test or while
wearing a respirator. In each of these cases, your employer must make
available to you appropriate medical examinations or consultations.
These must be provided at no cost to you and at a reasonable time and
place. The standard contains a procedure whereby you can obtain a second
opinion by a physician of your choice if your employer selected the
initial physician.
Appendix B to Sec. 1926.62--Employee Standard Summary
This appendix summarizes key provisions of the interim final
standard for lead in construction that you as a worker should become
familiar with.
I. Permissible Exposure Limit (PEL)--Paragraph (C)
The standard sets a permissible exposure limit (PEL) of 50
micrograms of lead per cubic meter of air (50 [micro]g/m\3\), averaged
over an 8-hour workday which is referred to as a time-weighted average
(TWA). This is the highest level of lead in air to which you may be
permissibly exposed over an 8-hour workday. However, since this is an 8-
hour average, short exposures above the PEL are permitted so long as for
each 8-hour work day your average exposure does not exceed this level.
This interim final standard, however, takes into account the fact that
your daily exposure to lead can extend beyond a typical 8-hour workday
as the result of overtime or other alterations in your work schedule. To
deal with this situation, the standard contains a formula which reduces
your permissible exposure when you are exposed more than 8 hours. For
example, if you are exposed to lead for 10 hours a day, the maximum
permitted average exposure would be 40 [micro]g/m\3\.
[[Page 104]]
II. Exposure Assessment--Paragraph (D)
If lead is present in your workplace in any quantity, your employer
is required to make an initial determination of whether any employee's
exposure to lead exceeds the action level (30 [micro]g/m\3\ averaged
over an 8-hour day). Employee exposure is that exposure which would
occur if the employee were not using a respirator. This initial
determination requires your employer to monitor workers' exposures
unless he or she has objective data which can demonstrate conclusively
that no employee will be exposed to lead in excess of the action level.
Where objective data is used in lieu of actual monitoring the employer
must establish and maintain an accurate record, documenting its
relevancy in assessing exposure levels for current job conditions. If
such objective data is available, the employer need proceed no further
on employee exposure assessment until such time that conditions have
changed and the determination is no longer valid.
Objective data may be compiled from various sources, e.g., insurance
companies and trade associations and information from suppliers or
exposure data collected from similar operations. Objective data may also
comprise previously-collected sampling data including area monitoring.
If it cannot be determined through using objective data that worker
exposure is less than the action level, your employer must conduct
monitoring or must rely on relevant previous personal sampling, if
available. Where monitoring is required for the initial determination,
it may be limited to a representative number of employees who are
reasonably expected to have the highest exposure levels. If your
employer has conducted appropriate air sampling for lead in the past 12
months, he or she may use these results, provided they are applicable to
the same employee tasks and exposure conditions and meet the
requirements for accuracy as specified in the standard. As with
objective data, if such results are relied upon for the initial
determination, your employer must establish and maintain a record as to
the relevancy of such data to current job conditions.
If there have been any employee complaints of symptoms which may be
attributable to exposure to lead or if there is any other information or
observations which would indicate employee exposure to lead, this must
also be considered as part of the initial determination.
If this initial determination shows that a reasonable possibility
exists that any employee may be exposed, without regard to respirators,
over the action level, your employer must set up an air monitoring
program to determine the exposure level representative of each employee
exposed to lead at your workplace. In carrying out this air monitoring
program, your employer is not required to monitor the exposure of every
employee, but he or she must monitor a representative number of
employees and job types. Enough sampling must be done to enable each
employee's exposure level to be reasonably represent full shift
exposure. In addition, these air samples must be taken under conditions
which represent each employee's regular, daily exposure to lead.
Sampling performed in the past 12 months may be used to determine
exposures above the action level if such sampling was conducted during
work activities essentially similar to present work conditions.
The standard lists certain tasks which may likely result in
exposures to lead in excess of the PEL and, in some cases, exposures in
excess of 50 times the PEL. If you are performing any of these tasks,
your employer must provide you with appropriate respiratory protection,
protective clothing and equipment, change areas, hand washing
facilities, biological monitoring, and training until such time that an
exposure assessment is conducted which demonstrates that your exposure
level is below the PEL.
If you are exposed to lead and air sampling is performed, your
employer is required to notify you in writing within 5 working days of
the air monitoring results which represent your exposure. If the results
indicate that your exposure exceeds the PEL (without regard to your use
of a respirator), then your employer must also notify you of this in
writing, and provide you with a description of the corrective action
that has been taken or will be taken to reduce your exposure.
Your exposure must be rechecked by monitoring, at least every six
months if your exposure is at or over the action level but below the
PEL. Your employer may discontinue monitoring for you if 2 consecutive
measurements, taken at least 7 days apart, are at or below the action
level. Air monitoring must be repeated every 3 months if you are exposed
over the PEL. Your employer must continue monitoring for you at this
frequency until 2 consecutive measurements, taken at least 7 days apart,
are below the PEL but above the action level, at which time your
employer must repeat monitoring of your exposure every six months and
may discontinue monitoring only after your exposure drops to or below
the action level. However, whenever there is a change of equipment,
process, control, or personnel or a new type of job is added at your
workplace which may result in new or additional exposure to lead, your
employer must perform additional monitoring.
III. Methods of Compliance--Paragraph (E)
Your employer is required to assure that no employee is exposed to
lead in excess of the PEL as an 8-hour TWA. The interim final standard
for lead in construction requires employers to institute engineering and
work
[[Page 105]]
practice controls including administrative controls to the extent
feasible to reduce employee exposure to lead. Where such controls are
feasible but not adequate to reduce exposures below the PEL they must be
used nonetheless to reduce exposures to the lowest level that can be
accomplished by these means and then supplemented with appropriate
respiratory protection.
Your employer is required to develop and implement a written
compliance program prior to the commencement of any job where employee
exposures may reach the PEL as an 8-hour TWA. The interim final standard
identifies the various elements that must be included in the plan. For
example, employers are required to include a description of operations
in which lead is emitted, detailing other relevant information about the
operation such as the type of equipment used, the type of material
involved, employee job responsibilities, operating procedures and
maintenance practices. In addition, your employer's compliance plan must
specify the means that will be used to achieve compliance and, where
engineering controls are required, include any engineering plans or
studies that have been used to select the control methods. If
administrative controls involving job rotation are used to reduce
employee exposure to lead, the job rotation schedule must be included in
the compliance plan. The plan must also detail the type of protective
clothing and equipment, including respirators, housekeeping and hygiene
practices that will be used to protect you from the adverse effects of
exposure to lead.
The written compliance program must be made available, upon request,
to affected employees and their designated representatives, the
Assistant Secretary and the Director.
Finally, the plan must be reviewed and updated at least every 6
months to assure it reflects the current status in exposure control.
IV. Respiratory Protection--Paragraph (F)
Your employer is required to provide and assure your use of
respirators when your exposure to lead is not controlled below the PEL
by other means. The employer must pay the cost of the respirator.
Whenever you request one, your employer is also required to provide you
a respirator even if your air exposure level is not above the PEL. You
might desire a respirator when, for example, you have received medical
advice that your lead absorption should be decreased. Or, you may intend
to have children in the near future, and want to reduce the level of
lead in your body to minimize adverse reproductive effects. While
respirators are the least satisfactory means of controlling your
exposure, they are capable of providing significant protection if
properly chosen, fitted, worn, cleaned, maintained, and replaced when
they stop providing adequate protection.
Your employer is required to select respirators from the types
listed in Table I of the Respiratory Protection section of the standard
(Sec. 1926.62 (f)). Any respirator chosen must be approved by the
National Institute for Occupational Safety and Health (NIOSH) under the
provisions of 42 CFR part 84. This respirator selection table will
enable your employer to choose a type of respirator that will give you a
proper amount of protection based on your airborne lead exposure. Your
employer may select a type of respirator that provides greater
protection than that required by the standard; that is, one recommended
for a higher concentration of lead than is present in your workplace.
For example, a powered air-purifying respirator (PAPR) is much more
protective than a typical negative pressure respirator, and may also be
more comfortable to wear. A PAPR has a filter, cartridge, or canister to
clean the air, and a power source that continuously blows filtered air
into your breathing zone. Your employer might make a PAPR available to
you to ease the burden of having to wear a respirator for long periods
of time. The standard provides that you can obtain a PAPR upon request.
Your employer must also start a Respiratory Protection Program. This
program must include written procedures for the proper selection, use,
cleaning, storage, and maintenance of respirators.
Your employer must ensure that your respirator facepiece fits
properly. Proper fit of a respirator facepiece is critical to your
protection from airborne lead. Obtaining a proper fit on each employee
may require your employer to make available several different types of
respirator masks. To ensure that your respirator fits properly and that
facepiece leakage is minimal, your employer must give you either a
qualitative or quantitative fit test as specified in appendix A of the
Respiratory Protection standard located at 29 CFR 1910.134.
You must also receive from your employer proper training in the use
of respirators. Your employer is required to teach you how to wear a
respirator, to know why it is needed, and to understand its limitations.
The standard provides that if your respirator uses filter elements,
you must be given an opportunity to change the filter elements whenever
an increase in breathing resistance is detected. You also must be
permitted to periodically leave your work area to wash your face and
respirator facepiece whenever necessary to prevent skin irritation. If
you ever have difficulty in breathing during a fit test or while using a
respirator, your employer must make a medical examination available to
you to determine whether you can safely wear a respirator. The result of
this examination may be to give you a positive pressure respirator
(which reduces
[[Page 106]]
breathing resistance) or to provide alternative means of protection.
V. Protective Work Clothing and Equipment--Paragraph (G)
If you are exposed to lead above the PEL as an 8-hour TWA, without
regard to your use of a respirator, or if you are exposed to lead
compounds such as lead arsenate or lead azide which can cause skin and
eye irritation, your employer must provide you with protective work
clothing and equipment appropriate for the hazard. If work clothing is
provided, it must be provided in a clean and dry condition at least
weekly, and daily if your airborne exposure to lead is greater than 200
[micro]g/m\3\. Appropriate protective work clothing and equipment can
include coveralls or similar full-body work clothing, gloves, hats,
shoes or disposable shoe coverlets, and face shields or vented goggles.
Your employer is required to provide all such equipment at no cost to
you. In addition, your employer is responsible for providing repairs and
replacement as necessary, and also is responsible for the cleaning,
laundering or disposal of protective clothing and equipment.
The interim final standard requires that your employer assure that
you follow good work practices when you are working in areas where your
exposure to lead may exceed the PEL. With respect to protective clothing
and equipment, where appropriate, the following procedures should be
observed prior to beginning work:
1. Change into work clothing and shoe covers in the clean section of
the designated changing areas;
2. Use work garments of appropriate protective gear, including
respirators before entering the work area; and
3. Store any clothing not worn under protective clothing in the
designated changing area.
Workers should follow these procedures upon leaving the work area:
1. HEPA vacuum heavily contaminated protective work clothing while
it is still being worn. At no time may lead be removed from protective
clothing by any means which result in uncontrolled dispersal of lead
into the air;
2. Remove shoe covers and leave them in the work area;
3. Remove protective clothing and gear in the dirty area of the
designated changing area. Remove protective coveralls by carefully
rolling down the garment to reduce exposure to dust.
4. Remove respirators last; and
5. Wash hands and face.
Workers should follow these procedures upon finishing work for the
day (in addition to procedures described above):
1. Where applicable, place disposal coveralls and shoe covers with
the abatement waste;
2. Contaminated clothing which is to be cleaned, laundered or
disposed of must be placed in closed containers in the change room.
3. Clean protective gear, including respirators, according to
standard procedures;
4. Wash hands and face again. If showers are available, take a
shower and wash hair. If shower facilities are not available at the work
site, shower immediately at home and wash hair.
VI. Housekeeping--Paragraph (H)
Your employer must establish a housekeeping program sufficient to
maintain all surfaces as free as practicable of accumulations of lead
dust. Vacuuming is the preferred method of meeting this requirement, and
the use of compressed air to clean floors and other surfaces is
generally prohibited unless removal with compressed air is done in
conjunction with ventilation systems designed to contain dispersal of
the lead dust. Dry or wet sweeping, shoveling, or brushing may not be
used except where vacuuming or other equally effective methods have been
tried and do not work. Vacuums must be used equipped with a special
filter called a high-efficiency particulate air (HEPA) filter and
emptied in a manner which minimizes the reentry of lead into the
workplace.
VII. Hygiene Facilities and Practices--Paragraph (I)
The standard requires that hand washing facilities be provided where
occupational exposure to lead occurs. In addition, change areas, showers
(where feasible), and lunchrooms or eating areas are to be made
available to workers exposed to lead above the PEL. Your employer must
assure that except in these facilities, food and beverage is not present
or consumed, tobacco products are not present or used, and cosmetics are
not applied, where airborne exposures are above the PEL. Change rooms
provided by your employer must be equipped with separate storage
facilities for your protective clothing and equipment and street clothes
to avoid cross-contamination. After showering, no required protective
clothing or equipment worn during the shift may be worn home. It is
important that contaminated clothing or equipment be removed in change
areas and not be worn home or you will extend your exposure and expose
your family since lead from your clothing can accumulate in your house,
car, etc.
Lunchrooms or eating areas may not be entered with protective
clothing or equipment unless surface dust has been removed by vacuuming,
downdraft booth, or other cleaning method. Finally, workers exposed
[[Page 107]]
above the PEL must wash both their hands and faces prior to eating,
drinking, smoking or applying cosmetics.
All of the facilities and hygiene practices just discussed are
essential to minimize additional sources of lead absorption from
inhalation or ingestion of lead that may accumulate on you, your
clothes, or your possessions. Strict compliance with these provisions
can virtually eliminate several sources of lead exposure which
significantly contribute to excessive lead absorption.
VIII. Medical Surveillance--Paragraph (J)
The medical surveillance program is part of the standard's
comprehensive approach to the prevention of lead-related disease. Its
purpose is to supplement the main thrust of the standard which is aimed
at minimizing airborne concentrations of lead and sources of ingestion.
Only medical surveillance can determine if the other provisions of the
standard have affectively protected you as an individual. Compliance
with the standard's provision will protect most workers from the adverse
effects of lead exposure, but may not be satisfactory to protect
individual workers (1) who have high body burdens of lead acquired over
past years, (2) who have additional uncontrolled sources of non-
occupational lead exposure, (3) who exhibit unusual variations in lead
absorption rates, or (4) who have specific non-work related medical
conditions which could be aggravated by lead exposure (e.g., renal
disease, anemia). In addition, control systems may fail, or hygiene and
respirator programs may be inadequate. Periodic medical surveillance of
individual workers will help detect those failures. Medical surveillance
will also be important to protect your reproductive ability-regardless
of whether you are a man or woman.
All medical surveillance required by the interim final standard must
be performed by or under the supervision of a licensed physician. The
employer must provide required medical surveillance without cost to
employees and at a reasonable time and place. The standard's medical
surveillance program has two parts--periodic biological monitoring and
medical examinations. Your employer's obligation to offer you medical
surveillance is triggered by the results of the air monitoring program.
Full medical surveillance must be made available to all employees who
are or may be exposed to lead in excess of the action level for more
than 30 days a year and whose blood lead level exceeds 40 [micro]g/dl.
Initial medical surveillance consisting of blood sampling and analysis
for lead and zinc protoporphyrin must be provided to all employees
exposed at any time (1 day) above the action level.
Biological monitoring under the standard must be provided at least
every 2 months for the first 6 months and every 6 months thereafter
until your blood lead level is below 40 [micro]g/dl. A zinc
protoporphyrin (ZPP) test is a very useful blood test which measures an
adverse metabolic effect of lead on your body and is therefore an
indicator of lead toxicity.
If your BLL exceeds 40 [micro]g/dl the monitoring frequency must be
increased from every 6 months to at least every 2 months and not reduced
until two consecutive BLLs indicate a blood lead level below 40
[micro]g/dl. Each time your BLL is determined to be over 40 [micro]g/dl,
your employer must notify you of this in writing within five working
days of his or her receipt of the test results. The employer must also
inform you that the standard requires temporary medical removal with
economic protection when your BLL exceeds 50 [micro]g/dl. (See
Discussion of Medical Removal Protection-Paragraph (k).) Anytime your
BLL exceeds 50 [micro]g/dl your employer must make available to you
within two weeks of receipt of these test results a second follow-up BLL
test to confirm your BLL. If the two tests both exceed 50 [micro]g/dl,
and you are temporarily removed, then your employer must make successive
BLL tests available to you on a monthly basis during the period of your
removal.
Medical examinations beyond the initial one must be made available
on an annual basis if your blood lead level exceeds 40 [micro]g/dl at
any time during the preceding year and you are being exposed above the
airborne action level of 30 [micro]g/m\3\ for 30 or more days per year.
The initial examination will provide information to establish a baseline
to which subsequent data can be compared.
An initial medical examination to consist of blood sampling and
analysis for lead and zinc protoporphyrin must also be made available
(prior to assignment) for each employee being assigned for the first
time to an area where the airborne concentration of lead equals or
exceeds the action level at any time. In addition, a medical examination
or consultation must be made available as soon as possible if you notify
your employer that you are experiencing signs or symptoms commonly
associated with lead poisoning or that you have difficulty breathing
while wearing a respirator or during a respirator fit test. You must
also be provided a medical examination or consultation if you notify
your employer that you desire medical advice concerning the effects of
current or past exposure to lead on your ability to procreate a healthy
child.
Finally, appropriate follow-up medical examinations or consultations
may also be provided for employees who have been temporarily removed
from exposure under the medical removal protection provisions of the
standard. (See Part IX, below.)
The standard specifies the minimum content of pre-assignment and
annual medical examinations. The content of other types of medical
examinations and consultations is
[[Page 108]]
left up to the sound discretion of the examining physician. Pre-
assignment and annual medical examinations must include (1) a detailed
work history and medical history; (2) a thorough physical examination,
including an evaluation of your pulmonary status if you will be required
to use a respirator; (3) a blood pressure measurement; and (4) a series
of laboratory tests designed to check your blood chemistry and your
kidney function. In addition, at any time upon your request, a
laboratory evaluation of male fertility will be made (microscopic
examination of a sperm sample), or a pregnancy test will be given.
The standard does not require that you participate in any of the
medical procedures, tests, etc. which your employer is required to make
available to you. Medical surveillance can, however, play a very
important role in protecting your health. You are strongly encouraged,
therefore, to participate in a meaningful fashion. The standard contains
a multiple physician review mechanism which will give you a chance to
have a physician of your choice directly participate in the medical
surveillance program. If you are dissatisfied with an examination by a
physician chosen by your employer, you can select a second physician to
conduct an independent analysis. The two doctors would attempt to
resolve any differences of opinion, and select a third physician to
resolve any firm dispute. Generally your employer will choose the
physician who conducts medical surveillance under the lead standard-
unless you and your employer can agree on the choice of a physician or
physicians. Some companies and unions have agreed in advance, for
example, to use certain independent medical laboratories or panels of
physicians. Any of these arrangements are acceptable so long as required
medical surveillance is made available to workers.
The standard requires your employer to provide certain information
to a physician to aid in his or her examination of you. This information
includes (1) the standard and its appendices, (2) a description of your
duties as they relate to occupational lead exposure, (3) your exposure
level or anticipated exposure level, (4) a description of any personal
protective equipment you wear, (5) prior blood lead level results, and
(6) prior written medical opinions concerning you that the employer has.
After a medical examination or consultation the physician must prepare a
written report which must contain (1) the physician's opinion as to
whether you have any medical condition which places you at increased
risk of material impairment to health from exposure to lead, (2) any
recommended special protective measures to be provided to you, (3) any
blood lead level determinations, and (4) any recommended limitation on
your use of respirators. This last element must include a determination
of whether you can wear a powered air purifying respirator (PAPR) if you
are found unable to wear a negative pressure respirator.
The medical surveillance program of the interim lead standard may at
some point in time serve to notify certain workers that they have
acquired a disease or other adverse medical condition as a result of
occupational lead exposure. If this is true, these workers might have
legal rights to compensation from public agencies, their employers,
firms that supply hazardous products to their employers, or other
persons. Some states have laws, including worker compensation laws, that
disallow a worker who learns of a job-related health impairment to sue,
unless the worker sues within a short period of time after learning of
the impairment. (This period of time may be a matter of months or
years.) An attorney can be consulted about these possibilities. It
should be stressed that OSHA is in no way trying to either encourage or
discourage claims or lawsuits. However, since results of the standard's
medical surveillance program can significantly affect the legal remedies
of a worker who has acquired a job-related disease or impairment, it is
proper for OSHA to make you aware of this.
The medical surveillance section of the standard also contains
provisions dealing with chelation. Chelation is the use of certain drugs
(administered in pill form or injected into the body) to reduce the
amount of lead absorbed in body tissues. Experience accumulated by the
medical and scientific communities has largely confirmed the
effectiveness of this type of therapy for the treatment of very severe
lead poisoning. On the other hand, it has also been established that
there can be a long list of extremely harmful side effects associated
with the use of chelating agents. The medical community has balanced the
advantages and disadvantages resulting from the use of chelating agents
in various circumstances and has established when the use of these
agents is acceptable. The standard includes these accepted limitations
due to a history of abuse of chelation therapy by some lead companies.
The most widely used chelating agents are calcium disodium EDTA, (Ca Na2
EDTA), Calcium Disodium Versenate (Versenate), and d-penicillamine
(pencillamine or Cupramine).
The standard prohibits ``prophylactic chelation'' of any employee by
any person the employer retains, supervises or controls. Prophylactic
chelation is the routine use of chelating or similarly acting drugs to
prevent elevated blood levels in workers who are occupationally exposed
to lead, or the use of these drugs to routinely lower blood lead levels
to predesignated concentrations believed to be ``safe''. It should be
emphasized that where an employer takes a worker who has no symptoms of
lead poisoning and
[[Page 109]]
has chelation carried out by a physician (either inside or outside of a
hospital) solely to reduce the worker's blood lead level, that will
generally be considered prophylactic chelation. The use of a hospital
and a physician does not mean that prophylactic chelation is not being
performed. Routine chelation to prevent increased or reduce current
blood lead levels is unacceptable whatever the setting.
The standard allows the use of ``therapeutic'' or ``diagnostic''
chelation if administered under the supervision of a licensed physician
in a clinical setting with thorough and appropriate medical monitoring.
Therapeutic chelation responds to severe lead poisoning where there are
marked symptoms. Diagnostic chelation involved giving a patient a dose
of the drug then collecting all urine excreted for some period of time
as an aid to the diagnosis of lead poisoning.
In cases where the examining physician determines that chelation is
appropriate, you must be notified in writing of this fact before such
treatment. This will inform you of a potentially harmful treatment, and
allow you to obtain a second opinion.
IX. Medical Removal Protection--Paragraph (K)
Excessive lead absorption subjects you to increased risk of disease.
Medical removal protection (MRP) is a means of protecting you when, for
whatever reasons, other methods, such as engineering controls, work
practices, and respirators, have failed to provide the protection you
need. MRP involves the temporary removal of a worker from his or her
regular job to a place of significantly lower exposure without any loss
of earnings, seniority, or other employment rights or benefits. The
purpose of this program is to cease further lead absorption and allow
your body to naturally excrete lead which has previously been absorbed.
Temporary medical removal can result from an elevated blood lead level,
or a medical opinion. For up to 18 months, or for as long as the job the
employee was removed from lasts, protection is provided as a result of
either form of removal. The vast majority of removed workers, however,
will return to their former jobs long before this eighteen month period
expires.
You may also be removed from exposure even if your blood lead level
is below 50 [micro]g/dl if a final medical determination indicates that
you temporarily need reduced lead exposure for medical reasons. If the
physician who is implementing your employers medical program makes a
final written opinion recommending your removal or other special
protective measures, your employer must implement the physician's
recommendation. If you are removed in this manner, you may only be
returned when the doctor indicates that it is safe for you to do so.
The standard does not give specific instructions dealing with what
an employer must do with a removed worker. Your job assignment upon
removal is a matter for you, your employer and your union (if any) to
work out consistent with existing procedures for job assignments. Each
removal must be accomplished in a manner consistent with existing
collective bargaining relationships. Your employer is given broad
discretion to implement temporary removals so long as no attempt is made
to override existing agreements. Similarly, a removed worker is provided
no right to veto an employer's choice which satisfies the standard.
In most cases, employers will likely transfer removed employees to
other jobs with sufficiently low lead exposure. Alternatively, a
worker's hours may be reduced so that the time weighted average exposure
is reduced, or he or she may be temporarily laid off if no other
alternative is feasible.
In all of these situation, MRP benefits must be provided during the
period of removal--i.e., you continue to receive the same earnings,
seniority, and other rights and benefits you would have had if you had
not been removed. Earnings includes more than just your base wage; it
includes overtime, shift differentials, incentives, and other
compensation you would have earned if you had not been removed. During
the period of removal you must also be provided with appropriate follow-
up medical surveillance. If you were removed because your blood lead
level was too high, you must be provided with a monthly blood test. If a
medical opinion caused your removal, you must be provided medical tests
or examinations that the doctor believes to be appropriate. If you do
not participate in this follow up medical surveillance, you may lose
your eligibility for MRP benefits.
When you are medically eligible to return to your former job, your
employer must return you to your ``former job status.'' This means that
you are entitled to the position, wages, benefits, etc., you would have
had if you had not been removed. If you would still be in your old job
if no removal had occurred that is where you go back. If not, you are
returned consistent with whatever job assignment discretion your
employer would have had if no removal had occurred. MRP only seeks to
maintain your rights, not expand them or diminish them.
If you are removed under MRP and you are also eligible for worker
compensation or other compensation for lost wages, your employer's MRP
benefits obligation is reduced by the amount that you actually receive
from these other sources. This is also true if you obtain other
employment during the time you are laid off with MRP benefits.
The standard also covers situations where an employer voluntarily
removes a worker from exposure to lead due to the effects of
[[Page 110]]
lead on the employee's medical condition, even though the standard does
not require removal. In these situations MRP benefits must still be
provided as though the standard required removal. Finally, it is
important to note that in all cases where removal is required,
respirators cannot be used as a substitute. Respirators may be used
before removal becomes necessary, but not as an alternative to a
transfer to a low exposure job, or to a lay-off with MRP benefits.
X. Employee Information and Training--Paragraph (L)
Your employer is required to provide an information and training
program for all employees exposed to lead above the action level or who
may suffer skin or eye irritation from lead compounds such as lead
arsenate or lead azide. The program must train these employees regarding
the specific hazards associated with their work environment, protective
measures which can be taken, including the contents of any compliance
plan in effect, the danger of lead to their bodies (including their
reproductive systems), and their rights under the standard. All
employees must be trained prior to initial assignment to areas where
there is a possibility of exposure over the action level.
This training program must also be provided at least annually
thereafter unless further exposure above the action level will not
occur.
XI. Signs--Paragraph (M)
The standard requires that the following warning sign be posted in
work areas when the exposure to lead is above the PEL:
DANGER
LEAD WORK AREA
MAY DAMAGE FERTILITY OR THE UNBORN CHILD
CAUSES DAMAGE TO THE CENTRAL NERVOUS SYSTEM
DO NOT EAT, DRINK OR SMOKE IN THIS AREA
Prior to June 1, 2016, employers may use the following legend in
lieu of that specified above:
WARNING
LEAD WORK AREA
POISON
NO SMOKING OR EATING
* * * * *
XII. Recordkeeping--Paragraph (N)
Your employer is required to keep all records of exposure monitoring
for airborne lead. These records must include the name and job
classification of employees measured, details of the sampling and
analytical techniques, the results of this sampling, and the type of
respiratory protection being worn by the person sampled. Such records
are to be retained for at least 30 years. Your employer is also required
to keep all records of biological monitoring and medical examination
results. These records must include the names of the employees, the
physician's written opinion, and a copy of the results of the
examination. Medical records must be preserved and maintained for the
duration of employment plus 30 years. However, if the employee's
duration of employment is less than one year, the employer need not
retain that employee's medical records beyond the period of employment
if they are provided to the employee upon termination of employment.
Recordkeeping is also required if you are temporarily removed from
your job under the medical removal protection program. This record must
include your name and social security number, the date of your removal
and return, how the removal was or is being accomplished, and whether or
not the reason for the removal was an elevated blood lead level. Your
employer is required to keep each medical removal record only for as
long as the duration of an employee's employment.
The standard requires that if you request to see or copy
environmental monitoring, blood lead level monitoring, or medical
removal records, they must be made available to you or to a
representative that you authorize. Your union also has access to these
records. Medical records other than BLL's must also be provided upon
request to you, to your physician or to any other person whom you may
specifically designate. Your union does not have access to your personal
medical records unless you authorize their access.
XIII. Observation of Monitoring--Paragraph (O)
When air monitoring for lead is performed at your workplace as
required by this standard, your employer must allow you or someone you
designate to act as an observer of the monitoring. Observers are
entitled to an explanation of the measurement procedure, and to record
the results obtained. Since results will not normally be available at
the time of the monitoring, observers are entitled to record or receive
the results of the monitoring when returned by the laboratory. Your
employer is required to provide the observer with any personal
protective devices required to be worn by employees working in the area
that is being monitored. The employer must require the observer to wear
all such equipment and to comply with all other applicable safety and
health procedures.
[[Page 111]]
XIV. For Additional Information
A. A copy of the interim standard for lead in construction can be
obtained free of charge by calling or writing the OSHA Office of
Publications, room N-3101, United States Department of Labor,
Washington, DC 20210: Telephone (202) 219-4667.
B. Additional information about the standard, its enforcement, and
your employer's compliance can be obtained from the nearest OSHA Area
Office listed in your telephone directory under United States
Government/Department of Labor.
Appendix C to Sec. 1926.62--Medical Surveillance Guidelines
Introduction
The primary purpose of the Occupational Safety and Health Act of
1970 is to assure, so far as possible, safe and healthful working
conditions for every working man and woman. The interim final
occupational health standard for lead in construction is designed to
protect workers exposed to inorganic lead including metallic lead, all
inorganic lead compounds and organic lead soaps.
Under this interim final standard occupational exposure to inorganic
lead is to be limited to 50 [micro]g/m\3\ (micrograms per cubic meter)
based on an 8 hour time-weighted average (TWA). This permissible
exposure limit (PEL) must be achieved through a combination of
engineering, work practice and administrative controls to the extent
feasible. Where these controls are in place but are found not to reduce
employee exposures to or below the PEL, they must be used nonetheless,
and supplemented with respirators to meet the 50 [micro]g/m\3\ exposure
limit.
The standard also provides for a program of biological monitoring
for employees exposed to lead above the action level at any time, and
additional medical surveillance for all employees exposed to levels of
inorganic lead above 30 [micro]g/m\3\ (TWA) for more than 30 days per
year and whose BLL exceeds 40 [micro]g/dl.
The purpose of this document is to outline the medical surveillance
provisions of the interim standard for inorganic lead in construction,
and to provide further information to the physician regarding the
examination and evaluation of workers exposed to inorganic lead.
Section 1 provides a detailed description of the monitoring
procedure including the required frequency of blood testing for exposed
workers, provisions for medical removal protection (MRP), the
recommended right of the employee to a second medical opinion, and
notification and recordkeeping requirements of the employer. A
discussion of the requirements for respirator use and respirator
monitoring and OSHA's position on prophylactic chelation therapy are
also included in this section.
Section 2 discusses the toxic effects and clinical manifestations of
lead poisoning and effects of lead intoxication on enzymatic pathways in
heme synthesis. The adverse effects on both male and female reproductive
capacity and on the fetus are also discussed.
Section 3 outlines the recommended medical evaluation of the worker
exposed to inorganic lead, including details of the medical history,
physical examination, and recommended laboratory tests, which are based
on the toxic effects of lead as discussed in Section 2.
Section 4 provides detailed information concerning the laboratory
tests available for the monitoring of exposed workers. Included also is
a discussion of the relative value of each test and the limitations and
precautions which are necessary in the interpretation of the laboratory
results.
I. Medical Surveillance and Monitoring Requirements for Workers Exposed
to Inorganic Lead
Under the interim final standard for inorganic lead in the
construction industry, initial medical surveillance consisting of
biological monitoring to include blood lead and ZPP level determination
shall be provided to employees exposed to lead at or above the action
level on any one day. In addition, a program of biological monitoring is
to be made available to all employees exposed above the action level at
any time and additional medical surveillance is to be made available to
all employees exposed to lead above 30 [micro]g/m\3\ TWA for more than
30 days each year and whose BLL exceeds 40 [micro]g/dl. This program
consists of periodic blood sampling and medical evaluation to be
performed on a schedule which is defined by previous laboratory results,
worker complaints or concerns, and the clinical assessment of the
examining physician.
Under this program, the blood lead level (BLL) of all employees who
are exposed to lead above 30 [micro]g/m\3\ for more than 30 days per
year or whose blood lead is above 40 [micro]g/dl but exposed for no more
than 30 days per year is to be determined at least every two months for
the first six months of exposure and every six months thereafter. The
frequency is increased to every two months for employees whose last
blood lead level was 40 [micro]g/dl or above. For employees who are
removed from exposure to lead due to an elevated blood lead, a new blood
lead level must be measured monthly. A zinc protoporphyrin (ZPP)
measurement is strongly recommended on each occasion that a blood lead
level measurement is made.
An annual medical examination and consultation performed under the
guidelines discussed in Section 3 is to be made available to each
employee exposed above 30 [micro]g/m\3\ for
[[Page 112]]
more than 30 days per year for whom a blood test conducted at any time
during the preceding 12 months indicated a blood lead level at or above
40 [micro]g/dl. Also, an examination is to be given to all employees
prior to their assignment to an area in which airborne lead
concentrations reach or exceed the 30 [micro]g/m\3\ for more than 30
days per year. In addition, a medical examination must be provided as
soon as possible after notification by an employee that the employee has
developed signs or symptoms commonly associated with lead intoxication,
that the employee desires medical advice regarding lead exposure and the
ability to procreate a healthy child, or that the employee has
demonstrated difficulty in breathing during a respirator fitting test or
during respirator use. An examination is also to be made available to
each employee removed from exposure to lead due to a risk of sustaining
material impairment to health, or otherwise limited or specially
protected pursuant to medical recommendations.
Results of biological monitoring or the recommendations of an
examining physician may necessitate removal of an employee from further
lead exposure pursuant to the standard's medical removal protection
(MRP) program. The object of the MRP program is to provide temporary
medical removal to workers either with substantially elevated blood lead
levels or otherwise at risk of sustaining material health impairment
from continued substantial exposure to lead.
Under the standard's ultimate worker removal criteria, a worker is
to be removed from any work having an eight hour TWA exposure to lead of
30 [micro]g/m\3\ when his or her blood lead level reaches 50 [micro]g/dl
and is confirmed by a second follow-up blood lead level performed within
two weeks after the employer receives the results of the first blood
sampling test. Return of the employee to his or her job status depends
on a worker's blood lead level declining to 40 [micro]g/dl.
As part of the interim standard, the employer is required to notify
in writing each employee whose blood lead level exceeds 40 [micro]g/dl.
In addition each such employee is to be informed that the standard
requires medical removal with MRP benefits, discussed below, when an
employee's blood lead level exceeds the above defined limit.
In addition to the above blood lead level criterion, temporary
worker removal may also take place as a result of medical determinations
and recommendations. Written medical opinions must be prepared after
each examination pursuant to the standard. If the examining physician
includes a medical finding, determination or opinion that the employee
has a medical condition which places the employee at increased risk of
material health impairment from exposure to lead, then the employee must
be removed from exposure to lead at or above 30 [micro]g/m\3\.
Alternatively, if the examining physician recommends special protective
measures for an employee (e.g., use of a powered air purifying
respirator) or recommends limitations on an employee's exposure to lead,
then the employer must implement these recommendations.
Recommendations may be more stringent than the specific provisions
of the standard. The examining physician, therefore, is given broad
flexibility to tailor special protective procedures to the needs of
individual employees. This flexibility extends to the evaluation and
management of pregnant workers and male and female workers who are
planning to raise children. Based on the history, physical examination,
and laboratory studies, the physician might recommend special protective
measures or medical removal for an employee who is pregnant or who is
planning to conceive a child when, in the physician's judgment,
continued exposure to lead at the current job would pose a significant
risk. The return of the employee to his or her former job status, or the
removal of special protections or limitations, depends upon the
examining physician determining that the employee is no longer at
increased risk of material impairment or that special measures are no
longer needed.
During the period of any form of special protection or removal, the
employer must maintain the worker's earnings, seniority, and other
employment rights and benefits (as though the worker had not been
removed) for a period of up to 18 months or for as long as the job the
employee was removed from lasts if less than 18 months. This economic
protection will maximize meaningful worker participation in the medical
surveillance program, and is appropriate as part of the employer's
overall obligation to provide a safe and healthful workplace. The
provisions of MRP benefits during the employee's removal period may,
however, be conditioned upon participation in medical surveillance.
The lead standard provides for a multiple physician review in cases
where the employee wishes a second opinion concerning potential lead
poisoning or toxicity. If an employee wishes a second opinion, he or she
can make an appointment with a physician of his or her choice. This
second physician will review the findings, recommendations or
determinations of the first physician and conduct any examinations,
consultations or tests deemed necessary in an attempt to make a final
medical determination. If the first and second physicians do not agree
in their assessment they must try to resolve their differences. If they
cannot reach an agreement then they must designate a third physician to
resolve the dispute.
[[Page 113]]
The employer must provide examining and consulting physicians with
the following specific information: A copy of the lead regulations and
all appendices, a description of the employee's duties as related to
exposure, the exposure level or anticipated level to lead and any other
toxic substances (if applicable), a description of personal protective
equipment used, blood lead levels, and all prior written medical
opinions regarding the employee in the employer's possession or control.
The employer must also obtain from the physician and provide the
employee with a written medical opinion containing blood lead levels,
the physicians's opinion as to whether the employee is at risk of
material impairment to health, any recommended protective measures for
the employee if further exposure is permitted, as well as any
recommended limitations upon an employee's use of respirators.
Employers must instruct each physician not to reveal to the employer
in writing or in any other way his or her findings, laboratory results,
or diagnoses which are felt to be unrelated to occupational lead
exposure. They must also instruct each physician to advise the employee
of any occupationally or non-occupationally related medical condition
requiring further treatment or evaluation.
The standard provides for the use of respirators where engineering
and other primary controls are not effective. However, the use of
respirator protection shall not be used in lieu of temporary medical
removal due to elevated blood lead levels or findings that an employee
is at risk of material health impairment. This is based on the numerous
inadequacies of respirators including skin rash where the facepiece
makes contact with the skin, unacceptable stress to breathing in some
workers with underlying cardiopulmonary impairment, difficulty in
providing adequate fit, the tendency for respirators to create
additional hazards by interfering with vision, hearing, and mobility,
and the difficulties of assuring the maximum effectiveness of a
complicated work practice program involving respirators. Respirators do,
however, serve a useful function where engineering and work practice
controls are inadequate by providing supplementary, interim, or short-
term protection, provided they are properly selected for the environment
in which the employee will be working, properly fitted to the employee,
maintained and cleaned periodically, and worn by the employee when
required.
In its interim final standard on occupational exposure to inorganic
lead in the construction industry, OSHA has prohibited prophylactic
chelation. Diagnostic and therapeutic chelation are permitted only under
the supervision of a licensed physician with appropriate medical
monitoring in an acceptable clinical setting. The decision to initiate
chelation therapy must be made on an individual basis and take into
account the severity of symptoms felt to be a result of lead toxicity
along with blood lead levels, ZPP levels, and other laboratory tests as
appropriate. EDTA and penicillamine which are the primary chelating
agents used in the therapy of occupational lead poisoning have
significant potential side effects and their use must be justified on
the basis of expected benefits to the worker. Unless frank and severe
symptoms are present, therapeutic chelation is not recommended, given
the opportunity to remove a worker from exposure and allow the body to
naturally excrete accumulated lead. As a diagnostic aid, the chelation
mobilization test using CA-EDTA has limited applicability. According to
some investigators, the test can differentiate between lead-induced and
other nephropathies. The test may also provide an estimation of the
mobile fraction of the total body lead burden.
Employers are required to assure that accurate records are
maintained on exposure assessment, including environmental monitoring,
medical surveillance, and medical removal for each employee. Exposure
assessment records must be kept for at least 30 years. Medical
surveillance records must be kept for the duration of employment plus 30
years except in cases where the employment was less than one year. If
duration of employment is less than one year, the employer need not
retain this record beyond the term of employment if the record is
provided to the employee upon termination of employment. Medical removal
records also must be maintained for the duration of employment. All
records required under the standard must be made available upon request
to the Assistant Secretary of Labor for Occupational Safety and Health
and the Director of the National Institute for Occupational Safety and
Health. Employers must also make environmental and biological monitoring
and medical removal records available to affected employees and to
former employees or their authorized employee representatives. Employees
or their specifically designated representatives have access to their
entire medical surveillance records.
In addition, the standard requires that the employer inform all
workers exposed to lead at or above 30 [micro]g/m\3\ of the provisions
of the standard and all its appendices, the purpose and description of
medical surveillance and provisions for medical removal protection if
temporary removal is required. An understanding of the potential health
effects of lead exposure by all exposed employees along with full
understanding of their rights under the lead standard is essential for
an effective monitoring program.
[[Page 114]]
II. Adverse Health Effects of Inorganic Lead
Although the toxicity of lead has been known for 2,000 years, the
knowledge of the complex relationship between lead exposure and human
response is still being refined. Significant research into the toxic
properties of lead continues throughout the world, and it should be
anticipated that our understanding of thresholds of effects and margins
of safety will be improved in future years. The provisions of the lead
standard are founded on two prime medical judgments: First, the
prevention of adverse health effects from exposure to lead throughout a
working lifetime requires that worker blood lead levels be maintained at
or below 40 [micro]g/dl and second, the blood lead levels of workers,
male or female, who intend to parent in the near future should be
maintained below 30 [micro]g/dl to minimize adverse reproductive health
effects to the parents and developing fetus. The adverse effects of lead
on reproduction are being actively researched and OSHA encourages the
physician to remain abreast of recent developments in the area to best
advise pregnant workers or workers planning to conceive children.
The spectrum of health effects caused by lead exposure can be
subdivided into five developmental stages: Normal, physiological changes
of uncertain significance, pathophysiological changes, overt symptoms
(morbidity), and mortality. Within this process there are no sharp
distinctions, but rather a continuum of effects. Boundaries between
categories overlap due to the wide variation of individual responses and
exposures in the working population. OSHA's development of the lead
standard focused on pathophysiological changes as well as later stages
of disease.
1. Heme Synthesis Inhibition. The earliest demonstrated effect of
lead involves its ability to inhibit at least two enzymes of the heme
synthesis pathway at very low blood levels. Inhibition of delta
aminolevulinic acid dehydrase (ALA-D) which catalyzes the conversion of
delta-aminolevulinic acid (ALA) to protoporphyrin is observed at a blood
lead level below 20 [micro]g/dl. At a blood lead level of 40 [micro]g/
dl, more than 20% of the population would have 70% inhibition of ALA-D.
There is an exponential increase in ALA excretion at blood lead levels
greater than 40 [micro]g/dl.
Another enzyme, ferrochelatase, is also inhibited at low blood lead
levels. Inhibition of ferrochelatase leads to increased free erythrocyte
protoporphyrin (FEP) in the blood which can then bind to zinc to yield
zinc protoporphyrin. At a blood lead level of 50 [micro]g/dl or greater,
nearly 100% of the population will have an increase in FEP. There is
also an exponential relationship between blood lead levels greater than
40 [micro]g/dl and the associated ZPP level, which has led to the
development of the ZPP screening test for lead exposure.
While the significance of these effects is subject to debate, it is
OSHA's position that these enzyme disturbances are early stages of a
disease process which may eventually result in the clinical symptoms of
lead poisoning. Whether or not the effects do progress to the later
stages of clinical disease, disruption of these enzyme processes over a
working lifetime is considered to be a material impairment of health.
One of the eventual results of lead-induced inhibition of enzymes in
the heme synthesis pathway is anemia which can be asymptomatic if mild
but associated with a wide array of symptoms including dizziness,
fatigue, and tachycardia when more severe. Studies have indicated that
lead levels as low as 50 [micro]g/dl can be associated with a definite
decreased hemoglobin, although most cases of lead-induced anemia, as
well as shortened red-cell survival times, occur at lead levels
exceeding 80 [micro]g/dl. Inhibited hemoglobin synthesis is more common
in chronic cases whereas shortened erythrocyte life span is more common
in acute cases.
In lead-induced anemias, there is usually a reticulocytosis along
with the presence of basophilic stippling, and ringed sideroblasts,
although none of the above are pathognomonic for lead-induced anemia.
2. Neurological Effects. Inorganic lead has been found to have toxic
effects on both the central and peripheral nervous systems. The earliest
stages of lead-induced central nervous system effects first manifest
themselves in the form of behavioral disturbances and central nervous
system symptoms including irritability, restlessness, insomnia and other
sleep disturbances, fatigue, vertigo, headache, poor memory, tremor,
depression, and apathy. With more severe exposure, symptoms can progress
to drowsiness, stupor, hallucinations, delirium, convulsions and coma.
The most severe and acute form of lead poisoning which usually
follows ingestion or inhalation of large amounts of lead is acute
encephalopathy which may arise precipitously with the onset of
intractable seizures, coma, cardiorespiratory arrest, and death within
48 hours.
While there is disagreement about what exposure levels are needed to
produce the earliest symptoms, most experts agree that symptoms
definitely can occur at blood lead levels of 60 [micro]g/dl whole blood
and therefore recommend a 40 [micro]g/dl maximum. The central nervous
system effects frequently are not reversible following discontinued
exposure or chelation therapy and when improvement does occur, it is
almost always only partial.
The peripheral neuropathy resulting from lead exposure
characteristically involves only motor function with minimal sensory
damage and has a marked predilection for
[[Page 115]]
the extensor muscles of the most active extremity. The peripheral
neuropathy can occur with varying degrees of severity. The earliest and
mildest form which can be detected in workers with blood lead levels as
low as 50 [micro]g/dl is manifested by slowing of motor nerve conduction
velocity often without clinical symptoms. With progression of the
neuropathy there is development of painless extensor muscle weakness
usually involving the extensor muscles of the fingers and hand in the
most active upper extremity, followed in severe cases by wrist drop or,
much less commonly, foot drop.
In addition to slowing of nerve conduction, electromyographical
studies in patients with blood lead levels greater than 50 [micro]g/dl
have demonstrated a decrease in the number of acting motor unit
potentials, an increase in the duration of motor unit potentials, and
spontaneous pathological activity including fibrillations and
fasciculations. Whether these effects occur at levels of 40 [micro]g/dl
is undetermined.
While the peripheral neuropathies can occasionally be reversed with
therapy, again such recovery is not assured particularly in the more
severe neuropathies and often improvement is only partial. The lack of
reversibility is felt to be due in part to segmental demyelination.
3. Gastrointestinal. Lead may also affect the gastrointestinal
system producing abdominal colic or diffuse abdominal pain,
constipation, obstipation, diarrhea, anorexia, nausea and vomiting. Lead
colic rarely develops at blood lead levels below 80 [micro]g/dl.
4. Renal. Renal toxicity represents one of the most serious health
effects of lead poisoning. In the early stages of disease nuclear
inclusion bodies can frequently be identified in proximal renal tubular
cells. Renal function remains normal and the changes in this stage are
probably reversible. With more advanced disease there is progressive
interstitial fibrosis and impaired renal function. Eventually extensive
interstitial fibrosis ensues with sclerotic glomeruli and dilated and
atrophied proximal tubules; all represent end stage kidney disease.
Azotemia can be progressive, eventually resulting in frank uremia
necessitating dialysis. There is occasionally associated hypertension
and hyperuricemia with or without gout.
Early kidney disease is difficult to detect. The urinalysis is
normal in early lead nephropathy and the blood urea nitrogen and serum
creatinine increase only when two-thirds of kidney function is lost.
Measurement of creatinine clearance can often detect earlier disease as
can other methods of measurement of glomerular filtration rate. An
abnormal Ca-EDTA mobilization test has been used to differentiate
between lead-induced and other nephropathies, but this procedure is not
widely accepted. A form of Fanconi syndrome with aminoaciduria,
glycosuria, and hyperphosphaturia indicating severe injury to the
proximal renal tubules is occasionally seen in children.
5. Reproductive effects. Exposure to lead can have serious effects
on reproductive function in both males and females. In male workers
exposed to lead there can be a decrease in sexual drive, impotence,
decreased ability to produce healthy sperm, and sterility. Malformed
sperm (teratospermia), decreased number of sperm (hypospermia), and
sperm with decreased motility (asthenospermia) can all occur.
Teratospermia has been noted at mean blood lead levels of 53 [micro]g/dl
and hypospermia and asthenospermia at 41 [micro]g/dl. Furthermore, there
appears to be a dose-response relationship for teratospermia in lead
exposed workers.
Women exposed to lead may experience menstrual disturbances
including dysmenorrhea, menorrhagia and amenorrhea. Following exposure
to lead, women have a higher frequency of sterility, premature births,
spontaneous miscarriages, and stillbirths.
Germ cells can be affected by lead and cause genetic damage in the
egg or sperm cells before conception and result in failure to implant,
miscarriage, stillbirth, or birth defects.
Infants of mothers with lead poisoning have a higher mortality
during the first year and suffer from lowered birth weights, slower
growth, and nervous system disorders.
Lead can pass through the placental barrier and lead levels in the
mother's blood are comparable to concentrations of lead in the umbilical
cord at birth. Transplacental passage becomes detectable at 12-14 weeks
of gestation and increases until birth.
There is little direct data on damage to the fetus from exposure to
lead but it is generally assumed that the fetus and newborn would be at
least as susceptible to neurological damage as young children. Blood
lead levels of 50-60 [micro]g/dl in children can cause significant
neurobehavioral impairments and there is evidence of hyperactivity at
blood levels as low as 25 [micro]g/dl. Given the overall body of
literature concerning the adverse health effects of lead in children,
OSHA feels that the blood lead level in children should be maintained
below 30 [micro]g/dl with a population mean of 15 [micro]g/dl. Blood
lead levels in the fetus and newborn likewise should not exceed 30
[micro]g/dl.
Because of lead's ability to pass through the placental barrier and
also because of the demonstrated adverse effects of lead on reproductive
function in both the male and female as well as the risk of genetic
damage of lead on both the ovum and sperm, OSHA recommends a 30
[micro]g/dl maximum permissible blood lead level in both males and
females who wish to bear children.
[[Page 116]]
6. Other toxic effects. Debate and research continue on the effects
of lead on the human body. Hypertension has frequently been noted in
occupationally exposed individuals although it is difficult to assess
whether this is due to lead's adverse effects on the kidney or if some
other mechanism is involved. Vascular and electrocardiographic changes
have been detected but have not been well characterized. Lead is thought
to impair thyroid function and interfere with the pituitary-adrenal
axis, but again these effects have not been well defined.
III. Medical Evaluation
The most important principle in evaluating a worker for any
occupational disease including lead poisoning is a high index of
suspicion on the part of the examining physician. As discussed in
Section 2, lead can affect numerous organ systems and produce a wide
array of signs and symptoms, most of which are non-specific and subtle
in nature at least in the early stages of disease. Unless serious
concern for lead toxicity is present, many of the early clues to
diagnosis may easily be overlooked.
The crucial initial step in the medical evaluation is recognizing
that a worker's employment can result in exposure to lead. The worker
will frequently be able to define exposures to lead and lead containing
materials but often will not volunteer this information unless
specifically asked. In other situations the worker may not know of any
exposures to lead but the suspicion might be raised on the part of the
physician because of the industry or occupation of the worker. Potential
occupational exposure to lead and its compounds occur in many
occupations in the construction industry, including demolition and
salvaging operations, removal or encapsulation of materials containing
lead, construction, alteration, repair or renovation of structures
containing lead, transportation, disposal, storage or containment of
lead or lead-containing materials on construction sites, and maintenance
operations associated with construction activities.
Once the possibility for lead exposure is raised, the focus can then
be directed toward eliciting information from the medical history,
physical exam, and finally from laboratory data to evaluate the worker
for potential lead toxicity.
A complete and detailed work history is important in the initial
evaluation. A listing of all previous employment with information on job
description, exposure to fumes or dust, known exposures to lead or other
toxic substances, a description of any personal protective equipment
used, and previous medical surveillance should all be included in the
worker's record. Where exposure to lead is suspected, information
concerning on-the-job personal hygiene, smoking or eating habits in work
areas, laundry procedures, and use of any protective clothing or
respiratory protection equipment should be noted. A complete work
history is essential in the medical evaluation of a worker with
suspected lead toxicity, especially when long term effects such as
neurotoxicity and nephrotoxicity are considered.
The medical history is also of fundamental importance and should
include a listing of all past and current medical conditions, current
medications including proprietary drug intake, previous surgeries and
hospitalizations, allergies, smoking history, alcohol consumption, and
also non-occupational lead exposures such as hobbies (hunting, riflery).
Also known childhood exposures should be elicited. Any previous history
of hematological, neurological, gastrointestinal, renal, psychological,
gynecological, genetic, or reproductive problems should be specifically
noted.
A careful and complete review of systems must be performed to assess
both recognized complaints and subtle or slowly acquired symptoms which
the worker might not appreciate as being significant. The review of
symptoms should include the following:
1. General--weight loss, fatigue, decreased appetite.
2. Head, Eyes, Ears, Nose, Throat (HEENT)--headaches, visual
disturbances or decreased visual acuity, hearing deficits or tinnitus,
pigmentation of the oral mucosa, or metallic taste in mouth.
3. Cardio-pulmonary--shortness of breath, cough, chest pains,
palpitations, or orthopnea.
4. Gastrointestinal--nausea, vomiting, heartburn, abdominal pain,
constipation or diarrhea.
5. Neurologic--irritability, insomnia, weakness (fatigue),
dizziness, loss of memory, confusion, hallucinations, incoordination,
ataxia, decreased strength in hands or feet, disturbances in gait,
difficulty in climbing stairs, or seizures.
6. Hematologic--pallor, easy fatigability, abnormal blood loss,
melena.
7. Reproductive (male and female and spouse where relevant)--history
of infertility, impotence, loss of libido, abnormal menstrual periods,
history of miscarriages, stillbirths, or children with birth defects.
8. Musculo-skeletal--muscle and joint pains.
The physical examination should emphasize the neurological,
gastrointestinal, and cardiovascular systems. The worker's weight and
blood pressure should be recorded and the oral mucosa checked for
pigmentation characteristic of a possible Burtonian or lead line on the
gingiva. It should be noted, however, that the lead line may not be
present even in severe lead poisoning if good oral hygiene is practiced.
The presence of pallor on skin examination may indicate an anemia
which, if severe,
[[Page 117]]
might also be associated with a tachycardia. If an anemia is suspected,
an active search for blood loss should be undertaken including potential
blood loss through the gastrointestinal tract.
A complete neurological examination should include an adequate
mental status evaluation including a search for behavioral and
psychological disturbances, memory testing, evaluation for irritability,
insomnia, hallucinations, and mental clouding. Gait and coordination
should be examined along with close observation for tremor. A detailed
evaluation of peripheral nerve function including careful sensory and
motor function testing is warranted. Strength testing particularly of
extensor muscle groups of all extremities is of fundamental importance.
Cranial nerve evaluation should also be included in the routine
examination.
The abdominal examination should include auscultation for bowel
sounds and abdominal bruits and palpation for organomegaly, masses, and
diffuse abdominal tenderness.
Cardiovascular examination should evaluate possible early signs of
congestive heart failure. Pulmonary status should be addressed
particularly if respirator protection is contemplated.
As part of the medical evaluation, the interim lead standard
requires the following laboratory studies:
1. Blood lead level
2. Hemoglobin and hematocrit determinations, red cell indices, and
examination of the peripheral blood smear to evaluate red blood cell
morphology
3. Blood urea nitrogen
4. Serum creatinine
5. Routine urinalysis with microscopic examination.
6. A zinc protoporphyrin level.
In addition to the above, the physician is authorized to order any
further laboratory or other tests which he or she deems necessary in
accordance with sound medical practice. The evaluation must also include
pregnancy testing or laboratory evaluation of male fertility if
requested by the employee. Additional tests which are probably not
warranted on a routine basis but may be appropriate when blood lead and
ZPP levels are equivocal include delta aminolevulinic acid and
coproporphyrin concentrations in the urine, and dark-field illumination
for detection of basophilic stippling in red blood cells.
If an anemia is detected further studies including a careful
examination of the peripheral smear, reticulocyte count, stool for
occult blood, serum iron, total iron binding capacity, bilirubin, and,
if appropriate, vitamin B12 and folate may be of value in attempting to
identify the cause of the anemia.
If a peripheral neuropathy is suspected, nerve conduction studies
are warranted both for diagnosis and as a basis to monitor any therapy.
If renal disease is questioned, a 24 hour urine collection for
creatinine clearance, protein, and electrolytes may be indicated.
Elevated uric acid levels may result from lead-induced renal disease and
a serum uric acid level might be performed.
An electrocardiogram and chest x-ray may be obtained as deemed
appropriate.
Sophisticated and highly specialized testing should not be done
routinely and where indicated should be under the direction of a
specialist.
IV. Laboratory Evaluation
The blood lead level at present remains the single most important
test to monitor lead exposure and is the test used in the medical
surveillance program under the lead standard to guide employee medical
removal. The ZPP has several advantages over the blood lead level.
Because of its relatively recent development and the lack of extensive
data concerning its interpretation, the ZPP currently remains an
ancillary test.
This section will discuss the blood lead level and ZPP in detail and
will outline their relative advantages and disadvantages. Other blood
tests currently available to evaluate lead exposure will also be
reviewed.
The blood lead level is a good index of current or recent lead
absorption when there is no anemia present and when the worker has not
taken any chelating agents. However, blood lead levels along with
urinary lead levels do not necessarily indicate the total body burden of
lead and are not adequate measures of past exposure. One reason for this
is that lead has a high affinity for bone and up to 90% of the body's
total lead is deposited there. A very important component of the total
lead body burden is lead in soft tissue (liver, kidney, and brain). This
fraction of the lead body burden, the biologically active lead, is not
entirely reflected by blood lead levels since it is a function of the
dynamics of lead absorption, distribution, deposition in bone and
excretion. Following discontinuation of exposure to lead, the excess
body burden is only slowly mobilized from bone and other relatively
stable body stores and excreted. Consequently, a high blood lead level
may only represent recent heavy exposure to lead without a significant
total body excess and likewise a low blood lead level does not exclude
an elevated total body burden of lead.
Also due to its correlation with recent exposures, the blood lead
level may vary considerably over short time intervals.
To minimize laboratory error and erroneous results due to
contamination, blood specimens must be carefully collected after
[[Page 118]]
thorough cleaning of the skin with appropriate methods using lead-free
blood containers and analyzed by a reliable laboratory. Under the
standard, samples must be analyzed in laboratories which are approved by
OSHA. Analysis is to be made using atomic absorption spectrophotometry,
anodic stripping voltammetry or any method which meets the accuracy
requirements set forth by the standard.
The determination of lead in urine is generally considered a less
reliable monitoring technique than analysis of whole blood primarily due
to individual variability in urinary excretion capacity as well as the
technical difficulty of obtaining accurate 24 hour urine collections. In
addition, workers with renal insufficiency, whether due to lead or some
other cause, may have decreased lead clearance and consequently urine
lead levels may underestimate the true lead burden. Therefore, urine
lead levels should not be used as a routine test.
The zinc protoporphyrin test, unlike the blood lead determination,
measures an adverse metabolic effect of lead and as such is a better
indicator of lead toxicity than the level of blood lead itself. The
level of ZPP reflects lead absorption over the preceding 3 to 4 months,
and therefore is a better indicator of lead body burden. The ZPP
requires more time than the blood lead to read significantly elevated
levels; the return to normal after discontinuing lead exposure is also
slower. Furthermore, the ZPP test is simpler, faster, and less expensive
to perform and no contamination is possible. Many investigators believe
it is the most reliable means of monitoring chronic lead absorption.
Zinc protoporphyrin results from the inhibition of the enzyme
ferrochelatase which catalyzes the insertion of an iron molecule into
the protoporphyrin molecule, which then becomes heme. If iron is not
inserted into the molecule then zinc, having a greater affinity for
protoporphyrin, takes the place of the iron, forming ZPP.
An elevation in the level of circulating ZPP may occur at blood lead
levels as low as 20-30 [micro]g/dl in some workers. Once the blood lead
level has reached 40 [micro]g/dl there is more marked rise in the ZPP
value from its normal range of less than 100 [micro]g/dl100 ml.
Increases in blood lead levels beyond 40 [micro]g/100 g are associated
with exponential increases in ZPP.
Whereas blood lead levels fluctuate over short time spans, ZPP
levels remain relatively stable. ZPP is measured directly in red blood
cells and is present for the cell's entire 120 day life-span. Therefore,
the ZPP level in blood reflects the average ZPP production over the
previous 3-4 months and consequently the average lead exposure during
that time interval.
It is recommended that a hematocrit be determined whenever a
confirmed ZPP of 50 [micro]g/100 ml whole blood is obtained to rule out
a significant underlying anemia. If the ZPP is in excess of 100
[micro]g/100 ml and not associated with abnormal elevations in blood
lead levels, the laboratory should be checked to be sure that blood
leads were determined using atomic absorption spectrophotometry anodic
stripping voltammetry, or any method which meets the accuracy
requirements set forth by the standard by an OSHA approved laboratory
which is experienced in lead level determinations. Repeat periodic blood
lead studies should be obtained in all individuals with elevated ZPP
levels to be certain that an associated elevated blood lead level has
not been missed due to transient fluctuations in blood leads.
ZPP has a characteristic fluorescence spectrum with a peak at 594 nm
which is detectable with a hematofluorimeter. The hematofluorimeter is
accurate and portable and can provide on-site, instantaneous results for
workers who can be frequently tested via a finger prick.
However, careful attention must be given to calibration and quality
control procedures. Limited data on blood lead-ZPP correlations and the
ZPP levels which are associated with the adverse health effects
discussed in Section 2 are the major limitations of the test. Also it is
difficult to correlate ZPP levels with environmental exposure and there
is some variation of response with age and sex. Nevertheless, the ZPP
promises to be an important diagnostic test for the early detection of
lead toxicity and its value will increase as more data is collected
regarding its relationship to other manifestations of lead poisoning.
Levels of delta-aminolevulinic acid (ALA) in the urine are also used
as a measure of lead exposure. Increasing concentrations of ALA are
believed to result from the inhibition of the enzyme delta-
aminolevulinic acid dehydrase (ALA-D). Although the test is relatively
easy to perform, inexpensive, and rapid, the disadvantages include
variability in results, the necessity to collect a complete 24 hour
urine sample which has a specific gravity greater than 1.010, and also
the fact that ALA decomposes in the presence of light.
The pattern of porphyrin excretion in the urine can also be helpful
in identifying lead intoxication. With lead poisoning, the urine
concentrations of coproporphyrins I and II, porphobilinogen and
uroporphyrin I rise. The most important increase, however, is that of
coproporphyrin III; levels may exceed 5,000 [micro]g/l in the urine in
lead poisoned individuals, but its correlation with blood lead levels
and ZPP are not as good as those of ALA. Increases in urinary porphyrins
are not diagnostic of lead toxicity and may be seen in
[[Page 119]]
porphyria, some liver diseases, and in patients with high reticulocyte
counts.
Summary. The Occupational Safety and Health Administration's interim
standard for inorganic lead in the construction industry places
significant emphasis on the medical surveillance of all workers exposed
to levels of inorganic lead above 30 [micro]g/m\3\ TWA. The physician
has a fundamental role in this surveillance program, and in the
operation of the medical removal protection program.
Even with adequate worker education on the adverse health effects of
lead and appropriate training in work practices, personal hygiene and
other control measures, the physician has a primary responsibility for
evaluating potential lead toxicity in the worker. It is only through a
careful and detailed medical and work history, a complete physical
examination and appropriate laboratory testing that an accurate
assessment can be made. Many of the adverse health effects of lead
toxicity are either irreversible or only partially reversible and
therefore early detection of disease is very important.
This document outlines the medical monitoring program as defined by
the occupational safety and health standard for inorganic lead. It
reviews the adverse health effects of lead poisoning and describes the
important elements of the history and physical examinations as they
relate to these adverse effects. Finally, the appropriate laboratory
testing for evaluating lead exposure and toxicity is presented.
It is hoped that this review and discussion will give the physician
a better understanding of the OSHA standard with the ultimate goal of
protecting the health and well-being of the worker exposed to lead under
his or her care.
[58 FR 26627, May 4, 1993, as amended at 58 FR 34218, June 24, 1993; 61
FR 5510, Feb. 13, 1996; 63 FR 1296, Jan. 8, 1998; 70 FR 1143, Jan. 5,
2005; 71 FR 16674, Apr. 3, 2006; 71 FR 50191, Aug. 24, 2006; 73 FR
75588, Dec. 12, 2008; 76 FR 33611, June 8, 2011; 76 FR 80741, Dec. 27,
2011; 77 FR 17890, Mar. 26, 2012]
Sec. 1926.64 Process safety management of highly hazardous chemicals.
Purpose. This section contains requirements for preventing or
minimizing the consequences of catastrophic releases of toxic, reactive,
flammable, or explosive chemicals. These releases may result in toxic,
fire or explosion hazards.
(a) Application. (1) This section applies to the following:
(i) A process which involves a chemical at or above the specified
threshold quantities listed in appendix A to this section;
(ii) A process which involves a Category 1 flammable gas (as defined
in Sec. 1910.1200(c)) or flammable liquid with a flashpoint below 100
[deg]F (37.8 [deg]C) on site in one location, in a quantity of 10,000
pounds (4535.9 kg) or more except for:
(A) Hydrocarbon fuels used solely for workplace consumption as a
fuel (e.g., propane used for comfort heating, gasoline for vehicle
refueling), if such fuels are not a part of a process containing another
highly hazardous chemical covered by this standard;
(B) Flammable liquids with a flashpoint below 100 [deg]F (37.8
[deg]C) stored in atmospheric tanks or transferred that are kept below
their normal boiling point without benefit of chilling or refrigeration.
(2) This section does not apply to:
(i) Retail facilities;
(ii) Oil or gas well drilling or servicing operations; or,
(iii) Normally unoccupied remote facilities.
(b) Definitions. Atmospheric tank means a storage tank which has
been designed to operate at pressures from atmospheric through 0.5
p.s.i.g. (pounds per square inch gauge, 3.45 Kpa).
Boiling point means the boiling point of a liquid at a pressure of
14.7 pounds per square inch absolute (p.s.i.a.) (760 mm.). For the
purposes of this section, where an accurate boiling point is unavailable
for the material in question, or for mixtures which do not have a
constant boiling point, the 10 percent point of a distillation performed
in accordance with the Standard Method of Test for Distillation of
Petroleum Products, ASTM D-86-62, may be used as the boiling point of
the liquid.
Catastrophic release means a major uncontrolled emission, fire, or
explosion, involving one or more highly hazardous chemicals, that
presents serious danger to employees in the workplace.
Facility means the buildings, containers or equipment which contain
a process.
Highly hazardous chemical means a substance possessing toxic,
reactive, flammable, or explosive properties and specified by paragraph
(a)(1) of this section.
Hot work means work involving electric or gas welding, cutting,
brazing, or
[[Page 120]]
similar flame or spark-producing operations.
Normally unoccupied remote facility means a facility which is
operated, maintained or serviced by employees who visit the facility
only periodically to check its operation and to perform necessary
operating or maintenance tasks. No employees are permanently stationed
at the facility. Facilities meeting this definition are not contiguous
with, and must be geographically remote from all other buildings,
processes or persons.
Process means any activity involving a highly hazardous chemical
including any use, storage, manufacturing, handling, or the on-site
movement of such chemicals, or combination of these activities. For
purposes of this definition, any group of vessels which are
interconnected and separate vessels which are located such that a highly
hazardous chemical could be involved in a potential release shall be
considered a single process.
Replacement in kind means a replacement which satisfies the design
specification.
Trade secret means any confidential formula, pattern, process,
device, information or compilation of information that is used in an
employer's business, and that gives the employer an opportunity to
obtain an advantage over competitors who do not know or use it. Appendix
D contained in Sec. 1926.59 sets out the criteria to be used in
evaluating trade secrets.
(c) Employee participation. (1) Employers shall develop a written
plan of action regarding the implementation of the employee
participation required by this paragraph.
(2) Employers shall consult with employees and their representatives
on the conduct and development of process hazards analyses and on the
development of the other elements of process safety management in this
standard.
(3) Employers shall provide to employees and their representatives
access to process hazard analyses and to all other information required
to be developed under this standard.
(d) Process safety information. In accordance with the schedule set
forth in paragraph (e)(1) of this section, the employer shall complete a
compilation of written process safety information before conducting any
process hazard analysis required by the standard. The compilation of
written process safety information is to enable the employer and the
employees involved in operating the process to identify and understand
the hazards posed by those processes involving highly hazardous
chemicals. This process safety information shall include information
pertaining to the hazards of the highly hazardous chemicals used or
produced by the process, information pertaining to the technology of the
process, and information pertaining to the equipment in the process.
(1) Information pertaining to the hazards of the highly hazardous
chemicals in the process. This information shall consist of at least the
following:
(i) Toxicity information;
(ii) Permissible exposure limits;
(iii) Physical data;
(iv) Reactivity data:
(v) Corrosivity data;
(vi) Thermal and chemical stability data; and
(vii) Hazardous effects of inadvertent mixing of different materials
that could foreseeably occur.
Note to paragraph (d)(1): Safety data sheets meeting the
requirements of Sec. 1910.1200(g) may be used to comply with this
requirement to the extent they contain the information required by this
paragraph (d)(1).
(2) Information pertaining to the technology of the process. (i)
Information concerning the technology of the process shall include at
least the following:
(A) A block flow diagram or simplified process flow diagram (see
appendix B to this section);
(B) Process chemistry;
(C) Maximum intended inventory;
(D) Safe upper and lower limits for such items as temperatures,
pressures, flows or compositions; and,
(E) An evaluation of the consequences of deviations, including those
affecting the safety and health of employees.
(ii) Where the original technical information no longer exists, such
information may be developed in conjunction with the process hazard
analysis
[[Page 121]]
in sufficient detail to support the analysis.
(3) Information pertaining to the equipment in the process. (i)
Information pertaining to the equipment in the process shall include:
(A) Materials of construction;
(B) Piping and instrument diagrams (P&ID's);
(C) Electrical classification;
(D) Relief system design and design basis;
(E) Ventilation system design;
(F) Design codes and standards employed;
(G) Material and energy balances for processes built after May 26,
1992; and,
(H) Safety systems (e.g. interlocks, detection or suppression
systems).
(ii) The employer shall document that equipment complies with
recognized and generally accepted good engineering practices.
(iii) For existing equipment designed and constructed in accordance
with codes, standards, or practices that are no longer in general use,
the employer shall determine and document that the equipment is
designed, maintained, inspected, tested, and operating in a safe manner.
(e) Process hazard analysis. (1) The employer shall perform an
initial process hazard analysis (hazard evaluation) on processes covered
by this standard. The process hazard analysis shall be appropriate to
the complexity of the process and shall identify, evaluate, and control
the hazards involved in the process. Employers shall determine and
document the priority order for conducting process hazard analyses based
on a rationale which includes such considerations as extent of the
process hazards, number of potentially affected employees, age of the
process, and operating history of the process. The process hazard
analysis shall be conducted as soon as possible, but not later than the
following schedule:
(i) No less than 25 percent of the initial process hazards analyses
shall be completed by May 26, 1994;
(ii) No less than 50 percent of the initial process hazards analyses
shall be completed by May 26, 1995;
(iii) No less than 75 percent of the initial process hazards
analyses shall be completed by May 26, 1996;
(iv) All initial process hazards analyses shall be completed by May
26, 1997.
(v) Process hazards analyses completed after May 26, 1987 which meet
the requirements of this paragraph are acceptable as initial process
hazards analyses. These process hazard analyses shall be updated and
revalidated, based on their completion date, in accordance with
paragraph (e)(6) of this standard.
(2) The employer shall use one or more of the following
methodologies that are appropriate to determine and evaluate the hazards
of the process being analyzed.
(i) What-If;
(ii) Checklist;
(iii) What-If/Checklist;
(iv) Hazard and Operability Study (HAZOP);
(v) Failure Mode and Effects Analysis (FMEA);
(vi) Fault-Tree Analysis; or
(vii) An appropriate equivalent methodology.
(3) The process hazard analysis shall address:
(i) The hazards of the process;
(ii) The identification of any previous incident which had a likely
potential for catastrophic consequences in the workplace;
(iii) Engineering and administrative controls applicable to the
hazards and their interrelationships such as appropriate application of
detection methodologies to provide early warning of releases.
(Acceptable detection methods might include process monitoring and
control instrumentation with alarms, and detection hardware such as
hydrocarbon sensors.);
(iv) Consequences of failure of engineering and administrative
controls;
(v) Facility siting;
(vi) Human factors; and
(vii) A qualitative evaluation of a range of the possible safety and
health effects of failure of controls on employees in the workplace.
(4) The process hazard analysis shall be performed by a team with
expertise in engineering and process operations, and the team shall
include at least one employee who has experience and knowledge specific
to the process being evaluated. Also, one member of the team must be
knowledgeable in the
[[Page 122]]
specific process hazard analysis methodology being used.
(5) The employer shall establish a system to promptly address the
team's findings and recommendations; assure that the recommendations are
resolved in a timely manner and that the resolution is documented;
document what actions are to be taken; complete actions as soon as
possible; develop a written schedule of when these actions are to be
completed; communicate the actions to operating, maintenance and other
employees whose work assignments are in the process and who may be
affected by the recommendations or actions.
(6) At least every five (5) years after the completion of the
initial process hazard analysis, the process hazard analysis shall be
updated and revalidated by a team meeting the requirements in paragraph
(e)(4) of this section, to assure that the process hazard analysis is
consistent with the current process.
(7) Employers shall retain process hazards analyses and updates or
revalidations for each process covered by this section, as well as the
documented resolution of recommendations described in paragraph (e)(5)
of this section for the life of the process.
(f) Operating procedures. (1) The employer shall develop and
implement written operating procedures that provide clear instructions
for safely conducting activities involved in each covered process
consistent with the process safety information and shall address at
least the following elements.
(i) Steps for each operating phase:
(A) Initial startup;
(B) Normal operations;
(C) Temporary operations;
(D) Emergency shutdown including the conditions under which
emergency shutdown is required, and the assignment of shutdown
responsibility to qualified operators to ensure that emergency shutdown
is executed in a safe and timely manner.
(E) Emergency operations;
(F) Normal shutdown; and,
(G) Startup following a turnaround, or after an emergency shutdown.
(ii) Operating limits:
(A) Consequences of deviation; and
(B) Steps required to correct or avoid deviation.
(iii) Safety and health considerations:
(A) Properties of, and hazards presented by, the chemicals used in
the process;
(B) Precautions necessary to prevent exposure, including engineering
controls, administrative controls, and personal protective equipment;
(C) Control measures to be taken if physical contact or airborne
exposure occurs;
(D) Quality control for raw materials and control of hazardous
chemical inventory levels; and,
(E) Any special or unique hazards.
(iv) Safety systems and their functions.
(2) Operating procedures shall be readily accessible to employees
who work in or maintain a process.
(3) The operating procedures shall be reviewed as often as necessary
to assure that they reflect current operating practice, including
changes that result from changes in process chemicals, technology, and
equipment, and changes to facilities. The employer shall certify
annually that these operating procedures are current and accurate.
(4) The employer shall develop and implement safe work practices to
provide for the control of hazards during operations such as lockout/
tagout; confined space entry; opening process equipment or piping; and
control over entrance into a facility by maintenance, contractor,
laboratory, or other support personnel. These safe work practices shall
apply to employees and contractor employees.
(g) Training--(1) Initial training. (i) Each employee presently
involved in operating a process, and each employee before being involved
in operating a newly assigned process, shall be trained in an overview
of the process and in the operating procedures as specified in paragraph
(f) of this section. The training shall include emphasis on the specific
safety and health hazards, emergency operations including shutdown, and
safe work practices applicable to the employee's job tasks.
(ii) In lieu of initial training for those employees already
involved in
[[Page 123]]
operating a process on May 26, 1992, an employer may certify in writing
that the employee has the required knowledge, skills, and abilities to
safely carry out the duties and responsibilities as specified in the
operating procedures.
(2) Refresher training. Refresher training shall be provided at
least every three years, and more often if necessary, to each employee
involved in operating a process to assure that the employee understands
and adheres to the current operating procedures of the process. The
employer, in consultation with the employees involved in operating the
process, shall determine the appropriate frequency of refresher
training.
(3) Training documentation. The employer shall ascertain that each
employee involved in operating a process has received and understood the
training required by this paragraph. The employer shall prepare a record
which contains the identity of the employee, the date of training, and
the means used to verify that the employee understood the training.
(h) Contractors--(1) Application. This paragraph applies to
contractors performing maintenance or repair, turnaround, major
renovation, or specialty work on or adjacent to a covered process. It
does not apply to contractors providing incidental services which do not
influence process safety, such as janitorial work, food and drink
services, laundry, delivery or other supply services.
(2) Employer responsibilities. (i) The employer, when selecting a
contractor, shall obtain and evaluate information regarding the contract
employer's safety performance and programs.
(ii) The employer shall inform contract employers of the known
potential fire, explosion, or toxic release hazards related to the
contractor's work and the process.
(iii) The employer shall explain to contract employers the
applicable provisions of the emergency action plan required by paragraph
(n) of this section.
(iv) The employer shall develop and implement safe work practices
consistent with paragraph (f)(4) of this section, to control the
entrance, presence and exit of contract employers and contract employees
in covered process areas.
(v) The employer shall periodically evaluate the performance of
contract employers in fulfilling their obligations as specified in
paragraph (h)(3) of this section.
(vi) The employer shall maintain a contract employee injury and
illness log related to the contractor's work in process areas.
(3) Contract employer responsibilities. (i) The contract employer
shall assure that each contract employee is trained in the work
practices necessary to safely perform his/her job.
(ii) The contract employer shall assure that each contract employee
is instructed in the known potential fire, explosion, or toxic release
hazards related to his/her job and the process, and the applicable
provisions of the emergency action plan.
(iii) The contract employer shall document that each contract
employee has received and understood the training required by this
paragraph. The contract employer shall prepare a record which contains
the identity of the contract employee, the date of training, and the
means used to verify that the employee understood the training.
(iv) The contract employer shall assure that each contract employee
follows the safety rules of the facility including the safe work
practices required by paragraph (f)(4) of this section.
(v) The contract employer shall advise the employer of any unique
hazards presented by the contract employer's work, or of any hazards
found by the contract employer's work.
(i) Pre-startup safety review. (1) The employer shall perform a pre-
startup safety review for new facilities and for modified facilities
when the modification is significant enough to require a change in the
process safety information.
(2) The pre-startup safety review shall confirm that prior to the
introduction of highly hazardous chemicals to a process:
(i) Construction and equipment is in accordance with design
specifications;
[[Page 124]]
(ii) Safety, operating, maintenance, and emergency procedures are in
place and are adequate;
(iii) For new facilities, a process hazard analysis has been
performed and recommendations have been resolved or implemented before
startup; and modified facilities meet the requirements contained in
management of change, paragraph (l).
(iv) Training of each employee involved in operating a process has
been completed.
(j) Mechanical integrity--(1) Application. Paragraphs (j)(2) through
(j)(6) of this section apply to the following process equipment:
(i) Pressure vessels and storage tanks;
(ii) Piping systems (including piping components such as valves);
(iii) Relief and vent systems and devices;
(iv) Emergency shutdown systems;
(v) Controls (including monitoring devices and sensors, alarms, and
interlocks) and,
(vi) Pumps.
(2) Written procedures. The employer shall establish and implement
written procedures to maintain the on-going integrity of process
equipment.
(3) Training for process maintenance activities. The employer shall
train each employee involved in maintaining the on-going integrity of
process equipment in an overview of that process and its hazards and in
the procedures applicable to the employee's job tasks to assure that the
employee can perform the job tasks in a safe manner.
(4) Inspection and testing. (i) Inspections and tests shall be
performed on process equipment.
(ii) Inspection and testing procedures shall follow recognized and
generally accepted good engineering practices.
(iii) The frequency of inspections and tests of process equipment
shall be consistent with applicable manufacturers' recommendations and
good engineering practices, and more frequently if determined to be
necessary by prior operating experience.
(iv) The employer shall document each inspection and test that has
been performed on process equipment. The documentation shall identify
the date of the inspection or test, the name of the person who performed
the inspection or test, the serial number or other identifier of the
equipment on which the inspection or test was performed, a description
of the inspection or test performed, and the results of the inspection
or test.
(5) Equipment deficiencies. The employer shall correct deficiencies
in equipment that are outside acceptable limits (defined by the process
safety information in paragraph (d) of this section) before further use
or in a safe and timely manner when necessary means are taken to assure
safe operation.
(6) Quality assurance. (i) In the construction of new plants and
equipment, the employer shall assure that equipment as it is fabricated
is suitable for the process application for which they will be used.
(ii) Appropriate checks and inspections shall be performed to assure
that equipment is installed properly and consistent with design
specifications and the manufacturer's instructions.
(iii) The employer shall assure that maintenance materials, spare
parts and equipment are suitable for the process application for which
they will be used.
(k) Hot work permit. (1) The employer shall issue a hot work permit
for hot work operations conducted on or near a covered process.
(2) The permit shall document that the fire prevention and
protection requirements in 29 CFR 1926.352 have been implemented prior
to beginning the hot work operations; it shall indicate the date(s)
authorized for hot work; and identify the object on which hot work is to
be performed. The permit shall be kept on file until completion of the
hot work operations.
(l) Management of change. (1) The employer shall establish and
implement written procedures to manage changes (except for
``replacements in kind'') to process chemicals, technology, equipment,
and procedures; and, changes to facilities that affect a covered
process.
(2) The procedures shall assure that the following considerations
are addressed prior to any change:
(i) The technical basis for the proposed change;
(ii) Impact of change on safety and health;
[[Page 125]]
(iii) Modifications to operating procedures;
(iv) Necessary time period for the change; and,
(v) Authorization requirements for the proposed change.
(3) Employees involved in operating a process and maintenance and
contract employees whose job tasks will be affected by a change in the
process shall be informed of, and trained in, the change prior to start-
up of the process or affected part of the process.
(4) If a change covered by this paragraph results in a change in the
process safety information required by paragraph (d) of this section,
such information shall be updated accordingly.
(5) If a change covered by this paragraph results in a change in the
operating procedures or practices required by paragraph (f) of this
section, such procedures or practices shall be updated accordingly.
(m) Incident investigation. (1) The employer shall investigate each
incident which resulted in, or could reasonably have resulted in a
catastrophic release of highly hazardous chemical in the workplace.
(2) An incident investigation shall be initiated as promptly as
possible, but not later than 48 hours following the incident.
(3) An incident investigation team shall be established and consist
of at least one person knowledgeable in the process involved, including
a contract employee if the incident involved work of the contractor, and
other persons with appropriate knowledge and experience to thoroughly
investigate and analyze the incident.
(4) A report shall be prepared at the conclusion of the
investigation which includes at a minimum:
(i) Date of incident;
(ii) Date investigation began;
(iii) A description of the incident;
(iv) The factors that contributed to the incident; and,
(v) Any recommendations resulting from the investigation.
(5) The employer shall establish a system to promptly address and
resolve the incident report findings and recommendations. Resolutions
and corrective actions shall be documented.
(6) The report shall be reviewed with all affected personnel whose
job tasks are relevant to the incident findings including contract
employees where applicable.
(7) Incident investigation reports shall be retained for five years.
(n) Emergency planning and response. The employer shall establish
and implement an emergency action plan for the entire plant in
accordance with the provisions of 29 CFR 1926.35(a). In addition, the
emergency action plan shall include procedures for handling small
releases. Employers covered under this standard may also be subject to
the hazardous waste and emergency response provisions contained in 29
CFR 1926.65(a), (p) and (q).
(o) Compliance audits. (1) Employers shall certify that they have
evaluated compliance with the provisions of this section at least every
three years to verify that the procedures and practices developed under
the standard are adequate and are being followed.
(2) The compliance audit shall be conducted by at least one person
knowledgeable in the process.
(3) A report of the findings of the audit shall be developed.
(4) The employer shall promptly determine and document an
appropriate response to each of the findings of the compliance audit,
and document that deficiencies have been corrected.
(5) Employers shall retain the two (2) most recent compliance audit
reports.
(p) Trade secrets. (1) Employers shall make all information
necessary to comply with the section available to those persons
responsible for compiling the process safety information (required by
paragraph (d) of this section), those assisting in the development of
the process hazard analysis (required by paragraph (e) of this section),
those responsible for developing the operating procedures (required by
paragraph (f) of this section), and those involved in incident
investigations (required by paragraph (m) of this section), emergency
planning and response (paragraph (n) of this section) and compliance
audits (paragraph (o) of this section) without regard to possible trade
secret status of such information.
[[Page 126]]
(2) Nothing in this paragraph shall preclude the employer from
requiring the persons to whom the information is made available under
paragraph (p)(1) of this section to enter into confidentiality
agreements not to disclose the information as set forth in 29 CFR
1926.59.
(3) Subject to the rules and procedures set forth in 29 CFR
1926.59(i) (1) through (12), employees and their designated
representatives shall have access to trade secret information contained
within the process hazard analysis and other documents required to be
developed by this standard.
Appendix A to Sec. 1926.64--List of Highly Hazardous Chemicals, Toxics
and Reactives (Mandatory)
This appendix contains a listing of toxic and reactive highly
hazardous chemicals which present a potential for a catastrophic event
at or above the threshold quantity.
------------------------------------------------------------------------
Chemical Name CAS* TQ**
------------------------------------------------------------------------
Acetaldehyde....................................... 75-07-0 2500
Acrolein (2-Propenal).............................. 107-02-8 150
Acrylyl Chloride................................... 814-68-6 250
Allyl Chloride..................................... 107-05-1 1000
Allylamine......................................... 107-11-9 1000
Alkylaluminums..................................... Varies 5000
Ammonia, Anhydrous................................. 7664-41-7 10000
Ammonia solutions (greater than 44% ammonia by 7664-41-7 15000
weight)...........................................
Ammonium Perchlorate............................... 7790-98-9 500
Ammonium Permanganate.............................. 7787-36-2 7500
Arsine (also called Arsenic Hydride)............... 7784-42-1 100
Bis(Chloromethyl) Ether............................ 542-88-1 100
Boron Trichloride.................................. 10294-34-5 2500
Boron Trifluoride.................................. 7637-07-2 250
Bromine............................................ 7726-95-6 1500
Bromine Chloride................................... 13863-41-7 1500
Bromine Pentafluoride.............................. 7789-30-2 2500
Bromine Trifluoride................................ 7787-71-5 15000
3-Bromopropyne (also called Propargyl Bromide)..... 106-96-7 100
Butyl Hydroperoxide (Tertiary)..................... 75-91-2 5000
Butyl Perbenzoate (Tertiary)....................... 614-45-9 7500
Carbonyl Chloride (see Phosgene)................... 75-44-5 100
* Carbonyl Fluoride................................ 353-50-4 2500
Cellulose Nitrate (concentration greater than 12.6% 9004-70-0 2500
nitrogen..........................................
Chlorine........................................... 7782-50-5 1500
Chlorine Dioxide................................... 10049-04-4 1000
Chlorine Pentrafluoride............................ 13637-63-3 1000
Chlorine Trifluoride............................... 7790-91-2 1000
Chlorodiethylaluminum (also called Diethylaluminum 96-10-6 5000
Chloride).........................................
1-Chloro-2,4-Dinitrobenzene........................ 97-00-7 5000
Chloromethyl Methyl Ether.......................... 107-30-2 500
Chloropicrin....................................... 76-06-2 500
Chloropicrin and Methyl Bromide mixture............ None 1500
Chloropicrin and Methyl Chloride mixture........... None 1500
Cumene Hydroperoxide............................... 80-15-9 5000
Cyanogen........................................... 460-19-5 2500
Cyanogen Chloride.................................. 506-77-4 500
Cyanuric Fluoride.................................. 675-14-9 100
Diacetyl Peroxide (concentration greater than 70%). 110-22-5 5000
Diazomethane....................................... 334-88-3 500
Dibenzoyl Peroxide................................. 94-36-0 7500
Diborane........................................... 19287-45-7 100
Dibutyl Peroxide (Tertiary)........................ 110-05-4 5000
Dichloro Acetylene................................. 7572-29-4 250
Dichlorosilane..................................... 4109-96-0 2500
Diethylzinc........................................ 557-20-0 10000
Diisopropyl Peroxydicarbonate...................... 105-64-6 7500
Dilauroyl Peroxide................................. 105-74-8 7500
Dimethyldichlorosilane............................. 75-78-5 1000
Dimethylhydrazine, 1,1-............................ 57-14-7 1000
Dimethylamine, Anhydrous........................... 124-40-3 2500
2,4-Dinitroaniline................................. 97-02-9 5000
Ethyl Methyl Ketone Peroxide (also Methyl Ethyl 1338-23-4 5000
Ketone Peroxide; concentration greater than 60%)..
Ethyl Nitrite...................................... 109-95-5 5000
Ethylamine......................................... 75-04-7 7500
Ethylene Fluorohydrin.............................. 371-62-0 100
Ethylene Oxide..................................... 75-21-8 5000
Ethyleneimine...................................... 151-56-4 1000
Fluorine........................................... 7782-41-4 1000
Formaldehyde (Formalin)............................ 50-00-0 1000
Furan.............................................. 110-00-9 500
Hexafluoroacetone.................................. 684-16-2 5000
Hydrochloric Acid, Anhydrous....................... 7647-01-0 5000
Hydrofluoric Acid, Anhydrous....................... 7664-39-3 1000
Hydrogen Bromide................................... 10035-10-6 5000
Hydrogen Chloride.................................. 7647-01-0 5000
Hydrogen Cyanide, Anhydrous........................ 74-90-8 1000
Hydrogen Fluoride.................................. 7664-39-3 1000
Hydrogen Peroxide (52% by weight or greater)....... 7722-84-1 7500
Hydrogen Selenide.................................. 7783-07-5 150
Hydrogen Sulfide................................... 7783-06-4 1500
Hydroxylamine...................................... 7803-49-8 2500
Iron, Pentacarbonyl................................ 13463-40-6 250
Isopropylamine..................................... 75-31-0 5000
Ketene............................................. 463-51-4 100
Methacrylaldehyde.................................. 78-85-3 1000
Methacryloyl Chloride.............................. 920-46-7 150
Methacryloyloxyethyl Isocyanate.................... 30674-80-7 100
Methyl Acrylonitrile............................... 126-98-7 250
Methylamine, Anhydrous............................. 74-89-5 1000
[[Page 127]]
Methyl Bromide..................................... 74-83-9 2500
Methyl Chloride.................................... 74-87-3 15000
Methyl Chloroformate............................... 79-22-1 500
Methyl Ethyl Ketone Peroxide (concentration greater 1338-23-4 5000
than 60%).........................................
Methyl Fluoroacetate............................... 453-18-9 100
Methyl Fluorosulfate............................... 421-20-5 100
Methyl Hydrazine................................... 60-34-4 100
Methyl Iodide...................................... 74-88-4 7500
Methyl Isocyanate.................................. 624-83-9 250
Methyl Mercaptan................................... 74-93-1 5000
Methyl Vinyl Ketone................................ 79-84-4 100
Methyltrichlorosilane.............................. 75-79-6 500
Nickel Carbonly (Nickel Tetracarbonyl)............. 13463-39-3 150
Nitric Acid (94.5% by weight or greater)........... 7697-37-2 500
Nitric Oxide....................................... 10102-43-9 250
Nitroaniline (para Nitroaniline.................... 100-01-6 5000
Nitromethane....................................... 75-52-5 2500
Nitrogen Dioxide................................... 10102-44-0 250
Nitrogen Oxides (NO; NO(2); N2O4; N2O3)............ 10102-44-0 250
Nitrogen Tetroxide (also called Nitrogen Peroxide). 10544-72-6 250
Nitrogen Trifluoride............................... 7783-54-2 5000
Nitrogen Trioxide.................................. 10544-73-7 250
Oleum (65% to 80% by weight; also called Fuming 8014-94-7 1000
Sulfuric Acid)....................................
Osmium Tetroxide................................... 20816-12-0 100
Oxygen Difluoride (Fluorine Monoxide).............. 7783-41-7 100
Ozone.............................................. 10028-15-6 100
Pentaborane........................................ 19624-22-7 100
Peracetic Acid (concentration greater 60% Acetic 79-21-0 1000
Acid; also called Peroxyacetic Acid)..............
Perchloric Acid (concentration greater than 60% by 7601-90-3 5000
weight)...........................................
Perchloromethyl Mercaptan.......................... 594-42-3 150
Perchloryl Fluoride................................ 7616-94-6 5000
Peroxyacetic Acid (concentration greater than 60% 79-21-0 1000
Acetic Acid; also called Peracetic Acid)..........
Phosgene (also called Carbonyl Chloride)........... 75-44-5 100
Phosphine (Hydrogen Phosphide)..................... 7803-51-2 100
Phosphorus Oxychloride (also called Phosphoryl 10025-87-3 1000
Chloride).........................................
Phosphorus Trichloride............................. 7719-12-2 1000
Phosphoryl Chloride (also called Phosphorus 10025-87-3 1000
Oxychloride)......................................
Propargyl Bromide.................................. 106-96-7 100
Propyl Nitrate..................................... 627-3-4 2500
Sarin.............................................. 107-44-8 100
Selenium Hexafluoride.............................. 7783-79-1 1000
Stibine (Antimony Hydride)......................... 7803-52-3 500
Sulfur Dioxide (liquid)............................ 7446-09-5 1000
Sulfur Pentafluoride............................... 5714-22-7 250
Sulfur Tetrafluoride............................... 7783-60-0 250
Sulfur Trioxide (also called Sulfuric Anhydride)... 7446-11-9 1000
Sulfuric Anhydride (also called Sulfur Trioxide)... 7446-11-9 1000
Tellurium Hexafluoride............................. 7783-80-4 250
Tetrafluoroethylene................................ 116-14-3 5000
Tetrafluorohydrazine............................... 10036-47-2 5000
Tetramethyl Lead................................... 75-74-1 1000
Thionyl Chloride................................... 7719-09-7 250
Trichloro (chloromethyl) Silane.................... 1558-25-4 100
Trichloro (dichlorophenyl) Silane.................. 27137-85-5 2500
Trichlorosilane.................................... 10025-78-2 5000
Trifluorochloroethylene............................ 79-38-9 10000
Trimethyoxysilane.................................. 2487-90-3 1500
------------------------------------------------------------------------
* Chemical Abstract Service Number
** Threshold Quantity in Pounds (Amount necessary to be covered by this
standard.)
[[Page 128]]
Appendix B to Sec. 1926.64--Block Flow Diagram and Simplified Process
Flow Diagram (Nonmandatory)
[GRAPHIC] [TIFF OMITTED] TC30OC91.008
[[Page 129]]
[GRAPHIC] [TIFF OMITTED] TC30OC91.009
Appendix C to Sec. 1926.64--Compliance Guidelines and Recommendations
for Process Safety Management (Nonmandatory)
This appendix serves as a nonmandatory guideline to assist employers
and employees in complying with the requirements of this section, as
well as provides other helpful recommendations and information. Examples
presented in this appendix are not the only means of achieving the
performance goals in the standard. This appendix neither adds nor
detracts from the requirements of the standard.
1. Introduction to Process Safety Management. The major objective of
process safety management of highly hazardous chemicals is to prevent
unwanted releases of hazardous chemicals especially into locations which
could expose employees and others to serious hazards. An effective
process safety management program requires a systematic approach to
evaluating the whole process. Using this approach the process design,
process technology, operational and maintenance activities and
procedures, nonroutine activities and procedures, emergency preparedness
plans and procedures, training programs, and other elements which impact
the process are all considered in the evaluation. The various lines of
defense that have been incorporated into the design and operation of the
process to prevent or mitigate the release of hazardous chemicals need
to be evaluated and strengthened to assure their effectiveness at each
level. Process safety management is the proactive identification,
evaluation and mitigation or prevention of chemical releases that could
occur as a result of failures in process, procedures or equipment.
[[Page 130]]
The process safety management standard targets highly hazardous
chemicals that have the potential to cause a catastrophic incident. This
standard as a whole is to aid employers in their efforts to prevent or
mitigate episodic chemical releases that could lead to a catastrophe in
the workplace and possibly to the surrounding community. To control
these types of hazards, employers need to develop the necessary
expertise, experiences, judgement and proactive initiative within their
workforce to properly implement and maintain an effective process safety
management program as envisioned in the OSHA standard. This OSHA
standard is required by the Clean Air Act Amendments as is the
Environmental Protection Agency's Risk Management Plan. Employers, who
merge the two sets of requirements into their process safety management
program, will better assure full compliance with each as well as
enhancing their relationship with the local community.
While OSHA believes process safety management will have a positive
effect on the safety of employees in workplaces and also offers other
potential benefits to employers (increased productivity), smaller
businesses which may have limited resources available to them at this
time, might consider alternative avenues of decreasing the risks
associated with highly hazardous chemicals at their workplaces. One
method which might be considered is the reduction in the inventory of
the highly hazardous chemical. This reduction in inventory will result
in a reduction of the risk or potential for a catastrophic incident.
Also, employers including small employers may be able to establish more
efficient inventory control by reducing the quantities of highly
hazardous chemicals on site below the established threshold quantities.
This reduction can be accomplished by ordering smaller shipments and
maintaining the minimum inventory necessary for efficient and safe
operation. When reduced inventory is not feasible, then the employer
might consider dispersing inventory to several locations on site.
Dispersing storage into locations where a release in one location will
not cause a release in another location is a practical method to also
reduce the risk or potential for catastrophic incidents.
2. Employee Involvement in Process Safety Management. Section 304 of
the Clean Air Act Amendments states that employers are to consult with
their employees and their representatives regarding the employers
efforts in the development and implementation of the process safety
management program elements and hazard assessments. Section 304 also
requires employers to train and educate their employees and to inform
affected employees of the findings from incident investigations required
by the process safety management program. Many employers, under their
safety and health programs, have already established means and methods
to keep employees and their representatives informed about relevant
safety and health issues and employers may be able to adapt these
practices and procedures to meet their obligations under this standard.
Employers who have not implemented an occupational safety and health
program may wish to form a safety and health committee of employees and
management representatives to help the employer meet the obligations
specified by this standard. These committees can become a significant
ally in helping the employer to implement and maintain an effective
process safety management program for all employees.
3. Process Safety Information. Complete and accurate written
information concerning process chemicals, process technology, and
process equipment is essential to an effective process safety management
program and to a process hazards analysis. The compiled information will
be a necessary resource to a variety of users including the team that
will perform the process hazards analysis as required under paragraph
(e); those developing the training programs and the operating
procedures; contractors whose employees will be working with the
process; those conducting the pre-startup reviews; local emergency
preparedness planners; and insurance and enforcement officials.
The information to be compiled about the chemicals, including
process intermediates, needs to be comprehensive enough for an accurate
assessment of the fire and explosion characteristics, reactivity
hazards, the safety and health hazards to workers, and the corrosion and
erosion effects on the process equipment and monitoring tools. Current
safety data sheet (SDS) information can be used to help meet this
requirement which must be supplemented with process chemistry
information including runaway reaction and over pressure hazards if
applicable.
Process technology information will be a part of the process safety
information package and it is expected that it will include diagrams of
the type shown in appendix B of this section as well as employer
established criteria for maximum inventory levels for process chemicals;
limits beyond which would be considered upset conditions; and a
qualitative estimate of the consequences or results of deviation that
could occur if operating beyond the established process limits.
Employers are encouraged to use diagrams which will help users
understand the process.
A block flow diagram is used to show the major process equipment and
interconnecting process flow lines and show flow rates, stream
composition, temperatures, and pressures when necessary for clarity. The
block flow diagram is a simplified diagram.
[[Page 131]]
Process flow diagrams are more complex and will show all main flow
streams including valves to enhance the understanding of the process, as
well as pressures and temperatures on all feed and product lines within
all major vessels, in and out of headers and heat exchangers, and points
of pressure and temperature control. Also, materials of construction
information, pump capacities and pressure heads, compressor horsepower
and vessel design pressures and temperatures are shown when necessary
for clarity. In addition, major components of control loops are usually
shown along with key utilities on process flow diagrams.
Piping and instrument diagrams (P&Ids) may be the more appropriate
type of diagrams to show some of the above details and to display the
information for the piping designer and engineering staff. The P&IDs are
to be used to describe the relationships between equipment and
instrumentation as well as other relevant information that will enhance
clarity. Computer software programs which do P&Ids or other diagrams
useful to the information package, may be used to help meet this
requirement.
The information pertaining to process equipment design must be
documented. In other words, what were the codes and standards relied on
to establish good engineering practice. These codes and standards are
published by such organizations as the American Society of Mechanical
Engineers, American Petroleum Institute, American National Standards
Institute, National Fire Protection Association, American Society for
Testing and Materials, National Board of Boiler and Pressure Vessel
Inspectors, National Association of Corrosion Engineers, American
Society of Exchange Manufacturers Association, and model building code
groups.
In addition, various engineering societies issue technical reports
which impact process design. For example, the American Institute of
Chemical Engineers has published technical reports on topics such as two
phase flow for venting devices. This type of technically recognized
report would constitute good engineering practice.
For existing equipment designed and constructed many years ago in
accordance with the codes and standards available at that time and no
longer in general use today, the employer must document which codes and
standards were used and that the design and construction along with the
testing, inspection and operation are still suitable for the intended
use. Where the process technology requires a design which departs from
the applicable codes and standards, the employer must document that the
design and construction is suitable for the intended purpose.
4. Process Hazard Analysis. A process hazard analysis (PHA),
sometimes called a process hazard evaluation, is one of the most
important elements of the process safety management program. A PHA is an
organized and systematic effort to identify and analyze the significance
of potential hazards associated with the processing or handling of
highly hazardous chemicals. A PHA provides information which will assist
employers and employees in making decisions for improving safety and
reducing the consequences of unwanted or unplanned releases of hazardous
chemicals. A PHA is directed toward analyzing potential causes and
consequences of fires, explosions, releases of toxic or flammable
chemicals and major spills of hazardous chemicals. The PHA focuses on
equipment, instrumentation, utilities, human actions (routine and
nonroutine), and external factors that might impact the process. These
considerations assist in determining the hazards and potential failure
points or failure modes in a process.
The selection of a PHA methodology or technique will be influenced
by many factors including the amount of existing knowledge about the
process. Is it a process that has been operated for a long period of
time with little or no innovation and extensive experience has been
generated with its use? Or, is it a new process or one which has been
changed frequently by the inclusion of innovative features? Also, the
size and complexity of the process will influence the decision as to the
appropriate PHA methodology to use. All PHA methodologies are subject to
certain limitations. For example, the checklist methodology works well
when the process is very stable and no changes are made, but it is not
as effective when the process has undergone extensive change. The
checklist may miss the most recent changes and consequently the changes
would not be evaluated. Another limitation to be considered concerns the
assumptions made by the team or analyst. The PHA is dependent on good
judgement and the assumptions made during the study need to be
documented and understood by the team and reviewer and kept for a future
PHA.
The team conducting the PHA need to understand the methodology that
is going to be used. A PHA team can vary in size from two people to a
number of people with varied operational and technical backgrounds. Some
team members may only be a part of the team for a limited time. The team
leader needs to be fully knowledgeable in the proper implementation of
the PHA methodology that is to be used and should be impartial in the
evaluation. The other full or part time team members need to provide the
team with expertise in areas such as process technology, process design,
operating procedures
[[Page 132]]
and practices, including how the work is actually performed, alarms,
emergency procedures, instrumentation, maintenance procedures, both
routine and nonroutine tasks, including how the tasks are authorized,
procurement of parts and supplies, safety and health, and any other
relevant subject as the need dictates. At least one team member must be
familiar with the process.
The ideal team will have an intimate knowledge of the standards,
codes, specifications and regulations applicable to the process being
studied. The selected team members need to be compatible and the team
leader needs to be able to manage the team and the PHA study. The team
needs to be able to work together while benefiting from the expertise of
others on the team or outside the team, to resolve issues, and to forge
a consensus on the findings of the study and the recommendations.
The application of a PHA to a process may involve the use of
different methodologies for various parts of the process. For example, a
process involving a series of unit operations of varying sizes,
complexities, and ages may use different methodologies and team members
for each operation. Then the conclusions can be integrated into one
final study and evaluation. A more specific example is the use of a
checklist PHA for a standard boiler or heat exchanger and the use of a
Hazard and Operability PHA for the overall process. Also, for batch type
processes like custom batch operations, a generic PHA of a
representative batch may be used where there are only small changes of
monomer or other ingredient ratios and the chemistry is documented for
the full range and ratio of batch ingredients. Another process that
might consider using a generic type of PHA is a gas plant. Often these
plants are simply moved from site to site and therefore, a generic PHA
may be used for these movable plants. Also, when an employer has several
similar size gas plants and no sour gas is being processed at the site,
then a generic PHA is feasible as long as the variations of the
individual sites are accounted for in the PHA. Finally, when an employer
has a large continuous process which has several control rooms for
different portions of the process such as for a distillation tower and a
blending operation, the employer may wish to do each segment separately
and then integrate the final results.
Additionally, small businesses which are covered by this rule, will
often have processes that have less storage volume, less capacity, and
less complicated than processes at a large facility. Therefore, OSHA
would anticipate that the less complex methodologies would be used to
meet the process hazard analysis criteria in the standard. These process
hazard analyses can be done in less time and with a few people being
involved. A less complex process generally means that less data, P&IDs,
and process information is needed to perform a process hazard analysis.
Many small businesses have processes that are not unique, such as
cold storage lockers or water treatment facilities. Where employer
associations have a number of members with such facilities, a generic
PHA, evolved from a checklist or what-if questions, could be developed
and used by each employer effectively to reflect his/her particular
process; this would simplify compliance for them.
When the employer has a number of processes which require a PHA, the
employer must set up a priority system of which PHAs to conduct first. A
preliminary or gross hazard analysis may be useful in prioritizing the
processes that the employer has determined are subject to coverage by
the process safety management standard. Consideration should first be
given to those processes with the potential of adversely affecting the
largest number of employees. This prioritizing should consider the
potential severity of a chemical release, the number of potentially
affected employees, the operating history of the process such as the
frequency of chemical releases, the age of the process and any other
relevant factors. These factors would suggest a ranking order and would
suggest either using a weighing factor system or a systematic ranking
method. The use of a preliminary hazard analysis would assist an
employer in determining which process should be of the highest priority
and thereby the employer would obtain the greatest improvement in safety
at the facility.
Detailed guidance on the content and application of process hazard
analysis methodologies is available from the American Institute of
Chemical Engineers' Center for Chemical Process Safety (see appendix D).
5. Operating Procedures and Practices. Operating procedures describe
tasks to be performed, data to be recorded, operating conditions to be
maintained, samples to be collected, and safety and health precautions
to be taken. The procedures need to be technically accurate,
understandable to employees, and revised periodically to ensure that
they reflect current operations. The process safety information package
is to be used as a resource to better assure that the operating
procedures and practices are consistent with the known hazards of the
chemicals in the process and that the operating parameters are accurate.
Operating procedures should be reviewed by engineering staff and
operating personnel to ensure that they are accurate and provide
practical instructions on how to actually carry out job duties safely.
Operating procedures will include specific instructions or details
on what steps are to be taken or followed in carrying out the stated
procedures. These operating instructions for each procedure should
include the
[[Page 133]]
applicable safety precautions and should contain appropriate information
on safety implications. For example, the operating procedures addressing
operating parameters will contain operating instructions about pressure
limits, temperature ranges, flow rates, what to do when an upset
condition occurs, what alarms and instruments are pertinent if an upset
condition occurs, and other subjects. Another example of using operating
instructions to properly implement operating procedures is in starting
up or shutting down the process. In these cases, different parameters
will be required from those of normal operation. These operating
instructions need to clearly indicate the distinctions between startup
and normal operations such as the appropriate allowances for heating up
a unit to reach the normal operating parameters. Also the operating
instructions need to describe the proper method for increasing the
temperature of the unit until the normal operating temperature
parameters are achieved.
Computerized process control systems add complexity to operating
instructions. These operating instructions need to describe the logic of
the software as well as the relationship between the equipment and the
control system; otherwise, it may not be apparent to the operator.
Operating procedures and instructions are important for training
operating personnel. The operating procedures are often viewed as the
standard operating practices (SOPs) for operations. Control room
personnel and operating staff, in general, need to have a full
understanding of operating procedures. If workers are not fluent in
English then procedures and instructions need to be prepared in a second
language understood by the workers. In addition, operating procedures
need to be changed when there is a change in the process as a result of
the management of change procedures. The consequences of operating
procedure changes need to be fully evaluated and the information
conveyed to the personnel. For example, mechanical changes to the
process made by the maintenance department (like changing a valve from
steel to brass or other subtle changes) need to be evaluated to
determine if operating procedures and practices also need to be changed.
All management of change actions must be coordinated and integrated with
current operating procedures and operating personnel must be oriented to
the changes in procedures before the change is made. When the process is
shutdown in order to make a change, then the operating procedures must
be updated before startup of the process.
Training in how to handle upset conditions must be accomplished as
well as what operating personnel are to do in emergencies such as when a
pump seal fails or a pipeline ruptures. Communication between operating
personnel and workers performing work within the process area, such as
nonroutine tasks, also must be maintained. The hazards of the tasks are
to be conveyed to operating personnel in accordance with established
procedures and to those performing the actual tasks. When the work is
completed, operating personnel should be informed to provide closure on
the job.
6. Employee Training. All employees, including maintenance and
contractor employees, involved with highly hazardous chemicals need to
fully understand the safety and health hazards of the chemicals and
processes they work with for the protection of themselves, their fellow
employees and the citizens of nearby communities. Training conducted in
compliance with 1926.59, the Hazard Communication standard, will help
employees to be more knowledgeable about the chemicals they work with as
well as familiarize them with reading and understanding SDS. However,
additional training in subjects such as operating procedures and safety
work practices, emergency evacuation and response, safety procedures,
routine and nonroutine work authorization activities, and other areas
pertinent to process safety and health will need to be covered by an
employer's training program.
In establishing their training programs, employers must clearly
define the employees to be trained and what subjects are to be covered
in their training. Employers in setting up their training program will
need to clearly establish the goals and objectives they wish to achieve
with the training that they provide to their employees. The learning
goals or objectives should be written in clear measurable terms before
the training begins. These goals and objectives need to be tailored to
each of the specific training modules or segments. Employers should
describe the important actions and conditions under which the employee
will demonstrate competence or knowledge as well as what is acceptable
performance.
Hands-on-training where employees are able to use their senses
beyond listening, will enhance learning. For example, operating
personnel, who will work in a control room or at control panels, would
benefit by being trained at a simulated control panel or panels. Upset
conditions of various types could be displayed on the simulator, and
then the employee could go through the proper operating procedures to
bring the simulator panel back to the normal operating parameters. A
training environment could be created to help the trainee feel the full
reality of the situation but, of course, under controlled conditions.
This realistic type of training can be very effective in teaching
employees correct procedures while allowing them to also see the
consequences of what might happens if they do not follow established
operating procedures. Other training techniques using videos or on-the-
[[Page 134]]
job training can also be very effective for teaching other job tasks,
duties, or other important information. An effective training program
will allow the employee to fully participate in the training process and
to practice their skill or knowledge.
Employers need to periodically evaluate their training programs to
see if the necessary skills, knowledge, and routines are being properly
understood and implemented by their trained employees. The means or
methods for evaluating the training should be developed along with the
training program goals and objectives. Training program evaluation will
help employers to determine the amount of training their employees
understood, and whether the desired results were obtained. If, after the
evaluation, it appears that the trained employees are not at the level
of knowledge and skill that was expected, the employer will need to
revise the training program, provide retraining, or provide more
frequent refresher training sessions until the deficiency is resolved.
Those who conducted the training and those who received the training
should also be consulted as to how best to improve the training process.
If there is a language barrier, the language known to the trainees
should be used to reinforce the training messages and information.
Careful consideration must be given to assure that employees
including maintenance and contract employees receive current and updated
training. For example, if changes are made to a process, impacted
employees must be trained in the changes and understand the effects of
the changes on their job tasks (e.g., any new operating procedures
pertinent to their tasks). Additionally, as already discussed the
evaluation of the employee's absorption of training will certainly
influence the need for training.
7. Contractors. Employers who use contractors to perform work in and
around processes that involve highly hazardous chemicals, will need to
establish a screening process so that they hire and use contractors who
accomplish the desired job tasks without compromising the safety and
health of employees at a facility. For contractors, whose safety
performance on the job is not known to the hiring employer, the employer
will need to obtain information on injury and illness rates and
experience and should obtain contractor references. Additionally, the
employer must assure that the contractor has the appropriate job skills,
knowledge and certifications (such as for pressure vessel welders).
Contractor work methods and experiences should be evaluated. For
example, does the contractor conducting demolition work swing loads over
operating processes or does the contractor avoid such hazards?
Maintaining a site injury and illness log for contractors is another
method employers must use to track and maintain current knowledge of
work activities involving contract employees working on or adjacent to
covered processes. Injury and illness logs of both the employer's
employees and contract employees allow an employer to have full
knowledge of process injury and illness experience. This log will also
contain information which will be of use to those auditing process
safety management compliance and those involved in incident
investigations.
Contract employees must perform their work safely. Considering that
contractors often perform very specialized and potentially hazardous
tasks such as confined space entry activities and nonroutine repair
activities it is quite important that their activities be controlled
while they are working on or near a covered process. A permit system or
work authorization system for these activities would also be helpful to
all affected employers. The use of a work authorization system keeps an
employer informed of contract employee activities, and as a benefit the
employer will have better coordination and more management control over
the work being performed in the process area. A well run and well
maintained process where employee safety is fully recognized will
benefit all of those who work in the facility whether they be contract
employees or employees of the owner.
8. Pre-Startup Safety. For new processes, the employer will find a
PHA helpful in improving the design and construction of the process from
a reliability and quality point of view. The safe operation of the new
process will be enhanced by making use of the PHA recommendations before
final installations are completed. P&IDs are to be completed along with
having the operating procedures in place and the operating staff trained
to run the process before startup. The initial startup procedures and
normal operating procedures need to be fully evaluated as part of the
pre-startup review to assure a safe transfer into the normal operating
mode for meeting the process parameters.
For existing processes that have been shutdown for turnaround, or
modification, etc., the employer must assure that any changes other than
``replacement in kind'' made to the process during shutdown go through
the management of change procedures. P&IDs will need to be updated as
necessary, as well as operating procedures and instructions. If the
changes made to the process during shutdown are significant and impact
the training program, then operating personnel as well as employees
engaged in routine and nonroutine work in the process area may need some
refresher or additional training in light of the changes. Any incident
investigation recommendations, compliance audits or PHA recommendations
need to be reviewed as well to see what impacts they may have on the
process before beginning the startup.
[[Page 135]]
9. Mechanical Integrity. Employers will need to review their
maintenance programs and schedules to see if there are areas where
``breakdown'' maintenance is used rather than an on-going mechanical
integrity program. Equipment used to process, store, or handle highly
hazardous chemicals needs to be designed, constructed, installed and
maintained to minimize the risk of releases of such chemicals. This
requires that a mechanical integrity program be in place to assure the
continued integrity of process equipment. Elements of a mechanical
integrity program include the identification and categorization of
equipment and instrumentation, inspections and tests, testing and
inspection frequencies, development of maintenance procedures, training
of maintenance personnel, the establishment of criteria for acceptable
test results, documentation of test and inspection results, and
documentation of manufacturer recommendations as to meantime to failure
for equipment and instrumentation.
The first line of defense an employer has available is to operate
and maintain the process as designed, and to keep the chemicals
contained. This line of defense is backed up by the next line of defense
which is the controlled release of chemicals through venting to
scrubbers or flares, or to surge or overflow tanks which are designed to
receive such chemicals, etc. These lines of defense are the primary
lines of defense or means to prevent unwanted releases. The secondary
lines of defense would include fixed fire protection systems like
sprinklers, water spray, or deluge systems, monitor guns, etc., dikes,
designed drainage systems, and other systems which would control or
mitigate hazardous chemicals once an unwanted release occurs. These
primary and secondary lines of defense are what the mechanical integrity
program needs to protect and strengthen these primary and secondary
lines of defenses where appropriate.
The first step of an effective mechanical integrity program is to
compile and categorize a list of process equipment and instrumentation
for inclusion in the program. This list would include pressure vessels,
storage tanks, process piping, relief and vent systems, fire protection
system components, emergency shutdown systems and alarms and interlocks
and pumps. For the categorization of instrumentation and the listed
equipment the employer would prioritize which pieces of equipment
require closer scrutiny than others. Meantime to failure of various
instrumentation and equipment parts would be known from the
manufacturers data or the employer's experience with the parts, which
would then influence the inspection and testing frequency and associated
procedures. Also, applicable codes and standards such as the National
Board Inspection Code, or those from the American Society for Testing
and Material, American Petroleum Institute, National Fire Protection
Association, American National Standards Institute, American Society of
Mechanical Engineers, and other groups, provide information to help
establish an effective testing and inspection frequency, as well as
appropriate methodologies.
The applicable codes and standards provide criteria for external
inspections for such items as foundation and supports, anchor bolts,
concrete or steel supports, guy wires, nozzles and sprinklers, pipe
hangers, grounding connections, protective coatings and insulation, and
external metal surfaces of piping and vessels, etc. These codes and
standards also provide information on methodologies for internal
inspection, and a frequency formula based on the corrosion rate of the
materials of construction. Also, erosion both internal and external
needs to be considered along with corrosion effects for piping and
valves. Where the corrosion rate is not known, a maximum inspection
frequency is recommended, and methods of developing the corrosion rate
are available in the codes. Internal inspections need to cover items
such as vessel shell, bottom and head; metallic linings; nonmetallic
linings; thickness measurements for vessels and piping; inspection for
erosion, corrosion, cracking and bulges; internal equipment like trays,
baffles, sensors and screens for erosion, corrosion or cracking and
other deficiencies. Some of these inspections may be performed by state
or local government inspectors under state and local statutes. However,
each employer needs to develop procedures to ensure that tests and
inspections are conducted properly and that consistency is maintained
even where different employees may be involved. Appropriate training is
to be provided to maintenance personnel to ensure that they understand
the preventive maintenance program procedures, safe practices, and the
proper use and application of special equipment or unique tools that may
be required. This training is part of the overall training program
called for in the standard.
A quality assurance system is needed to help ensure that the proper
materials of construction are used, that fabrication and inspection
procedures are proper, and that installation procedures recognize field
installation concerns. The quality assurance program is an essential
part of the mechanical integrity program and will help to maintain the
primary and secondary lines of defense that have been designed into the
process to prevent unwanted chemical releases or those which control or
mitigate a release. ``As built'' drawings, together with certifications
of coded vessels and other equipment, and materials of construction need
to be verified and retained in the quality assurance documentation.
Equipment installation jobs need
[[Page 136]]
to be properly inspected in the field for use of proper materials and
procedures and to assure that qualified craftsmen are used to do the
job. The use of appropriate gaskets, packing, bolts, valves, lubricants
and welding rods need to be verified in the field. Also, procedures for
installation of safety devices need to be verified, such as the torque
on the bolts on ruptured disc installations, uniform torque on flange
bolts, proper installation of pump seals, etc. If the quality of parts
is a problem, it may be appropriate to conduct audits of the equipment
supplier's facilities to better assure proper purchases of required
equipment which is suitable for its intended service. Any changes in
equipment that may become necessary will need to go through the
management of change procedures.
10. Nonroutine Work Authorizations. Nonroutine work which is
conducted in process areas needs to be controlled by the employer in a
consistent manner. The hazards identified involving the work that is to
be accomplished must be communicated to those doing the work, but also
to those operating personnel whose work could affect the safety of the
process. A work authorization notice or permit must have a procedure
that describes the steps the maintenance supervisor, contractor
representative or other person needs to follow to obtain the necessary
clearance to get the job started. The work authorization procedures need
to reference and coordinate, as applicable, lockout/tagout procedures,
line breaking procedures, confined space entry procedures and hot work
authorizations. This procedure also needs to provide clear steps to
follow once the job is completed in order to provide closure for those
that need to know the job is now completed and equipment can be returned
to normal.
11. Managing Change. To properly manage changes to process
chemicals, technology, equipment and facilities, one must define what is
meant by change. In this process safety management standard, change
includes all modifications to equipment, procedures, raw materials and
processing conditions other than ``replacement in kind.'' These changes
need to be properly managed by identifying and reviewing them prior to
implementation of the change. For example, the operating procedures
contain the operating parameters (pressure limits, temperature ranges,
flow rates, etc.) and the importance of operating within these limits.
While the operator must have the flexibility to maintain safe operation
within the established parameters, any operation outside of these
parameters requires review and approval by a written management of
change procedure.
Management of change covers such as changes in process technology
and changes to equipment and instrumentation. Changes in process
technology can result from changes in production rates, raw materials,
experimentation, equipment unavailability, new equipment, new product
development, change in catalyst and changes in operating conditions to
improve yield or quality. Equipment changes include among others change
in materials of construction, equipment specifications, piping pre-
arrangements, experimental equipment, computer program revisions and
changes in alarms and interlocks. Employers need to establish means and
methods to detect both technical changes and mechanical changes.
Temporary changes have caused a number of catastrophes over the
years, and employers need to establish ways to detect temporary changes
as well as those that are permanent. It is important that a time limit
for temporary changes be established and monitored since, without
control, these changes may tend to become permanent. Temporary changes
are subject to the management of change provisions. In addition, the
management of change procedures are used to insure that the equipment
and procedures are returned to their original or designed conditions at
the end of the temporary change. Proper documentation and review of
these changes is invaluable in assuring that the safety and health
considerations are being incorporated into the operating procedures and
the process.
Employers may wish to develop a form or clearance sheet to
facilitate the processing of changes through the management of change
procedures. A typical change form may include a description and the
purpose of the change, the technical basis for the change, safety and
health considerations, documentation of changes for the operating
procedures, maintenance procedures, inspection and testing, P&IDs,
electrical classification, training and communications, pre-startup
inspection, duration if a temporary change, approvals and authorization.
Where the impact of the change is minor and well understood, a check
list reviewed by an authorized person with proper communication to
others who are affected may be sufficient. However, for a more complex
or significant design change, a hazard evaluation procedure with
approvals by operations, maintenance, and safety departments may be
appropriate. Changes in documents such as P&IDs, raw materials,
operating procedures, mechanical integrity programs, electrical
classifications, etc., need to be noted so that these revisions can be
made permanent when the drawings and procedure manuals are updated.
Copies of process changes need to be kept in an accessible location to
ensure that design changes are available to operating personnel as well
as to PHA team members when a PHA is being done or one is being updated.
[[Page 137]]
12. Investigation of Incidents. Incident investigation is the
process of identifying the underlying causes of incidents and
implementing steps to prevent similar events from occurring. The intent
of an incident investigation is for employers to learn from past
experiences and thus avoid repeating past mistakes. The incidents for
which OSHA expects employers to become aware and to investigate are the
types of events which result in or could reasonably have resulted in a
catastrophic release. Some of the events are sometimes referred to as
``near misses,'' meaning that a serious consequence did not occur, but
could have.
Employers need to develop in-house capability to investigate
incidents that occur in their facilities. A team needs to be assembled
by the employer and trained in the techniques of investigation including
how to conduct interviews of witnesses, needed documentation and report
writing. A multi-disciplinary team is better able to gather the facts of
the event and to analyze them and develop plausible scenarios as to what
happened, and why. Team members should be selected on the basis of their
training, knowledge and ability to contribute to a team effort to fully
investigate the incident. Employees in the process area where the
incident occurred should be consulted, interviewed or made a member of
the team. Their knowledge of the events form a significant set of facts
about the incident which occurred. The report, its findings and
recommendations are to be shared with those who can benefit from the
information. The cooperation of employees is essential to an effective
incident investigation. The focus of the investigation should be to
obtain facts, and not to place blame. The team and the investigation
process should clearly deal with all involved individuals in a fair,
open and consistent manner.
13. Emergency Preparedness. Each employer must address what actions
employees are to take when there is an unwanted release of highly
hazardous chemicals. Emergency preparedness or the employer's tertiary
(third) lines of defense are those that will be relied on along with the
secondary lines of defense when the primary lines of defense which are
used to prevent an unwanted release fail to stop the release. Employers
will need to decide if they want employees to handle and stop small or
minor incidental releases. Whether they wish to mobilize the available
resources at the plant and have them brought to bear on a more
significant release. Or whether employers want their employees to
evacuate the danger area and promptly escape to a preplanned safe zone
area, and allow the local community emergency response organizations to
handle the release. Or whether the employer wants to use some
combination of these actions. Employers will need to select how many
different emergency preparedness or tertiary lines of defense they plan
to have and then develop the necessary plans and procedures, and
appropriately train employees in their emergency duties and
responsibilities and then implement these lines of defense.
Employers at a minimum must have an emergency action plan which will
facilitate the prompt evacuation of employees when an unwanted release
of highly hazardous chemical. This means that the employer will have a
plan that will be activated by an alarm system to alert employees when
to evacuate and, that employees who are physically impaired, will have
the necessary support and assistance to get them to the safe zone as
well. The intent of these requirements is to alert and move employees to
a safe zone quickly. Delaying alarms or confusing alarms are to be
avoided. The use of process control centers or similar process buildings
in the process area as safe areas is discouraged. Recent catastrophes
have shown that a large life loss has occurred in these structures
because of where they have been sited and because they are not
necessarily designed to withstand over-pressures from shockwaves
resulting from explosions in the process area.
Unwanted incidental releases of highly hazardous chemicals in the
process area must be addressed by the employer as to what actions
employees are to take. If the employer wants employees to evacuate the
area, then the emergency action plan will be activated. For outdoor
processes where wind direction is important for selecting the safe route
to a refuge area, the employer should place a wind direction indicator
such as a wind sock or pennant at the highest point that can be seen
throughout the process area. Employees can move in the direction of
cross wind to upwind to gain safe access to the refuge area by knowing
the wind direction.
If the employer wants specific employees in the release area to
control or stop the minor emergency or incidental release, these actions
must be planned for in advance and procedures developed and implemented.
Preplanning for handling incidental releases for minor emergencies in
the process area needs to be done, appropriate equipment for the hazards
must be provided, and training conducted for those employees who will
perform the emergency work before they respond to handle an actual
release. The employer's training program, including the Hazard
Communication standard training is to address the training needs for
employees who are expected to handle incidental or minor releases.
Preplanning for releases that are more serious than incidental
releases is another important line of defense to be used by the
employer. When a serious release of a highly hazardous chemical occurs,
the employer
[[Page 138]]
through preplanning will have determined in advance what actions
employees are to take. The evacuation of the immediate release area and
other areas as necessary would be accomplished under the emergency
action plan. If the employer wishes to use plant personnel such as a
fire brigade, spill control team, a hazardous materials team, or use
employees to render aid to those in the immediate release area and
control or mitigate the incident, these actions are covered by 1926.65,
the Hazardous Waste Operations and Emergency Response (HAZWOPER)
standard. If outside assistance is necessary, such as through mutual aid
agreements between employers or local government emergency response
organizations, these emergency responders are also covered by HAZWOPER.
The safety and health protections required for emergency responders are
the responsibility of their employers and of the on-scene incident
commander.
Responders may be working under very hazardous conditions and
therefore the objective is to have them competently led by an on-scene
incident commander and the commander's staff, properly equipped to do
their assigned work safely, and fully trained to carry out their duties
safely before they respond to an emergency. Drills, training exercises,
or simulations with the local community emergency response planners and
responder organizations is one means to obtain better preparedness. This
close cooperation and coordination between plant and local community
emergency preparedness managers will also aid the employer in complying
with the Environmental Protection Agency's Risk Management Plan
criteria.
One effective way for medium to large facilities to enhance
coordination and communication during emergencies for on plant
operations and with local community organizations is for employers to
establish and equip an emergency control center. The emergency control
center would be sited in a safe zone area so that it could be occupied
throughout the duration of an emergency. The center would serve as the
major communication link between the on-scene incident commander and
plant or corporate management as well as with the local community
officials. The communication equipment in the emergency control center
should include a network to receive and transmit information by
telephone, radio or other means. It is important to have a backup
communication network in case of power failure or one communication
means fails. The center should also be equipped with the plant layout
and community maps, utility drawings including fire water, emergency
lighting, appropriate reference materials such as a government agency
notification list, company personnel phone list, SARA Title III reports
and safety data sheets, emergency plans and procedures manual, a listing
with the location of emergency response equipment, mutual aid
information, and access to meteorological or weather condition data and
any dispersion modeling data.
14. Compliance Audits. Employers need to select a trained individual
or assemble a trained team of people to audit the process safety
management system and program. A small process or plant may need only
one knowledgeable person to conduct an audit. The audit is to include an
evaluation of the design and effectiveness of the process safety
management system and a field inspection of the safety and health
conditions and practices to verify that the employer's systems are
effectively implemented. The audit should be conducted or lead by a
person knowledgeable in audit techniques and who is impartial towards
the facility or area being audited. The essential elements of an audit
program include planning, staffing, conducting the audit, evaluation and
corrective action, follow-up and documentation.
Planning in advance is essential to the success of the auditing
process. Each employer needs to establish the format, staffing,
scheduling and verification methods prior to conducting the audit. The
format should be designed to provide the lead auditor with a procedure
or checklist which details the requirements of each section of the
standard. The names of the audit team members should be listed as part
of the format as well. The checklist, if properly designed, could serve
as the verification sheet which provides the auditor with the necessary
information to expedite the review and assure that no requirements of
the standard are omitted. This verification sheet format could also
identify those elements that will require evaluation or a response to
correct deficiencies. This sheet could also be used for developing the
follow-up and documentation requirements.
The selection of effective audit team members is critical to the
success of the program. Team members should be chosen for their
experience, knowledge, and training and should be familiar with the
processes and with auditing techniques, practices and procedures. The
size of the team will vary depending on the size and complexity of the
process under consideration. For a large, complex, highly instrumented
plant, it may be desirable to have team members with expertise in
process engineering and design, process chemistry, instrumentation and
computer controls, electrical hazards and classifications, safety and
health disciplines, maintenance, emergency preparedness, warehousing or
shipping, and process safety auditing. The team may use part-time
members to provide for the depth of expertise required as well as for
what is actually done or followed, compared to what is written.
An effective audit includes a review of the relevant documentation
and process safety
[[Page 139]]
information, inspection of the physical facilities, and interviews with
all levels of plant personnel. Utilizing the audit procedure and
checklist developed in the preplanning stage, the audit team can
systematically analyze compliance with the provisions of the standard
and any other corporate policies that are relevant. For example, the
audit team will review all aspects of the training program as part of
the overall audit. The team will review the written training program for
adequacy of content, frequency of training, effectiveness of training in
terms of its goals and objectives as well as to how it fits into meeting
the standard's requirements, documentation, etc. Through interviews, the
team can determine the employee's knowledge and awareness of the safety
procedures, duties, rules, emergency response assignments, etc. During
the inspection, the team can observe actual practices such as safety and
health policies, procedures, and work authorization practices. This
approach enables the team to identify deficiencies and determine where
corrective actions or improvements are necessary.
An audit is a technique used to gather sufficient facts and
information, including statistical information, to verify compliance
with standards. Auditors should select as part of their preplanning a
sample size sufficient to give a degree of confidence that the audit
reflects the level of compliance with the standard. The audit team,
through this systematic analysis, should document areas which require
corrective action as well as those areas where the process safety
management system is effective and working in an effective manner. This
provides a record of the audit procedures and findings, and serves as a
baseline of operation data for future audits. It will assist future
auditors in determining changes or trends from previous audits.
Corrective action is one of the most important parts of the audit.
It includes not only addressing the identified deficiencies, but also
planning, followup, and documentation. The corrective action process
normally begins with a management review of the audit findings. The
purpose of this review is to determine what actions are appropriate, and
to establish priorities, timetables, resource allocations and
requirements and responsibilities. In some cases, corrective action may
involve a simple change in procedure or minor maintenance effort to
remedy the concern. Management of change procedures need to be used, as
appropriate, even for what may seem to be a minor change. Many of the
deficiencies can be acted on promptly, while some may require
engineering studies or indepth review of actual procedures and
practices. There may be instances where no action is necessary and this
is a valid response to an audit finding. All actions taken, including an
explanation where no action is taken on a finding, needs to be
documented as to what was done and why.
It is important to assure that each deficiency identified is
addressed, the corrective action to be taken noted, and the audit person
or team responsible be properly documented by the employer. To control
the corrective action process, the employer should consider the use of a
tracking system. This tracking system might include periodic status
reports shared with affected levels of management, specific reports such
as completion of an engineering study, and a final implementation report
to provide closure for audit findings that have been through management
of change, if appropriate, and then shared with affected employees and
management. This type of tracking system provides the employer with the
status of the corrective action. It also provides the documentation
required to verify that appropriate corrective actions were taken on
deficiencies identified in the audit.
Appendix D to Sec. 1926.64--Sources of Further Information
(Nonmandatory)
1. Center for Chemical Process Safety, American Institute of
Chemical Engineers, 345 East 47th Street, New York, NY 10017, (212) 705-
7319.
2. ``Guidelines for Hazard Evaluation Procedures,'' American
Institute of Chemical Engineers; 345 East 47th Street, New York, NY
10017.
3. ``Guidelines for Technical Management of Chemical Process
Safety,'' Center for Chemical Process Safety of the American Institute
of Chemical Engineers; 345 East 47th Street, New York, NY 10017.
4. ``Evaluating Process Safety in the Chemical Industry,'' Chemical
Manufacturers Association; 2501 M Street NW, Washington, DC 20037.
5. ``Safe Warehousing of Chemicals,'' Chemical Manufacturers
Association; 2501 M Street NW, Washington, DC 20037.
6. ``Management of Process Hazards,'' American Petroleum Institute
(API Recommended Practice 750); 1220 L Street, N.W., Washington, DC
20005.
7. ``Improving Owner and Contractor Safety Performance,'' American
Petroleum Institute (API Recommended Practice 2220); API, 1220 L Street
N.W., Washington, DC 20005.
8. Chemical Manufacturers Association (CMA's Manager Guide), First
Edition, September 1991; CMA, 2501 M Street, N.W., Washington, DC 20037.
9. ``Improving Construction Safety Performance,'' Report A- 3, The
Business Roundtable; The Business Roundtable, 200 Park Avenue, New York,
NY 10166. (Report includes criteria to evaluate contractor safety
performance and criteria to enhance contractor safety performance).
[[Page 140]]
10. ``Recommended Guidelines for Contractor Safety and Health,''
Texas Chemical Council; Texas Chemical Council, 1402 Nueces Street,
Austin, TX 78701-1534.
11. ``Loss Prevention in the Process Industries,'' Volumes I and II;
Frank P. Lees, Butterworth; London 1983.
12. ``Safety and Health Program Management Guidelines,'' 1989; U.S.
Department of Labor, Occupational Safety and Health Administration.
13. ``Safety and Health Guide for the Chemical Industry,'' 1986,
(OSHA 3091); U.S. Department of Labor, Occupational Safety and Health
Administration; 200 Constitution Avenue, N.W., Washington, DC 20210.
14. ``Review of Emergency Systems,'' June 1988; U.S. Environmental
Protection Agency (EPA), Office of Solid Waste and Emergency Response,
Washington, DC 20460.
15. ``Technical Guidance for Hazards Analysis, Emergency Planning
for Extremely Hazardous Substances,'' December 1987; U.S. Environmental
Protection Agency (EPA), Federal Emergency Management Administration
(FEMA) and U.S. Department of Transportation (DOT), Washington, DC
20460.
16. ``Accident Investigation...A New Approach,'' 1983, National
Safety Council; 444 North Michigan Avenue, Chicago, IL 60611-3991.
17. ``Fire & Explosion Index Hazard Classification Guide,'' 6th
Edition, May 1987, Dow Chemical Company; Midland, Michigan 48674.
18. ``Chemical Exposure Index,'' May 1988, Dow Chemical Company;
Midland, Michigan 48674.
[58 FR 35115, June 30, 1993, as amended at 77 FR 17890, Mar. 26, 2012;
78 FR 9315, Feb. 8, 2013]
Sec. 1926.65 Hazardous waste operations and emergency response.
(a) Scope, application, and definitions--(1) Scope. This section
covers the following operations, unless the employer can demonstrate
that the operation does not involve employee exposure or the reasonable
possibility for employee exposure to safety or health hazards:
(i) Clean-up operations required by a governmental body, whether
Federal, state, local or other involving hazardous substances that are
conducted at uncontrolled hazardous waste sites (including, but not
limited to, the EPA's National Priority Site List (NPL), state priority
site lists, sites recommended for the EPA NPL, and initial
investigations of government identified sites which are conducted before
the presence or absence of hazardous substances has been ascertained);
(ii) Corrective actions involving clean-up operations at sites
covered by the Resource Conservation and Recovery Act of 1976 (RCRA) as
amended (42 U.S.C. 6901 et seq.);
(iii) Voluntary clean-up operations at sites recognized by Federal,
state, local or other governmental bodies as uncontrolled hazardous
waste sites;
(iv) Operations involving hazardous wastes that are conducted at
treatment, storage, and disposal (TSD) facilities regulated by 40 CFR
parts 264 and 265 pursuant to RCRA; or by agencies under agreement with
U.S.E.P.A. to implement RCRA regulations; and
(v) Emergency response operations for releases of, or substantial
threats of releases of, hazardous substances without regard to the
location of the hazard.
(2) Application. (i) All requirements of part 1910 and part 1926 of
title 29 of the Code of Federal Regulations apply pursuant to their
terms to hazardous waste and emergency response operations whether
covered by this section or not. If there is a conflict or overlap, the
provision more protective of employee safety and health shall apply
without regard to 29 CFR 1926.20(e)(1).
(ii) Hazardous substance clean-up operations within the scope of
paragraphs (a)(1)(i) through (a)(1)(iii) of this section must comply
with all paragraphs of this section except paragraphs (p) and (q).
(iii) Operations within the scope of paragraph (a)(1)(iv) of this
section must comply only with the requirements of paragraph (p) of this
section.
Notes and Exceptions: (A) All provisions of paragraph (p) of this
section cover any treatment, storage or disposal (TSD) operation
regulated by 40 CFR parts 264 and 265 or by state law authorized under
RCRA, and required to have a permit or interim status from EPA pursuant
to 40 CFR 270.1 or from a state agency pursuant to RCRA.
(B) Employers who are not required to have a permit or interim
status because they are conditionally exempt small quantity generators
under 40 CFR 261.5 or are generators who qualify under 40 CFR 262.34 for
exemptions from regulation under 40 CFR parts 264, 265 and 270
(``excepted employers'') are not covered by paragraphs (p)(1) through
(p)(7) of this section. Excepted employers who are required by the EPA
or state agency
[[Page 141]]
to have their employees engage in emergency response or who direct their
employees to engage in emergency response are covered by paragraph
(p)(8) of this section, and cannot be exempted by (p)(8)(i) of this
section. Excepted employers who are not required to have employees
engage in emergency response, who direct their employees to evacuate in
the case of such emergencies and who meet the requirements of paragraph
(p)(8)(i) of this section are exempt from the balance of paragraph
(p)(8) of this section.
(C) If an area is used primarily for treatment, storage or disposal,
any emergency response operations in that area shall comply with
paragraph (p)(8) of this section. In other areas not used primarily for
treatment, storage, or disposal, any emergency response operations shall
comply with paragraph (q) of this section. Compliance with the
requirements of paragraph (q) of this section shall be deemed to be in
compliance with the requirements of paragraph (p)(8) of this section.
(iv) Emergency response operations for releases of, or substantial
threats of releases of, hazardous substances which are not covered by
paragraphs (a)(1)(i) through (a)(1)(iv) of this section must only comply
with the requirements of paragraph (q) of this section.
(3) Definitions--Buddy system means a system of organizing employees
into work groups in such a manner that each employee of the work group
is designated to be observed by at least one other employee in the work
group. The purpose of the buddy system is to provide rapid assistance to
employees in the event of an emergency.
Clean-up operation means an operation where hazardous substances are
removed, contained, incinerated, neutralized, stabilized, cleared-up, or
in any other manner processed or handled with the ultimate goal of
making the site safer for people or the environment.
Decontamination means the removal of hazardous substances from
employees and their equipment to the extent necessary to preclude the
occurrence of foreseeable adverse health affects.
Emergency response or responding to emergencies means a response
effort by employees from outside the immediate release area or by other
designated responders (i.e., mutual-aid groups, local fire departments,
etc.) to an occurrence which results, or is likely to result, in an
uncontrolled release of a hazardous substance. Responses to incidental
releases of hazardous substances where the substance can be absorbed,
neutralized, or otherwise controlled at the time of release by employees
in the immediate release area, or by maintenance personnel are not
considered to be emergency responses within the scope of this standard.
Responses to releases of hazardous substances where there is no
potential safety or health hazard (i.e., fire, explosion, or chemical
exposure) are not considered to be emergency responses.
Facility means (A) any building, structure, installation, equipment,
pipe or pipeline (including any pipe into a sewer or publicly owned
treatment works), well, pit, pond, lagoon, impoundment, ditch, storage
container, motor vehicle, rolling stock, or aircraft, or (B) any site or
area where a hazardous substance has been deposited, stored, disposed
of, or placed, or otherwise come to be located; but does not include any
consumer product in consumer use or any water-borne vessel.
Hazardous materials response (HAZMAT) team means an organized group
of employees, designated by the employer, who are expected to perform
work to handle and control actual or potential leaks or spills of
hazardous substances requiring possible close approach to the substance.
The team members perform responses to releases or potential releases of
hazardous substances for the purpose of control or stabilization of the
incident. A HAZMAT team is not a fire brigade nor is a typical fire
brigade a HAZMAT team. A HAZMAT team, however, may be a separate
component of a fire brigade or fire department.
Hazardous substance means any substance designated or listed under
paragraphs (A) through (D) of this definition, exposure to which results
or may result in adverse affects on the health or safety of employees:
(A) Any substance defined under section 101(14) of CERCLA;
(B) Any biological agent and other disease-causing agent which after
release into the environment and upon
[[Page 142]]
exposure, ingestion, inhalation, or assimilation into any person, either
directly from the environment or indirectly by ingestion through food
chains, will or may reasonably be anticipated to cause death, disease,
behavioral abnormalities, cancer, genetic mutation, physiological
malfunctions (including malfunctions in reproduction) or physical
deformations in such persons or their offspring;
(C) Any substance listed by the U.S. Department of Transportation as
hazardous materials under 49 CFR 172.101 and appendices; and
(D) Hazardous waste as herein defined.
Hazardous waste means--(A) A waste or combination of wastes as
defined in 40 CFR 261.3, or
(B) Those substances defined as hazardous wastes in 49 CFR 171.8.
Hazardous waste operation means any operation conducted within the
scope of this standard.
Hazardous waste site or Site means any facility or location within
the scope of this standard at which hazardous waste operations take
place.
Health hazard means a chemical or a pathogen where acute or chronic
health effects may occur in exposed employees. It also includes stress
due to temperature extremes. The term health hazard includes chemicals
that are classified in accordance with the Hazard Communication
Standard, Sec. 1910.1200, as posing one of the following hazardous
effects: acute toxicity (any route of exposure); skin corrosion or
irritation; serious eye damage or eye irritation; respiratory or skin
sensitization; germ cell mutagenicity; carcinogenicity; reproductive
toxicity; specific target organ toxicity (single or repeated exposure);
aspiration toxicity or simple asphyxiant. (See Appendix A to Sec.
1910.1200--Health Hazard Criteria (Mandatory) for the criteria for
determining whether a chemical is classified as a health hazard.)
IDLH or Immediately dangerous to life or health means an atmospheric
concentration of any toxic, corrosive or asphyxiant substance that poses
an immediate threat to life or would cause irreversible or delayed
adverse health effects or would interfere with an individual's ability
to escape from a dangerous atmosphere.
Oxygen deficiency means that concentration of oxygen by volume below
which atmosphere supplying respiratory protection must be provided. It
exists in atmospheres where the percentage of oxygen by volume is less
than 19.5 percent oxygen.
Permissible exposure limit means the exposure, inhalation or dermal
permissible exposure limit specified either in Sec. 1926.55, elsewhere
in subpart D, or in other pertinent sections of this part.
Published exposure level means the exposure limits published in
``NIOSH Recommendations for Occupational Health Standards'' dated 1986
incorporated by reference, or if none is specified, the exposure limits
published in the standards specified by the American Conference of
Governmental Industrial Hygienists in their publication ``Threshold
Limit Values and Biological Exposure Indices for 1987-88'' dated 1987
incorporated by reference.
Post emergency response means that portion of an emergency response
performed after the immediate threat of a release has been stabilized or
eliminated and clean-up of the site has begun. If post emergency
response is performed by an employer's own employees who were part of
the initial emergency response, it is considered to be part of the
initial response and not post emergency response. However, if a group of
an employer's own employees, separate from the group providing initial
response, performs the clean-up operation, then the separate group of
employees would be considered to be performing post-emergency response
and subject to paragraph (q)(11) of this section.
Qualified person means a person with specific training, knowledge
and experience in the area for which the person has the responsibility
and the authority to control.
Site safety and health supervisor (or official) means the individual
located on a hazardous waste site who is responsible to the employer and
has the authority and knowledge necessary to implement the site safety
and health plan and verify compliance with applicable safety and health
requirements.
[[Page 143]]
Small quantity generator means a generator of hazardous wastes who
in any calendar month generates no more than 1,000 kilograms (2,205
pounds) of hazardous waste in that month.
Uncontrolled hazardous waste site, means an area identified as an
uncontrolled hazardous waste site by a governmental body, whether
Federal, state, local or other where an accumulation of hazardous
substances creates a threat to the health and safety of individuals or
the environment or both. Some sites are found on public lands such as
those created by former municipal, county or state landfills where
illegal or poorly managed waste disposal has taken place. Other sites
are found on private property, often belonging to generators or former
generators of hazardous substance wastes. Examples of such sites
include, but are not limited to, surface impoundments, landfills, dumps,
and tank or drum farms. Normal operations at TSD sites are not covered
by this definition.
(b) Safety and health program.
Note to (b): Safety and health programs developed and implemented to
meet other Federal, state, or local regulations are considered
acceptable in meeting this requirement if they cover or are modified to
cover the topics required in this paragraph. An additional or separate
safety and health program is not required by this paragraph.
(1) General. (i) Employers shall develop and implement a written
safety and health program for their employees involved in hazardous
waste operations. The program shall be designed to identify, evaluate,
and control safety and health hazards, and provide for emergency
response for hazardous waste operations.
(ii) The written safety and health program shall incorporate the
following:
(A) An organizational structure;
(B) A comprehensive workplan;
(C) A site-specific safety and health plan which need not repeat the
employer's standard operating procedures required in paragraph
(b)(1)(ii)(F) of this section;
(D) The safety and health training program;
(E) The medical surveillance program;
(F) The employer's standard operating procedures for safety and
health; and
(G) Any necessary interface between general program and site
specific activities.
(iii) Site excavation. Site excavations created during initial site
preparation or during hazardous waste operations shall be shored or
sloped as appropriate to prevent accidental collapse in accordance with
subpart P of 29 CFR part 1926.
(iv) Contractors and sub-contractors. An employer who retains
contractor or sub-contractor services for work in hazardous waste
operations shall inform those contractors, sub-contractors, or their
representatives of the site emergency response procedures and any
potential fire, explosion, health, safety or other hazards of the
hazardous waste operation that have been identified by the employer,
including those identified in the employer's information program.
(v) Program availability. The written safety and health program
shall be made available to any contractor or subcontractor or their
representative who will be involved with the hazardous waste operation;
to employees; to employee designated representatives; to OSHA personnel,
and to personnel of other Federal, state, or local agencies with
regulatory authority over the site.
(2) Organizational structure part of the site program--(i) The
organizationa1 structure part of the program shall establish the
specific chain of command and specify the overall responsibilities of
supervisors and employees. It shall include, at a minimum, the following
elements:
(A) A general supervisor who has the responsibility and authority to
direct all hazardous waste operations.
(B) A site safety and health supervisor who has the responsibility
and authority to develop and implement the site safety and health plan
and verify compliance.
(C) All other personnel needed for hazardous waste site operations
and emergency response and their general functions and responsibilities.
(D) The lines of authority, responsibility, and communication.
[[Page 144]]
(ii) The organizational structure shall be reviewed and updated as
necessary to reflect the current status of waste site operations.
(3) Comprehensive workplan part of the site program. The
comprehensive workplan part of the program shall address the tasks and
objectives of the site operations and the logistics and resources
required to reach those tasks and objectives.
(i) The comprehensive workplan shall address anticipated clean-up
activities as well as normal operating procedures which need not repeat
the employer's procedures available elsewhere.
(ii) The comprehensive workplan shall define work tasks and
objectives and identify the methods for accomplishing those tasks and
objectives.
(iii) The comprehensive workplan shall establish personnel
requirements for implementing the plan.
(iv) The comprehensive workplan shall provide for the implementation
of the training required in paragraph (e) of this section.
(v) The comprehensive workplan shall provide for the implementation
of the required informational programs required in paragraph (i) of this
section.
(vi) The comprehensive workplan shall provide for the implementation
of the medical surveillance program described in paragraph (f) of this
section.
(4) Site-specific safety and health plan part of the program--(i)
General. The site safety and health plan, which must be kept on site,
shall address the safety and health hazards of each phase of site
operation and include the requirements and procedures for employee
protection.
(ii) Elements. The site safety and health plan, as a minimum, shall
address the following:
(A) A safety and health risk or hazard analysis for each site task
and operation found in the workplan.
(B) Employee training assignments to assure compliance with
paragraph (e) of this section.
(C) Personal protective equipment to be used by employees for each
of the site tasks and operations being conducted as required by the
personal protective equipment program in paragraph (g)(5) of this
section.
(D) Medical surveillance requirements in accordance with the program
in paragraph (f) of this section.
(E) Frequency and types of air monitoring, personnel monitoring, and
environmental sampling techniques and instrumentation to be used,
including methods of maintenance and calibration of monitoring and
sampling equipment to be used.
(F) Site control measures in accordance with the site control
program required in paragraph (d) of this section.
(G) Decontamination procedures in accordance with paragraph (k) of
this section.
(H) An emergency response plan meeting the requirements of paragraph
(l) of this section for safe and effective responses to emergencies,
including the necessary PPE and other equipment.
(I) Confined space entry procedures.
(J) A spill containment program meeting the requirements of
paragraph (j) of this section.
(iii) Pre-entry briefing. The site specific safety and health plan
shall provide for pre-entry briefings to be held prior to initiating any
site activity, and at such other times as necessary to ensure that
employees are apprised of the site safety and health plan and that this
plan is being followed. The information and data obtained from site
characterization and analysis work required in paragraph (c) of this
section shall be used to prepare and update the site safety and health
plan.
(iv) Effectiveness of site safety and health plan. Inspections shall
be conducted by the site safety and health supervisor or, in the absence
of that individual, another individual who is knowledgeable in
occupational safety and health, acting on behalf of the employer as
necessary to determine the effectiveness of the site safety and health
plan. Any deficiencies in the effectiveness of the site safety and
health plan shall be corrected by the employer.
(c) Site characterization and analysis--(1) General. Hazardous waste
sites shall be evaluated in accordance with this paragraph to identify
specific site hazards and to determine the appropriate safety and health
control procedures
[[Page 145]]
needed to protect employees from the identified hazards.
(2) Preliminary evaluation. A preliminary evaluation of a site's
characteristics shall be performed prior to site entry by a qualified
person in order to aid in the selection of appropriate employee
protection methods prior to site entry. Immediately after initial site
entry, a more detailed evaluation of the site's specific characteristics
shall be performed by a qualified person in order to further identify
existing site hazards and to further aid in the selection of the
appropriate engineering controls and personal protective equipment for
the tasks to be performed.
(3) Hazard identification. All suspected conditions that may pose
inhalation or skin absorption hazards that are immediately dangerous to
life or health (IDLH), or other conditions that may cause death or
serious harm, shall be identified during the preliminary survey and
evaluated during the detailed survey. Examples of such hazards include,
but are not limited to, confined space entry, potentially explosive or
flammable situations, visible vapor clouds, or areas where biological
indicators such as dead animals or vegetation are located.
(4) Required information. The following information to the extent
available shall be obtained by the employer prior to allowing employees
to enter a site:
(i) Location and approximate size of the site.
(ii) Description of the response activity and/or the job task to be
performed.
(iii) Duration of the planned employee activity.
(iv) Site topography and accessibility by air and roads.
(v) Safety and health hazards expected at the site.
(vi) Pathways for hazardous substance dispersion.
(vii) Present status and capabilities of emergency response teams
that would provide assistance to hazardous waste clean-up site employees
at the time of an emergency.
(viii) Hazardous substances and health hazards involved or expected
at the site, and their chemical and physical properties.
(5) Personal protective equipment. Personal protective equipment
(PPE) shall be provided and used during initial site entry in accordance
with the following requirements:
(i) Based upon the results of the preliminary site evaluation, an
ensemble of PPE shall be selected and used during initial site entry
which will provide protection to a level of exposure below permissible
exposure limits and published exposure levels for known or suspected
hazardous substances and health hazards, and which will provide
protection against other known and suspected hazards identified during
the preliminary site evaluation. If there is no permissible exposure
limit or published exposure level, the employer may use other published
studies and information as a guide to appropriate personal protective
equipment.
(ii) If positive-pressure self-contained breathing apparatus is not
used as part of the entry ensemble, and if respiratory protection is
warranted by the potential hazards identified during the preliminary
site evaluation, an escape self-contained breathing apparatus of at
least five minute's duration shall be carried by employees during
initial site entry.
(iii) If the preliminary site evaluation does not produce sufficient
information to identify the hazards or suspected hazards of the site, an
ensemble providing protection equivalent to Level B PPE shall be
provided as minimum protection, and direct reading instruments shall be
used as appropriate for identifying IDLH conditions. (See appendix B for
a description of Level B hazards and the recommendations for Level B
protective equipment.)
(iv) Once the hazards of the site have been identified, the
appropriate PPE shall be selected and used in accordance with paragraph
(g) of this section.
(6) Monitoring. The following monitoring shall be conducted during
initial site entry when the site evaluation produces information that
shows the potential for ionizing radiation or IDLH conditions, or when
the site information is not sufficient reasonably to eliminate these
possible conditions:
[[Page 146]]
(i) Monitoring with direct reading instruments for hazardous levels
of ionizing radiation.
(ii) Monitoring the air with appropriate direct reading test
equipment (i.e., combustible gas meters, detector tubes) for IDLH and
other conditions that may cause death or serious harm (combustible or
explosive atmospheres, oxygen deficiency, toxic substances).
(iii) Visually observing for signs of actual or potential IDLH or
other dangerous conditions.
(iv) An ongoing air monitoring program in accordance with paragraph
(h) of this section shall be implemented after site characterization has
determined the site is safe for the start-up of operations.
(7) Risk identification. Once the presence and concentrations of
specific hazardous substances and health hazards have been established,
the risks associated with these substances shall be identified.
Employees who will be working on the site shall be informed of any risks
that have been identified. In situations covered by the Hazard
Communication Standard, 29 CFR 1926.59, training required by that
standard need not be duplicated.
Note to (c)(7): Risks to consider include, but are not limited to:
(a) Exposures exceeding the permissible exposure limits and
published exposure levels.
(b) IDLH concentrations.
(c) Potential skin absorption and irritation sources.
(d) Potential eye irritation sources.
(e) Explosion sensitivity and flammability ranges.
(f) Oxygen deficiency.
(8) Employee notification. Any information concerning the chemical,
physical, and toxicologic properties of each substance known or expected
to be present on site that is available to the employer and relevant to
the duties an employee is expected to perform shall be made available to
the affected employees prior to the commencement of their work
activities. The employer may utilize information developed for the
hazard communication standard for this purpose.
(d) Site control--(1) General. Appropriate site control procedures
shall be implemented to control employee exposure to hazardous
substances before clean-up work begins.
(2) Site control program. A site control program for protecting
employees which is part of the employer's site safety and health program
required in paragraph (b) of this section shall be developed during the
planning stages of a hazardous waste clean-up operation and modified as
necessary as new information becomes available.
(3) Elements of the site control program. The site control program
shall, as a minimum, include: A site map; site work zones; the use of a
``buddy system''; site communications including alerting means for
emergencies; the standard operating procedures or safe work practices;
and, identification of the nearest medical assistance. Where these
requirements are covered elsewhere they need not be repeated.
(e) Training--(1) General. (i) All employees working on site (such
as but not limited to equipment operators, general laborers and others)
exposed to hazardous substances, health hazards, or safety hazards and
their supervisors and management responsible for the site shall receive
training meeting the requirements of this paragraph before they are
permitted to engage in hazardous waste operations that could expose them
to hazardous substances, safety, or health hazards, and they shall
receive review training as specified in this paragraph.
(ii) Employees shall not be permitted to participate in or supervise
field activities until they have been trained to a level required by
their job function and responsibility.
(2) Elements to be covered. The training shall thoroughly cover the
following:
(i) Names of personnel and alternates responsible for site safety
and health;
(ii) Safety, health and other hazards present on the site;
(iii) Use of personal protective equipment;
(iv) Work practices by which the employee can minimize risks from
hazards;
(v) Safe use of engineering controls and equipment on the site;
(vi) Medical surveillance requirements, including recognition of
symptoms and signs which might indicate overexposure to hazards; and
[[Page 147]]
(vii) The contents of paragraphs (G) through (J) of the site safety
and health plan set forth in paragraph (b)(4)(ii) of this section.
(3) Initial training. (i) General site workers (such as equipment
operators, general laborers and supervisory personnel) engaged in
hazardous substance removal or other activities which expose or
potentially expose workers to hazardous substances and health hazards
shall receive a minimum of 40 hours of instruction off the site, and a
minimum of three days actual field experience under the direct
supervision of a trained, experienced supervisor.
(ii) Workers on site only occasionally for a specific limited task
(such as, but not limited to, ground water monitoring, land surveying,
or geo-physical surveying) and who are unlikely to be exposed over
permissible exposure limits and published exposure limits shall receive
a minimum of 24 hours of instruction off the site, and the minimum of
one day actual field experience under the direct supervision of a
trained, experienced supervisor.
(iii) Workers regularly on site who work in areas which have been
monitored and fully characterized indicating that exposures are under
permissible exposure limits and published exposure limits where
respirators are not necessary, and the characterization indicates that
there are no health hazards or the possibility of an emergency
developing, shall receive a minimum of 24 hours of instruction off the
site and the minimum of one day actual field experience under the direct
supervision of a trained, experienced supervisor.
(iv) Workers with 24 hours of training who are covered by paragraphs
(e)(3)(ii) and (e)(3)(iii) of this section, and who become general site
workers or who are required to wear respirators, shall have the
additional 16 hours and two days of training necessary to total the
training specified in paragraph (e)(3)(i).
(4) Management and supervisor training. On-site management and
supervisors directly responsible for, or who supervise employees engaged
in, hazardous waste operations shall receive 40 hours initial training,
and three days of supervised field experience (the training may be
reduced to 24 hours and one day if the only area of their responsibility
is employees covered by paragraphs (e)(3)(ii) and (e)(3)(iii)) and at
least eight additional hours of specialized training at the time of job
assignment on such topics as, but not limited to, the employer's safety
and health program and the associated employee training program,
personal protective equipment program, spill containment program, and
health hazard monitoring procedure and techniques.
(5) Qualifications for trainers. Trainers shall be qualified to
instruct employees about the subject matter that is being presented in
training. Such trainers shall have satisfactorily completed a training
program for teaching the subjects they are expected to teach, or they
shall have the academic credentials and instructional experience
necessary for teaching the subjects. Instructors shall demonstrate
competent instructional skills and knowledge of the applicable subject
matter.
(6) Training certification. Employees and supervisors that have
received and successfully completed the training and field experience
specified in paragraphs (e)(1) through (e)(4) of this section shall be
certified by their instructor or the head instructor and trained
supervisor as having successfully completed the necessary training. A
written certificate shall be given to each person so certified. Any
person who has not been so certified or who does not meet the
requirements of paragraph (e)(9) of this section shall be prohibited
from engaging in hazardous waste operations.
(7) Emergency response. Employees who are engaged in responding to
hazardous emergency situations at hazardous waste clean-up sites that
may expose them to hazardous substances shall be trained in how to
respond to such expected emergencies.
(8) Refresher training. Employees specified in paragraph (e)(1) of
this section, and managers and supervisors specified in paragraph (e)(4)
of this section, shall receive eight hours of refresher training
annually on the items specified in paragraph (e)(2) and/or (e)(4) of
this section, any critique of incidents that have occurred in the past
year that can serve as training examples of related work, and other
relevant topics.
[[Page 148]]
(9) Equivalent training. Employers who can show by documentation or
certification that an employee's work experience and/or training has
resulted in training equivalent to that training required in paragraphs
(e)(1) through (e)(4) of this section shall not be required to provide
the initial training requirements of those paragraphs to such employees
and shall provide a copy of the certification or documentation to the
employee upon request. However, certified employees or employees with
equivalent training new to a site shall receive appropriate, site
specific training before site entry and have appropriate supervised
field experience at the new site. Equivalent training includes any
academic training or the training that existing employees might have
already received from actual hazardous waste site work experience.
(f) Medical surveillance--(1) General. Employers engaged in
operations specified in paragraphs (a)(1)(i) through (a)(1)(iv) of this
section and not covered by (a)(2)(iii) exceptions and employers of
employees specified in paragraph (q)(9) shall institute a medical
surveillance program in accordance with this paragraph.
(2) Employees covered. The medical surveillance program shall be
instituted by the employer for the following employees:
(i) All employees who are or may be exposed to hazardous substances
or health hazards at or above the permissible exposure limits or, if
there is no permissible exposure limit, above the published exposure
levels for these substances, without regard to the use of respirators,
for 30 days or more a year;
(ii) All employees who wear a respirator for 30 days or more a year
or as required by Sec. 1926.103;
(iii) All employees who are injured, become ill or develop signs or
symptoms due to possible overexposure involving hazardous substances or
health hazards from an emergency response or hazardous waste operation;
and
(iv) Members of HAZMAT teams.
(3) Frequency of medical examinations and consultations. Medical
examinations and consultations shall be made available by the employer
to each employee covered under paragraph (f)(2) of this section on the
following schedules:
(i) For employees covered under paragraphs (f)(2)(i), (f)(2)(ii),
and (f)(2)(iv):
(A) Prior to assignment;
(B) At least once every twelve months for each employee covered
unless the attending physician believes a longer interval (not greater
than biennially) is appropriate;
(C) At termination of employment or reassignment to an area where
the employee would not be covered if the employee has not had an
examination within the last six months;
(D) As soon as possible upon notification by an employee that the
employee has developed signs or symptoms indicating possible
overexposure to hazardous substances or health hazards, or that the
employee has been injured or exposed above the permissible exposure
limits or published exposure levels in an emergency situation;
(E) At more frequent times, if the examining physician determines
that an increased frequency of examination is medically necessary.
(ii) For employees covered under paragraph (f)(2)(iii) and for all
employees including those of employers covered by paragraph (a)(1)(v)
who may have been injured, received a health impairment, developed signs
or symptoms which may have resulted from exposure to hazardous
substances resulting from an emergency incident, or exposed during an
emergency incident to hazardous substances at concentrations above the
permissible exposure limits or the published exposure levels without the
necessary personal protective equipment being used:
(A) As soon as possible following the emergency incident or
development of signs or symptoms;
(B) At additional times, if the examining physician determines that
follow-up examinations or consultations are medically necessary.
(4) Content of medical examinations and consultations. (i) Medical
examinations required by paragraph (f)(3) of this section shall include
a medical and work history (or updated history if one is in the
employee's file) with special emphasis on symptoms related to the
handling of hazardous substances and
[[Page 149]]
health hazards, and to fitness for duty including the ability to wear
any required PPE under conditions (i.e., temperature extremes) that may
be expected at the work site.
(ii) The content of medical examinations or consultations made
available to employees pursuant to paragraph (f) shall be determined by
the attending physician. The guidelines in the Occupational Safety and
Health Guidance Manual for Hazardous Waste Site Activities (See appendix
D, Reference 10) should be consulted.
(5) Examination bv a physician and costs. All medical examinations
and procedures shall be performed by or under the supervision of a
licensed physician, preferably one knowledgeable in occupational
medicine, and shall be provided without cost to the employee, without
loss of pay, and at a reasonable time and place.
(6) Information provided to the physician. The employer shall
provide one copy of this standard and its appendices to the attending
physician, and in addition the following for each employee:
(i) A description of the employee's duties as they relate to the
employee's exposures.
(ii) The employee's exposure levels or anticipated exposure levels.
(iii) A description of any personal protective equipment used or to
be used.
(iv) Information from previous medical examinations of the employee
which is not readily available to the examining physician.
(v) Information required by Sec. 1926.103.
(7) Physician's written opinion. (i) The employer shall obtain and
furnish the employee with a copy of a written opinion from the attending
physician containing the following:
(A) The physician's opinion as to whether the employee has any
detected medical conditions which would place the employee at increased
risk of material impairment of the employee's health from work in
hazardous waste operations or emergency response, or from respirator
use.
(B) The physician's recommended limitations upon the employee's
assigned work.
(C) The results of the medical examination and tests if requested by
the employee.
(D) A statement that the employee has been informed by the physician
of the results of the medical examination and any medical conditions
which require further examination or treatment.
(ii) The written opinion obtained by the employer shall not reveal
specific findings or diagnoses unrelated to occupational exposures.
(8) Recordkeeping. (i) An accurate record of the medical
surveillance required by paragraph (f) of this section shall be
retained. This record shall be retained for the period specified and
meet the criteria of 29 CFR 1926.33.
(ii) The record required in paragraph (f)(8)(i) of this section
shall include at least the following information:
(A) The name and social security number of the employee;
(B) Physician's written opinions, recommended limitations, and
results of examinations and tests;
(C) Any employee medical complaints related to exposure to hazardous
substances;
(D) A copy of the information provided to the examining physician by
the employer, with the exception of the standard and its appendices.
(g) Engineering controls, work practices, and personal protective
equipment for employee protection. Engineering controls, work practices,
personal protective equipment, or a combination of these shall be
implemented in accordance with this paragraph to protect employees from
exposure to hazardous substances and safety and health hazards.
(1) Engineering controls, work practices and PPE for substances
regulated either in Sec. 1926.55, elsewhere in subpart D, or in other
pertinent sections of this part. (i) Engineering controls and work
practices shall be instituted to reduce and maintain employee exposure
to or below the permissible exposure limits for substances regulated
either in Sec. 1926.55 or other pertinent sections of this part, except
to the extent that such controls and practices are not feasible.
Note to (g)(1)(i): Engineering controls which may be feasible
include the use of
[[Page 150]]
pressurized cabs or control booths on equipment, and/or the use of
remotely operated material handling equipment. Work practices which may
be feasible are removing all non-essential employees from potential
exposure during opening of drums, wetting down dusty operations and
locating employees upwind of possible hazards.
(ii) Whenever engineering controls and work practices are not
feasible or not required, any reasonable combination of engineering
controls, work practices and PPE shall be used to reduce and maintain
employee exposures to or below the permissible exposure limits or dose
limits for substances regulated either in Sec. 1926.55 or other
pertinent sections of this part.
(iii) The employer shall not implement a schedule of employee
rotation as a means of compliance with permissible exposure limits or
dose limits except when there is no other feasible way of complying with
the airborne or dermal dose limits for ionizing radiation.
(iv) The provisions of subpart D shall be followed.
(2) Engineering controls, work practices, and PPE for substances not
regulated either in Sec. 1926.55, elsewhere in subpart D, or in other
pertinent sections of this part. An appropriate combination of
engineering controls, work practices and personal protective equipment
shall be used to reduce and maintain employee exposure to or below
published exposure levels for hazardous substances and health hazards
not regulated either in Sec. 1926.55, elsewhere in subpart D, or in
other pertinent sections of this part. The employer may use the
published literature and MSDS as a guide in making the employer's
determination as to what level of protection the employer believes is
appropriate for hazardous substances and health hazards for which there
is no permissible exposure limit or published exposure limit.
(3) Personal protective equipment selection. (i) Personal protective
equipment (PPE) shall be selected and used which will protect employees
from the hazards and potential hazards they are likely to encounter as
identified during the site characterization and analysis.
(ii) Personal protective equipment selection shall be based on an
evaluation of the performance characteristics of the PPE relative to the
requirements and limitations of the site, the task-specific conditions
and duration, and the hazards and potential hazards identified at the
site.
(iii) Positive pressure self-contained breathing apparatus, or
positive pressure air-line respirators equipped with an escape air
supply, shall be used when chemical exposure levels present will create
a substantial possibility of immediate death, immediate serious illness
or injury, or impair the ability to escape.
(iv) Totally-encapsulating chemical protective suits (protection
equivalent to Level A protection as recommended in appendix B) shall be
used in conditions where skin absorption of a hazardous substance may
result in a substantial possibility of immediate death, immediate
serious illness or injury, or impair the ability to escape.
(v) The level of protection provided by PPE selection shall be
increased when additional information on site conditions indicates that
increased protection is necessary to reduce employee exposures below
permissible exposure limits and published exposure levels for hazardous
substances and health hazards. (See appendix B for guidance on selecting
PPE ensembles.)
Note to (g)(3): The level of employee protection provided may be
decreased when additional information or site conditions show that
decreased protection will not result in hazardous exposures to
employees.
(vi) Personal protective equipment shall be selected and used to
meet the requirements of subpart E of this part and additional
requirements specified in this section.
(4) Totally-encapsulating chemical protective suits. (i) Totally-
encapsulating suits shall protect employees from the particular hazards
which are identified during site characterization and analysis.
(ii) Totally-encapsulating suits shall be capable of maintaining
positive air pressure. (See appendix A for a test method which may be
used to evaluate this requirement.)
(iii) Totally-encapsulating suits shall be capable of preventing
inward test gas leakage of more than 0.5 percent. (See appendix A for a
test method which may be used to evaluate this requirement.)
(5) Personal protective equipment (PPE) program. A written personal
protective equipment program, which is part of
[[Page 151]]
the employer's safety and health program required in paragraph (b) of
this section or required in paragraph (p)(1) of this section and which
is also a part of the site-specific safety and health plan shall be
established. The PPE program shall address the elements listed below.
When elements, such as donning and doffing procedures, are provided by
the manufacturer of a piece of equipment and are attached to the plan,
they need not be rewritten into the plan as long as they adequately
address the procedure or element.
(i) PPE selection based upon site hazards,
(ii) PPE use and limitations of the equipment,
(iii) Work mission duration,
(iv) PPE maintenance and storage,
(v) PPE decontamination and disposal,
(vi) PPE training and proper fitting,
(vii) PPE donning and doffing procedures,
(viii) PPE inspection procedures prior to, during, and after use,
(ix) Evaluation of the effectiveness of the PPE program, and
(x) Limitations during temperature extremes, heat stress, and other
appropriate medical considerations.
(h) Monitoring--(1) General. (i) Monitoring shall be performed in
accordance with this paragraph where there may be a question of employee
exposure to hazardous concentrations of hazardous substances in order to
assure proper selection of engineering controls, work practices and
personal protective equipment so that employees are not exposed to
levels which exceed permissible exposure limits, or published exposure
levels if there are no permissible exposure limits, for hazardous
substances.
(ii) Air monitoring shall be used to identify and quantify airborne
levels of hazardous substances and safety and health hazards in order to
determine the appropriate level of employee protection needed on site.
(2) Initial entry. Upon initial entry, representative air monitoring
shall be conducted to identify any IDLH condition, exposure over
permissible exposure limits or published exposure levels, exposure over
a radioactive material's dose limits or other dangerous condition such
as the presence of flammable atmospheres or oxygen-deficient
environments.
(3) Periodic monitoring. Periodic monitoring shall be conducted when
the possibility of an IDLH condition or flammable atmosphere has
developed or when there is indication that exposures may have risen over
permissible exposure limits or published exposure levels since prior
monitoring. Situations where it shall be considered whether the
possibility that exposures have risen are as follows:
(i) When work begins on a different portion of the site.
(ii) When contaminants other than those previously identified are
being handled.
(iii) When a different type of operation is initiated (e.g., drum
opening as opposed to exploratory well drilling).
(iv) When employees are handling leaking drums or containers or
working in areas with obvious liquid contamination (e.g., a spill or
lagoon).
(4) Monitoring of high-risk employees. After the actual clean-up
phase of any hazardous waste operation commences; for example, when
soil, surface water or containers are moved or disturbed; the employer
shall monitor those employees likely to have the highest exposures to
hazardous substances and health hazards likely to be present above
permissible exposure limits or published exposure levels by using
personal sampling frequently enough to characterize employee exposures.
If the employees likely to have the highest exposure are over
permissible exposure limits or published exposure limits, then
monitoring shall continue to determine all employees likely to be above
those limits. The employer may utilize a representative sampling
approach by documenting that the employees and chemicals chosen for
monitoring are based on the criteria stated above.
Note to (h): It is not required to monitor employees engaged in site
characterization operations covered by paragraph (c) of this section.
(i) Informational programs. Employers shall develop and implement a
program, which is part of the employer's safety and health program
required in paragraph (b) of this section, to inform
[[Page 152]]
employees, contractors, and subcontractors (or their representative)
actually engaged in hazardous waste operations of the nature, level and
degree of exposure likely as a result of participation in such hazardous
waste operations. Employees, contractors and subcontractors working
outside of the operations part of a site are not covered by this
standard.
(j) Handling drums and containers--(1) General. (i) Hazardous
substances and contaminated soils, liquids, and other residues shall be
handled, transported, labeled, and disposed of in accordance with this
paragraph.
(ii) Drums and containers used during the clean-up shall meet the
appropriate DOT, OSHA, and EPA regulations for the wastes that they
contain.
(iii) When practical, drums and containers shall be inspected and
their integrity shall be assured prior to being moved. Drums or
containers that cannot be inspected before being moved because of
storage conditions (i.e., buried beneath the earth, stacked behind other
drums, stacked several tiers high in a pile, etc.) shall be moved to an
accessible location and inspected prior to further handling.
(iv) Unlabelled drums and containers shall be considered to contain
hazardous substances and handled accordingly until the contents are
positively identified and labeled.
(v) Site operations shall be organized to minimize the amount of
drum or container movement.
(vi) Prior to movement of drums or containers, all employees exposed
to the transfer operation shall be warned of the potential hazards
associated with the contents of the drums or containers.
(vii) U.S. Department of Transportation specified salvage drums or
containers and suitable quantities of proper absorbent shall be kept
available and used in areas where spills, leaks, or ruptures may occur.
(viii) Where major spills may occur, a spill containment program,
which is part of the employer's safety and health program required in
paragraph (b) of this section, shall be implemented to contain and
isolate the entire volume of the hazardous substance being transferred.
(ix) Drums and containers that cannot be moved without rupture,
leakage, or spillage shall be emptied into a sound container using a
device classified for the material being transferred.
(x) A ground-penetrating system or other type of detection system or
device shall be used to estimate the location and depth of buried drums
or containers.
(xi) Soil or covering material shall be removed with caution to
prevent drum or container rupture.
(xii) Fire extinguishing equipment meeting the requirements of
subpart F of this part shall be on hand and ready for use to control
incipient fires.
(2) Opening drums and containers. The following procedures shall be
followed in areas where drums or containers are being opened:
(i) Where an airline respirator system is used, connections to the
source of air supply shall be protected from contamination and the
entire system shall be protected from physical damage.
(ii) Employees not actually involved in opening drums or containers
shall be kept a safe distance from the drums or containers being opened.
(iii) If employees must work near or adjacent to drums or containers
being opened, a suitable shield that does not interfere with the work
operation shall be placed between the employee and the drums or
containers being opened to protect the employee in case of accidental
explosion.
(iv) Controls for drum or container opening equipment, monitoring
equipment, and fire suppression equipment shall be located behind the
explosion-resistant barrier.
(v) When there is a reasonable possibility of flammable atmospheres
being present, material handling equipment and hand tools shall be of
the type to prevent sources of ignition.
(vi) Drums and containers shall be opened in such a manner that
excess interior pressure will be safely relieved. If pressure can not be
relieved from a remote location, appropriate shielding shall be placed
between the employee and the drums or containers to reduce the risk of
employee injury.
(vii) Employees shall not stand upon or work from drums or
containers.
[[Page 153]]
(3) Material handling equipment. Material handiing equipment used to
transfer drums and containers shall be selected, positioned and operated
to minimize sources of ignition related to the equipment from igniting
vapors released from ruptured drums or containers.
(4) Radioactive wastes. Drums and containers containing radioactive
wastes shall not be handled until such time as their hazard to employees
is properly assessed.
(5) Shock sensitive wastes. As a minimum, the following special
precautions shall be taken when drums and containers containing or
suspected of containing shock-sensitive wastes are handled:
(i) All non-essential employees shall be evacuated from the area of
transfer.
(ii) Material handling equipment shall be provided with explosive
containment devices or protective shields to protect equipment operators
from exploding containers.
(iii) An employee alarm system capable of being perceived above
surrounding light and noise conditions shall be used to signal the
commencement and completion of explosive waste handling activities.
(iv) Continuous communications (i.e., portable radios, hand signals,
telephones, as appropriate) shall be maintained between the employee-in-
charge of the immediate handling area and both the site safety and
health supervisor and the command post until such time as the handling
operation is completed. Communication equipment or methods that could
cause shock sensitive materials to explode shall not be used.
(v) Drums and containers under pressure, as evidenced by bulging or
swelling, shall not be moved until such time as the cause for excess
pressure is determined and appropriate containment procedures have been
implemented to protect employees from explosive relief of the drum.
(vi) Drums and containers containing packaged laboratory wastes
shall be considered to contain shock-sensitive or explosive materials
until they have been characterized.
Caution: Shipping of shock sensitive wastes may be prohibited under U.S.
Department of Transportation regulations. Employers and their shippers
should refer to 49 CFR 173.21 and 173.50.
(6) Laboratory waste packs. In addition to the requirements of
paragraph (j)(5) of this section, the following precautions shall be
taken, as a minimum, in handling laboratory waste packs (lab packs):
(i) Lab packs shall be opened only when necessary and then only by
an individual knowledgeable in the inspection, classification, and
segregation of the containers within the pack according to the hazards
of the wastes.
(ii) If crystalline material is noted on any container, the contents
shall be handled as a shock-sensitive waste until the contents are
identified.
(7) Sampling of drum and container contents. Sampling of containers
and drums shall be done in accordance with a sampling procedure which is
part of the site safety and health plan developed for and available to
employees and others at the specific worksite.
(8) Shipping and transport. (i) Drums and containers shall be
identified and classified prior to packaging for shipment.
(ii) Drum or container staging areas shall be kept to the minimum
number necessary to identify and classify materials safely and prepare
them for transport.
(iii) Staging areas shall be provided with adequate access and
egress routes.
(iv) Bulking of hazardous wastes shall be permitted only after a
thorough characterization of the materials has been completed.
(9) Tank and vault procedures. (i) Tanks and vaults containing
hazardous substances shall be handled in a manner similar to that for
drums and containers, taking into consideration the size of the tank or
vault.
(ii) Appropriate tank or vault entry procedures as described in the
employer's safety and health plan shall be followed whenever employees
must enter a tank or vault.
(k) Decontamination--(1) General. Procedures for all phases of
decontamination shall be developed and implemented in accordance with
this paragraph.
[[Page 154]]
(2) Decontamination procedures. (i) A decontamination procedure
shall be developed, communicated to employees and implemented before any
employees or equipment may enter areas on site where potential for
exposure to hazardous substances exists.
(ii) Standard operating procedures shall be developed to minimize
employee contact with hazardous substances or with equipment that has
contacted hazardous substances.
(iii) All employees leaving a contaminated area shall be
appropriately decontaminated; all contaminated clothing and equipment
leaving a contaminated area shall be appropriately disposed of or
decontaminated.
(iv) Decontamination procedures shall be monitored by the site
safety and health supervisor to determine their effectiveness. When such
procedures are found to be ineffective, appropriate steps shall be taken
to correct any deficiencies.
(3) Location. Decontamination shall be performed in geographical
areas that will minimize the exposure of uncontaminated employees or
equipment to contaminated employees or equipment.
(4) Equipment and solvents. All equipment and solvents used for
decontamination shall be decontaminated or disposed of properly.
(5) Personal protective clothing and equipment. (i) Protective
clothing and equipment shall be decontaminated, cleaned, laundered,
maintained or replaced as needed to maintain their effectiveness.
(ii) Employees whose non-impermeable clothing becomes wetted with
hazardous substances shall immediately remove that clothing and proceed
to shower. The clothing shall be disposed of or decontaminated before it
is removed from the work zone.
(6) Unauthorized employees. Unauthorized employees shall not remove
protective clothing or equipment from change rooms.
(7) Commercial laundries or cleaning establishments. Commercial
laundries or cleaning establishments that decontaminate protective
clothing or equipment shall be informed of the potentially harmful
effects of exposures to hazardous substances.
(8) Showers and change rooms. Where the decontamination procedure
indicates a need for regular showers and change rooms outside of a
contaminated area, they shall be provided and meet the requirements of
29 CFR 1910.141. If temperature conditions prevent the effective use of
water, then other effective means for cleansing shall be provided and
used.
(l) Emergency response by employees at uncontrolled hazardous waste
sites--(1) Emergency response plan. (i) An emergency response plan shall
be developed and implemented by all employers within the scope of
paragraphs (a)(1) (i)-(ii) of this section to handle anticipated
emergencies prior to the commencement of hazardous waste operations. The
plan shall be in writing and available for inspection and copying by
employees, their representatives, OSHA personnel and other governmental
agencies with relevant responsibilities.
(ii) Employers who will evacuate their employees from the danger
area when an emergency occurs, and who do not permit any of their
employees to assist in handling the emergency, are exempt from the
requirements of this paragraph if they provide an emergency action plan
complying with Sec. 1926.35 of this part.
(2) Elements of an emergency response plan. The employer shall
develop an emergency response plan for emergencies which shall address,
as a minimum, the following:
(i) Pre-emergency planning.
(ii) Personnel roles, lines of authority, and communication.
(iii) Emergency recognition and prevention.
(iv) Safe distances and places of refuge.
(v) Site security and control.
(vi) Evacuation routes and procedures.
(vii) Decontamination procedures which are not covered by the site
safety and health plan.
(viii) Emergency medical treatment and first aid.
(ix) Emergency alerting and response procedures.
(x) Critique of response and follow-up.
(xi) PPE and emergency equipment.
[[Page 155]]
(3) Procedures for handling emergency incidents. (i) In addition to
the elements for the emergency response plan required in paragraph
(1)(2) of this section, the following elements shall be included for
emergency response plans:
(A) Site topography, layout, and prevailing weather conditions.
(B) Procedures for reporting incidents to local, state, and federal
governmental agencies.
(ii) The emergency response plan shall be a separate section of the
Site Safety and Health Plan.
(iii) The emergency response plan shall be compatible and integrated
with the disaster, fire and/or emergency response plans of local, state,
and federal agencies.
(iv) The emergency response plan shall be rehearsed regularly as
part of the overall training program for site operations.
(v) The site emergency response plan shall be reviewed periodically
and, as necessary, be amended to keep it current with new or changing
site conditions or information.
(vi) An employee alarm system shall be installed in accordance with
29 CFR 1926.159 to notify employees of an emergency situation; to stop
work activities if necessary; to lower background noise in order to
speed communication; and to begin emergency procedures.
(vii) Based upon the information available at time of the emergency,
the employer shall evaluate the incident and the site response
capabilities and proceed with the appropriate steps to implement the
site emergency response plan.
(m) Illumination. Areas accessible to employees shall be lighted to
not less than the minimum illumination intensities listed in the
following Table D-65.1 while any work is in progress:
Table D-65.1--Minimum Illumination Intensities in Foot-Candles
------------------------------------------------------------------------
Foot-candles Area or operations
------------------------------------------------------------------------
5...................................... General site areas.
3...................................... Excavation and waste areas,
accessways, active storage
areas, loading platforms,
refueling, and field
maintenance areas.
5...................................... Indoors: Warehouses, corridors,
hallways, and exitways.
5...................................... Tunnels, shafts, and general
underground work areas.
(Exception: Minimum of 10 foot-
candles is required at tunnel
and shaft heading during
drilling mucking, and scaling.
Mine Safety and Health
Administration approved cap
lights shall be acceptable for
use in the tunnel heading.)
10..................................... General shops (e.g., mechanical
and electrical equipment
rooms, active storerooms,
barracks or living quarters,
locker or dressing rooms,
dining areas, and indoor
toilets and workrooms.)
30..................................... First aid stations,
infirmaries, and offices.
------------------------------------------------------------------------
(n) Sanitation at temporary workplaces--(1) Potable water. (i) An
adequate supply of potable water shall be provided on the site.
(ii) Portable containers used to dispense drinking water shall be
capable of being tightly closed, and equipped with a tap. Water shall
not be dipped from containers.
(iii) Any container used to distribute drinking water shall be
clearly marked as to the nature of its contents and not used for any
other purpose.
(iv) Where single service cups (to be used but once) are supplied,
both a sanitary container for the unused cups and a receptacle for
disposing of the used cups shall be provided.
(2) Nonpotable water. (i) Outlets for nonpotable water, such as
water for firefighting purposes, shall be identified to indicate clearly
that the water is unsafe and is not to be used for drinking, washing, or
cooking purposes.
(ii) There shall be no cross-connection, open or potential, between
a system furnishing potable water and a system furnishing nonpotable
water.
(3) Toilet facilities. (i) Toilets shall be provided for employees
according to the following Table D-65.2.
Table D-65.2--Toilet Facilities
------------------------------------------------------------------------
Number of employees Minimum number of facilities
------------------------------------------------------------------------
20 or fewer............................... One.
More than 20, fewer than 200.............. One toilet seat and one
urinal per 40 employees.
More than 200............................. One toilet seat and one
urinal per 50 employees.
------------------------------------------------------------------------
(ii) Under temporary field conditions, provisions shall be made to
assure that at least one toilet facility is available.
[[Page 156]]
(iii) Hazardous waste sites not provided with a sanitary sewer shall
be provided with the following toilet facilities unless prohibited by
local codes:
(A) Chemical toilets;
(B) Recirculating toilets;
(C) Combustion toilets; or
(D) Flush toilets.
(iv) The requirements of this paragraph for sanitation facilities
shall not apply to mobile crews having transportation readily available
to nearby toilet facilities.
(v) Doors entering toilet facilities shall be provided with entrance
locks controlled from inside the facility.
(4) Food handling. All food service facilities and operations for
employees shall meet the applicable laws, ordinances, and regulations of
the jurisdictions in which they are located.
(5) Temporary sleeping quarters. When temporary sleeping quarters
are provided, they shall be heated, ventilated, and lighted.
(6) Washing facilities. The employer shall provide adequate washing
facilities for employees engaged in operations where hazardous
substances may be harmful to employees. Such facilities shall be in near
proximity to the worksite; in areas where exposures are below
permissible exposure limits and published exposure levels and which are
under the controls of the employer; and shall be so equipped as to
enable employees to remove hazardous substances from themselves.
(7) Showers and change rooms. When hazardous waste clean-up or
removal operations commence on a site and the duration of the work will
require six months or greater time to complete, the employer shall
provide showers and change rooms for all employees exposed to hazardous
substances and health hazards involved in hazardous waste clean-up or
removal operations.
(i) Showers shall be provided and shall meet the requirements of 29
CFR 1926.51(f)(4).
(ii) Change rooms shall be provided and shall meet the requirements
of 29 CFR 1926.51(i). Change rooms shall consist of two separate change
areas separated by the shower area required in paragraph (n)(7)(i) of
this section. One change area, with an exit leading off the worksite,
shall provide employees with a clean area where they can remove, store,
and put on street clothing. The second area, with an exit to the
worksite, shall provide employees with an area where they can put on,
remove and store work clothing and personal protective equipment.
(iii) Showers and change rooms shall be located in areas where
exposures are below the permissible exposure limits and published
exposure levels. If this cannot be accomplished, then a ventilation
system shall be provided that will supply air that is below the
permissible exposure limits and published exposure levels.
(iv) Employers shall assure that employees shower at the end of
their work shift and when leaving the hazardous waste site.
(o) New technology programs. (1) The employer shall develop and
implement procedures for the introduction of effective new technologies
and equipment developed for the improved protection of employees working
with hazardous waste clean-up operations, and the same shall be
implemented as part of the site safety and health program to assure that
employee protection is being maintained.
(2) New technologies, equipment or control measures available to the
industry, such as the use of foams, absorbents, adsorbents,
neutralizers, or other means to suppress the level of air contaminates
while excavating the site or for spill control, shall be evaluated by
employers or their representatives. Such an evaluation shall be done to
determine the effectiveness of the new methods, materials, or equipment
before implementing their use on a large scale for enhancing employee
protection. Information and data from manufacturers or suppliers may be
used as part of the employer's evaluation effort. Such evaluations shall
be made available to OSHA upon request.
(p) Certain operations conducted under the Resource Conservation and
Recovery Act of 1976 (RCRA). Employers conducting operations at
treatment, storage and disposal (TSD) facilities specified in paragraph
(a)(1)(iv) of this section shall provide and implement the programs
specified in this paragraph. See the ``Notes and Exceptions'' to
[[Page 157]]
paragraph (a)(2)(iii) of this section for employers not covered.)''.
(1) Safety and health program. The employer shall develop and
implement a written safety and health program for employees involved in
hazardous waste operations that shall be available for inspection by
employees, their representatives and OSHA personnel. The program shall
be designed to identify, evaluate and control safety and health hazards
in their facilities for the purpose of employee protection, to provide
for emergency response meeting the requirements of paragraph (p)(8) of
this section and to address as appropriate site analysis, engineering
controls, maximum exposure limits, hazardous waste handling procedures
and uses of new technologies.
(2) Hazard communication program. The employer shall implement a
hazard communication program meeting the requirements of 29 CFR 1926.59
as part of the employer's safety and program.
Note to 1926.65: The exemption for hazardous waste provided in Sec.
1926.59 is applicable to this section.
(3) Medical surveillance program. The employer shall develop and
implement a medical surveillance program meeting the requirements of
paragraph (f) of this section.
(4) Decontamination program. The employer shall develop and
implement a decontamination procedure meeting the requirements of
paragraph (k) of this section.
(5) New technology program. The employer shall develop and implement
procedures meeting the requirements of paragraph (o) of this section for
introducing new and innovative equipment into the workplace.
(6) Material handling program. Where employees will be handling
drums or containers, the employer shall develop and implement procedures
meeting the requirements of paragraphs (j)(1) (ii) through (viii) and
(xi) of this section, as well as (j)(3) and (j)(8) of this section prior
to starting such work.
(7) Training program--(i) New employees. The employer shall develop
and implement a training program, which is part of the employer's safety
and health program, for employees exposed to health hazards or hazardous
substances at TSD operations to enable the employees to perform their
assigned duties and functions in a safe and healthful manner so as not
endanger themselves or other employees. The initial training shall be
for 24 hours and refresher training shall be for eight hours annually.
Employees who have received the initial training required by this
paragraph shall be given a written certificate attesting that they have
successfully completed the necessary training.
(ii) Current employees. Employers who can show by an employee's
previous work experience and/or training that the employee has had
training equivalent to the initial training required by this paragraph,
shall be considered as meeting the initial training requirements of this
paragraph as to that employee. Equivalent training includes the training
that existing employees might have already received from actual site
work experience. Current employees shall receive eight hours of
refresher training annually.
(iii) Trainers. Trainers who teach initial training shall have
satisfactorily completed a training course for teaching the subjects
they are expected to teach or they shall have the academic credentials
and instruction experience necessary to demonstrate a good command of
the subject matter of the courses and competent instructional skills.
(8) Emergency response program--(i) Emergency response plan. An
emergency response plan shall be developed and implemented by all
employers. Such plans need not duplicate any of the subjects fully
addressed in the employer's contingency planning required by permits,
such as those issued by the U.S. Environmental Protection Agency,
provided that the contingency plan is made part of the emergency
response plan. The emergency response plan shall be a written portion of
the employers safety and health program required in paragraph (p)(1) of
this section. Employers who will evacuate their employees from the
worksite location when an emergency occurs and who do not permit any of
their employees to assist in handling the emergency are exempt from the
requirements of paragraph (p)(8) if they provide an
[[Page 158]]
emergency action plan complying with Sec. 1926.35 of this part.
(ii) Elements of an emergency response plan. The employer shall
develop an emergency response plan for emergencies which shall address,
as a minimum, the following areas to the extent that they are not
addressed in any specific program required in this paragraph:
(A) Pre-emergency planning and coordination with outside parties.
(B) Personnel roles, lines of authority, and communication.
(C) Emergency recognition and prevention.
(D) Safe distances and places of refuge.
(E) Site security and control.
(F) Evacuation routes and procedures.
(G) Decontamination procedures.
(H) Emergency medical treatment and first aid.
(I) Emergency alerting and response procedures.
(J) Critique of response and follow-up.
(K) PPE and emergency equipment.
(iii) Training. (A) Training for emergency response employees shall
be completed before they are called upon to perform in real emergencies.
Such training shall include the elements of the emergency response plan,
standard operating procedures the employer has established for the job,
the personal protective equipment to be worn and procedures for handling
emergency incidents.
Exception #1: An employer need not train all employees to the degree
specified if the employer divides the work force in a manner such that a
sufficient number of employees who have responsibility to control
emergencies have the training specified, and all other employees, who
may first respond to an emergency incident, have sufficient awareness
training to recognize that an emergency response situation exists and
that they are instructed in that case to summon the fully trained
employees and not attempt control activities for which they are not
trained.
Exception #2: An employer need not train all employees to the degree
specified if arrangements have been made in advance for an outside
fully-trained emergency response team to respond in a reasonable period
and all employees, who may come to the incident first, have sufficient
awareness training to recognize that an emergency response situation
exists and they have been instructed to call the designated outside
fully-trained emergency response team for assistance.
(B) Employee members of TSD facility emergency response
organizations shall be trained to a level of competence in the
recognition of health and safety hazards to protect themselves and other
employees. This would include training in the methods used to minimize
the risk from safety and health hazards; in the safe use of control
equipment; in the selection and use of appropriate personal protective
equipment; in the safe operating procedures to be used at the incident
scene; in the techniques of coordination with other employees to
minimize risks; in the appropriate response to over exposure from health
hazards or injury to themselves and other employees; and in the
recognition of subsequent symptoms which may result from over exposures.
(C) The employer shall certify that each covered employee has
attended and successfully completed the training required in paragraph
(p)(8)(iii) of this section, or shall certify the employee's competency
at least yearly. The method used to demonstrate competency for
certification of training shall be recorded and maintained by the
employer.
(iv) Procedures for handling emergency incidents. (A) In addition to
the elements for the emergency response plan required in paragraph
(p)(8)(ii) of this section, the following elements shall be included for
emergency response plans to the extent that they do not repeat any
information already contained in the emergency response plan:
(1) Site topography, layout, and prevailing weather conditions.
(2) Procedures for reporting incidents to local, state, and federal
governmental agencies.
(B) The emergency response plan shall be compatible and integrated
with the disaster, fire and/or emergency response plans of local, state,
and federal agencies.
(C) The emergency response plan shall be rehearsed regularly as part
of the overall training program for site operations.
[[Page 159]]
(D) The site emergency response plan shall be reviewed periodically
and, as necessary, be amended to keep it current with new or changing
site conditions or information.
(E) An employee alarm system shall be installed in accordance with
29 CFR 1926.159 to notify employees of an emergency situation; to stop
work activities if necessary; to lower background noise in order to
speed communication; and to begin emergency procedures.
(F) Based upon the information available at time of the emergency,
the employer shall evaluate the incident and the site response
capabilities and proceed with the appropriate steps to implement the
site emergency response plan.
(q) Emerqency response to hazardous substance releases. This
paragraph covers employers whose employees are engaged in emergency
response no matter where it occurs except that it does not cover
employees engaged in operations specified in paragraphs (a)(1)(i)
through (a)(1)(iv) of this section. Those emergency response
organizations who have developed and implemented programs equivalent to
this paragraph for handling releases of hazardous substances pursuant to
section 303 of the Superfund Amendments and Reauthorization Act of 1986
(Emergency Planning and Community Right-to-Know Act of 1986, 42 U.S.C.
11003) shall be deemed to have met the requirements of this paragraph.
(1) Emergency response plan. An emergency response plan shall be
developed and implemented to handle anticipated emergencies prior to the
commencement of emergency response operations. The plan shall be in
writing and available for inspection and copying by employees, their
representatives and OSHA personnel. Employers who will evacuate their
employees from the danger area when an emergency occurs, and who do not
permit any of their employees to assist in handling the emergency, are
exempt from the requirements of this paragraph if they provide an
emergency action plan in accordance with Sec. 1926.35 of this part.
(2) Elements of an emergency response plan. The employer shall
develop an emergency response plan for emergencies which shall address,
as a minimum, the following to the extent that they are not addressed
elsewhere:
(i) Pre-emergency planning and coordination with outside parties.
(ii) Personnel roles, lines of authority, training, and
communication.
(iii) Emergency recognition and prevention.
(iv) Safe distances and places of refuge.
(v) Site security and control.
(vi) Evacuation routes and procedures.
(vii) Decontamination.
(viii) Emergency medical treatment and first aid.
(ix) Emergency alerting and response procedures.
(x) Critique of response and follow-up.
(xi) PPE and emergency equipment.
(xii) Emergency response organizations may use the local emergency
response plan or the state emergency response plan or both, as part of
their emergency response plan to avoid duplication. Those items of the
emergency response plan that are being properly addressed by the SARA
Title III plans may be substituted into their emergency plan or
otherwise kept together for the employer and employee's use.
(3) Procedures for handling emergency response. (i) The senior
emergency response official responding to an emergency shall become the
individual in charge of a site-specific Incident Command System (ICS).
All emergency responders and their communications shall be coordinated
and controlled through the individual in charge of the ICS assisted by
the senior official present for each employer.
Note to (g)(3)(i): The senior official at an emergency response is
the most senior official on the site who has the responsibility for
controlling the operations at the site. Initially it is the senior
officer on the first-due piece of responding emergency apparatus to
arrive on the incident scene. As more senior officers arrive (i.e.,
battalion chief, fire chief, state law enforcement official, site
coordinator, etc.) the position is passed up the line of authority which
has been previously established.
[[Page 160]]
(ii) The individual in charge of the ICS shall identify, to the
extent possible, all hazardous substances or conditions present and
shall address as appropriate site analysis, use of engineering controls,
maximum exposure limits, hazardous substance handling procedures, and
use of any new technologies.
(iii) Based on the hazardous substances and/or conditions present,
the individual in charge of the ICS shall implement appropriate
emergency operations, and assure that the personal protective equipment
worn is appropriate for the hazards to be encountered. However, personal
protective equipment shall meet, at a minimum, the criteria contained in
29 CFR 1926.97 when worn while performing fire fighting operations
beyond the incipient stage for any incident.
(iv) Employees engaged in emergency response and exposed to
hazardous substances presenting an inhalation hazard or potential
inhalation hazard shall wear positive pressure self-contained breathing
apparatus while engaged in emergency response, until such time that the
individual in charge of the ICS determines through the use of air
monitoring that a decreased level of respiratory protection will not
result in hazardous exposures to employees.
(v) The individual in charge of the ICS shall limit the number of
emergency response personnel at the emergency site, in those areas of
potential or actual exposure to incident or site hazards, to those who
are actively performing emergency operations. However, operations in
hazardous areas shall be performed using the buddy system in groups of
two or more.
(vi) Back-up personnel shall stand by with equipment ready to
provide assistance or rescue. Advance first aid support personnel, as a
minimum, shall also stand by with medical equipment and transportation
capability.
(vii) The individual in charge of the ICS shall designate a safety
official, who is knowledgable in the operations being implemented at the
emergency response site, with specific responsibility to identify and
evaluate hazards and to provide direction with respect to the safety of
operations for the emergency at hand.
(viii) When activities are judged by the safety official to be an
IDLH condition and/or to involve an imminent danger condition, the
safety official shall have the authority to alter, suspend, or terminate
those activities. The safety official shall immediately inform the
individual in charge of the ICS of any actions needed to be taken to
correct these hazards at the emergency scene.
(ix) After emergency operations have terminated, the individual in
charge of the ICS shall implement appropriate decontamination
procedures.
(x) When deemed necessary for meeting the tasks at hand, approved
self-contained compressed air breathing apparatus may be used with
approved cylinders from other approved self-contained compressed air
breathing apparatus provided that such cylinders are of the same
capacity and pressure rating. All compressed air cylinders used with
self-contained breathing apparatus shall meet U.S. Department of
Transportation and National Institute for Occupational Safety and Health
criteria.
(4) Skilled support personnel. Personnel, not necessarily an
employer's own employees, who are skilled in the operation of certain
equipment, such as mechanized earth moving or digging equipment or crane
and hoisting equipment, and who are needed temporarily to perform
immediate emergency support work that cannot reasonably be performed in
a timely fashion by an employer's own employees, and who will be or may
be exposed to the hazards at an emergency response scene, are not
required to meet the training required in this paragraph for the
employer's regular employees. However, these personnel shall be given an
initial briefing at the site prior to their participation in any
emergency response. The initial briefing shall include instruction in
the wearing of appropriate personal protective equipment, what chemical
hazards are involved, and what duties are to be performed. All other
appropriate safety and health precautions provided to the employer's own
employees shall be used to assure the safety and health of these
personnel.
[[Page 161]]
(5) Specialist employees. Employees who, in the course of their
regular job duties, work with and are trained in the hazards of specific
hazardous substances, and who will be called upon to provide technical
advice or assistance at a hazardous substance release incident to the
individual in charge, shall receive training or demonstrate competency
in the area of their specialization annually.
(6) Training. Training shall be based on the duties and function to
be performed by each responder of an emergency response organization.
The skill and knowledge levels required for all new responders, those
hired after the effective date of this standard, shall be conveyed to
them through training before they are permitted to take part in actual
emergency operations on an incident. Employees who participate, or are
expected to participate, in emergency response, shall be given training
in accordance with the following paragraphs:
(i) First responder awareness level. First responders at the
awareness level are individuals who are likely to witness or discover a
hazardous substance release and who have been trained to initiate an
emergency response sequence by notifying the proper authorities of the
release. They would take no further action beyond notifying the
authorities of the release. First responders at the awareness level
shall have sufficient training or have had sufficient experience to
objectively demonstrate competency in the following areas:
(A) An understanding of what hazardous substances are, and the risks
associated with them in an incident.
(B) An understanding of the potential outcomes associated with an
emergency created when hazardous substances are present.
(C) The ability to recognize the presence of hazardous substances in
an emergency.
(D) The ability to identify the hazardous substances, if possible.
(E) An understanding of the role of the first responder awareness
individual in the employer's emergency response plan including site
security and control and the U.S. Department of Transportation's
Emergency Response Guidebook.
(F) The ability to realize the need for additional resources, and to
make appropriate notifications to the communication center.
(ii) First responder operations level. First responders at the
operations level are individuals who respond to releases or potential
releases of hazardous substances as part of the initial response to the
site for the purpose of protecting nearby persons, property, or the
environment from the effects of the release. They are trained to respond
in a defensive fashion without actually trying to stop the release.
Their function is to contain the release from a safe distance, keep it
from spreading, and prevent exposures. First responders at the
operational level shall have received at least eight hours of training
or have had sufficient experience to objectively demonstrate competency
in the following areas in addition to those listed for the awareness
level and the employer shall so certify:
(A) Knowledge of the basic hazard and risk assessment techniques.
(B) Know how to select and use proper personal protective equipment
provided to the first responder operational level.
(C) An understanding of basic hazardous materials terms.
(D) Know how to perform basic control, containment and/or
confinement operations within the capabilities of the resources and
personal protective equipment available with their unit.
(E) Know how to implement basic decontamination procedures.
(F) An understanding of the relevant standard operating procedures
and termination procedures.
(iii) Hazardous materials technician. Hazardous materials
technicians are individuals who respond to releases or potential
releases for the purpose of stopping the release. They assume a more
aggressive role than a first responder at the operations level in that
they will approach the point of release in order to plug, patch or
otherwise stop the release of a hazardous substance. Hazardous materials
technicians shall have received at least 24
[[Page 162]]
hours of training equal to the first responder operations level and in
addition have competency in the following areas and the employer shall
so certify:
(A) Know how to implement the employer's emergency response plan.
(B) Know the classification, identification and verification of
known and unknown materials by using field survey instruments and
equipment.
(C) Be able to function within an assigned role in the Incident
Command System.
(D) Know how to select and use proper specialized chemical personal
protective equipment provided to the hazardous materials technician.
(E) Understand hazard and risk assessment techniques.
(F) Be able to perform advance control, containment, and/or
confinement operations within the capabilities of the resources and
personal protective equipment available with the unit.
(G) Understand and implement decontamination procedures.
(H) Understand termination procedures.
(I) Understand basic chemical and toxicological terminology and
behavior.
(iv) Hazardous materials specialist. Hazardous materials specialists
are individuals who respond with and provide support to hazardous
materials technicians. Their duties parallel those of the hazardous
materials technician, however, those duties require a more directed or
specific knowledge of the various substances they may be called upon to
contain. The hazardous materials specialist would also act as the site
liaison with Federal, state, local and other government authorities in
regards to site activities. Hazardous materials specialists shall have
received at least 24 hours of training equal to the technician level and
in addition have competency in the following areas and the employer
shall so certify:
(A) Know how to implement the local emergency response plan.
(B) Understand classification, identification and verification of
known and unknown materials by using advanced survey instruments and
equipment.
(C) Know of the state emergency response plan.
(D) Be able to select and use proper specialized chemical personal
protective equipment provided to the hazardous materials specialist.
(E) Understand in-depth hazard and risk techniques.
(F) Be able to perform specialized control, containment, and/or
confinement operations within the capabilities of the resources and
personal protective equipment available.
(G) Be able to determine and implement decontamination procedures.
(H) Have the ability to develop a site safety and control plan.
(I) Understand chemical, radiological and toxicological terminology
and behavior.
(v) On scene incident commander. Incident commanders, who will
assume control of the incident scene beyond the first responder
awareness level, shall receive at least 24 hours of training equal to
the first responder operations level and in addition have competency in
the following areas and the employer shall so certify:
(A) Know and be able to implement the employer's incident command
system.
(B) Know how to implement the employer's emergency response plan.
(C) Know and understand the hazards and risks associated with
employees working in chemical protective clothing.
(D) Know how to implement the local emergency response plan.
(E) Know of the state emergency response plan and of the Federal
Regional Response Team.
(F) Know and understand the importance of decontamination
procedures.
(7) Trainers. Trainers who teach any of the above training subjects
shall have satisfactorily completed a training course for teaching the
subjects they are expected to teach, such as the courses offered by the
U.S. National Fire Academy, or they shall have the training and/or
academic credentials and instructional experience necessary to
demonstrate competent instructional skills and a good command of the
subject matter of the courses they are to teach.
(8) Refresher training. (i) Those employees who are trained in
accordance with paragraph (q)(6) of this section
[[Page 163]]
shall receive annual refresher training of sufficient content and
duration to maintain their competencies, or shall demonstrate competency
in those areas at least yearly.
(ii) A statement shall be made of the training or competency, and if
a statement of competency is made, the employer shall keep a record of
the methodology used to demonstrate competency.
(9) Medical surveillance and consultation. (i) Members of an
organized and designated HAZMAT team and hazardous materials specialists
shall receive a baseline physical examination and be provided with
medical surveillance as required in paragraph (f) of this section.
(ii) Any emergency response employees who exhibits signs or symptoms
which may have resulted from exposure to hazardous substances during the
course of an emergency incident, either immediately or subsequently,
shall be provided with medical consultation as required in paragraph
(f)(3)(ii) of this section.
(10) Chemical protective clothing. Chemical protective clothing and
equipment to be used by organized and designated HAZMAT team members, or
to be used by hazardous materials specialists, shall meet the
requirements of paragraphs (g) (3) through (5) of this section.
(11) Post-emergency response operations. Upon completion of the
emergency response, if it is determined that it is necessary to remove
hazardous substances, health hazards, and materials contaminated with
them (such as contaminated soil or other elements of the natural
environment) from the site of the incident, the employer conducting the
clean-up shall comply with one of the following:
(i) Meet all of the requirements of paragraphs (b) through (o) of
this section; or
(ii) Where the clean-up is done on plant property using plant or
workplace employees, such employees shall have completed the training
requirements of the following: 29 CFR 1926.35, 1926.59, and 1926.103,
and other appropriate safety and health training made necessary by the
tasks that they are expected to be performed such as personal protective
equipment and decontamination procedures. All equipment to be used in
the performance of the clean-up work shall be in serviceable condition
and shall have been inspected prior to use.
Appendices to Sec. 1926.65--Hazardous Waste Operations and Emergency
Response
Note: The following appendices serve as non-mandatory guidelines to
assist employees and employers in complying with the appropriate
requirements of this section. However Sec. 1926.65(g) makes mandatory
in certain circumstances the use of Level A and Level B PPE protection.
Appendix A to Sec. 1926.65--Personal Protective Equipment Test Methods
This appendix sets forth the non-mandatory examples of tests which
may be used to evaluate compliance with Sec. 1926.65(g)(4) (ii) and
(iii). Other tests and other challenge agents may be used to evaluate
compliance.
A. Totally-encapsulating chemical protective suit pressure test
1.0--Scope
1.1 This practice measures the ability of a gas tight totally-
encapsulating chemical protective suit material, seams, and closures to
maintain a fixed positive pressure. The results of this practice allow
the gas tight integrity of a totally-encapsulating chemical protective
suit to be evaluated.
1.2 Resistance of the suit materials to permeation, penetration, and
degradation by specific hazardous substances is not determined by this
test method.
2.0--Definition of terms
2.1 Totally-encapsulated chemical protective suit (TECP suit) means
a full body garment which is constructed of protective clothing
materials; covers the wearer's torso, head, arms, legs and respirator;
may cover the wearer's hands and feet with tightly attached gloves and
boots; completely encloses the wearer and respirator by itself or in
combination with the wearer's gloves and boots.
2.2 Protective clothing material means any material or combination
of materials used in an item of clothing for the purpose of isolating
parts of the body from direct contact with a potentially hazardous
liquid or gaseous chemicals.
2.3 Gas tight means, for the purpose of this test method, the
limited flow of a gas under pressure from the inside of a TECP suit to
atmosphere at a prescribed pressure and time interval.
3.0--Summary of test method
3.1 The TECP suit is visually inspected and modified for the test.
The test apparatus is attached to the suit to permit inflation to
[[Page 164]]
the pre-test suit expansion pressure for removal of suit wrinkles and
creases. The pressure is lowered to the test pressure and monitored for
three minutes. If the pressure drop is excessive, the TECP suit fails
the test and is removed from service. The test is repeated after leak
location and repair.
4.0--Required Supplies
4.1 Source of compressed air.
4.2 Test apparatus for suit testing, including a pressure
measurement device with a sensitivity of at least \1/4\ inch water
gauge.
4.3 Vent valve closure plugs or sealing tape.
4.4 Soapy water solution and soft brush.
4.5 Stop watch or appropriate timing device.
5.0--Safety Precautions
5.1 Care shall be taken to provide the correct pressure safety
devices required for the source of compressed air used.
6.0--Test Procedure
6.1 Prior to each test, the tester shall perform a visual inspection
of the suit. Check the suit for seam integrity by visually examining the
seams and gently pulling on the seams. Ensure that all air supply lines,
fittings, visor, zippers, and valves are secure and show no signs of
deterioration.
6.1.1 Seal off the vent valves along with any other normal inlet or
exhaust points (such as umbilical air line fittings or face piece
opening) with tape or other appropriate means (caps, plugs, fixture,
etc.). Care should be exercised in the sealing process not to damage any
of the suit components.
6.1.2 Close all closure assemblies.
6.1.3 Prepare the suit for inflation by providing an improvised
connection point on the suit for connecting an airline. Attach the
pressure test apparatus to the suit to permit suit inflation from a
compressed air source equipped with a pressure indicating regulator. The
leak tightness of the pressure test apparatus should be tested before
and after each test by closing off the end of the tubing attached to the
suit and assuring a pressure of three inches water gauge for three
minutes can be maintained. If a component is removed for the test, that
component shall be replaced and a second test conducted with another
component removed to permit a complete test of the ensemble.
6.1.4 The pre-test expansion pressure (A) and the suit test pressure
(B) shall be supplied by the suit manufacturer, but in no case shall
they be less than: (A)=three inches water gauge; and (B)=two inches
water gauge. The ending suit pressure (C) shall be no less than 80
percent of the test pressure (B); i.e., the pressure drop shall not
exceed 20 percent of the test pressure (B).
6.1.5 Inflate the suit until the pressure inside is equal to
pressure (A), the pre-test expansion suit pressure. Allow at least one
minute to fill out the wrinkles in the suit. Release sufficient air to
reduce the suit pressure to pressure (B), the suit test pressure. Begin
timing. At the end of three minutes, record the suit pressure as
pressure (C), the ending suit pressure. The difference between the suit
test pressure and the ending suit test pressure (B-C) shall be defined
as the suit pressure drop.
6.1.6 If the suit pressure drop is more than 20 percent of the suit
test pressure (B) during the three-minute test period, the suit fails
the test and shall be removed from service.
7.0--Retest Procedure
7.1 If the suit fails the test check for leaks by inflating the suit
to pressure (A) and brushing or wiping the entire suit (including seams,
closures, lens gaskets, glove-to-sleeve joints, etc.) with a mild soap
and water solution. Observe the suit for the formation of soap bubbles,
which is an indication of a leak. Repair all identified leaks.
7.2 Retest the TECP suit as outlined in Test procedure 6.0.
8.0--Report
8.1 Each TECP suit tested by this practice shall have the following
information recorded:
8.1.1 Unique identification number, identifying brand name, date of
purchase, material of construction, and unique fit features, e.g.,
special breathing apparatus.
8.1.2 The actual values for test pressures (A), (B), and (C) shall
be recorded along with the specific observation times. If the ending
pressure (C) is less than 80 percent of the test pressure (B), the suit
shall be identified as failing the test. When possible, the specific
leak location shall be identified in the test records. Retest pressure
data shall be recorded as an additional test.
8.1.3 The source of the test apparatus used shall be identified and
the sensitivity of the pressure gauge shall be recorded.
8.1.4 Records shall be kept for each pressure test even if repairs
are being made at the test location.
CAUTION
Visually inspect all parts of the suit to be sure they are
positioned correctly and secured tightly before putting the suit back
into service. Special care should be taken to examine each exhaust valve
to make sure it is not blocked.
Care should also be exercised to assure that the inside and outside
of the suit is completely dry before it is put into storage.
B. Totally-encapsulating chemical protective suit qualitative leak test
1.0--Scope
1.1 This practice semi-qualitatively tests gas tight totally-
encapsulating chemical protective suit integrity by detecting inward
leakage of ammonia vapor. Since no modifications are made to the suit to
carry out
[[Page 165]]
this test, the results from this practice provide a realistic test for
the integrity of the entire suit.
1.2 Resistance of the suit materials to permeation, penetration, and
degradation is not determined by this test method. ASTM test methods are
available to test suit materials for these characteristics and the tests
are usually conducted by the manufacturers of the suits.
2.0--Definition of terms
2.1 Totally-encapsulated chemical protective suit (TECP suit) means
a full body garment which is constructed of protective clothing
materials; covers the wearer's torso, head, arms, legs and respirator;
may cover the wearer's hands and feet with tightly attached gloves and
boots; completely encloses the wearer and respirator by itself or in
combination with the wearer's gloves, and boots.
2.2 Protective clothing material means any material or combination
of materials used in an item of clothing for the purpose of isolating
parts of the body from direct contact with a potentially hazardous
liquid or gaseous chemicals.
2.3 Gas tight means, for the purpose of this test method, the
limited flow of a gas under pressure from the inside of a TECP suit to
atmosphere at a prescribed pressure and time interval.
2.4 Intrusion Coefficient means a number expressing the level of
protection provided by a gas tight totally-encapsulating chemical
protective suit. The intrusion coefficient is calculated by dividing the
test room challenge agent concentration by the concentration of
challenge agent found inside the suit. The accuracy of the intrusion
coefficient is dependent on the challenge agent monitoring methods. The
larger the intrusion coefficient the greater the protection provided by
the TECP suit.
3.0--Summary of recommended practice
3.1 The volume of concentrated aqueous ammonia solution (ammonia
hydroxide NH4 OH) required to generate the test atmosphere is
determined using the directions outlined in 6.1. The suit is donned by a
person wearing the appropriate respiratory equipment (either a positive
pressure self-contained breathing apparatus or a positive pressure
supplied air respirator) and worn inside the enclosed test room. The
concentrated aqueous ammonia solution is taken by the suited individual
into the test room and poured into an open plastic pan. A two-minute
evaporation period is observed before the test room concentration is
measured, using a high range ammonia length of stain detector tube. When
the ammonia vapor reaches a concentration of between 1000 and 1200 ppm,
the suited individual starts a standardized exercise protocol to stress
and flex the suit. After this protocol is completed, the test room
concentration is measured again. The suited individual exits the test
room and his stand-by person measures the ammonia concentration inside
the suit using a low range ammonia length of stain detector tube or
other more sensitive ammonia detector. A stand-by person is required to
observe the test individual during the test procedure; aid the person in
donning and doffing the TECP suit; and monitor the suit interior. The
intrusion coefficient of the suit can be calculated by dividing the
average test area concentration by the interior suit concentration. A
colorimetric ammonia indicator strip of bromophenol blue or equivalent
is placed on the inside of the suit face piece lens so that the suited
individual is able to detect a color change and know if the suit has a
significant leak. If a color change is observed the individual shall
leave the test room immediately.
4.0--Required supplies
4.1 A supply of concentrated aqueous ammonium hydroxide (58% by
weight).
4.2 A supply of bromophenol/blue indicating paper or equivalent,
sensitive to 5-10 ppm ammonia or greater over a two-minute period of
exposure. [pH 3.0 (yellow) to pH 4.6 (blue)]
4.3 A supply of high range (0.5-10 volume percent) and low range (5-
700 ppm) detector tubes for ammonia and the corresponding sampling pump.
More sensitive ammonia detectors can be substituted for the low range
detector tubes to improve the sensitivity of this practice.
4.4 A shallow plastic pan (PVC) at least
12:14:1 and a half pint plastic
container (PVC) with tightly closing lid.
4.5 A graduated cylinder or other volumetric measuring device of at
least 50 milliliters in volume with an accuracy of at least 1 milliliters.
5.0--Safety precautions
5.1 Concentrated aqueous ammonium hydroxide, NH4 OH, is a
corrosive volatile liquid requiring eye, skin, and respiratory
protection. The person conducting the test shall review the MSDS for
aqueous ammonia.
5.2 Since the established permissible exposure limit for ammonia is
35 ppm as a 15 minute STEL, only persons wearing a positive pressure
self-contained breathing apparatus or a positive pressure supplied air
respirator shall be in the chamber. Normally only the person wearing the
totally-encapsulating suit will be inside the chamber. A stand-by person
shall have a positive pressure self-contained breathing apparatus, or a
positive pressure supplied air respirator available to enter the test
area should the suited individual need assistance.
5.3 A method to monitor the suited individual must be used during
this test. Visual contact is the simplest but other methods using
communication devices are acceptable.
5.4 The test room shall be large enough to allow the exercise
protocol to be carried out
[[Page 166]]
and then to be ventilated to allow for easy exhaust of the ammonia test
atmosphere after the test(s) are completed.
5.5 Individuals shall be medically screened for the use of
respiratory protection and checked for allergies to ammonia before
participating in this test procedure.
6.0--Test procedure
6.1.1 Measure the test area to the nearest foot and calculate its
volume in cubic feet. Multiply the test area volume by 0.2 milliliters
of concentrated aqueous ammonia solution per cubic foot of test area
volume to determine the approximate volume of concentrated aqueous
ammonia required to generate 1000 ppm in the test area.
6.1.2 Measure this volume from the supply of concentrated aqueous
ammonia and place it into a closed plastic container.
6.1.3 Place the container, several high range ammonia detector
tubes, and the pump in the clean test pan and locate it near the test
area entry door so that the suited individual has easy access to these
supplies.
6.2.1 In a non-contaminated atmosphere, open a pre-sealed ammonia
indicator strip and fasten one end of the strip to the inside of the
suit face shield lens where it can be seen by the wearer. Moisten the
indicator strip with distilled water. Care shall be taken not to
contaminate the detector part of the indicator paper by touching it. A
small piece of masking tape or equivalent should be used to attach the
indicator strip to the interior of the suit face shield.
6.2.2 If problems are encountered with this method of attachment,
the indicator strip can be attached to the outside of the respirator
face piece lens being used during the test.
6.3 Don the respiratory protective device normally used with the
suit, and then don the TECP suit to be tested. Check to be sure all
openings which are intended to be sealed (zippers, gloves, etc.) are
completely sealed. DO NOT, however, plug off any venting valves.
6.4 Step into the enclosed test room such as a closet, bathroom, or
test booth, equipped with an exhaust fan. No air should be exhausted
from the chamber during the test because this will dilute the ammonia
challenge concentrations.
6.5 Open the container with the pre-measured volume of concentrated
aqueous ammonia within the enclosed test room, and pour the liquid into
the empty plastic test pan. Wait two minutes to allow for adequate
volatilization of the concentrated aqueous ammonia. A small mixing fan
can be used near the evaporation pan to increase the evaporation rate of
the ammonia solution.
6.6 After two minutes a determination of the ammonia concentration
within the chamber should be made using the high range colorimetric
detector tube. A concentration of 1000 ppm ammonia or greater shall be
generated before the exercises are started.
6.7 To test the integrity of the suit the following four minute
exercise protocol should be followed:
6.7.1 Raising the arms above the head with at least 15 raising
motions completed in one minute.
6.7.2 Walking in place for one minute with at least 15 raising
motions of each leg in a one-minute period.
6.7.3 Touching the toes with a least 10 complete motions of the arms
from above the head to touching of the toes in a one-minute period.
6.7.4 Knee bends with at least 10 complete standing and squatting
motions in a one-minute period.
6.8 If at any time during the test the colorimetric indicating paper
should change colors, the test should be stopped and section 6.10 and
6.12 initiated (See ] 4.2).
6.9 After completion of the test exercise, the test area
concentration should be measured again using the high range colorimetric
detector tube.
6.10 Exit the test area.
6.11 The opening created by the suit zipper or other appropriate
suit penetration should be used to determine the ammonia concentration
in the suit with the low range length of stain detector tube or other
ammonia monitor. The internal TECP suit air should be sampled far enough
from the enclosed test area to prevent a false ammonia reading.
6.12 After completion of the measurement of the suit interior
ammonia concentration the test is concluded and the suit is doffed and
the respirator removed.
6.13 The ventilating fan for the test room should be turned on and
allowed to run for enough time to remove the ammonia gas. The fan shall
be vented to the outside of the building.
6.14 Any detectable ammonia in the suit interior (five ppm ammonia
(NH3) or more for the length of stain detector tube)
indicates that the suit has failed the test. When other ammonia
detectors are used a lower level of detection is possible, and it should
be specified as the pass/fail criteria.
6.15 By following this test method, an intrusion coefficient of
approximately 200 or more can be measured with the suit in a completely
operational condition. If the intrusion coefficient is 200 or more, then
the suit is suitable for emergency response and field use.
7.0--Retest procedures
7.1 If the suit fails this test, check for leaks by following the
pressure test in test A above.
7.2 Retest the TECP suit as outlined in the test procedure 6.0.
[[Page 167]]
8.0--Report
8.1 Each gas tight totally-encapsulating chemical protective suit
tested by this practice shall have the following information recorded.
8.1.1 Unique identification number, identifying brand name, date of
purchase, material of construction, and unique suit features; e.g.,
special breathing apparatus.
8.1.2 General description of test room used for test.
8.1.3 Brand name and purchase date of ammonia detector strips and
color change data.
8.1.4 Brand name, sampling range, and expiration date of the length
of stain ammonia detector tubes. The brand name and model of the
sampling pump should also be recorded. If another type of ammonia
detector is used, it should be identified along with its minimum
detection limit for ammonia.
8.1.5 Actual test results shall list the two test area
concentrations, their average, the interior suit concentration, and the
calculated intrusion coefficient. Retest data shall be recorded as an
additional test.
8.2 The evaluation of the data shall be specified as ``suit passed''
or ``suit failed,'' and the date of the test. Any detectable ammonia
(five ppm or greater for the length of stain detector tube) in the suit
interior indicates the suit has failed this test. When other ammonia
detectors are used, a lower level of detection is possible and it should
be specified as the pass fail criteria.
CAUTION
Visually inspect all parts of the suit to be sure they are
positioned correctly and secured tightly before putting the suit back
into service. Special care should be taken to examine each exhaust valve
to make sure it is not blocked.
Care should also be exercised to assure that the inside and outside
of the suit is completely dry before it is put into storage.
Appendix B to Sec. 1926.65--General Description and Discussion of the
Levels of Protection and Protective Gear
This appendix sets forth information about personal protective
equipment (PPE) protection levels which may be used to assist employers
in complying with the PPE requirements of this section.
As required by the standard, PPE must be selected which will protect
employees from the specific hazards which they are likely to encounter
during their work on-site.
Selection of the appropriate PPE is a complex process which should
take into consideration a variety of factors. Key factors involved in
this process are identification of the hazards, or suspected hazards;
their routes of potential hazard to employees (inhalation, skin
absorption, ingestion, and eye or skin contact); and the performance of
the PPE materials (and seams) in providing a barrier to these hazards.
The amount of protection provided by PPE is material-hazard specific.
That is, protective equipment materials will protect well against some
hazardous substances and poorly, or not at all, against others. In many
instances, protective equipment materials cannot be found which will
provide continuous protection from the particular hazardous substance.
In these cases the breakthrough time of the protective material should
exceed the work durations.
Other factors in this selection process to be considered are
matching the PPE to the employee's work requirements and task-specific
conditions. The durability of PPE materials, such as tear strength and
seam strength, should be considered in relation to the employee's tasks.
The effects of PPE in relation to heat stress and task duration are a
factor in selecting and using PPE. In some cases layers of PPE may be
necessary to provide sufficient protection, or to protect expensive PPE
inner garments, suits or equipment.
The more that is known about the hazards at the site, the easier the
job of PPE selection becomes. As more information about the hazards and
conditions at the site becomes available, the site supervisor can make
decisions to up-grade or down-grade the level of PPE protection to match
the tasks at hand.
The following are guidelines which an employer can use to begin the
selection of the appropriate PPE. As noted above, the site information
may suggest the use of combinations of PPE selected from the different
protection levels (i.e., A, B, C, or D) as being more suitable to the
hazards of the work. It should be cautioned that the listing below does
not fully address the performance of the specific PPE material in
relation to the specific hazards at the job site, and that PPE
selection, evaluation and re-selection is an ongoing process until
sufficient information about the hazards and PPE performance is
obtained.
Part A. Personal protective equipment is divided into four
categories based on the degree of protection afforded. (See Part B of
this appendix for further explanation of Levels A, B, C, and D hazards.)
I. Level A-- To be selected when the greatest level of skin,
respiratory, and eye protection is required.
The following constitute Level A equipment; it may be used as
appropriate;
1. Positive pressure, full face-piece self-contained breathing
apparatus (SCBA), or positive pressure supplied air respirator with
escape SCBA, approved by the National Institute for Occupational Safety
and Health (NIOSH).
[[Page 168]]
2. Totally-encapsulating chemical-protective suit.
3. Coveralls. \1\
4. Long underwear. \1\
5. Gloves, outer, chemical-resistant.
6. Gloves, inner, chemical-resistant.
7. Boots, chemical-resistant, steel toe and shank.
8. Hard hat (under suit). \1\
9. Disposable protective suit, gloves and boots (depending on suit
construction, may be worn over totally-encapsulating suit).
II. Level B--The highest level of respiratory protection is
necessary but a lesser level of skin protection is needed.
The following constitute Level B equipment; it may be used as
appropriate.
1. Positive pressure, full-facepiece self-contained breathing
apparatus (SCBA), or positive pressure supplied air respirator with
escape SCBA (NIOSH approved).
2. Hooded chemical-resistant clothing (overalls and long-sleeved
jacket; coveralls; one or two-piece chemical-splash suit; disposable
chemical-resistant overalls).
3. Coveralls. \1\
4. Gloves, outer, chemical-resistant.
5. Gloves, inner, chemical-resistant.
6. Boots, outer, chemical-resistant steel toe and shank.
7. Boot-covers, outer, chemical-resistant (disposable). \1\
8. Hard hat. \1\
9. [Reserved]
10. Face shield. \1\
III. Level C--The concentration(s) and type(s) of airborne
substance(s) is known and the criteria for using air purifying
respirators are met.
The following constitute Level C equipment; it may be used as
appropriate.
1. Full-face or half-mask, air purifying respirators (NIOSH
approved).
2. Hooded chemical-resistant clothing (overalls; two-piece chemical-
splash suit; disposable chemical-resistant overalls).
3. Coveralls. \1\
---------------------------------------------------------------------------
\1\ Optional, as applicable.
---------------------------------------------------------------------------
4. Gloves, outer, chemical-resistant.
5. Gloves, inner, chemical-resistant.
6. Boots (outer), chemical-resistant steel toe and shank. \1\
7. Boot-covers, outer, chemical-resistant (disposable) \1\.
8. Hard hat. \1\
9. Escape mask. \1\
10. Face shield. \1\
IV. Level D--A work uniform affording minimal protection, used for
nuisance contamination only.
The following constitute Level D equipment; it may be used as
appropriate:
1. Coveralls.
2. Gloves. \1\
3. Boots/shoes, chemical-resistant steel toe and shank.
4. Boots, outer, chemical-resistant (disposable). \1\
5. Safety glasses or chemical splash goggles*.
6. Hard hat. \1\
7. Escape mask. \1\
8. Face shield. \1\
Part B. The types of hazards for which levels A, B, C, and D
protection are appropriate are described below:
I. Level A--Level A protection should be used when:
1. The hazardous substance has been identified and requires the
highest level of protection for skin, eyes, and the respiratory system
based on either the measured (or potential for) high concentration of
atmospheric vapors, gases, or particulates; or the site operations and
work functions involve a high potential for splash, immersion, or
exposure to unexpected vapors, gases, or particulates of materials that
are harmful to skin or capable of being absorbed through the skin;
2. Substances with a high degree of hazard to the skin are known or
suspected to be present, and skin contact is possible; or
3. Operations are being conducted in confined, poorly ventilated
areas, and the absence of conditions requiring Level A have not yet been
determined.
II. Level B--Level B protection should be used when:
1. The type and atmospheric concentration of substances have been
identified and require a high level of respiratory protection, but less
skin protection;
2. The atmosphere contains less than 19.5 percent oxygen; or
3. The presence of incompletely identified vapors or gases is
indicated by a direct-reading organic vapor detection instrument, but
vapors and gases are not suspected of containing high levels of
chemicals harmful to skin or capable of being absorbed through the skin.
Note: This involves atmospheres with IDLH concentrations of specific
substances that present severe inhalation hazards and that do not
represent a severe skin hazard; or that do not meet the criteria for use
of air-purifying respirators.
III. Level C--Level C protection should be used when:
1. The atmospheric contaminants, liquid splashes, or other direct
contact will not adversely affect or be absorbed through any exposed
skin;
2. The types of air contaminants have been identified,
concentrations measured, and an air-purifying respirator is available
that can remove the contaminants; and
3. All criteria for the use of air-purifying respirators are met.
IV. Level D--Level D protection should be used when:
[[Page 169]]
1. The atmosphere contains no known hazard; and
2. Work functions preclude splashes, immersion, or the potential for
unexpected inhalation of or contact with hazardous levels of any
chemicals.
Note: As stated before, combinations of personal protective
equipment other than those described for Levels A, B, C, and D
protection may be more appropriate and may be used to provide the proper
level of protection.
As an aid in selecting suitable chemical protective clothing, it
should be noted that the National Fire Protection Association (NFPA) has
developed standards on chemical protective clothing. The standards that
have been adopted by include:
NFPA 1991--Standard on Vapor-Protective Suits for Hazardous Chemical
Emergencies (EPA Level A Protective Clothing).
NFPA 1992--Standard on Liquid Splash-Protective Suits for Hazardous
Chemical Emergencies (EPA Level B Protective Clothing).
NFPA 1993--Standard on Liquid Splash-Protective Suits for Non-
emergency, Non-flammable Hazardous Chemical Situations (EPA Level B
Protective Clothing).
These standards apply documentation and performance requirements to
the manufacture of chemical protective suits. Chemical protective suits
meeting these requirements are labelled as compliant with the
appropriate standard. It is recommended that chemical protective suits
that meet these standards be used.
Appendix C to Sec. 1926.65--Compliance Guidelines
1. Occupational Safety and Health Program. Each hazardous waste site
clean-up effort will require an occupational safety and health program
headed by the site coordinator or the employer's representative. The
purpose of the program will be the protection of employees at the site
and will be an extension of the employer's overall safety and health
program. The program will need to be developed before work begins on the
site and implemented as work proceeds as stated in paragraph (b). The
program is to facilitate coordination and communication of safety and
health issues among personnel responsible for the various activities
which will take place at the site. It will provide the overall means for
planning and implementing the needed safety and health training and job
orientation of employees who will be working at the site. The program
will provide the means for identifying and controlling worksite hazards
and the means for monitoring program effectiveness. The program will
need to cover the responsibilities and authority of the site coordinator
or the employer's manager on the site for the safety and health of
employees at the site, and the relationships with contractors or support
services as to what each employer's safety and health responsibilities
are for their employees on the site. Each contractor on the site needs
to have its own safety and health program so structured that it will
smoothly interface with the program of the site coordinator or principal
contractor.
Also those employers involved with treating, storing or disposal of
hazardous waste as covered in paragraph (p) must have implemented a
safety and health program for their employees. This program is to
include the hazard communication program required in paragraph (p)(1)
and the training required in paragraphs (p)(7) and (p)(8) as parts of
the employers comprehensive overall safety and health program. This
program is to be in writing.
Each site or workplace safety and health program will need to
include the following: (1) Policy statements of the line of authority
and accountability for implementing the program, the objectives of the
program and the role of the site safety and health supervisor or manager
and staff; (2) means or methods for the development of procedures for
identifying and controlling workplace hazards at the site; (3) means or
methods for the development and communication to employees of the
various plans, work rules, standard operating procedures and practices
that pertain to individual employees and supervisors; (4) means for the
training of supervisors and employees to develop the needed skills and
knowledge to perform their work in a safe and healthful manner; (5)
means to anticipate and prepare for emergency situations; and (6) means
for obtaining information feedback to aid in evaluating the program and
for improving the effectiveness of the program. The management and
employees should be trying continually to improve the effectiveness of
the program thereby enhancing the protection being afforded those
working on the site.
Accidents on the site or workplace should be investigated to provide
information on how such occurrences can be avoided in the future. When
injuries or illnesses occur on the site or workplace, they will need to
be investigated to determine what needs to be done to prevent this
incident from occurring again. Such information will need to be used as
feedback on the effectiveness of the program and the information turned
into positive steps to prevent any reoccurrence. Receipt of employee
suggestions or complaints relating to safety and health issues involved
with site or workplace activities is also a feedback mechanism that can
be used effectively to improve the program and may serve in part as an
evaluative tool(s).
For the development and implementation of the program to be the most
effective, professional safety and health personnel should
[[Page 170]]
be used. Certified Safety Professionals, Board Certified Industrial
Hygienists or Registered Professional Safety Engineers are good examples
of professional stature for safety and health managers who will
administer the employer's program.
2. Training. The training programs for employees subject to the
requirements of paragraph (e) of this standard should address: the
safety and health hazards employees should expect to find on hazardous
waste clean-up sites; what control measures or techniques are effective
for those hazards; what monitoring procedures are effective in
characterizing exposure levels; what makes an effective employer's
safety and health program; what a site safety and health plan should
include; hands on training with personal protective equipment and
clothing they may be expected to use; the contents of the OSHA standard
relevant to the employee's duties and function; and, employee's
responsibilities under OSHA and other regulations. Supervisors will need
training in their responsibilities under the safety and health program
and its subject areas such as the spill containment program, the
personal protective equipment program, the medical surveillance program,
the emergency response plan and other areas.
The training programs for employees subject to the requirements of
paragraph (p) of this standard should address: the employers safety and
health program elements impacting employees; the hazard communication
program; the medical surveillance program; the hazards and the controls
for such hazards that employees need to know for their job duties and
functions. All require annual refresher training.
The training programs for employees covered by the requirements of
paragraph (q) of this standard should address those competencies
required for the various levels of response such as: the hazards
associated with hazardous substances; hazard identification and
awareness; notification of appropriate persons; the need for and use of
personal protective equipment including respirators; the decontamination
procedures to be used; preplanning activities for hazardous substance
incidents including the emergency reponse plan; company standard
operating procedures for hazardous substance emergency responses; the
use of the incident command system and other subjects. Hands-on training
should be stressed whenever possible. Critiques done after an incident
which include an evaluation of what worked and what did not and how
could the incident be better handled the next time may be counted as
training time.
For hazardous materials specialists (usually members of hazardous
materials teams), the training should address the care, use and/or
testing of chemical protective clothing including totally encapsulating
suits, the medical surveillance program, the standard operating
procedures for the hazardous materials team including the use of
plugging and patching equipment and other subject areas.
Officers and leaders who may be expected to be in charge at an
incident should be fully knowledgeable of their company's incident
command system. They should know where and how to obtain additional
assistance and be familiar with the local district's emergency response
plan and the state emergency response plan.
Specialist employees such as technical experts, medical experts or
environmental experts that work with hazardous materials in their
regular jobs, who may be sent to the incident scene by the shipper,
manufacturer or governmental agency to advise and assist the person in
charge of the incident should have training on an annual basis. Their
training should include the care and use of personal protective
equipment including respirators; knowledge of the incident command
system and how they are to relate to it; and those areas needed to keep
them current in their respective field as it relates to safety and
health involving specific hazardous substances.
Those skilled support personnel, such as employees who work for
public works departments or equipment operators who operate bulldozers,
sand trucks, backhoes, etc., who may be called to the incident scene to
provide emergency support assistance, should have at least a safety and
health briefing before entering the area of potential or actual
exposure. These skilled support personnel, who have not been a part of
the emergency response plan and do not meet the training requirements,
should be made aware of the hazards they face and should be provided all
necessary protective clothing and equipment required for their tasks.
There are two National Fire Protection Association standards, NFPA
472--``Standard for Professional Competence of Responders to Hazardous
Material Incidents'' and NFPA 471--``Recommended Practice for Responding
to Hazardous Material Incidents'', which are excellent resource
documents to aid fire departments and other emergency response
organizations in developing their training program materials. NFPA 472
provides guidance on the skills and knowledge needed for first responder
awareness level, first responder operations level, hazmat technicians,
and hazmat specialist. It also offers guidance for the officer corp who
will be in charge of hazardous substance incidents.
3. Decontamination. Decontamination procedures should be tailored to
the specific hazards of the site, and may vary in complexity and number
of steps, depending on the level of hazard and the employee's exposure
to the hazard. Decontamination procedures and PPE decontamination
methods
[[Page 171]]
will vary depending upon the specific substance, since one procedure or
method may not work for all substances. Evaluation of decontamination
methods and procedures should be performed, as necessary, to assure that
employees are not exposed to hazards by re-using PPE. References in
appendix D may be used for guidance in establishing an effective
decontamination program. In addition, the U.S. Coast Guard's Manual,
``Policy Guidance for Response to Hazardous Chemical Releases,'' U.S.
Department of Transportation, Washington, DC (COMDTINST M16465.30) is a
good reference for establishing an effective decontamination program.
4. Emergency response plans. States, along with designated districts
within the states, will be developing or have developed local emergency
response plans. These state and district plans should be utilized in the
emergency response plans called for in the standard. Each employer
should assure that its emergency response plan is compatible with the
local plan. The major reference being used to aid in developing the
state and local district plans is the Hazardous Materials Emergency
Planning Guide, NRT-1. The current Emergency Response Guidebook from the
U.S. Department of Transportation, CMA's CHEMTREC and the Fire Service
Emergency Management Handbook may also be used as resources.
Employers involved with treatment, storage, and disposal facilities
for hazardous waste, which have the required contingency plan called for
by their permit, would not need to duplicate the same planning elements.
Those items of the emergency response plan that are properly addressed
in the contingency plan may be substituted into the emergency response
plan required in 1926.65 or otherwise kept together for employer and
employee use.
5. Personal protective equipment programs. The purpose of personal
protective clothing and equipment (PPE) is to shield or isolate
individuals from the chemical, physical, and biologic hazards that may
be encountered at a hazardous substance site.
As discussed in appendix B, no single combination of protective
equipment and clothing is capable of protecting against all hazards.
Thus PPE should be used in conjunction with other protective methods and
its effectiveness evaluated periodically.
The use of PPE can itself create significant worker hazards, such as
heat stress, physical and psychological stress, and impaired vision,
mobility, and communication. For any given situation, equipment and
clothing should be selected that provide an adequate level of
protection. However, over-protection, as well as under-protection, can
be hazardous and should be avoided where possible.
Two basic objectives of any PPE program should be to protect the
wearer from safety and health hazards, and to prevent injury to the
wearer from incorrect use and/or malfunction of the PPE. To accomplish
these goals, a comprehensive PPE program should include hazard
identification, medical monitoring, environmental surveillance,
selection, use, maintenance, and decontamination of PPE and its
associated training.
The written PPE program should include policy statements,
procedures, and guidelines. Copies should be made available to all
employees, and a reference copy should be made available at the
worksite. Technical data on equipment, maintenance manuals, relevant
regulations, and other essential information should also be collected
and maintained.
6. Incident command system (ICS). Paragraph 1926.65(q)(3)(ii)
requires the implementation of an ICS. The ICS is an organized approach
to effectively control and manage operations at an emergency incident.
The individual in charge of the ICS is the senior official responding to
the incident. The ICS is not much different than the ``command post''
approach used for many years by the fire service. During large complex
fires involving several companies and many pieces of apparatus, a
command post would be established. This enabled one individual to be in
charge of managing the incident, rather than having several officers
from different companies making separate, and sometimes conflicting,
decisions. The individual in charge of the command post would delegate
responsibility for performing various tasks to subordinate officers.
Additionally, all communications were routed through the command post to
reduce the number of radio transmissions and eliminate confusion.
However, strategy, tactics, and all decisions were made by one
individual.
The ICS is a very similar system, except it is implemented for
emergency response to all incidents, both large and small, that involve
hazardous substances.
For a small incident, the individual in charge of the ICS may
perform many tasks of the ICS. There may not be any, or little,
delegation of tasks to subordinates. For example, in response to a small
incident, the individual in charge of the ICS, in addition to normal
command activities, may become the safety officer and may designate only
one employee (with proper equipment) as a back-up to provide assistance
if needed. OSHA does recommend, however, that at least two employees be
designated as back-up personnel since the assistance needed may include
rescue.
To illustrate the operation of the ICS, the following scenario might
develop during a small incident, such as an overturned tank truck with a
small leak of flammable liquid.
The first responding senior officer would implement and take command
of the ICS. That person would size-up the incident and
[[Page 172]]
determine if additional personnel and apparatus were necessary; would
determine what actions to take to control the leak; and, determine the
proper level of personal protective equipment. If additional assistance
is not needed, the individual in charge of the ICS would implement
actions to stop and control the leak using the fewest number of
personnel that can effectively accomplish the tasks. The individual in
charge of the ICS then would designate himself as the safety officer and
two other employees as a back-up in case rescue may become necessary. In
this scenario, decontamination procedures would not be necessary.
A large complex incident may require many employees and difficult,
time-consuming efforts to control. In these situations, the individual
in charge of the ICS will want to delegate different tasks to
subordinates in order to maintain a span of control that will keep the
number of subordinates, that are reporting, to a manageable level.
Delegation of task at large incidents may be by location, where the
incident scene is divided into sectors, and subordinate officers
coordinate activities within the sector that they have been assigned.
Delegation of tasks can also be by function. Some of the functions
that the individual in charge of the ICS may want to delegate at a large
incident are: medical services; evacuation; water supply; resources
(equipment, apparatus); media relations; safety; and, site control
(integrate activities with police for crowd and traffic control). Also
for a large incident, the individual in charge of the ICS will designate
several employees as back-up personnel; and a number of safety officers
to monitor conditions and recommend safety precautions.
Therefore, no matter what size or complexity an incident may be, by
implementing an ICS there will be one individual in charge who makes the
decisions and gives directions; and, all actions, and communications are
coordinated through one central point of command. Such a system should
reduce confusion, improve safety, organize and coordinate actions, and
should facilitate effective management of the incident.
7. Site Safety and Control Plans. The safety and security of
response personnel and others in the area of an emergeny response
incident site should be of primary concern to the incident commander.
The use of a site safety and control plan could greatly assist those in
charge of assuring the safety and health of employees on the site.
A comprehensive site safety and control plan should include the
following: summary analysis of hazards on the site and a risk analysis
of those hazards; site map or sketch; site work zones (clean zone,
transition or decontamination zone, work or hot zone); use of the buddy
system; site communications; command post or command center; standard
operating procedures and safe work practices; medical assistance and
triage area; hazard monitoring plan (air contaminate monitoring, etc.);
decontamination procedures and area; and other relevant areas. This plan
should be a part of the employer's emergency response plan or an
extension of it to the specific site.
8. Medical surveillance programs. Workers handling hazardous
substances may be exposed to toxic chemicals, safety hazards, biologic
hazards, and radiation. Therefore, a medical surveillance program is
essential to assess and monitor workers' health and fitness for
employment in hazardous waste operations and during the course of work;
to provide emergency and other treatment as needed; and to keep accurate
records for future reference.
The Occupational Safety and Health Guidance Manual for Hazardous
Waste Site Activities developed by the National Institute for
Occupational Safety and Health (NIOSH), the Occupational Safety and
Health Administration (OSHA), the U.S. Coast Guard (USCG), and the
Environmental Protection Agency (EPA); October 1985 provides an
excellent example of the types of medical testing that should be done as
part of a medical surveillance program.
9. New Technology and Spill Containment Programs. Where hazardous
substances may be released by spilling from a container that will expose
employees to the hazards of the materials, the employer will need to
implement a program to contain and control the spilled material. Diking
and ditching, as well as use of absorbents like diatomaceous earth, are
traditional techniques which have proven to be effective over the years.
However, in recent years new products have come into the marketplace,
the use of which complement and increase the effectiveness of these
traditional methods. These new products also provide emergency
responders and others with additional tools or agents to use to reduce
the hazards of spilled materials.
These agents can be rapidly applied over a large area and can be
uniformly applied or otherwise can be used to build a small dam, thus
improving the workers' ability to control spilled material. These
application techniques enhance the intimate contact between the agent
and the spilled material allowing for the quickest effect by the agent
or quickest control of the spilled material. Agents are available to
solidify liquid spilled materials, to suppress vapor generation from
spilled materials, and to do both. Some special agents, which when
applied as recommended by the manufacturer, will react in a controlled
manner with the spilled material to neutralize acids or caustics, or
greatly reduce the level of hazard of the spilled material.
[[Page 173]]
There are several modern methods and devices for use by emergency
response personnel or others involved with spill control efforts to
safely apply spill control agents to control spilled material hazards.
These include portable pressurized applicators similar to hand-held
portable fire extinguishing devices, and nozzle and hose systems similar
to portable fire fighting foam systems which allow the operator to apply
the agent without having to come into contact with the spilled material.
The operator is able to apply the agent to the spilled material from a
remote position.
The solidification of liquids provides for rapid containment and
isolation of hazardous substance spills. By directing the agent at run-
off points or at the edges of the spill, the reactant solid will
automatically create a barrier to slow or stop the spread of the
material. Clean-up of hazardous substances is greatly improved when
solidifying agents, acid or caustic neutralizers, or activated carbon
adsorbents are used. Properly applied, these agents can totally solidify
liquid hazardous substances or neutralize or absorb them, which results
in materials which are less hazardous and easier to handle, transport,
and dispose of. The concept of spill treatment, to create less hazardous
substances, will improve the safety and level of protection of employees
working at spill clean-up operations or emergency response operations to
spills of hazardous substances.
The use of vapor suppression agents for volatile hazardous
substances, such as flammable liquids and those substances which present
an inhalation hazard, is important for protecting workers. The rapid and
uniform distribution of the agent over the surface of the spilled
material can provide quick vapor knockdown. There are temporary and
long-term foam-type agents which are effective on vapors and dusts, and
activated carbon adsorption agents which are effective for vapor control
and soaking-up of the liquid. The proper use of hose lines or hand-held
portable pressurized applicators provides good mobility and permits the
worker to deliver the agent from a safe distance without having to step
into the untreated spilled material. Some of these systems can be
recharged in the field to provide coverage of larger spill areas than
the design limits of a single charged applicator unit. Some of the more
effective agents can solidify the liquid flammable hazardous substances
and at the same time elevate the flashpoint above 140 [deg]F so the
resulting substance may be handled as a nonhazardous waste material if
it meets the U.S. Environmental Protection Agency's 40 CFR part 261
requirements (See particularly Sec. 261.21).
All workers performing hazardous substance spill control work are
expected to wear the proper protective clothing and equipment for the
materials present and to follow the employer's established standard
operating procedures for spill control. All involved workers need to be
trained in the established operating procedures; in the use and care of
spill control equipment; and in the associated hazards and control of
such hazards of spill containment work.
These new tools and agents are the things that employers will want
to evaluate as part of their new technology program. The treatment of
spills of hazardous substances or wastes at an emergency incident as
part of the immediate spill containment and control efforts is sometimes
acceptable to EPA and a permit exception is described in 40 CFR
264.1(g)(8) and 265.1(c)(11).
Appendix D to Sec. 1926.65--References
The following references may be consulted for further information on
the subject of this standard:
1. OSHA Instruction DFO CPL 2.70--January 29, 1986, Special Emphasis
Program: Hazardous Waste Sites.
2. OSHA Instruction DFO CPL 2-2.37A--January 29, 1986, Technical
Assistance and Guidelines for Superfund and Other Hazardous Waste Site
Activities.
3. OSHA Instruction DTS CPL 2.74--January 29, 1986, Hazardous Waste
Activity Form, OSHA 175.
4. Hazardous Waste Inspections Reference Manual, U.S. Department of
Labor, Occupational Safety and Health Administration, 1986.
5. Memorandum of Understanding Among the National Institute for
Occupational Safety and Health, the Occupational Safety and Health
Administration, the United States Coast Guard, and the United States
Environmental Protection Agency, Guidance for Worker Protection During
Hazardous Waste Site Investigations and Clean-up and Hazardous Substance
Emergencies. December 18, 1980.
6. National Priorities List, 1st Edition, October 1984; U.S.
Environmental Protection Agency, Revised periodically.
7. The Decontamination of Response Personnel, Field Standard
Operating Procedures (F.S.O.P.) 7; U.S. Environmental Protection Agency,
Office of Emergency and Remedial Response, Hazardous Response Support
Division, December 1984.
8. Preparation of a Site Safety Plan, Field Standard Operating
Procedures (F.S.O.P.) 9; U.S. Environmental Protection Agency, Office of
Emergency and Remedial Response, Hazardous Response Support Division,
April 1985.
9. Standard Operating Safety Guidelines; U.S. Environmental
Protection Agency, Office of Emergency and Remedial Response, Hazardous
Response Support Division, Environmental Response Team; November 1984.
10. Occupational Safety and Health Guidance Manual for Hazardous
Waste Site Activities, National Institute for Occupational Safety
[[Page 174]]
and Health (NIOSH), Occupational Safety and Health Administration
(OSHA), U.S. Coast Guard (USCG), and Environmental Protection Agency
(EPA); October 1985.
11. Protecting Health and Safety at Hazardous Waste Sites: An
Overview, U.S. Environmental Protection Agency, EPA/625/9-85/006;
September 1985.
12. Hazardous Waste Sites and Hazardous Substance Emergencies, NIOSH
Worker Bulletin, U.S. Department of Health and Human Services, Public
Health Service, Centers for Disease Control, National Institute for
Occupational Safety and Health; December 1982.
13. Personal Protective Equipment for Hazardous Materials Incidents:
A Selection Guide; U.S. Department of Health and Human Services, Public
Health Service, Centers for Disease Control, National Institute for
Occupational Safety and Health; October 1984.
14. Fire Service Emergency Management Handbook, International
Association of Fire Chiefs Foundation, 101 East Holly Avenue, Unit 10B,
Sterling, VA 22170, January 1985.
15. Emergency Response Guidebook, U.S Department of Transportation,
Washington, DC, 1987.
16. Report to the Congress on Hazardous Materials Training, Planning
and Preparedness, Federal Emergency Management Agency, Washington, DC,
July 1986.
17. Workbook for Fire Command, Alan V. Brunacini and J. David
Beageron, National Fire Protection Association, Batterymarch Park,
Quincy, MA 02269, 1985.
18. Fire Command, Alan V. Brunacini, National Fire Protection
Association, Batterymarch Park,, Quincy, MA 02269, 1985.
19. Incident Command System, Fire Protection Publications, Oklahoma
State University, Stillwater, OK 74078, 1983.
20. Site Emergency Response Planning, Chemical Manufacturers
Association, Washington, DC 20037, 1986.
21. Hazardous Materials Emergency Planning Guide, NRT-1,
Environmental Protection Agency, Washington, DC, March 1987.
22. Community Teamwork: Working Together to Promote Hazardous
Materials Transportation Safety. U.S. Department of Transportation,
Washington, DC, May 1983.
23. Disaster Planning Guide for Business and Industry, Federal
Emergency Management Agency, Publication No. FEMA 141, August 1987.
Appendix E to Sec. 1926.65--Training Curriculum Guidelines
The following non-mandatory general criteria may be used for
assistance in developing site-specific training curriculum used to meet
the training requirements of 29 CFR 1926.65(e); 29 CFR 1926.65(p)(7),
(p)(8)(iii); and 29 CFR 1926.65(q)(6), (q)(7), and (q)(8). These are
generic guidelines and they are not presented as a complete training
curriculum for any specific employer. Site-specific training programs
must be developed on the basis of a needs assessment of the hazardous
waste site, RCRA/TSDF, or emergency response operation in accordance
with 29 CFR 1926.65.
It is noted that the legal requirements are set forth in the
regulatory text of Sec. 1926.65. The guidance set forth here presents a
highly effective program that in the areas covered would meet or exceed
the regulatory requirements. In addition, other approaches could meet
the regulatory requirements.
Suggested General Criteria
Definitions:
Competent means possessing the skills, knowledge, experience, and
judgment to perform assigned tasks or activities satisfactorily as
determined by the employer.
Demonstration means the showing by actual use of equipment or
procedures.
Hands-on training means training in a simulated work environment
that permits each student to have experience performing tasks, making
decisions, or using equipment appropriate to the job assignment for
which the training is being conducted.
Initial training means training required prior to beginning work.
Lecture means an interactive discourse with a class lead by an
instructor.
Proficient means meeting a stated level of achievement.
Site-specific means individual training directed to the operations
of a specific job site.
Training hours means the number of hours devoted to lecture,
learning activities, small group work sessions, demonstration,
evaluations, or hands-on experience.
Suggested Core Criteria:
1. Training facility. The training facility should have available
sufficient resources, equipment, and site locations to perform didactic
and hands-on training when appropriate. Training facilities should have
sufficient organization, support staff, and services to conduct training
in each of the courses offered.
2. Training Director. Each training program should be under the
direction of a training director who is responsible for the program. The
Training Director should have a minimum of two years of employee
education experience.
3. Instructors. Instructors should be deem competent on the basis of
previous documented experience in their area of instruction, successful
completion of a ``train-the-trainer'' program specific to the topics
they will teach, and an evaluation of instructional competence by the
Training Director.
Instructors should be required to maintain professional competency
by participating in continuing education or professional development
programs or by completing successfully an annual refresher course and
having an annual review by the Training Director.
[[Page 175]]
The annual review by the Training Director should include
observation of an instructor's delivery, a review of those observations
with the trainer, and an analysis of any instructor or class evaluations
completed by the students during the previous year.
4. Course materials. The Training Director should approve all course
materials to be used by the training provider. Course materials should
be reviewed and updated at least annually. Materials and equipment
should be in good working order and maintained properly.
All written and audio-visual materials in training curricula should
be peer reviewed by technically competent outside reviewers or by a
standing advisory committee.
Reviews should possess expertise in the following disciplines were
applicable: occupational health, industrial hygiene and safety,
chemical/environmental engineering, employee education, or emergency
response. One or more of the peer reviewers should be a employee
experienced in the work activities to which the training is directed.
5. Students. The program for accepting students should include:
a. Assurance that the student is or will be involved in work where
chemical exposures are likely and that the student possesses the skills
necessary to perform the work.
b. A policy on the necessary medical clearance.
6. Ratios. Student-instructor ratios should not exceed 30 students
per instructor. Hands-on activity requiring the use of personal
protective equipment should have the following student-instructor
ratios. For Level C or Level D personal protective equipment the ratio
should be 10 students per instructor. For Level A or Level B personal
protective equipment the ratio should be 5 students per instructor.
7. Proficiency assessment. Proficiency should be evaluated and
documented by the use of a written assessment and a skill demonstration
selected and developed by the Training Director and training staff. The
assessment and demonstration should evaluate the knowledge and
individual skills developed in the course of training. The level of
minimum achievement necessary for proficiency shall be specified in
writing by the Training Director.
If a written test is used, there should be a minimum of 50
questions. If a written test is used in combination with a skills
demonstration, a minimum of 25 questions should be used. If a skills
demonstration is used, the tasks chosen and the means to rate successful
completion should be fully documented by the Training Director.
The content of the written test or of the skill demonstration shall
be relevant to the objectives of the course. The written test and skill
demonstration should be updated as necessary to reflect changes in the
curriculum and any update should be approved by the Training Director.
The proficiency assessment methods, regardless of the approach or
combination of approaches used, should be justified, document and
approved by the Training Director.
The proficiency of those taking the additional courses for
supervisors should be evaluated and document by using proficiency
assessment methods acceptable to the Training Director. These
proficiency assessment methods must reflect the additional
responsibilities borne by supervisory personnel in hazardous waste
operations or emergency response.
8. Course certificate. Written documentation should be provided to
each student who satisfactorily completes the training course. The
documentation should include:
a. Student's name.
b. Course title.
c. Course date.
d. Statement that the student has successfully completed the course.
e. Name and address of the training provider.
f. An individual identification number for the certificate.
g. List of the levels of personal protective equipment used by the
student to complete the course.
This documentation may include a certificate and an appropriate
wallet-sized laminated card with a photograph of the student and the
above information. When such course certificate cards are used, the
individual identification number for the training certificate should be
shown on the card.
9. Recordkeeping. Training providers should maintain records listing
the dates courses were presented, the names of the individual course
attenders, the names of those students successfully completing each
course, and the number of training certificates issued to each
successful student. These records should be maintained for a minimum of
five years after the date an individual participated in a training
program offered by the training provider. These records should be
available and provided upon the student's request or as mandated by law.
10. Program quality control. The Training Director should conduct or
direct an annual written audit of the training program. Program
modifications to address deficiencies, if any, should be documented,
approved, and implemented by the training provider. The audit and the
program modification documents should be maintained at the training
facility.
Suggested Program Quality Control Criteria
Factors listed here are suggested criteria for determining the
quality and appropriateness of employee health and safety training for
hazardous waste operations and emergency response.
[[Page 176]]
A. Training Plan.
Adequacy and appropriateness of the training program's curriculum
development, instructor training, distribution of course materials, and
direct student training should be considered, including
1. The duration of training, course content, and course schedules/
agendas;
2. The different training requirements of the various target
populations, as specified in the appropriate generic training
curriculum;
3. The process for the development of curriculum, which includes
appropriate technical input, outside review, evaluation, program
pretesting.
4. The adequate and appropriate inclusion of hands-on,
demonstration, and instruction methods;
5. Adequate monitoring of student safety, progress, and performance
during the training.
B. Program management, Training Director, staff, and consultants.
Adequacy and appropriateness of staff performance and delivering an
effective training program should be considered, including
1. Demonstration of the training director's leadership in assuring
quality of health and safety training.
2. Demonstration of the competency of the staff to meet the demands
of delivering high quality hazardous waste employee health and safety
training.
3. Organization charts establishing clear lines of authority.
4. Clearly defined staff duties including the relationship of the
training staff to the overall program.
5. Evidence that the training organizational structure suits the
needs of the training program.
6. Appropriateness and adequacy of the training methods used by the
instructors.
7. Sufficiency of the time committed by the training director and
staff to the training program.
8. Adequacy of the ratio of training staff to students.
9. Availability and commitment of the training program of adequate
human and equipment resources in the areas of
a. Health effects,
b. Safety,
c. Personal protective equipment (PPE),
d. Operational procedures,
e. Employee protection practices/procedures.
10. Appropriateness of management controls.
11. Adequacy of the organization and appropriate resources assigned
to assure appropriate training.
12. In the case of multiple-site training programs, adequacy of
satellite centers management.
C. Training facilities and resources.
Adequacy and appropriateness of the facilities and resources for
supporting the training program should be considered, including,
1. Space and equipment to conduct the training.
2. Facilities for representative hands-on training.
3. In the case of multiple-site programs, equipment and facilities
at the satellite centers.
4. Adequacy and appropriateness of the quality control and
evaluations program to account for instructor performance.
5. Adequacy and appropriateness of the quality control and
evaluation program to ensure appropriate course evaluation, feedback,
updating, and corrective action.
6. Adequacy and appropriateness of disciplines and expertise being
used within the quality control and evaluation program.
7. Adequacy and appropriateness of the role of student evaluations
to provide feedback for training program improvement.
D. Quality control and evaluation.
Adequacy and appropriateness of quality control and evaluation plans
for training programs should be considered, including:
1. A balanced advisory committee and/or competent outside reviewers
to give overall policy guidance;
2. Clear and adequate definition of the composition and active
programmatic role of the advisory committee or outside reviewers.
3. Adequacy of the minutes or reports of the advisory committee or
outside reviewers' meetings or written communication.
4. Adequacy and appropriateness of the quality control and
evaluations program to account for instructor performance.
5. Adequacy and appropriateness of the quality control and
evaluation program to ensure appropriate course evaluation, feedback,
updating, and corrective action.
6. Adequacy and appropriateness of disciplines and expertise being
used within the quality control and evaluation program.
7. Adequacy and appropriateness of the role of student evaluations
to provide feedback for training program improvement.
E. Students
Adequacy and appropriateness of the program for accepting students
should be considered, including
1. Assurance that the student already possess the necessary skills
for their job, including necessary documentation.
2. Appropriateness of methods the program uses to ensure that
recruits are capable of satisfactorily completing training.
3. Review and compliance with any medical clearance policy.
F. Institutional Environment and Administrative Support. The
adequacy and appropriateness of the institutional environment and
administrative support system for the training program should be
considered, including
[[Page 177]]
1. Adequacy of the institutional commitment to the employee training
program.
2. Adequacy and appropriateness of the administrative structure and
administrative support.
G. Summary of Evaluation Questions Key questions for evaluating the
quality and appropriateness of an overall training program should
include the following:
1. Are the program objectives clearly stated?
2. Is the program accomplishing its objectives?
3. Are appropriate facilities and staff available?
4. Is there an appropriate mix of classroom, demonstration, and
hands-on training?
5. Is the program providing quality employee health and safety
training that fully meets the intent of regulatory requirements?
6. What are the program's main strengths?
7. What are the program's main weaknesses?
8. What is recommended to improve the program?
9. Are instructors instructing according to their training outlines?
10. Is the evaluation tool current and appropriate for the program
content?
11. Is the course material current and relevant to the target group?
Suggested Training Curriculum Guidelines
The following training curriculum guidelines are for those
operations specifically identified in 29 CFR 1926.65 as requiring
training. Issues such as qualifications of instructors, training
certification, and similar criteria appropriate to all categories of
operations addressed in 1926.65 have been covered in the preceding
section and are not re-addressed in each of the generic guidelines.
Basic core requirements for training programs that are addressed include
1. General Hazardous Waste Operations
2. RCRA operations--Treatment, storage, and disposal facilities.
3. Emergency Response.
A. General Hazardous Waste Operations and Site-specific Training 1.
Off-site training.
Minimum training course content for hazardous waste operations,
required by 29 CFR 1926.65(e), should include the following topics or
procedures:
a. Regulatory knowledge.
(1) A review of 29 CFR 1926.65 and the core elements of an
occupational safety and health program.
(2) The content of a medical surveillance program as outlined in 29
CFR 1926.65(f).
(3) The content of an effective site safety and health plan
consistent with the requirements of 29 CFR 1926.65(b)(4)(ii).
(4) Emergency response plan and procedures as outlined in 29 CFR
1910.38 and 29 CFR 1926.65(l).
(5) Adequate illumination.
(6) Sanitation recommendation and equipment.
(7) Review and explanation of OSHA's hazard-communication standard
(29 CFR 1910.1200) and lock-out-tag-out standard (29 CFR 1910.147).
(8) Review of other applicable standards including but not limited
to those in the construction standards (29 CFR part 1926).
(9) Rights and responsibilities of employers and employees under
applicable OSHA and EPA laws.
b. Technical knowledge. (1) Type of potential exposures to chemical,
biological, and radiological hazards; types of human responses to these
hazards and recognition of those responses; principles of toxicology and
information about acute and chronic hazards; health and safety
considerations of new technology.
(2) Fundamentals of chemical hazards including but not limited to
vapor pressure, boiling points, flash points, ph, other physical and
chemical properties.
(3) Fire and explosion hazards of chemicals.
(4) General safety hazards such as but not limited to electrical
hazards, powered equipment hazards, motor vehicle hazards, walking-
working surface hazards, excavation hazards, and hazards associated with
working in hot and cold temperature extremes.
(5) Review and knowledge of confined space entry procedures in 29
CFR 1910.146.
(6) Work practices to minimize employee risk from site hazards.
(7) Safe use of engineering controls, equipment, and any new
relevant safety technology or safety procedures.
(8) Review and demonstration of competency with air sampling and
monitoring equipment that may be used in a site monitoring program.
(9) Container sampling procedures and safeguarding; general drum and
container handling procedures including special requirement for
laboratory waste packs, shock-sensitive wastes, and radioactive wastes.
(10) The elements of a spill control program.
(11) Proper use and limitations of material handling equipment.
(12) Procedures for safe and healthful preparation of containers for
shipping and transport.
(13) Methods of communication including those used while wearing
respiratory protection.
c. Technical skills. (1) Selection, use maintenance, and limitations
of personal protective equipment including the components and procedures
for carrying out a respirator program to comply with 29 CFR 1910.134.
(2) Instruction in decontamination programs including personnel,
equipment, and hardware; hands-on training including level
[[Page 178]]
A, B, and C ensembles and appropriate decontamination lines; field
activities including the donning and doffing of protective equipment to
a level commensurate with the employee's anticipated job function and
responsibility and to the degree required by potential hazards.
(3) Sources for additional hazard information; exercises using
relevant manuals and hazard coding systems.
d. Additional suggested items. (1) A laminated, dated card or
certificate with photo, denoting limitations and level of protection for
which the employee is trained should be issued to those students
successfully completing a course.
(2) Attendance should be required at all training modules, with
successful completion of exercises and a final written or oral
examination with at least 50 questions.
(3) A minimum of one-third of the program should be devoted to
hands-on exercises.
(4) A curriculum should be established for the 8-hour refresher
training required by 29 CFR 1926.65(e)(8), with delivery of such courses
directed toward those areas of previous training that need improvement
or reemphasis.
(5) A curriculum should be established for the required 8-hour
training for supervisors. Demonstrated competency in the skills and
knowledge provided in a 40-hour course should be a prerequisite for
supervisor training.
2. Refresher training. The 8-hour annual refresher training required
in 29 CFR 1926.65(e)(8) should be conducted by qualified training
providers. Refresher training should include at a minimum the following
topics and procedures:
(a) Review of and retraining on relevant topics covered in the 40-
hour program, as appropriate, using reports by the students on their
work experiences.
(b) Update on developments with respect to material covered in the
40-hour course.
(c) Review of changes to pertinent provisions of EPA or OSHA
standards or laws.
(d) Introduction of additional subject areas as appropriate.
(e) Hands-on review of new or altered PPE or decontamination
equipment or procedures. Review of new developments in personal
protective equipment.
(f) Review of newly developed air and contaminant monitoring
equipment.
3. On-site training. a. The employer should provide employees
engaged in hazardous waste site activities with information and training
prior to initial assignment into their work area, as follows:
(1) The requirements of the hazard communication program including
the location and availability of the written program, required lists of
hazardous chemicals, and safety data sheets.
(2) Activities and locations in their work area where hazardous
substance may be present.
(3) Methods and observations that may be used to detect the present
or release of a hazardous chemical in the work area (such as monitoring
conducted by the employer, continuous monitoring devices, visual
appearances, or other evidence (sight, sound or smell) of hazardous
chemicals being released, and applicable alarms from monitoring devices
that record chemical releases.
(4) The physical and health hazards of substances known or
potentially present in the work area.
(5) The measures employees can take to help protect themselves from
work-site hazards, including specific procedures the employer has
implemented.
(6) An explanation of the labeling system and safety data sheets and
how employees can obtain and use appropriate hazard information.
(7) The elements of the confined space program including special
PPE, permits, monitoring requirements, communication procedures,
emergency response, and applicable lock-out procedures.
b. The employer should provide hazardous waste employees information
and training and should provide a review and access to the site safety
and plan as follows:
(1) Names of personnel and alternate responsible for site safety and
health.
(2) Safety and health hazards present on the site.
(3) Selection, use, maintenance, and limitations of personal
protective equipment specific to the site.
(4) Work practices by which the employee can minimize risks from
hazards.
(5) Safe use of engineering controls and equipment available on
site.
(6) Safe decontamination procedures established to minimize employee
contact with hazardous substances, including:
(A) Employee decontamination,
(B) Clothing decontamination, and
(C) Equipment decontamination.
(7) Elements of the site emergency response plan, including:
(A) Pre-emergency planning.
(B) Personnel roles and lines of authority and communication.
(C) Emergency recognition and prevention.
(D) Safe distances and places of refuge.
(E) Site security and control.
(F) Evacuation routes and procedures.
(G) Decontamination procedures not covered by the site safety and
health plan.
(H) Emergency medical treatment and first aid.
(I) Emergency equipment and procedures for handling emergency
incidents.
c. The employer should provide hazardous waste employees information
and training
[[Page 179]]
on personal protective equipment used at the site, such as the
following:
(1) PPE to be used based upon known or anticipated site hazards.
(2) PPE limitations of materials and construction; limitations
during temperature extremes, heat stress, and other appropriate medical
considerations; use and limitations of respirator equipment as well as
documentation procedures as outlined in 29 CFR 1910.134.
(3) PPE inspection procedures prior to, during, and after use.
(4) PPE donning and doffing procedures.
(5) PPE decontamination and disposal procedures.
(6) PPE maintenance and storage.
(7) Task duration as related to PPE limitations.
d. The employer should instruct the employee about the site medical
surveillance program relative to the particular site, including
(1) Specific medical surveillance programs that have been adapted
for the site.
(2) Specific signs and symptoms related to exposure to hazardous
materials on the site.
(3) The frequency and extent of periodic medical examinations that
will be used on the site.
(4) Maintenance and availability of records.
(5) Personnel to be contacted and procedures to be followed when
signs and symptoms of exposures are recognized.
e. The employees will review and discuss the site safety plan as
part of the training program. The location of the site safety plan and
all written programs should be discussed with employees including a
discussion of the mechanisms for access, review, and references
described.
B. RCRA Operations Training for Treatment, Storage and Disposal
Facilities.
1. As a minimum, the training course required in 29 CFR 1926.65 (p)
should include the following topics:
(a) Review of the applicable paragraphs of 29 CFR 1926.65 and the
elements of the employer's occupational safety and health plan.
(b) Review of relevant hazards such as, but not limited to,
chemical, biological, and radiological exposures; fire and explosion
hazards; thermal extremes; and physical hazards.
(c) General safety hazards including those associated with
electrical hazards, powered equipment hazards, lock-out-tag-out
procedures, motor vehicle hazards and walking-working surface hazards.
(d) Confined-space hazards and procedures.
(e) Work practices to minimize employee risk from workplace hazards.
(f) Emergency response plan and procedures including first aid
meeting the requirements of paragraph (p)(8).
(g) A review of procedures to minimize exposure to hazardous waste
and various type of waste streams, including the materials handling
program and spill containment program.
(h) A review of hazard communication programs meeting the
requirements of 29 CFR 1910.1200.
(i) A review of medical surveillance programs meeting the
requirements of 29 CFR 1926.65(p)(3) including the recognition of signs
and symptoms of overexposure to hazardous substance including known
synergistic interactions.
(j) A review of decontamination programs and procedures meeting the
requirements of 29 CFR 1926.65(p)(4).
(k) A review of an employer's requirements to implement a training
program and its elements.
(l) A review of the criteria and programs for proper selection and
use of personal protective equipment, including respirators.
(m) A review of the applicable appendices to 29 CFR 1926.65.
(n) Principles of toxicology and biological monitoring as they
pertain to occupational health.
(o) Rights and responsibilities of employees and employers under
applicable OSHA and EPA laws.
(p) Hands-on exercises and demonstrations of competency with
equipment to illustrate the basic equipment principles that may be used
during the performance of work duties, including the donning and doffing
of PPE.
(q) Sources of reference, efficient use of relevant manuals, and
knowledge of hazard coding systems to include information contained in
hazardous waste manifests.
(r) At least 8 hours of hands-on training.
(s) Training in the job skills required for an employee's job
function and responsibility before they are permitted to participate in
or supervise field activities.
2. The individual employer should provide hazardous waste employees
with information and training prior to an employee's initial assignment
into a work area. The training and information should cover the
following topics:
(a) The Emergency response plan and procedures including first aid.
(b) A review of the employer's hazardous waste handling procedures
including the materials handling program and elements of the spill
containment program, location of spill response kits or equipment, and
the names of those trained to respond to releases.
(c) The hazardous communication program meeting the requirements of
29 CFR 1910.1200.
(d) A review of the employer's medical surveillance program
including the recognition of signs and symptoms of exposure to relevant
hazardous substance including known synergistic interactions.
[[Page 180]]
(e) A review of the employer's decontamination program and
procedures.
(f) An review of the employer's training program and the parties
responsible for that program.
(g) A review of the employer's personal protective equipment program
including the proper selection and use of PPE based upon specific site
hazards.
(h) All relevant site-specific procedures addressing potential
safety and health hazards. This may include, as appropriate, biological
and radiological exposures, fire and explosion hazards, thermal hazards,
and physical hazards such as electrical hazards, powered equipment
hazards, lock-out-tag-out hazards, motor vehicle hazards, and walking-
working surface hazards.
(i) Safe use engineering controls and equipment on site.
(j) Names of personnel and alternates responsible for safety and
health.
C. Emergency response training.
Federal OSHA standards in 29 CFR 1926.65(q) are directed toward
private sector emergency responders. Therefore, the guidelines provided
in this portion of the appendix are directed toward that employee
population. However, they also impact indirectly through State OSHA or
USEPA regulations some public sector emergency responders. Therefore,
the guidelines provided in this portion of the appendix may be applied
to both employee populations.
States with OSHA state plans must cover their employees with
regulations at least as effective as the Federal OSHA standards. Public
employees in states without approved state OSHA programs covering
hazardous waste operations and emergency response are covered by the
U.S. EPA under 40 CFR 311, a regulation virtually identical to Sec.
1926.65.
Since this is a non-mandatory appendix and therefore not an
enforceable standard, OSHA recommends that those employers, employees or
volunteers in public sector emergency response organizations outside
Federal OSHA jurisdiction consider the following criteria in developing
their own training programs. A unified approach to training at the
community level between emergency response organizations covered by
Federal OSHA and those not covered directly by Federal OSHA can help
ensure an effective community response to the release or potential
release of hazardous substances in the community.
a. General considerations.
Emergency response organizations are required to consider the topics
listed in Sec. 1926.65(q)(6). Emergency response organizations may use
some or all of the following topics to supplement those mandatory topics
when developing their response training programs. Many of the topics
would require an interaction between the response provider and the
individuals responsible for the site where the response would be
expected.
(1) Hazard recognition, including:
(A) Nature of hazardous substances present,
(B) Practical applications of hazard recognition, including
presentations on biology, chemistry, and physics.
(2) Principles of toxicology, biological monitoring, and risk
assessment.
(3) Safe work practices and general site safety.
(4) Engineering controls and hazardous waste operations.
(5) Site safety plans and standard operating procedures.
(6) Decontamination procedures and practices.
(7) Emergency procedures, first aid, and self-rescue.
(8) Safe use of field equipment.
(9) Storage, handling, use and transportation of hazardous
substances.
(10) Use, care, and limitations of personal protective equipment.
(11) Safe sampling techniques.
(12) Rights and responsibilities of employees under OSHA and other
related laws concerning right-to-know, safety and health, compensations
and liability.
(13) Medical monitoring requirements.
(14) Community relations.
b. Suggested criteria for specific courses.
(1) First responder awareness level.
(A) Review of and demonstration of competency in performing the
applicable skills of 29 CFR 1926.65(q).
(B) Hands-on experience with the U.S. Department of Transportation's
Emergency Response Guidebook (ERG) and familiarization with OSHA
standard 29 CFR 1926.60.
(C) Review of the principles and practices for analyzing an incident
to determine both the hazardous substances present and the basic hazard
and response information for each hazardous substance present.
(D) Review of procedures for implementing actions consistent with
the local emergency response plan, the organization's standard operating
procedures, and the current edition of DOT's ERG including emergency
notification procedures and follow-up communications.
(E) Review of the expected hazards including fire and explosions
hazards, confined space hazards, electrical hazards, powered equipment
hazards, motor vehicle hazards, and walking-working surface hazards.
(F) Awareness and knowledge of the competencies for the First
Responder at the Awareness Level covered in the National Fire Protection
Association's Standard No. 472, Professional Competence of Responders to
Hazardous Materials Incidents.
(2) First responder operations level.
[[Page 181]]
(A) Review of and demonstration of competency in performing the
applicable skills of 29 CFR 1926.65(q).
(B) Hands-on experience with the U.S. Department of Transportation's
Emergency Response Guidebook (ERG), manufacturer safety data sheets,
CHEMTREC/CANUTEC, shipper or manufacturer contacts and other relevant
sources of information addressing hazardous substance releases.
Familiarization with OSHA standard 29 CFR 1926.60.
(C) Review of the principles and practices for analyzing an incident
to determine the hazardous substances present, the likely behavior of
the hazardous substance and its container, the types of hazardous
substance transportation containers and vehicles, the types and
selection of the appropriate defensive strategy for containing the
release.
(D) Review of procedures for implementing continuing response
actions consistent with the local emergency response plan, the
organization's standard operating procedures, and the current edition of
DOT's ERG including extended emergency notification procedures and
follow-up communications.
(E) Review of the principles and practice for proper selection and
use of personal protective equipment.
(F) Review of the principles and practice of personnel and equipment
decontamination.
(G) Review of the expected hazards including fire and explosions
hazards, confined space hazards, electrical hazards, powered equipment
hazards, motor vehicle hazards, and walking-working surface hazards.
(H) Awareness and knowledge of the competencies for the First
Responder at the Operations Level covered in the National Fire
Protection Association's Standard No. 472, Professional Competence of
Responders to Hazardous Materials Incidents.
(3) Hazardous materials technician.
(A) Review of and demonstration of competency in performing the
applicable skills of 29 CFR 1926.65(q).
(B) Hands-on experience with written and electronic information
relative to response decision making including but not limited to the
U.S. Department of Transportation's Emergency Response Guidebook (ERG),
manufacturer safety data sheets, CHEMTREC/CANUTEC, shipper or
manufacturer contacts, computer data bases and response models, and
other relevant sources of information addressing hazardous substance
releases. Familiarization with 29 CFR 1926.60.
(C) Review of the principles and practices for analyzing an incident
to determine the hazardous substances present, their physical and
chemical properties, the likely behavior of the hazardous substance and
its container, the types of hazardous substance transportation
containers and vehicles involved in the release, the appropriate
strategy for approaching release sites and containing the release.
(D) Review of procedures for implementing continuing response
actions consistent with the local emergency response plan, the
organization's standard operating procedures, and the current edition of
DOT's ERG including extended emergency notification procedures and
follow-up communications.
(E) Review of the principles and practice for proper selection and
use of personal protective equipment.
(F) Review of the principles and practices of establishing exposure
zones, proper decontamination and medical surveillance stations and
procedures.
(G) Review of the expected hazards including fire and explosions
hazards, confined space hazards, electrical hazards, powered equipment
hazards, motor vehicle hazards, and walking-working surface hazards.
(H) Awareness and knowledge of the competencies for the Hazardous
Materials Technician covered in the National Fire Protection
Association's Standard No. 472, Professional Competence of Responders to
Hazardous Materials Incidents.
(4) Hazardous materials specialist.
(A) Review of and demonstration of competency in performing the
applicable skills of 29 CFR 1926.65(q).
(B) Hands-on experience with retrieval and use of written and
electronic information relative to response decision making including
but not limited to the U.S. Department of Transportation's Emergency
Response Guidebook (ERG), manufacturer safety data sheets, CHEMTREC/
CANUTEC, shipper or manufacturer contacts, computer data bases and
response models, and other relevant sources of information addressing
hazardous substance releases. Familiarization with 29 CFR 1926.60.
(C) Review of the principles and practices for analyzing an incident
to determine the hazardous substances present, their physical and
chemical properties, and the likely behavior of the hazardous substance
and its container, vessel, or vehicle.
(D) Review of the principles and practices for identification of the
types of hazardous substance transportation containers, vessels and
vehicles involved in the release; selecting and using the various types
of equipment available for plugging or patching transportation
containers, vessels or vehicles; organizing and directing the use of
multiple teams of hazardous material technicians and selecting the
appropriate strategy for approaching release sites and containing or
stopping the release.
(E) Review of procedures for implementing continuing response
actions consistent with the local emergency response plan, the
organization's standard operating procedures, including knowledge of the
available public and private response resources, establishment of an
incident command post, direction of hazardous material technician teams,
and
[[Page 182]]
extended emergency notification procedures and follow-up communications.
(F) Review of the principles and practice for proper selection and
use of personal protective equipment.
(G) Review of the principles and practices of establishing exposure
zones and proper decontamination, monitoring and medical surveillance
stations and procedures.
(H) Review of the expected hazards including fire and explosions
hazards, confined space hazards, electrical hazards, powered equipment
hazards, motor vehicle hazards, and walking-working surface hazards.
(I) Awareness and knowledge of the competencies for the Off-site
Specialist Employee covered in the National Fire Protection
Association's Standard No. 472, Professional Competence of Responders to
Hazardous Materials Incidents.
(5) Incident commander. The incident commander is the individual
who, at any one time, is responsible for and in control of the response
effort. This individual is the person responsible for the direction and
coordination of the response effort. An incident commander's position
should be occupied by the most senior, appropriately trained individual
present at the response site. Yet, as necessary and appropriate by the
level of response provided, the position may be occupied by many
individuals during a particular response as the need for greater
authority, responsibility, or training increases. It is possible for the
first responder at the awareness level to assume the duties of incident
commander until a more senior and appropriately trained individual
arrives at the response site.
Therefore, any emergency responder expected to perform as an
incident commander should be trained to fulfill the obligations of the
position at the level of response they will be providing including the
following:
(A) Ability to analyze a hazardous substance incident to determine
the magnitude of the response problem.
(B) Ability to plan and implement an appropriate response plan
within the capabilities of available personnel and equipment.
(C) Ability to implement a response to favorably change the outcome
of the incident in a manner consistent with the local emergency response
plan and the organization's standard operating procedures.
(D) Ability to evaluate the progress of the emergency response to
ensure that the response objectives are being met safely, effectively,
and efficiently.
(E) Ability to adjust the response plan to the conditions of the
response and to notify higher levels of response when required by the
changes to the response plan.
[58 FR 35129, June 30, 1993, as amended at 59 FR 43275, Aug. 22, 1994:
61 FR 5510, Feb. 13, 1996; 77 FR 17890, Mar. 26, 2012; 78 FR 9315, Feb.
8, 2013]
Sec. 1926.66 Criteria for design and construction of spray booths.
(a) Definitions applicable to this section--(1) Aerated solid
powders. Aerated powders shall mean any powdered material used as a
coating material which shall be fluidized within a container by passing
air uniformly from below. It is common practice to fluidize such
materials to form a fluidized powder bed and then dip the part to be
coated into the bed in a manner similar to that used in liquid dipping.
Such beds are also used as sources for powder spray operations.
(2) Spraying area. Any area in which dangerous quantities of
flammable vapors or mists, or combustible residues, dusts, or deposits
are present due to the operation of spraying processes.
(3) Spray booth. A power-ventilated structure provided to enclose or
accommodate a spraying operation to confine and limit the escape of
spray, vapor, and residue, and to safely conduct or direct them to an
exhaust system.
(4) Waterwash spray booth. A spray booth equipped with a water
washing system designed to minimize dusts or residues entering exhaust
ducts and to permit the recovery of overspray finishing material.
(5) Dry spray booth. A spray booth not equipped with a water washing
system as described in paragraph (a)(4) of this section. A dry spray
booth may be equipped with
(i) Distribution or baffle plates to promote an even flow of air
through the booth or cause the deposit of overspray before it enters the
exhaust duct; or
(ii) Overspray dry filters to minimize dusts; or
(iii) Overspray dry filters to minimize dusts or residues entering
exhaust ducts; or
(iv) Overspray dry filter rolls designed to minimize dusts or
residues entering exhaust ducts; or
(v) Where dry powders are being sprayed, with powder collection
systems so arranged in the exhaust to capture oversprayed material.
[[Page 183]]
(6) Fluidized bed. A container holding powder coating material which
is aerated from below so as to form an air-supported expanded cloud of
such material through which the preheated object to be coated is
immersed and transported.
(7) Electrostatic fluidized bed. A container holding powder coating
material which is aerated from below so as to form an air-supported
expanded cloud of such material which is electrically charged with a
charge opposite to the charge of the object to be coated; such object is
transported, through the container immediately above the charged and
aerated materials in order to be coated.
(8) Approved. Shall mean approved and listed by a nationally
recognized testing laboratory.
(9) Listed. See ``approved'' in paragraph (a)(8) of this section.
(b) Spray booths--(1) Construction. Spray booths shall be
substantially constructed of steel, securely and rigidly supported, or
of concrete or masonry except that aluminum or other substantial
noncombustible material may be used for intermittent or low volume
spraying. Spray booths shall be designed to sweep air currents toward
the exhaust outlet.
(2) Interiors. The interior surfaces of spray booths shall be smooth
and continuous without edges and otherwise designed to prevent pocketing
of residues and facilitate cleaning and washing without injury.
(3) Floors. The floor surface of a spray booth and operator's
working area, if combustible, shall be covered with noncombustible
material of such character as to facilitate the safe cleaning and
removal of residues.
(4) Distribution or baffle plates. Distribution or baffle plates, if
installed to promote an even flow of air through the booth or cause the
deposit of overspray before it enters the exhaust duct, shall be of
noncombustible material and readily removable or accessible on both
sides for cleaning. Such plates shall not be located in exhaust ducts.
(5) Dry type overspray collectors--(exhaust air filters). In
conventional dry type spray booths, overspray dry filters or filter
rolls, if installed, shall conform to the following:
(i) The spraying operations except electrostatic spraying operations
shall be so designed, installed and maintained that the average air
velocity over the open face of the booth (or booth cross section during
spraying operations) shall be not less than 100 linear feet per minute.
Electrostatic spraying operations may be conducted with an air velocity
over the open face of the booth of not less than 60 linear feet per
minute, or more, depending on the volume of the finishing material being
applied and its flammability and explosion characteristics. Visible
gauges or audible alarm or pressure activated devices shall be installed
to indicate or insure that the required air velocity is maintained.
Filter rolls shall be inspected to insure proper replacement of filter
media.
(ii) All discarded filter pads and filter rolls shall be immediately
removed to a safe, well-detached location or placed in a water-filled
metal container and disposed of at the close of the day's operation
unless maintained completely in water.
(iii) The location of filters in a spray booth shall be so as to not
reduce the effective booth enclosure of the articles being sprayed.
(iv) Space within the spray booth on the downstream and upstream
sides of filters shall be protected with approved automatic sprinklers.
(v) Filters or filter rolls shall not be used when applying a spray
material known to be highly susceptible to spontaneous heating and
ignition.
(vi) Clean filters or filter rolls shall be noncombustible or of a
type having a combustibility not in excess of class 2 filters as listed
by Underwriters' Laboratories, Inc. Filters and filter rolls shall not
be alternately used for different types of coating materials, where the
combination of materials may be conducive to spontaneous ignition.
(6) Frontal area. Each spray booth having a frontal area larger than
9 square feet shall have a metal deflector or curtain not less than 2
\1/2\ inches (5.35 cm) deep installed at the upper outer edge of the
booth over the opening.
[[Page 184]]
(7) Conveyors. Where conveyors are arranged to carry work into or
out of spray booths, the openings therefor shall be as small as
practical.
(8) Separation of operations. Each spray booth shall be separated
from other operations by not less than 3 feet (0.912 m), or by a greater
distance, or by such partition or wall as to reduce the danger from
juxtaposition of hazardous operations. See also paragraph (c)(1) of this
section.
(9) Cleaning. Spray booths shall be so installed that all portions
are readily accessible for cleaning. A clear space of not less than 3
feet (0.912 m) on all sides shall be kept free from storage or
combustible construction.
(10) Illumination. When spraying areas are illuminated through glass
panels or other transparent materials, only fixed lighting units shall
be used as a source of illumination. Panels shall effectively isolate
the spraying area from the area in which the lighting unit is located,
and shall be of a noncombustible material of such a nature or so
protected that breakage will be unlikely. Panels shall be so arranged
that normal accumulations of residue on the exposed surface of the panel
will not be raised to a dangerous temperature by radiation or conduction
from the source of illumination.
(c) Electrical and other sources of ignition--(1) Conformance. All
electrical equipment, open flames and other sources of ignition shall
conform to the requirements of this paragraph, except as follows:
(i) Electrostatic apparatus shall conform to the requirements of
paragraphs (e) and (f) of this section;
(ii) Drying, curing, and fusion apparatus shall conform to the
requirements of paragraph (g) of this section;
(iii) [Reserved]
(iv) Powder coating equipment shall conform to the requirements of
paragraph (c)(1) of this section.
(2) Minimum separation. There shall be no open flame or spark
producing equipment in any spraying area nor within 20 feet (6.08 m)
thereof, unless separated by a partition.
(3) Hot surfaces. Space-heating appliances, steampipes, or hot
surfaces shall not be located in a spraying area where deposits of
combustible residues may readily accumulate.
(4) Wiring conformance. Electrical wiring and equipment shall
conform to the provisions of this paragraph and shall otherwise be in
accordance with subpart S of this part.
(5) Combustible residues, areas. Unless specifically approved for
locations containing both deposits of readily ignitable residue and
explosive vapors, there shall be no electrical equipment in any spraying
area, whereon deposits of combustible residues may readily accumulate,
except wiring in rigid conduit or in boxes or fittings containing no
taps, splices, or terminal connections.
(6) Wiring type approved. Electrical wiring and equipment not
subject to deposits of combustible residues but located in a spraying
area as herein defined shall be of explosion-proof type approved for
Class I, group D locations and shall otherwise conform to the provisions
of subpart S of this part, for Class I, Division 1, Hazardous Locations.
Electrical wiring, motors, and other equipment outside of but within 20
feet (6.08 m) of any spraying area, and not separated therefrom by
partitions, shall not produce sparks under normal operating conditions
and shall otherwise conform to the provisions of subpart S of this part
for Class I, Division 2 Hazardous Locations.
(7) Lamps. Electric lamps outside of, but within 20 feet (6.08 m) of
any spraying area, and not separated therefrom by a partition, shall be
totally enclosed to prevent the falling of hot particles and shall be
protected from mechanical injury by suitable guards or by location.
(8) Portable lamps. Portable electric lamps shall not be used in any
spraying area during spraying operations. Portable electric lamps, if
used during cleaning or repairing operations, shall be of the type
approved for hazardous Class I locations.
(9) Grounding. (i) All metal parts of spray booths, exhaust ducts,
and piping systems conveying flammable or combustible liquids or aerated
solids shall be properly electrically grounded in an effective and
permanent manner.
(d) Ventilation--(1) Conformance. Ventilating and exhaust systems
shall be in accordance with the Standard for
[[Page 185]]
Blower and Exhaust Systems for Vapor Removal, NFPA No. 91-1961, where
applicable and shall also conform to the provisions of this section.
(2) General. All spraying areas shall be provided with mechanical
ventilation adequate to remove flammable vapors, mists, or powders to a
safe location and to confine and control combustible residues so that
life is not endangered. Mechanical ventilation shall be kept in
operation at all times while spraying operations are being conducted and
for a sufficient time thereafter to allow vapors from drying coated
articles and drying finishing material residue to be exhausted.
(3) Independent exhaust. Each spray booth shall have an independent
exhaust duct system discharging to the exterior of the building, except
that multiple cabinet spray booths in which identical spray finishing
material is used with a combined frontal area of not more than 18 square
feet may have a common exhaust. If more than one fan serves one booth,
all fans shall be so interconnected that one fan cannot operate without
all fans being operated.
(4) Fan-rotating element. The fan-rotating element shall be
nonferrous or nonsparking or the casing shall consist of or be lined
with such material. There shall be ample clearance between the fan-
rotating element and the fan casing to avoid a fire by friction,
necessary allowance being made for ordinary expansion and loading to
prevent contact between moving parts and the duct or fan housing. Fan
blades shall be mounted on a shaft sufficiently heavy to maintain
perfect alignment even when the blades of the fan are heavily loaded,
the shaft preferably to have bearings outside the duct and booth. All
bearings shall be of the self-lubricating type, or lubricated from the
outside duct.
(5) Electric motors. Electric motors driving exhaust fans shall not
be placed inside booths or ducts. See also paragraph (c) of this
section.
(6) Belts. Belts shall not enter the duct or booth unless the belt
and pulley within the duct or booth are thoroughly enclosed.
(7) Exhaust ducts. Exhaust ducts shall be constructed of steel and
shall be substantially supported. Exhaust ducts without dampers are
preferred; however, if dampers are installed, they shall be maintained
so that they will be in a full open position at all times the
ventilating system is in operation.
(i) Exhaust ducts shall be protected against mechanical damage and
have a clearance from unprotected combustible construction or other
combustible material of not less than 18 inches (45.72 cm).
(ii) If combustible construction is provided with the following
protection applied to all surfaces within 18 inches (45.72 cm),
clearances may be reduced to the distances indicated:
(a) 28-gage sheet metal on 1/4-inch 12 inches (30.48 cm).
asbestos mill board.
(b) 28-gage sheet metal on 1/8-inch 9 inches (22.86 cm).
asbestos mill board spaced out 1 inch
(2.54 cm) on noncombustible spacers.
(c) 22-gage sheet metal on 1-inch rockwool 3 inches (7.62 cm).
batts reinforced with wire mesh or the
equivalent.
(d) Where ducts are protected with an
approved automatic sprinkler system,
properly maintained, the clearance
required in paragraph (d)(7)(i) of this
section may be reduced to 6 inches (15.24
cm).
(8) Discharge clearance. Unless the spray booth exhaust duct
terminal is from a water-wash spray booth, the terminal discharge point
shall be not less than 6 feet from any combustible exterior wall or roof
nor discharge in the direction of any combustible construction or
unprotected opening in any noncombustible exterior wall within 25 feet
(7.6 m).
(9) Air exhaust. Air exhaust from spray operations shall not be
directed so that it will contaminate makeup air being introduced into
the spraying area or other ventilating intakes, nor directed so as to
create a nuisance. Air exhausted from spray operations shall not be
recirculated.
(10) Access doors. When necessary to facilitate cleaning, exhaust
ducts shall be provided with an ample number of access doors.
(11) Room intakes. Air intake openings to rooms containing spray
finishing operations shall be adequate for the efficient operation of
exhaust fans and shall be so located as to minimize the creation of dead
air pockets.
(12) Drying spaces. Freshly sprayed articles shall be dried only in
spaces provided with adequate ventilation to
[[Page 186]]
prevent the formation of explosive vapors. In the event adequate and
reliable ventilation is not provided such drying spaces shall be
considered a spraying area.
(e) Fixed electrostatic apparatus--(1) Conformance. Where
installation and use of electrostatic spraying equipment is used, such
installation and use shall conform to all other paragraphs of this
section, and shall also conform to the requirements of this paragraph.
(2) Type approval. Electrostatic apparatus and devices used in
connection with coating operations shall be of approved types.
(3) Location. Transformers, power packs, control apparatus, and all
other electrical portions of the equipment, with the exception of high-
voltage grids, electrodes, and electrostatic atomizing heads and their
connections, shall be located outside of the spraying area, or shall
otherwise conform to the requirements of paragraph (c) of this section.
(4) Support. Electrodes and electrostatic atomizing heads shall be
adequately supported in permanent locations and shall be effectively
insulated from the ground. Electrodes and electrostatic atomizing heads
which are permanently attached to their bases, supports, or
reciprocators, shall be deemed to comply with this section. Insulators
shall be nonporous and noncombustible.
(5) Insulators, grounding. High-voltage leads to electrodes shall be
properly insulated and protected from mechanical injury or exposure to
destructive chemicals. Electrostatic atomizing heads shall be
effectively and permanently supported on suitable insulators and shall
be effectively guarded against accidental contact or grounding. An
automatic means shall be provided for grounding the electrode system
when it is electrically deenergized for any reason. All insulators shall
be kept clean and dry.
(6) Safe distance. A safe distance shall be maintained between goods
being painted and electrodes or electrostatic atomizing heads or
conductors of at least twice the sparking distance. A suitable sign
indicating this safe distance shall be conspicuously posted near the
assembly.
(7) Conveyors required. Goods being painted using this process are
to be supported on conveyors. The conveyors shall be so arranged as to
maintain safe distances between the goods and the electrodes or
electrostatic atomizing heads at all times. Any irregularly shaped or
other goods subject to possible swinging or movement shall be rigidly
supported to prevent such swinging or movement which would reduce the
clearance to less than that specified in paragraph (e)(6) of this
section.
(8) Prohibition. This process is not acceptable where goods being
coated are manipulated by hand. When finishing materials are applied by
electrostatic equipment which is manipulated by hand, see paragraph (f)
of this section for applicable requirements.
(9) Fail-safe controls. Electrostatic apparatus shall be equipped
with automatic controls which will operate without time delay to
disconnect the power supply to the high voltage transformer and to
signal the operator under any of the following conditions:
(i) Stoppage of ventilating fans or failure of ventilating equipment
from any cause.
(ii) Stoppage of the conveyor carrying goods through the high
voltage field.
(iii) Occurrence of a ground or of an imminent ground at any point
on the high voltage system.
(iv) Reduction of clearance below that specified in paragraph (e)(6)
of this section.
(10) Guarding. Adequate booths, fencing, railings, or guards shall
be so placed about the equipment that they, either by their location or
character or both, assure that a safe isolation of the process is
maintained from plant storage or personnel. Such railings, fencing, and
guards shall be of conducting material, adequately grounded.
(11) Ventilation. Where electrostatic atomization is used the
spraying area shall be so ventilated as to insure safe conditions from a
fire and health standpoint.
(12) Fire protection. All areas used for spraying, including the
interior of the booth, shall be protected by automatic sprinklers where
this protection is available. Where this protection is not
[[Page 187]]
available, other approved automatic extinguishing equipment shall be
provided.
(f) Electrostatic hand spraying equipment--(1) Application. This
paragraph shall apply to any equipment using electrostatically charged
elements for the atomization and/or, precipitation of materials for
coatings on articles, or for other similar purposes in which the
atomizing device is hand held and manipulated during the spraying
operation.
(2) Conformance. Electrostatic hand spraying equipment shall conform
with the other provisions of this section.
(3) Equipment approval and specifications. Electrostatic hand spray
apparatus and devices used in connection with coating operations shall
be of approved types. The high voltage circuits shall be designed so as
to not produce a spark of sufficient intensity to ignite any vapor-air
mixtures nor result in appreciable shock hazard upon coming in contact
with a grounded object under all normal operating conditions. The
electrostatically charged exposed elements of the handgun shall be
capable of being energized only by a switch which also controls the
coating material supply.
(4) Electrical support equipment. Transformers, powerpacks, control
apparatus, and all other electrical portions of the equipment, with the
exception of the handgun itself and its connections to the power supply
shall be located outside of the spraying area or shall otherwise conform
to the requirements of paragraph (c) of this section.
(5) Spray gun ground. The handle of the spraying gun shall be
electrically connected to ground by a metallic connection and to be so
constructed that the operator in normal operating position is in
intimate electrical contact with the grounded handle.
(6) Grounding-general. All electrically conductive objects in the
spraying area shall be adequately grounded. This requirement shall apply
to paint containers, wash cans, and any other objects or devices in the
area. The equipment shall carry a prominent permanently installed
warning regarding the necessity for this grounding feature.
(7) Maintenance of grounds. Objects being painted or coated shall be
maintained in metallic contact with the conveyor or other grounded
support. Hooks shall be regularly cleaned to insure this contact and
areas of contact shall be sharp points or knife edges where possible.
Points of support of the object shall be concealed from random spray
where feasible and where the objects being sprayed are supported from a
conveyor, the point of attachment to the conveyor shall be so located as
to not collect spray material during normal operation.
(8) Interlocks. The electrical equipment shall be so interlocked
with the ventilation of the spraying area that the equipment cannot be
operated unless the ventilation fans are in operation.
(9) Ventilation. The spraying operation shall take place within a
spray area which is adequately ventilated to remove solvent vapors
released from the operation.
(g) Drying, curing, or fusion apparatus--(1) Conformance. Drying,
curing, or fusion apparatus in connection with spray application of
flammable and combustible finishes shall conform to the Standard for
Ovens and Furnaces, NFPA 86A-1969, where applicable and shall also
conform with the following requirements of this paragraph.
(2) Alternate use prohibited. Spray booths, rooms, or other
enclosures used for spraying operations shall not alternately be used
for the purpose of drying by any arrangement which will cause a material
increase in the surface temperature of the spray booth, room, or
enclosure.
(3) Adjacent system interlocked. Except as specifically provided in
paragraph (g)(4) of this section, drying, curing, or fusion units
utilizing a heating system having open flames or which may produce
sparks shall not be installed in a spraying area, but may be installed
adjacent thereto when equipped with an interlocked ventilating system
arranged to:
(i) Thoroughly ventilate the drying space before the heating system
can be started;
(ii) Maintain a safe atmosphere at any source of ignition;
(iii) Automatically shut down the heating system in the event of
failure of the ventilating system.
[[Page 188]]
(4) Alternate use permitted. Automobile refinishing spray booths or
enclosures, otherwise installed and maintained in full conformity with
this section, may alternately be used for drying with portable
electrical infrared drying apparatus when conforming with the following:
(i) Interior (especially floors) of spray enclosures shall be kept
free of overspray deposits.
(ii) During spray operations, the drying apparatus and electrical
connections and wiring thereto shall not be located within spray
enclosure nor in any other location where spray residues may be
deposited thereon.
(iii) The spraying apparatus, the drying apparatus, and the
ventilating system of the spray enclosure shall be equipped with
suitable interlocks so arranged that:
(a) The spraying apparatus cannot be operated while the drying
apparatus is inside the spray enclosure.
(b) The spray enclosure will be purged of spray vapors for a period
of not less than 3 minutes before the drying apparatus can be energized.
(c) The ventilating system will maintain a safe atmosphere within
the enclosure during the drying process and the drying apparatus will
automatically shut off in the event of failure of the ventilating
system.
(iv) All electrical wiring and equipment of the drying apparatus
shall conform with the applicable sections of subpart S of this part.
Only equipment of a type approved for Class I, Division 2 hazardous
locations shall be located within 18 inches (45.72 cm) of floor level.
All metallic parts of the drying apparatus shall be properly
electrically bonded and grounded.
(v) The drying apparatus shall contain a prominently located,
permanently attached warning sign indicating that ventilation should be
maintained during the drying period and that spraying should not be
conducted in the vicinity that spray will deposit on apparatus.
[58 FR 35149, June 30, 1993]
Subpart E_Personal Protective and Life Saving Equipment
Authority: 40 U.S.C. 333; 29 U.S.C. 653, 655, 657; Secretary of
Labor's Order No. 12-71 (36 FR 8754), 8-76 (41 FR 25059), 9-83 (48 FR
35736), 1-90 (55 FR 9033), 6-96 (62 FR 111), 5-2007 (72 FR 31160), 4-
2010 (75 FR 55355), or 1-2012 (77 FR 3912), as applicable; and 29 CFR
part 1911.
Sec. 1926.95 Criteria for personal protective equipment.
(a) Application. Protective equipment, including personal protective
equipment for eyes, face, head, and extremities, protective clothing,
respiratory devices, and protective shields and barriers, shall be
provided, used, and maintained in a sanitary and reliable condition
wherever it is necessary by reason of hazards of processes or
environment, chemical hazards, radiological hazards, or mechanical
irritants encountered in a manner capable of causing injury or
impairment in the function of any part of the body through absorption,
inhalation or physical contact.
(b) Employee-owned equipment. Where employees provide their own
protective equipment, the employer shall be responsible to assure its
adequacy, including proper maintenance, and sanitation of such
equipment.
(c) Design. All personal protective equipment shall be of safe
design and construction for the work to be performed.
(d) Payment for protective equipment. (1) Except as provided by
paragraphs (d)(2) through (d)(6) of this section, the protective
equipment, including personal protective equipment (PPE), used to comply
with this part, shall be provided by the employer at no cost to
employees.
(2) The employer is not required to pay for non-specialty safety-toe
protective footwear (including steel-toe shoes or steel-toe boots) and
non-specialty prescription safety eyewear, provided that the employer
permits such items to be worn off the job-site.
(3) When the employer provides metatarsal guards and allows the
employee, at his or her request, to use shoes or boots with built-in
metatarsal
[[Page 189]]
protection, the employer is not required to reimburse the employee for
the shoes or boots.
(4) The employer is not required to pay for:
(i) Everyday clothing, such as long-sleeve shirts, long pants,
street shoes, and normal work boots; or
(ii) Ordinary clothing, skin creams, or other items, used solely for
protection from weather, such as winter coats, jackets, gloves, parkas,
rubber boots, hats, raincoats, ordinary sunglasses, and sunscreen.
(5) The employer must pay for replacement PPE, except when the
employee has lost or intentionally damaged the PPE.
(6) Where an employee provides adequate protective equipment he or
she owns pursuant to paragraph (b) of this section, the employer may
allow the employee to use it and is not required to reimburse the
employee for that equipment. The employer shall not require an employee
to provide or pay for his or her own PPE, unless the PPE is excepted by
paragraphs (d)(2) through (d)(5) of this section.
(7) This section shall become effective on February 13, 2008.
Employers must implement the PPE payment requirements no later than May
15, 2008.
Note to Sec. 1926.95(d): When the provisions of another OSHA
standard specify whether or not the employer must pay for specific
equipment, the payment provisions of that standard shall prevail.
[58 FR 35152, June 30, 1993, as amended at 72 FR 64429, Nov. 15, 2007]
Sec. 1926.96 Occupational foot protection.
Safety-toe footwear for employees shall meet the requirements and
specifications in American National Standard for Men's Safety-Toe
Footwear, Z41.1-1967.
[58 FR 35152, June 30, 1993]
Sec. Sec. 1926.97-1926.98 [Reserved]
Sec. 1926.100 Head protection.
(a) Employees working in areas where there is a possible danger of
head injury from impact, or from falling or flying objects, or from
electrical shock and burns, shall be protected by protective helmets.
(b) Criteria for head protection. (1) The employer must provide each
employee with head protection that meets the specifications contained in
any of the following consensus standards:
(i) American National Standards Institute (ANSI) Z89.1-2009,
``American National Standard for Industrial Head Protection,''
incorporated by reference in Sec. 1926.6;
(ii) American National Standards Institute (ANSI) Z89.1-2003,
``American National Standard for Industrial Head Protection,''
incorporated by reference in Sec. 1926.6; or
(iii) American National Standards Institute (ANSI) Z89.1-1997,
``American National Standard for Personnel Protection--Protective
Headwear for Industrial Workers--Requirements,'' incorporated by
reference in Sec. 1926.6.
(2) The employer must ensure that the head protection provided for
each employee exposed to high-voltage electric shock and burns also
meets the specifications contained in Section 9.7 (``Electrical
Insulation'') of any of the consensus standards identified in paragraph
(b)(1) of this section.
(3) OSHA will deem any head protection device that the employer
demonstrates is at least as effective as a head protection device
constructed in accordance with one of the consensus standards identified
in paragraph (b)(1) of this section to be in compliance with the
requirements of this section.
[44 FR 8577, Feb. 9, 1979, as amended at 77 FR 37600, June 22, 2012; 77
FR 42988, July 23, 2012]
Sec. 1926.101 Hearing protection.
(a) Wherever it is not feasible to reduce the noise levels or
duration of exposures to those specified in Table D-2, Permissible Noise
Exposures, in Sec. 1926.52, ear protective devices shall be provided
and used.
(b) Ear protective devices inserted in the ear shall be fitted or
determined individually by competent persons.
(c) Plain cotton is not an acceptable protective device.
Sec. 1926.102 Eye and face protection.
(a) General. (1) Employees shall be provided with eye and face
protection
[[Page 190]]
equipment when machines or operations present potential eye or face
injury from physical, chemical, or radiation agents.
(2) Eye and face protection equipment required by this part shall
meet the requirements specified in American National Standards
Institute, Z87.1-1968, Practice for Occupational and Educational Eye and
Face Protection.
(3) Employees whose vision requires the use of corrective lenses in
spectacles, when required by this regulation to wear eye protection,
shall be protected by goggles or spectacles of one of the following
types:
(i) Spectacles whose protective lenses provide optical correction;
(ii) Goggles that can be worn over corrective spectacles without
disturbing the adjustment of the spectacles;
(iii) Goggles that incorporate corrective lenses mounted behind the
protective lenses.
(4) Face and eye protection equipment shall be kept clean and in
good repair. The use of this type equipment with structural or optical
defects shall be prohibited.
(5) Table E-1 shall be used as a guide in the selection of face and
eye protection for the hazards and operations noted.
[GRAPHIC] [TIFF OMITTED] TC30OC91.010
[GRAPHIC] [TIFF OMITTED] TC30OC91.011
*Non-side shield spectacles are available for limited hazard use
requiring only frontal protection.
**See Table E-2, in paragraph (b) of this section, Filter Lens Shade
Numbers for Protection Against Radiant Energy.
Applications
----------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------
Recommended protectors: Bold type
Operation Hazards numbers signify preferred protection
----------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------
Acetylene--Burning, Acetylene--Cutting, Sparks, harmful rays, 7, 8, 9.
Acetylene--Welding. molten metal, flying
particles.
----------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------
Chemical Handling........................ Splash, acid burns, fumes.. 2, 10 (For severe exposure add 10 over
2).
----------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------
Chipping................................. Flying particles........... 1, 3, 4, 5, 6, 7A, 8A.
----------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------
Electric (arc) welding................... Sparks, intense rays, 9, 11, (11 in combination with 4, 5, 6,
molten metal. in tinted lenses, advisable).
----------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------
[[Page 191]]
Furnace operations....................... Glare, heat, molten metal.. 7, 8, 9 (For severe exposure add 10).
----------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------
Grinding--Light.......................... Flying particles........... 1, 3, 4, 5, 6, 10.
----------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------
Grinding--Heavy.......................... Flying particles........... 1 , 3, 7A, 8A (For severe exposure add
10).
----------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------
Laboratory............................... Chemical splash, glass 2 (10 when in combination with 4, 5, 6).
breakage.
----------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------
Machining................................ Flying particles........... 1, 3, 4, 5, 6, 10.
----------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------
Molten metals............................ Heat, glare, sparks, splash 7, 8, (10 in combination with 4, 5, 6,
in tinted lenses).
----------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------
Spot welding............................. Flying particles, sparks... 1, 3, 4, 5, 6, 10.
----------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------
(6) Protectors shall meet the following minimum requirements:
(i) They shall provide adequate protection against the particular
hazards for which they are designed.
(ii) They shall be reasonably comfortable when worn under the
designated conditions.
(iii) They shall fit snugly and shall not unduly interfere with the
movements of the wearer.
(iv) They shall be durable.
(v) They shall be capable of being disinfected.
(vi) They shall be easily cleanable.
(7) Every protector shall be distinctly marked to facilitate
identification only of the manufacturer.
(8) When limitations or precautions are indicated by the
manufacturer, they shall be transmitted to the user and care taken to
see that such limitations and precautions are strictly observed.
(b) Protection against radiant energy--(1) Selection of shade
numbers for welding filter. Table E-2 shall be used as a guide for the
selection of the proper shade numbers of filter lenses or plates used in
welding. Shades more dense than those listed may be used to suit the
individual's needs.
Table E-2--Filter Lens Shade Numbers for Protection Against Radiant
Energy
------------------------------------------------------------------------
Shade
Welding operation number
------------------------------------------------------------------------
Shielded metal-arc welding \1/16\-, \3/32\-, \1/8\-, \5/32\- 10
inch diameter electrodes...................................
Gas-shielded arc welding (nonferrous) \1/16\-, \3/32\-, \1/ 11
8\-, \5/32\-inch diameter electrodes.......................
Gas-shielded arc welding (ferrous) \1/16\-, \3/32\-, \1/8\-, 12
\5/32\-inch diameter electrodes............................
Shielded metal-arc welding \3/16\-, \7/32\-, \1/4\-inch 12
diameter electrodes........................................
\5/16\-, \3/8\-inch diameter electrodes..................... 14
Atomic hydrogen welding..................................... 10-14
Carbon-arc welding.......................................... 14
Soldering................................................... 2
Torch brazing............................................... 3 or 4
Light cutting, up to 1 inch................................. 3 or 4
Medium cutting, 1 inch to 6 inches.......................... 4 or 5
Heavy cutting, over 6 inches................................ 5 or 6
Gas welding (light), up to \1/8\-inch....................... 4 or 5
Gas welding (medium), \1/8\-inch to \1/2\-inch.............. 5 or 6
Gas welding (heavy), over \1/2\-inch........................ 6 or 8
------------------------------------------------------------------------
(2) Laser protection. (i) Employees whose occupation or assignment
requires exposure to laser beams shall be furnished suitable laser
safety goggles which will protect for the specific wavelength of the
laser and be of optical density (O.D.) adequate for the energy involved.
Table E-3 lists the maximum power or energy density for which adequate
protection is afforded by glasses of optical densities from 5 through 8.
Table E-3--Selecting Laser Safety Glass
------------------------------------------------------------------------
Intensity, CW maximum Attenuation
power density (watts/ ------------------------------------------------
cm\2\) Optical density (O.D.) Attenuation factor
------------------------------------------------------------------------
10-2 5 10 \5\
10-1 6 10 \6\
1.0 7 10 \7\
10.0 8 10 \8\
------------------------------------------------------------------------
Output levels falling between lines in this table shall require the
higher optical density.
[[Page 192]]
(ii) All protective goggles shall bear a label identifying the
following data:
(a) The laser wavelengths for which use is intended;
(b) The optical density of those wavelengths;
(c) The visible light transmission.
[44 FR 8577, Feb. 9, 1979; 44 FR 20940, Apr. 6, 1979, as amended at 58
FR 35160, June 30, 1993]
Sec. 1926.103 Respiratory protection.
Note: The requirements applicable to construction work under this
section are identical to those set forth at 29 CFR 1910.134 of this
chapter.
[63 FR 1297; Jan. 8, 1998]
Sec. 1926.104 Safety belts, lifelines, and lanyards.
(a) Lifelines, safety belts, and lanyards shall be used only for
employee safeguarding. Any lifeline, safety belt, or lanyard actually
subjected to in-service loading, as distinguished from static load
testing, shall be immediately removed from service and shall not be used
again for employee safeguarding.
(b) Lifelines shall be secured above the point of operation to an
anchorage or structural member capable of supporting a minimum dead
weight of 5,400 pounds.
(c) Lifelines used on rock-scaling operations, or in areas where the
lifeline may be subjected to cutting or abrasion, shall be a minimum of
\7/8\-inch wire core manila rope. For all other lifeline applications, a
minimum of \3/4\-inch manila or equivalent, with a minimum breaking
strength of 5,400 pounds, shall be used.
(d) Safety belt lanyard shall be a minimum of \1/2\-inch nylon, or
equivalent, with a maximum length to provide for a fall of no greater
than 6 feet. The rope shall have a nominal breaking strength of 5,400
pounds.
(e) All safety belt and lanyard hardware shall be drop forged or
pressed steel, cadmium plated in accordance with type 1, Class B plating
specified in Federal Specification QQ-P-416. Surface shall be smooth and
free of sharp edges.
(f) All safety belt and lanyard hardware, except rivets, shall be
capable of withstanding a tensile loading of 4,000 pounds without
cracking, breaking, or taking a permanent deformation.
Sec. 1926.105 Safety nets.
(a) Safety nets shall be provided when workplaces are more than 25
feet above the ground or water surface, or other surfaces where the use
of ladders, scaffolds, catch platforms, temporary floors, safety lines,
or safety belts is impractical.
(b) Where safety net protection is required by this part, operations
shall not be undertaken until the net is in place and has been tested.
(c)(1) Nets shall extend 8 feet beyond the edge of the work surface
where employees are exposed and shall be installed as close under the
work surface as practical but in no case more than 25 feet below such
work surface. Nets shall be hung with sufficient clearance to prevent
user's contact with the surfaces or structures below. Such clearances
shall be determined by impact load testing.
(2) It is intended that only one level of nets be required for
bridge construction.
(d) The mesh size of nets shall not exceed 6 inches by 6 inches. All
new nets shall meet accepted performance standards of 17,500 foot-pounds
minimum impact resistance as determined and certified by the
manufacturers, and shall bear a label of proof test. Edge ropes shall
provide a minimum breaking strength of 5,000 pounds.
(e) Forged steel safety hooks or shackles shall be used to fasten
the net to its supports.
(f) Connections between net panels shall develop the full strength
of the net.
Sec. 1926.106 Working over or near water.
(a) Employees working over or near water, where the danger of
drowning exists, shall be provided with U.S. Coast Guard-approved life
jacket or buoyant work vests.
(b) Prior to and after each use, the buoyant work vests or life
preservers shall be inspected for defects which would alter their
strength or buoyancy. Defective units shall not be used.
(c) Ring buoys with at least 90 feet of line shall be provided and
readily available for emergency rescue operations.
[[Page 193]]
Distance between ring buoys shall not exceed 200 feet.
(d) At least one lifesaving skiff shall be immediately available at
locations where employees are working over or adjacent to water.
Sec. 1926.107 Definitions applicable to this subpart.
(a) Contaminant means any material which by reason of its action
upon, within, or to a person is likely to cause physical harm.
(b) Lanyard means a rope, suitable for supporting one person. One
end is fastened to a safety belt or harness and the other end is secured
to a substantial object or a safety line.
(c) Lifeline means a rope, suitable for supporting one person, to
which a lanyard or safety belt (or harness) is attached.
(d) O.D. means optical density and refers to the light refractive
characteristics of a lens.
(e) Radiant energy means energy that travels outward in all
directions from its sources.
(f) Safety belt means a device, usually worn around the waist which,
by reason of its attachment to a lanyard and lifeline or a structure,
will prevent a worker from falling.
[44 FR 8577, Feb. 9, 1979]
Subpart F_Fire Protection and Prevention
Authority: Section 107 of the Contract Work Hours and Safety
Standards Act (40 U.S.C. 3704); Sections 4, 6, and 8 of the Occupational
Safety and Health Act of 1970 (29 U.S.C. 653, 655, 657); Secretary of
Labor's Order No. 12-71 (36 FR 8754), 8-76 (41 FR 25059), 9-83 (48 FR
35736),1-90 (55 FR 9033), 6-96 (62 FR 111), 3-2000 (62 FR 50017), 5-2002
(67 FR 650008), 5-2007 (72 FR 31159), 4-2010 (75 FR 55355), or 1-2012
(77 FR 3912), as applicable; and 29 CFR part 1911.
Sec. 1926.150 Fire protection.
(a) General requirements. (1) The employer shall be responsible for
the development of a fire protection program to be followed throughout
all phases of the construction and demolition work, and he shall provide
for the firefighting equipment as specified in this subpart. As fire
hazards occur, there shall be no delay in providing the necessary
equipment.
(2) Access to all available firefighting equipment shall be
maintained at all times.
(3) All firefighting equipment, provided by the employer, shall be
conspicuously located.
(4) All firefighting equipment shall be periodically inspected and
maintained in operating condition. Defective equipment shall be
immediately replaced.
(5) As warranted by the project, the employer shall provide a
trained and equipped firefighting organization (Fire Brigade) to assure
adequate protection to life.
(b) Water supply. (1) A temporary or permanent water supply, of
sufficient volume, duration, and pressure, required to properly operate
the firefighting equipment shall be made available as soon as
combustible materials accumulate.
(2) Where underground water mains are to be provided, they shall be
installed, completed, and made available for use as soon as practicable.
(c) Portable firefighting equipment--(1) Fire extinguishers and
small hose lines. (i) A fire extinguisher, rated not less than 2A, shall
be provided for each 3,000 square feet of the protected building area,
or major fraction thereof. Travel distance from any point of the
protected area to the nearest fire extinguisher shall not exceed 100
feet.
(ii) One 55-gallon open drum of water with two fire pails may be
substituted for a fire extinguisher having a 2A rating.
(iii) A \1/2\-inch diameter garden-type hose line, not to exceed 100
feet in length and equipped with a nozzle, may be substituted for a 2A-
rated fire extinguisher, providing it is capable of discharging a
minimum of 5 gallons per minute with a minimum hose stream range of 30
feet horizontally. The garden-type hose lines shall be mounted on
conventional racks or reels. The number and location of hose racks or
reels shall be such that at least one hose stream can be applied to all
points in the area.
(iv) One or more fire extinguishers, rated not less than 2A, shall
be provided on each floor. In multistory
[[Page 194]]
buildings, at least one fire extinguisher shall be located adjacent to
stairway.
(v) Extinguishers and water drums, subject to freezing, shall be
protected from freezing.
(vi) A fire extinguisher, rated not less than 10B, shall be provided
within 50 feet of wherever more than 5 gallons of flammable or
combustible liquids or 5 pounds of flammable gas are being used on the
jobsite. This requirement does not apply to the integral fuel tanks of
motor vehicles.
(vii) Carbon tetrachloride and other toxic vaporizing liquid fire
extinguishers are prohibited.
(viii) Portable fire extinguishers shall be inspected periodically
and maintained in accordance with Maintenance and Use of Portable Fire
Extinguishers, NFPA No. 10A-1970.
(ix) Fire extinguishers which have been listed or approved by a
nationally recognized testing laboratory, shall be used to meet the
requirements of this subpart.
(x) Table F-1 may be used as a guide for selecting the appropriate
portable fire extinguishers.
[GRAPHIC] [TIFF OMITTED] TC30OC91.012
(2) Fire hose and connections. (i) One hundred feet, or less, of
1\1/2\-inch hose, with a nozzle capable of discharging water at 25
gallons or more per minute, may be substituted for a fire extinguisher
rated not more than 2A in the designated area provided that the hose
line can reach all points in the area.
(ii) If fire hose connections are not compatible with local
firefighting equipment, the contractor shall provide adapters, or
equivalent, to permit connections.
(iii) During demolition involving combustible materials, charged
hose lines, supplied by hydrants, water tank trucks with pumps, or
equivalent, shall be made available.
(d) Fixed firefighting equipment--(1) Sprinkler protection. (i) If
the facility being constructed includes the installation of automatic
sprinkler protection, the installation shall closely follow the
construction and be placed in service as soon as applicable laws permit
following completion of each story.
[[Page 195]]
(ii) During demolition or alterations, existing automatic sprinkler
installations shall be retained in service as long as reasonable. The
operation of sprinkler control valves shall be permitted only by
properly authorized persons. Modification of sprinkler systems to permit
alterations or additional demolition should be expedited so that the
automatic protection may be returned to service as quickly as possible.
Sprinkler control valves shall be checked daily at close of work to
ascertain that the protection is in service.
(2) Standpipes. In all structures in which standpipes are required,
or where standpipes exist in structures being altered, they shall be
brought up as soon as applicable laws permit, and shall be maintained as
construction progresses in such a manner that they are always ready for
fire protection use. The standpipes shall be provided with Siamese fire
department connections on the outside of the structure, at the street
level, which shall be conspicuously marked. There shall be at least one
standard hose outlet at each floor.
(e) Fire alarm devices. (1) An alarm system, e.g., telephone system,
siren, etc., shall be established by the employer whereby employees on
the site and the local fire department can be alerted for an emergency.
(2) The alarm code and reporting instructions shall be conspicuously
posted at phones and at employee entrances.
(f) Fire cutoffs. (1) Fire walls and exit stairways, required for
the completed buildings, shall be given construction priority. Fire
doors, with automatic closing devices, shall be hung on openings as soon
as practicable.
(2) Fire cutoffs shall be retained in buildings undergoing
alterations or demolition until operations necessitate their removal.
[44 FR 8577, Feb. 9, 1979; 44 FR 20940, Apr. 6, 1979, as amended at 58
FR 35162, June 30, 1993; 61 FR 31432, June 20, 1996]
Sec. 1926.151 Fire prevention.
(a) Ignition hazards. (1) Electrical wiring and equipment for light,
heat, or power purposes shall be installed in compliance with the
requirements of subpart K of this part.
(2) Internal combustion engine powered equipment shall be so located
that the exhausts are well away from combustible materials. When the
exhausts are piped to outside the building under construction, a
clearance of at least 6 inches shall be maintained between such piping
and combustible material.
(3) Smoking shall be prohibited at or in the vicinity of operations
which constitute a fire hazard, and shall be conspicuously posted: ``No
Smoking or Open Flame.''
(4) Portable battery powered lighting equipment, used in connection
with the storage, handling, or use of flammable gases or liquids, shall
be of the type approved for the hazardous locations.
(5) The nozzle of air, inert gas, and steam lines or hoses, when
used in the cleaning or ventilation of tanks and vessels that contain
hazardous concentrations of flammable gases or vapors, shall be bonded
to the tank or vessel shell. Bonding devices shall not be attached or
detached in hazardous concentrations of flammable gases or vapors.
(b) Temporary buildings. (1) No temporary building shall be erected
where it will adversely affect any means of exit.
(2) Temporary buildings, when located within another building or
structure, shall be of either noncombustible construction or of
combustible construction having a fire resistance of not less than 1
hour.
(3) Temporary buildings, located other than inside another building
and not used for the storage, handling, or use of flammable or
combustible liquids, flammable gases, explosives, or blasting agents, or
similar hazardous occupancies, shall be located at a distance of not
less than 10 feet from another building or structure. Groups of
temporary buildings, not exceeding 2,000 square feet in aggregate,
shall, for the purposes of this part, be considered a single temporary
building.
(c) Open yard storage. (1) Combustible materials shall be piled with
due regard to the stability of piles and in no case higher than 20 feet.
(2) Driveways between and around combustible storage piles shall be
at
[[Page 196]]
least 15 feet wide and maintained free from accumulation of rubbish,
equipment, or other articles or materials. Driveways shall be so spaced
that a maximum grid system unit of 50 feet by 150 feet is produced.
(3) The entire storage site shall be kept free from accumulation of
unnecessary combustible materials. Weeds and grass shall be kept down
and a regular procedure provided for the periodic cleanup of the entire
area.
(4) When there is a danger of an underground fire, that land shall
not be used for combustible or flammable storage.
(5) Method of piling shall be solid wherever possible and in orderly
and regular piles. No combustible material shall be stored outdoors
within 10 feet of a building or structure.
(6) Portable fire extinguishing equipment, suitable for the fire
hazard involved, shall be provided at convenient, conspicuously
accessible locations in the yard area. Portable fire extinguishers,
rated not less than 2A, shall be placed so that maximum travel distance
to the nearest unit shall not exceed 100 feet.
(d) Indoor storage. (1) Storage shall not obstruct, or adversely
affect, means of exit.
(2) All materials shall be stored, handled, and piled with due
regard to their fire characteristics.
(3) Noncompatible materials, which may create a fire hazard, shall
be segregated by a barrier having a fire resistance of at least 1 hour.
(4) Material shall be piled to minimize the spread of fire
internally and to permit convenient access for firefighting. Stable
piling shall be maintained at all times. Aisle space shall be maintained
to safely accommodate the widest vehicle that may be used within the
building for firefighting purposes.
(5) Clearance of at least 36 inches shall be maintained between the
top level of the stored material and the sprinkler deflectors.
(6) Clearance shall be maintained around lights and heating units to
prevent ignition of combustible materials.
(7) A clearance of 24 inches shall be maintained around the path of
travel of fire doors unless a barricade is provided, in which case no
clearance is needed. Material shall not be stored within 36 inches of a
fire door opening.
[44 FR 8577, Feb. 9, 1979; 44 FR 20940, Apr. 6, 1979, as amended at 51
FR 25318, July 11, 1986]
Sec. 1926.152 Flammable liquids.
(a) General requirements. (1) Only approved containers and portable
tanks shall be used for storage and handling of flammable liquids.
Approved safety cans or Department of Transportation approved containers
shall be used for the handling and use of flammable liquids in
quantities of 5 gallons or less, except that this shall not apply to
those flammable liquid materials which are highly viscid (extremely hard
to pour), which may be used and handled in original shipping containers.
For quantities of one gallon or less, the original container may be
used, for storage, use and handling of flammable liquids.
(2) Flammable liquids shall not be stored in areas used for exits,
stairways, or normally used for the safe passage of people.
(b) Indoor storage of flammable liquids. (1) No more than 25 gallons
of flammable liquids shall be stored in a room outside of an approved
storage cabinet. For storage of liquefied petroleum gas, see Sec.
1926.153.
(2) Quantities of flammable liquid in excess of 25 gallons shall be
stored in an acceptable or approved cabinet meeting the following
requirements:
(i) Acceptable wooden storage cabinets shall be constructed in the
following manner, or equivalent: The bottom, sides, and top shall be
constructed of an exterior grade of plywood at least 1 inch in
thickness, which shall not break down or delaminate under standard fire
test conditions. All joints shall be rabbeted and shall be fastened in
two directions with flathead wood screws. When more than one door is
used, there shall be a rabbeted overlap of not less than 1 inch. Steel
hinges shall be mounted in such a manner as to not lose their holding
capacity due to loosening or burning out of the screws when subjected to
fire. Such cabinets shall be painted inside and out with fire retardant
paint.
(ii) Approved metal storage cabinets will be acceptable.
[[Page 197]]
(iii) Cabinets shall be labeled in conspicuous lettering,
``Flammable-Keep Away from Open Flames.''
(3) Not more than 60 gallons of Category 1, 2 and/or 3 flammable
liquids or 120 gallons of Category 4 flammable liquids shall be stored
in any one storage cabinet. Not more than three such cabinets may be
located in a single storage area. Quantities in excess of this shall be
stored in an inside storage room.
(4)(i) Inside storage rooms shall be constructed to meet the
required fire-resistive rating for their use. Such construction shall
comply with the test specifications set forth in Standard Methods of
Fire Test of Building Construction and Material, NFPA 251-1969.
(ii) Where an automatic extinguishing system is provided, the system
shall be designed and installed in an approved manner. Openings to other
rooms or buildings shall be provided with noncombustible liquid-tight
raised sills or ramps at least 4 inches in height, or the floor in the
storage area shall be at least 4 inches below the surrounding floor.
Openings shall be provided with approved self-closing fire doors. The
room shall be liquid-tight where the walls join the floor. A permissible
alternate to the sill or ramp is an open-grated trench, inside of the
room, which drains to a safe location. Where other portions of the
building or other buildings are exposed, windows shall be protected as
set forth in the Standard for Fire Doors and Windows, NFPA No. 80-1970,
for Class E or F openings. Wood of at least 1-inch nominal thickness may
be used for shelving, racks, dunnage, scuffboards, floor overlay, and
similar installations.
(iii) Materials which will react with water and create a fire hazard
shall not be stored in the same room with flammable liquids.
(iv) Storage in inside storage rooms shall comply with Table F-2
following:
Table F-2
----------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------
Total
allowable
quantities
Fire protection provided Fire resistance Maximum size gals./sq.
ft./floor
area
----------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------
Yes...................................... 2 hrs....................... 500 sq. ft................. 10
No....................................... 2 hrs....................... 500 sq. ft................. 4
Yes...................................... 1 hr........................ 150 sq. ft................. 5
No....................................... 1 hr........................ 150 sq. ft................. 2
----------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------
Note: Fire protection system shall be sprinkler, water spray, carbon dioxide or other system approved by a
nationally recognized testing laboratory for this purpose.
(v) Electrical wiring and equipment located in inside storage rooms
shall be approved for Class I, Division 1, Hazardous Locations. For
definition of Class I, Division 1, Hazardous Locations, see Sec.
1926.449.
(vi) Every inside storage room shall be provided with either a
gravity or a mechanical exhausting system. Such system shall commence
not more than 12 inches above the floor and be designed to provide for a
complete change of air within the room at least 6 times per hour. If a
mechanical exhausting system is used, it shall be controlled by a switch
located outside of the door. The ventilating equipment and any lighting
fixtures shall be operated by the same switch. An electric pilot light
shall be installed adjacent to the switch if Category 1, 2, or 3
flammable liquids are dispensed within the room. Where gravity
ventilation is provided, the fresh air intake, as well as the exhausting
outlet from the room, shall be on the exterior of the building in which
the room is located.
(vii) In every inside storage room there shall be maintained one
clear aisle at least 3 feet wide. Containers over 30 gallons capacity
shall not be stacked one upon the other.
(viii) Flammable liquids in excess of that permitted in inside
storage rooms shall be stored outside of buildings in accordance with
paragraph (c) of this section.
(5) Quantity. The quantity of flammable liquids kept in the vicinity
of spraying operations shall be the minimum required for operations and
should ordinarily not exceed a supply for 1 day or one shift. Bulk
storage of portable containers of flammable liquids shall be in a
separate, constructed building detached from other important buildings
or cut off in a standard manner.
[[Page 198]]
(c) Storage outside buildings. (1) Storage of containers (not more
than 60 gallons each) shall not exceed 1,100 gallons in any one pile or
area. Piles or groups of containers shall be separated by a 5-foot
clearance. Piles or groups of containers shall not be nearer than 20
feet to a building.
(2) Within 200 feet of each pile of containers, there shall be a 12-
foot-wide access way to permit approach of fire control apparatus.
(3) The storage area shall be graded in a manner to divert possible
spills away from buildings or other exposures, or shall be surrounded by
a curb or earth dike at least 12 inches high. When curbs or dikes are
used, provisions shall be made for draining off accumulations of ground
or rain water, or spills of flammable liquids. Drains shall terminate at
a safe location and shall be accessible to operation under fire
conditions.
(4) Outdoor portable tank storage: (i) Portable tanks shall not be
nearer than 20 feet from any building. Two or more portable tanks,
grouped together, having a combined capacity in excess of 2,200 gallons,
shall be separated by a 5-foot-clear area. Individual portable tanks
exceeding 1,100 gallons shall be separated by a 5-foot-clear area.
(ii) Within 200 feet of each portable tank, there shall be a 12-
foot-wide access way to permit approach of fire control apparatus.
(5) Storage areas shall be kept free of weeds, debris, and other
combustible material not necessary to the storage.
(6) Portable tanks, not exceeding 660 gallons, shall be provided
with emergency venting and other devices, as required by chapters III
and IV of NFPA 30-1969, The Flammable and Combustible Liquids Code.
(7) Portable tanks, in excess of 660 gallons, shall have emergency
venting and other devices, as required by chapters II and III of The
Flammable and Combustible Liquids Code, NFPA 30-1969.
(d) Fire control for flammable liquid storage. (1) At least one
portable fire extinguisher, having a rating of not less than 20-B units,
shall be located outside of, but not more than 10 feet from, the door
opening into any room used for storage of more than 60 gallons of
flammable liquids.
(2) At least one portable fire extinguisher having a rating of not
less than 20-B units shall be located not less than 25 feet, nor more
than 75 feet, from any flammable liquid storage area located outside.
(3) When sprinklers are provided, they shall be installed in
accordance with the Standard for the Installation of Sprinkler Systems,
NFPA 13-1969.
(4) At least one portable fire extinguisher having a rating of not
less than 20-B:C units shall be provided on all tank trucks or other
vehicles used for transporting and/or dispensing flammable liquids.
(e) Dispensing liquids. (1) Areas in which flammable liquids are
transferred at one time, in quantities greater than 5 gallons from one
tank or container to another tank or container, shall be separated from
other operations by 25-feet distance or by construction having a fire
resistance of at least 1 hour. Drainage or other means shall be provided
to control spills. Adequate natural or mechanical ventilation shall be
provided to maintain the concentration of flammable vapor at or below 10
percent of the lower flammable limit.
(2) Transfer of Category 1, 2, or 3 flammable liquids from one
container to another shall be done only when containers are electrically
interconnected (bonded).
(3) Flammable liquids shall be drawn from or transferred into
vessels, containers, or tanks within a building or outside only through
a closed piping system, from safety cans, by means of a device drawing
through the top, or from a container, or portable tanks, by gravity or
pump, through an approved self-closing valve. Transferring by means of
air pressure on the container or portable tanks is prohibited.
(4) The dispensing units shall be protected against collision
damage.
(5) Dispensing devices and nozzles for Category 1, 2, or 3 flammable
liquids shall be of an approved type.
(f) Handling liquids at point of final use. (1) Category 1, 2, or 3
flammable liquids shall be kept in closed containers when not actually
in use.
[[Page 199]]
(2) Leakage or spillage of flammable liquids shall be disposed of
promptly and safely.
(3) Category 1, 2, or 3 flammable liquids may be used only where
there are no open flames or other sources of ignition within 50 feet of
the operation, unless conditions warrant greater clearance.
(g) Service and refueling areas. (1) Flammable liquids shall be
stored in approved closed containers, in tanks located underground, or
in aboveground portable tanks.
(2) The tank trucks shall comply with the requirements covered in
the Standard for Tank Vehicles for Flammable and Combustible Liquids,
NFPA No. 385-1966.
(3) The dispensing hose shall be an approved type.
(4) The dispensing nozzle shall be an approved automatic-closing
type without a latch-open device.
(5) Underground tanks shall not be abandoned.
(6) Clearly identified and easily accessible switch(es) shall be
provided at a location remote from dispensing devices to shut off the
power to all dispensing devices in the event of an emergency.
(7)(i) Heating equipment of an approved type may be installed in the
lubrication or service area where there is no dispensing or transferring
of Category 1, 2, or 3 flammable liquids, provided the bottom of the
heating unit is at least 18 inches above the floor and is protected from
physical damage.
(ii) Heating equipment installed in lubrication or service areas,
where Category 1, 2, or 3 flammable liquids are dispensed, shall be of
an approved type for garages, and shall be installed at least 8 feet
above the floor.
(8) There shall be no smoking or open flames in the areas used for
fueling, servicing fuel systems for internal combustion engines,
receiving or dispensing of flammable liquids.
(9) Conspicuous and legible signs prohibiting smoking shall be
posted.
(10) The motors of all equipment being fueled shall be shut off
during the fueling operation.
(11) Each service or fueling area shall be provided with at least
one fire extinguisher having a rating of not less than 20-B:C located so
that an extinguisher will be within 75 feet of each pump, dispenser,
underground fill pipe opening, and lubrication or service area.
(h) Scope. This section applies to the handling, storage, and use of
flammable liquids with a flashpoint at or below 199.4 [deg]F (93
[deg]C). This section does not apply to:
(1) Bulk transportation of flammable liquids; and
(2) Storage, handling, and use of fuel oil tanks and containers
connected with oil burning equipment.
(i) Tank storage--(1) Design and construction of tanks--(i)
Materials. (A) Tanks shall be built of steel except as provided in
paragraphs (i)(1)(i) (B) through (E) of this section.
(B) Tanks may be built of materials other than steel for
installation underground or if required by the properties of the liquid
stored. Tanks located above ground or inside buildings shall be of
noncombustible construction.
(C) Tanks built of materials other than steel shall be designed to
specifications embodying principles recognized as good engineering
design for the material used.
(D) Unlined concrete tanks may be used for storing flammable liquids
having a gravity of 40[deg] API or heavier. Concrete tanks with special
lining may be used for other services provided the design is in
accordance with sound engineering practice.
(E) [Reserved]
(F) Special engineering consideration shall be required if the
specific gravity of the liquid to be stored exceeds that of water or if
the tanks are designed to contain flammable liquids at a liquid
temperature below 0 [deg]F.
(ii) Fabrication. (A) [Reserved]
(B) Metal tanks shall be welded, riveted, and caulked, brazed, or
bolted, or constructed by use of a combination of these methods. Filler
metal used in brazing shall be nonferrous metal or an alloy having a
melting point above 1000 [deg]F. and below that of the metal joined.
(iii) Atmospheric tanks. (A) Atmospheric tanks shall be built in
accordance with acceptable good standards of design. Atmospheric tanks
may be built in accordance with:
(1) Underwriters' Laboratories, Inc., Subjects No. 142, Standard for
Steel
[[Page 200]]
Aboveground Tanks for Flammable and Combustible Liquids, 1968; No. 58,
Standard for Steel Underground Tanks for Flammable and Combustible
Liquids, Fifth Edition, December 1961; or No. 80, Standard for Steel
Inside Tanks for Oil-Burner Fuel, September 1963.
(2) American Petroleum Institute Standards No. 12A, Specification
for Oil Storage Tanks with Riveted Shells, Seventh Edition, September
1951, or No. 650, Welded Steel Tanks for Oil Storage, Third Edition,
1966.
(3) American Petroleum Institute Standards No. 12B, Specification
for Bolted Production Tanks, Eleventh Edition, May 1958, and Supplement
1, March 1962; No. 12D, Specification for Large Welded Production Tanks,
Seventh Edition, August 1957; or No. 12F, Specification for Small Welded
Production Tanks, Fifth Edition, March 1961. Tanks built in accordance
with these standards shall be used only as production tanks for storage
of crude petroleum in oil-producing areas.
(B) Tanks designed for underground service not exceeding 2,500
gallons (9,462.5 L) capacity may be used aboveground.
(C) Low-pressure tanks and pressure vessels may be used as
atmospheric tanks.
(D) Atmospheric tanks shall not be used for the storage of a
flammable liquid at a temperature at or above its boiling point.
(iv) Low pressure tanks. (A) The normal operating pressure of the
tank shall not exceed the design pressure of the tank.
(B) Low-pressure tanks shall be built in accordance with acceptable
standards of design. Low-pressure tanks may be built in accordance with:
(1) American Petroleum Institute Standard No. 620. Recommended Rules
for the Design and Construction of Large, Welded, Low-Pressure Storage
Tanks, Third Edition, 1966.
(2) The principles of the Code for Unfired Pressure Vessels, Section
VIII of the ASME Boiler and Pressure Vessels Code, 1968.
(C) Atmospheric tanks built according to Underwriters' Laboratories,
Inc., requirements in paragraph (i)(1)(iii)(A) of this section and shall
be limited to 2.5 p.s.i.g. under emergency venting conditions.
This paragraph may be used for operating pressures not exceeding 1
p.s.i.g.
(D) Pressure vessels may be used as low-pressure tanks.
(v) Pressure vessels. (A) The normal operating pressure of the
vessel shall not exceed the design pressure of the vessel.
(B) Pressure vessels shall be built in accordance with the Code for
Unfired Pressure Vessels, Section VIII of the ASME Boiler and Pressure
Vessel Code 1968.
(vi) Provisions for internal corrosion. When tanks are not designed
in accordance with the American Petroleum Institute, American Society of
Mechanical Engineers, or the Underwriters' Laboratories, Inc.'s,
standards, or if corrosion is anticipated beyond that provided for in
the design formulas used, additional metal thickness or suitable
protective coatings or linings shall be provided to compensate for the
corrosion loss expected during the design life of the tank.
(2) Installation of outside aboveground tanks. (i) [Reserved]
(ii) Spacing (shell-to-shell) between aboveground tanks. (A) The
distance between any two flammable liquid storage tanks shall not be
less than 3 feet (0.912 m).
(B) Except as provided in paragraph (i)(2)(ii)(C) of this section,
the distance between any two adjacent tanks shall not be less than one-
sixth the sum of their diameters. When the diameter of one tank is less
than one-half the diameter of the adjacent tank, the distance between
the two tanks shall not be less than one-half the diameter of the
smaller tank.
(C) Where crude petroleum in conjunction with production facilities
are located in noncongested areas and have capacities not exceeding
126,000 gallons (3,000 barrels), the distance between such tanks shall
not be less than 3 feet (0.912 m).
(D) Where unstable flammable liquids are stored, the distance
between such tanks shall not be less than one-half the sum of their
diameters.
(E) When tanks are compacted in three or more rows or in an
irregular pattern, greater spacing or other
[[Page 201]]
means shall be provided so that inside tanks are accessible for
firefighting purposes.
(F) The minimum separation between a liquefied petroleum gas
container and a flammable liquid storage tank shall be 20 feet (6.08 m),
except in the case of flammable liquid tanks operating at pressures
exceeding 2.5 p.s.i.g. or equipped with emergency venting which will
permit pressures to exceed 2.5 p.s.i.g. in which case the provisions of
paragraphs (i)(2)(ii) (A) and (B) of this section shall apply. Suitable
means shall be taken to prevent the accumulation of flammable liquids
under adjacent liquefied petroleum gas containers such as by diversion
curbs or grading. When flammable liquid storage tanks are within a diked
area, the liquefied petroleum gas containers shall be outside the diked
area and at least 10 feet (3.04 m) away from the centerline of the wall
of the diked area. The foregoing provisions shall not apply when
liquefied petroleum gas containers of 125 gallons (473.125 L) or less
capacity are installed adjacent to fuel oil supply tanks of 550 gallons
(2,081.75 L) or less capacity.
(iii) [Reserved]
(iv) Normal venting for aboveground tanks. (A) Atmospheric storage
tanks shall be adequately vented to prevent the development of vacuum or
pressure sufficient to distort the roof of a cone roof tank or exceeding
the design pressure in the case of other atmospheric tanks, as a result
of filling or emptying, and atmospheric temperature changes.
(B) Normal vents shall be sized either in accordance with: (1) The
American Petroleum Institute Standard 2000 (1968), Venting Atmospheric
and Low-Pressure Storage Tanks; or (2) other accepted standard; or (3)
shall be at least as large as the filling or withdrawal connection,
whichever is larger but in no case less than 1\1/4\ inch (3.175 cm)
nominal inside diameter.
(C) Low-pressure tanks and pressure vessels shall be adequately
vented to prevent development of pressure or vacuum, as a result of
filling or emptying and atmospheric temperature changes, from exceeding
the design pressure of the tank or vessel. Protection shall also be
provided to prevent overpressure from any pump discharging into the tank
or vessel when the pump discharge pressure can exceed the design
pressure of the tank or vessel.
(D) If any tank or pressure vessel has more than one fill or
withdrawal connection and simultaneous filling or withdrawal can be
made, the vent size shall be based on the maximum anticipated
simultaneous flow.
(E) Unless the vent is designed to limit the internal pressure 2.5
p.s.i. or less, the outlet of vents and vent drains shall be arranged to
discharge in such a manner as to prevent localized overheating of any
part of the tank in the event vapors from such vents are ignited.
(F) Tanks and pressure vessels storing Category 1 flammable liquids
shall be equipped with venting devices that shall be normally closed
except when venting to pressure or vacuum conditions. Tanks and pressure
vessels storing Category 2 flammable liquids, or Category 3 flammable
liquids with a flashpoint below 100 [deg]F (37.8 [deg]C), shall be
equipped with venting devices that shall be normally closed except when
venting under pressure or vacuum conditions, or with approved flame
arresters.
Exemption: Tanks of 3,000 bbls (barrels) (84 m(3)) capacity or less
containing crude petroleum in crude-producing areas; and, outside
aboveground atmospheric tanks under 1,000 gallons (3,785 L) capacity
containing other than Category 1 flammable liquids may have open vents.
(See paragraph (i)(2)(vi)(B) of this section.)
(G) Flame arresters or venting devices required in paragraph
(i)(2)(iv)(F) of this section may be omitted for Category 2 flammable
liquids or Category 3 flammable liquids with a flashpoint below 100
[deg]F (37.8 [deg]C) where conditions are such that their use may, in
case of obstruction, result in tank damage.
(v) Emergency relief venting for fire exposure for aboveground
tanks. (A) Every aboveground storage tank shall have some form of
construction or device that will relieve excessive internal pressure
caused by exposure fires.
(B) In a vertical tank the construction referred to in paragraph
(i)(2)(v)(A) of this section may take the
[[Page 202]]
form of a floating roof, lifter roof, a weak roof-to-shell seam, or
other approved pressure relieving construction. The weak roof-to-shell
seam shall be constructed to fail preferential to any other seam.
(C) Where entire dependence for emergency relief is placed upon
pressure relieving devices, the total venting capacity of both normal
and emergency vents shall be enough to prevent rupture of the shell or
bottom of the tank if vertical, or of the shell or heads if horizontal.
If unstable liquids are stored, the effects of heat or gas resulting
from polymerization, decomposition, condensation, or self-reactivity
shall be taken into account. The total capacity of both normal and
emergency venting devices shall be not less than that derived from Table
F-10 except as provided in paragraph (i)(2)(v) (E) or (F) of this
section. Such device may be a self-closing manhole cover, or one using
long bolts that permit the cover to lift under internal pressure, or an
additional or larger relief valve or valves. The wetted area of the tank
shall be calculated on the basis of 55 percent of the total exposed area
of a sphere or spheroid, 75 percent of the total exposed area of a
horizontal tank and the first 30 feet (9.12 m) above grade of the
exposed shell area of a vertical tank.
Table F-10--Wetted Area Versus Cubic Feet (Meters) Free Air Per Hour
[14.7 psia and 60 [deg]F. (15.55 [deg]C)]
------------------------------------------------------------------------
Square Square
Square feet CFH (m\3\H) feet CFH feet CFH
(m\2\) (m\2\) (m\3\H) (m\2\) (m\3\H)
------------------------------------------------------------------------
20 (1.84) 21,100 200 (18.4) 211,000 1,000 524,000
(590.8) (5,908) (90.2) (14,672)
30 (2.76) 31,600 250 (23) 239,000 1,200 557,000
(884.8) (6,692) (110.4) (15,596)
40 (3.68) 42,100 300 (27.6) 265,000 1,400 587,000
(1,178.8) (7,420) (128.8) (16,436)
50 (4.6) 52,700 350 (32.2) 288,000 1,600 614,000
(1,475.6) (8,064) (147.2) (17,192)
60 (5.52) 63,200 400 (36.8) 312,000 1,800 639,000
(1,769.6) (8,736) (165.6) (17,892)
70 (6.44) 73,700 500 (46) 354,000 2,000 662,000
(2,063.6) (9,912) (180.4) (18,536)
80 (7.36) 84,200 600 (55.2) 392,000 2,400 704,000
(2,357.6) (10,976) (220.8) (19,712)
90 (8.28) 94,800 700 (64.4) 428,000 2,800 742,000
(2,654.4) (11,984) (257.6) (20,776)
100 (9.2) 105,000 800 (73.6) 462,000 and
(2,940) (12,936)
120 (11.04) 126,000 900 (82.8) 493,000 over
(3,528) (13,804)
140 (12.88) 147,000 1,000 524,000
(4,116) (90.2) (14,672)
160 (14.72) 168,000
(4,704)
180 (16.56) 190,000
(5,320)
200 (18.4) 211,000
(5,908)
------------------------------------------------------------------------
(D) For tanks and storage vessels designed for pressure over 1
p.s.i.g., the total rate of venting shall be determined in accordance
with Table F-10, except that when the exposed wetted area of the surface
is greater than 2,800 square feet (257.6 m\2\), the total rate of
venting shall be calculated by the following formula:
CFH = 1,107A\0.82\
Where:
CFH = Venting requirement, in cubic feet (meters) of free air per hour.
A = Exposed wetted surface, in square feet (m\2\).
Note: The foregoing formula is based on Q=21,000A\0.82\.
(E) The total emergency relief venting capacity for any specific
stable liquid may be determined by the following formula:
V = 1337/L[radic] M
V = Cubic feet (meters) of free air per hour from Table F-10.
L = Latent heat of vaporization of specific liquid in B.t.u. per pound.
M = Molecular weight of specific liquids.
(F) The required airflow rate of paragraph (i)(2)(v) (C) or (E) of
this section may be multiplied by the appropriate factor listed in the
following schedule when protection is provided as indicated. Only one
factor may be used for any one tank.
0.5 for drainage in accordance with paragraph (i)(2)(vii)(B) of this
section for tanks over 200 square feet (18.4 m\2\) of wetted area.
0.3 for approved water spray.
0.3 for approved insulation.
0.15 for approved water spray with approved insulation.
[[Page 203]]
(G) The outlet of all vents and vent drains on tanks equipped with
emergency venting to permit pressures exceeding 2.5 p.s.i.g. shall be
arranged to discharge in such a way as to prevent localized overheating
of any part of the tank, in the event vapors from such vents are
ignited.
(H) Each commercial tank venting device shall have stamped on it the
opening pressure, the pressure at which the valve reaches the full open
position, and the flow capacity at the latter pressure, expressed in
cubic feet (meters) per hour of air at 60 [deg]F. (15.55 [deg]C) and at
a pressure of 14.7 p.s.i.a.
(I) The flow capacity of tank venting devices 12 inches (30.48 cm)
and smaller in nominal pipe size shall be determined by actual test of
each type and size of vent. These flow tests may be conducted by the
manufacturer if certified by a qualified impartial observer, or may be
conducted by an outside agency. The flow capacity of tank venting
devices larger than 12 inches (30.48 cm) nominal pipe size, including
manhole covers with long bolts or equivalent, may be calculated provided
that the opening pressure is actually measured, the rating pressure and
corresponding free orifice area are stated, the word ``calculated''
appears on the nameplate, and the computation is based on a flow
coefficient of 0.5 applied to the rated orifice area.
(vi) Vent piping for aboveground tanks. (A) Vent piping shall be
constructed in accordance with paragraph (c) of this section.
(B) Where vent pipe outlets for tanks storing Category 1 or 2
flammable liquids, or Category 3 flammable liquids with a flashpoint
below 100 [deg]F (37.8 [deg]C), are adjacent to buildings or public
ways, they shall be located so that the vapors are released at a safe
point outside of buildings and not less than 12 feet (3.658 m) above the
adjacent ground level. In order to aid their dispersion, vapors shall be
discharged upward or horizontally away from closely adjacent walls. Vent
outlets shall be located so that flammable vapors will not be trapped by
eaves or other obstructions and shall be at least 5 feet (1.52 m) from
building openings.
(C) When tank vent piping is manifolded, pipe sizes shall be such as
to discharge, within the pressure limitations of the system, the vapors
they may be required to handle when manifolded tanks are subject to the
same fire exposure.
(vii) Drainage, dikes, and walls for aboveground tanks--(A) Drainage
and diked areas. The area surrounding a tank or a group of tanks shall
be provided with drainage as in paragraph (i)(2)(vii)(B) of this
section, or shall be diked as provided in (i)(2)(vii)(C) of this
section, to prevent accidental discharge of liquid from endangering
adjoining property or reaching waterways.
(B) Drainage. Where protection of adjoining property or waterways is
by means of a natural or manmade drainage system, such systems shall
comply with the following:
(1) [Reserved]
(2) The drainage system shall terminate in vacant land or other area
or in an impounding basin having a capacity not smaller than that of the
largest tank served. This termination area and the route of the drainage
system shall be so located that, if the flammable liquids in the
drainage system are ignited, the fire will not seriously expose tanks or
adjoining property.
(C) Diked areas. Where protection of adjoining property or waterways
is accomplished by retaining the liquid around the tank by means of a
dike, the volume of the diked area shall comply with the following
requirements:
(1) Except as provided in paragraph (i)(2)(vii)(C)(2) of this
section, the volumetric capacity of the diked area shall not be less
than the greatest amount of liquid that can be released from the largest
tank within the diked area, assuming a full tank. The capacity of the
diked area enclosing more than one tank shall be calculated by deducting
the volume of the tanks other than the largest tank below the height of
the dike.
(2) For a tank or group of tanks with fixed roofs containing crude
petroleum with boilover characteristics, the volumetric capacity of the
diked area shall be not less than the capacity of the largest tank
served by the enclosure, assuming a full tank. The capacity of the diked
enclosure shall be calculated
[[Page 204]]
by deducting the volume below the height of the dike of all tanks within
the enclosure.
(3) Walls of the diked area shall be of earth, steel, concrete or
solid masonry designed to be liquidtight and to withstand a full
hydrostatic head. Earthen walls 3 feet (0.912 m) or more in height shall
have a flat section at the top not less than 2 feet (0.608 m) wide. The
slope of an earthen wall shall be consistent with the angle of repose of
the material of which the wall is constructed.
(4) The walls of the diked area shall be restricted to an average
height of 6 feet (1.824 m) above interior grade.
(5) [Reserved]
(6) No loose combustible material, empty or full drum or barrel,
shall be permitted within the diked area.
(viii) Tank openings other than vents for aboveground tanks.
(A)-(C) [Reserved]
(D) Openings for gaging shall be provided with a vaportight cap or
cover.
(E) For Category 2 flammable liquids or Category 3 flammable liquids
with a flashpoint below 100 [deg]F (37.8 [deg]C), other than crude oils,
gasolines, and asphalts, the fill pipe shall be so designed and
installed as to minimize the possibility of generating static
electricity. A fill pipe entering the top of a tank shall terminate
within 6 inches (15.24 cm) of the bottom of the tank and shall be
installed to avoid excessive vibration.
(F) Filling and emptying connections which are made and broken shall
be located outside of buildings at a location free from any source of
ignition and not less than 5 feet (1.52 m) away from any building
opening. Such connection shall be closed and liquidtight when not in
use. The connection shall be properly identified.
(3) Installation of underground tanks--(i) Location. Evacuation for
underground storage tanks shall be made with due care to avoid
undermining of foundations of existing structures. Underground tanks or
tanks under buildings shall be so located with respect to existing
building foundations and supports that the loads carried by the latter
cannot be transmitted to the tank. The distance from any part of a tank
storing Category 1 or 2 flammable liquids, or Category 3 flammable
liquids with a flashpoint below 100 [deg]F (37.8 [deg]C), to the nearest
wall of any basement or pit shall be not less than 1 foot (0.304 m), and
to any property line that may be built upon, not less than 3 feet (0.912
m). The distance from any part of a tank storing Category 3 flammable
liquids with a flashpoint at or above 100 [deg]F (37.8 [deg]C) or
Category 4 flammable liquids to the nearest wall of any basement, pit or
property line shall be not less than 1 foot (0.304 m).
(ii) Depth and cover. Underground tanks shall be set on firm
foundations and surrounded with at least 6 inches (15.24 cm) of
noncorrosive, inert materials such as clean sand, earth, or gravel well
tamped in place. The tank shall be placed in the hole with care since
dropping or rolling the tank into the hole can break a weld, puncture or
damage the tank, or scrape off the protective coating of coated tanks.
Tanks shall be covered with a minimum of 2 feet (0.608 m) of earth, or
shall be covered with not less than 1 foot (0.304 m) of earth, on top of
which shall be placed a slab of reinforced concrete not less than 4
inches (10.16 cm) thick. When underground tanks are, or are likely to
be, subject to traffic, they shall be protected against damage from
vehicles passing over them by at least 3 feet (0.912 m) of earth cover,
or 18 inches (45.72 cm) of well-tamped earth, plus 6 inches (15.24 cm)
of reinforced concrete or 8 inches (20.32 cm) of asphaltic concrete.
When asphaltic or reinforced concrete paving is used as part of the
protection, it shall extend at least 1 foot (0.304 m) horizontally
beyond the outline of the tank in all directions.
(iii) Corrosion protection. Corrosion protection for the tank and
its piping shall be provided by one or more of the following methods:
(A) Use of protective coatings or wrappings;
(B) Cathodic protection; or,
(C) Corrosion resistant materials of construction.
(iv) Vents. (A) Location and arrangement of vents for Category 1 or
2 flammable liquids, or Category 3 flammable liquids with a flashpoint
below 100 [deg]F (37.8 [deg]C). Vent pipes from tanks storing Category 1
or 2 flammable liquids, or
[[Page 205]]
Category 3 flammable liquids with a flashpoint below 100 [deg]F (37.8
[deg]C), shall be so located that the discharge point is outside of
buildings, higher than the fill pipe opening, and not less than 12 feet
(3.658 m) above the adjacent ground level. Vent pipes shall discharge
only upward in order to disperse vapors. Vent pipes 2 inches (5.08 cm)
or less in nominal inside diameter shall not be obstructed by devices
that will cause excessive back pressure. Vent pipe outlets shall be so
located that flammable vapors will not enter building openings, or be
trapped under eaves or other obstructions. If the vent pipe is less than
10 feet (3.04 m) in length, or greater than 2 inches (5.08 cm) in
nominal inside diameter, the outlet shall be provided with a vacuum and
pressure relief device or there shall be an approved flame arrester
located in the vent line at the outlet or within the approved distance
from the outlet.
(B) Size of vents. Each tank shall be vented through piping adequate
in size to prevent blow-back of vapor or liquid at the fill opening
while the tank is being filled. Vent pipes shall be not less than 1\1/4\
inch (3.175 cm) nominal inside diameter.
Table F-11--Vent Line Diameters
----------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------
Pipe length \1\
Maximum flow GPM (L) --------------------------------------------------------
50 feet (15.2 m) 100 feet (30.4 m) 200 feet (60.8 m)
----------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------
Inches (cm) Inches (cm) Inches (cm)
100 (378.5)............................................ 1\1/4\ (3.175) 1\1/4\ (3.175) 1\1/4\ (3.175)
200 (757).............................................. 1\1/4\ (3.175) 1\1/4\ (3.175) 1\1/4\ (3.175)
300 (1,135.5).......................................... 1\1/4\ (3.175) 1\1/4\ (3.175) 1\1/2\ (3.81)
400 (1,514)............................................ 1\1/4\ (3.175) 1\1/2\ (3.81) 2 (5.08)
500 (1,892.5).......................................... 1\1/2\ (3.81) 1\1/2\ (3.81) 2 (5.08)
600 (2,271)............................................ 1\1/2\ (3.81) 2 (5.08) 2 (5.08)
700 (2,649.5).......................................... 2 (5.08) 2 (5.08) 2 (5.08)
800 (3,028)............................................ 2 (5.08) 2 (5.08) 3 (7.62)
900 (3,406.5).......................................... 2 (5.08) 2 (5.08) 3 (7.62)
1,000 (3,785).......................................... 2 (5.08) 2 (5.08) 3 (7.62)
----------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------
\1\ Vent lines of 50 ft. (15.2 m), 100 ft. (30.4 m), and 200 ft. (60.8 m) of pipe plus 7 ells.
(C) Location and arrangement of vents for Category 3 flammable
liquids with a flashpoint at or above 100 [deg]F (37.8 [deg]C) or
Category 4 flammable liquids. Vent pipes from tanks storing Category 3
flammable liquids with a flashpoint at or above 100 [deg]F (37.8 [deg]C)
or Category 4 flammable liquids shall terminate outside of the building
and higher than the fill pipe opening. Vent outlets shall be above
normal snow level. They may be fitted with return bends, coarse screens
or other devices to minimize ingress of foreign material.
(D) Vent piping shall be constructed in accordance with paragraph
(3)(iv)(C) of this section. Vent pipes shall be so laid as to drain
toward the tank without sags or traps in which liquid can collect. They
shall be located so that they will not be subjected to physical damage.
The tank end of the vent pipe shall enter the tank through the top.
(E) When tank vent piping is manifolded, pipe sizes shall be such as
to discharge, within the pressure limitations of the system, the vapors
they may be required to handle when manifolded tanks are filled
simultaneously.
(v) Tank openings other than vents. (A) Connections for all tank
openings shall be vapor or liquid tight.
(B) Openings for manual gaging, if independent of the fill pipe,
shall be provided with a liquid-tight cap or cover. If inside a
building, each such opening shall be protected against liquid overflow
and possible vapor release by means of a spring loaded check valve or
other approved device.
(C) Fill and discharge lines shall enter tanks only through the top.
Fill lines shall be sloped toward the tank.
(D) For Category 2 flammable liquids, or Category 3 flammable
liquids with a flashpoint below 100 [deg]F (37.8 [deg]C), other than
crude oils, gasolines, and asphalts, the fill pipe shall be so designed
and installed as to minimize the
[[Page 206]]
possibility of generating static electricity by terminating within 6
inches (15.24 cm) of the bottom of the tank.
(E) Filling and emptying connections which are made and broken shall
be located outside of buildings at a location free from any source of
ignition and not less than 5 feet (1.52 m) away from any building
opening. Such connection shall be closed and liquidtight when not in
use. The connection shall be properly identified.
(4) Installation of tanks inside of buildings--(i) Location. Tanks
shall not be permitted inside of buildings except as provided in
paragraphs (e), (g), (h), or (i) of this section.
(ii) Vents. Vents for tanks inside of buildings shall be as provided
in paragraphs (i)(2) (iv), (v), (vi)(B), and (3)(iv) of this section,
except that emergency venting by the use of weak roof seams on tanks
shall not be permitted. Vents shall discharge vapors outside the
buildings.
(iii) Vent piping. Vent piping shall be constructed in accordance
with paragraph (c) of this section.
(iv) Tank openings other than vents. (A) Connections for all tank
openings shall be vapor or liquidtight. Vents are covered in paragraph
(i)(4)(ii) of this section.
(B) Each connection to a tank inside of buildings through which
liquid can normally flow shall be provided with an internal or an
external valve located as close as practical to the shell of the tank.
Such valves, when external, and their connections to the tank shall be
of steel except when the chemical characteristics of the liquid stored
are incompatible with steel. When materials other than steel are
necessary, they shall be suitable for the pressures, structural
stresses, and temperatures involved, including fire exposures.
(C) Flammable liquid tanks located inside of buildings, except in
one-story buildings designed and protected for flammable liquid storage,
shall be provided with an automatic-closing heat-actuated valve on each
withdrawal connection below the liquid level, except for connections
used for emergency disposal, to prevent continued flow in the event of
fire in the vicinity of the tank. This function may be incorporated in
the valve required in paragraph (i)(4)(iv)(B) of this section, and if a
separate valve, shall be located adjacent to the valve required in
paragraph (i)(4)(iv)(B) of this section.
(D) Openings for manual gaging, if independent of the fill pipe (see
paragraph (i)(4)(iv)(F) of this section), shall be provided with a
vaportight cap or cover. Each such opening shall be protected against
liquid overflow and possible vapor release by means of a spring loaded
check valve or other approved device.
(E) For Category 2 flammable liquids, or Category 3 flammable
liquids with a flashpoint below 100 [deg]F (37.8 [deg]C), other than
crude oils, gasolines, and asphalts, the fill pipe shall be so designed
and installed as to minimize the possibility of generating static
electricity by terminating within 6 inches (15.24 cm) of the bottom of
the tank.
(F) The fill pipe inside of the tank shall be installed to avoid
excessive vibration of the pipe.
(G) The inlet of the fill pipe shall be located outside of buildings
at a location free from any source of ignition and not less than 5 feet
(1.52 m) away from any building opening. The inlet of the fill pipe
shall be closed and liquidtight when not in use. The fill connection
shall be properly identified.
(H) Tanks inside buildings shall be equipped with a device, or other
means shall be provided, to prevent overflow into the building.
(5) Supports, foundations, and anchorage for all tank locations--(i)
General. Tank supports shall be installed on firm foundations. Tank
supports shall be of concrete, masonry, or protected steel. Single wood
timber supports (not cribbing) laid horizontally may be used for outside
aboveground tanks if not more than 12 inches (30.48 cm) high at their
lowest point.
(ii) Fire resistance. Steel supports or exposed piling shall be
protected by materials having a fire resistance rating of not less than
2 hours, except that steel saddles need not be protected if less than 12
inches (30.48 cm) high at their lowest point. Water spray protection or
its equivalent may be used in lieu of fire-resistive materials to
protect supports.
(iii) Spheres. The design of the supporting structure for tanks such
as
[[Page 207]]
spheres shall receive special engineering consideration.
(iv) Load distribution. Every tank shall be so supported as to
prevent the excessive concentration of loads on the supporting portion
of the shell.
(v) Foundations. Tanks shall rest on the ground or on foundations
made of concrete, masonry, piling, or steel. Tank foundations shall be
designed to minimize the possibility of uneven settling of the tank and
to minimize corrosion in any part of the tank resting on the foundation.
(vi) Flood areas. Where a tank is located in an area that may be
subjected to flooding, the applicable precautions outlined in this
subdivision shall be observed.
(A) No aboveground vertical storage tank containing a flammable
liquid shall be located so that the allowable liquid level within the
tank is below the established maximum flood stage, unless the tank is
provided with a guiding structure such as described in paragraphs
(i)(5)(vi) (M), (N), and (O) of this section.
(B) Independent water supply facilities shall be provided at
locations where there is no ample and dependable public water supply
available for loading partially empty tanks with water.
(C) In addition to the preceding requirements, each tank so located
that more than 70 percent, but less than 100 percent, of its allowable
liquid storage capacity will be submerged at the established maximum
flood stage, shall be safeguarded by one of the following methods: Tank
shall be raised, or its height shall be increased, until its top extends
above the maximum flood stage a distance equivalent to 30 percent or
more of its allowable liquid storage capacity: Provided, however, That
the submerged part of the tank shall not exceed two and one-half times
the diameter. Or, as an alternative to the foregoing, adequate
noncombustible structural guides, designed to permit the tank to float
vertically without loss of product, shall be provided.
(D) Each horizontal tank so located that more than 70 percent of its
storage capacity will be submerged at the established flood stage, shall
be anchored, attached to a foundation of concrete or of steel and
concrete, of sufficient weight to provide adequate load for the tank
when filled with flammable liquid and submerged by flood waters to the
established flood stage, or adequately secured by other means.
(E) [Reserved]
(F) At locations where there is no ample and dependable water
supply, or where filling of underground tanks with liquids is
impracticable because of the character of their contents, their use, or
for other reasons, each tank shall be safeguarded against movement when
empty and submerged by high ground water or flood waters by anchoring,
weighting with concrete or other approved solid loading material, or
securing by other means. Each such tank shall be so constructed and
installed that it will safely resist external pressures due to high
ground water or flood waters.
(G) At locations where there is an ample and dependable water supply
available, underground tanks containing flammable liquids, so installed
that more than 70 percent of their storage capacity will be submerged at
the maximum flood stage, shall be so anchored, weighted, or secured by
other means, as to prevent movement of such tanks when filled with
flammable liquids, and submerged by flood waters to the established
flood stage.
(H) Pipe connections below the allowable liquid level in a tank
shall be provided with valves or cocks located as closely as practicable
to the tank shell. Such valves and their connections to tanks shall be
of steel or other material suitable for use with the liquid being
stored. Cast iron shall not be permitted.
(I) At locations where an independent water supply is required, it
shall be entirely independent of public power and water supply.
Independent source of water shall be available when flood waters reach a
level not less than 10 feet (3.04 m) below the bottom of the lowest tank
on a property.
(J) The self-contained power and pumping unit shall be so located or
so designed that pumping into tanks may be carried on continuously
throughout the rise in flood waters from a level 10 feet (3.04 m) below
the lowest tank to the level of the potential flood stage.
[[Page 208]]
(K) Capacity of the pumping unit shall be such that the rate of rise
of water in all tanks shall be equivalent to the established potential
average rate of rise of flood waters at any stage.
(L) Each independent pumping unit shall be tested periodically to
insure that it is in satisfactory operating condition.
(M) Structural guides for holding floating tanks above their
foundations shall be so designed that there will be no resistance to the
free rise of a tank, and shall be constructed of noncombustible
material.
(N) The strength of the structure shall be adequate to resist
lateral movement of a tank subject to a horizontal force in any
direction equivalent to not less than 25 pounds per square foot (1.05 kg
m\2\) acting on the projected vertical cross-sectional area of the tank.
(O) Where tanks are situated on exposed points or bends in a
shoreline where swift currents in flood waters will be present, the
structures shall be designed to withstand a unit force of not less than
50 pounds per square foot (2.1 kg m\2\).
(P) The filling of a tank to be protected by water loading shall be
started as soon as flood waters reach a dangerous flood stage. The rate
of filling shall be at least equal to the rate of rise of the
floodwaters (or the established average potential rate of rise).
(Q) Sufficient fuel to operate the water pumps shall be available at
all times to insure adequate power to fill all tankage with water.
(R) All valves on connecting pipelines shall be closed and locked in
closed position when water loading has been completed.
(S) Where structural guides are provided for the protection of
floating tanks, all rigid connections between tanks and pipelines shall
be disconnected and blanked off or blinded before the floodwaters reach
the bottom of the tank, unless control valves and their connections to
the tank are of a type designed to prevent breakage between the valve
and the tank shell.
(T) All valves attached to tanks other than those used in connection
with water loading operations shall be closed and locked.
(U) If a tank is equipped with a swing line, the swing pipe shall be
raised to and secured at its highest position.
(V) Inspections. The Assistant Secretary or his designated
representative shall make periodic inspections of all plants where the
storage of flammable liquids is such as to require compliance with the
foregoing requirements, in order to assure the following:
(1) That all flammable liquid storage tanks are in compliance with
these requirements and so maintained.
(2) That detailed printed instructions of what to do in flood
emergencies are properly posted.
(3) That station operators and other employees depended upon to
carry out such instructions are thoroughly informed as to the location
and operation of such valves and other equipment necessary to effect
these requirements.
(vii) Earthquake areas. In areas subject to earthquakes, the tank
supports and connections shall be designed to resist damage as a result
of such shocks.
(6) Sources of ignition. In locations where flammable vapors may be
present, precautions shall be taken to prevent ignition by eliminating
or controlling sources of ignition. Sources of ignition may include open
flames, lightning, smoking, cutting and welding, hot surfaces,
frictional heat, sparks (static, electrical, and mechanical),
spontaneous ignition, chemical and physical-chemical reactions, and
radiant heat.
(7) Testing--(i) General. All tanks, whether shop built or field
erected, shall be strength tested before they are placed in service in
accordance with the applicable paragraphs of the code under which they
were built. The American Society of Mechanical Engineers (ASME) code
stamp, American Petroleum Institute (API) monogram, or the label of the
Underwriters' Laboratories, Inc., on a tank shall be evidence of
compliance with this strength test. Tanks not marked in accordance with
the above codes shall be strength tested before they are placed in
service in accordance with good engineering principles and reference
shall be made to the sections on testing in the codes
[[Page 209]]
listed in paragraphs (i)(1) (iii)(A), (iv)(B), or (v)(B) of this
section.
(ii) Strength. When the vertical length of the fill and vent pipes
is such that when filled with liquid the static head imposed upon the
bottom of the tank exceeds 10 pounds per square inch (68.94 kPa), the
tank and related piping shall be tested hydrostatically to a pressure
equal to the static head thus imposed.
(iii) Tightness. In addition to the strength test called for in
paragraphs (i)(7) (i) and (ii) of this section, all tanks and
connections shall be tested for tightness. Except for underground tanks,
this tightness test shall be made at operating pressure with air, inert
gas, or water prior to placing the tank in service. In the case of
field-erected tanks the strength test may be considered to be the test
for tank tightness. Underground tanks and piping, before being covered,
enclosed, or placed in use, shall be tested for tightness
hydrostatically, or with air pressure at not less than 3 pounds per
square inch (20.68 kPa) and not more than 5 pounds per square inch
(34.47 kPa).
(iv) Repairs. All leaks or deformations shall be corrected in an
acceptable manner before the tank is placed in service. Mechanical
caulking is not permitted for correcting leaks in welded tanks except
pinhole leaks in the roof.
(v) Derated operations. Tanks to be operated at pressures below
their design pressure may be tested by the applicable provisions of
paragraphs (i)(7) (i) or (ii) of this section, based upon the pressure
developed under full emergency venting of the tank.
(j) Piping, valves, and fittings--(1) General--(i) Design. The
design (including selection of materials) fabrication, assembly, test,
and inspection of piping systems containing flammable liquids shall be
suitable for the expected working pressures and structural stresses.
Conformity with the applicable provisions of Pressure Piping, ANSI B31
series and the provisions of this paragraph, shall be considered prima
facie evidence of compliance with the foregoing provisions.
(ii) Exceptions. This paragraph does not apply to any of the
following:
(A) Tubing or casing on any oil or gas wells and any piping
connected directly thereto.
(B) Motor vehicle, aircraft, boat, or portable or stationary
engines.
(C) Piping within the scope of any applicable boiler and pressures
vessel code.
(iii) Definitions. As used in this paragraph, piping systems consist
of pipe, tubing, flanges, bolting, gaskets, valves, fittings, the
pressure containing parts of other components such as expansion joints
and strainers, and devices which serve such purposes as mixing,
separating, snubbing, distributing, metering, or controlling flow.
(2) Materials for piping, valves, and fittings--(i) Required
materials. Materials for piping, valves, or fittings shall be steel,
nodular iron, or malleable iron, except as provided in paragraphs (j)(2)
(ii), (iii) and (iv) of this section.
(ii) Exceptions. Materials other than steel, nodular iron, or
malleable iron may be used underground, or if required by the properties
of the flammable liquid handled. Material other than steel, nodular
iron, or malleable iron shall be designed to specifications embodying
principles recognized as good engineering practices for the material
used.
(iii) Linings. Piping, valves, and fittings may have combustible or
noncombustible linings.
(iv) Low-melting materials. When low-melting point materials such as
aluminum and brass or materials that soften on fire exposure such as
plastics, or non-ductile materials such as cast iron, are necessary,
special consideration shall be given to their behavior on fire exposure.
If such materials are used in above ground piping systems or inside
buildings, they shall be suitably protected against fire exposure or so
located that any spill resulting from the failure of these materials
could not unduly expose persons, important buildings or structures or
can be readily controlled by remote valves.
(3) Pipe joints. Joints shall be made liquid tight. Welded or
screwed joints or approved connectors shall be used. Threaded joints and
connections shall be made up tight with a suitable lubricant or piping
compound. Pipe joints
[[Page 210]]
dependent upon the friction characteristics of combustible materials for
mechanical continuity of piping shall not be used inside buildings. They
may be used outside of buildings above or below ground. If used above
ground, the piping shall either be secured to prevent disengagement at
the fitting or the piping system shall be so designed that any spill
resulting from such disengagement could not unduly expose persons,
important buildings or structures, and could be readily controlled by
remote valves.
(4) Supports. Piping systems shall be substantially supported and
protected against physical damage and excessive stresses arising from
settlement, vibration, expansion, or contraction.
(5) Protection against corrosion. All piping for flammable liquids,
both aboveground and underground, where subject to external corrosion,
shall be painted or otherwise protected.
(6) Valves. Piping systems shall contain a sufficient number of
valves to operate the system properly and to protect the plant. Piping
systems in connection with pumps shall contain a sufficient number of
valves to control properly the flow of liquid in normal operation and in
the event of physical damage. Each connection to pipelines, by which
equipments such as tankcars or tank vehicles discharge liquids by means
of pumps into storage tanks, shall be provided with a check valve for
automatic protection against backflow if the piping arrangement is such
that backflow from the system is possible.
(7) Testing. All piping before being covered, enclosed, or placed in
use shall be hydrostatically tested to 150 percent of the maximum
anticipated pressure of the system, or pneumatically tested to 110
percent of the maximum anticipated pressure of the system, but not less
than 5 pounds per square inch gage at the highest point of the system.
This test shall be maintained for a sufficient time to complete visual
inspection of all joints and connections, but for at least 10 minutes.
(k) Marine service stations--(1) Dispensing. (i) The dispensing area
shall be located away from other structures so as to provide room for
safe ingress and egress of craft to be fueled. Dispensing units shall in
all cases be at least 20 feet (6.08 m) from any activity involving fixed
sources of ignition.
(ii) Dispensing shall be by approved dispensing units with or
without integral pumps and may be located on open piers, wharves, or
floating docks or on shore or on piers of the solid fill type.
(iii) Dispensing nozzles shall be automatic-closing without a hold-
open latch.
(2) Tanks and pumps. (i) Tanks, and pumps not integral with the
dispensing unit, shall be on shore or on a pier of the solid fill type,
except as provided in paragraphs (k)(2) (ii) and (iii) of this section.
(ii) Where shore location would require excessively long supply
lines to dispensers, tanks may be installed on a pier provided that
applicable portions of paragraph (b) of this section relative to
spacing, diking, and piping are complied with and the quantity so stored
does not exceed 1,100 gallons (4,163.5 L) aggregate capacity.
(iii) Shore tanks supplying marine service stations may be located
above ground, where rock ledges or high water table make underground
tanks impractical.
(iv) Where tanks are at an elevation which would produce gravity
head on the dispensing unit, the tank outlet shall be equipped with a
pressure control valve positioned adjacent to and outside the tank block
valve specified in Sec. 1926.152(c)(8) of this section, so adjusted
that liquid cannot flow by gravity from the tank in case of piping or
hose failure.
(3) Piping. (i) Piping between shore tanks and dispensing units
shall be as described in paragraph (k)(2)(iii) of this section, except
that, where dispensing is from a floating structure, suitable lengths of
oil-resistant flexible hose may be employed between the shore piping and
the piping on the floating structure as made necessary by change in
water level or shoreline.
[[Page 211]]
[GRAPHIC] [TIFF OMITTED] TR26MR12.128
[[Page 212]]
[GRAPHIC] [TIFF OMITTED] TR26MR12.129
(ii) A readily accessible valve to shut off the supply from shore
shall be provided in each pipeline at or near the approach to the pier
and at the shore end of each pipeline adjacent to the point where
flexible hose is attached.
(iii) Piping shall be located so as to be protected from physical
damage.
(iv) Piping handling Category 1 or 2 flammable liquids, or Category
3 flammable liquids with a flashpoint below 100 [deg]F (37.8 [deg]C),
shall be grounded to control stray currents.
(4) Definition; as used in this section: Marine service station
shall mean that portion of a property where flammable liquids used as
fuels are stored and dispensed from fixed equipment on shore, piers,
wharves, or floating docks into the fuel tanks of self-propelled craft,
and shall include all facilities used in connection therewith.
[44 FR 8577, Feb. 9, 1979; 44 FR 20940, Apr. 6, 1979, as amended at 51
FR 25318, July 11, 1986; 58 FR 35162, June 30, 1993; 63 FR 33469, June
18, 1998; 77 FR 17891, Mar. 26, 2012]
Sec. 1926.153 Liquefied petroleum gas (LP-Gas).
(a) Approval of equipment and systems. (1) Each system shall have
containers, valves, connectors, manifold valve assemblies, and
regulators of an approved type.
(2) All cylinders shall meet the Department of Transportation
specification identification requirements published in 49 CFR part 178,
Shipping Container Specifications.
[[Page 213]]
(3) Definition. As used in this section, Containers--All vessels,
such as tanks, cylinders, or drums, used for transportation or storing
liquefied petroleum gases.
(b) Welding on LP-Gas containers. Welding is prohibited on
containers.
(c) Container valves and container accessories. (1) Valves,
fittings, and accessories connected directly to the container, including
primary shut off valves, shall have a rated working pressure of at least
250 p.s.i.g. and shall be of material and design suitable for LP-Gas
service.
(2) Connections to containers, except safety relief connections,
liquid level gauging devices, and plugged openings, shall have shutoff
valves located as close to the container as practicable.
(d) Safety devices. (1) Every container and every vaporizer shall be
provided with one or more approved safety relief valves or devices.
These valves shall be arranged to afford free vent to the outer air with
discharge not less than 5 feet horizontally away from any opening into a
building which is below such discharge.
(2) Shutoff valves shall not be installed between the safety relief
device and the container, or the equipment or piping to which the safety
relief device is connected, except that a shutoff valve may be used
where the arrangement of this valve is such that full required capacity
flow through the safety relief device is always afforded.
(3) Container safety relief devices and regulator relief vents shall
be located not less than 5 feet in any direction from air openings into
sealed combustion system appliances or mechanical ventilation air
intakes.
(e) Dispensing. (1) Filling of fuel containers for trucks or motor
vehicles from bulk storage containers shall be performed not less than
10 feet from the nearest masonry-walled building, or not less than 25
feet from the nearest building or other construction and, in any event,
not less than 25 feet from any building opening.
(2) Filling of portable containers or containers mounted on skids
from storage containers shall be performed not less than 50 feet from
the nearest building.
(f) Requirements for appliances. (1) LP-Gas consuming appliances
shall be approved types.
(2) Any appliance that was originally manufactured for operation
with a gaseous fuel other than LP-Gas, and is in good condition, may be
used with LP-Gas only after it is properly converted, adapted, and
tested for performance with LP-Gas before the appliance is placed in
use.
(g) Containers and regulating equipment installed outside of
buildings or structures. Containers shall be upright upon firm
foundations or otherwise firmly secured. The possible effect on the
outlet piping of settling shall be guarded against by a flexible
connection or special fitting.
(h) Containers and equipment used inside of buildings or structures.
(1) When operational requirements make portable use of containers
necessary, and their location outside of buildings or structures is
impracticable, containers and equipment shall be permitted to be used
inside of buildings or structures in accordance with paragraphs (h)(2)
through (11) of this section.
(2) Containers in use means connected for use.
(3) Systems utilizing containers having a water capacity greater
than 2\1/2\ pounds (nominal 1 pound LP-Gas capacity) shall be equipped
with excess flow valves. Such excess flow valves shall be either
integral with the container valves or in the connections to the
container valve outlets.
(4) Regulators shall be either directly connected to the container
valves or to manifolds connected to the container valves. The regulator
shall be suitable for use with LP-Gas. Manifolds and fittings connecting
containers to pressure regulator inlets shall be designed for at least
250 p.s.i.g. service pressure.
(5) Valves on containers having water capacity greater than 50
pounds (nominal 20 pounds LP-Gas capacity) shall be protected from
damage while in use or storage.
(6) Aluminum piping or tubing shall not be used.
(7) Hose shall be designed for a working pressure of at least 250
p.s.i.g. Design, construction, and performance of hose, and hose
connections shall have their suitability determined by listing
[[Page 214]]
by a nationally recognized testing agency. The hose length shall be as
short as practicable. Hoses shall be long enough to permit compliance
with spacing provisions of paragraphs (h)(1) through (13) of this
section, without kinking or straining, or causing hose to be so close to
a burner as to be damaged by heat.
(8) Portable heaters, including salamanders, shall be equipped with
an approved automatic device to shut off the flow of gas to the main
burner, and pilot if used, in the event of flame failure. Such heaters,
having inputs above 50,000 B.t.u. per hour, shall be equipped with
either a pilot, which must be lighted and proved before the main burner
can be turned on, or an electrical ignition system.
Note: The provisions of this subparagraph do not apply to portable
heaters under 7,500 B.t.u. per hour input when used with containers
having a maximum water capacity of 2\1/2\ pounds.
(9) Container valves, connectors, regulators, manifolds, piping, and
tubing shall not be used as structural supports for heaters.
(10) Containers, regulating equipment, manifolds, pipe, tubing, and
hose shall be located to minimize exposure to high temperatures or
physical damage.
(11) Containers having a water capacity greater than 2\1/2\ pounds
(nominal 1 pound LP-Gas capacity) connected for use shall stand on a
firm and substantially level surface and, when necessary, shall be
secured in an upright position.
(12) The maximum water capacity of individual containers shall be
245 pounds (nominal 100 pounds LP-Gas capacity).
(13) For temporary heating, heaters (other than integral heater-
container units) shall be located at least 6 feet from any LP-Gas
container. This shall not prohibit the use of heaters specifically
designed for attachment to the container or to a supporting standard,
provided they are designed and installed so as to prevent direct or
radiant heat application from the heater onto the containers. Blower and
radiant type heaters shall not be directed toward any LP-Gas container
within 20 feet.
(14) If two or more heater-container units, of either the integral
or nonintegral type, are located in an unpartitioned area on the same
floor, the container or containers of each unit shall be separated from
the container or containers of any other unit by at least 20 feet.
(15) When heaters are connected to containers for use in an
unpartitioned area on the same floor, the total water capacity of
containers, manifolded together for connection to a heater or heaters,
shall not be greater than 735 pounds (nominal 300 pounds LP-Gas
capacity). Such manifolds shall be separated by at least 20 feet.
(16) Storage of containers awaiting use shall be in accordance with
paragraphs (j) and (k) of this section.
(i) Multiple container systems. (1) Valves in the assembly of
multiple container systems shall be arranged so that replacement of
containers can be made without shutting off the flow of gas in the
system. This provision is not to be construed as requiring an automatic
changeover device.
(2) Heaters shall be equipped with an approved regulator in the
supply line between the fuel cylinder and the heater unit. Cylinder
connectors shall be provided with an excess flow valve to minimize the
flow of gas in the event the fuel line becomes ruptured.
(3) Regulators and low-pressure relief devices shall be rigidly
attached to the cylinder valves, clyinders, supporting standards, the
building walls, or otherwise rigidly secured, and shall be so installed
or protected from the elements.
(j) Storage of LPG containers. Storage of LPG within buildings is
prohibited.
(k) Storage outside of buildings. (1) Storage outside of buildings,
for containers awaiting use, shall be located from the nearest building
or group of buildings, in accordance with the following:
Table F-3
------------------------------------------------------------------------
Distance
Quantity of LP-Gas stored (feet)
------------------------------------------------------------------------
500 lbs. or less............................................ 0
501 to 6,000 lbs............................................ 10
6,001 to 10,000 lbs......................................... 20
Over 10,000 lbs............................................. 25
------------------------------------------------------------------------
[[Page 215]]
(2) Containers shall be in a suitable ventilated enclosure or
otherwise protected against tampering.
(l) Fire protection. Storage locations shall be provided with at
least one approved portable fire extinguisher having a rating of not
less than 20-B:C.
(m) Systems utilizing containers other than DOT containers--(1)
Application. This paragraph applies specifically to systems utilizing
storage containers other than those constructed in accordance with DOT
specifications. Paragraph (b) of this section applies to this paragraph
unless otherwise noted in paragraph (b) of this section.
(2) Design pressure and classification of storage containers.
Storage containers shall be designed and classified in accordance with
Table F-31.
Table F-31
------------------------------------------------------------------------
Minimum design pressure of container,
lb. per sq. in. gage
--------------------------------------
For gases with 1949 edition of ASME
vapor press. Code (Par. U-200, U-
Not to exceed 1949 and 201); 1950, 1952,
Container type lb. per sq. in. earlier 1956, 1959, 1962,
gage at 100 editions of 1965, and 1968
[deg]F. (37.8 ASME Code (Par. (Division 1)
[deg]C.) U-68, U-69) editions of ASME
Code; All editions
of API-ASME Code \3\
------------------------------------------------------------------------
\1\ 80 \1\ 80 \1\ 80 \1\ 100
100 100 100 125
125 125 125 156
150 150 150 187
175 175 175 219
\2\ 200 215 200 250
------------------------------------------------------------------------
\1\ New storage containers of the 80 type have not been authorized since
Dec. 31, 1947.
\2\ Container type may be increased by increments of 25. The minimum
design pressure of containers shall be 100% of the container type
designation when constructed under 1949 or earlier editions of the
ASME Code (Par. U-68 and U-69). The minimum design pressure of
containers shall be 125% of the container type designation when
constructed under: (1) the 1949 ASME Code (Par. U-200 and U-201), (2)
1950, 1952, 1956, 1959, 1962, 1965, and 1968 (Division 1) editions of
the ASME Code, and (3) all editions of the API-ASME Code.
\3\ Construction of containers under the API-ASME Code is not authorized
after July 1, 1961.
(3) Containers with foundations attached (portable or semiportable b
containers with suitable steel ``runners'' or ``skids'' and popularly
known in the industry as ``skid tanks'') shall be designed, installed,
and used in accordance with these rules subject to the following
provisions:
(i) If they are to be used at a given general location for a
temporary period not to exceed 6 months they need not have fire-
resisting foundations or saddles but shall have adequate ferrous metal
supports.
(ii) They shall not be located with the outside bottom of the
container shell more than 5 feet (1.52 m) above the surface of the
ground unless fire-resisting supports are provided.
(iii) The bottom of the skids shall not be less than 2 inches (5.08
cm) or more than 12 inches (30.48 cm) below the outside bottom of the
container shell.
(iv) Flanges, nozzles, valves, fittings, and the like, having
communication with the interior of the container, shall be protected
against physical damage.
(v) When not permanently located on fire-resisting foundations,
piping connections shall be sufficiently flexible to minimize the
possibility of breakage or leakage of connections if the container
settles, moves, or is otherwise displaced.
(vi) Skids, or lugs for attachment of skids, shall be secured to the
container in accordance with the code or rules under which the container
is designed and built (with a minimum factor of safety of four) to
withstand loading in any direction equal to four times the weight of the
container and attachments when filled to the maximum permissible loaded
weight.
(4) Field welding where necessary shall be made only on saddle
plates or brackets which were applied by the manufacturer of the tank.
(n) When LP-Gas and one or more other gases are stored or used in
the same area, the containers shall be marked to identify their content.
Marking shall be in compliance with American National Standard Z48.1-
1954, ``Method of Marking Portable Compressed Gas Containers To Identify
the Material Contained.''
(o) Damage from vehicles. When damage to LP-Gas systems from
vehicular traffic is a possibility, precautions against such damage
shall be taken.
[44 FR 8577, Feb. 9, 1979; 44 FR 20940, Apr. 6, 1979, as amended at 58
FR 35170, June 30, 1993]
Sec. 1926.154 Temporary heating devices.
(a) Ventilation. (1) Fresh air shall be supplied in sufficient
quantities to maintain the health and safety of workmen. Where natural
means of fresh air supply is inadequate, mechanical ventilation shall be
provided.
[[Page 216]]
(2) When heaters are used in confined spaces, special care shall be
taken to provide sufficient ventilation in order to ensure proper
combustion, maintain the health and safety of workmen, and limit
temperature rise in the area.
(b) Clearance and mounting. (1) Temporary heating devices shall be
installed to provide clearance to combustible material not less than the
amount shown in Table F-4.
(2) Temporary heating devices, which are listed for installation
with lesser clearances than specified in Table F-4, may be installed in
accordance with their approval.
Table F-4
------------------------------------------------------------------------
Minimum clearance, (inches)
------------------------------
Heating appliances Chimney
Sides Rear connector
------------------------------------------------------------------------
Room heater, circulating type............ 12 12 18
Room heater, radiant type................ 36 36 18
------------------------------------------------------------------------
(3) Heaters not suitable for use on wood floors shall not be set
directly upon them or other combustible materials. When such heaters are
used, they shall rest on suitable heat insulating material or at least
1-inch concrete, or equivalent. The insulating material shall extend
beyond the heater 2 feet or more in all directions.
(4) Heaters used in the vicinity of combustible tarpaulins, canvas,
or similar coverings shall be located at least 10 feet from the
coverings. The coverings shall be securely fastened to prevent ignition
or upsetting of the heater due to wind action on the covering or other
material.
(c) Stability. Heaters, when in use, shall be set horizontally
level, unless otherwise permitted by the manufacturer's markings.
(d) Solid fuel salamanders. Solid fuel salamanders are prohibited in
buildings and on scaffolds.
(e) Oil-fired heaters. (1) Flammable liquid-fired heaters shall be
equipped with a primary safety control to stop the flow of fuel in the
event of flame failure. Barometric or gravity oil feed shall not be
considered a primary safety control.
(2) Heaters designed for barometric or gravity oil feed shall be
used only with the integral tanks.
(3) [Reserved]
(4) Heaters specifically designed and approved for use with separate
supply tanks may be directly connected for gravity feed, or an automatic
pump, from a supply tank.
Sec. 1926.155 Definitions applicable to this subpart.
(a) Approved, for the purpose of this subpart, means equipment that
has been listed or approved by a nationally recognized testing
laboratory such as Factory Mutual Engineering Corp., or Underwriters'
Laboratories, Inc., or Federal agencies such as Bureau of Mines, or U.S.
Coast Guard, which issue approvals for such equipment.
(b) Closed container means a container so sealed by means of a lid
or other device that neither liquid nor vapor will escape from it at
ordinary temperatures.
(c) [Reserved]
(d) Combustion means any chemical process that involves oxidation
sufficient to produce light or heat.
(e) Fire brigade means an organized group of employees that are
knowledgeable, trained, and skilled in the safe evacuation of employees
during emergency situations and in assisting in fire fighting
operations.
(f) Fire resistance means so resistant to fire that, for specified
time and under conditions of a standard heat intensity, it will not fail
structurally and will not permit the side away from the fire to become
hotter than a specified temperature. For purposes of this part, fire
resistance shall be determined by the Standard Methods of Fire Tests of
Building Construction and Materials, NFPA 251-1969.
(g) Flammable means capable of being easily ignited, burning
intensely, or having a rapid rate of flame spread.
(h) Flammable liquid means any liquid having a vapor pressure not
exceeding 40 pounds per square inch (absolute) at 100 [deg]F (37.8
[deg]C) and having a flashpoint at or below 199.4 [deg]F (93 [deg]C).
Flammable liquids are divided into four categories as follows:
(1) Category 1 shall include liquids having flashpoints below 73.4
[deg]F (23 [deg]C)
[[Page 217]]
and having a boiling point at or below 95 [deg]F (35 [deg]C).
(2) Category 2 shall include liquids having flashpoints below 73.4
[deg]F (23 [deg]C) and having a boiling point above 95 [deg]F (35
[deg]C).
(3) Category 3 shall include liquids having flashpoints at or above
73.4 [deg]F (23 [deg]C) and at or below 140 [deg]F (60 [deg]C).
(4) Category 4 shall include liquids having flashpoints above 140
[deg]F (60 [deg]C) and at or below 199.4 [deg]F (93 [deg]C).
(i) Flash point of the liquid means the temperature at which it
gives off vapor sufficient to form an ignitable mixture with the air
near the surface of the liquid or within the vessel used as determined
by appropriate test procedure and apparatus as specified below.
(1) The flashpoint of liquids having a viscosity less than 45
Saybolt Universal Second(s) at 100 [deg]F (37.8 [deg]C) and a flashpoint
below 175 [deg]F (79.4 [deg]C) shall be determined in accordance with
the Standard Method of Test for Flash Point by the Tag Closed Tester,
ASTM D-56-69 (incorporated by reference; See Sec. 1926.6), or an
equivalent method as defined by Sec. 1910.1200 appendix B.
(2) The flashpoints of liquids having a viscosity of 45 Saybolt
Universal Second(s) or more at 175 [deg]F (79.4 [deg]C) or higher shall
be determined in accordance with the Standard Method of Test for Flash
Point by the Pensky Martens Closed Tester, ASTM D-93-69 (incorporated by
reference; See Sec. 1926.6), or an equivalent method as defined by
Sec. 1910.1200 appendix B.
(j) Liquefied petroleum gases, LPG and LP Gas mean and include any
material which is composed predominantly of any of the following
hydrocarbons, or mixtures of them, such as propane, propylene, butane
(normal butane or iso-butane), and butylenes.
(k) Portable tank means a closed container having a liquid capacity
more than 60 U.S. gallons, and not intended for fixed installation.
(l) Safety can means an approved closed container, of not more than
5 gallons capacity, having a flash-arresting screen, spring-closing lid
and spout cover and so designed that it will safely relieve internal
pressure when subjected to fire exposure.
(m) Vapor pressure means the pressure, measured in pounds per square
inch (absolute), exerted by a volatile liquid as determined by the
``Standard Method of Test for Vapor Pressure of Petroleum Products (Reid
Method).'' (ASTM D-323-58).
[44 FR 8577, Feb. 9, 1979; 44 FR 20940, Apr. 6, 1979, as amended at 77
FR 17894, Mar. 26, 2012]
Subpart G_Signs, Signals, and Barricades
Authority: Sec. 107, Contract Work Hours and Safety Standards Act
(Construction Safety Act) (40 U.S.C. 333); sections 4, 6, 8,
Occupational Safety and Health Act of 1970 (29 U.S.C. 653, 655, 657);
Secretary of Labor's Order No. 12-71 (36 FR 8754), 8-76 (41 FR 25059),
9-83 (48 FR 35736), or 3-2000 (65 FR 50017) as applicable, 29 CFR part
1911.
Effective Date Note: At 78 FR 35567, June 13, 2013, the authority
citation for subpart G was revised, effective Sept. 11, 2013. For the
convenience of the user, the revised text is set forth as follows:
Authority: 40 U.S.C. 333; 29 U.S.C. 653, 655, 657; Secretary of
Labor's Order No. 12-71 (36 FR 8754), 8-76 (41 FR 25059), 9-83 (48 FR
35736), 3-2000 (65 FR 50017), 5-2002 (67 FR 65008), 5-2007 (72 FR
31159), 4-2010 (75 FR 55355), or 1-2012 (77 FR 3912), as applicable; and
29 CFR part 1911.
Sec. 1926.200 Accident prevention signs and tags.
(a) General. Signs and symbols required by this subpart shall be
visible at all times when work is being performed, and shall be removed
or covered promptly when the hazards no longer exist.
(b) Danger signs. (1) Danger signs (see Figure G-1) shall be used
only where an immediate hazard exists.
(2) Danger signs shall have red as the predominating color for the
upper panel; black outline on the borders; and a white lower panel for
additional sign wording.
(c) Caution signs. (1) Caution signs (see Figure G-2) shall be used
only to warn against potential hazards or to caution against unsafe
practices.
(2) Caution signs shall have yellow as the predominating color;
black upper panel and borders: yellow lettering of ``caution'' on the
black panel; and the lower yellow panel for additional sign wording.
Black lettering shall be used for additional wording.
[[Page 218]]
[GRAPHIC] [TIFF OMITTED] TC30OC91.013
(3) Standard color of the background shall be yellow; and the panel,
black with yellow letters. Any letters used against the yellow
background shall be black. The colors shall be those of opaque glossy
samples as specified in Table 1 of American National Standard Z53.1-
1967.
(d) Exit signs. Exit signs, when required, shall be lettered in
legible red letters, not less than 6 inches high, on a white field and
the principal stroke of the letters shall be at least three-fourths inch
in width.
(e) Safety instruction signs. Safety instruction signs, when used,
shall be white with green upper panel with white letters to convey the
principal message. Any additional wording on the sign shall be black
letters on the white background.
(f) Directional signs. Directional signs, other than automotive
traffic signs specified in paragraph (g) of this section, shall be white
with a black panel and a white directional symbol. Any additional
wording on the sign shall be black letters on the white background.
(g) Traffic signs. (1) Construction areas shall be posted with
legible traffic signs at points of hazard.
(2) All traffic control signs or devices used for protection of
construction workers shall conform to Part VI of the Manual of Uniform
Traffic Control Devices (AMUTCD''), 1988 Edition, Revision 3, September
3, 1993, FHWA-SA-94-027 or Part VI of the Manual on Uniform Traffic
Control Devices, Millennium Edition, December 2000, FHWA, which are
incorporated by reference. The Director of the Federal Register approves
this incorporation by reference in accordance with 5 U.S.C. 552(a) and 1
CFR part 51. You may obtain a copy of the Millennium Edition from the
following organizations: American Traffic Safety Services Association,
15 Riverside Parkway, Suite 100, Fredericksburg, VA 22406-1022;
Telephone: 1-800-231-3475; FAX: (540) 368-1722; www.atssa.com; Institute
of Transportation Engineers, 1099 14th Street, NW., Suite 300 West,
Washington, DC 20005-3438; FAX: (202) 289-7722; www.ite.org; and
American Association of State Highway and Transportation Officials;
www.aashto.org; Telephone: 1-800-231-3475; FAX: 1-800-525-5562.
Electronic copies of the MUTCD 2000 are available for downloading at
http://mutcd.fhwa.dot.gov/kno-millennium. Electronic copies of the 1988
Edition MUTCD, Revision 3, are available for downloading at http://
www.osha.gov/doc/highway--workzones. Both documents are available for
inspection at the OSHA Docket Office, Room N2625, U.S. Department of
Labor, 200 Constitution Avenue, NW., Washington, DC 20210 or at the
National Archives and Records Administration (NARA). For information on
the availability of this material at NARA, call 202-741-6030, or go to:
http://www.archives.gov/federal--register/code--of--federal--
regulations/ibr--locations.html.
(h) Accident prevention tags. (1) Accident prevention tags shall be
used as a temporary means of warning employees of an existing hazard,
such as defective tools, equipment, etc. They shall not be used in place
of, or as a substitute for, accident prevention signs.
(2) Specifications for accident prevention tags similar to those in
Table G-1 shall apply.
[[Page 219]]
[GRAPHIC] [TIFF OMITTED] TC30OC91.014
(i) Additional rules. American National Standards Institute (ANSI)
Z35.1-1968, Specifications for Accident Prevention Signs, and Z35.2-
1968, Specifications for Accident Prevention Tags, contain rules which
are additional to the rules prescribed in this section. The employer
shall comply with ANSI Z35.1-1968 and Z35.2-1968 with respect to rules
not specifically prescribed in this subpart.
[44 FR 8577, Feb. 9, 1979; 44 FR 20940, Apr. 6, 1979, as amended at 58
FR 35173, June 30, 1993; 67 FR 57736, Sept. 12, 2002; 69 FR 18803, Apr.
9, 2004]
Effective Date Note: At 78 FR 35567, June 13, 2013, Sec. 1926.200
was amended by revising paragraphs (b)(1), (c)(1), (c)(3), (g)(2),
(h)(2), and (i), effective Sept. 11, 2013. For the convenience of the
user, the revised text is set forth as follows:
[[Page 220]]
Sec. 1926.200 Accident prevention signs and tags.
* * * * *
(b) Danger signs. (1) Danger signs shall be used only where an
immediate hazard exists, and shall follow the specifications provided in
Figure 1 of ANSI Z35.1-1968 or in Figure 2 of ANSI Z535.2-2011,
incorporated by reference in Sec. 1926.6.
* * * * *
(c) Caution signs. (1) Caution signs shall be used only to warn
against potential hazards or to caution against unsafe practices, and
shall follow the specifications provided in Figure 4 of ANSI Z35.1-1968
or in Figure 2 of ANSI Z535.2-2011, incorporated by reference for the
sections specified in Sec. 1926.6.
* * * * *
(3) The standard color of the background shall be yellow; and the
panel, black with yellow letters. Any letters used against the yellow
background shall be black. The colors shall be those of opaque glossy
samples as specified in Table 1 of ANSI Z53.1-1967 or in Table 1 of ANSI
Z535.1-2006(R2011), incorporated by reference in Sec. 1926.6.
* * * * *
(g) * * *
(2) All traffic control signs or devices used for protection of
construction workers shall conform to Part VI of the MUTCD, 1988
Edition, Revision 3, or Part VI of the MUTCD, Millennium Edition,
incorporated by reference in Sec. 1926.6.
(h) * * *
(2) For accident prevention tags, employers shall follow
specifications that are similar to those in Figures 1 to 4 of ANSI
Z35.2-1968 or Figures 1 to 8 of ANSI Z535.5-2011, incorporated by
reference in Sec. 1926.6.
(i) Additional rules. ANSI Z35.1-1968, ANSI Z535.2-2011, ANSI Z35.2-
1968, and ANSI Z535.5-2011, incorporated by reference in Sec. 1926.6,
contain rules in addition to those specifically prescribed in this
subpart. The employer shall comply with ANSI Z35.1-1968 or ANSI Z535.2-
2011, and ANSI Z35.2-1968 or Z535.5-2011, with respect to such
additional rules.
Sec. 1926.201 Signaling.
(a) Flaggers. Signaling by flaggers and the use of flaggers,
including warning garments worn by flaggers shall conform to Part VI of
the Manual on Uniform Traffic Control Devices, (1988 Edition, Revision 3
or the Millennium Edition), which are incorporated by reference in Sec.
1926.200(g)(2).
(b) Crane and hoist signals. Regulations for crane and hoist
signaling will be found in applicable American National Standards
Institute standards.
[44 FR 8577, Feb. 9, 1979; 44 FR 20940, Apr. 6, 1979, as amended at 67
FR 57736, Sept. 12, 2002]
Effective Date Note: At 78 FR 35567, June 13, 2013, Sec. 1926.201
was amended by revising paragraph (a), effective Sept. 11, 2013. For the
convenience of the user, the revised text is set forth as follows:
Sec. 1926.201 Signaling.
(a) Flaggers. Signaling by flaggers and the use of flaggers,
including warning garments worn by flaggers, shall conform to Part VI of
the Manual on Uniform Traffic Control Devices (1988 Edition, Revision 3,
or the Millennium Edition), incorporated by reference in Sec. 1926.6.
* * * * *
Sec. 1926.202 Barricades.
Barricades for protection of employees shall conform to Part VI of
the Manual on Uniform Traffic Control Devices (1988 Edition, Revision 3
or Millennium Edition), which are incorporated by reference in Sec.
1926.200(g)(2).
[67 FR 57736, Sept. 12, 2002]
Effective Date Note: At 78 FR 35567, June 13, 2013, Sec. 1926.202
was revised, effective Sept. 11, 2013. For the convenience of the user,
the revised text is set forth as follows:
Sec. 1926.202 Barricades.
Barricades for protection of employees shall conform to Part VI of
the Manual on Uniform Traffic Control Devices (1988 Edition, Revision 3,
or the Millennium Edition), incorporated by reference in Sec. 1926.6.
Sec. 1926.203 Definitions applicable to this subpart.
(a) Barricade means an obstruction to deter the passage of persons
or vehicles.
(b) Signs are the warnings of hazard, temporarily or permanently
affixed or placed, at locations where hazards exist.
(c) Signals are moving signs, provided by workers, such as flaggers,
or by devices, such as flashing lights, to warn of possible or existing
hazards.
[[Page 221]]
(d) Tags are temporary signs, usually attached to a piece of
equipment or part of a structure, to warn of existing or immediate
hazards.
[44 FR 8577, Feb. 9, 1979; 44 FR 20940, Apr. 6, 1979, as amended at 67
FR 57736, Sept. 12, 2002]
Subpart H_Materials Handling, Storage, Use, and Disposal
Authority: 40 U.S.C. 3701; 29 U.S.C. 653, 655, 657; and Secretary of
Labor's Order No. 12-71 (36 FR 8754), 8-76 (41 FR 25059), 9-83 (48 FR
35736), 1-90 (55 FR 9033), 4-2010 (75 FR 55355), or 1-2012 (77 FR 3912),
as applicable. Section 1926.250 also issued under 29 CFR part 1911.
Sec. 1926.250 General requirements for storage.
(a) General. (1) All materials stored in tiers shall be stacked,
racked, blocked, interlocked, or otherwise secured to prevent sliding,
falling or collapse.
(2) Maximum safe load limits of floors within buildings and
structures, in pounds per square foot, shall be conspicuously posted in
all storage areas, except for floor or slab on grade. Maximum safe loads
shall not be exceeded.
(3) Aisles and passageways shall be kept clear to provide for the
free and safe movement of material handling equipment or employees. Such
areas shall be kept in good repair.
(4) When a difference in road or working levels exist, means such as
ramps, blocking, or grading shall be used to ensure the safe movement of
vehicles between the two levels.
(b) Material storage. (1) Material stored inside buildings under
construction shall not be placed within 6 feet of any hoistway or inside
floor openings, nor within 10 feet of an exterior wall which does not
extend above the top of the material stored.
(2) Each employee required to work on stored material in silos,
hoppers, tanks, and similar storage areas shall be equipped with
personal fall arrest equipment meeting the requirements of subpart M of
this part.
(3) Noncompatible materials shall be segregated in storage.
(4) Bagged materials shall be stacked by stepping back the layers
and cross-keying the bags at least every 10 bags high.
(5) Materials shall not be stored on scaffolds or runways in excess
of supplies needed for immediate operations.
(6) Brick stacks shall not be more than 7 feet in height. When a
loose brick stack reaches a height of 4 feet, it shall be tapered back 2
inches in every foot of height above the 4-foot level.
(7) When masonry blocks are stacked higher than 6 feet, the stack
shall be tapered back one-half block per tier above the 6-foot level.
(8) Lumber:
(i) Used lumber shall have all nails withdrawn before stacking.
(ii) Lumber shall be stacked on level and solidly supported sills.
(iii) Lumber shall be so stacked as to be stable and self-
supporting.
(iv) Lumber piles shall not exceed 20 feet in height provided that
lumber to be handled manually shall not be stacked more than 16 feet
high.
(9) Structural steel, poles, pipe, bar stock, and other cylindrical
materials, unless racked, shall be stacked and blocked so as to prevent
spreading or tilting.
(c) Housekeeping. Storage areas shall be kept free from accumulation
of materials that constitute hazards from tripping, fire, explosion, or
pest harborage. Vegetation control will be exercised when necessary.
(d) Dockboards (bridge plates). (1) Portable and powered dockboards
shall be strong enough to carry the load imposed on them.
(2) Portable dockboards shall be secured in position, either by
being anchored or equipped with devices which will prevent their
slipping.
(3) Handholds, or other effective means, shall be provided on
portable dockboards to permit safe handling.
(4) Positive protection shall be provided to prevent railroad cars
from being moved while dockboards or bridge plates are in position.
[44 FR 8577, Feb. 9, 1979; 44 FR 20940, Apr. 6, 1979, as amended at 49
FR 18295, Apr. 30, 1984; 54 FR 24334, June 7, 1989; 58 FR 35173, June
30, 1993; 59 FR 40729, Aug. 9, 1994; 61 FR 5510, Feb. 13, 1996]
[[Page 222]]
Sec. 1926.251 Rigging equipment for material handling.
(a) General. (1) Rigging equipment for material handling shall be
inspected prior to use on each shift and as necessary during its use to
ensure that it is safe. Defective rigging equipment shall be removed
from service.
(2) Employers must ensure that rigging equipment:
(i) Has permanently affixed and legible identification markings as
prescribed by the manufacturer that indicate the recommended safe
working load;
(ii) Not be loaded in excess of its recommended safe working load as
prescribed on the identification markings by the manufacturer; and
(iii) Not be used without affixed, legible identification markings,
required by paragraph (a)(2)(i) of this section.
(3) Rigging equipment, when not in use, shall be removed from the
immediate work area so as not to present a hazard to employees.
(4) Special custom design grabs, hooks, clamps, or other lifting
accessories, for such units as modular panels, prefabricated structures
and similar materials, shall be marked to indicate the safe working
loads and shall be proof-tested prior to use to 125 percent of their
rated load.
(5) Scope. This section applies to slings used in conjunction with
other material handling equipment for the movement of material by
hoisting, in employments covered by this part. The types of slings
covered are those made from alloy steel chain, wire rope, metal mesh,
natural or synthetic fiber rope (conventional three strand
construction), and synthetic web (nylon, polyester, and polypropylene).
(6) Inspections. Each day before being used, the sling and all
fastenings and attachments shall be inspected for damage or defects by a
competent person designated by the employer. Additional inspections
shall be performed during sling use, where service conditions warrant.
Damaged or defective slings shall be immediately removed from service.
(b) Alloy steel chains. (1) Welded alloy steel chain slings shall
have permanently affixed durable identification stating size, grade,
rated capacity, and sling manufacturer.
(2) Hooks, rings, oblong links, pear-shaped links, welded or
mechanical coupling links, or other attachments, when used with alloy
steel chains, shall have a rated capacity at least equal to that of the
chain.
(3) Job or shop hooks and links, or makeshift fasteners, formed from
bolts, rods, etc., or other such attachments, shall not be used.
(4) Employers must not use alloy steel-chain slings with loads in
excess of the rated capacities (i.e., working load limits) indicated on
the sling by permanently affixed and legible identification markings
prescribed by the manufacturer.
(5) Whenever wear at any point of any chain link exceeds that shown
in Table H-1, the assembly shall be removed from service.
(6) Inspections. (i) In addition to the inspection required by other
paragraphs of this section, a thorough periodic inspection of alloy
steel chain slings in use shall be made on a regular basis, to be
determined on the basis of (A) frequency of sling use; (B) severity of
service conditions; (C) nature of lifts being made; and (D) experience
gained on the service life of slings used in similar circumstances. Such
inspections shall in no event be at intervals greater than once every 12
months.
(ii) The employer shall make and maintain a record of the most
recent month in which each alloy steel chain sling was thoroughly
inspected, and shall make such record available for examination.
(c) Wire rope. (1) Employers must not use improved plow-steel wire
rope and wire-rope slings with loads in excess of the rated capacities
(i.e., working load limits) indicated on the sling by permanently
affixed and legible identification markings prescribed by the
manufacturer.
(2) Protruding ends of strands in splices on slings and bridles
shall be covered or blunted.
(3) Wire rope shall not be secured by knots, except on haul back
lines on scrapers.
(4) The following limitations shall apply to the use of wire rope:
[[Page 223]]
(i) An eye splice made in any wire rope shall have not less than
three full tucks. However, this requirement shall not operate to
preclude the use of another form of splice or connection which can be
shown to be as efficient and which is not otherwise prohibited.
(ii) Except for eye splices in the ends of wires and for endless
rope slings, each wire rope used in hoisting or lowering, or in pulling
loads, shall consist of one continuous piece without knot or splice.
(iii) Eyes in wire rope bridles, slings, or bull wires shall not be
formed by wire rope clips or knots.
(iv) Wire rope shall not be used if, in any length of eight
diameters, the total number of visible broken wires exceeds 10 percent
of the total number of wires, or if the rope shows other signs of
excessive wear, corrosion, or defect.
(5) When U-bolt wire rope clips are used to form eyes, Table H-2
shall be used to determine the number and spacing of clips.
(i) When used for eye splices, the U-bolt shall be applied so that
the ``U'' section is in contact with the dead end of the rope.
(i1) [Reserved]
(6) Slings shall not be shortened with knots or bolts or other
makeshift devices.
(7) Sling legs shall not be kinked.
(8) Slings used in a basket hitch shall have the loads balanced to
prevent slippage.
(9) Slings shall be padded or protected from the sharp edges of
their loads.
(10) Hands or fingers shall not be placed between the sling and its
load while the sling is being tightened around the load.
(11) Shock loading is prohibited.
(12) A sling shall not be pulled from under a load when the load is
resting on the sling.
(13) Minimum sling lengths. (i) Cable laid and 6 x 19 and 6 x 37
slings shall have a minimum clear length of wire rope 10 times the
component rope diameter between splices, sleeves or end fittings.
(ii) Braided slings shall have a minimum clear length of wire rope
40 times the component rope diameter between the loops or end fittings.
(iii) Cable laid grommets, strand laid grommets and endless slings
shall have a minimum circumferential length of 96 times their body
diameter.
(14) Safe operating temperatures. Fiber core wire rope slings of all
grades shall be permanently removed from service if they are exposed to
temperatures in excess of 200 [deg]F (93.33 [deg]C). When nonfiber core
wire rope slings of any grade are used at temperatures above 400 [deg]F
(204.44 [deg]C) or below minus 60 [deg]F (15.55 [deg]C), recommendations
of the sling manufacturer regarding use at that temperature shall be
followed.
(15) End attachments. (i) Welding of end attachments, except covers
to thimbles, shall be performed prior to the assembly of the sling.
(ii) All welded end attachments shall not be used unless proof
tested by the manufacturer or equivalent entity at twice their rated
capacity prior to initial use. The employer shall retain a certificate
of the proof test, and make it available for examination.
(16) Wire rope slings shall have permanently affixed, legible
identification markings stating size, rated capacity for the type(s) of
hitch(es) used and the angle upon which it is based, and the number of
legs if more than one.
(d) Natural rope, and synthetic fiber. (1) Employers must not use
natural- and synthetic-fiber rope slings with loads in excess of the
rated capacities (i.e., working load limits) indicated on the sling by
permanently affixed and legible identification markings prescribed by
the manufacturer.
(2) All splices in rope slings provided by the employer shall be
made in accordance with fiber rope manufacturers recommendations.
(i) In manila rope, eye splices shall contain at least three full
tucks, and short splices shall contain at least six full tucks (three on
each side of the centerline of the splice).
(ii) In layed synthetic fiber rope, eye splices shall contain at
least four full tucks, and short splices shall contain at least eight
full tucks (four on each side of the centerline of the splice).
(iii) Strand end tails shall not be trimmed short (flush with the
surface of the rope) immediately adjacent to
[[Page 224]]
the full tucks. This precaution applies to both eye and short splices
and all types of fiber rope. For fiber ropes under 1-inch diameter, the
tails shall project at least six rope diameters beyond the last full
tuck. For fiber ropes 1-inch diameter and larger, the tails shall
project at least 6 inches beyond the last full tuck. In applications
where the projecting tails may be objectionable, the tails shall be
tapered and spliced into the body of the rope using at least two
additional tucks (which will require a tail length of approximately six
rope diameters beyond the last full tuck).
(iv) For all eye splices, the eye shall be sufficiently large to
provide an included angle of not greater than 60[deg] at the splice when
the eye is placed over the load or support.
(v) Knots shall not be used in lieu of splices.
(3) Safe operating temperatures. Natural and synthetic fiber rope
slings, except for wet frozen slings, may be used in a temperature range
from minus 20 [deg]F (-28.88 [deg]C) to plus 180 [deg]F (82.2 [deg]C)
without decreasing the working load limit. For operations outside this
temperature range and for wet frozen slings, the sling manufacturer's
recommendations shall be followed.
(4) Splicing. Spliced fiber rope slings shall not be used unless
they have been spliced in accordance with the following minimum
requirements and in accordance with any additional recommendations of
the manufacturer:
(i) In manila rope, eye splices shall consist of at least three full
tucks, and short splices shall consist of at least six full tucks, three
on each side of the splice center line.
(ii) In synthetic fiber rope, eye splices shall consist of at least
four full tucks, and short splices shall consist of at least eight full
tucks, four on each side of the center line.
(iii) Strand end tails shall not be trimmed flush with the surface
of the rope immediately adjacent to the full tucks. This applies to all
types of fiber rope and both eye and short splices. For fiber rope under
1 inch (2.54 cm) in diameter, the tail shall project at least six rope
diameters beyond the last full tuck. For fiber rope 1 inch (2.54 cm) in
diameter and larger, the tail shall project at least 6 inches (15.24 cm)
beyond the last full tuck. Where a projecting tail interferes with the
use of the sling, the tail shall be tapered and spliced into the body of
the rope using at least two additional tucks (which will require a tail
length of approximately six rope diameters beyond the last full tuck).
(iv) Fiber rope slings shall have a minimum clear length of rope
between eye splices equal to 10 times the rope diameter.
(v) Knots shall not be used in lieu of splices.
(vi) Clamps not designed specifically for fiber ropes shall not be
used for splicing.
(vii) For all eye splices, the eye shall be of such size to provide
an included angle of not greater than 60 degrees at the splice when the
eye is placed over the load or support.
(5) End attachments. Fiber rope slings shall not be used if end
attachments in contact with the rope have sharp edges or projections.
(6) Removal from service. Natural and synthetic fiber rope slings
shall be immediately removed from service if any of the following
conditions are present:
(i) Abnormal wear.
(ii) Powdered fiber between strands.
(iii) Broken or cut fibers.
(iv) Variations in the size or roundness of strands.
(v) Discoloration or rotting.
(vi) Distortion of hardware in the sling.
(7) Employers must use natural- and synthetic-fiber rope slings that
have permanently affixed and legible identification markings that state
the rated capacity for the type(s) of hitch(es) used and the angle upon
which it is based, type of fiber material, and the number of legs if
more than one.
(e) Synthetic webbing (nylon, polyester, and polypropylene). (1) The
employer shall have each synthetic web sling marked or coded to show:
(i) Name or trademark of manufacturer.
(ii) Rated capacities for the type of hitch.
(iii) Type of material.
(2) Rated capacity shall not be exceeded.
[[Page 225]]
(3) Webbing. Synthetic webbing shall be of uniform thickness and
width and selvage edges shall not be split from the webbing's width.
(4) Fittings. Fittings shall be:
(i) Of a minimum breaking strength equal to that of the sling; and
(ii) Free of all sharp edges that could in any way damage the
webbing.
(5) Attachment of end fittings to webbing and formation of eyes.
Stitching shall be the only method used to attach end fittings to
webbing and to form eyes. The thread shall be in an even pattern and
contain a sufficient number of stitches to develop the full breaking
strength of the sling.
(6) Environmental conditions. When synthetic web slings are used,
the following precautions shall be taken:
(i) Nylon web slings shall not be used where fumes, vapors, sprays,
mists or liquids of acids or phenolics are present.
(ii) Polyester and polypropylene web slings shall not be used where
fumes, vapors, sprays, mists or liquids of caustics are present.
(iii) Web slings with aluminum fittings shall not be used where
fumes, vapors, sprays, mists or liquids of caustics are present.
(7) Safe operating temperatures. Synthetic web slings of polyester
and nylon shall not be used at temperatures in excess of 180 [deg]F
(82.2 [deg]C). Polypropylene web slings shall not be used at
temperatures in excess of 200 [deg]F (93.33 [deg]C).
(8) Removal from service. Synthetic web slings shall be immediately
removed from service if any of the following conditions are present:
(i) Acid or caustic burns;
(ii) Melting or charring of any part of the sling surface;
(iii) Snags, punctures, tears or cuts;
(iv) Broken or worn stitches; or
(v) Distortion of fittings.
(f) Shackles and hooks. (1) Employers must not use shackles with
loads in excess of the rated capacities (i.e., working load limits)
indicated on the shackle by permanently affixed and legible
identification markings prescribed by the manufacturer.
(2) The manufacturer's recommendations shall be followed in
determining the safe working loads of the various sizes and types of
specific and identifiable hooks. All hooks for which no applicable
manufacturer's recommendations are available shall be tested to twice
the intended safe working load before they are initially put into use.
The employer shall maintain a record of the dates and results of such
tests.
Table H-1--Maximum Allowable Wear at any Point of Link
------------------------------------------------------------------------
Maximum
allowable
Chain size (inches) wear
(inch)
------------------------------------------------------------------------
\1/4\....................................................... \3/64\
\3/8\....................................................... \5/64\
\1/2\....................................................... \7/64\
\5/8\....................................................... \9/64\
\3/4\....................................................... \5/32\
\7/8\....................................................... \11/64\
1........................................................... \3/16\
1\1/8\...................................................... \7/32\
1\1/4\...................................................... \1/4\
1\3/8\...................................................... \9/32\
1\1/2\...................................................... \5/16\
1\3/4\...................................................... \11/32\
------------------------------------------------------------------------
Table H-2--Number and Spacing of U-Bolt Wire Rope Clips
------------------------------------------------------------------------
Number of clips
Improved plow steel, rope diameter -------------------- Minimum
(inches) Drop Other spacing
forged material (inches)
------------------------------------------------------------------------
\1/2\................................... 3 4 3
\5/8\................................... 3 4 3\3/4\
\3/4\................................... 4 5 4\1/2\
\7/8\................................... 4 5 5\1/4\
1....................................... 5 6 6
1\1/8\.................................. 6 6 6\3/4\
1\1/4\.................................. 6 7 7\1/2\
1\3/8\.................................. 7 7 8\1/4\
1\1/2\.................................. 7 8 9
------------------------------------------------------------------------
[44 FR 8577, Feb. 9, 1979; 44 FR 20940, Apr. 6, 1979, as amended at 58
FR 35173, June 30, 1993; 76 FR 33611, June 8, 2011; 77 FR 23118, Apr.
18, 2012]
Sec. 1926.252 Disposal of waste materials.
(a) Whenever materials are dropped more than 20 feet to any point
lying outside the exterior walls of the building, an enclosed chute of
wood, or equivalent material, shall be used. For the purpose of this
paragraph, an enclosed chute is a slide, closed in on all sides, through
which material is moved from a high place to a lower one.
(b) When debris is dropped through holes in the floor without the
use of chutes, the area onto which the material is dropped shall be
completely enclosed with barricades not less than 42
[[Page 226]]
inches high and not less than 6 feet back from the projected edge of the
opening above. Signs warning of the hazard of falling materials shall be
posted at each level. Removal shall not be permitted in this lower area
until debris handling ceases above.
(c) All scrap lumber, waste material, and rubbish shall be removed
from the immediate work area as the work progresses.
(d) Disposal of waste material or debris by burning shall comply
with local fire regulations.
(e) All solvent waste, oily rags, and flammable liquids shall be
kept in fire resistant covered containers until removed from worksite.
Subpart I_Tools_Hand and Power
Authority: Sections 4, 6, and 8 of the Occupational Safety and
Health Act of 1970 (29 U.S.C. 653, 655, 657); Secretary of Labor's Order
No. 12-71 (36 FR 8754), 8-76 (41 FR 25059), 9-83 (48 FR 35736), 1-90 (55
FR 9033), or 5-2002 (67 FR 65008), as applicable; and 29 CFR part 1911.
Section 1926.307 also issued under 5 U.S.C. 553.
Sec. 1926.300 General requirements.
(a) Condition of tools. All hand and power tools and similar
equipment, whether furnished by the employer or the employee, shall be
maintained in a safe condition.
(b) Guarding. (1) When power operated tools are designed to
accommodate guards, they shall be equipped with such guards when in use.
(2) Belts, gears, shafts, pulleys, sprockets, spindles, drums, fly
wheels, chains, or other reciprocating, rotating or moving parts of
equipment shall be guarded if such parts are exposed to contact by
employees or otherwise create a hazard. Guarding shall meet the
requirements as set forth in American National Standards Institute,
B15.1-1953 (R1958), Safety Code for Mechanical Power-Transmission
Apparatus.
(3) Types of guarding. One or more methods of machine guarding shall
be provided to protect the operator and other employees in the machine
area from hazards such as those created by point of operation, ingoing
nip points, rotating parts, flying chips and sparks. Examples of
guarding methods are--barrier guards, two-hand tripping devices,
electronic safety devices, etc.
(4) Point of operation guarding. (i) Point of operation is the area
on a machine where work is actually performed upon the material being
processed.
(ii) The point of operation of machines whose operation exposes an
employee to injury, shall be guarded. The guarding device shall be in
conformity with any appropriate standards therefor, or, in the absence
of applicable specific standards, shall be so designed and constructed
as to prevent the operator from having any part of his body in the
danger zone during the operating cycle.
(iii) Special handtools for placing and removing material shall be
such as to permit easy handling of material without the operator placing
a hand in the danger zone. Such tools shall not be in lieu of other
guarding required by this section, but can only be used to supplement
protection provided.
(iv) The following are some of the machines which usually require
point of operation guarding:
(a) Guillotine cutters.
(b) Shears.
(c) Alligator shears.
(d) Power presses.
(e) Milling machines.
(f) Power saws.
(g) Jointers.
(h) Portable power tools.
(i) Forming rolls and calenders.
(5) Exposure of blades. When the periphery of the blades of a fan is
less than 7 feet (2.128 m) above the floor or working level, the blades
shall be guarded. The guard shall have openings no larger than \1/2\
inch (1.27 cm).
(6) Anchoring fixed machinery. Machines designed for a fixed
location shall be securely anchored to prevent walking or moving.
(7) Guarding of abrasive wheel machinery--exposure adjustment.
Safety guards of the types described in paragraphs (b) (8) and (9) of
this section, where the operator stands in front of the opening, shall
be constructed so that the peripheral protecting member can be adjusted
to the constantly decreasing diameter of the wheel. The maximum angular
exposure above the horizontal plane of the wheel spindle as specified
[[Page 227]]
in paragraphs (b) (8) and (9) of this section shall never be exceeded,
and the distance between the wheel periphery and the adjustable tongue
or the end of the peripheral member at the top shall never exceed \1/4\
inch (0.635 cm). (See Figures I-1 through I-6.)
[GRAPHIC] [TIFF OMITTED] TR07MR96.000
Figure I-1 Figure I-2
Correct
Showing adjustable tongue giving required angle protection for all sizes
of wheel used.
[GRAPHIC] [TIFF OMITTED] TR07MR96.001
Figure I-3 Figure I-4
Correct
Showing movable guard with opening small enough to give required
protection for the smallest size wheel used.
[GRAPHIC] [TIFF OMITTED] TR07MR96.002
Figure I-5 Figure I-6
Incorrect
Showing movable guard with size of opening correct for full size wheel
but too large for smaller wheel.
(8) Bench and floor stands. The angular exposure of the grinding
wheel periphery and sides for safety guards used on machines known as
bench and floor stands should not exceed 90[deg] or one-fourth of the
periphery. This exposure shall begin at a point not more than 65[deg]
above the horizontal plane of the wheel spindle. (See Figures I-7 and I-
8 and paragraph (b)(7) of this section.)
[GRAPHIC] [TIFF OMITTED] TR07MR96.003
Figure I-7 Figure I-8
Wherever the nature of the work requires contact with the wheel below
the horizontal plane of the spindle, the exposure shall not
exceed 125[deg] (See Figures I-9 and I-10.)
[GRAPHIC] [TIFF OMITTED] TR07MR96.004
Figure I-9 Figure I-10
(9) Cylindrical grinders. The maximum angular exposure of the
grinding wheel periphery and sides for safety guards used on cylindrical
grinding machines shall not exceed 180[deg]. This exposure shall begin
at a point not more than 65[deg] above the horizontal plane of the wheel
spindle. (See Figures I-11 and I-12 and paragraph (b)(7) of this
section.)
[GRAPHIC] [TIFF OMITTED] TR07MR96.005
Figure I-11 Figure I-12
(c) Personal protective equipment. Employees using hand and power
tools and exposed to the hazard of falling, flying, abrasive, and
splashing objects, or exposed to harmful dusts, fumes, mists, vapors, or
gases shall be provided with the particular personal protective
equipment necessary to protect them from the hazard. All personal
protective equipment shall meet the requirements and be maintained
according to subparts D and E of this part.
(d) Switches. (1) All hand-held powered platen sanders, grinders
with wheels 2-inch diameter or less, routers, planers, laminate
trimmers, nibblers, shears, scroll saws, and jigsaws with
[[Page 228]]
blade shanks one-fourth of an inch wide or less may be equipped with
only a positive ``on-off'' control.
(2) All hand-held powered drills, tappers, fastener drivers,
horizontal, vertical, and angle grinders with wheels greater than 2
inches in diameter, disc sanders, belt sanders, reciprocating saws,
saber saws, and other similar operating powered tools shall be equipped
with a momentary contact ``on-off'' control and may have a lock-on
control provided that turnoff can be accomplished by a single motion of
the same finger or fingers that turn it on.
(3) All other hand-held powered tools, such as circular saws, chain
saws, and percussion tools without positive accessory holding means,
shall be equipped with a constant pressure switch that will shut off the
power when the pressure is released.
(4) The requirements of this paragraph shall become effective on
July 15, 1972.
(5) Exception: This paragraph does not apply to concrete vibrators,
concrete breakers, powered tampers, jack hammers, rock drills, and
similar hand operated power tools.
[44 FR 8577, Feb. 9, 1979; 44 FR 20940, Apr. 6, 1979, as amended at 58
FR 35175, June 30, 1993; 61 FR 9250, Mar. 7, 1996]
Sec. 1926.301 Hand tools.
(a) Employers shall not issue or permit the use of unsafe hand
tools.
(b) Wrenches, including adjustable, pipe, end, and socket wrenches
shall not be used when jaws are sprung to the point that slippage
occurs.
(c) Impact tools, such as drift pins, wedges, and chisels, shall be
kept free of mushroomed heads.
(d) The wooden handles of tools shall be kept free of splinters or
cracks and shall be kept tight in the tool.
Sec. 1926.302 Power-operated hand tools.
(a) Electric power-operated tools. (1) Electric power operated tools
shall either be of the approved double-insulated type or grounded in
accordance with subpart K of this part.
(2) The use of electric cords for hoisting or lowering tools shall
not be permitted.
(b) Pneumatic power tools. (1) Pneumatic power tools shall be
secured to the hose or whip by some positive means to prevent the tool
from becoming accidentally disconnected.
(2) Safety clips or retainers shall be securely installed and
maintained on pneumatic impact (percussion) tools to prevent attachments
from being accidentally expelled.
(3) All pneumatically driven nailers, staplers, and other similar
equipment provided with automatic fastener feed, which operate at more
than 100 p.s.i. pressure at the tool shall have a safety device on the
muzzle to prevent the tool from ejecting fasteners, unless the muzzle is
in contact with the work surface.
(4) Compressed air shall not be used for cleaning purposes except
where reduced to less than 30 p.s.i. and then only with effective chip
guarding and personal protective equipment which meets the requirements
of subpart E of this part. The 30 p.s.i. requirement does not apply for
concrete form, mill scale and similar cleaning purposes.
(5) The manufacturer's safe operating pressure for hoses, pipes,
valves, filters, and other fittings shall not be exceeded,
(6) The use of hoses for hoisting or lowering tools shall not be
permitted.
(7) All hoses exceeding \1/2\-inch inside diameter shall have a
safety device at the source of supply or branch line to reduce pressure
in case of hose failure.
(8) Airless spray guns of the type which atomize paints and fluids
at high pressures (1,000 pounds or more per square inch) shall be
equipped with automatic or visible manual safety devices which will
prevent pulling of the trigger to prevent release of the paint or fluid
until the safety device is manually released.
(9) In lieu of the above, a diffuser nut which will prevent high
pressure, high velocity release, while the nozzle tip is removed, plus a
nozzle tip guard which will prevent the tip from coming into contact
with the operator, or other equivalent protection, shall be provided.
(10) Abrasive blast cleaning nozzles. The blast cleaning nozzles
shall be equipped with an operating valve which must be held open
manually. A support shall be provided on which the nozzle may be mounted
when it is not in use.
[[Page 229]]
(c) Fuel powered tools. (1) All fuel powered tools shall be stopped
while being refueled, serviced, or maintained, and fuel shall be
transported, handled, and stored in accordance with subpart F of this
part.
(2) When fuel powered tools are used in enclosed spaces, the
applicable requirements for concentrations of toxic gases and use of
personal protective equipment, as outlined in subparts D and E of this
part, shall apply.
(d) Hydraulic power tools. (1) The fluid used in hydraulic powered
tools shall be fire-resistant fluids approved under Schedule 30 of the
U.S. Bureau of Mines, Department of the Interior, and shall retain its
operating characteristics at the most extreme temperatures to which it
will be exposed.
(2) The manufacturer's safe operating pressures for hoses, valves,
pipes, filters, and other fittings shall not be exceeded.
(e) Powder-actuated tools. (1) Only employees who have been trained
in the operation of the particular tool in use shall be allowed to
operate a powder-actuated tool.
(2) The tool shall be tested each day before loading to see that
safety devices are in proper working condition. The method of testing
shall be in accordance with the manufacturer's recommended procedure.
(3) Any tool found not in proper working order, or that develops a
defect during use, shall be immediately removed from service and not
used until properly repaired.
(4) Personal protective equipment shall be in accordance with
subpart E of this part.
(5) Tools shall not be loaded until just prior to the intended
firing time. Neither loaded nor empty tools are to be pointed at any
employees. Hands shall be kept clear of the open barrel end.
(6) Loaded tools shall not be left unattended.
(7) Fasteners shall not be driven into very hard or brittle
materials including, but not limited to, cast iron, glazed tile,
surface-hardened steel, glass block, live rock, face brick, or hollow
tile.
(8) Driving into materials easily penetrated shall be avoided unless
such materials are backed by a substance that will prevent the pin or
fastener from passing completely through and creating a flying missile
hazard on the other side.
(9) No fastener shall be driven into a spalled area caused by an
unsatisfactory fastening.
(10) Tools shall not be used in an explosive or flammable
atmosphere.
(11) All tools shall be used with the correct shield, guard, or
attachment recommended by the manufacturer.
(12) Powder-actuated tools used by employees shall meet all other
applicable requirements of American National Standards Institute, A10.3-
1970, Safety Requirements for Explosive-Actuated Fastening Tools.
[44 FR 8577, Feb. 9, 1979; 44 FR 20940, Apr. 6, 1979, as amended at 58
FR 35175, June 30, 1993]
Sec. 1926.303 Abrasive wheels and tools.
(a) Power. All grinding machines shall be supplied with sufficient
power to maintain the spindle speed at safe levels under all conditions
of normal operation.
(b) Guarding. (1) Grinding machines shall be equipped with safety
guards in conformance with the requirements of American National
Standards Institute, B7.1-1970, Safety Code for the Use, Care and
Protection of Abrasive Wheels, and paragraph (d) of this section.
(2) Guard design. The safety guard shall cover the spindle end, nut,
and flange projections. The safety guard shall be mounted so as to
maintain proper alignment with the wheel, and the strength of the
fastenings shall exceed the strength of the guard, except:
(i) Safety guards on all operations where the work provides a
suitable measure of protection to the operator, may be so constructed
that the spindle end, nut, and outer flange are exposed; and where the
nature of the work is such as to entirely cover the side of the wheel,
the side covers of the guard may be omitted; and
(ii) The spindle end, nut, and outer flange may be exposed on
machines designed as portable saws.
(c) Use of abrasive wheels. (1) Floor stand and bench mounted
abrasive wheels, used for external grinding, shall be provided with
safety guards
[[Page 230]]
(protection hoods). The maximum angular exposure of the grinding wheel
periphery and sides shall be not more than 90[deg], except that when
work requires contact with the wheel below the horizontal plane of the
spindle, the angular exposure shall not exceed 125[deg]. In either case,
the exposure shall begin not more than 65[deg] above the horizontal
plane of the spindle. Safety guards shall be strong enough to withstand
the effect of a bursting wheel.
(2) Floor and bench-mounted grinders shall be provided with work
rests which are rigidly supported and readily adjustable. Such work
rests shall be kept at a distance not to exceed one-eighth inch from the
surface of the wheel.
(3) Cup type wheels used for external grinding shall be protected by
either a revolving cup guard or a band type guard in accordance with the
provisions of the American National Standards Institute, B7.1-1970
Safety Code for the Use, Care, and Protection of Abrasive Wheels. All
other portable abrasive wheels used for external grinding, shall be
provided with safety guards (protection hoods) meeting the requirements
of paragraph (c)(5) of this section, except as follows:
(i) When the work location makes it impossible, a wheel equipped
with safety flanges, as described in paragraph (c)(6) of this section,
shall be used;
(ii) When wheels 2 inches or less in diameter which are securely
mounted on the end of a steel mandrel are used.
(4) Portable abrasive wheels used for internal grinding shall be
provided with safety flanges (protection flanges) meeting the
requirements of paragraph (c)(6) of this section, except as follows:
(i) When wheels 2 inches or less in diameter which are securely
mounted on the end of a steel mandrel are used;
(ii) If the wheel is entirely within the work being ground while in
use.
(5) When safety guards are required, they shall be so mounted as to
maintain proper alignment with the wheel, and the guard and its
fastenings shall be of sufficient strength to retain fragments of the
wheel in case of accidental breakage. The maximum angular exposure of
the grinding wheel periphery and sides shall not exceed 180[deg].
(6) When safety flanges are required, they shall be used only with
wheels designed to fit the flanges. Only safety flanges, of a type and
design and properly assembled so as to ensure that the pieces of the
wheel will be retained in case of accidental breakage, shall be used.
(7) All abrasive wheels shall be closely inspected and ring-tested
before mounting to ensure that they are free from cracks or defects.
(8) Grinding wheels shall fit freely on the spindle and shall not be
forced on. The spindle nut shall be tightened only enough to hold the
wheel in place.
(9) All employees using abrasive wheels shall be protected by eye
protection equipment in accordance with the requirements of subpart E of
this part, except when adequate eye protection is afforded by eye
shields which are permanently attached to the bench or floor stand.
(d) Other requirements. All abrasive wheels and tools used by
employees shall meet other applicable requirements of American National
Standards Institute, B7.1-1970, Safety Code for the Use, Care and
Protection of Abrasive Wheels.
(e) Work rests. On offhand grinding machines, work rests shall be
used to support the work. They shall be of rigid construction and
designed to be adjustable to compensate for wheel wear. Work rests shall
be kept adjusted closely to the wheel with a maximum opening of \1/8\
inch (0.3175 cm) to prevent the work from being jammed between the wheel
and the rest, which may cause wheel breakage. The work rest shall be
securely clamped after each adjustment. The adjustment shall not be made
with the wheel in motion.
[44 FR 8577, Feb. 9, 1979; 44 FR 20940, Apr. 6, 1979, as amended at 58
FR 35175, June 30, 1993]
Sec. 1926.304 Woodworking tools.
(a) Disconnect switches. All fixed power driven woodworking tools
shall be provided with a disconnect switch that can either be locked or
tagged in the off position.
(b) Speeds. The operating speed shall be etched or otherwise
permanently marked on all circular saws over 20 inches in diameter or
operating at over 10,000 peripheral feet per minute. Any
[[Page 231]]
saw so marked shall not be operated at a speed other than that marked on
the blade. When a marked saw is retensioned for a different speed, the
marking shall be corrected to show the new speed.
(c) Self-feed. Automatic feeding devices shall be installed on
machines whenever the nature of the work will permit. Feeder attachments
shall have the feed rolls or other moving parts covered or guarded so as
to protect the operator from hazardous points.
(d) Guarding. All portable, power-driven circular saws shall be
equipped with guards above and below the base plate or shoe. The upper
guard shall cover the saw to the depth of the teeth, except for the
minimum arc required to permit the base to be tilted for bevel cuts. The
lower guard shall cover the saw to the depth of the teeth, except for
the minimum arc required to allow proper retraction and contact with the
work. When the tool is withdrawn from the work, the lower guard shall
automatically and instantly return to the covering position.
(e) Personal protective equipment. All personal protective equipment
provided for use shall conform to subpart E of this part.
(f) Other requirements. All woodworking tools and machinery shall
meet other applicable requirements of American National Standards
Institute, 01.1-1961, Safety Code for Woodworking Machinery.
(g) Radial saws. (1) The upper hood shall completely enclose the
upper portion of the blade down to a point that will include the end of
the saw arbor. The upper hood shall be constructed in such a manner and
of such material that it will protect the operator from flying
splinters, broken saw teeth, etc., and will deflect sawdust away from
the operator. The sides of the lower exposed portion of the blade shall
be guarded to the full diameter of the blade by a device that will
automatically adjust itself to the thickness of the stock and remain in
contact with stock being cut to give maximum protection possible for the
operation being performed.
(h) Hand-fed crosscut table saws. (1) Each circular crosscut table
saw shall be guarded by a hood which shall meet all the requirements of
paragraph (i)(1) of this section for hoods for circular ripsaws.
(i) Hand-fed ripsaws. (1) Each circular hand-fed ripsaw shall be
guarded by a hood which shall completely enclose that portion of the saw
above the table and that portion of the saw above the material being
cut. The hood and mounting shall be arranged so that the hood will
automatically adjust itself to the thickness of and remain in contact
with the material being cut but it shall not offer any considerable
resistance to insertion of material to saw or to passage of the material
being sawed. The hood shall be made of adequate strength to resist blows
and strains incidental to reasonable operation, adjusting, and handling,
and shall be so designed as to protect the operator from flying
splinters and broken saw teeth. It shall be made of material that is
soft enough so that it will be unlikely to cause tooth breakage. The
hood shall be so mounted as to insure that its operation will be
positive, reliable, and in true alignment with the saw; and the mounting
shall be adequate in strength to resist any reasonable side thrust or
other force tending to throw it out of line.
[44 FR 8577, Feb. 9, 1979; 44 FR 20940, Apr. 6, 1979, as amended at 58
FR 35175, June 30, 1993; 61 FR 9251, Mar. 7, 1996]
Sec. 1926.305 Jacks--lever and ratchet, screw, and hydraulic.
(a) General requirements. (1) The manufacturer's rated capacity
shall be legibly marked on all jacks and shall not be exceeded.
(2) All jacks shall have a positive stop to prevent overtravel.
(b) [Reserved]
(c) Blocking. When it is necessary to provide a firm foundation, the
base of the jack shall be blocked or cribbed. Where there is a
possibility of slippage of the metal cap of the jack, a wood block shall
be placed between the cap and the load.
(d)(1) Operation and maintenance. (i) After the load has been
raised, it shall be cribbed, blocked, or otherwise secured at once.
(ii) Hydraulic jacks exposed to freezing temperatures shall be
supplied with an adequate antifreeze liquid.
[[Page 232]]
(iii) All jacks shall be properly lubricated at regular intervals.
(iv) Each jack shall be thoroughly inspected at times which depend
upon the service conditions. Inspections shall be not less frequent than
the following:
(a) For constant or intermittent use at one locality, once every 6
months,
(b) For jacks sent out of shop for special work, when sent out and
when returned,
(c) For a jack subjected to abnormal load or shock, immediately
before and immediately thereafter.
(v) Repair or replacement parts shall be examined for possible
defects.
(vi) Jacks which are out of order shall be tagged accordingly, and
shall not be used until repairs are made.
[44 FR 8577, Feb. 9, 1979; 44 FR 20940, Apr. 6, 1979, as amended at 55
FR 42328, Oct. 18, 1990; 58 FR 35176, June 30, 1993]
Sec. 1926.306 Air receivers.
(a) General requirements--(1) Application. This section applies to
compressed air receivers, and other equipment used in providing and
utilizing compressed air for performing operations such as cleaning,
drilling, hoisting, and chipping. On the other hand, however, this
section does not deal with the special problems created by using
compressed air to convey materials nor the problems created when men
work in compressed air as in tunnels and caissons. This section is not
intended to apply to compressed air machinery and equipment used on
transportation vehicles such as steam railroad cars, electric railway
cars, and automotive equipment.
(2) New and existing equipment. (i) All new air receivers installed
after the effective date of these regulations shall be constructed in
accordance with the 1968 edition of the A.S.M.E. Boiler and Pressure
Vessel Code Section VIII.
(ii) All safety valves used shall be constructed, installed, and
maintained in accordance with the A.S.M.E. Boiler and Pressure Vessel
Code, Section VIII Edition 1968.
(b) Installation and equipment requirements--(1) Installation. Air
receivers shall be so installed that all drains, handholes, and manholes
therein are easily accessible. Under no circumstances shall an air
receiver be buried underground or located in an inaccessible place.
(2) Drains and traps. A drain pipe and valve shall be installed at
the lowest point of every air receiver to provide for the removal of
accumulated oil and water. Adequate automatic traps may be installed in
addition to drain valves. The drain valve on the air receiver shall be
opened and the receiver completely drained frequently and at such
intervals as to prevent the accumulation of excessive amounts of liquid
in the receiver.
(3) Gages and valves. (i) Every air receiver shall be equipped with
an indicating pressure gage (so located as to be readily visible) and
with one or more spring-loaded safety valves. The total relieving
capacity of such safety valves shall be such as to prevent pressure in
the receiver from exceeding the maximum allowable working pressure of
the receiver by more than 10 percent.
(ii) No valve of any type shall be placed between the air receiver
and its safety valve or valves.
(iii) Safety appliances, such as safety valves, indicating devices
and controlling devices, shall be constructed, located, and installed so
that they cannot be readily rendered inoperative by any means, including
the elements.
(iv) All safety valves shall be tested frequently and at regular
intervals to determine whether they are in good operating condition.
[58 FR 35176, June 30, 1993]
Sec. 1926.307 Mechanical power-transmission apparatus.
(a) General requirements. (1) This section covers all types and
shapes of power-transmission belts, except the following when operating
at two hundred and fifty (250) feet per minute or less: (i) Flat belts 1
inch (2.54 cm) or less in width, (ii) flat belts 2 inches (5.08 cm) or
less in width which are free from metal lacings or fasteners, (iii)
round belts \1/2\ inch (1.27 cm) or less in diameter; and (iv) single
strand V-belts, the width of which is thirteen thirty-seconds (\13/32\)
inch or less.
(2) Vertical and inclined belts (paragraphs (e) (3) and (4) of this
section) if not more than 2\1/2\ inches (6.35 cm) wide
[[Page 233]]
and running at a speed of less than one thousand (1,000) feet per
minute, and if free from metal lacings or fastenings may be guarded with
a nip-point belt and pulley guard.
(3) For the Textile Industry, because of the presence of excessive
deposits of lint, which constitute a serious fire hazard, the sides and
face sections only of nip-point belt and pulley guards are required,
provided the guard shall extend at least 6 inches (15.24 cm) beyond the
rim of the pulley on the in-running and off-running sides of the belt
and at least 2 inches (5.08 cm) away from the rim and face of the pulley
in all other directions.
(4) This section covers the principal features with which power
transmission safeguards shall comply.
(b) Prime-mover guards--(1) Flywheels. Flywheels located so that any
part is 7 feet (2.128 m) or less above floor or platform shall be
guarded in accordance with the requirements of this subparagraph:
(i) With an enclosure of sheet, perforated, or expanded metal, or
woven wire;
(ii) With guard rails placed not less than 15 inches (38.1 cm) nor
more than 20 inches (50.8 cm) from rim. When flywheel extends into pit
or is within 12 inches (30.48 cm) of floor, a standard toeboard shall
also be provided;
(iii) When the upper rim of flywheel protrudes through a working
floor, it shall be entirely enclosed or surrounded by a guardrail and
toeboard.
(iv) For flywheels with smooth rims 5 feet (1.52 m) or less in
diameter, where the preceding methods cannot be applied, the following
may be used: A disk attached to the flywheel in such manner as to cover
the spokes of the wheel on the exposed side and present a smooth surface
and edge, at the same time providing means for periodic inspection. An
open space, not exceeding 4 inches (10.16 cm) in width, may be left
between the outside edge of the disk and the rim of the wheel if
desired, to facilitate turning the wheel over. Where a disk is used, the
keys or other dangerous projections not covered by disk shall be cut off
or covered. This subdivision does not apply to flywheels with solid web
centers.
(v) Adjustable guard to be used for starting engine or for running
adjustment may be provided at the flywheel of gas or oil engines. A slot
opening for jack bar will be permitted.
(vi) Wherever flywheels are above working areas, guards shall be
installed having sufficient strength to hold the weight of the flywheel
in the event of a shaft or wheel mounting failure.
(2) Cranks and connecting rods. Cranks and connecting rods, when
exposed to contact, shall be guarded in accordance with paragraphs (m)
and (n) of this section, or by a guardrail as described in paragraph
(o)(5) of this section.
(3) Tail rods or extension piston rods. Tail rods or extension
piston rods shall be guarded in accordance with paragraphs (m) and (o)
of this section, or by a guardrail on sides and end, with a clearance of
not less than 15 (38.1 cm) nor more than 20 inches (50.8 cm) when rod is
fully extended.
(c) Shafting--(1) Installation. (i) Each continuous line of shafting
shall be secured in position against excessive endwise movement.
(ii) Inclined and vertical shafts, particularly inclined idler
shafts, shall be securely held in position against endwise thrust.
(2) Guarding horizontal shafting. (i) All exposed parts of
horizontal shafting 7 feet (2.128 m) or less from floor or working
platform, excepting runways used exclusively for oiling, or running
adjustments, shall be protected by a stationary casing enclosing
shafting completely or by a trough enclosing sides and top or sides and
bottom of shafting as location requires.
(ii) Shafting under bench machines shall be enclosed by a stationary
casing, or by a trough at sides and top or sides and bottom, as location
requires. The sides of the trough shall come within at least 6 inches
(15.24 cm) of the underside of table, or if shafting is located near
floor within 6 inches (15.24 cm) of floor. In every case the sides of
trough shall extend at least 2 inches (5.08 cm) beyond the shafting or
protuberance.
(3) Guarding vertical and inclined shafting. Vertical and inclined
shafting 7 feet (2.128 m) or less from floor or
[[Page 234]]
working platform, excepting maintenance runways, shall be enclosed with
a stationary casing in accordance with requirements of paragraphs (m)
and (o) of this section.
(4) Projecting shaft ends. (i) Projecting shaft ends shall present a
smooth edge and end and shall not project more than one-half the
diameter of the shaft unless guarded by nonrotating caps or safety
sleeves.
(ii) Unused keyways shall be filled up or covered.
(5) Power-transmission apparatus located in basements. All
mechanical power transmission apparatus located in basements, towers,
and rooms used exclusively for power transmission equipment shall be
guarded in accordance with this section, except that the requirements
for safeguarding belts, pulleys, and shafting need not be complied with
when the following requirements are met:
(i) The basement, tower, or room occupied by transmission equipment
is locked against unauthorized entrance.
(ii) The vertical clearance in passageways between the floor and
power transmission beams, ceiling, or any other objects, is not less
than 5 ft. 6 in. (1.672 m).
(iii) The intensity of illumination conforms to the requirements of
ANSI A11.1-1965 (R-1970).
(iv) [Reserved]
(v) The route followed by the oiler is protected in such manner as
to prevent accident.
(d) Pulleys--(1) Guarding. Pulleys, any parts of which are 7 feet
(2.128 m) or less from the floor or working platform, shall be guarded
in accordance with the standards specified in paragraphs (m) and (o) of
this section. Pulleys serving as balance wheels (e.g., punch presses) on
which the point of contact between belt and pulley is more than 6 ft. 6
in. (1.976 m) from the floor or platform may be guarded with a disk
covering the spokes.
(2) Location of pulleys. (i) Unless the distance to the nearest
fixed pulley, clutch, or hanger exceeds the width of the belt used, a
guide shall be provided to prevent the belt from leaving the pulley on
the side where insufficient clearance exists.
(ii) [Reserved]
(3) Broken pulleys. Pulleys with cracks, or pieces broken out of
rims, shall not be used.
(4) Pulley speeds. Pulleys intended to operate at rim speed in
excess of manufacturers normal recommendations shall be specially
designed and carefully balanced for the speed at which they are to
operate.
(e) Belt, rope, and chain drives--(1) Horizontal belts and ropes.
(i) Where both runs of horizontal belts are 7 feet (2.128 m) or less
from the floor level, the guard shall extend to at least 15 inches (38.1
cm) above the belt or to a standard height except that where both runs
of a horizontal belt are 42 inches (106.68 cm) or less from the floor,
the belt shall be fully enclosed.
(ii) In powerplants or power-development rooms, a guardrail may be
used in lieu of the guard required by paragraph (e)(1)(i) of this
section.
(2) Overhead horizontal belts. (i) Overhead horizontal belts, with
lower parts 7 feet (2.128 m) or less from the floor or platform, shall
be guarded on sides and bottom in accordance with paragraph (o)(3) of
this section.
(ii) Horizontal overhead belts more than 7 feet (2.128 m) above
floor or platform shall be guarded for their entire length under the
following conditions:
(a) If located over passageways or work places and traveling 1,800
feet or more per minute.
(b) If center to center distance between pulleys is 10 feet (3.04 m)
or more.
(c) If belt is 8 inches (20.32 cm) or more in width.
(iii) Where the upper and lower runs of horizontal belts are so
located that passage of persons between them would be possible, the
passage shall be either:
(a) Completely barred by a guardrail or other barrier in accordance
with paragraphs (m) and (o) of this section; or
(b) Where passage is regarded as necessary, there shall be a
platform over the lower run guarded on either side by a railing
completely filled in with wire mesh or other filler, or by a solid
barrier. The upper run shall be so guarded as to prevent contact
therewith either by the worker or by objects carried by him. In
powerplants only the lower run of the belt need be guarded.
[[Page 235]]
(iv) Overhead chain and link belt drives are governed by the same
rules as overhead horizontal belts and shall be guarded in the same
manner as belts.
(3) Vertical and inclined belts. (i) Vertical and inclined belts
shall be enclosed by a guard conforming to standards in paragraphs (m)
and (o) of this section.
(ii) All guards for inclined belts shall be arranged in such a
manner that a minimum clearance of 7 feet (2.128 m) is maintained
between belt and floor at any point outside of guard.
(4) Vertical belts. Vertical belts running over a lower pulley more
than 7 feet (2.128 m) above floor or platform shall be guarded at the
bottom in the same manner as horizontal overhead belts, if conditions
are as stated in paragraphs (e)(2)(ii) (a) and (c) of this section.
(5) Cone-pulley belts. (i) The cone belt and pulley shall be
equipped with a belt shifter so constructed as to adequately guard the
nip point of the belt and pulley. If the frame of the belt shifter does
not adequately guard the nip point of the belt and pulley, the nip point
shall be further protected by means of a vertical guard placed in front
of the pulley and extending at least to the top of the largest step of
the cone.
(ii) If the belt is of the endless type or laced with rawhide laces,
and a belt shifter is not desired, the belt will be considered guarded
if the nip point of the belt and pulley is protected by a nip point
guard located in front of the cone extending at least to the top of the
largest step of the cone, and formed to show the contour of the cone in
order to give the nip point of the belt and pulley the maximum
protection.
(iii) If the cone is located less than 3 feet (0.912 m) from the
floor or working platform, the cone pulley and belt shall be guarded to
a height of 3 feet (0.912 m) regardless of whether the belt is endless
or laced with rawhide.
(6) Belt tighteners. (i) Suspended counterbalanced tighteners and
all parts thereof shall be of substantial construction and securely
fastened; the bearings shall be securely capped. Means must be provided
to prevent tightener from falling, in case the belt breaks.
(ii) Where suspended counterweights are used and not guarded by
location, they shall be so encased as to prevent accident.
(f) Gears, sprockets, and chains--(1) Gears. Gears shall be guarded
in accordance with one of the following methods:
(i) By a complete enclosure; or
(ii) By a standard guard as described in paragraph (o) of this
section, at least 7 feet (2.128 m) high extending 6 inches (15.24 cm)
above the mesh point of the gears; or
(iii) By a band guard covering the face of gear and having flanges
extended inward beyond the root of the teeth on the exposed side or
sides. Where any portion of the train of gears guarded by a band guard
is less than 6 feet (1.824 m) from the floor a disk guard or a complete
enclosure to the height of 6 feet (1.824 m) shall be required.
(2) Hand-operated gears. Paragraph (f)(1) of this section does not
apply to hand-operated gears used only to adjust machine parts and which
do not continue to move after hand power is removed. However, the
guarding of these gears is highly recommended.
(3) Sprockets and chains. All sprocket wheels and chains shall be
enclosed unless they are more than 7 feet (2.128 m) above the floor or
platform. Where the drive extends over other machine or working areas,
protection against falling shall be provided. This subparagraph does not
apply to manually operated sprockets.
(4) Openings for oiling. When frequent oiling must be done, openings
with hinged or sliding self-closing covers shall be provided. All points
not readily accessible shall have oil feed tubes if lubricant is to be
added while machinery is in motion.
(g) Guarding friction drives. The driving point of all friction
drives when exposed to contact shall be guarded, all arm or spoke
friction drives and all web friction drives with holes in the web shall
be entirely enclosed, and all projecting belts on friction drives where
exposed to contact shall be guarded.
(h) Keys, setscrews, and other projections. (1) All projecting keys,
setscrews, and other projections in revolving
[[Page 236]]
parts shall be removed or made flush or guarded by metal cover. This
subparagraph does not apply to keys or setscrews within gear or sprocket
casings or other enclosures, nor to keys, setscrews, or oilcups in hubs
of pulleys less than 20 inches (50.8 cm) in diameter where they are
within the plane of the rim of the pulley.
(2) It is recommended, however, that no projecting setscrews or
oilcups be used in any revolving pulley or part of machinery.
(i) Collars and couplings--(1) Collars. All revolving collars,
including split collars, shall be cylindrical, and screws or bolts used
in collars shall not project beyond the largest periphery of the collar.
(2) Couplings. Shaft couplings shall be so constructed as to present
no hazard from bolts, nuts, setscrews, or revolving surfaces. Bolts,
nuts, and setscrews will, however, be permitted where they are covered
with safety sleeves or where they are used parallel with the shafting
and are countersunk or else do not extend beyond the flange of the
coupling.
(j) Bearings and facilities for oiling. All drip cups and pans shall
be securely fastened.
(k) Guarding of clutches, cutoff couplings, and clutch pulleys--(1)
Guards. Clutches, cutoff couplings, or clutch pulleys having projecting
parts, where such clutches are located 7 feet (2.128 m) or less above
the floor or working platform, shall be enclosed by a stationary guard
constructed in accordance with this section. A ``U'' type guard is
permissible.
(2) Engine rooms. In engine rooms a guardrail, preferably with
toeboard, may be used instead of the guard required by paragraph (k)(1)
of this section, provided such a room is occupied only by engine room
attendants.
(l) Belt shifters, clutches, shippers, poles, perches, and
fasteners--(1) Belt shifters. (i) Tight and loose pulleys on all new
installations made on or after August 31, 1971, shall be equipped with a
permanent belt shifter provided with mechanical means to prevent belt
from creeping from loose to tight pulley. It is recommended that old
installations be changed to conform to this rule.
(ii) Belt shifter and clutch handles shall be rounded and be located
as far as possible from danger of accidental contact, but within easy
reach of the operator. Where belt shifters are not directly located over
a machine or bench, the handles shall be cut off 6 ft. 6 in. (1.976 m)
above floor level.
(2) Belt shippers and shipper poles. The use of belt poles as
substitutes for mechanical shifters is not recommended.
(3) Belt perches. Where loose pulleys or idlers are not practicable,
belt perches in form of brackets, rollers, etc., shall be used to keep
idle belts away from the shafts.
(4) Belt fasteners. Belts which of necessity must be shifted by hand
and belts within 7 feet (2.128 m) of the floor or working platform which
are not guarded in accordance with this section shall not be fastened
with metal in any case, nor with any other fastening which by
construction or wear will constitute an accident hazard.
(m) Standard guards--general requirements--(1) Materials. (i)
Standard conditions shall be secured by the use of the following
materials. Expanded metal, perforated or solid sheet metal, wire mesh on
a frame of angle iron, or iron pipe securely fastened to floor or to
frame of machine.
(ii) All metal should be free from burrs and sharp edges.
(2) Methods of manufacture. (i) Expanded metal, sheet or perforated
metal, and wire mesh shall be securely fastened to frame.
(n) [Reserved]
(o) Approved materials--(1) Minimum requirements. The materials and
dimensions specified in this paragraph shall apply to all guards, except
horizontal overhead belts, rope, cable, or chain guards more than 7 feet
(2.128 m) above floor, or platform.
(i) [Reserved]
(a) All guards shall be rigidly braced every 3 feet (0.912 m) or
fractional part of their height to some fixed part of machinery or
building structure. Where guard is exposed to contact with moving
equipment additional strength may be necessary.
(2) Wood guards. (i) Wood guards may be used in the woodworking and
chemical industries, in industries where the
[[Page 237]]
presence of fumes or where manufacturing conditions would cause the
rapid deterioration of metal guards; also in construction work and in
locations outdoors where extreme cold or extreme heat make metal guards
and railings undesirable. In all other industries, wood guards shall not
be used.
(3) Guards for horizontal overhead belts. (i) Guards for horizontal
overhead belts shall run the entire length of the belt and follow the
line of the pulley to the ceiling or be carried to the nearest wall,
thus enclosing the belt effectively. Where belts are so located as to
make it impracticable to carry the guard to wall or ceiling,
construction of guard shall be such as to enclose completely the top and
bottom runs of belt and the face of pulleys.
(ii) [Reserved]
(iii) Suitable reinforcement shall be provided for the ceiling
rafters or overhead floor beams, where such is necessary, to sustain
safely the weight and stress likely to be imposed by the guard. The
interior surface of all guards, by which is meant the surface of the
guard with which a belt will come in contact, shall be smooth and free
from all projections of any character, except where construction demands
it; protruding shallow roundhead rivets may be used. Overhead belt
guards shall be at least one-quarter wider than belt which they protect,
except that this clearance need not in any case exceed 6 inches (15.24
cm) on each side. Overhead rope drive and block and roller-chain-drive
guards shall be not less than 6 inches (15.24 cm) wider than the drive
on each side. In overhead silent chain-drive guards where the chain is
held from lateral displacement on the sprockets, the side clearances
required on drives of 20 inch (50.8 cm) centers or under shall be not
less than \1/4\ inch (0.635 cm) from the nearest moving chain part, and
on drives of over 20 inch (50.8 cm) centers a minimum of \1/2\ inch
(1.27 cm) from the nearest moving chain part.
(4) Guards for horizontal overhead rope and chain drives. Overhead-
rope and chain-drive guard construction shall conform to the rules for
overhead-belt guard.
(5) Guardrails and toeboards. (i) Guardrail shall be 42 inches
(106.68 cm) in height, with midrail between top rail and floor.
(ii) Posts shall be not more than 8 feet (2.432 m) apart; they are
to be permanent and substantial, smooth, and free from protruding nails,
bolts, and splinters. If made of pipe, the post shall be 1\1/4\ inches
(3.175 cm) inside diameter, or larger. If made of metal shapes or bars,
their section shall be equal in strength to that of 1\1/2\ (3.81 cm) by
1\1/2\ (3.81 cm) by \3/16\ inch angle iron. If made of wood, the posts
shall be two by four (2 x 4) inches or larger. The upper rail shall be
two by four (2 x 4) inches, or two one by four (1 x 4) strips, one at
the top and one at the side of posts. The midrail may be one by four (1
x 4) inches or more. Where panels are fitted with expanded metal or wire
mesh the middle rails may be omitted. Where guard is exposed to contact
with moving equipment, additional strength may be necessary.
(iii) Toeboards shall be 4 inches (10.16 cm) or more in height, of
wood, metal, or of metal grill not exceeding 1 inch (2.54 cm) mesh.
(p) Care of equipment--(1) General. All power-transmission equipment
shall be inspected at intervals not exceeding 60 days and be kept in
good working condition at all times.
(2) Shafting. (i) Shafting shall be kept in alignment, free from
rust and excess oil or grease.
(ii) Where explosives, explosive dusts, flammable vapors or
flammable liquids exist, the hazard of static sparks from shafting shall
be carefully considered.
(3) Bearings. Bearings shall be kept in alignment and properly
adjusted.
(4) Hangers. Hangers shall be inspected to make certain that all
supporting bolts and screws are tight and that supports of hanger boxes
are adjusted properly.
(5) Pulleys. (i) Pulleys shall be kept in proper alignment to
prevent belts from running off.
(6) Care of belts.
(i) [Reserved]
(ii) Inspection shall be made of belts, lacings, and fasteners and
such equipment kept in good repair.
[[Page 238]]
(7) Lubrication. The regular oilers shall wear tight-fitting
clothing. Machinery shall be oiled when not in motion, wherever
possible.
[58 FR 35176, June 30, 1993, as amended at 69 FR 31882, June 8, 2004]
Subpart J_Welding and Cutting
Authority: Sec. 107, Contract Work Hours and Safety Standards Act
(Construction Safety Act) (40 U.S.C. 333); secs. 4, 6, 8, Occupational
Safety and Health Act of 1970 (29 U.S.C. 653, 655, 657); Secretary of
Labor's Order No. 12-71 (36 FR 8754), 8-76 (41 FR 25059), or 9-83 (48 FR
35736), as applicable.
Sec. 1926.350 Gas welding and cutting.
(a) Transporting, moving, and storing compressed gas cylinders. (1)
Valve protection caps shall be in place and secured.
(2) When cylinders are hoisted, they shall be secured on a cradle,
slingboard, or pallet. They shall not be hoisted or transported by means
of magnets or choker slings.
(3) Cylinders shall be moved by tilting and rolling them on their
bottom edges. They shall not be intentionally dropped, struck, or
permitted to strike each other violently.
(4) When cylinders are transported by powered vehicles, they shall
be secured in a vertical position.
(5) Valve protection caps shall not be used for lifting cylinders
from one vertical position to another. Bars shall not be used under
valves or valve protection caps to pry cylinders loose when frozen.
Warm, not boiling, water shall be used to thaw cylinders loose.
(6) Unless cylinders are firmly secured on a special carrier
intended for this purpose, regulators shall be removed and valve
protection caps put in place before cylinders are moved.
(7) A suitable cylinder truck, chain, or other steadying device
shall be used to keep cylinders from being knocked over while in use.
(8) When work is finished, when cylinders are empty, or when
cylinders are moved at any time, the cylinder valve shall be closed.
(9) Compressed gas cylinders shall be secured in an upright position
at all times except, if necessary, for short periods of time while
cylinders are actually being hoisted or carried.
(10) Oxygen cylinders in storage shall be separated from fuel-gas
cylinders or combustible materials (especially oil or grease), a minimum
distance of 20 feet (6.1 m) or by a noncombustible barrier at least 5
feet (1.5 m) high having a fire-resistance rating of at least one-half
hour.
(11) Inside of buildings, cylinders shall be stored in a well-
protected, well-ventilated, dry location, at least 20 feet (6.1 m) from
highly combustible materials such as oil or excelsior. Cylinders should
be stored in definitely assigned places away from elevators, stairs, or
gangways. Assigned storage places shall be located where cylinders will
not be knocked over or damaged by passing or falling objects, or subject
to tampering by unauthorized persons. Cylinders shall not be kept in
unventilated enclosures such as lockers and cupboards.
(12) The in-plant handling, storage, and utilization of all
compressed gases in cylinders, portable tanks, rail tankcars, or motor
vehicle cargo tanks shall be in accordance with Compressed Gas
Association Pamphlet P-1-1965.
(b) Placing cylinders. (1) Cylinders shall be kept far enough away
from the actual welding or cutting operation so that sparks, hot slag,
or flame will not reach them. When this is impractical, fire resistant
shields shall be provided.
(2) Cylinders shall be placed where they cannot become part of an
electrical circuit. Electrodes shall not be struck against a cylinder to
strike an arc.
(3) Fuel gas cylinders shall be placed with valve end up whenever
they are in use. They shall not be placed in a location where they would
be subject to open flame, hot metal, or other sources of artificial
heat.
(4) Cylinders containing oxygen or acetylene or other fuel gas shall
not be taken into confined spaces.
(c) Treatment of cylinders. (1) Cylinders, whether full or empty,
shall not be used as rollers or supports.
(2) No person other than the gas supplier shall attempt to mix gases
in a cylinder. No one except the owner of the cylinder or person
authorized by him, shall refill a cylinder. No one
[[Page 239]]
shall use a cylinder's contents for purposes other than those intended
by the supplier. All cylinders used shall meet the Department of
Transportation requirements published in 49 CFR part 178, subpart C,
Specification for Cylinders.
(3) No damaged or defective cylinder shall be used.
(d) Use of fuel gas. The employer shall thoroughly instruct
employees in the safe use of fuel gas, as follows:
(1) Before a regulator to a cylinder valve is connected, the valve
shall be opened slightly and closed immediately. (This action is
generally termed ``cracking'' and is intended to clear the valve of dust
or dirt that might otherwise enter the regulator.) The person cracking
the valve shall stand to one side of the outlet, not in front of it. The
valve of a fuel gas cylinder shall not be cracked where the gas would
reach welding work, sparks, flame, or other possible sources of
ignition.
(2) The cylinder valve shall always be opened slowly to prevent
damage to the regulator. For quick closing, valves on fuel gas cylinders
shall not be opened more than 1\1/2\ turns. When a special wrench is
required, it shall be left in position on the stem of the valve while
the cylinder is in use so that the fuel gas flow can be shut off quickly
in case of an emergency. In the case of manifolded or coupled cylinders,
at least one such wrench shall always be available for immediate use.
Nothing shall be placed on top of a fuel gas cylinder, when in use,
which may damage the safety device or interfere with the quick closing
of the valve.
(3) Fuel gas shall not be used from cylinders through torches or
other devices which are equipped with shutoff valves without reducing
the pressure through a suitable regulator attached to the cylinder valve
or manifold.
(4) Before a regulator is removed from a cylinder valve, the
cylinder valve shall always be closed and the gas released from the
regulator.
(5) If, when the valve on a fuel gas cylinder is opened, there is
found to be a leak around the valve stem, the valve shall be closed and
the gland nut tightened. If this action does not stop the leak, the use
of the cylinder shall be discontinued, and it shall be properly tagged
and removed from the work area. In the event that fuel gas should leak
from the cylinder valve, rather than from the valve stem, and the gas
cannot be shut off, the cylinder shall be properly tagged and removed
from the work area. If a regulator attached to a cylinder valve will
effectively stop a leak through the valve seat, the cylinder need not be
removed from the work area.
(6) If a leak should develop at a fuse plug or other safety device,
the cylinder shall be removed from the work area.
(e) Fuel gas and oxygen manifolds. (1) Fuel gas and oxygen manifolds
shall bear the name of the substance they contain in letters at least 1-
inch high which shall be either painted on the manifold or on a sign
permanently attached to it.
(2) Fuel gas and oxygen manifolds shall be placed in safe, well
ventilated, and accessible locations. They shall not be located within
enclosed spaces.
(3) Manifold hose connections, including both ends of the supply
hose that lead to the manifold, shall be such that the hose cannot be
interchanged between fuel gas and oxygen manifolds and supply header
connections. Adapters shall not be used to permit the interchange of
hose. Hose connections shall be kept free of grease and oil.
(4) When not in use, manifold and header hose connections shall be
capped.
(5) Nothing shall be placed on top of a manifold, when in use, which
will damage the manifold or interfere with the quick closing of the
valves.
(f) Hose. (1) Fuel gas hose and oxygen hose shall be easily
distinguishable from each other. The contrast may be made by different
colors or by surface characteristics readily distinguishable by the
sense of touch. Oxygen and fuel gas hoses shall not be interchangeable.
A single hose having more than one gas passage shall not be used.
(2) When parallel sections of oxygen and fuel gas hose are taped
together, not more than 4 inches out of 12 inches shall be covered by
tape.
(3) All hose in use, carrying acetylene, oxygen, natural or
manufactured fuel gas, or any gas or substance which
[[Page 240]]
may ignite or enter into combustion, or be in any way harmful to
employees, shall be inspected at the beginning of each working shift.
Defective hose shall be removed from service.
(4) Hose which has been subject to flashback, or which shows
evidence of severe wear or damage, shall be tested to twice the normal
pressure to which it is subject, but in no case less than 300 p.s.i.
Defective hose, or hose in doubtful condition, shall not be used.
(5) Hose couplings shall be of the type that cannot be unlocked or
disconnected by means of a straight pull without rotary motion.
(6) Boxes used for the storage of gas hose shall be ventilated.
(7) Hoses, cables, and other equipment shall be kept clear of
passageways, ladders and stairs.
(g) Torches. (1) Clogged torch tip openings shall be cleaned with
suitable cleaning wires, drills, or other devices designed for such
purpose.
(2) Torches in use shall be inspected at the beginning of each
working shift for leaking shutoff valves, hose couplings, and tip
connections. Defective torches shall not be used.
(3) Torches shall be lighted by friction lighters or other approved
devices, and not by matches or from hot work.
(h) Regulators and gauges. Oxygen and fuel gas pressure regulators,
including their related gauges, shall be in proper working order while
in use.
(i) Oil and grease hazards. Oxygen cylinders and fittings shall be
kept away from oil or grease. Cylinders, cylinder caps and valves,
couplings, regulators, hose, and apparatus shall be kept free from oil
or greasy substances and shall not be handled with oily hands or gloves.
Oxygen shall not be directed at oily surfaces, greasy clothes, or within
a fuel oil or other storage tank or vessel.
(j) Additional rules. For additional details not covered in this
subpart, applicable technical portions of American National Standards
Institute, Z49.1-1967, Safety in Welding and Cutting, shall apply.
[44 FR 8577, Feb. 9, 1979; 44 FR 20940, Apr. 6, 1979, as amended at 55
FR 42328, Oct. 18, 1990; 58 FR 35179, June 30, 1993]
Sec. 1926.351 Arc welding and cutting.
(a) Manual electrode holders. (1) Only manual electrode holders
which are specifically designed for arc welding and cutting, and are of
a capacity capable of safely handling the maximum rated current required
by the electrodes, shall be used.
(2) Any current-carrying parts passing through the portion of the
holder which the arc welder or cutter grips in his hand, and the outer
surfaces of the jaws of the holder, shall be fully insulated against the
maximum voltage encountered to ground.
(b) Welding cables and connectors. (1) All arc welding and cutting
cables shall be of the completely insulated, flexible type, capable of
handling the maximum current requirements of the work in progress,
taking into account the duty cycle under which the arc welder or cutter
is working.
(2) Only cable free from repair or splices for a minimum distance of
10 feet from the cable end to which the electrode holder is connected
shall be used, except that cables with standard insulated connectors or
with splices whose insulating quality is equal to that of the cable are
permitted.
(3) When it becomes necessary to connect or splice lengths of cable
one to another, substantial insulated connectors of a capacity at least
equivalent to that of the cable shall be used. If connections are
effected by means of cable lugs, they shall be securely fastened
together to give good electrical contact, and the exposed metal parts of
the lugs shall be completely insulated.
(4) Cables in need of repair shall not be used. When a cable, other
than the cable lead referred to in paragraph (b)(2) of this section,
becomes worn to the extent of exposing bare conductors, the portion thus
exposed shall be protected by means of rubber and friction tape or other
equivalent insulation.
(c) Ground returns and machine grounding. (1) A ground return cable
shall have a safe current carrying capacity equal to or exceeding the
specified maximum output capacity of the arc welding or cutting unit
which it services. When a single ground return cable services more than
one unit, its safe current-carrying capacity shall equal or exceed the
total specified
[[Page 241]]
maximum output capacities of all the units which it services.
(2) Pipelines containing gases or flammable liquids, or conduits
containing electrical circuits, shall not be used as a ground return.
For welding on natural gas pipelines, the technical portions of
regulations issued by the Department of Transportation, Office of
Pipeline Safety, 49 CFR part 192, Minimum Federal Safety Standards for
Gas Pipelines, shall apply.
(3) When a structure or pipeline is employed as a ground return
circuit, it shall be determined that the required electrical contact
exists at all joints. The generation of an arc, sparks, or heat at any
point shall cause rejection of the structures as a ground circuit.
(4) When a structure or pipeline is continuously employed as a
ground return circuit, all joints shall be bonded, and periodic
inspections shall be conducted to ensure that no condition of
electrolysis or fire hazard exists by virtue of such use.
(5) The frames of all arc welding and cutting machines shall be
grounded either through a third wire in the cable containing the circuit
conductor or through a separate wire which is grounded at the source of
the current. Grounding circuits, other than by means of the structure,
shall be checked to ensure that the circuit between the ground and the
grounded power conductor has resistance low enough to permit sufficient
current to flow to cause the fuse or circuit breaker to interrupt the
current.
(6) All ground connections shall be inspected to ensure that they
are mechanically strong and electrically adequate for the required
current.
(d) Operating instructions. Employers shall instruct employees in
the safe means of arc welding and cutting as follows:
(1) When electrode holders are to be left unattended, the electrodes
shall be removed and the holders shall be so placed or protected that
they cannot make electrical contact with employees or conducting
objects.
(2) Hot electrode holders shall not be dipped in water; to do so may
expose the arc welder or cutter to electric shock.
(3) When the arc welder or cutter has occasion to leave his work or
to stop work for any appreciable length of time, or when the arc welding
or cutting machine is to be moved, the power supply switch to the
equipment shall be opened.
(4) Any faulty or defective equipment shall be reported to the
supervisor.
(5) See Sec. 1926.406(c) for additional requirements.
(e) Shielding. Whenever practicable, all arc welding and cutting
operations shall be shielded by noncombustible or flameproof screens
which will protect employees and other persons working in the vicinity
from the direct rays of the arc.
[44 FR 8577, Feb. 9, 1979; 44 FR 20940, Apr. 6, 1979, as amended at 51
FR 25318, July 11, 1986]
Sec. 1926.352 Fire prevention.
(a) When practical, objects to be welded, cut, or heated shall be
moved to a designated safe location or, if the objects to be welded,
cut, or heated cannot be readily moved, all movable fire hazards in the
vicinity shall be taken to a safe place, or otherwise protected.
(b) If the object to be welded, cut, or heated cannot be moved and
if all the fire hazards cannot be removed, positive means shall be taken
to confine the heat, sparks, and slag, and to protect the immovable fire
hazards from them.
(c) No welding, cutting, or heating shall be done where the
application of flammable paints, or the presence of other flammable
compounds, or heavy dust concentrations creates a hazard.
(d) Suitable fire extinguishing equipment shall be immediately
available in the work area and shall be maintained in a state of
readiness for instant use.
(e) When the welding, cutting, or heating operation is such that
normal fire prevention precautions are not sufficient, additional
personnel shall be assigned to guard against fire while the actual
welding, cutting, or heating operation is being performed, and for a
sufficient period of time after completion of the work to ensure that no
possibility of fire exists. Such personnel shall be instructed as to the
specific anticipated fire hazards and how the
[[Page 242]]
firefighting equipment provided is to be used.
(f) When welding, cutting, or heating is performed on walls, floors,
and ceilings, since direct penetration of sparks or heat transfer may
introduce a fire hazard to an adjacent area, the same precautions shall
be taken on the opposite side as are taken on the side on which the
welding is being performed.
(g) For the elimination of possible fire in enclosed spaces as a
result of gas escaping through leaking or improperly closed torch
valves, the gas supply to the torch shall be positively shut off at some
point outside the enclosed space whenever the torch is not to be used or
whenever the torch is left unattended for a substantial period of time,
such as during the lunch period. Overnight and at the change of shifts,
the torch and hose shall be removed from the confined space. Open end
fuel gas and oxygen hoses shall be immediately removed from enclosed
spaces when they are disconnected from the torch or other gas-consuming
device.
(h) Except when the contents are being removed or transferred,
drums, pails, and other containers which contain or have contained
flammable liquids shall be kept closed. Empty containers shall be
removed to a safe area apart from hot work operations or open flames.
(i) Drums containers, or hollow structures which have contained
toxic or flammable substances shall, before welding, cutting, or heating
is undertaken on them, either be filled with water or thoroughly cleaned
of such substances and ventilated and tested. For welding, cutting and
heating on steel pipelines containing natural gas, the pertinent
portions of regulations issued by the Department of Transportation,
Office of Pipeline Safety, 49 CFR part 192, Minimum Federal Safety
Standards for Gas Pipelines, shall apply.
(j) Before heat is applied to a drum, container, or hollow
structure, a vent or opening shall be provided for the release of any
built-up pressure during the application of heat.
Sec. 1926.353 Ventilation and protection in welding, cutting, and heating.
(a) Mechanical ventilation. For purposes of this section, mechanical
ventilation shall meet the following requirements:
(1) Mechanical ventilation shall consist of either general
mechanical ventilation systems or local exhaust systems.
(2) General mechanical ventilation shall be of sufficient capacity
and so arranged as to produce the number of air changes necessary to
maintain welding fumes and smoke within safe limits, as defined in
subpart D of this part.
(3) Local exhaust ventilation shall consist of freely movable hoods
intended to be placed by the welder or burner as close as practicable to
the work. This system shall be of sufficient capacity and so arranged as
to remove fumes and smoke at the source and keep the concentration of
them in the breathing zone within safe limits as defined in subpart D of
this part.
(4) Contaminated air exhausted from a working space shall be
discharged into the open air or otherwise clear of the source of intake
air.
(5) All air replacing that withdrawn shall be clean and respirable.
(6) Oxygen shall not be used for ventilation purposes, comfort
cooling, blowing dust from clothing, or for cleaning the work area.
(b) Welding, cutting, and heating in confined spaces. (1) Except as
provided in paragraph (b)(2) of this section, and paragraph (c)(2) of
this section, either general mechanical or local exhaust ventilation
meeting the requirements of paragraph (a) of this section shall be
provided whenever welding, cutting, or heating is performed in a
confined space.
(2) When sufficient ventilation cannot be obtained without blocking
the means of access, employees in the confined space shall be protected
by air line respirators in accordance with the requirements of subpart E
of this part, and an employee on the outside of such a confined space
shall be assigned to maintain communication with those working within it
and to aid them in an emergency.
[[Page 243]]
(3) Lifelines. Where a welder must enter a confined space through a
manhole or other small opening, means shall be provided for quickly
removing him in case of emergency. When safety belts and lifelines are
used for this purpose they shall be so attached to the welder's body
that his body cannot be jammed in a small exit opening. An attendant
with a pre-planned rescue procedure shall be stationed outside to
observe the welder at all times and be capable of putting rescue
operations into effect.
(c) Welding, cutting, or heating of metals of toxic significance.
(1) Welding, cutting, or heating in any enclosed spaces involving the
metals specified in this subparagraph shall be performed with either
general mechanical or local exhaust ventilation meeting the requirements
of paragraph (a) of this section:
(i) Zinc-bearing base or filler metals or metals coated with zinc-
bearing materials;
(ii) Lead base metals;
(iii) Cadmium-bearing filler materials;
(iv) Chromium-bearing metals or metals coated with chromium-bearing
materials.
(2) Welding, cutting, or heating in any enclosed spaces involving
the metals specified in this subparagraph shall be performed with local
exhaust ventilation in accordance with the requirements of paragraph (a)
of this section, or employees shall be protected by air line respirators
in accordance with the requirements of subpart E of this part:
(i) Metals containing lead, other than as an impurity, or metals
coated with lead-bearing materials;
(ii) Cadmium-bearing or cadmium-coated base metals;
(iii) Metals coated with mercury-bearing metals;
(iv) Beryllium-containing base or filler metals. Because of its high
toxicity, work involving beryllium shall be done with both local exhaust
ventilation and air line respirators.
(3) Employees performing such operations in the open air shall be
protected by filter-type respirators in accordance with the requirements
of subpart E of this part, except that employees performing such
operations on beryllium-containing base or filler metals shall be
protected by air line respirators in accordance with the requirements of
subpart E of this part.
(4) Other employees exposed to the same atmosphere as the welders or
burners shall be protected in the same manner as the welder or burner.
(d) Inert-gas metal-arc welding. (1) Since the inert-gas metal-arc
welding process involves the production of ultra-violet radiation of
intensities of 5 to 30 times that produced during shielded metal-arc
welding, the decomposition of chlorinated solvents by ultraviolet rays,
and the liberation of toxic fumes and gases, employees shall not be
permitted to engage in, or be exposed to the process until the following
special precautions have been taken:
(i) The use of chlorinated solvents shall be kept at least 200 feet,
unless shielded, from the exposed arc, and surfaces prepared with
chlorinated solvents shall be thoroughly dry before welding is permitted
on such surfaces.
(ii) Employees in the area not protected from the arc by screening
shall be protected by filter lenses meeting the requirements of subpart
E of this part. When two or more welders are exposed to each other's
arc, filter lens goggles of a suitable type, meeting the requirements of
subpart E of this part, shall be worn under welding helmets. Hand
shields to protect the welder against flashes and radiant energy shall
be used when either the helmet is lifted or the shield is removed.
(iii) Welders and other employees who are exposed to radiation shall
be suitably protected so that the skin is covered completely to prevent
burns and other damage by ultraviolet rays. Welding helmets and hand
shields shall be free of leaks and openings, and free of highly
reflective surfaces.
(iv) When inert-gas metal-arc welding is being performed on
stainless steel, the requirements of paragraph (c)(2) of this section
shall be met to protect against dangerous concentrations of nitrogen
dioxide.
(e) General welding, cutting, and heating. (1) Welding, cutting, and
heating, not involving conditions or materials described in paragraph
(b), (c), or (d) of this section, may normally be done without
mechanical ventilation or respiratory protective equipment, but
[[Page 244]]
where, because of unusual physical or atmospheric conditions, an unsafe
accumulation of contaminants exists, suitable mechanical ventilation or
respiratory protective equipment shall be provided.
(2) Employees performing any type of welding, cutting, or heating
shall be protected by suitable eye protective equipment in accordance
with the requirements of subpart E of this part.
[44 FR 8577, Feb. 9, 1979; 44 FR 20940, Apr. 6, 1979, as amended at 55
FR 42328, Oct. 18, 1990; 58 FR 35179, June 30, 1993]
Sec. 1926.354 Welding, cutting, and heating in way of preservative coatings.
(a) Before welding, cutting, or heating is commenced on any surface
covered by a preservative coating whose flammability is not known, a
test shall be made by a competent person to determine its flammability.
Preservative coatings shall be considered to be highly flammable when
scrapings burn with extreme rapidity.
(b) Precautions shall be taken to prevent ignition of highly
flammable hardened preservative coatings. When coatings are determined
to be highly flammable, they shall be stripped from the area to be
heated to prevent ignition.
(c) Protection against toxic preservative coatings: (1) In enclosed
spaces, all surfaces covered with toxic preservatives shall be stripped
of all toxic coatings for a distance of at least 4 inches from the area
of heat application, or the employees shall be protected by air line
respirators, meeting the requirements of subpart E of this part.
(2) In the open air, employees shall be protected by a respirator,
in accordance with requirements of subpart E of this part.
(d) The preservative coatings shall be removed a sufficient distance
from the area to be heated to ensure that the temperature of the
unstripped metal will not be appreciably raised. Artificial cooling of
the metal surrounding the heating area may be used to limit the size of
the area required to be cleaned.
Subpart K_Electrical
Authority: Sections 6 and 8 of the Occupational Safety and Health
Act of 1970 (29 U.S.C. 655 and 657); sec. 107, Contract Work Hours and
Safety Standards Act (40 U.S.C. 333); Secretary of Labor's Order No. 9-
83 (48 FR 35736) or 1-90 (55 FR 9033), as applicable; 29 CFR part 1911.
Source: 51 FR 25318, July 11, 1986, unless otherwise noted.
General
Sec. 1926.400 Introduction.
This subpart addresses electrical safety requirements that are
necessary for the practical safeguarding of employees involved in
construction work and is divided into four major divisions and
applicable definitions as follows:
(a) Installation safety requirements. Installation safety
requirements are contained in Sec. Sec. 1926.402 through 1926.408.
Included in this category are electric equipment and installations used
to provide electric power and light on jobsites.
(b) Safety-related work practices. Safety-related work practices are
contained in Sec. Sec. 1926.416 and 1926.417. In addition to covering
the hazards arising from the use of electricity at jobsites, these
regulations also cover the hazards arising from the accidental contact,
direct or indirect, by employees with all energized lines, above or
below ground, passing through or near the jobsite.
(c) Safety-related maintenance and environmental considerations.
Safety-related maintenance and environmental considerations are
contained in Sec. Sec. 1926.431 and 1926.432.
(d) Safety requirements for special equipment. Safety requirements
for special equipment are contained in Sec. 1926.441.
(e) Definitions. Definitions applicable to this subpart are
contained in Sec. 1926.449.
Sec. 1926.401 [Reserved]
Installation Safety Requirements
Sec. 1926.402 Applicability.
(a) Covered. Sections 1926.402 through 1926.408 contain installation
safety requirements for electrical equipment
[[Page 245]]
and installations used to provide electric power and light at the
jobsite. These sections apply to installations, both temporary and
permanent, used on the jobsite; but these sections do not apply to
existing permanent installations that were in place before the
construction activity commenced.
Note: If the electrical installation is made in accordance with the
National Electrical Code ANSI/NFPA 70-1984, exclusive of Formal
Interpretations and Tentative Interim Amendments, it will be deemed to
be in compliance with Sec. Sec. 1926.403 through 1926.408, except for
Sec. Sec. 1926.404(b)(1) and 1926.405(a)(2)(ii) (E), (F), (G), and (J).
(b) Not covered. Sections 1926.402 through 1926.408 do not cover
installations used for the generation, transmission, and distribution of
electric energy, including related communication, metering, control, and
transformation installations. (However, these regulations do cover
portable and vehicle-mounted generators used to provide power for
equipment used at the jobsite.) See subpart V of this part for the
construction of power distribution and transmission lines.
Sec. 1926.403 General requirements.
(a) Approval. All electrical conductors and equipment shall be
approved.
(b) Examination, installation, and use of equipment--(1)
Examination. The employer shall ensure that electrical equipment is free
from recognized hazards that are likely to cause death or serious
physical harm to employees. Safety of equipment shall be determined on
the basis of the following considerations:
(i) Suitability for installation and use in conformity with the
provisions of this subpart. Suitability of equipment for an identified
purpose may be evidenced by listing, labeling, or certification for that
identified purpose.
(ii) Mechanical strength and durability, including, for parts
designed to enclose and protect other equipment, the adequacy of the
protection thus provided.
(iii) Electrical insulation.
(iv) Heating effects under conditions of use.
(v) Arcing effects.
(vi) Classification by type, size, voltage, current capacity,
specific use.
(vii) Other factors which contribute to the practical safeguarding
of employees using or likely to come in contact with the equipment.
(2) Installation and use. Listed, labeled, or certified equipment
shall be installed and used in accordance with instructions included in
the listing, labeling, or certification.
(c) Interrupting rating. Equipment intended to break current shall
have an interrupting rating at system voltage sufficient for the current
that must be interrupted.
(d) Mounting and cooling of equipment--(1) Mounting. Electric
equipment shall be firmly secured to the surface on which it is mounted.
Wooden plugs driven into holes in masonry, concrete, plaster, or similar
materials shall not be used.
(2) Cooling. Electrical equipment which depends upon the natural
circulation of air and convection principles for cooling of exposed
surfaces shall be installed so that room air flow over such surfaces is
not prevented by walls or by adjacent installed equipment. For equipment
designed for floor mounting, clearance between top surfaces and adjacent
surfaces shall be provided to dissipate rising warm air. Electrical
equipment provided with ventilating openings shall be installed so that
walls or other obstructions do not prevent the free circulation of air
through the equipment.
(e) Splices. Conductors shall be spliced or joined with splicing
devices designed for the use or by brazing, welding, or soldering with a
fusible metal or alloy. Soldered splices shall first be so spliced or
joined as to be mechanically and electrically secure without solder and
then soldered. All splices and joints and the free ends of conductors
shall be covered with an insulation equivalent to that of the conductors
or with an insulating device designed for the purpose.
(f) Arcing parts. Parts of electric equipment which in ordinary
operation produce arcs, sparks, flames, or molten metal shall be
enclosed or separated and isolated from all combustible material.
[[Page 246]]
(g) Marking. Electrical equipment shall not be used unless the
manufacturer's name, trademark, or other descriptive marking by which
the organization responsible for the product may be identified is placed
on the equipment and unless other markings are provided giving voltage,
current, wattage, or other ratings as necessary. The marking shall be of
sufficient durability to withstand the environment involved.
(h) Identification of disconnecting means and circuits. Each
disconnecting means required by this subpart for motors and appliances
shall be legibly marked to indicate its purpose, unless located and
arranged so the purpose is evident. Each service, feeder, and branch
circuit, at its disconnecting means or overcurrent device, shall be
legibly marked to indicate its purpose, unless located and arranged so
the purpose is evident. These markings shall be of sufficient durability
to withstand the environment involved.
(i) 600 Volts, nominal, or less. This paragraph applies to equipment
operating at 600 volts, nominal, or less.
(1) Working space about electric equipment. Sufficient access and
working space shall be provided and maintained about all electric
equipment to permit ready and safe operation and maintenance of such
equipment.
(i) Working clearances. Except as required or permitted elsewhere in
this subpart, the dimension of the working space in the direction of
access to live parts operating at 600 volts or less and likely to
require examination, adjustment, servicing, or maintenance while alive
shall not be less than indicated in Table K-1. In addition to the
dimensions shown in Table K-1, workspace shall not be less than 30
inches (762 mm) wide in front of the electric equipment. Distances shall
be measured from the live parts if they are exposed, or from the
enclosure front or opening if the live parts are enclosed. Walls
constructed of concrete, brick, or tile are considered to be grounded.
Working space is not required in back of assemblies such as dead-front
switchboards or motor control centers where there are no renewable or
adjustable parts such as fuses or switches on the back and where all
connections are accessible from locations other than the back.
Table K-1--Working Clearances
------------------------------------------------------------------------
Minimum clear distance
for conditions \1\
Nominal voltage to ground --------------------------
(a) (b) (c)
------------------------------------------------------------------------
Feet Feet Feet
\2\ \2\ \2\
0-150........................................ 3 3 3
151-600...................................... 3 3\1/2\ 4
------------------------------------------------------------------------
\1\ Conditions (a), (b), and (c) are as follows: (a) Exposed live parts
on one side and no live or grounded parts on the other side of the
working space, or exposed live parts on both sides effectively guarded
by insulating material. Insulated wire or insulated busbars operating
at not over 300 volts are not considered live parts. (b) Exposed live
parts on one side and grounded parts on the other side. (c) Exposed
live parts on both sides of the workspace [not guarded as provided in
Condition (a)] with the operator between.
\2\ Note: For International System of Units (SI): one foot=0.3048m.
(ii) Clear spaces. Working space required by this subpart shall not
be used for storage. When normally enclosed live parts are exposed for
inspection or servicing, the working space, if in a passageway or
general open space, shall be guarded.
(iii) Access and entrance to working space. At least one entrance
shall be provided to give access to the working space about electric
equipment.
(iv) Front working space. Where there are live parts normally
exposed on the front of switchboards or motor control centers, the
working space in front of such equipment shall not be less than 3 feet
(914 mm).
(v) Headroom. The minimum headroom of working spaces about service
equipment, switchboards, panelboards, or motor control centers shall be
6 feet 3 inches (1.91 m).
(2) Guarding of live parts. (i) Except as required or permitted
elsewhere in this subpart, live parts of electric equipment operating at
50 volts or more shall be guarded against accidental contact by cabinets
or other forms of enclosures, or by any of the following means:
(A) By location in a room, vault, or similar enclosure that is
accessible only to qualified persons.
(B) By partitions or screens so arranged that only qualified persons
will have access to the space within reach of the live parts. Any
openings in such partitions or screens shall be so sized and located
that persons are not likely to come into accidental contact with
[[Page 247]]
the live parts or to bring conducting objects into contact with them.
(C) By location on a balcony, gallery, or platform so elevated and
arranged as to exclude unqualified persons.
(D) By elevation of 8 feet (2.44 m) or more above the floor or other
working surface and so installed as to exclude unqualified persons.
(ii) In locations where electric equipment would be exposed to
physical damage, enclosures or guards shall be so arranged and of such
strength as to prevent such damage.
(iii) Entrances to rooms and other guarded locations containing
exposed live parts shall be marked with conspicuous warning signs
forbidding unqualified persons to enter.
(j) Over 600 volts, nominal--(1) General. Conductors and equipment
used on circuits exceeding 600 volts, nominal, shall comply with all
applicable provisions of paragraphs (a) through (g) of this section and
with the following provisions which supplement or modify those
requirements. The provisions of paragraphs (j)(2), (j)(3), and (j)(4) of
this section do not apply to equipment on the supply side of the service
conductors.
(2) Enclosure for electrical installations. Electrical installations
in a vault, room, closet or in an area surrounded by a wall, screen, or
fence, access to which is controlled by lock and key or other equivalent
means, are considered to be accessible to qualified persons only. A
wall, screen, or fence less than 8 feet (2.44 m) in height is not
considered adequate to prevent access unless it has other features that
provide a degree of isolation equivalent to an 8-foot (2.44-m) fence.
The entrances to all buildings, rooms or enclosures containing exposed
live parts or exposed conductors operating at over 600 volts, nominal,
shall be kept locked or shall be under the observation of a qualified
person at all times.
(i) Installations accessible to qualified persons only. Electrical
installations having exposed live parts shall be accessible to qualified
persons only and shall comply with the applicable provisions of
paragraph (j)(3) of this section.
(ii) Installations accessible to unqualified persons. Electrical
installations that are open to unqualified persons shall be made with
metal-enclosed equipment or shall be enclosed in a vault or in an area,
access to which is controlled by a lock. Metal-enclosed switchgear, unit
substations, transformers, pull boxes, connection boxes, and other
similar associated equipment shall be marked with appropriate caution
signs. If equipment is exposed to physical damage from vehicular
traffic, guards shall be provided to prevent such damage. Ventilating or
similar openings in metal-enclosed equipment shall be designed so that
foreign objects inserted through these openings will be deflected from
energized parts.
(3) Workspace about equipment. Sufficient space shall be provided
and maintained about electric equipment to permit ready and safe
operation and maintenance of such equipment. Where energized parts are
exposed, the minimum clear workspace shall not be less than 6 feet 6
inches (1.98 m) high (measured vertically from the floor or platform),
or less than 3 feet (914 mm) wide (measured parallel to the equipment).
The depth shall be as required in Table K-2. The workspace shall be
adequate to permit at least a 90-degree opening of doors or hinged
panels.
(i) Working space. The minimum clear working space in front of
electric equipment such as switchboards, control panels, switches,
circuit breakers, motor controllers, relays, and similar equipment shall
not be less than specified in Table K-2 unless otherwise specified in
this subpart. Distances shall be measured from the live parts if they
are exposed, or from the enclosure front or opening if the live parts
are enclosed. However, working space is not required in back of
equipment such as deadfront switchboards or control assemblies where
there are no renewable or adjustable parts (such as fuses or switches)
on the back and where all connections are accessible from locations
other than the back. Where rear access is required to work on de-
energized parts on the back of enclosed equipment, a minimum working
space of 30 inches (762 mm) horizontally shall be provided.
[[Page 248]]
Table K-2--Minimum Depth of Clear Working Space in Front of Electric
Equipment
------------------------------------------------------------------------
Conditions \1\
Nominal voltage to ground --------------------------
(a) (b) (c)
------------------------------------------------------------------------
Feet Feet Feet
\2\ \2\ \2\
601 to 2,500................................. 3 4 5
2,501 to 9,000............................... 4 5 6
9,001 to 25,000.............................. 5 6 9
25,001 to 75 kV.............................. 6 8 10
Above 75kV................................... 8 10 12
------------------------------------------------------------------------
\1\Conditions (a), (b), and (c) are as follows: (a) Exposed live parts
on one side and no live or grounded parts on the other side of the
working space, or exposed live parts on both sides effectively guarded
by insulating materials. Insulated wire or insulated busbars operating
at not over 300 volts are not considered live parts. (b) Exposed live
parts on one side and grounded parts on the other side. Walls
constructed of concrete, brick, or tile are considered to be grounded
surfaces. (c) Exposed live parts on both sides of the workspace [not
guarded as provided in Condition (a)] with the operator between.
\2\ Note: For SI units: one foot=0.3048 m.
(ii) Lighting outlets and points of control. The lighting outlets
shall be so arranged that persons changing lamps or making repairs on
the lighting system will not be endangered by live parts or other
equipment. The points of control shall be so located that persons are
not likely to come in contact with any live part or moving part of the
equipment while turning on the lights.
(iii) Elevation of unguarded live parts. Unguarded live parts above
working space shall be maintained at elevations not less than specified
in Table K-3.
Table K-3--Elevation of Unguarded Energized Parts Above Working Space
------------------------------------------------------------------------
Nominal voltage between phases Minimum elevation
------------------------------------------------------------------------
601-7,500................................. 8 feet 6 inches. \1\
7,501-35,000.............................. 9 feet.
Over 35kV................................. 9 feet+0.37 inches per kV
above 35kV.
------------------------------------------------------------------------
\1\ Note: For SI units: one inch=25.4 mm; one foot=0.3048 m.
(4) Entrance and access to workspace. At least one entrance not less
than 24 inches (610 mm) wide and 6 feet 6 inches (1.98 m) high shall be
provided to give access to the working space about electric equipment.
On switchboard and control panels exceeding 48 inches (1.22 m) in width,
there shall be one entrance at each end of such board where practicable.
Where bare energized parts at any voltage or insulated energized parts
above 600 volts are located adjacent to such entrance, they shall be
guarded.
[51 FR 25318, July 11, 1986, as amended at 61 FR 5510, Feb. 13, 1996]
Sec. 1926.404 Wiring design and protection.
(a) Use and identification of grounded and grounding conductors--(1)
Identification of conductors. A conductor used as a grounded conductor
shall be identifiable and distinguishable from all other conductors. A
conductor used as an equipment grounding conductor shall be identifiable
and distinguishable from all other conductors.
(2) Polarity of connections. No grounded conductor shall be attached
to any terminal or lead so as to reverse designated polarity.
(3) Use of grounding terminals and devices. A grounding terminal or
grounding-type device on a receptacle, cord connector, or attachment
plug shall not be used for purposes other than grounding.
(b) Branch circuits--(1) Ground-fault protection--(i) General. The
employer shall use either ground fault circuit interrupters as specified
in paragraph (b)(1)(ii) of this section or an assured equipment
grounding conductor program as specified in paragraph (b)(1)(iii) of
this section to protect employees on construction sites. These
requirements are in addition to any other requirements for equipment
grounding conductors.
(ii) Ground-fault circuit interrupters. All 120-volt, single-phase,
15- and 20-ampere receptacle outlets on construction sites, which are
not a part of the permanent wiring of the building or structure and
which are in use by employees, shall have approved ground-fault circuit
interrupters for personnel protection. Receptacles on a two-wire,
single-phase portable or vehicle-mounted generator rated not more than
5kW, where the circuit conductors of the generator are insulated from
the generator frame and all other grounded surfaces, need not be
protected with ground-fault circuit interrupters.
(iii) Assured equipment grounding conductor program. The employer
shall establish and implement an assured equipment grounding conductor
program on construction sites covering all
[[Page 249]]
cord sets, receptacles which are not a part of the building or
structure, and equipment connected by cord and plug which are available
for use or used by employees. This program shall comply with the
following minimum requirements:
(A) A written description of the program, including the specific
procedures adopted by the employer, shall be available at the jobsite
for inspection and copying by the Assistant Secretary and any affected
employee.
(B) The employer shall designate one or more competent persons (as
defined in Sec. 1926.32(f)) to implement the program.
(C) Each cord set, attachment cap, plug and receptacle of cord sets,
and any equipment connected by cord and plug, except cord sets and
receptacles which are fixed and not exposed to damage, shall be visually
inspected before each day's use for external defects, such as deformed
or missing pins or insulation damage, and for indications of possible
internal damage. Equipment found damaged or defective shall not be used
until repaired.
(D) The following tests shall be performed on all cord sets,
receptacles which are not a part of the permanent wiring of the building
or structure, and cord- and plug-connected equipment required to be
grounded:
(1) All equipment grounding conductors shall be tested for
continuity and shall be electrically continuous.
(2) Each receptacle and attachment cap or plug shall be tested for
correct attachment of the equipment grounding conductor. The equipment
grounding conductor shall be connected to its proper terminal.
(E) All required tests shall be performed:
(1) Before first use;
(2) Before equipment is returned to service following any repairs;
(3) Before equipment is used after any incident which can be
reasonably suspected to have caused damage (for example, when a cord set
is run over); and
(4) At intervals not to exceed 3 months, except that cord sets and
receptacles which are fixed and not exposed to damage shall be tested at
intervals not exceeding 6 months.
(F) The employer shall not make available or permit the use by
employees of any equipment which has not met the requirements of this
paragraph (b)(1)(iii) of this section.
(G) Tests performed as required in this paragraph shall be recorded.
This test record shall identify each receptacle, cord set, and cord- and
plug-connected equipment that passed the test and shall indicate the
last date it was tested or the interval for which it was tested. This
record shall be kept by means of logs, color coding, or other effective
means and shall be maintained until replaced by a more current record.
The record shall be made available on the jobsite for inspection by the
Assistant Secretary and any affected employee.
(2) Outlet devices. Outlet devices shall have an ampere rating not
less than the load to be served and shall comply with the following:
(i) Single receptacles. A single receptacle installed on an
individual branch circuit shall have an ampere rating of not less than
that of the branch circuit.
(ii) Two or more receptacles. Where connected to a branch circuit
supplying two or more receptacles or outlets, receptacle ratings shall
conform to the values listed in Table K-4.
(iii) Receptacles used for the connection of motors. The rating of
an attachment plug or receptacle used for cord- and plug-connection of a
motor to a branch circuit shall not exceed 15 amperes at 125 volts or 10
amperes at 250 volts if individual overload protection is omitted.
Table K-4--Receptacle Ratings for Various Size Circuits
------------------------------------------------------------------------
Circuit rating amperes Receptacle rating amperes
------------------------------------------------------------------------
15......................................... Not over 15.
20......................................... 15 or 20.
30......................................... 30.
40......................................... 40 or 50.
50......................................... 50.
------------------------------------------------------------------------
(c) Outside conductors and lamps--(1) 600 volts, nominal, or less.
Paragraphs (c)(1)(i) through (c)(1)(iv) of this section apply to branch
circuit, feeder, and service conductors rated 600 volts, nominal, or
less and run outdoors as open conductors.
[[Page 250]]
(i) Conductors on poles. Conductors supported on poles shall provide
a horizontal climbing space not less than the following:
(A) Power conductors below communication conductors--30 inches (762
mm) .
(B) Power conductors alone or above communication conductors: 300
volts or less--24 inches (610 mm); more than 300 volts--30 inches (762
mm).
(C) Communication conductors below power conductors: with power
conductors 300 volts or less--24 inches (610 mm); more than 300 volts--
30 inches (762 mm).
(ii) Clearance from ground. Open conductors shall conform to the
following minimum clearances:
(A) 10 feet (3.05 m)--above finished grade, sidewalks, or from any
platform or projection from which they might be reached.
(B) 12 feet (3.66 m)--over areas subject to vehicular traffic other
than truck traffic.
(C) 15 feet (4.57 m)--over areas other than those specified in
paragraph (c)(1)(ii)(D) of this section that are subject to truck
traffic.
(D) 18 feet (5.49 m)--over public streets, alleys, roads, and
driveways.
(iii) Clearance from building openings. Conductors shall have a
clearance of at least 3 feet (914 mm) from windows, doors, fire escapes,
or similar locations. Conductors run above the top level of a window are
considered to be out of reach from that window and, therefore, do not
have to be 3 feet (914 mm) away.
(iv) Clearance over roofs. Conductors above roof space accessible to
employees on foot shall have a clearance from the highest point of the
roof surface of not less than 8 feet (2.44 m) vertical clearance for
insulated conductors, not less than 10 feet (3.05 m) vertical or
diagonal clearance for covered conductors, and not less than 15 feet
(4.57 m) for bare conductors, except that:
(A) Where the roof space is also accessible to vehicular traffic,
the vertical clearance shall not be less than 18 feet (5.49 m), or
(B) Where the roof space is not normally accessible to employees on
foot, fully insulated conductors shall have a vertical or diagonal
clearance of not less than 3 feet (914 mm), or
(C) Where the voltage between conductors is 300 volts or less and
the roof has a slope of not less than 4 inches (102 mm) in 12 inches
(305 mm), the clearance from roofs shall be at least 3 feet (914 mm), or
(D) Where the voltage between conductors is 300 volts or less and
the conductors do not pass over more than 4 feet (1.22 m) of the
overhang portion of the roof and they are terminated at a through-the-
roof raceway or support, the clearance from roofs shall be at least 18
inches (457 mm).
(2) Location of outdoor lamps. Lamps for outdoor lighting shall be
located below all live conductors, transformers, or other electric
equipment, unless such equipment is controlled by a disconnecting means
that can be locked in the open position or unless adequate clearances or
other safeguards are provided for relamping operations.
(d) Services--(1) Disconnecting means--(i) General. Means shall be
provided to disconnect all conductors in a building or other structure
from the service-entrance conductors. The disconnecting means shall
plainly indicate whether it is in the open or closed position and shall
be installed at a readily accessible location nearest the point of
entrance of the service-entrance conductors.
(ii) Simultaneous opening of poles. Each service disconnecting means
shall simultaneously disconnect all ungrounded conductors.
(2) Services over 600 volts, nominal. The following additional
requirements apply to services over 600 volts, nominal.
(i) Guarding. Service-entrance conductors installed as open wires
shall be guarded to make them accessible only to qualified persons.
(ii) Warning signs. Signs warning of high voltage shall be posted
where unauthorized employees might come in contact with live parts.
(e) Overcurrent protection--(1) 600 volts, nominal, or less. The
following requirements apply to overcurrent protection of circuits rated
600 volts, nominal, or less.
[[Page 251]]
(i) Protection of conductors and equipment. Conductors and equipment
shall be protected from overcurrent in accordance with their ability to
safely conduct current. Conductors shall have sufficient ampacity to
carry the load.
(ii) Grounded conductors. Except for motor-running overload
protection, overcurrent devices shall not interrupt the continuity of
the grounded conductor unless all conductors of the circuit are opened
simultaneously.
(iii) Disconnection of fuses and thermal cutouts. Except for devices
provided for current-limiting on the supply side of the service
disconnecting means, all cartridge fuses which are accessible to other
than qualified persons and all fuses and thermal cutouts on circuits
over 150 volts to ground shall be provided with disconnecting means.
This disconnecting means shall be installed so that the fuse or thermal
cutout can be disconnected from its supply without disrupting service to
equipment and circuits unrelated to those protected by the overcurrent
device.
(iv) Location in or on premises. Overcurrent devices shall be
readily accessible. Overcurrent devices shall not be located where they
could create an employee safety hazard by being exposed to physical
damage or located in the vicinity of easily ignitible material.
(v) Arcing or suddenly moving parts. Fuses and circuit breakers
shall be so located or shielded that employees will not be burned or
otherwise injured by their operation.
(vi) Circuit breakers--(A) Circuit breakers shall clearly indicate
whether they are in the open (off) or closed (on) position.
(B) Where circuit breaker handles on switchboards are operated
vertically rather than horizontally or rotationally, the up position of
the handle shall be the closed (on) position.
(C) If used as switches in 120-volt, fluorescent lighting circuits,
circuit breakers shall be marked ``SWD.''
(2) Over 600 volts, nominal. Feeders and branch circuits over 600
volts, nominal, shall have short-circuit protection.
(f) Grounding. Paragraphs (f)(1) through (f)(11) of this section
contain grounding requirements for systems, circuits, and equipment.
(1) Systems to be grounded. The following systems which supply
premises wiring shall be grounded:
(i) Three-wire DC systems. All 3-wire DC systems shall have their
neutral conductor grounded.
(ii) Two-wire DC systems. Two-wire DC systems operating at over 50
volts through 300 volts between conductors shall be grounded unless they
are rectifier-derived from an AC system complying with paragraphs
(f)(1)(iii), (f)(1)(iv), and (f)(1)(v) of this section.
(iii) AC circuits, less than 50 volts. AC circuits of less than 50
volts shall be grounded if they are installed as overhead conductors
outside of buildings or if they are supplied by transformers and the
transformer primary supply system is ungrounded or exceeds 150 volts to
ground.
(iv) AC systems, 50 volts to 1000 volts. AC systems of 50 volts to
1000 volts shall be grounded under any of the following conditions,
unless exempted by paragraph (f)(1)(v) of this section:
(A) If the system can be so grounded that the maximum voltage to
ground on the ungrounded conductors does not exceed 150 volts;
(B) If the system is nominally rated 480Y/277 volt, 3-phase, 4-wire
in which the neutral is used as a circuit conductor;
(C) If the system is nominally rated 240/120 volt, 3-phase, 4-wire
in which the midpoint of one phase is used as a circuit conductor; or
(D) If a service conductor is uninsulated.
(v) Exceptions. AC systems of 50 volts to 1000 volts are not
required to be grounded if the system is separately derived and is
supplied by a transformer that has a primary voltage rating less than
1000 volts, provided all of the following conditions are met:
(A) The system is used exclusively for control circuits,
(B) The conditions of maintenance and supervision assure that only
qualified persons will service the installation,
(C) Continuity of control power is required, and
(D) Ground detectors are installed on the control system.
(2) Separately derived systems. Where paragraph (f)(1) of this
section requires
[[Page 252]]
grounding of wiring systems whose power is derived from generator,
transformer, or converter windings and has no direct electrical
connection, including a solidly connected grounded circuit conductor, to
supply conductors originating in another system, paragraph (f)(5) of
this section shall also apply.
(3) Portable and vehicle-mounted generators--(i) Portable
generators. Under the following conditions, the frame of a portable
generator need not be grounded and may serve as the grounding electrode
for a system supplied by the generator:
(A) The generator supplies only equipment mounted on the generator
and/or cord- and plug-connected equipment through receptacles mounted on
the generator, and
(B) The noncurrent-carrying metal parts of equipment and the
equipment grounding conductor terminals of the receptacles are bonded to
the generator frame.
(ii) Vehicle-mounted generators. Under the following conditions the
frame of a vehicle may serve as the grounding electrode for a system
supplied by a generator located on the vehicle:
(A) The frame of the generator is bonded to the vehicle frame, and
(B) The generator supplies only equipment located on the vehicle
and/or cord- and plug-connected equipment through receptacles mounted on
the vehicle or on the generator, and
(C) The noncurrent-carrying metal parts of equipment and the
equipment grounding conductor terminals of the receptacles are bonded to
the generator frame, and
(D) The system complies with all other provisions of this section.
(iii) Neutral conductor bonding. A neutral conductor shall be bonded
to the generator frame if the generator is a component of a separately
derived system. No other conductor need be bonded to the generator
frame.
(4) Conductors to be grounded. For AC premises wiring systems the
identified conductor shall be grounded.
(5) Grounding connections--(i) Grounded system. For a grounded
system, a grounding electrode conductor shall be used to connect both
the equipment grounding conductor and the grounded circuit conductor to
the grounding electrode. Both the equipment grounding conductor and the
grounding electrode conductor shall be connected to the grounded circuit
conductor on the supply side of the service disconnecting means, or on
the supply side of the system disconnecting means or overcurrent devices
if the system is separately derived.
(ii) Ungrounded systems. For an ungrounded service-supplied system,
the equipment grounding conductor shall be connected to the grounding
electrode conductor at the service equipment. For an ungrounded
separately derived system, the equipment grounding conductor shall be
connected to the grounding electrode conductor at, or ahead of, the
system disconnecting means or overcurrent devices.
(6) Grounding path. The path to ground from circuits, equipment, and
enclosures shall be permanent and continuous.
(7) Supports, enclosures, and equipment to be grounded--(i) Supports
and enclosures for conductors. Metal cable trays, metal raceways, and
metal enclosures for conductors shall be grounded, except that:
(A) Metal enclosures such as sleeves that are used to protect cable
assemblies from physical damage need not be grounded; and
(B) Metal enclosures for conductors added to existing installations
of open wire, knob-and-tube wiring, and nonmetallic-sheathed cable need
not be grounded if all of the following conditions are met:
(1) Runs are less than 25 feet (7.62 m);
(2) Enclosures are free from probable contact with ground, grounded
metal, metal laths, or other conductive materials; and
(3) Enclosures are guarded against employee contact.
(ii) Service equipment enclosures. Metal enclosures for service
equipment shall be grounded.
(iii) Fixed equipment. Exposed noncurrent-carrying metal parts of
fixed equipment which may become energized shall be grounded under any
of the following conditions:
(A) If within 8 feet (2.44 m) vertically or 5 feet (1.52 m)
horizontally of ground
[[Page 253]]
or grounded metal objects and subject to employee contact.
(B) If located in a wet or damp location and subject to employee
contact.
(C) If in electrical contact with metal.
(D) If in a hazardous (classified) location.
(E) If supplied by a metal-clad, metal-sheathed, or grounded metal
raceway wiring method.
(F) If equipment operates with any terminal at over 150 volts to
ground; however, the following need not be grounded:
(1) Enclosures for switches or circuit breakers used for other than
service equipment and accessible to qualified persons only;
(2) Metal frames of electrically heated appliances which are
permanently and effectively insulated from ground; and
(3) The cases of distribution apparatus such as transformers and
capacitors mounted on wooden poles at a height exceeding 8 feet (2.44 m)
above ground or grade level.
(iv) Equipment connected by cord and plug. Under any of the
conditions described in paragraphs (f)(7)(iv)(A) through (f)(7)(iv)(C)
of this section, exposed noncurrent-carrying metal parts of cord- and
plug-connected equipment which may become energized shall be grounded:
(A) If in a hazardous (classified) location (see Sec. 1926.407).
(B) If operated at over 150 volts to ground, except for guarded
motors and metal frames of electrically heated appliances if the
appliance frames are permanently and effectively insulated from ground.
(C) If the equipment is one of the types listed in paragraphs
(f)(7)(iv)(C)(1) through (f)(7)(iv)(C)(5) of this section. However, even
though the equipment may be one of these types, it need not be grounded
if it is exempted by paragraph (f)(7)(iv)(C)(6).
(1) Hand held motor-operated tools;
(2) Cord- and plug-connected equipment used in damp or wet locations
or by employees standing on the ground or on metal floors or working
inside of metal tanks or boilers;
(3) Portable and mobile X-ray and associated equipment;
(4) Tools likely to be used in wet and/or conductive locations; and
(5) Portable hand lamps.
(6) Tools likely to be used in wet and/or conductive locations need
not be grounded if supplied through an isolating transformer with an
ungrounded secondary of not over 50 volts. Listed or labeled portable
tools and appliances protected by a system of double insulation, or its
equivalent, need not be grounded. If such a system is employed, the
equipment shall be distinctively marked to indicate that the tool or
appliance utilizes a system of double insulation.
(v) Nonelectrical equipment. The metal parts of the following
nonelectrical equipment shall be grounded: Frames and tracks of
electrically operated cranes; frames of nonelectrically driven elevator
cars to which electric conductors are attached; hand-operated metal
shifting ropes or cables of electric elevators, and metal partitions,
grill work, and similar metal enclosures around equipment of over IkV
between conductors.
(8) Methods of grounding equipment--(i) With circuit conductors.
Noncurrent-carrying metal parts of fixed equipment, if required to be
grounded by this subpart, shall be grounded by an equipment grounding
conductor which is contained within the same raceway, cable, or cord, or
runs with or encloses the circuit conductors. For DC circuits only, the
equipment grounding conductor may be run separately from the circuit
conductors.
(ii) Grounding conductor. A conductor used for grounding fixed or
movable equipment shall have capacity to conduct safely any fault
current which may be imposed on it.
(iii) Equipment considered effectively grounded. Electric equipment
is considered to be effectively grounded if it is secured to, and in
electrical contact with, a metal rack or structure that is provided for
its support and the metal rack or structure is grounded by the method
specified for the noncurrent-carrying metal parts of fixed equipment in
paragraph (f)(8)(i) of this section. Metal car frames supported by metal
hoisting cables attached to or running over metal sheaves or drums of
[[Page 254]]
grounded elevator machines are also considered to be effectively
grounded.
(9) Bonding. If bonding conductors are used to assure electrical
continuity, they shall have the capacity to conduct any fault current
which may be imposed.
(10) Made electrodes. If made electrodes are used, they shall be
free from nonconductive coatings, such as paint or enamel; and, if
practicable, they shall be embedded below permanent moisture level. A
single electrode consisting of a rod, pipe or plate which has a
resistance to ground greater than 25 ohms shall be augmented by one
additional electrode installed no closer than 6 feet (1.83 m) to the
first electrode.
(11) Grounding of systems and circuits of 1000 volts and over (high
voltage)--(i) General. If high voltage systems are grounded, they shall
comply with all applicable provisions of paragraphs (f)(1) through
(f)(10) of this section as supplemented and modified by this paragraph
(f)(11).
(ii) Grounding of systems supplying portable or mobile equipment.
Systems supplying portable or mobile high voltage equipment, other than
substations installed on a temporary basis, shall comply with the
following:
(A) Portable and mobile high voltage equipment shall be supplied
from a system having its neutral grounded through an impedance. If a
delta-connected high voltage system is used to supply the equipment, a
system neutral shall be derived.
(B) Exposed noncurrent-carrying metal parts of portable and mobile
equipment shall be connected by an equipment grounding conductor to the
point at which the system neutral impedance is grounded.
(C) Ground-fault detection and relaying shall be provided to
automatically de-energize any high voltage system component which has
developed a ground fault. The continuity of the equipment grounding
conductor shall be continuously monitored so as to de-energize
automatically the high voltage feeder to the portable equipment upon
loss of continuity of the equipment grounding conductor.
(D) The grounding electrode to which the portable or mobile
equipment system neutral impedance is connected shall be isolated from
and separated in the ground by at least 20 feet (6.1 m) from any other
system or equipment grounding electrode, and there shall be no direct
connection between the grounding electrodes, such as buried pipe, fence
or like objects.
(iii) Grounding of equipment. All noncurrent-carrying metal parts of
portable equipment and fixed equipment including their associated
fences, housings, enclosures, and supporting structures shall be
grounded. However, equipment which is guarded by location and isolated
from ground need not be grounded. Additionally, pole-mounted
distribution apparatus at a height exceeding 8 feet (2.44 m) above
ground or grade level need not be grounded.
[51 FR 25318, July 11, 1986, as amended at 54 FR 24334, June 7, 1989; 61
FR 5510, Feb. 13, 1996]
Sec. 1926.405 Wiring methods, components, and equipment for general use.
(a) Wiring methods. The provisions of this paragraph do not apply to
conductors which form an integral part of equipment such as motors,
controllers, motor control centers and like equipment.
(1) General requirements--(i) Electrical continuity of metal
raceways and enclosures. Metal raceways, cable armor, and other metal
enclosures for conductors shall be metallically joined together into a
continuous electric conductor and shall be so connected to all boxes,
fittings, and cabinets as to provide effective electrical continuity.
(ii) Wiring in ducts. No wiring systems of any type shall be
installed in ducts used to transport dust, loose stock or flammable
vapors. No wiring system of any type shall be installed in any duct used
for vapor removal or in any shaft containing only such ducts.
(2) Temporary wiring--(i) Scope. The provisions of paragraph (a)(2)
of this section apply to temporary electrical power and lighting wiring
methods which may be of a class less than would be required for a
permanent installation. Except as specifically modified in paragraph
(a)(2) of this section, all other requirements of this subpart for
[[Page 255]]
permanent wiring shall apply to temporary wiring installations.
Temporary wiring shall be removed immediately upon completion of
construction or the purpose for which the wiring was installed.
(ii) General requirements for temporary wiring--(A) Feeders shall
originate in a distribution center. The conductors shall be run as
multiconductor cord or cable assemblies or within raceways; or, where
not subject to physical damage, they may be run as open conductors on
insulators not more than 10 feet (3.05 m) apart.
(B) Branch circuits shall originate in a power outlet or panelboard.
Conductors shall be run as multiconductor cord or cable assemblies or
open conductors, or shall be run in raceways. All conductors shall be
protected by overcurrent devices at their ampacity. Runs of open
conductors shall be located where the conductors will not be subject to
physical damage, and the conductors shall be fastened at intervals not
exceeding 10 feet (3.05 m). No branch-circuit conductors shall be laid
on the floor. Each branch circuit that supplies receptacles or fixed
equipment shall contain a separate equipment grounding conductor if the
branch circuit is run as open conductors.
(C) Receptacles shall be of the grounding type. Unless installed in
a complete metallic raceway, each branch circuit shall contain a
separate equipment grounding conductor, and all receptacles shall be
electrically connected to the grounding conductor. Receptacles for uses
other than temporary lighting shall not be installed on branch circuits
which supply temporary lighting. Receptacles shall not be connected to
the same ungrounded conductor of multiwire circuits which supply
temporary lighting.
(D) Disconnecting switches or plug connectors shall be installed to
permit the disconnection of all ungrounded conductors of each temporary
circuit.
(E) All lamps for general illumination shall be protected from
accidental contact or breakage. Metal-case sockets shall be grounded.
(F) Temporary lights shall not be suspended by their electric cords
unless cords and lights are designed for this means of suspension.
(G) Portable electric lighting used in wet and/or other conductive
locations, as for example, drums, tanks, and vessels, shall be operated
at 12 volts or less. However, 120-volt lights may be used if protected
by a ground-fault circuit interrupter.
(H) A box shall be used wherever a change is made to a raceway
system or a cable system which is metal clad or metal sheathed.
(I) Flexible cords and cables shall be protected from damage. Sharp
corners and projections shall be avoided. Flexible cords and cables may
pass through doorways or other pinch points, if protection is provided
to avoid damage.
(J) Extension cord sets used with portable electric tools and
appliances shall be of three-wire type and shall be designed for hard or
extra-hard usage. Flexible cords used with temporary and portable lights
shall be designed for hard or extra-hard usage.
Note: The National Electrical Code, ANSI/NFPA 70, in Article 400,
Table 400-4, lists various types of flexible cords, some of which are
noted as being designed for hard or extra-hard usage. Examples of these
types of flexible cords include hard service cord (types S, ST, SO, STO)
and junior hard service cord (types SJ, SJO, SJT, SJTO).
(iii) Guarding. For temporary wiring over 600 volts, nominal,
fencing, barriers, or other effective means shall be provided to prevent
access of other than authorized and qualified personnel.
(b) Cabinets, boxes, and fittings--(1) Conductors entering boxes,
cabinets, or fittings. Conductors entering boxes, cabinets, or fittings
shall be protected from abrasion, and openings through which conductors
enter shall be effectively closed. Unused openings in cabinets, boxes,
and fittings shall also be effectively closed.
(2) Covers and canopies. All pull boxes, junction boxes, and
fittings shall be provided with covers. If metal covers are used, they
shall be grounded. In energized installations each outlet box shall have
a cover, faceplate, or fixture canopy. Covers of outlet boxes having
holes through which flexible cord pendants pass shall be provided with
bushings designed for the purpose or shall have smooth, well-rounded
surfaces on which the cords may bear.
[[Page 256]]
(3) Pull and junction boxes for systems over 600 volts, nominal. In
addition to other requirements in this section for pull and junction
boxes, the following shall apply to these boxes for systems over 600
volts, nominal:
(i) Complete enclosure. Boxes shall provide a complete enclosure for
the contained conductors or cables.
(ii) Covers. Boxes shall be closed by covers securely fastened in
place. Underground box covers that weigh over 100 pounds (43.6 kg) meet
this requirement. Covers for boxes shall be permanently marked ``HIGH
VOLTAGE.'' The marking shall be on the outside of the box cover and
shall be readily visible and legible.
(c) Knife switches. Single-throw knife switches shall be so
connected that the blades are dead when the switch is in the open
position. Single-throw knife switches shall be so placed that gravity
will not tend to close them. Single-throw knife switches approved for
use in the inverted position shall be provided with a locking device
that will ensure that the blades remain in the open position when so
set. Double-throw knife switches may be mounted so that the throw will
be either vertical or horizontal. However, if the throw is vertical, a
locking device shall be provided to ensure that the blades remain in the
open position when so set.
(d) Switchboards and panelboards. Switchboards that have any exposed
live parts shall be located in permanently dry locations and accessible
only to qualified persons. Panelboards shall be mounted in cabinets,
cutout boxes, or enclosures designed for the purpose and shall be dead
front. However, panelboards other than the dead front externally-
operable type are permitted where accessible only to qualified persons.
Exposed blades of knife switches shall be dead when open.
(e) Enclosures for damp or wet locations--(1) Cabinets, fittings,
and boxes. Cabinets, cutout boxes, fittings, boxes, and panelboard
enclosures in damp or wet locations shall be installed so as to prevent
moisture or water from entering and accumulating within the enclosures.
In wet locations the enclosures shall be weatherproof.
(2) Switches and circuit breakers. Switches, circuit breakers, and
switchboards installed in wet locations shall be enclosed in
weatherproof enclosures.
(f) Conductors for general wiring. All conductors used for general
wiring shall be insulated unless otherwise permitted in this subpart.
The conductor insulation shall be of a type that is suitable for the
voltage, operating temperature, and location of use. Insulated
conductors shall be distinguishable by appropriate color or other means
as being grounded conductors, ungrounded conductors, or equipment
grounding conductors.
(g) Flexible cords and cables--(1) Use of flexible cords and
cables--(i) Permitted uses. Flexible cords and cables shall be suitable
for conditions of use and location. Flexible cords and cables shall be
used only for:
(A) Pendants;
(B) Wiring of fixtures;
(C) Connection of portable lamps or appliances;
(D) Elevator cables;
(E) Wiring of cranes and hoists;
(F) Connection of stationary equipment to facilitate their frequent
interchange;
(G) Prevention of the transmission of noise or vibration; or
(H) Appliances where the fastening means and mechanical connections
are designed to permit removal for maintenance and repair.
(ii) Attachment plugs for cords. If used as permitted in paragraphs
(g)(1)(i)(C), (g)(1)(i)(F), or (g)(1)(i)(H) of this section, the
flexible cord shall be equipped with an attachment plug and shall be
energized from a receptacle outlet.
(iii) Prohibited uses. Unless necessary for a use permitted in
paragraph (g)(1)(i) of this section, flexible cords and cables shall not
be used:
(A) As a substitute for the fixed wiring of a structure;
(B) Where run through holes in walls, ceilings, or floors;
(C) Where run through doorways, windows, or similar openings, except
as permitted in paragraph (a)(2)(ii)(1) of this section;
(D) Where attached to building surfaces; or
(E) Where concealed behind building walls, ceilings, or floors.
[[Page 257]]
(2) Identification, splices, and terminations--(i) Identification. A
conductor of a flexible cord or cable that is used as a grounded
conductor or an equipment grounding conductor shall be distinguishable
from other conductors.
(ii) Marking. Type SJ, SJO, SJT, SJTO, S, SO, ST, and STO cords
shall not be used unless durably marked on the surface with the type
designation, size, and number of conductors.
(iii) Splices. Flexible cords shall be used only in continuous
lengths without splice or tap. Hard service flexible cords No. 12 or
larger may be repaired if spliced so that the splice retains the
insulation, outer sheath properties, and usage characteristics of the
cord being spliced.
(iv) Strain relief. Flexible cords shall be connected to devices and
fittings so that strain relief is provided which will prevent pull from
being directly transmitted to joints or terminal screws.
(v) Cords passing through holes. Flexible cords and cables shall be
protected by bushings or fittings where passing through holes in covers,
outlet boxes, or similar enclosures.
(h) Portable cables over 600 volts, nominal. Multiconductor portable
cable for use in supplying power to portable or mobile equipment at over
600 volts, nominal, shall consist of No. 8 or larger conductors
employing flexible stranding. Cables operated at over 2000 volts shall
be shielded for the purpose of confining the voltage stresses to the
insulation. Grounding conductors shall be provided. Connectors for these
cables shall be of a locking type with provisions to prevent their
opening or closing while energized. Strain relief shall be provided at
connections and terminations. Portable cables shall not be operated with
splices unless the splices are of the permanent molded, vulcanized, or
other equivalent type. Termination enclosures shall be marked with a
high voltage hazard warning, and terminations shall be accessible only
to authorized and qualified personnel.
(i) Fixture wires--(1) General. Fixture wires shall be suitable for
the voltage, temperature, and location of use. A fixture wire which is
used as a grounded conductor shall be identified.
(2) Uses permitted. Fixture wires may be used:
(i) For installation in lighting, fixtures and in similar equipment
where enclosed or protected and not subject to bending or twisting in
use; or
(ii) For connecting lighting fixtures to the branch-circuit
conductors supplying the fixtures.
(3) Uses not permitted. Fixture wires shall not be used as branch-
circuit conductors except as permitted for Class 1 power-limited
circuits.
(j) Equipment for general use--(1) Lighting fixtures, lampholders,
lamps, and receptacles--(i) Live parts. Fixtures, lampholders, lamps,
rosettes, and receptacles shall have no live parts normally exposed to
employee contact. However, rosettes and cleat-type lampholders and
receptacles located at least 8 feet (2.44 m) above the floor may have
exposed parts.
(ii) Support. Fixtures, lampholders, rosettes, and receptacles shall
be securely supported. A fixture that weighs more than 6 pounds (2.72
kg) or exceeds 16 inches (406 mm) in any dimension shall not be
supported by the screw shell of a lampholder.
(iii) Portable lamps. Portable lamps shall be wired with flexible
cord and an attachment plug of the polarized or grounding type. If the
portable lamp uses an Edison-based lampholder, the grounded conductor
shall be identified and attached to the screw shell and the identified
blade of the attachment plug. In addition, portable handlamps shall
comply with the following:
(A) Metal shell, paperlined lampholders shall not be used;
(B) Handlamps shall be equipped with a handle of molded composition
or other insulating material;
(C) Handlamps shall be equipped with a substantial guard attached to
the lampholder or handle;
(D) Metallic guards shall be grounded by the means of an equipment
grounding conductor run within the power supply cord.
(iv) Lampholders. Lampholders of the screw-shell type shall be
installed for use as lampholders only. Lampholders installed in wet or
damp locations shall be of the weatherproof type.
(v) Fixtures. Fixtures installed in wet or damp locations shall be
identified for the purpose and shall be installed
[[Page 258]]
so that water cannot enter or accumulate in wireways, lampholders, or
other electrical parts.
(2) Receptacles, cord connectors, and attachment plugs (caps)--(i)
Configuration. Receptacles, cord connectors, and attachment plugs shall
be constructed so that no receptacle or cord connector will accept an
attachment plug with a different voltage or current rating than that for
which the device is intended. However, a 20-ampere T-slot receptacle or
cord connector may accept a 15-ampere attachment plug of the same
voltage rating. Receptacles connected to circuits having different
voltages, frequencies, or types of current (ac or dc) on the same
premises shall be of such design that the attachment plugs used on these
circuits are not interchangeable.
(ii) Damp and wet locations. A receptacle installed in a wet or damp
location shall be designed for the location.
(3) Appliances--(i) Live parts. Appliances, other than those in
which the current-carrying parts at high temperatures are necessarily
exposed, shall have no live parts normally exposed to employee contact.
(ii) Disconnecting means. A means shall be provided to disconnect
each appliance.
(iii) Rating. Each appliance shall be marked with its rating in
volts and amperes or volts and watts.
(4) Motors. This paragraph applies to motors, motor circuits, and
controllers.
(i) In sight from. If specified that one piece of equipment shall be
``in sight from'' another piece of equipment, one shall be visible and
not more than 50 feet (15.2 m) from the other.
(ii) Disconnecting means--(A) A disconnecting means shall be located
in sight from the controller location. The controller disconnecting
means for motor branch circuits over 600 volts, nominal, may be out of
sight of the controller, if the controller is marked with a warning
label giving the location and identification of the disconnecting means
which is to be locked in the open position.
(B) The disconnecting means shall disconnect the motor and the
controller from all ungrounded supply conductors and shall be so
designed that no pole can be operated independently.
(C) If a motor and the driven machinery are not in sight from the
controller location, the installation shall comply with one of the
following conditions:
(1) The controller disconnecting means shall be capable of being
locked in the open position.
(2) A manually operable switch that will disconnect the motor from
its source of supply shall be placed in sight from the motor location.
(D) The disconnecting means shall plainly indicate whether it is in
the open (off) or closed (on) position.
(E) The disconnecting means shall be readily accessible. If more
than one disconnect is provided for the same equipment, only one need be
readily accessible.
(F) An individual disconnecting means shall be provided for each
motor, but a single disconnecting means may be used for a group of
motors under any one of the following conditions:
(1) If a number of motors drive special parts of a single machine or
piece of apparatus, such as a metal or woodworking machine, crane, or
hoist;
(2) If a group of motors is under the protection of one set of
branch-circuit protective devices; or
(3) If a group of motors is in a single room in sight from the
location of the disconnecting means.
(iii) Motor overload, short-circuit, and ground-fault protection.
Motors, motor-control apparatus, and motor branch-circuit conductors
shall be protected against overheating due to motor overloads or failure
to start, and against short-circuits or ground faults. These provisions
do not require overload protection that will stop a motor where a
shutdown is likely to introduce additional or increased hazards, as in
the case of fire pumps, or where continued operation of a motor is
necessary for a safe shutdown of equipment or process and motor overload
sensing devices are connected to a supervised alarm.
(iv) Protection of live parts--all voltages--(A) Stationary motors
having commutators, collectors, and brush rigging located inside of
motor end brackets and not conductively connected to supply circuits
operating at
[[Page 259]]
more than 150 volts to ground need not have such parts guarded. Exposed
live parts of motors and controllers operating at 50 volts or more
between terminals shall be guarded against accidental contact by any of
the following:
(1) By installation in a room or enclosure that is accessible only
to qualified persons;
(2) By installation on a balcony, gallery, or platform, so elevated
and arranged as to exclude unqualified persons; or
(3) By elevation 8 feet (2.44 m) or more above the floor.
(B) Where live parts of motors or controllers operating at over 150
volts to ground are guarded against accidental contact only by location,
and where adjustment or other attendance may be necessary during the
operation of the apparatus, insulating mats or platforms shall be
provided so that the attendant cannot readily touch live parts unless
standing on the mats or platforms.
(5) Transformers--(i) Application. The following paragraphs cover
the installation of all transformers, except:
(A) Current transformers;
(B) Dry-type transformers installed as a component part of other
apparatus;
(C) Transformers which are an integral part of an X-ray, high
frequency, or electrostatic-coating apparatus;
(D) Transformers used with Class 2 and Class 3 circuits, sign and
outline lighting, electric discharge lighting, and power-limited fire-
protective signaling circuits.
(ii) Operating voltage. The operating voltage of exposed live parts
of transformer installations shall be indicated by warning signs or
visible markings on the equipment or structure.
(iii) Transformers over 35 kV. Dry-type, high fire point liquid-
insulated, and askarel-insulated transformers installed indoors and
rated over 35 kV shall be in a vault.
(iv) Oil-insulated transformers. If they present a fire hazard to
employees, oil-insulated transformers installed indoors shall be in a
vault.
(v) Fire protection. Combustible material, combustible buildings and
parts of buildings, fire escapes, and door and window openings shall be
safeguarded from fires which may originate in oil-insulated transformers
attached to or adjacent to a building or combustible material.
(vi) Transformer vaults. Transformer vaults shall be constructed so
as to contain fire and combustible liquids within the vault and to
prevent unauthorized access. Locks and latches shall be so arranged that
a vault door can be readily opened from the inside.
(vii) Pipes and ducts. Any pipe or duct system foreign to the vault
installation shall not enter or pass through a transformer vault.
(viii) Material storage. Materials shall not be stored in
transformer vaults.
(6) Capacitors--(i) Drainage of stored charge. All capacitors,
except surge capacitors or capacitors included as a component part of
other apparatus, shall be provided with an automatic means of draining
the stored charge and maintaining the discharged state after the
capacitor is disconnected from its source of supply.
(ii) Over 600 volts. Capacitors rated over 600 volts, nominal, shall
comply with the following additional requirements:
(A) Isolating or disconnecting switches (with no interrupting
rating) shall be interlocked with the load interrupting device or shall
be provided with prominently displayed caution signs to prevent
switching load current.
(B) For series capacitors the proper switching shall be assured by
use of at least one of the following:
(1) Mechanically sequenced isolating and bypass switches,
(2) Interlocks, or
(3) Switching procedure prominently displayed at the switching
location.
[51 FR 25318, July 11, 1986, as amended at 61 FR 5510, Feb. 13, 1996]
Sec. 1926.406 Specific purpose equipment and installations.
(a) Cranes and hoists. This paragraph applies to the installation of
electric equipment and wiring used in connection with cranes, monorail
hoists, hoists, and all runways.
(1) Disconnecting means--(i) Runway conductor disconnecting means. A
readily accessible disconnecting means shall
[[Page 260]]
be provided between the runway contact conductors and the power supply.
(ii) Disconnecting means for cranes and monorail hoists. A
disconnecting means, capable of being locked in the open position, shall
be provided in the leads from the runway contact conductors or other
power supply on any crane or monorail hoist.
(A) If this additional disconnecting means is not readily accessible
from the crane or monorail hoist operating station, means shall be
provided at the operating station to open the power circuit to all
motors of the crane or monorail hoist.
(B) The additional disconnect may be omitted if a monorail hoist or
hand-propelled crane bridge installation meets all of the following:
(1) The unit is floor controlled;
(2) The unit is within view of the power supply disconnecting means;
and
(3) No fixed work platform has been provided for servicing the unit.
(2) Control. A limit switch or other device shall be provided to
prevent the load block from passing the safe upper limit of travel of
any hoisting mechanism.
(3) Clearance. The dimension of the working space in the direction
of access to live parts which may require examination, adjustment,
servicing, or maintenance while alive shall be a minimum of 2 feet 6
inches (762 mm). Where controls are enclosed in cabinets, the door(s)
shall open at least 90 degrees or be removable, or the installation
shall provide equivalent access.
(4) Grounding. All exposed metal parts of cranes, monorail hoists,
hoists and accessories including pendant controls shall be metallically
joined together into a continuous electrical conductor so that the
entire crane or hoist will be grounded in accordance with Sec.
1926.404(f). Moving parts, other than removable accessories or
attachments, having metal-to-metal bearing surfaces shall be considered
to be electrically connected to each other through the bearing surfaces
for grounding purposes. The trolley frame and bridge frame shall be
considered as electrically grounded through the bridge and trolley
wheels and its respective tracks unless conditions such as paint or
other insulating materials prevent reliable metal-to-metal contact. In
this case a separate bonding conductor shall be provided.
(b) Elevators, escalators, and moving walks--(1) Disconnecting
means. Elevators, escalators, and moving walks shall have a single means
for disconnecting all ungrounded main power supply conductors for each
unit.
(2) Control panels. If control panels are not located in the same
space as the drive machine, they shall be located in cabinets with doors
or panels capable of being locked closed.
(c) Electric welders--disconnecting means--(1) Motor-generator, AC
transformer, and DC rectifier arc welders. A disconnecting means shall
be provided in the supply circuit for each motor-generator arc welder,
and for each AC transformer and DC rectifier arc welder which is not
equipped with a disconnect mounted as an integral part of the welder.
(2) Resistance welders. A switch or circuit breaker shall be
provided by which each resistance welder and its control equipment can
be isolated from the supply circuit. The ampere rating of this
disconnecting means shall not be less than the supply conductor
ampacity.
(d) X-Ray equipment--(1) Disconnecting means--(i) General. A
disconnecting means shall be provided in the supply circuit. The
disconnecting means shall be operable from a location readily accessible
from the X-ray control. For equipment connected to a 120-volt branch
circuit of 30 amperes or less, a grounding-type attachment plug cap and
receptacle of proper rating may serve as a disconnecting means.
(ii) More than one piece of equipment. If more than one piece of
equipment is operated from the same high-voltage circuit, each piece or
each group of equipment as a unit shall be provided with a high-voltage
switch or equivalent disconnecting means. This disconnecting means shall
be constructed, enclosed, or located so as to avoid contact by employees
with its live parts.
(2) Control--Radiographic and fluoroscopic types. Radiographic and
fluoroscopic-type equipment shall be effectively enclosed or shall have
interlocks that deenergize the equipment
[[Page 261]]
automatically to prevent ready access to live current-carrying parts.
Sec. 1926.407 Hazardous (classified) locations.
(a) Scope. This section sets forth requirements for electric
equipment and wiring in locations which are classified depending on the
properties of the flammable vapors, liquids or gases, or combustible
dusts or fibers which may be present therein and the likelihood that a
flammable or combustible concentration or quantity is present. Each
room, section or area shall be considered individually in determining
its classification. These hazardous (classified) locations are assigned
six designations as follows:
Class I, Division 1
Class I, Division 2
Class II, Division 1
Class II, Division 2
Class III, Division l
Class III, Division 2
For definitions of these locations see Sec. 1926.449. All
applicable requirements in this subpart apply to all hazardous
(classified) locations, unless modified by provisions of this section.
(b) Electrical installations. Equipment, wiring methods, and
installations of equipment in hazardous (classified) locations shall be
approved as intrinsically safe or approved for the hazardous
(classified) location or safe for the hazardous (classified) location.
Requirements for each of these options are as follows:
(1) Intrinsically safe. Equipment and associated wiring approved as
intrinsically safe is permitted in any hazardous (classified) location
included in its listing or labeling.
(2) Approved for the hazardous (classified) location--(i) General.
Equipment shall be approved not only for the class of location but also
for the ignitible or combustible properties of the specific gas, vapor,
dust, or fiber that will be present.
Note: NFPA 70, the National Electrical Code, lists or defines
hazardous gases, vapors, and dusts by ``Groups'' characterized by their
ignitible or combustible properties.
(ii) Marking. Equipment shall not be used unless it is marked to
show the class, group, and operating temperature or temperature range,
based on operation in a 40-degree C ambient, for which it is approved.
The temperature marking shall not exceed the ignition temperature of the
specific gas, vapor, or dust to be encountered. However, the following
provisions modify this marking requirement for specific equipment:
(A) Equipment of the non-heat-producing type (such as junction
boxes, conduit, and fitting) and equipment of the heat-producing type
having a maximum temperature of not more than 100 degrees C (212 degrees
F) need not have a marked operating temperature or temperature range.
(B) Fixed lighting fixtures marked for use only in Class I, Division
2 locations need not be marked to indicate the group.
(C) Fixed general-purpose equipment in Class I locations, other than
lighting fixtures, which is acceptable for use in Class I, Division 2
locations need not be marked with the class, group, division, or
operating temperature.
(D) Fixed dust-tight equipment, other than lighting fixtures, which
is acceptable for use in Class II, Division 2 and Class III locations
need not be marked with the class, group, division, or operating
temperature.
(3) Safe for the hazardous (classified) location. Equipment which is
safe for the location shall be of a type and design which the employer
demonstrates will provide protection from the hazards arising from the
combustibility and flammability of vapors, liquids, gases, dusts, or
fibers.
Note: The National Electrical Code, NFPA 70, contains guidelines for
determining the type and design of equipment and installations which
will meet this requirement. The guidelines of this document address
electric wiring, equipment, and systems installed in hazardous
(classified) locations and contain specific provisions for the
following: wiring methods, wiring connections, conductor insulation,
flexible cords, sealing and drainage, transformers, capacitors,
switches, circuit breakers, fuses, motor controllers, receptacles,
attachment plugs, meters, relays, instruments, resistors, generators,
motors, lighting fixtures, storage battery charging equipment, electric
cranes, electric hoists and similar equipment, utilization equipment,
signaling systems, alarm systems, remote control systems, local loud
speaker and communication systems, ventilation piping,
[[Page 262]]
live parts, lightning surge protection, and grounding. Compliance with
these guidelines will constitute one means, but not the only means, of
compliance with this paragraph.
(c) Conduits. All conduits shall be threaded and shall be made
wrench-tight. Where it is impractical to make a threaded joint tight, a
bonding jumper shall be utilized.
[51 FR 25318, July 11, 1986, as amended at 61 FR 5510, Feb. 13, 1996]
Sec. 1926.408 Special systems.
(a) Systems over 600 volts, nominal. Paragraphs (a)(1) through
(a)(4) of this section contain general requirements for all circuits and
equipment operated at over 600 volts.
(1) Wiring methods for fixed installations--(i) Above ground. Above-
ground conductors shall be installed in rigid metal conduit, in
intermediate metal conduit, in cable trays, in cablebus, in other
suitable raceways, or as open runs of metal-clad cable designed for the
use and purpose. However, open runs of non-metallic-sheathed cable or of
bare conductors or busbars may be installed in locations which are
accessible only to qualified persons. Metallic shielding components,
such as tapes, wires, or braids for conductors, shall be grounded. Open
runs of insulated wires and cables having a bare lead sheath or a
braided outer covering shall be supported in a manner designed to
prevent physical damage to the braid or sheath.
(ii) Installations emerging from the ground. Conductors emerging
from the ground shall be enclosed in raceways. Raceways installed on
poles shall be of rigid metal conduit, intermediate metal conduit, PVC
schedule 80 or equivalent extending from the ground line up to a point 8
feet (2.44 m) above finished grade. Conductors entering a building shall
be protected by an enclosure from the ground line to the point of
entrance. Metallic enclosures shall be grounded.
(2) Interrupting and isolating devices--(i) Circuit breakers.
Circuit breakers located indoors shall consist of metal-enclosed or
fire-resistant, cell-mounted units. In locations accessible only to
qualified personnel, open mounting of circuit breakers is permitted. A
means of indicating the open and closed position of circuit breakers
shall be provided.
(ii) Fused cutouts. Fused cutouts installed in buildings or
transformer vaults shall be of a type identified for the purpose. They
shall be readily accessible for fuse replacement.
(iii) Equipment isolating means. A means shall be provided to
completely isolate equipment for inspection and repairs. Isolating means
which are not designed to interrupt the load current of the circuit
shall be either interlocked with a circuit interrupter or provided with
a sign warning against opening them under load.
(3) Mobile and portable equipment--(i) Power cable connections to
mobile machines. A metallic enclosure shall be provided on the mobile
machine for enclosing the terminals of the power cable. The enclosure
shall include provisions for a solid connection for the ground wire(s)
terminal to ground effectively the machine frame. The method of cable
termination used shall prevent any strain or pull on the cable from
stressing the electrical connections. The enclosure shall have provision
for locking so only authorized qualified persons may open it and shall
be marked with a sign warning of the presence of energized parts.
(ii) Guarding live parts. All energized switching and control parts
shall be enclosed in effectively grounded metal cabinets or enclosures.
Circuit breakers and protective equipment shall have the operating means
projecting through the metal cabinet or enclosure so these units can be
reset without locked doors being opened. Enclosures and metal cabinets
shall be locked so that only authorized qualified persons have access
and shall be marked with a sign warning of the presence of energized
parts. Collector ring assemblies on revolving-type machines (shovels,
draglines, etc.) shall be guarded.
(4) Tunnel installations--(i) Application. The provisions of this
paragraph apply to installation and use of high-voltage power
distribution and utilization equipment which is associated with tunnels
and which is portable and/or mobile, such as substations, trailers,
cars, mobile shovels, draglines, hoists, drills, dredges, compressors,
pumps,
[[Page 263]]
conveyors, and underground excavators.
(ii) Conductors. Conductors in tunnels shall be installed in one or
more of the following:
(A) Metal conduit or other metal raceway,
(B) Type MC cable, or
(C) Other suitable multiconductor cable.
Conductors shall also be so located or guarded as to protect them from
physical damage. Multiconductor portable cable may supply mobile
equipment. An equipment grounding conductor shall be run with circuit
conductors inside the metal raceway or inside the multiconductor cable
jacket. The equipment grounding conductor may be insulated or bare.
(iii) Guarding live parts. Bare terminals of transformers, switches,
motor controllers, and other equipment shall be enclosed to prevent
accidental contact with energized parts. Enclosures for use in tunnels
shall be drip-proof, weatherproof, or submersible as required by the
environmental conditions.
(iv) Disconnecting means. A disconnecting means that simultaneously
opens all ungrounded conductors shall be installed at each transformer
or motor location.
(v) Grounding and bonding. All nonenergized metal parts of electric
equipment and metal raceways and cable sheaths shall be grounded and
bonded to all metal pipes and rails at the portal and at intervals not
exceeding 1000 feet (305 m) throughout the tunnel.
(b) Class 1, Class 2, and Class 3 remote control, signaling, and
power-limited circuits--(1) Classification. Class 1, Class 2, or Class 3
remote control, signaling, or power-limited circuits are characterized
by their usage and electrical power limitation which differentiates them
from light and power circuits. These circuits are classified in
accordance with their respective voltage and power limitations as
summarized in paragraphs (b)(1)(i) through (b)(1)(iii) of this section.
(i) Class 1 circuits--(A) A Class 1 power-limited circuit is
supplied from a source having a rated output of not more than 30 volts
and 1000 volt-amperes.
(B) A Class 1 remote control circuit or a Class 1 signaling circuit
has a voltage which does not exceed 600 volts; however, the power output
of the source need not be limited.
(ii) Class 2 and Class 3 circuits--(A) Power for Class 2 and Class 3
circuits is limited either inherently (in which no overcurrent
protection is required) or by a combination of a power source and
overcurrent protection.
(B) The maximum circuit voltage is 150 volts AC or DC for a Class 2
inherently limited power source, and 100 volts AC or DC for a Class 3
inherently limited power source.
(C) The maximum circuit voltage is 30 volts AC and 60 volts DC for a
Class 2 power source limited by overcurrent protection, and 150 volts AC
or DC for a Class 3 power source limited by overcurrent protection.
(iii) Application. The maximum circuit voltages in paragraphs
(b)(1)(i) and (b)(1)(ii) of this section apply to sinusoidal AC or
continuous DC power sources, and where wet contact occurrence is not
likely.
(2) Marking. A Class 2 or Class 3 power supply unit shall not be
used unless it is durably marked where plainly visible to indicate the
class of supply and its electrical rating.
(c) Communications systems--(1) Scope. These provisions for
communication systems apply to such systems as central-station-connected
and non-central-station-connected telephone circuits, radio receiving
and transmitting equipment, and outside wiring for fire and burglar
alarm, and similar central station systems. These installations need not
comply with the provisions of Sec. Sec. 1926.403 through 1926.408(b),
except Sec. 1926.404(c)(1)(ii) and Sec. 1926.407.
(2) Protective devices--(i) Circuits exposed to power conductors.
Communication circuits so located as to be exposed to accidental contact
with light or power conductors operating at over 300 volts shall have
each circuit so exposed provided with an approved protector.
(ii) Antenna lead-ins. Each conductor of a lead-in from an outdoor
antenna shall be provided with an antenna discharge unit or other means
that will drain static charges from the antenna system.
[[Page 264]]
(3) Conductor location--(i) Outside of buildings--(A) Receiving
distribution lead-in or aerial-drop cables attached to buildings and
lead-in conductors to radio transmitters shall be so installed as to
avoid the possibility of accidental contact with electric light or power
conductors.
(B) The clearance between lead-in conductors and any lightning
protection conductors shall not be less than 6 feet (1.83 m).
(ii) On poles. Where practicable, communication conductors on poles
shall be located below the light or power conductors. Communications
conductors shall not be attached to a crossarm that carries light or
power conductors.
(iii) Inside of buildings. Indoor antennas, lead-ins, and other
communication conductors attached as open conductors to the inside of
buildings shall be located at least 2 inches (50.8 mm) from conductors
of any light or power or Class 1 circuits unless a special and equally
protective method of conductor separation is employed.
(4) Equipment location. Outdoor metal structures supporting
antennas, as well as self-supporting antennas such as vertical rods or
dipole structures, shall be located as far away from overhead conductors
of electric light and power circuits of over 150 volts to ground as
necessary to avoid the possibility of the antenna or structure falling
into or making accidental contact with such circuits.
(5) Grounding--(i) Lead-in conductors. If exposed to contact with
electric light or power conductors, the metal sheath of aerial cables
entering buildings shall be grounded or shall be interrupted close to
the entrance to the building by an insulating joint or equivalent
device. Where protective devices are used, they shall be grounded.
(ii) Antenna structures. Masts and metal structures supporting
antennas shall be permanently and effectively grounded without splice or
connection in the grounding conductor.
(iii) Equipment enclosures. Transmitters shall be enclosed in a
metal frame or grill or separated from the operating space by a barrier,
all metallic parts of which are effectively connected to ground. All
external metal handles and controls accessible to the operating
personnel shall be effectively grounded. Unpowered equipment and
enclosures shall be considered grounded where connected to an attached
coaxial cable with an effectively grounded metallic shield.
[51 FR 25318, July 11, 1986, as amended at 61 FR 5510, Feb. 13, 1996]
Sec. Sec. 1926.409-1926.415 [Reserved]
Safety-Related Work Practices
Sec. 1926.416 General requirements.
(a) Protection of employees--(1) No employer shall permit an
employee to work in such proximity to any part of an electric power
circuit that the employee could contact the electric power circuit in
the course of work, unless the employee is protected against electric
shock by deenergizing the circuit and grounding it or by guarding it
effectively by insulation or other means.
(2) In work areas where the exact location of underground electric
powerlines is unknown, employees using jack-hammers, bars, or other hand
tools which may contact a line shall be provided with insulated
protective gloves.
(3) Before work is begun the employer shall ascertain by inquiry or
direct observation, or by instruments, whether any part of an energized
electric power circuit, exposed or concealed, is so located that the
performance of the work may bring any person, tool, or machine into
physical or electrical contact with the electric power circuit. The
employer shall post and maintain proper warning signs where such a
circuit exists. The employer shall advise employees of the location of
such lines, the hazards involved, and the protective measures to be
taken.
(b) Passageways and open spaces---(1) Barriers or other means of
guarding shall be provided to ensure that workspace for electrical
equipment will not be used as a passageway during periods when energized
parts of electrical equipment are exposed.
(2) Working spaces, walkways, and similar locations shall be kept
clear of cords so as not to create a hazard to employees.
[[Page 265]]
(c) Load ratings. In existing installations, no changes in circuit
protection shall be made to increase the load in excess of the load
rating of the circuit wiring.
(d) Fuses. When fuses are installed or removed with one or both
terminals energized, special tools insulated for the voltage shall be
used.
(e) Cords and cables. (1) Worn or frayed electric cords or cables
shall not be used.
(2) Extension cords shall not be fastened with staples, hung from
nails, or suspended by wire.
[44 FR 8577, Feb. 9, 1979; 44 FR 20940, Apr. 6, 1979, as amended at 55
FR 42328, Oct. 18, 1990; 58 FR 35179, June 30, 1993; 61 FR 9251, Mar. 7,
1996; 61 FR 41738, Aug. 12, 1996]
Sec. 1926.417 Lockout and tagging of circuits.
(a) Controls. Controls that are to be deactivated during the course
of work on energized or deenergized equipment or circuits shall be
tagged.
(b) Equipment and circuits. Equipment or circuits that are
deenergized shall be rendered inoperative and shall have tags attached
at all points where such equipment or circuits can be energized.
(c) Tags. Tags shall be placed to identify plainly the equipment or
circuits being worked on.
[44 FR 8577, Feb. 9, 1979; 44 FR 20940, Apr. 6, 1979, as amended at 55
FR 42328, Oct. 18, 1990; 58 FR 35181, June 30, 1993; 61 FR 9251, Mar. 7,
1996; 61 FR 41739, Aug. 12, 1996]]
Sec. Sec. 1926.418-1926.430 [Reserved]
Safety-Related Maintenance and Environmental Considerations
Sec. 1926.431 Maintenance of equipment.
The employer shall ensure that all wiring components and utilization
equipment in hazardous locations are maintained in a dust-tight, dust-
ignition-proof, or explosion-proof condition, as appropriate. There
shall be no loose or missing screws, gaskets, threaded connections,
seals, or other impairments to a tight condition.
Sec. 1926.432 Environmental deterioration of equipment.
(a) Deteriorating agents--(1) Unless identified for use in the
operating environment, no conductors or equipment shall be located:
(i) In damp or wet locations;
(ii) Where exposed to gases, fumes, vapors, liquids, or other agents
having a deteriorating effect on the conductors or equipment; or
(iii) Where exposed to excessive temperatures.
(2) Control equipment, utilization equipment, and busways approved
for use in dry locations only shall be protected against damage from the
weather during building construction.
(b) Protection against corrosion. Metal raceways, cable armor,
boxes, cable sheathing, cabinets, elbows, couplings, fittings, supports,
and support hardware shall be of materials appropriate for the
environment in which they are to be installed.
Sec. Sec. 1926.433-1926.440 [Reserved]
Safety Requirements for Special Equipment
Sec. 1926.441 Batteries and battery charging.
(a) General requirements--(1) Batteries of the unsealed type shall
be located in enclosures with outside vents or in well ventilated rooms
and shall be arranged so as to prevent the escape of fumes, gases, or
electrolyte spray into other areas.
(2) Ventilation shall be provided to ensure diffusion of the gases
from the battery and to prevent the accumulation of an explosive
mixture.
(3) Racks and trays shall be substantial and shall be treated to
make them resistant to the electrolyte.
(4) Floors shall be of acid resistant construction unless protected
from acid accumulations.
(5) Face shields, aprons, and rubber gloves shall be provided for
workers handling acids or batteries.
(6) Facilities for quick drenching of the eyes and body shall be
provided within 25 feet (7.62 m) of battery handling areas.
(7) Facilities shall be provided for flushing and neutralizing
spilled electrolyte and for fire protection.
(b) Charging--(1) Battery charging installations shall be located in
areas designated for that purpose.
[[Page 266]]
(2) Charging apparatus shall be protected from damage by trucks.
(3) When batteries are being charged, the vent caps shall be kept in
place to avoid electrolyte spray. Vent caps shall be maintained in
functioning condition.
Sec. Sec. 1926.442-1926.448 [Reserved]
Definitions
Sec. 1926.449 Definitions applicable to this subpart.
The definitions given in this section apply to the terms used in
subpart K. The definitions given here for ``approved'' and ``qualified
person'' apply, instead of the definitions given in Sec. 1926.32, to
the use of these terms in subpart K.
Acceptable. An installation or equipment is acceptable to the
Assistant Secretary of Labor, and approved within the meaning of this
subpart K:
(a) If it is accepted, or certified, or listed, or labeled, or
otherwise determined to be safe by a qualified testing laboratory
capable of determining the suitability of materials and equipment for
installation and use in accordance with this standard; or
(b) With respect to an installation or equipment of a kind which no
qualified testing laboratory accepts, certifies, lists, labels, or
determines to be safe, if it is inspected or tested by another Federal
agency, or by a State, municipal, or other local authority responsible
for enforcing occupational safety provisions of the National Electrical
Code, and found in compliance with those provisions; or
(c) With respect to custom-made equipment or related installations
which are designed, fabricated for, and intended for use by a particular
customer, if it is determined to be safe for its intended use by its
manufacturer on the basis of test data which the employer keeps and
makes available for inspection to the Assistant Secretary and his
authorized representatives.
Accepted. An installation is ``accepted'' if it has been inspected
and found to be safe by a qualified testing laboratory.
Accessible. (As applied to wiring methods.) Capable of being removed
or exposed without damaging the building structure or finish, or not
permanently closed in by the structure or finish of the building. (See
``concealed'' and ``exposed.'')
Accessible. (As applied to equipment.) Admitting close approach; not
guarded by locked doors, elevation, or other effective means.
(See``Readily accessible.'')
Ampacity. The current in amperes a conductor can carry continuously
under the conditions of use without exceeding its temperature rating.
Appliances. Utilization equipment, generally other than industrial,
normally built in standardized sizes or types, which is installed or
connecetcd as a unit to perform one or more functions.
Approved. Acceptable to the authority enforcing this subpart. The
authority enforcing this subpart is the Assistant Secretary of Labor for
Occupational Safety and Health. The definition of ``acceptable''
indicates what is acceptable to the Assistant Secretary of Labor, and
therefore approved within the meaning of this subpart.
Askarel. A generic term for a group of nonflammable synthetic
chlorinated hydrocarbons used as electrical insulating media. Askarels
of various compositional types are used. Under arcing conditions the
gases produced, while consisting predominantly of noncombustible
hydrogen chloride, can include varying amounts of combustible gases
depending upon the askarel type.
Attachment plug (Plug cap)(Cap). A device which, by insertion in a
receptacle, establishes connection between the conductors of the
attached flexible cord and the conductors connected permanently to the
receptacle.
Automatic. Self-acting, operating by its own mechanism when actuated
by some impersonal influence, as for example, a change in current
strength, pressure, temperature, or mechanical configuration.
Bare conductor. See ``Conductor.''
Bonding. The permanent joining of metallic parts to form an
electrically conductive path which will assure electrical continuity and
the capacity to conduct safely any current likely to be imposed.
[[Page 267]]
Bonding jumper. A reliable conductor to assure the required
electrical conductivity between metal parts required to be electrically
connected.
Branch circuit. The circuit conductors between the final overcurrent
device protecting the circuit and the outlet(s).
Building. A structure which stands alone or which is cut off from
adjoining structures by fire walls with all openings therein protected
by approved fire doors.
Cabinet. An enclosure designed either for surface or flush mounting,
and provided with a frame, mat, or trim in which a swinging door or
doors are or may be hung.
Certified. Equipment is ``certified'' if it:
(a) Has been tested and found by a qualified testing laboratory to
meet applicable test standards or to be safe for use in a specified
manner, and
(b) Is of a kind whose production is periodically inspected by a
qualified testing laboratory. Certified equipment must bear a label,
tag, or other record of certification.
Circuit breaker--(a) (600 volts nominal, or less.) A device designed
to open and close a circuit by nonautomatic means and to open the
circuit automatically on a predetermined overcurrent without injury to
itself when properly applied within its rating.
(b) (Over 600 volts, nominal.) A switching device capable of making,
carrying, and breaking currents under normal circuit conditions, and
also making, carrying for a specified time, and breaking currents under
specified abnormal circuit conditions, such as those of short circuit.
Class I locations. Class I locations are those in which flammable
gases or vapors are or may be present in the air in quantities
sufficient to produce explosive or ignitible mixtures. Class I locations
include the following:
(a) Class I, Division 1. A Class I, Division 1 location is a
location:
(1) In which ignitible concentrations of flammable gases or vapors
may exist under normal operating conditions; or
(2) In which ignitible concentrations of such gases or vapors may
exist frequently because of repair or maintenance operations or because
of leakage; or
(3) In which breakdown or faulty operation of equipment or processes
might release ignitible concentrations of flammable gases or vapors, and
might also cause simultaneous failure of electric equipment.
Note: This classification usually includes locations where volatile
flammable liquids or liquefied flammable gases are transferred from one
container to another; interiors of spray booths and areas in the
vicinity of spraying and painting operations where volatile flammable
solvents are used; locations containing open tanks or vats of volatile
flammable liquids; drying rooms or compartments for the evaporation of
flammable solvents; inadequately ventilated pump rooms for flammable gas
or for volatile flammable liquids; and all other locations where
ignitible concentrations of flammable vapors or gases are likely to
occur in the course of normal operations.
(b) Class I, Division 2. A Class I, Division 2 location is a
location:
(1) In which volatile flammable liquids or flammable gases are
handled, processed, or used, but in which the hazardous liquids, vapors,
or gases will normally be confined within closed containers or closed
systems from which they can escape only in case of accidental rupture or
breakdown of such containers or systems, or in case of abnormal
operation of equipment; or
(2) In which ignitible concentrations of gases or vapors are
normally prevented by positive mechanical ventilation, and which might
become hazardous through failure or abnormal operations of the
ventilating equipment; or
(3) That is adjacent to a Class I, Division 1 location, and to which
ignitible concentrations of gases or vapors might occasionally be
communicated unless such communication is prevented by adequate
positive-pressure ventilation from a source of clean air, and effective
safeguards against ventilation failure are provided.
Note: This classification usually includes locations where volatile
flammable liquids or flammable gases or vapors are used, but which would
become hazardous only in case of an accident or of some unusual
operating condition. The quantity of flammable material that might
escape in case of accident, the adequacy of ventilating equipment, the
total area involved, and the record of the industry or business with
respect to explosions
[[Page 268]]
or fires are all factors that merit consideration in determining the
classification and extent of each location.
Piping without valves, checks, meters, and similar devices would not
ordinarily introduce a hazardous condition even though used for
flammable liquids or gases. Locations used for the storage of flammable
liquids or of liquefied or compressed gases in sealed containers would
not normally be considered hazardous unless also subject to other
hazardous conditions.
Electrical conduits and their associated enclosures separated from
process fluids by a single seal or barrier are classed as a Division 2
location if the outside of the conduit and enclosures is a nonhazardous
location.
Class II locations. Class II locations are those that are hazardous
because of the presence of combustible dust. Class II locations include
the following:
(a) Class II, Division 1. A Class II, Division 1 location is a
location:
(1) In which combustible dust is or may be in suspension in the air
under normal operating conditions, in quantities sufficient to produce
explosive or ignitible mixtures; or
(2) Where mechanical failure or abnormal operation of machinery or
equipment might cause such explosive or ignitible mixtures to be
produced, and might also provide a source of ignition through
simultaneous failure of electric equipment, operation of protection
devices, or from other causes, or
(3) In which combustible dusts of an electrically conductive nature
may be present.
Note: Combustible dusts which are electrically nonconductive include
dusts produced in the handling and processing of grain and grain
products, pulverized sugar and cocoa, dried egg and milk powders,
pulverized spices, starch and pastes, potato and woodflour, oil meal
from beans and seed, dried hay, and other organic materials which may
produce combustible dusts when processed or handled. Dusts containing
magnesium or aluminum are particularly hazardous and the use of extreme
caution is necessary to avoid ignition and explosion.
(b) Class II, Division 2. A Class II, Division 2 location is a
location in which:
(1) Combustible dust will not normally be in suspension in the air
in quantities sufficient to produce explosive or ignitible mixtures, and
dust accumulations are normally insufficient to interfere with the
normal operation of electrical equipment or other apparatus; or
(2) Dust may be in suspension in the air as a result of infrequent
malfunctioning of handling or processing equipment, and dust
accumulations resulting therefrom may be ignitible by abnormal operation
or failure of electrical equipment or other apparatus.
Note: This classification includes locations where dangerous
concentrations of suspended dust would not be likely but where dust
accumulations might form on or in the vicinity of electric equipment.
These areas may contain equipment from which appreciable quantities of
dust would escape under abnormal operating conditions or be adjacent to
a Class II Division 1 location, as described above, into which an
explosive or ignitible concentration of dust may be put into suspension
under abnormal operating conditions.
Class III locations. Class III locations are those that are
hazardous because of the presence of easily ignitible fibers or flyings
but in which such fibers or flyings are not likely to be in suspension
in the air in quantities sufficient to produce ignitible mixtures. Class
111 locations include the following:
(a) Class III, Division 1. A Class III, Division 1 location is a
location in which easily ignitible fibers or materials producing
combustible flyings are handled, manufactured, or used.
Note: Easily ignitible fibers and flyings include rayon, cotton
(including cotton linters and cotton waste), sisal or henequen, istle,
jute, hemp, tow, cocoa fiber, oakum, baled waste kapok, Spanish moss,
excelsior, sawdust, woodchips, and other material of similar nature.
(b) Class III, Division 2. A Class III, Division 2 location is a
location in which easily ignitible fibers are stored or handled, except
in process of manufacture.
Collector ring. A collector ring is an assembly of slip rings for
transferring electrical energy from a stationary to a rotating member.
Concealed. Rendered inaccessible by the structure or finish of the
building. Wires in concealed raceways are considered concealed, even
though they may become accessible by withdrawing them. [See
``Accessible. (As applied to wiring methods.)'']
[[Page 269]]
Conductor--(a) Bare. A conductor having no covering or electrical
insulation whatsoever.
(b) Covered. A conductor encased within material of composition or
thickness that is not recognized as electrical insulation.
(c) Insulated. A conductor encased within material of composition
and thickness that is recognized as electrical insulation.
Controller. A device or group of devices that serves to govern, in
some predetermined manner, the electric power delivered to the apparatus
to which it is connected.
Covered conductor. See ``Conductor.''
Cutout. (Over 600 volts, nominal.) An assembly of a fuse support
with either a fuseholder, fuse carrier, or disconnecting blade. The
fuseholder or fuse carrier may include a conducting element (fuse link),
or may act as the disconnecting blade by the inclusion of a nonfusible
member.
Cutout box. An enclosure designed for surface mounting and having
swinging doors or covers secured directly to and telescoping with the
walls of the box proper. (See ``Cabinet.'')
Damp location. See ``Location.''
Dead front. Without live parts exposed to a person on the operating
side of the equipment.
Device. A unit of an electrical system which is intended to carry
but not utilize electric energy.
Disconnecting means. A device, or group of devices, or other means
by which the conductors of a circuit can be disconnected from their
source of supply.
Disconnecting (or Isolating) switch. (Over 600 volts, nominal.) A
mechanical switching device used for isolating a circuit or equipment
from a source of power.
Dry location. See ``Location.''
Enclosed. Surrounded by a case, housing, fence or walls which will
prevent persons from accidentally contacting energized parts.
Enclosure. The case or housing of apparatus, or the fence or walls
surrounding an installation to prevent personnel from accidentally
contacting energized parts, or to protect the equipment from physical
damage.
Equipment. A general term including material, fittings, devices,
appliances, fixtures, apparatus, and the like, used as a part of, or in
connection with, an electrical installation.
Equipment grounding conductor. See ``Grounding conductor,
equipment.''
Explosion-proof apparatus. Apparatus enclosed in a case that is
capable of withstanding an explosion of a specified gas or vapor which
may occur within it and of preventing the ignition of a specified gas or
vapor surrounding the enclosure by sparks, flashes, or explosion of the
gas or vapor within, and which operates at such an external temperature
that it will not ignite a surrounding flammable atmosphere.
Exposed. (As applied to live parts.) Capable of being inadvertently
touched or approached nearer than a safe distance by a person. It is
applied to parts not suitably guarded, isolated, or insulated. (See
``Accessible and ``Concealed.'')
Exposed. (As applied to wiring methods.) On or attached to the
surface or behind panels designed to allow access. [See ``Accessible.
(As applied to wiring methods.)'']
Exposed. (For the purposes of Sec. 1926.408(d), Communications
systems.) Where the circuit is in such a position that in case of
failure of supports or insulation, contact with another circuit may
result.
Externally operable. Capable of being operated without exposing the
operator to contact with live parts.
Feeder. All circuit conductors between the service equipment, or the
generator switchboard of an isolated plant, and the final branch-circuit
overcurrent device.
Festoon lighting. A string of outdoor lights suspended between two
points more than 15 feet (4.57 m) apart.
Fitting. An accessory such as a locknut, bushing, or other part of a
wiring system that is intended primarily to perform a mechanical rather
than an electrical function.
Fuse. (Over 600 volts, nominal.) An overcurrent protective device
with a circuit opening fusible part that is heated and severed by the
passage of overcurrent through it. A fuse comprises all the parts that
form a unit capable of performing the prescribed
[[Page 270]]
functions. It may or may not be the complete device necessary to connect
it into an electrical circuit.
Ground. A conducting connection, whether intentional or accidental,
between an electrical circuit or equipment and the earth, or to some
conducting body that serves in place of the earth.
Grounded. Connected to earth or to some conducting body that serves
in place of the earth.
Grounded, effectively (Over 600 volts, nominal.) Permanently
connected to earth through a ground connection of sufficiently low
impedance and having sufficient ampacity that ground fault current which
may occur cannot build up to voltages dangerous to personnel.
Grounded conductor. A system or circuit conductor that is
intentionally grounded.
Grounding conductor. A conductor used to connect equipment or the
grounded circuit of a wiring system to a grounding electrode or
electrodes.
Grounding conductor, equipment. The conductor used to connect the
noncurrent-carrying metal parts of equipment, raceways, and other
enclosures to the system grounded conductor and/or the grounding
electrode conductor at the service equipment or at the source of a
separately derived system.
Grounding electrode conductor. The conductor used to connect the
grounding electrode to the equipment grounding conductor and/or to the
grounded conductor of the circuit at the service equipment or at the
source of a separately derived system.
Ground-fault circuit interrupter. A device for the protection of
personnel that functions to deenergize a circuit or portion thereof
within an established period of time when a current to ground exceeds
some predetermined value that is less than that required to operate the
overcurrent protective device of the supply circuit.
Guarded. Covered, shielded, fenced, enclosed, or otherwise protected
by means of suitable covers, casings, barriers, rails, screens, mats, or
platforms to remove the likelihood of approach to a point of danger or
contact by persons or objects.
Hoistway. Any shaftway, hatchway, well hole, or other vertical
opening or space in which an elevator or dumbwaiter is designed to
operate.
Identified (conductors or terminals). Identified, as used in
reference to a conductor or its terminal, means that such conductor or
terminal can be recognized as grounded.
Identified (for the use). Recognized as suitable for the specific
purpose, function, use, environment, application, etc. where described
as a requirement in this standard. Suitability of equipment for a
specific purpose, environment, or application is determined by a
qualified testing laboratory where such identification includes labeling
or listing.
Insulated conductor. See ``Conductor.''
Interrupter switch. (Over 600 volts, nominal.) A switch capable of
making, carrying, and interrupting specified currents.
Intrinsically safe equipment and associated wiring. Equipment and
associated wiring in which any spark or thermal effect, produced either
normally or in specified fault conditions, is incapable, under certain
prescribed test conditions, of causing ignition of a mixture of
flammable or combustible material in air in its most easily ignitible
concentration.
Isolated. Not readily accessible to persons unless special means for
access are used.
Isolated power system. A system comprising an isolating transformer
or its equivalent, a line isolation monitor, and its ungrounded circuit
conductors.
Labeled. Equipment or materials to which has been attached a label,
symbol or other identifying mark of a qualified testing laboratory which
indicates compliance with appropriate standards or performance in a
specified manner.
Lighting outlet. An outlet intended for the direct connection of a
lampholder, a lighting fixture, or a pendant cord terminating in a
lampholder.
Listed. Equipment or materials included in a list published by a
qualified testing laboratory whose listing states either that the
equipment or material meets appropriate standards or has been tested and
found suitable for use in a specified manner.
Location--(a) Damp location. Partially protected locations under
canopies,
[[Page 271]]
marquees, roofed open porches, and like locations, and interior
locations subject to moderate degrees of moisture, such as some
basements.
(b) Dry location. A location not normally subject to dampness or
wetness. A location classified as dry may be temporarily subject to
dampness or wetness, as in the case of a building under construction.
(c) Wet location. Installations underground or in concrete slabs or
masonry in direct contact with the earth, and locations subject to
saturation with water or other liquids, such as locations exposed to
weather and unprotected.
Mobile X-ray. X-ray equipment mounted on a permanent base with
wheels and/or casters for moving while completely assembled.
Motor control center. An assembly of one or more enclosed sections
having a common power bus and principally containing motor control
units.
Outlet. A point on the wiring system at which current is taken to
supply utilization equipment.
Overcurrent. Any current in excess of the rated current of equipment
or the ampacity of a conductor. It may result from overload (see
definition), short circuit, or ground fault. A current in excess of
rating may be accommodated by certain equipment and conductors for a
given set of conditions. Hence the rules for overcurrent protection are
specific for particular situations.
Overload. Operation of equipment in excess of normal, full load
rating, or of a conductor in excess of rated ampacity which, when it
persists for a sufficient length of time, would cause damage or
dangerous overheating. A fault, such as a short circuit or ground fault,
is not an overload. (See``Overcurrent.'')
Panelboard. A single panel or group of panel units designed for
assembly in the form of a single panel; including buses, automatic
overcurrent devices, and with or without switches for the control of
light, heat, or power circuits; designed to be placed in a cabinet or
cutout box placed in or against a wall or partition and accessible only
from the front. (See ``Switchboard.'')
Portable X-ray. X-ray equipment designed to be hand-carried.
Power fuse. (Over 600 volts, nominal.) See ``Fuse.''
Power outlet. An enclosed assembly which may include receptacles,
circuit breakers, fuseholders, fused switches, buses and watt-hour meter
mounting means; intended to serve as a means for distributing power
required to operate mobile or temporarily installed equipment.
Premises wiring system. That interior and exterior wiring, including
power, lighting, control, and signal circuit wiring together with all of
its associated hardware, fittings, and wiring devices, both permanently
and temporarily installed, which extends from the load end of the
service drop, or load end of the service lateral conductors to the
outlet(s). Such wiring does not include wiring internal to appliances,
fixtures, motors, controllers, motor control centers, and similar
equipment.
Qualified person. One familiar with the construction and operation
of the equipment and the hazards involved.
Qualified testing laboratory. A properly equipped and staffed
testing laboratory which has capabilities for and which provides the
following services:
(a) Experimental testing for safety of specified items of equipment
and materials referred to in this standard to determine compliance with
appropriate test standards or performance in a specified manner;
(b) Inspecting the run of such items of equipment and materials at
factories for product evaluation to assure compliance with the test
standards;
(c) Service-value determinations through field inspections to
monitor the proper use of labels on products and with authority for
recall of the label in the event a hazardous product is installed;
(d) Employing a controlled procedure for identifying the listed and/
or labeled equipment or materials tested; and
(e) Rendering creditable reports or findings that are objective and
without bias of the tests and test methods employed.
Raceway. A channel designed expressly for holding wires, cables, or
busbars, with additional functions as permitted in this subpart.
Raceways may be of metal or insulating material,
[[Page 272]]
and the term includes rigid metal conduit, rigid nonmetallic conduit,
intermediate metal conduit, liquidtight flexible metal conduit, flexible
metallic tubing, flexible metal conduit, electrical metallic tubing,
underfloor raceways, cellular concrete floor raceways, cellular metal
floor raceways, surface raceways, wireways, and busways.
Readily accessible. Capable of being reached quickly for operation,
renewal, or inspections, without requiring those to whom ready access is
requisite to climb over or remove obstacles or to resort to portable
ladders, chairs, etc. (See ``Accessible.'')
Receptacle. A receptacle is a contact device installed at the outlet
for the connection of a single attachment plug. A single receptacle is a
single contact device with no other contact device on the same yoke. A
multiple receptacle is a single device containing two or more
receptacles.
Receptacle outlet. An outlet where one or more receptacles are
installed.
Remote-control circuit. Any electric circuit that controls any other
circuit through a relay or an equivalent device.
Sealable equipment. Equipment enclosed in a case or cabinet that is
provided with a means of sealing or locking so that live parts cannot be
made accessible without opening the enclosure. The equipment may or may
not be operable without opening the enclosure.
Separately derived system. A premises wiring system whose power is
derived from generator, transformer, or converter windings and has no
direct electrical connection, including a solidly connected grounded
circuit conductor, to supply conductors originating in another system.
Service. The conductors and equipment for delivering energy from the
electricity supply system to the wiring system of the premises served.
Service conductors. The supply conductors that extend from the
street main or from transformers to the service equipment of the
premises supplied.
Service drop. The overhead service conductors from the last pole or
other aerial support to and including the splices, if any, connecting to
the service-entrance conductors at the building or other structure.
Service-entrance conductors, overhead system. The service conductors
between the terminals of the service equipment and a point usually
outside the building, clear of building walls, where joined by tap or
splice to the service drop.
Service-entrance conductors, underground system. The service
conductors between the terminals of the service equipment and the point
of connection to the service lateral. Where service equipment is located
outside the building walls, there may be no service-entrance conductors,
or they may be entirely outside the building.
Service equipment. The necessary equipment, usually consisting of a
circuit breaker or switch and fuses, and their accessories, located near
the point of entrance of supply conductors to a building or other
structure, or an otherwise defined area, and intended to constitute the
main control and means of cutoff of the supply.
Service raceway. The raceway that encloses the service-entrance
conductors.
Signaling circuit. Any electric circuit that energizes signaling
equipment.
Switchboard. A large single panel, frame, or assembly of panels
which have switches, buses, instruments, overcurrent and other
protective devices mounted on the face or back or both. Switchboards are
generally accessible from the rear as well as from the front and are not
intended to be installed in cabinets. (See ``Panelboard.'')
Switches--(a) General-use switch. A switch intended for use in
general distribution and branch circuits. It is rated in amperes, and it
is capable of interrupting its rated current at its rated voltage.
(b) General-use snap switch. A form of general-use switch so
constructed that it can be installed in flush device boxes or on outlet
box covers, or otherwise used in conjunction with wiring systems
recognized by this subpart.
(c) Isolating switch. A switch intended for isolating an electric
circuit from the source of power. It has no interrupting rating, and it
is intended to be operated only after the circuit has been opened by
some other means.
[[Page 273]]
(d) Motor-circuit switch. A switch, rated in horsepower, capable of
interrupting the maximum operating overload current of a motor of the
same horsepower rating as the switch at the rated voltage.
Switching devices. (Over 600 volts, nominal.) Devices designed to
close and/or open one or more electric circuits. Included in this
category are circuit breakers, cutouts, disconnecting (or isolating)
switches, disconnecting means, and interrupter switches.
Transportable X-ray. X-ray equipment installed in a vehicle or that
may readily be disassembled for transport in a vehicle.
Utilization equipment. Utilization equipment means equipment which
utilizes electric energy for mechanical, chemical, heating, lighting, or
similar useful purpose.
Utilization system. A utilization system is a system which provides
electric power and light for employee workplaces, and includes the
premises wiring system and utilization equipment.
Ventilated. Provided with a means to permit circulation of air
sufficient to remove an excess of heat, fumes, or vapors.
Volatile flammable liquid. A flammable liquid having a flash point
below 38 degrees C (100 degrees F) or whose temperature is above its
flash point, or a Class II combustible liquid having a vapor pressure
not exceeding 40 psia (276 kPa) at 38 [deg]C (100 [deg]F) whose
temperature is above its flash point.
Voltage. (Of a circuit.) The greatest root-mean-square (effective)
difference of potential between any two conductors of the circuit
concerned.
Voltage, nominal. A nominal value assigned to a circuit or system
for the purpose of conveniently designating its voltage class (as 120/
240, 480Y/277, 600, etc.). The actual voltage at which a circuit
operates can vary from the nominal within a range that permits
satisfactory operation of equipment.
Voltage to ground. For grounded circuits, the voltage between the
given conductor and that point or conductor of the circuit that is
grounded; for ungrounded circuits, the greatest voltage between the
given conductor and any other conductor of the circuit.
Watertight. So constructed that moisture will not enter the
enclosure.
Weatherproof. So constructed or protected that exposure to the
weather will not interfere with successful operation. Rainproof,
raintight, or watertight equipment can fulfill the requirements for
weatherproof where varying weather conditions other than wetness, such
as snow, ice, dust, or temperature extremes, are not a factor.
Wet location. See ``Location.''
Subpart L_Scaffolds
Authority: 40 U.S.C. 333; 29 U.S.C. 653, 655, 657; Secretary of
Labor's Order Nos. 1-90 (55 FR 9033), 5-2007 (72 FR 31159), or 1-2012
(77 FR 3912); and 29 CFR part 1911.
Source: 61 FR 46104, Aug. 30, 1996, unless otherwise noted.
Sec. 1926.450 Scope, application and definitions applicable to this subpart.
(a) Scope and application. This subpart applies to all scaffolds
used in workplaces covered by this part. It does not apply to crane or
derrick suspended personnel platforms. The criteria for aerial lifts are
set out exclusively in Sec. 1926.453.
(b) Definitions. Adjustable suspension scaffold means a suspension
scaffold equipped with a hoist(s) that can be operated by an employee(s)
on the scaffold.
Bearer (putlog) means a horizontal transverse scaffold member (which
may be supported by ledgers or runners) upon which the scaffold platform
rests and which joins scaffold uprights, posts, poles, and similar
members.
Boatswains' chair means a single-point adjustable suspension
scaffold consisting of a seat or sling designed to support one employee
in a sitting position.
Body belt (safety belt) means a strap with means both for securing
it about the waist and for attaching it to a lanyard, lifeline, or
deceleration device.
Body harness means a design of straps which may be secured about the
employee in a manner to distribute the fall arrest forces over at least
the thighs, pelvis, waist, chest and shoulders, with means for attaching
it to other components of a personal fall arrest system.
[[Page 274]]
Brace means a rigid connection that holds one scaffold member in a
fixed position with respect to another member, or to a building or
structure.
Bricklayers' square scaffold means a supported scaffold composed of
framed squares which support a platform.
Carpenters' bracket scaffold means a supported scaffold consisting
of a platform supported by brackets attached to building or structural
walls.
Catenary scaffold means a suspension scaffold consisting of a
platform supported by two essentially horizontal and parallel ropes
attached to structural members of a building or other structure.
Additional support may be provided by vertical pickups.
Chimney hoist means a multi-point adjustable suspension scaffold
used to provide access to work inside chimneys. (See ``Multi-point
adjustable suspension scaffold''.)
Cleat means a structural block used at the end of a platform to
prevent the platform from slipping off its supports. Cleats are also
used to provide footing on sloped surfaces such as crawling boards.
Competent person means one who is capable of identifying existing
and predictable hazards in the surroundings or working conditions which
are unsanitary, hazardous, or dangerous to employees, and who has
authorization to take prompt corrective measures to eliminate them.
Continuous run scaffold (Run scaffold) means a two- point or multi-
point adjustable suspension scaffold constructed using a series of
interconnected braced scaffold members or supporting structures erected
to form a continuous scaffold.
Coupler means a device for locking together the tubes of a tube and
coupler scaffold.
Crawling board (chicken ladder) means a supported scaffold
consisting of a plank with cleats spaced and secured to provide footing,
for use on sloped surfaces such as roofs.
Deceleration device means any mechanism, such as a rope grab, rip-
stitch lanyard, specially-woven lanyard, tearing or deforming lanyard,
or automatic self-retracting lifeline lanyard, which dissipates a
substantial amount of energy during a fall arrest or limits the energy
imposed on an employee during fall arrest.
Double pole (independent pole) scaffold means a supported scaffold
consisting of a platform(s) resting on cross beams (bearers) supported
by ledgers and a double row of uprights independent of support (except
ties, guys, braces) from any structure.
Equivalent means alternative designs, materials or methods to
protect against a hazard which the employer can demonstrate will provide
an equal or greater degree of safety for employees than the methods,
materials or designs specified in the standard.
Exposed power lines means electrical power lines which are
accessible to employees and which are not shielded from contact. Such
lines do not include extension cords or power tool cords.
Eye or Eye splice means a loop with or without a thimble at the end
of a wire rope.
Fabricated decking and planking means manufactured platforms made of
wood (including laminated wood, and solid sawn wood planks), metal or
other materials.
Fabricated frame scaffold (tubular welded frame scaffold) means a
scaffold consisting of a platform(s) supported on fabricated end frames
with integral posts, horizontal bearers, and intermediate members.
Failure means load refusal, breakage, or separation of component
parts. Load refusal is the point where the ultimate strength is
exceeded.
Float (ship) scaffold means a suspension scaffold consisting of a
braced platform resting on two parallel bearers and hung from overhead
supports by ropes of fixed length.
Form scaffold means a supported scaffold consisting of a platform
supported by brackets attached to formwork.
Guardrail system means a vertical barrier, consisting of, but not
limited to, toprails, midrails, and posts, erected to prevent employees
from falling off a scaffold platform or walkway to lower levels.
Hoist means a manual or power-operated mechanical device to raise or
lower a suspended scaffold.
Horse scaffold means a supported scaffold consisting of a platform
supported by construction horses (saw horses).
[[Page 275]]
Horse scaffolds constructed of metal are sometimes known as trestle
scaffolds.
Independent pole scaffold (see ``Double pole scaffold'').
Interior hung scaffold means a suspension scaffold consisting of a
platform suspended from the ceiling or roof structure by fixed length
supports.
Ladder jack scaffold means a supported scaffold consisting of a
platform resting on brackets attached to ladders.
Ladder stand means a mobile, fixed-size, self-supporting ladder
consisting of a wide flat tread ladder in the form of stairs.
Landing means a platform at the end of a flight of stairs.
Large area scaffold means a pole scaffold, tube and coupler
scaffold, systems scaffold, or fabricated frame scaffold erected over
substantially the entire work area. For example: a scaffold erected over
the entire floor area of a room.
Lean-to scaffold means a supported scaffold which is kept erect by
tilting it toward and resting it against a building or structure.
Lifeline means a component consisting of a flexible line that
connects to an anchorage at one end to hang vertically (vertical
lifeline), or that connects to anchorages at both ends to stretch
horizontally (horizontal lifeline), and which serves as a means for
connecting other components of a personal fall arrest system to the
anchorage.
Lower levels means areas below the level where the employee is
located and to which an employee can fall. Such areas include, but are
not limited to, ground levels, floors, roofs, ramps, runways,
excavations, pits, tanks, materials, water, and equipment.
Masons' adjustable supported scaffold (see ``Self-contained
adjustable scaffold'').
Masons' multi-point adjustable suspension scaffold means a
continuous run suspension scaffold designed and used for masonry
operations.
Maximum intended load means the total load of all persons,
equipment, tools, materials, transmitted loads, and other loads
reasonably anticipated to be applied to a scaffold or scaffold component
at any one time.
Mobile scaffold means a powered or unpowered, portable, caster or
wheel-mounted supported scaffold.
Multi-level suspended scaffold means a two-point or multi-point
adjustable suspension scaffold with a series of platforms at various
levels resting on common stirrups.
Multi-point adjustable suspension scaffold means a suspension
scaffold consisting of a platform(s) which is suspended by more than two
ropes from overhead supports and equipped with means to raise and lower
the platform to desired work levels. Such scaffolds include chimney
hoists.
Needle beam scaffold means a platform suspended from needle beams.
Open sides and ends means the edges of a platform that are more than
14 inches (36 cm) away horizontally from a sturdy, continuous, vertical
surface (such as a building wall) or a sturdy, continuous horizontal
surface (such as a floor), or a point of access. Exception: For
plastering and lathing operations the horizontal threshold distance is
18 inches (46 cm).
Outrigger means the structural member of a supported scaffold used
to increase the base width of a scaffold in order to provide support for
and increased stability of the scaffold.
Outrigger beam (Thrustout) means the structural member of a
suspension scaffold or outrigger scaffold which provides support for the
scaffold by extending the scaffold point of attachment to a point out
and away from the structure or building.
Outrigger scaffold means a supported scaffold consisting of a
platform resting on outrigger beams (thrustouts) projecting beyond the
wall or face of the building or structure, the inboard ends of which are
secured inside the building or structure.
Overhand bricklaying means the process of laying bricks and masonry
units such that the surface of the wall to be jointed is on the opposite
side of the wall from the mason, requiring the mason to lean over the
wall to complete the work. It includes mason tending and electrical
installation incorporated into the brick wall during the overhand
bricklaying process.
[[Page 276]]
Personal fall arrest system means a system used to arrest an
employee's fall. It consists of an anchorage, connectors, a body belt or
body harness and may include a lanyard, deceleration device, lifeline,
or combinations of these.
Platform means a work surface elevated above lower levels. Platforms
can be constructed using individual wood planks, fabricated planks,
fabricated decks, and fabricated platforms.
Pole scaffold (see definitions for ``Single-pole scaffold'' and
``Double (independent) pole scaffold'').
Power operated hoist means a hoist which is powered by other than
human energy.
Pump jack scaffold means a supported scaffold consisting of a
platform supported by vertical poles and movable support brackets.
Qualified means one who, by possession of a recognized degree,
certificate, or professional standing, or who by extensive knowledge,
training, and experience, has successfully demonstrated his/her ability
to solve or resolve problems related to the subject matter, the work, or
the project.
Rated load means the manufacturer's specified maximum load to be
lifted by a hoist or to be applied to a scaffold or scaffold component.
Repair bracket scaffold means a supported scaffold consisting of a
platform supported by brackets which are secured in place around the
circumference or perimeter of a chimney, stack, tank or other supporting
structure by one or more wire ropes placed around the supporting
structure.
Roof bracket scaffold means a rooftop supported scaffold consisting
of a platform resting on angular-shaped supports.
Runner (ledger or ribbon) means the lengthwise horizontal spacing or
bracing member which may support the bearers.
Scaffold means any temporary elevated platform (supported or
suspended) and its supporting structure (including points of anchorage),
used for supporting employees or materials or both.
Self-contained adjustable scaffold means a combination supported and
suspension scaffold consisting of an adjustable platform(s) mounted on
an independent supporting frame(s) not a part of the object being worked
on, and which is equipped with a means to permit the raising and
lowering of the platform(s). Such systems include rolling roof rigs,
rolling outrigger systems, and some masons' adjustable supported
scaffolds.
Shore scaffold means a supported scaffold which is placed against a
building or structure and held in place with props.
Single-point adjustable suspension scaffold means a suspension
scaffold consisting of a platform suspended by one rope from an overhead
support and equipped with means to permit the movement of the platform
to desired work levels.
Single-pole scaffold means a supported scaffold consisting of a
platform(s) resting on bearers, the outside ends of which are supported
on runners secured to a single row of posts or uprights, and the inner
ends of which are supported on or in a structure or building wall.
Stair tower (Scaffold stairway/tower) means a tower comprised of
scaffold components and which contains internal stairway units and rest
platforms. These towers are used to provide access to scaffold platforms
and other elevated points such as floors and roofs.
Stall load means the load at which the prime-mover of a power-
operated hoist stalls or the power to the prime-mover is automatically
disconnected.
Step, platform, and trestle ladder scaffold means a platform resting
directly on the rungs of step ladders or trestle ladders.
Stilts means a pair of poles or similar supports with raised
footrests, used to permit walking above the ground or working surface.
Stonesetters' multi-point adjustable suspension scaffold means a
continuous run suspension scaffold designed and used for stonesetters'
operations.
Supported scaffold means one or more platforms supported by
outrigger beams, brackets, poles, legs, uprights, posts, frames, or
similar rigid support.
Suspension scaffold means one or more platforms suspended by ropes
or other non-rigid means from an overhead structure(s).
[[Page 277]]
System scaffold means a scaffold consisting of posts with fixed
connection points that accept runners, bearers, and diagonals that can
be interconnected at predetermined levels.
Tank builders' scaffold means a supported scaffold consisting of a
platform resting on brackets that are either directly attached to a
cylindrical tank or attached to devices that are attached to such a
tank.
Top plate bracket scaffold means a scaffold supported by brackets
that hook over or are attached to the top of a wall. This type of
scaffold is similar to carpenters' bracket scaffolds and form scaffolds
and is used in residential construction for setting trusses.
Tube and coupler scaffold means a supported or suspended scaffold
consisting of a platform(s) supported by tubing, erected with coupling
devices connecting uprights, braces, bearers, and runners.
Tubular welded frame scaffold (see ``Fabricated frame scaffold'').
Two-point suspension scaffold (swing stage) means a suspension
scaffold consisting of a platform supported by hangers (stirrups)
suspended by two ropes from overhead supports and equipped with means to
permit the raising and lowering of the platform to desired work levels.
Unstable objects means items whose strength, configuration, or lack
of stability may allow them to become dislocated and shift and therefore
may not properly support the loads imposed on them. Unstable objects do
not constitute a safe base support for scaffolds, platforms, or
employees. Examples include, but are not limited to, barrels, boxes,
loose brick, and concrete blocks.
Vertical pickup means a rope used to support the horizontal rope in
catenary scaffolds.
Walkway means a portion of a scaffold platform used only for access
and not as a work level.
Window jack scaffold means a platform resting on a bracket or jack
which projects through a window opening.
[61 FR 46104, Aug. 30, 1996, as amended at 75 FR 48133, Aug. 9, 2010]
Sec. 1926.451 General requirements.
This section does not apply to aerial lifts, the criteria for which
are set out exclusively in Sec. 1926.453.
(a) Capacity. (1) Except as provided in paragraphs (a)(2), (a)(3),
(a)(4), (a)(5) and (g) of this section, each scaffold and scaffold
component shall be capable of supporting, without failure, its own
weight and at least 4 times the maximum intended load applied or
transmitted to it.
(2) Direct connections to roofs and floors, and counterweights used
to balance adjustable suspension scaffolds, shall be capable of
resisting at least 4 times the tipping moment imposed by the scaffold
operating at the rated load of the hoist, or 1.5 (minimum) times the
tipping moment imposed by the scaffold operating at the stall load of
the hoist, whichever is greater.
(3) Each suspension rope, including connecting hardware, used on
non-adjustable suspension scaffolds shall be capable of supporting,
without failure, at least 6 times the maximum intended load applied or
transmitted to that rope.
(4) Each suspension rope, including connecting hardware, used on
adjustable suspension scaffolds shall be capable of supporting, without
failure, at least 6 times the maximum intended load applied or
transmitted to that rope with the scaffold operating at either the rated
load of the hoist, or 2 (minimum) times the stall load of the hoist,
whichever is greater.
(5) The stall load of any scaffold hoist shall not exceed 3 times
its rated load.
(6) Scaffolds shall be designed by a qualified person and shall be
constructed and loaded in accordance with that design. Non-mandatory
appendix A to this subpart contains examples of criteria that will
enable an employer to comply with paragraph (a) of this section.
(b) Scaffold platform construction. (1) Each platform on all working
levels of scaffolds shall be fully planked or decked between the front
uprights and the guardrail supports as follows:
(i) Each platform unit (e.g., scaffold plank, fabricated plank,
fabricated deck, or fabricated platform) shall be installed so that the
space between adjacent units and the space between the
[[Page 278]]
platform and the uprights is no more than 1 inch (2.5 cm) wide, except
where the employer can demonstrate that a wider space is necessary (for
example, to fit around uprights when side brackets are used to extend
the width of the platform).
(ii) Where the employer makes the demonstration provided for in
paragraph (b)(1)(i) of this section, the platform shall be planked or
decked as fully as possible and the remaining open space between the
platform and the uprights shall not exceed 9\1/2\ inches (24.1 cm).
Exception to paragraph (b)(1): The requirement in paragraph (b)(1)
to provide full planking or decking does not apply to platforms used
solely as walkways or solely by employees performing scaffold erection
or dismantling. In these situations, only the planking that the employer
establishes is necessary to provide safe working conditions is required.
(2) Except as provided in paragraphs (b)(2)(i) and (b)(2)(ii) of
this section, each scaffold platform and walkway shall be at least 18
inches (46 cm) wide.
(i) Each ladder jack scaffold, top plate bracket scaffold, roof
bracket scaffold, and pump jack scaffold shall be at least 12 inches (30
cm) wide. There is no minimum width requirement for boatswains' chairs.
Note to paragraph (b)(2)(i): Pursuant to an administrative stay
effective November 29, 1996 and published in the Federal Register on
November 25, 1996, the requirement in paragraph (b)(2)(i) that roof
bracket scaffolds be at least 12 inches wide is stayed until November
25, 1997 or until rulemaking regarding the minimum width of roof bracket
scaffolds has been completed, whichever is later.
(ii) Where scaffolds must be used in areas that the employer can
demonstrate are so narrow that platforms and walkways cannot be at least
18 inches (46 cm) wide, such platforms and walkways shall be as wide as
feasible, and employees on those platforms and walkways shall be
protected from fall hazards by the use of guardrails and/or personal
fall arrest systems.
(3) Except as provided in paragraphs (b)(3) (i) and (ii) of this
section, the front edge of all platforms shall not be more than 14
inches (36 cm) from the face of the work, unless guardrail systems are
erected along the front edge and/or personal fall arrest systems are
used in accordance with paragraph (g) of this section to protect
employees from falling.
(i) The maximum distance from the face for outrigger scaffolds shall
be 3 inches (8 cm);
(ii) The maximum distance from the face for plastering and lathing
operations shall be 18 inches (46 cm).
(4) Each end of a platform, unless cleated or otherwise restrained
by hooks or equivalent means, shall extend over the centerline of its
support at least 6 inches (15 cm).
(5)(i) Each end of a platform 10 feet or less in length shall not
extend over its support more than 12 inches (30 cm) unless the platform
is designed and installed so that the cantilevered portion of the
platform is able to support employees and/or materials without tipping,
or has guardrails which block employee access to the cantilevered end.
(ii) Each platform greater than 10 feet in length shall not extend
over its support more than 18 inches (46 cm), unless it is designed and
installed so that the cantilevered portion of the platform is able to
support employees without tipping, or has guardrails which block
employee access to the cantilevered end.
(6) On scaffolds where scaffold planks are abutted to create a long
platform, each abutted end shall rest on a separate support surface.
This provision does not preclude the use of common support members, such
as ``T'' sections, to support abutting planks, or hook on platforms
designed to rest on common supports.
(7) On scaffolds where platforms are overlapped to create a long
platform, the overlap shall occur only over supports, and shall not be
less than 12 inches (30 cm) unless the platforms are nailed together or
otherwise restrained to prevent movement.
(8) At all points of a scaffold where the platform changes
direction, such as turning a corner, any platform that rests on a bearer
at an angle other than a right angle shall be laid first, and platforms
which rest at right angles over the same bearer shall be laid second, on
top of the first platform.
[[Page 279]]
(9) Wood platforms shall not be covered with opaque finishes, except
that platform edges may be covered or marked for identification.
Platforms may be coated periodically with wood preservatives, fire-
retardant finishes, and slip-resistant finishes; however, the coating
may not obscure the top or bottom wood surfaces.
(10) Scaffold components manufactured by different manufacturers
shall not be intermixed unless the components fit together without force
and the scaffold's structural integrity is maintained by the user.
Scaffold components manufactured by different manufacturers shall not be
modified in order to intermix them unless a competent person determines
the resulting scaffold is structurally sound.
(11) Scaffold components made of dissimilar metals shall not be used
together unless a competent person has determined that galvanic action
will not reduce the strength of any component to a level below that
required by paragraph (a)(1) of this section.
(c) Criteria for supported scaffolds. (1) Supported scaffolds with a
height to base width (including outrigger supports, if used) ratio of
more than four to one (4:1) shall be restrained from tipping by guying,
tying, bracing, or equivalent means, as follows:
(i) Guys, ties, and braces shall be installed at locations where
horizontal members support both inner and outer legs.
(ii) Guys, ties, and braces shall be installed according to the
scaffold manufacturer's recommendations or at the closest horizontal
member to the 4:1 height and be repeated vertically at locations of
horizontal members every 20 feet (6.1 m) or less thereafter for
scaffolds 3 feet (0.91 m) wide or less, and every 26 feet (7.9 m) or
less thereafter for scaffolds greater than 3 feet (0.91 m) wide. The top
guy, tie or brace of completed scaffolds shall be placed no further than
the 4:1 height from the top. Such guys, ties and braces shall be
installed at each end of the scaffold and at horizontal intervals not to
exceed 30 feet (9.1 m) (measured from one end [not both] towards the
other).
(iii) Ties, guys, braces, or outriggers shall be used to prevent the
tipping of supported scaffolds in all circumstances where an eccentric
load, such as a cantilevered work platform, is applied or is transmitted
to the scaffold.
(2) Supported scaffold poles, legs, posts, frames, and uprights
shall bear on base plates and mud sills or other adequate firm
foundation.
(i) Footings shall be level, sound, rigid, and capable of supporting
the loaded scaffold without settling or displacement.
(ii) Unstable objects shall not be used to support scaffolds or
platform units.
(iii) Unstable objects shall not be used as working platforms.
(iv) Front-end loaders and similar pieces of equipment shall not be
used to support scaffold platforms unless they have been specifically
designed by the manufacturer for such use.
(v) Fork-lifts shall not be used to support scaffold platforms
unless the entire platform is attached to the fork and the fork-lift is
not moved horizontally while the platform is occupied.
(3) Supported scaffold poles, legs, posts, frames, and uprights
shall be plumb and braced to prevent swaying and displacement.
(d) Criteria for suspension scaffolds. (1) All suspension scaffold
support devices, such as outrigger beams, cornice hooks, parapet clamps,
and similar devices, shall rest on surfaces capable of supporting at
least 4 times the load imposed on them by the scaffold operating at the
rated load of the hoist (or at least 1.5 times the load imposed on them
by the scaffold at the stall capacity of the hoist, whichever is
greater).
(2) Suspension scaffold outrigger beams, when used, shall be made of
structural metal or equivalent strength material, and shall be
restrained to prevent movement.
(3) The inboard ends of suspension scaffold outrigger beams shall be
stabilized by bolts or other direct connections to the floor or roof
deck, or they shall have their inboard ends stabilized by
counterweights, except masons' multi-point adjustable suspension
scaffold outrigger beams shall not be stabilized by counterweights.
(i) Before the scaffold is used, direct connections shall be
evaluated by a competent person who shall confirm,
[[Page 280]]
based on the evaluation, that the supporting surfaces are capable of
supporting the loads to be imposed. In addition, masons' multi-point
adjustable suspension scaffold connections shall be designed by an
engineer experienced in such scaffold design.
(ii) Counterweights shall be made of non-flowable material. Sand,
gravel and similar materials that can be easily dislocated shall not be
used as counterweights.
(iii) Only those items specifically designed as counterweights shall
be used to counterweight scaffold systems. Construction materials such
as, but not limited to, masonry units and rolls of roofing felt, shall
not be used as counterweights.
(iv) Counterweights shall be secured by mechanical means to the
outrigger beams to prevent accidental displacement.
(v) Counterweights shall not be removed from an outrigger beam until
the scaffold is disassembled.
(vi) Outrigger beams which are not stabilized by bolts or other
direct connections to the floor or roof deck shall be secured by
tiebacks.
(vii) Tiebacks shall be equivalent in strength to the suspension
ropes.
(viii) Outrigger beams shall be placed perpendicular to its bearing
support (usually the face of the building or structure). However, where
the employer can demonstrate that it is not possible to place an
outrigger beam perpendicular to the face of the building or structure
because of obstructions that cannot be moved, the outrigger beam may be
placed at some other angle, provided opposing angle tiebacks are used.
(ix) Tiebacks shall be secured to a structurally sound anchorage on
the building or structure. Sound anchorages include structural members,
but do not include standpipes, vents, other piping systems, or
electrical conduit.
(x) Tiebacks shall be installed perpendicular to the face of the
building or structure, or opposing angle tiebacks shall be installed.
Single tiebacks installed at an angle are prohibited.
(4) Suspension scaffold outrigger beams shall be:
(i) Provided with stop bolts or shackles at both ends;
(ii) Securely fastened together with the flanges turned out when
channel iron beams are used in place of I-beams;
(iii) Installed with all bearing supports perpendicular to the beam
center line;
(iv) Set and maintained with the web in a vertical position; and
(v) When an outrigger beam is used, the shackle or clevis with which
the rope is attached to the outrigger beam shall be placed directly over
the center line of the stirrup.
(5) Suspension scaffold support devices such as cornice hooks, roof
hooks, roof irons, parapet clamps, or similar devices shall be:
(i) Made of steel, wrought iron, or materials of equivalent
strength;
(ii) Supported by bearing blocks; and
(iii) Secured against movement by tiebacks installed at right angles
to the face of the building or structure, or opposing angle tiebacks
shall be installed and secured to a structurally sound point of
anchorage on the building or structure. Sound points of anchorage
include structural members, but do not include standpipes, vents, other
piping systems, or electrical conduit.
(iv) Tiebacks shall be equivalent in strength to the hoisting rope.
(6) When winding drum hoists are used on a suspension scaffold, they
shall contain not less than four wraps of the suspension rope at the
lowest point of scaffold travel. When other types of hoists are used,
the suspension ropes shall be long enough to allow the scaffold to be
lowered to the level below without the rope end passing through the
hoist, or the rope end shall be configured or provided with means to
prevent the end from passing through the hoist.
(7) The use of repaired wire rope as suspension rope is prohibited.
(8) Wire suspension ropes shall not be joined together except
through the use of eye splice thimbles connected with shackles or
coverplates and bolts.
(9) The load end of wire suspension ropes shall be equipped with
proper size thimbles and secured by eyesplicing or equivalent means.
[[Page 281]]
(10) Ropes shall be inspected for defects by a competent person
prior to each workshift and after every occurrence which could affect a
rope's integrity. Ropes shall be replaced if any of the following
conditions exist:
(i) Any physical damage which impairs the function and strength of
the rope.
(ii) Kinks that might impair the tracking or wrapping of rope around
the drum(s) or sheave(s).
(iii) Six randomly distributed broken wires in one rope lay or three
broken wires in one strand in one rope lay.
(iv) Abrasion, corrosion, scrubbing, flattening or peening causing
loss of more than one-third of the original diameter of the outside
wires.
(v) Heat damage caused by a torch or any damage caused by contact
with electrical wires.
(vi) Evidence that the secondary brake has been activated during an
overspeed condition and has engaged the suspension rope.
(11) Swaged attachments or spliced eyes on wire suspension ropes
shall not be used unless they are made by the wire rope manufacturer or
a qualified person.
(12) When wire rope clips are used on suspension scaffolds:
(i) There shall be a minimum of 3 wire rope clips installed, with
the clips a minimum of 6 rope diameters apart;
(ii) Clips shall be installed according to the manufacturer's
recommendations;
(iii) Clips shall be retightened to the manufacturer's
recommendations after the initial loading;
(iv) Clips shall be inspected and retightened to the manufacturer's
recommendations at the start of each workshift thereafter;
(v) U-bolt clips shall not be used at the point of suspension for
any scaffold hoist;
(vi) When U-bolt clips are used, the U-bolt shall be placed over the
dead end of the rope, and the saddle shall be placed over the live end
of the rope.
(13) Suspension scaffold power-operated hoists and manual hoists
shall be tested by a qualified testing laboratory.
(14) Gasoline-powered equipment and hoists shall not be used on
suspension scaffolds.
(15) Gears and brakes of power-operated hoists used on suspension
scaffolds shall be enclosed.
(16) In addition to the normal operating brake, suspension scaffold
power-operated hoists and manually operated hoists shall have a braking
device or locking pawl which engages automatically when a hoist makes
either of the following uncontrolled movements: an instantaneous change
in momentum or an accelerated overspeed.
(17) Manually operated hoists shall require a positive crank force
to descend.
(18) Two-point and multi-point suspension scaffolds shall be tied or
otherwise secured to prevent them from swaying, as determined to be
necessary based on an evaluation by a competent person. Window cleaners'
anchors shall not be used for this purpose.
(19) Devices whose sole function is to provide emergency escape and
rescue shall not be used as working platforms. This provision does not
preclude the use of systems which are designed to function both as
suspension scaffolds and emergency systems.
(e) Access. This paragraph applies to scaffold access for all
employees. Access requirements for employees erecting or dismantling
supported scaffolds are specifically addressed in paragraph (e)(9) of
this section.
(1) When scaffold platforms are more than 2 feet (0.6 m) above or
below a point of access, portable ladders, hook-on ladders, attachable
ladders, stair towers (scaffold stairways/towers), stairway-type ladders
(such as ladder stands), ramps, walkways, integral prefabricated
scaffold access, or direct access from another scaffold, structure,
personnel hoist, or similar surface shall be used. Crossbraces shall not
be used as a means of access.
(2) Portable, hook-on, and attachable ladders (Additional
requirements for the proper construction and use of portable ladders are
contained in subpart X of this part--Stairways and Ladders):
(i) Portable, hook-on, and attachable ladders shall be positioned so
as not to tip the scaffold;
[[Page 282]]
(ii) Hook-on and attachable ladders shall be positioned so that
their bottom rung is not more than 24 inches (61 cm) above the scaffold
supporting level;
(iii) When hook-on and attachable ladders are used on a supported
scaffold more than 35 feet (10.7 m) high, they shall have rest platforms
at 35-foot (10.7 m) maximum vertical intervals.
(iv) Hook-on and attachable ladders shall be specifically designed
for use with the type of scaffold used;
(v) Hook-on and attachable ladders shall have a minimum rung length
of 11\1/2\ inches (29 cm); and
(vi) Hook-on and attachable ladders shall have uniformly spaced
rungs with a maximum spacing between rungs of 16\3/4\ inches.
(3) Stairway-type ladders shall:
(i) Be positioned such that their bottom step is not more than 24
inches (61 cm) above the scaffold supporting level;
(ii) Be provided with rest platforms at 12 foot (3.7 m) maximum
vertical intervals;
(iii) Have a minimum step width of 16 inches (41 cm), except that
mobile scaffold stairway-type ladders shall have a minimum step width of
11\1/2\ inches (30 cm); and
(iv) Have slip-resistant treads on all steps and landings.
(4) Stairtowers (scaffold stairway/towers) shall be positioned such
that their bottom step is not more than 24 inches (61 cm.) above the
scaffold supporting level.
(i) A stairrail consisting of a toprail and a midrail shall be
provided on each side of each scaffold stairway.
(ii) The toprail of each stairrail system shall also be capable of
serving as a handrail, unless a separate handrail is provided.
(iii) Handrails, and toprails that serve as handrails, shall provide
an adequate handhold for employees grasping them to avoid falling.
(iv) Stairrail systems and handrails shall be surfaced to prevent
injury to employees from punctures or lacerations, and to prevent
snagging of clothing.
(v) The ends of stairrail systems and handrails shall be constructed
so that they do not constitute a projection hazard.
(vi) Handrails, and toprails that are used as handrails, shall be at
least 3 inches (7.6 cm) from other objects.
(vii) Stairrails shall be not less than 28 inches (71 cm) nor more
than 37 inches (94 cm) from the upper surface of the stairrail to the
surface of the tread, in line with the face of the riser at the forward
edge of the tread.
(viii) A landing platform at least 18 inches (45.7 cm) wide by at
least 18 inches (45.7 cm) long shall be provided at each level.
(ix) Each scaffold stairway shall be at least 18 inches (45.7 cm)
wide between stairrails.
(x) Treads and landings shall have slip-resistant surfaces.
(xi) Stairways shall be installed between 40 degrees and 60 degrees
from the horizontal.
(xii) Guardrails meeting the requirements of paragraph (g)(4) of
this section shall be provided on the open sides and ends of each
landing.
(xiii) Riser height shall be uniform, within \1/4\ inch, (0.6 cm)
for each flight of stairs. Greater variations in riser height are
allowed for the top and bottom steps of the entire system, not for each
flight of stairs.
(xiv) Tread depth shall be uniform, within \1/4\ inch, for each
flight of stairs.
(5) Ramps and walkways. (i) Ramps and walkways 6 feet (1.8 m) or
more above lower levels shall have guardrail systems which comply with
subpart M of this part--Fall Protection;
(ii) No ramp or walkway shall be inclined more than a slope of one
(1) vertical to three (3) horizontal (20 degrees above the horizontal).
(iii) If the slope of a ramp or a walkway is steeper than one (1)
vertical in eight (8) horizontal, the ramp or walkway shall have cleats
not more than fourteen (14) inches (35 cm) apart which are securely
fastened to the planks to provide footing.
(6) Integral prefabricated scaffold access frames shall:
(i) Be specifically designed and constructed for use as ladder
rungs;
(ii) Have a rung length of at least 8 inches (20 cm);
(iii) Not be used as work platforms when rungs are less than 11\1/2\
inches in
[[Page 283]]
length, unless each affected employee uses fall protection, or a
positioning device, which complies with Sec. 1926.502;
(iv) Be uniformly spaced within each frame section;
(v) Be provided with rest platforms at 35-foot (10.7 m) maximum
vertical intervals on all supported scaffolds more than 35 feet (10.7 m)
high; and
(vi) Have a maximum spacing between rungs of 16\3/4\ inches (43 cm).
Non-uniform rung spacing caused by joining end frames together is
allowed, provided the resulting spacing does not exceed 16\3/4\ inches
(43 cm).
(7) Steps and rungs of ladder and stairway type access shall line up
vertically with each other between rest platforms.
(8) Direct access to or from another surface shall be used only when
the scaffold is not more than 14 inches (36 cm) horizontally and not
more than 24 inches (61 cm) vertically from the other surface.
(9) Effective September 2, 1997, access for employees erecting or
dismantling supported scaffolds shall be in accordance with the
following:
(i) The employer shall provide safe means of access for each
employee erecting or dismantling a scaffold where the provision of safe
access is feasible and does not create a greater hazard. The employer
shall have a competent person determine whether it is feasible or would
pose a greater hazard to provide, and have employees use a safe means of
access. This determination shall be based on site conditions and the
type of scaffold being erected or dismantled.
(ii) Hook-on or attachable ladders shall be installed as soon as
scaffold erection has progressed to a point that permits safe
installation and use.
(iii) When erecting or dismantling tubular welded frame scaffolds,
(end) frames, with horizontal members that are parallel, level and are
not more than 22 inches apart vertically may be used as climbing devices
for access, provided they are erected in a manner that creates a usable
ladder and provides good hand hold and foot space.
(iv) Cross braces on tubular welded frame scaffolds shall not be
used as a means of access or egress.
(f) Use. (1) Scaffolds and scaffold components shall not be loaded
in excess of their maximum intended loads or rated capacities, whichever
is less.
(2) The use of shore or lean-to scaffolds is prohibited.
(3) Scaffolds and scaffold components shall be inspected for visible
defects by a competent person before each work shift, and after any
occurrence which could affect a scaffold's structural integrity.
(4) Any part of a scaffold damaged or weakened such that its
strength is less than that required by paragraph (a) of this section
shall be immediately repaired or replaced, braced to meet those
provisions, or removed from service until repaired.
(5) Scaffolds shall not be moved horizontally while employees are on
them, unless they have been designed by a registered professional
engineer specifically for such movement or, for mobile scaffolds, where
the provisions of Sec. 1926.452(w) are followed.
(6) The clearance between scaffolds and power lines shall be as
follows: Scaffolds shall not be erected, used, dismantled, altered, or
moved such that they or any conductive material handled on them might
come closer to exposed and energized power lines than as follows:
------------------------------------------------------------------------
Insulated lines voltage Minimum distance Alternatives
------------------------------------------------------------------------
Less than 300 volts......... 3 feet (0.9 m)......
300 volts to 50 kv.......... 10 feet (3.1m)......
More than 50 kv............. 10 feet (3.1 m) plus 2 times the length
0.4 inches (1.0 cm) of the line
for each 1 kv over insulator, but
50 kv. never less than 10
feet (3.1 m).
------------------------------------------------------------------------
------------------------------------------------------------------------
Uninsulated lines voltage Minimum distance Alternatives
------------------------------------------------------------------------
Less than 50 kv............. 10 feet (3.1 m).....
More than 50 kv............. 10 feet (3.1 m) plus 2 times the length
0.4 inches (1.0 cm) of the line
for each 1 kv over insulator, but
50 kv. never less than 10
feet (3.1 m).
------------------------------------------------------------------------
[[Page 284]]
Exception to paragraph (f)(6): Scaffolds and materials may be closer
to power lines than specified above where such clearance is necessary
for performance of work, and only after the utility company, or
electrical system operator, has been notified of the need to work closer
and the utility company, or electrical system operator, has deenergized
the lines, relocated the lines, or installed protective coverings to
prevent accidental contact with the lines.
(7) Scaffolds shall be erected, moved, dismantled, or altered only
under the supervision and direction of a competent person qualified in
scaffold erection, moving, dismantling or alteration. Such activities
shall be performed only by experienced and trained employees selected
for such work by the competent person.
(8) Employees shall be prohibited from working on scaffolds covered
with snow, ice, or other slippery material except as necessary for
removal of such materials.
(9) Where swinging loads are being hoisted onto or near scaffolds
such that the loads might contact the scaffold, tag lines or equivalent
measures to control the loads shall be used.
(10) Suspension ropes supporting adjustable suspension scaffolds
shall be of a diameter large enough to provide sufficient surface area
for the functioning of brake and hoist mechanisms.
(11) Suspension ropes shall be shielded from heat-producing
processes. When acids or other corrosive substances are used on a
scaffold, the ropes shall be shielded, treated to protect against the
corrosive substances, or shall be of a material that will not be damaged
by the substance being used.
(12) Work on or from scaffolds is prohibited during storms or high
winds unless a competent person has determined that it is safe for
employees to be on the scaffold and those employees are protected by a
personal fall arrest system or wind screens. Wind screens shall not be
used unless the scaffold is secured against the anticipated wind forces
imposed.
(13) Debris shall not be allowed to accumulate on platforms.
(14) Makeshift devices, such as but not limited to boxes and
barrels, shall not be used on top of scaffold platforms to increase the
working level height of employees.
(15) Ladders shall not be used on scaffolds to increase the working
level height of employees, except on large area scaffolds where
employers have satisfied the following criteria:
(i) When the ladder is placed against a structure which is not a
part of the scaffold, the scaffold shall be secured against the sideways
thrust exerted by the ladder;
(ii) The platform units shall be secured to the scaffold to prevent
their movement;
(iii) The ladder legs shall be on the same platform or other means
shall be provided to stabilize the ladder against unequal platform
deflection, and
(iv) The ladder legs shall be secured to prevent them from slipping
or being pushed off the platform.
(16) Platforms shall not deflect more than \1/60\ of the span when
loaded.
(17) To reduce the possibility of welding current arcing through the
suspension wire rope when performing welding from suspended scaffolds,
the following precautions shall be taken, as applicable:
(i) An insulated thimble shall be used to attach each suspension
wire rope to its hanging support (such as cornice hook or outrigger).
Excess suspension wire rope and any additional independent lines from
grounding shall be insulated;
(ii) The suspension wire rope shall be covered with insulating
material extending at least 4 feet (1.2 m) above the hoist. If there is
a tail line below the hoist, it shall be insulated to prevent contact
with the platform. The portion of the tail line that hangs free below
the scaffold shall be guided or retained, or both, so that it does not
become grounded;
(iii) Each hoist shall be covered with insulated protective covers;
(iv) In addition to a work lead attachment required by the welding
process, a grounding conductor shall be connected from the scaffold to
the structure. The size of this conductor shall be at least the size of
the welding process work lead, and this conductor shall not be in series
with the welding process or the work piece;
[[Page 285]]
(v) If the scaffold grounding lead is disconnected at any time, the
welding machine shall be shut off; and
(vi) An active welding rod or uninsulated welding lead shall not be
allowed to contact the scaffold or its suspension system.
(g) Fall protection. (1) Each employee on a scaffold more than 10
feet (3.1 m) above a lower level shall be protected from falling to that
lower level. Paragraphs (g)(1) (i) through (vii) of this section
establish the types of fall protection to be provided to the employees
on each type of scaffold. Paragraph (g)(2) of this section addresses
fall protection for scaffold erectors and dismantlers.
Note to paragraph (g)(1): The fall protection requirements for
employees installing suspension scaffold support systems on floors,
roofs, and other elevated surfaces are set forth in subpart M of this
part.
(i) Each employee on a boatswains' chair, catenary scaffold, float
scaffold, needle beam scaffold, or ladder jack scaffold shall be
protected by a personal fall arrest system;
(ii) Each employee on a single-point or two-point adjustable
suspension scaffold shall be protected by both a personal fall arrest
system and guardrail system;
(iii) Each employee on a crawling board (chicken ladder) shall be
protected by a personal fall arrest system, a guardrail system (with
minimum 200 pound toprail capacity), or by a three-fourth inch (1.9 cm)
diameter grabline or equivalent handhold securely fastened beside each
crawling board;
(iv) Each employee on a self-contained adjustable scaffold shall be
protected by a guardrail system (with minimum 200 pound toprail
capacity) when the platform is supported by the frame structure, and by
both a personal fall arrest system and a guardrail system (with minimum
200 pound toprail capacity) when the platform is supported by ropes;
(v) Each employee on a walkway located within a scaffold shall be
protected by a guardrail system (with minimum 200 pound toprail
capacity) installed within 9\1/2\ inches (24.1 cm) of and along at least
one side of the walkway.
(vi) Each employee performing overhand bricklaying operations from a
supported scaffold shall be protected from falling from all open sides
and ends of the scaffold (except at the side next to the wall being
laid) by the use of a personal fall arrest system or guardrail system
(with minimum 200 pound toprail capacity).
(vii) For all scaffolds not otherwise specified in paragraphs
(g)(1)(i) through (g)(1)(vi) of this section, each employee shall be
protected by the use of personal fall arrest systems or guardrail
systems meeting the requirements of paragraph (g)(4) of this section.
(2) Effective September 2, 1997, the employer shall have a competent
person determine the feasibility and safety of providing fall protection
for employees erecting or dismantling supported scaffolds. Employers are
required to provide fall protection for employees erecting or
dismantling supported scaffolds where the installation and use of such
protection is feasible and does not create a greater hazard.
(3) In addition to meeting the requirements of Sec. 1926.502(d),
personal fall arrest systems used on scaffolds shall be attached by
lanyard to a vertical lifeline, horizontal lifeline, or scaffold
structural member. Vertical lifelines shall not be used when overhead
components, such as overhead protection or additional platform levels,
are part of a single-point or two-point adjustable suspension scaffold.
(i) When vertical lifelines are used, they shall be fastened to a
fixed safe point of anchorage, shall be independent of the scaffold, and
shall be protected from sharp edges and abrasion. Safe points of
anchorage include structural members of buildings, but do not include
standpipes, vents, other piping systems, electrical conduit, outrigger
beams, or counterweights.
(ii) When horizontal lifelines are used, they shall be secured to
two or more structural members of the scaffold, or they may be looped
around both suspension and independent suspension lines (on scaffolds so
equipped) above the hoist and brake attached to the end of the scaffold.
Horizontal lifelines shall not be attached only to the suspension ropes.
[[Page 286]]
(iii) When lanyards are connected to horizontal lifelines or
structural members on a single-point or two-point adjustable suspension
scaffold, the scaffold shall be equipped with additional independent
support lines and automatic locking devices capable of stopping the fall
of the scaffold in the event one or both of the suspension ropes fail.
The independent support lines shall be equal in number and strength to
the suspension ropes.
(iv) Vertical lifelines, independent support lines, and suspension
ropes shall not be attached to each other, nor shall they be attached to
or use the same point of anchorage, nor shall they be attached to the
same point on the scaffold or personal fall arrest system.
(4) Guardrail systems installed to meet the requirements of this
section shall comply with the following provisions (guardrail systems
built in accordance with appendix A to this subpart will be deemed to
meet the requirements of paragraphs (g)(4) (vii), (viii), and (ix) of
this section):
(i) Guardrail systems shall be installed along all open sides and
ends of platforms. Guardrail systems shall be installed before the
scaffold is released for use by employees other than erection/
dismantling crews.
(ii) The top edge height of toprails or equivalent member on
supported scaffolds manufactured or placed in service after January 1,
2000 shall be installed between 38 inches (0.97 m) and 45 inches (1.2 m)
above the platform surface. The top edge height on supported scaffolds
manufactured and placed in service before January 1, 2000, and on all
suspended scaffolds where both a guardrail and a personal fall arrest
system are required shall be between 36 inches (0.9 m) and 45 inches
(1.2 m). When conditions warrant, the height of the top edge may exceed
the 45-inch height, provided the guardrail system meets all other
criteria of paragraph (g)(4).
(iii) When midrails, screens, mesh, intermediate vertical members,
solid panels, or equivalent structural members are used, they shall be
installed between the top edge of the guardrail system and the scaffold
platform.
(iv) When midrails are used, they shall be installed at a height
approximately midway between the top edge of the guardrail system and
the platform surface.
(v) When screens and mesh are used, they shall extend from the top
edge of the guardrail system to the scaffold platform, and along the
entire opening between the supports.
(vi) When intermediate members (such as balusters or additional
rails) are used, they shall not be more than 19 inches (48 cm) apart.
(vii) Each toprail or equivalent member of a guardrail system shall
be capable of withstanding, without failure, a force applied in any
downward or horizontal direction at any point along its top edge of at
least 100 pounds (445 n) for guardrail systems installed on single-point
adjustable suspension scaffolds or two-point adjustable suspension
scaffolds, and at least 200 pounds (890 n) for guardrail systems
installed on all other scaffolds.
(viii) When the loads specified in paragraph (g)(4)(vii) of this
section are applied in a downward direction, the top edge shall not drop
below the height above the platform surface that is prescribed in
paragraph (g)(4)(ii) of this section.
(ix) Midrails, screens, mesh, intermediate vertical members, solid
panels, and equivalent structural members of a guardrail system shall be
capable of withstanding, without failure, a force applied in any
downward or horizontal direction at any point along the midrail or other
member of at least 75 pounds (333 n) for guardrail systems with a
minimum 100 pound toprail capacity, and at least 150 pounds (666 n) for
guardrail systems with a minimum 200 pound toprail capacity.
(x) Suspension scaffold hoists and non-walk-through stirrups may be
used as end guardrails, if the space between the hoist or stirrup and
the side guardrail or structure does not allow passage of an employee to
the end of the scaffold.
(xi) Guardrails shall be surfaced to prevent injury to an employee
from punctures or lacerations, and to prevent snagging of clothing.
(xii) The ends of all rails shall not overhang the terminal posts
except when such overhang does not constitute a projection hazard to
employees.
[[Page 287]]
(xiii) Steel or plastic banding shall not be used as a toprail or
midrail.
(xiv) Manila or plastic (or other synthetic) rope being used for
toprails or midrails shall be inspected by a competent person as
frequently as necessary to ensure that it continues to meet the strength
requirements of paragraph (g) of this section.
(xv) Crossbracing is acceptable in place of a midrail when the
crossing point of two braces is between 20 inches (0.5 m) and 30 inches
(0.8 m) above the work platform or as a toprail when the crossing point
of two braces is between 38 inches (0.97 m) and 48 inches (1.3 m) above
the work platform. The end points at each upright shall be no more than
48 inches (1.3 m) apart.
(h) Falling object protection. (1) In addition to wearing hardhats
each employee on a scaffold shall be provided with additional protection
from falling hand tools, debris, and other small objects through the
installation of toeboards, screens, or guardrail systems, or through the
erection of debris nets, catch platforms, or canopy structures that
contain or deflect the falling objects. When the falling objects are too
large, heavy or massive to be contained or deflected by any of the
above-listed measures, the employer shall place such potential falling
objects away from the edge of the surface from which they could fall and
shall secure those materials as necessary to prevent their falling.
(2) Where there is a danger of tools, materials, or equipment
falling from a scaffold and striking employees below, the following
provisions apply:
(i) The area below the scaffold to which objects can fall shall be
barricaded, and employees shall not be permitted to enter the hazard
area; or
(ii) A toeboard shall be erected along the edge of platforms more
than 10 feet (3.1 m) above lower levels for a distance sufficient to
protect employees below, except on float (ship) scaffolds where an
edging of \3/4\ x 1\1/2\ inch (2 x 4 cm) wood or equivalent may be used
in lieu of toeboards;
(iii) Where tools, materials, or equipment are piled to a height
higher than the top edge of the toeboard, paneling or screening
extending from the toeboard or platform to the top of the guardrail
shall be erected for a distance sufficient to protect employees below;
or
(iv) A guardrail system shall be installed with openings small
enough to prevent passage of potential falling objects; or
(v) A canopy structure, debris net, or catch platform strong enough
to withstand the impact forces of the potential falling objects shall be
erected over the employees below.
(3) Canopies, when used for falling object protection, shall comply
with the following criteria:
(i) Canopies shall be installed between the falling object hazard
and the employees.
(ii) When canopies are used on suspension scaffolds for falling
object protection, the scaffold shall be equipped with additional
independent support lines equal in number to the number of points
supported, and equivalent in strength to the strength of the suspension
ropes.
(iii) Independent support lines and suspension ropes shall not be
attached to the same points of anchorage.
(4) Where used, toeboards shall be:
(i) Capable of withstanding, without failure, a force of at least 50
pounds (222 n) applied in any downward or horizontal direction at any
point along the toeboard (toeboards built in accordance with appendix A
to this subpart will be deemed to meet this requirement); and
(ii) At least three and one-half inches (9 cm) high from the top
edge of the toeboard to the level of the walking/working surface.
Toeboards shall be securely fastened in place at the outermost edge of
the platform and have not more than \1/4\ inch (0.7 cm) clearance above
the walking/working surface. Toeboards shall be solid or with openings
not over one inch (2.5 cm) in the greatest dimension.
[61 FR 46107, Aug. 30, 1996, as corrected and amended at 61 FR 59831,
59832, Nov. 25, 1996]
Effective Date Note: At 61 FR 59832, Nov. 25, 1996, Sec.
1926.451(b)(2)(i) was amended and certain requirements stayed until Nov.
25, 1997, or until further rulemaking has been completed, whichever is
later.
[[Page 288]]
Sec. 1926.452 Additional requirements applicable to specific types of
scaffolds.
In addition to the applicable requirements of Sec. 1926.451, the
following requirements apply to the specific types of scaffolds
indicated. Scaffolds not specifically addressed by Sec. 1926.452, such
as but not limited to systems scaffolds, must meet the requirements of
Sec. 1926.451.
(a) Pole scaffolds. (1) When platforms are being moved to the next
level, the existing platform shall be left undisturbed until the new
bearers have been set in place and braced, prior to receiving the new
platforms.
(2) Crossbracing shall be installed between the inner and outer sets
of poles on double pole scaffolds.
(3) Diagonal bracing in both directions shall be installed across
the entire inside face of double-pole scaffolds used to support loads
equivalent to a uniformly distributed load of 50 pounds (222 kg) or more
per square foot (929 square cm).
(4) Diagonal bracing in both directions shall be installed across
the entire outside face of all double- and single-pole scaffolds.
(5) Runners and bearers shall be installed on edge.
(6) Bearers shall extend a minimum of 3 inches (7.6 cm) over the
outside edges of runners.
(7) Runners shall extend over a minimum of two poles, and shall be
supported by bearing blocks securely attached to the poles.
(8) Braces, bearers, and runners shall not be spliced between poles.
(9) Where wooden poles are spliced, the ends shall be squared and
the upper section shall rest squarely on the lower section. Wood splice
plates shall be provided on at least two adjacent sides, and shall
extend at least 2 feet (0.6 m) on either side of the splice, overlap the
abutted ends equally, and have at least the same cross-sectional areas
as the pole. Splice plates of other materials of equivalent strength may
be used.
(10) Pole scaffolds over 60 feet in height shall be designed by a
registered professional engineer, and shall be constructed and loaded in
accordance with that design. Non-mandatory appendix A to this subpart
contains examples of criteria that will enable an employer to comply
with design and loading requirements for pole scaffolds under 60 feet in
height.
(b) Tube and coupler scaffolds. (1) When platforms are being moved
to the next level, the existing platform shall be left undisturbed until
the new bearers have been set in place and braced prior to receiving the
new platforms.
(2) Transverse bracing forming an ``X'' across the width of the
scaffold shall be installed at the scaffold ends and at least at every
third set of posts horizontally (measured from only one end) and every
fourth runner vertically. Bracing shall extend diagonally from the inner
or outer posts or runners upward to the next outer or inner posts or
runners. Building ties shall be installed at the bearer levels between
the transverse bracing and shall conform to the requirements of Sec.
1926.451(c)(1).
(3) On straight run scaffolds, longitudinal bracing across the inner
and outer rows of posts shall be installed diagonally in both
directions, and shall extend from the base of the end posts upward to
the top of the scaffold at approximately a 45 degree angle. On scaffolds
whose length is greater than their height, such bracing shall be
repeated beginning at least at every fifth post. On scaffolds whose
length is less than their height, such bracing shall be installed from
the base of the end posts upward to the opposite end posts, and then in
alternating directions until reaching the top of the scaffold. Bracing
shall be installed as close as possible to the intersection of the
bearer and post or runner and post.
(4) Where conditions preclude the attachment of bracing to posts,
bracing shall be attached to the runners as close to the post as
possible.
(5) Bearers shall be installed transversely between posts, and when
coupled to the posts, shall have the inboard coupler bear directly on
the runner coupler. When the bearers are coupled to the runners, the
couplers shall be as close to the posts as possible.
(6) Bearers shall extend beyond the posts and runners, and shall
provide full contact with the coupler.
(7) Runners shall be installed along the length of the scaffold,
located on
[[Page 289]]
both the inside and outside posts at level heights (when tube and
coupler guardrails and midrails are used on outside posts, they may be
used in lieu of outside runners).
(8) Runners shall be interlocked on straight runs to form continuous
lengths, and shall be coupled to each post. The bottom runners and
bearers shall be located as close to the base as possible.
(9) Couplers shall be of a structural metal, such as drop-forged
steel, malleable iron, or structural grade aluminum. The use of gray
cast iron is prohibited.
(10) Tube and coupler scaffolds over 125 feet in height shall be
designed by a registered professional engineer, and shall be constructed
and loaded in accordance with such design. Non-mandatory appendix A to
this subpart contains examples of criteria that will enable an employer
to comply with design and loading requirements for tube and coupler
scaffolds under 125 feet in height.
(c) Fabricated frame scaffolds (tubular welded frame scaffolds). (1)
When moving platforms to the next level, the existing platform shall be
left undisturbed until the new end frames have been set in place and
braced prior to receiving the new platforms.
(2) Frames and panels shall be braced by cross, horizontal, or
diagonal braces, or combination thereof, which secure vertical members
together laterally. The cross braces shall be of such length as will
automatically square and align vertical members so that the erected
scaffold is always plumb, level, and square. All brace connections shall
be secured.
(3) Frames and panels shall be joined together vertically by
coupling or stacking pins or equivalent means.
(4) Where uplift can occur which would displace scaffold end frames
or panels, the frames or panels shall be locked together vertically by
pins or equivalent means.
(5) Brackets used to support cantilevered loads shall:
(i) Be seated with side-brackets parallel to the frames and end-
brackets at 90 degrees to the frames;
(ii) Not be bent or twisted from these positions; and
(iii) Be used only to support personnel, unless the scaffold has
been designed for other loads by a qualified engineer and built to
withstand the tipping forces caused by those other loads being placed on
the bracket-supported section of the scaffold.
(6) Scaffolds over 125 feet (38.0 m) in height above their base
plates shall be designed by a registered professional engineer, and
shall be constructed and loaded in accordance with such design.
(d) Plasterers', decorators', and large area scaffolds. Scaffolds
shall be constructed in accordance with paragraphs (a), (b), or (c) of
this section, as appropriate.
(e) Bricklayers' square scaffolds (squares). (1) Scaffolds made of
wood shall be reinforced with gussets on both sides of each corner.
(2) Diagonal braces shall be installed on all sides of each square.
(3) Diagonal braces shall be installed between squares on the rear
and front sides of the scaffold, and shall extend from the bottom of
each square to the top of the next square.
(4) Scaffolds shall not exceed three tiers in height, and shall be
so constructed and arranged that one square rests directly above the
other. The upper tiers shall stand on a continuous row of planks laid
across the next lower tier, and shall be nailed down or otherwise
secured to prevent displacement.
(f) Horse scaffolds. (1) Scaffolds shall not be constructed or
arranged more than two tiers or 10 feet (3.0 m) in height, whichever is
less.
(2) When horses are arranged in tiers, each horse shall be placed
directly over the horse in the tier below.
(3) When horses are arranged in tiers, the legs of each horse shall
be nailed down or otherwise secured to prevent displacement.
(4) When horses are arranged in tiers, each tier shall be
crossbraced.
(g) Form scaffolds and carpenters' bracket scaffolds. (1) Each
bracket, except those for wooden bracket-form scaffolds, shall be
attached to the supporting formwork or structure by means of one or more
of the following: nails; a metal stud attachment device; welding;
hooking over a secured structural supporting member, with the
[[Page 290]]
form wales either bolted to the form or secured by snap ties or tie
bolts extending through the form and securely anchored; or, for
carpenters' bracket scaffolds only, by a bolt extending through to the
opposite side of the structure's wall.
(2) Wooden bracket-form scaffolds shall be an integral part of the
form panel.
(3) Folding type metal brackets, when extended for use, shall be
either bolted or secured with a locking-type pin.
(h) Roof bracket scaffolds. (1) Scaffold brackets shall be
constructed to fit the pitch of the roof and shall provide a level
support for the platform.
(2) Brackets (including those provided with pointed metal
projections) shall be anchored in place by nails unless it is
impractical to use nails. When nails are not used, brackets shall be
secured in place with first-grade manila rope of at least three-fourth
inch (1.9 cm) diameter, or equivalent.
(i) Outrigger scaffolds. (1) The inboard end of outrigger beams,
measured from the fulcrum point to the extreme point of anchorage, shall
be not less than one and one-half times the outboard end in length.
(2) Outrigger beams fabricated in the shape of an I-beam or channel
shall be placed so that the web section is vertical.
(3) The fulcrum point of outrigger beams shall rest on secure
bearings at least 6 inches (15.2 cm) in each horizontal dimension.
(4) Outrigger beams shall be secured in place against movement, and
shall be securely braced at the fulcrum point against tipping.
(5) The inboard ends of outrigger beams shall be securely anchored
either by means of braced struts bearing against sills in contact with
the overhead beams or ceiling, or by means of tension members secured to
the floor joists underfoot, or by both.
(6) The entire supporting structure shall be securely braced to
prevent any horizontal movement.
(7) To prevent their displacement, platform units shall be nailed,
bolted, or otherwise secured to outriggers.
(8) Scaffolds and scaffold components shall be designed by a
registered professional engineer and shall be constructed and loaded in
accordance with such design.
(j) Pump jack scaffolds. (1) Pump jack brackets, braces, and
accessories shall be fabricated from metal plates and angles. Each pump
jack bracket shall have two positive gripping mechanisms to prevent any
failure or slippage.
(2) Poles shall be secured to the structure by rigid triangular
bracing or equivalent at the bottom, top, and other points as necessary.
When the pump jack has to pass bracing already installed, an additional
brace shall be installed approximately 4 feet (1.2 m) above the brace to
be passed, and shall be left in place until the pump jack has been moved
and the original brace reinstalled.
(3) When guardrails are used for fall protection, a workbench may be
used as the toprail only if it meets all the requirements in paragraphs
(g)(4) (ii), (vii), (viii), and (xiii) of Sec. 1926.451.
(4) Work benches shall not be used as scaffold platforms.
(5) When poles are made of wood, the pole lumber shall be straight-
grained, free of shakes, large loose or dead knots, and other defects
which might impair strength.
(6) When wood poles are constructed of two continuous lengths, they
shall be joined together with the seam parallel to the bracket.
(7) When two by fours are spliced to make a pole, mending plates
shall be installed at all splices to develop the full strength of the
member.
(k) Ladder jack scaffolds. (1) Platforms shall not exceed a height
of 20 feet (6.1 m).
(2) All ladders used to support ladder jack scaffolds shall meet the
requirements of subpart X of this part--Stairways and Ladders, except
that job-made ladders shall not be used to support ladder jack
scaffolds.
(3) The ladder jack shall be so designed and constructed that it
will bear on the side rails and ladder rungs or on the ladder rungs
alone. If bearing on rungs only, the bearing area shall include a length
of at least 10 inches (25.4 cm) on each rung.
(4) Ladders used to support ladder jacks shall be placed, fastened,
or
[[Page 291]]
equipped with devices to prevent slipping.
(5) Scaffold platforms shall not be bridged one to another.
(l) Window jack scaffolds. (1) Scaffolds shall be securely attached
to the window opening.
(2) Scaffolds shall be used only for the purpose of working at the
window opening through which the jack is placed.
(3) Window jacks shall not be used to support planks placed between
one window jack and another, or for other elements of scaffolding.
(m) Crawling boards (chicken ladders). (1) Crawling boards shall
extend from the roof peak to the eaves when used in connection with roof
construction, repair, or maintenance.
(2) Crawling boards shall be secured to the roof by ridge hooks or
by means that meet equivalent criteria (e.g., strength and durability).
(n) Step, platform, and trestle ladder scaffolds. (1) Scaffold
platforms shall not be placed any higher than the second highest rung or
step of the ladder supporting the platform.
(2) All ladders used in conjunction with step, platform and trestle
ladder scaffolds shall meet the pertinent requirements of subpart X of
this part--Stairways and Ladders, except that job-made ladders shall not
be used to support such scaffolds.
(3) Ladders used to support step, platform, and trestle ladder
scaffolds shall be placed, fastened, or equipped with devices to prevent
slipping.
(4) Scaffolds shall not be bridged one to another.
(o) Single-point adjustable suspension scaffolds. (1) When two
single-point adjustable suspension scaffolds are combined to form a two-
point adjustable suspension scaffold, the resulting two-point scaffold
shall comply with the requirements for two-point adjustable suspension
scaffolds in paragraph (p) of this section.
(2) The supporting rope between the scaffold and the suspension
device shall be kept vertical unless all of the following conditions are
met:
(i) The rigging has been designed by a qualified person, and
(ii) The scaffold is accessible to rescuers, and
(iii) The supporting rope is protected to ensure that it will not
chafe at any point where a change in direction occurs, and
(iv) The scaffold is positioned so that swinging cannot bring the
scaffold into contact with another surface.
(3) Boatswains' chair tackle shall consist of correct size ball
bearings or bushed blocks containing safety hooks and properly ``eye-
spliced'' minimum five-eighth (\5/8\) inch (1.6 cm) diameter first-grade
manila rope, or other rope which will satisfy the criteria (e.g.,
strength and durability) of manila rope.
(4) Boatswains' chair seat slings shall be reeved through four
corner holes in the seat; shall cross each other on the underside of the
seat; and shall be rigged so as to prevent slippage which could cause an
out-of-level condition.
(5) Boatswains' chair seat slings shall be a minimum of five-eight
(\5/8\) inch (1.6 cm) diameter fiber, synthetic, or other rope which
will satisfy the criteria (e.g., strength, slip resistance, durability,
etc.) of first grade manila rope.
(6) When a heat-producing process such as gas or arc welding is
being conducted, boatswains' chair seat slings shall be a minimum of
three-eight (\3/8\) inch (1.0 cm) wire rope.
(7) Non-cross-laminated wood boatswains' chairs shall be reinforced
on their underside by cleats securely fastened to prevent the board from
splitting.
(p) Two-point adjustable suspension scaffolds (swing stages). The
following requirements do not apply to two-point adjustable suspension
scaffolds used as masons' or stonesetters' scaffolds. Such scaffolds are
covered by paragraph (q) of this section.
(1) Platforms shall not be more than 36 inches (0.9 m) wide unless
designed by a qualified person to prevent unstable conditions.
(2) The platform shall be securely fastened to hangers (stirrups) by
U-bolts or by other means which satisfy the requirements of Sec.
1926.451(a).
(3) The blocks for fiber or synthetic ropes shall consist of at
least one double and one single block. The sheaves of all blocks shall
fit the size of the rope used.
[[Page 292]]
(4) Platforms shall be of the ladder-type, plank-type, beam-type, or
light-metal type. Light metal-type platforms having a rated capacity of
750 pounds or less and platforms 40 feet (12.2 m) or less in length
shall be tested and listed by a nationally recognized testing
laboratory.
(5) Two-point scaffolds shall not be bridged or otherwise connected
one to another during raising and lowering operations unless the bridge
connections are articulated (attached), and the hoists properly sized.
(6) Passage may be made from one platform to another only when the
platforms are at the same height, are abutting, and walk-through
stirrups specifically designed for this purpose are used.
(q) Multi-point adjustable suspension scaffolds, stonesetters'
multi-point adjustable suspension scaffolds, and masons' multi-point
adjustable suspension scaffolds. (1) When two or more scaffolds are used
they shall not be bridged one to another unless they are designed to be
bridged, the bridge connections are articulated, and the hoists are
properly sized.
(2) If bridges are not used, passage may be made from one platform
to another only when the platforms are at the same height and are
abutting.
(3) Scaffolds shall be suspended from metal outriggers, brackets,
wire rope slings, hooks, or means that meet equivalent criteria (e.g.,
strength, durability).
(r) Catenary scaffolds. (1) No more than one platform shall be
placed between consecutive vertical pickups, and no more than two
platforms shall be used on a catenary scaffold.
(2) Platforms supported by wire ropes shall have hook-shaped stops
on each end of the platforms to prevent them from slipping off the wire
ropes. These hooks shall be so placed that they will prevent the
platform from falling if one of the horizontal wire ropes breaks.
(3) Wire ropes shall not be tightened to the extent that the
application of a scaffold load will overstress them.
(4) Wire ropes shall be continuous and without splices between
anchors.
(s) Float (ship) scaffolds. (1) The platform shall be supported by a
minimum of two bearers, each of which shall project a minimum of 6
inches (15.2 cm) beyond the platform on both sides. Each bearer shall be
securely fastened to the platform.
(2) Rope connections shall be such that the platform cannot shift or
slip.
(3) When only two ropes are used with each float:
(i) They shall be arranged so as to provide four ends which are
securely fastened to overhead supports.
(ii) Each supporting rope shall be hitched around one end of the
bearer and pass under the platform to the other end of the bearer where
it is hitched again, leaving sufficient rope at each end for the
supporting ties.
(t) Interior hung scaffolds. (1) Scaffolds shall be suspended only
from the roof structure or other structural member such as ceiling
beams.
(2) Overhead supporting members (roof structure, ceiling beams, or
other structural members) shall be inspected and checked for strength
before the scaffold is erected.
(3) Suspension ropes and cables shall be connected to the overhead
supporting members by shackles, clips, thimbles, or other means that
meet equivalent criteria (e.g., strength, durability).
(u) Needle beam scaffolds. (1) Scaffold support beams shall be
installed on edge.
(2) Ropes or hangers shall be used for supports, except that one end
of a needle beam scaffold may be supported by a permanent structural
member.
(3) The ropes shall be securely attached to the needle beams.
(4) The support connection shall be arranged so as to prevent the
needle beam from rolling or becoming displaced.
(5) Platform units shall be securely attached to the needle beams by
bolts or equivalent means. Cleats and overhang are not considered to be
adequate means of attachment.
(v) Multi-level suspended scaffolds. (1) Scaffolds shall be equipped
with additional independent support lines, equal in number to the number
of points supported, and of equivalent strength to the suspension ropes,
and rigged to support the scaffold in the event the suspension rope(s)
fail.
[[Page 293]]
(2) Independent support lines and suspension ropes shall not be
attached to the same points of anchorage.
(3) Supports for platforms shall be attached directly to the support
stirrup and not to any other platform.
(w) Mobile scaffolds. (1) Scaffolds shall be braced by cross,
horizontal, or diagonal braces, or combination thereof, to prevent
racking or collapse of the scaffold and to secure vertical members
together laterally so as to automatically square and align the vertical
members. Scaffolds shall be plumb, level, and squared. All brace
connections shall be secured.
(i) Scaffolds constructed of tube and coupler components shall also
comply with the requirements of paragraph (b) of this section;
(ii) Scaffolds constructed of fabricated frame components shall also
comply with the requirements of paragraph (c) of this section.
(2) Scaffold casters and wheels shall be locked with positive wheel
and/or wheel and swivel locks, or equivalent means, to prevent movement
of the scaffold while the scaffold is used in a stationary manner.
(3) Manual force used to move the scaffold shall be applied as close
to the base as practicable, but not more than 5 feet (1.5 m) above the
supporting surface.
(4) Power systems used to propel mobile scaffolds shall be designed
for such use. Forklifts, trucks, similar motor vehicles or add-on motors
shall not be used to propel scaffolds unless the scaffold is designed
for such propulsion systems.
(5) Scaffolds shall be stabilized to prevent tipping during
movement.
(6) Employees shall not be allowed to ride on scaffolds unless the
following conditions exist:
(i) The surface on which the scaffold is being moved is within 3
degrees of level, and free of pits, holes, and obstructions;
(ii) The height to base width ratio of the scaffold during movement
is two to one or less, unless the scaffold is designed and constructed
to meet or exceed nationally recognized stability test requirements such
as those listed in paragraph (x) of appendix A to this subpart (ANSI/SIA
A92.5 and A92.6);
(iii) Outrigger frames, when used, are installed on both sides of
the scaffold;
(iv) When power systems are used, the propelling force is applied
directly to the wheels, and does not produce a speed in excess of 1 foot
per second (.3 mps); and
(v) No employee is on any part of the scaffold which extends outward
beyond the wheels, casters, or other supports.
(7) Platforms shall not extend outward beyond the base supports of
the scaffold unless outrigger frames or equivalent devices are used to
ensure stability.
(8) Where leveling of the scaffold is necessary, screw jacks or
equivalent means shall be used.
(9) Caster stems and wheel stems shall be pinned or otherwise
secured in scaffold legs or adjustment screws.
(10) Before a scaffold is moved, each employee on the scaffold shall
be made aware of the move.
(x) Repair bracket scaffolds. (1) Brackets shall be secured in place
by at least one wire rope at least \1/2\ inch (1.27 cm) in diameter.
(2) Each bracket shall be attached to the securing wire rope (or
ropes) by a positive locking device capable of preventing the
unintentional detachment of the bracket from the rope, or by equivalent
means.
(3) Each bracket, at the contact point between the supporting
structure and the bottom of the bracket, shall be provided with a shoe
(heel block or foot) capable of preventing the lateral movement of the
bracket.
(4) Platforms shall be secured to the brackets in a manner that will
prevent the separation of the platforms from the brackets and the
movement of the platforms or the brackets on a completed scaffold.
(5) When a wire rope is placed around the structure in order to
provide a safe anchorage for personal fall arrest systems used by
employees erecting or dismantling scaffolds, the wire rope shall meet
the requirements of subpart M of this part, but shall be at least \5/16\
inch (0.8 cm) in diameter.
(6) Each wire rope used for securing brackets in place or as an
anchorage for personal fall arrest systems shall be protected from
damage due to contact with edges, corners, protrusions, or
[[Page 294]]
other discontinuities of the supporting structure or scaffold
components.
(7) Tensioning of each wire rope used for securing brackets in place
or as an anchorage for personal fall arrest systems shall be by means of
a turnbuckle at least 1 inch (2.54 cm) in diameter, or by equivalent
means.
(8) Each turnbuckle shall be connected to the other end of its rope
by use of an eyesplice thimble of a size appropriate to the turnbuckle
to which it is attached.
(9) U-bolt wire rope clips shall not be used on any wire rope used
to secure brackets or to serve as an anchor for personal fall arrest
systems.
(10) The employer shall ensure that materials shall not be dropped
to the outside of the supporting structure.
(11) Scaffold erection shall progress in only one direction around
any structure.
(y) Stilts. Stilts, when used, shall be used in accordance with the
following requirements:
(1) An employee may wear stilts on a scaffold only if it is a large
area scaffold.
(2) When an employee is using stilts on a large area scaffold where
a guardrail system is used to provide fall protection, the guardrail
system shall be increased in height by an amount equal to the height of
the stilts being used by the employee.
(3) Surfaces on which stilts are used shall be flat and free of
pits, holes and obstructions, such as debris, as well as other tripping
and falling hazards.
(4) Stilts shall be properly maintained. Any alteration of the
original equipment shall be approved by the manufacturer.
Sec. 1926.453 Aerial lifts.
(a) General requirements. (1) Unless otherwise provided in this
section, aerial lifts acquired for use on or after January 22, 1973
shall be designed and constructed in conformance with the applicable
requirements of the American National Standards for ``Vehicle Mounted
Elevating and Rotating Work Platforms,'' ANSI A92.2-1969, including
appendix. Aerial lifts acquired before January 22, 1973 which do not
meet the requirements of ANSI A92.2-1969, may not be used after January
1, 1976, unless they shall have been modified so as to conform with the
applicable design and construction requirements of ANSI A92.2-1969.
Aerial lifts include the following types of vehicle-mounted aerial
devices used to elevate personnel to job-sites above ground:
(i) Extensible boom platforms;
(ii) Aerial ladders;
(iii) Articulating boom platforms;
(iv) Vertical towers; and
(v) A combination of any such devices. Aerial equipment may be made
of metal, wood, fiberglass reinforced plastic (FRP), or other material;
may be powered or manually operated; and are deemed to be aerial lifts
whether or not they are capable of rotating about a substantially
vertical axis.
(2) Aerial lifts may be ``field modified'' for uses other than those
intended by the manufacturer provided the modification has been
certified in writing by the manufacturer or by any other equivalent
entity, such as a nationally recognized testing laboratory, to be in
conformity with all applicable provisions of ANSI A92.2-1969 and this
section and to be at least as safe as the equipment was before
modification.
(b) Specific requirements--(1) Ladder trucks and tower trucks.
Aerial ladders shall be secured in the lower traveling position by the
locking device on top of the truck cab, and the manually operated device
at the base of the ladder before the truck is moved for highway travel.
(2) Extensible and articulating boom platforms. (i) Lift controls
shall be tested each day prior to use to determine that such controls
are in safe working condition.
(ii) Only authorized persons shall operate an aerial lift.
(iii) Belting off to an adjacent pole, structure, or equipment while
working from an aerial lift shall not be permitted.
(iv) Employees shall always stand firmly on the floor of the basket,
and shall not sit or climb on the edge of the basket or use planks,
ladders, or other devices for a work position.
(v) A body belt shall be worn and a lanyard attached to the boom or
basket when working from an aerial lift.
Note to paragraph (b)(2)(v): As of January 1, 1998, subpart M of
this part
[[Page 295]]
(Sec. 1926.502(d)) provides that body belts are not acceptable as part
of a personal fall arrest system. The use of a body belt in a tethering
system or in a restraint system is acceptable and is regulated under
Sec. 1926.502(e).
(vi) Boom and basket load limits specified by the manufacturer shall
not be exceeded.
(vii) The brakes shall be set and when outriggers are used, they
shall be positioned on pads or a solid surface. Wheel chocks shall be
installed before using an aerial lift on an incline, provided they can
be safely installed.
(viii) An aerial lift truck shall not be moved when the boom is
elevated in a working position with men in the basket, except for
equipment which is specifically designed for this type of operation in
accordance with the provisions of paragraphs (a) (1) and (2) of this
section.
(ix) Articulating boom and extensible boom platforms, primarily
designed as personnel carriers, shall have both platform (upper) and
lower controls. Upper controls shall be in or beside the platform within
easy reach of the operator. Lower controls shall provide for overriding
the upper controls. Controls shall be plainly marked as to their
function. Lower level controls shall not be operated unless permission
has been obtained from the employee in the lift, except in case of
emergency.
(x) Climbers shall not be worn while performing work from an aerial
lift.
(xi) The insulated portion of an aerial lift shall not be altered in
any manner that might reduce its insulating value.
(xii) Before moving an aerial lift for travel, the boom(s) shall be
inspected to see that it is properly cradled and outriggers are in
stowed position except as provided in paragraph (b)(2)(viii) of this
section.
(3) Electrical tests. All electrical tests shall conform to the
requirements of ANSI A92.2-1969 section 5. However equivalent d.c.;
voltage tests may be used in lieu of the a.c. voltage specified in
A92.2-1969; d.c. voltage tests which are approved by the equipment
manufacturer or equivalent entity shall be considered an equivalent test
for the purpose of this paragraph (b)(3).
(4) Bursting safety factor. The provisions of the American National
Standards Institute standard ANSI A92.2-1969, section 4.9 Bursting
Safety Factor shall apply to all critical hydraulic and pneumatic
components. Critical components are those in which a failure would
result in a free fall or free rotation of the boom. All noncritical
components shall have a bursting safety factor of at least 2 to 1.
(5) Welding standards. All welding shall conform to the following
standards as applicable:
(i) Standard Qualification Procedure, AWS B3.0-41.
(ii) Recommended Practices for Automotive Welding Design, AWS D8.4-
61.
(iii) Standard Qualification of Welding Procedures and Welders for
Piping and Tubing, AWS D10.9-69.
(iv) Specifications for Welding Highway and Railway Bridges, AWS
D2.0-69.
Note to Sec. 1926.453: Non-mandatory appendix C to this subpart
lists examples of national consensus standards that are considered to
provide employee protection equivalent to that provided through the
application of ANSI A92.2-1969, where appropriate. This incorporation by
reference was approved by the Director of the Federal Register in
accordance with 5 U.S.C. 552(a) and 1 CFR part 51. Copies may be
obtained from the American National Standards Institute. Copies may be
inspected at the Docket Office, Occupational Safety and Health
Administration, U.S. Department of Labor, 200 Constitution Avenue, NW.,
room N2634, Washington, DC or at the National Archives and Records
Administration (NARA). For information on the availability of this
material at NARA, call 202-741-6030, or go to: http://www.archives.gov/
federal--register/code--of--federal--regulations/ibr--locations.html.
[61 FR 46116, Aug. 30, 1996; 61 FR 59832, Nov. 25, 1996, as amended at
69 FR 18803, Apr. 9, 2004]
Sec. 1926.454 Training requirements.
This section supplements and clarifies the requirements of Sec.
1926.21(b)(2) as these relate to the hazards of work on scaffolds.
(a) The employer shall have each employee who performs work while on
a scaffold trained by a person qualified in the subject matter to
recognize the hazards associated with the type of scaffold being used
and to understand the procedures to control or minimize
[[Page 296]]
those hazards. The training shall include the following areas, as
applicable:
(1) The nature of any electrical hazards, fall hazards and falling
object hazards in the work area;
(2) The correct procedures for dealing with electrical hazards and
for erecting, maintaining, and disassembling the fall protection systems
and falling object protection systems being used;
(3) The proper use of the scaffold, and the proper handling of
materials on the scaffold;
(4) The maximum intended load and the load-carrying capacities of
the scaffolds used; and
(5) Any other pertinent requirements of this subpart.
(b) The employer shall have each employee who is involved in
erecting, disassembling, moving, operating, repairing, maintaining, or
inspecting a scaffold trained by a competent person to recognize any
hazards associated with the work in question. The training shall include
the following topics, as applicable:
(1) The nature of scaffold hazards;
(2) The correct procedures for erecting, disassembling, moving,
operating, repairing, inspecting, and maintaining the type of scaffold
in question;
(3) The design criteria, maximum intended load-carrying capacity and
intended use of the scaffold;
(4) Any other pertinent requirements of this subpart.
(c) When the employer has reason to believe that an employee lacks
the skill or understanding needed for safe work involving the erection,
use or dismantling of scaffolds, the employer shall retrain each such
employee so that the requisite proficiency is regained. Retraining is
required in at least the following situations:
(1) Where changes at the worksite present a hazard about which an
employee has not been previously trained; or
(2) Where changes in the types of scaffolds, fall protection,
falling object protection, or other equipment present a hazard about
which an employee has not been previously trained; or
(3) Where inadequacies in an affected employee's work involving
scaffolds indicate that the employee has not retained the requisite
proficiency.
Non-Mandatory Appendices
Sec. (Non-mandatory) Appendix A to Subpart L of Part 1926--Scaffold
Specifications
This appendix provides non-mandatory guidelines to assist employers
in complying with the requirements of subpart L of this part. An
employer may use these guidelines and tables as a starting point for
designing scaffold systems. However, the guidelines do not provide all
the information necessary to build a complete system, and the employer
is still responsible for designing and assembling these components in
such a way that the completed system will meet the requirements of Sec.
1926.451(a). Scaffold components which are not selected and loaded in
accordance with this Appendix, and components for which no specific
guidelines or tables are given in this appendix (e.g., joints, ties,
components for wood pole scaffolds more than 60 feet in height,
components for heavy-duty horse scaffolds, components made with other
materials, and components with other dimensions, etc.) must be designed
and constructed in accordance with the capacity requirements of Sec.
1926.451(a), and loaded in accordance with Sec. 1926.451(d)(1).
Index to appendix A for Subpart L
1. General guidelines and tables.
2. Specific guidelines and tables.
(a) Pole scaffolds:
Single-pole wood pole scaffolds.
Independent wood pole scaffolds.
(b) Tube and coupler scaffolds.
(c) Fabricated frame scaffolds.
(d) Plasterers', decorators' and large area scaffolds.
(e) Bricklayers' square scaffolds.
(f) Horse scaffolds.
(g) Form scaffolds and carpenters' bracket scaffolds.
(h) Roof bracket scaffolds.
(i) Outrigger scaffolds (one level).
(j) Pump jack scaffolds.
(k) Ladder jack scaffolds.
(l) Window jack scaffolds.
(m) Crawling boards (chicken ladders).
(n) Step, platform and trestle ladder scaffolds.
(o) Single-point adjustable suspension scaffolds.
(p) Two-point adjustable suspension scaffolds.
(q)(1) Stonesetters' multi-point adjustable suspension scaffolds.
(2) Masons' multi-point adjustable suspension scaffolds.
(r) Catenary scaffolds.
(s) Float (ship) scaffolds.
[[Page 297]]
(t) Interior hung scaffolds.
(u) Needle beam scaffolds.
(v) Multi-level suspension scaffolds.
(w) Mobile scaffolds.
(x) Repair bracket scaffolds.
(y) Stilts.
(z) Tank builders' scaffolds.
1. General Guidelines and Tables
(a) The following tables, and the tables in Part 2--Specific
guidelines and tables, assume that all load-carrying timber members
(except planks) of the scaffold are a minimum of 1,500 lb-f/in\2\
(stress grade) construction grade lumber. All dimensions are nominal
sizes as provided in the American Softwood Lumber Standards, dated
January 1970, except that, where rough sizes are noted, only rough or
undressed lumber of the size specified will satisfy minimum
requirements.
(b) Solid sawn wood used as scaffold planks shall be selected for
such use following the grading rules established by a recognized lumber
grading association or by an independent lumber grading inspection
agency. Such planks shall be identified by the grade stamp of such
association or agency. The association or agency and the grading rules
under which the wood is graded shall be certified by the Board of
Review, American Lumber Standard Committee, as set forth in the American
Softwood Lumber Standard of the U.S. Department of Commerce.
(i) Allowable spans shall be determined in compliance with the
National Design Specification for Wood Construction published by the
National Forest Products Association; paragraph 5 of ANSI A10.8-1988
Scaffolding-Safety Requirements published by the American National
Standards Institute; or for 2x10 inch (nominal) or 2x9 inch (rough)
solid sawn wood planks, as shown in the following table:
------------------------------------------------------------------------
Maximum Maximum
permissible permissible
span using span using
Maximum intended nominal load (lb/ft\2\) full thickness nominal
undressed thickness
lumber (ft) lumber (ft)
------------------------------------------------------------------------
25...................................... 10 8
50...................................... 8 6
75...................................... 6 ..............
------------------------------------------------------------------------
(ii) The maximum permissible span for 1\1/4\ x 9-inch or wider wood
plank of full thickness with a maximum intended load of 50 lb/ft.\2\
shall be 4 feet.
(c) Fabricated planks and platforms may be used in lieu of solid
sawn wood planks. Maximum spans for such units shall be as recommended
by the manufacturer based on the maximum intended load being calculated
as follows:
------------------------------------------------------------------------
Rated load capacity Intended load
------------------------------------------------------------------------
Light-duty............... 25 pounds per square foot
applied uniformly over the entire span area.
Medium-duty.............. 50 pounds per square foot
applied uniformly over the entire span area.
Heavy-duty............... 75 pounds per square foot
applied uniformly over the entire span area.
One-person............... 250 pounds placed at the
center of the span (total 250 pounds).
Two-person............... 250 pounds placed 18
inches to the left and right of the center
of the span (total 500 pounds).
Three-person............. 250 pounds placed at the
center of the span and 250 pounds placed 18
inches to the left and right of the center
of the span (total 750 pounds).
------------------------------------------------------------------------
Note: Platform units used to make scaffold platforms intended for
light-duty use shall be capable of supporting at least 25 pounds per
square foot applied uniformly over the entire unit-span area, or a 250-
pound point load placed on the unit at the center of the span, whichever
load produces the greater shear force.
(d) Guardrails shall be as follows:
(i) Toprails shall be equivalent in strength to 2 inch by 4 inch
lumber; or
1\1/4\ inch x \1/8\ inch structural angle iron; or
1 inch x .070 inch wall steel tubing; or 1.990 inch x .058 inch wall
aluminum tubing.
(ii) Midrails shall be equivalent in strength to 1 inch by 6 inch
lumber; or
1\1/4\ inch x 1\1/4\ inch x \1/8\ inch structural angle iron; or
1 inch x .070 inch wall steel tubing; or
1.990 inch x .058 inch wall aluminum tubing.
(iii) Toeboards shall be equivalent in strength to 1 inch by 4 inch
lumber; or
1\1/4\ inch x 1\1/4\ inch structural angle iron; or
1 inch x .070 inch wall steel tubing; or
1.990 inch x .058 inch wall aluminum tubing.
(iv) Posts shall be equivalent in strength to 2 inch by 4 inch
lumber; or
1\1/4\ inch x 1\1/4\ inch x \1/8\ structural angle iron; or
1 inch x .070 inch wall steel tubing; or
1.990 inch x .058 inch wall aluminum tubing.
(v) Distance between posts shall not exceed 8 feet.
(e) Overhead protection shall consist of 2 inch nominal planking
laid tight, or \3/4\-inch plywood.
(f) Screen installed between toeboards and midrails or toprails
shall consist of No. 18 gauge U.S. Standard wire one inch mesh.
[[Page 298]]
2. Specific guidelines and tables.
(a) Pole Scaffolds.
Single Pole Wood Pole Scaffolds
----------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------
Light duty up to 20 Light duty up to Medium duty up to Heavy duty up to
feet high 60 feet high 60 feet high 60 feet high
----------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------
Maximum intended load (lbs/ft 25................. 25................ 50................ 75
\2\).
Poles or uprights.............. 2x4 in............. 4x4 in............ 4x4 in............ 4x6 in.
Maximum pole spacing 6 feet............. 10 feet........... 8 feet............ 6 feet
(longitudinal).
Maximum pole spacing 5 feet............. 5 feet............ 5 feet............ 5 feet
(transverse).
Runners........................ 1x4 in............. 1\1/4\x9 in....... 2x10 in........... 2x10 in.
Bearers and maximum spacing of
bearers:
3 feet..................... 2x4 in............. 2x4 in............ 2x10 in. or 3x4 in 2x10 in. or 3x5
in.
5 feet..................... 2x6 in. or 3x4 in.. 2x6 in. or 3x4 in. 2x10 in. or 3x4 in 2x10 in. or 3x5
(rough). in.
6 feet..................... ................... .................. 2x10 in. or 3x4 in 2x10 in. or 3x5
in.
8 feet..................... ................... .................. 2x10 in. or 3x4 in ..................
Planking....................... 1\1/4\x9 in........ 2x10 in........... 2x10 in........... 2x10 in.
Maximum vertical spacing of 7 feet............. 9 feet............ 7 feet............ 6 ft. 6 in.
horizontal members.
Bracing horizontal............. 1x4 in............. 1x4 in............ 1x6 in. or 1\1/ 2x4 in.
4\x4 in.
Bracing diagonal............... 1x4 in............. 1x4 in............ 1x4 in............ 2x4 in.
Tie-ins........................ 1x4 in............. 1x4 in............ 1x4 in............ 1x4 in.
----------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------
Note: All members except planking are used on edge. All wood bearers shall be reinforced with \3/16\x2 inch
steel strip, or the equivalent, secured to the lower edges for the entire length of the bearer.
Independent Wood Pole Scaffolds
----------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------
Light duty up to 20 Light duty up to Medium duty up to Heavy duty up to
feet high 60 feet high 60 feet high 60 feet high
----------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------
Maximum intended load.......... 25 lbs/ft\2\....... 25 lbs/ft\2\...... 50 lbs/ft\2\...... 75 lbs/ft\2\.
Poles or uprights.............. 2x4 in............. 4x4 in............ 4x4 in............ 4x4 in.
Maximum pole spacing 6 feet............. 10 feet........... 8 feet............ 6 feet.
(longitudinal).
Maximum (transverse)........... 6 feet............. 10 feet........... 8 feet............ 8 feet.
Runners........................ 1\1/4\x4 in........ 1\1/4\x9 in....... 2x10 in........... 2x10 in.
Bearers and maximum spacing of
bearers:
3 feet..................... 2x4 in............. 2x4 in............ 2x10 in........... 2x10 in. (rough).
6 feet..................... 2x6 in. or 3x4 in.. 2x10 in. (rough) 2x10 in........... 2x10 in. (rough).
or 3x8 in.
8 feet..................... 2x6 in. or 3x4 in.. 2x10 in. (rough) 2x10 in........... ..................
or 3x8 in.
10 feet.................... 2x6 in. or 3x4 in.. 2x10 in. (rough) .................. ..................
or 3x3 in.
Planking....................... 1\1/4\x9 in........ 2x10 in........... 2x10 in........... 2x10 in.
Maximum vertical spacing of 7 feet............. 7 feet............ 6 feet............ 6 feet.
horizontal members.
Bracing horizontal............. 1x4 in............. 1x4 in............ 1x6 in. or 1\1/ 2x4 in.
4\x4 in.
Bracing diagonal............... 1x4 in............. 1x4 in............ 1x4 in............ 2x4 in.
Tie-ins........................ 1x4 in............. 1x4 in............ 1x4 in............ 1x4 in.
----------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------
Note: All members except planking are used on edge. All wood bearers shall be reinforced with \3/16\x2 inch
steel strip, or the equivalent, secured to the lower edges for the entire length of the bearer.
(b) Tube and coupler scaffolds.
Minimum Size of Members
----------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------
Light duty Medium duty Heavy duty
----------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------
Maximum intended load................ 25 lbs/ft\2\........... 50 lbs/ft\2\........... 75 lbs/ft\2\.
Posts, runners and braces............ Nominal 2 in. (1.90 Nominal 2 in. (1.90 Nominal 2 in. (1.90
inches) OD steel tube inches) OD steel tube inches) OD steel tube
or pipe. or pipe. or pipe.
Bearers.............................. Nominal 2 in. (1.90 Nominal 2 in. (1.90 Nominal 2\1/2\ in.
inches). inches). (2.375 in.).
OD steel tube or pipe OD steel tube or pipe OD steel tube or pipe
and a maximum post and a maximum post and a maximum post
spacing of 4 ft.x10 spacing of 4 ft.x7 ft. spacing of 6 ft.x6 ft.
ft.. or.
Nominal 2\1/2\ in.
(2.375 in.).
OD steel tube or pipe
and a maximum post
spacing of 6 ft.x8
ft.*.
[[Page 299]]
Maximum runner spacing vertically.... 6 ft. 6 in............. 6 ft. 6 in............. 6 ft. 6 in.
----------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------
* Bearers shall be installed in the direction of the shorter dimension.
Note: Longitudinal diagonal bracing shall be installed at an angle of 45[deg] (5[deg]).
Maximum Number of Planked Levels
------------------------------------------------------------------------
Maximum number of
additional planked levels Maximum
--------------------------- height of
Light Medium Heavy scaffold
duty duty duty (in feet)
------------------------------------------------------------------------
Number of Working Levels:
1........................... 16 11 6 125
2........................... 11 1 0 125
3........................... 6 0 0 125
4........................... 1 0 0 125
------------------------------------------------------------------------
(c) Fabricated frame scaffolds. Because of their prefabricated
nature, no additional guidelines or tables for these scaffolds are being
adopted in this Appendix.
(d) Plasterers', decorators', and large area scaffolds. The
guidelines for pole scaffolds or tube and coupler scaffolds (Appendix A
(a) and (b)) may be applied.
(e) Bricklayers' square scaffolds.
Maximum intended load: 50 lb/ft.\2\*
---------------------------------------------------------------------------
* The squares shall be set not more than 8 feet apart for light duty
scaffolds and not more than 5 feet apart for medium duty scaffolds.
---------------------------------------------------------------------------
Maximum width: 5 ft.
Maximum height: 5 ft.
Gussets: 1 x 6 in.
Braces: 1 x 8 in.
Legs: 2 x 6 in.
Bearers (horizontal members): 2 x 6 in.
(f) Horse scaffolds.
Maximum intended load (light duty): 25 lb/ft.\2\ **
---------------------------------------------------------------------------
** Horses shall be spaced not more than 8 feet apart for light duty
loads, and not more than 5 feet apart for medium duty loads.
---------------------------------------------------------------------------
Maximum intended load (medium duty): 50 lb/ft.\2\ **
Horizontal members or bearers:
Light duty: 2 x 4 in.
Medium duty: 3 x 4 in.
Legs: 2 x 4 in.
Longitudinal brace between legs: 1 x 6 in.
Gusset brace at top of legs: 1 x 8 in.
Half diagonal braces: 2 x 4 in.
(g) Form scaffolds and carpenters' bracket scaffolds.
(1) Brackets shall consist of a triangular-shaped frame made of wood
with a cross-section not less than 2 inches by 3 inches, or of 1\1/4\
inch x 1\1/4\ inch x \1/8\ inch structural angle iron.
(2) Bolts used to attach brackets to structures shall not be less
than \5/8\ inches in diameter.
(3) Maximum bracket spacing shall be 8 feet on centers.
(4) No more than two employees shall occupy any given 8 feet of a
bracket or form scaffold at any one time. Tools and materials shall not
exceed 75 pounds in addition to the occupancy.
(5) Wooden figure-four scaffolds:
Maximum intended load: 25 lb/ft.\2\
Uprights: 2 x 4 in. or 2 x 6 in.
Bearers (two): 1 x 6 in.
Braces: 1 x 6 in.
Maximum length of bearers (unsupported): 3 ft. 6 in.
(i) Outrigger bearers shall consist of two pieces of 1 x 6 inch
lumber nailed on opposite sides of the vertical support.
(ii) Bearers for wood figure-four brackets shall project not more
than 3 feet 6 inches from the outside of the form support, and shall be
braced and secured to prevent tipping or turning. The knee or angle
brace shall intersect the bearer at least 3 feet from the form at an
angle of approximately 45 degrees, and the lower end shall be nailed to
a vertical support.
(6) Metal bracket scaffolds:
Maximum intended load: 25 lb/ft.\2\
Uprights: 2 x 4 inch
Bearers: As designed.
Braces: As designed.
(7) Wood bracket scaffolds:
Maximum intended load: 25 lb/ft.\2\
Uprights: 2 x 4 in or 2 x 6 in
Bearers: 2 x 6 in
Maximum scaffold width: 3 ft 6 in
Braces: 1 x 6 in
(h) Roof bracket scaffolds. No specific guidelines or tables are
given.
[[Page 300]]
(i) Outrigger scaffolds (single level). No specific guidelines or
tables are given.
(j) Pump jack scaffolds. Wood poles shall not exceed 30 feet in
height. Maximum intended load--500 lbs between poles; applied at the
center of the span. Not more than two employees shall be on a pump jack
scaffold at one time between any two supports. When 2 x 4's are spliced
together to make a 4 x 4 inch wood pole, they shall be spliced with ``10
penny'' common nails no more than 12 inches center to center, staggered
uniformly from the opposite outside edges.
(k) Ladder jack scaffolds. Maximum intended load--25 lb/ft\2\.
However, not more than two employees shall occupy any platform at any
one time. Maximum span between supports shall be 8 feet.
(l) Window jack scaffolds. Not more than one employee shall occupy a
window jack scaffold at any one time.
(m) Crawling boards (chicken ladders). Crawling boards shall be not
less than 10 inches wide and 1 inch thick, with cleats having a minimum
1 x 1\1/2\ inch cross-sectional area. The cleats shall be equal in
length to the width of the board and spaced at equal intervals not to
exceed 24 inches.
(n) Step, platform, and trestle ladder scaffolds. No additional
guidelines or tables are given.
(o) Single-point adjustable suspension scaffolds. Maximum intended
load--250 lbs. Wood seats for boatswains' chairs shall be not less than
1 inch thick if made of non-laminated wood, or \5/8\ inches thick if
made of marine quality plywood.
(p) Two-point adjustable suspension scaffolds. (1) In addition to
direct connections to buildings (except window cleaners' anchors)
acceptable ways to prevent scaffold sway include angulated roping and
static lines. Angulated roping is a system of platform suspension in
which the upper wire rope sheaves or suspension points are closer to the
plane of the building face than the corresponding attachment points on
the platform, thus causing the platform to press against the face of the
building. Static lines are separate ropes secured at their top and
bottom ends closer to the plane of the building face than the outermost
edge of the platform. By drawing the static line taut, the platform is
drawn against the face of the building.
(2) On suspension scaffolds designed for a working load of 500
pounds, no more than two employees shall be permitted on the scaffold at
one time. On suspension scaffolds with a working load of 750 pounds, no
more than three employees shall be permitted on the scaffold at one
time.
(3) Ladder-type platforms. The side stringer shall be of clear
straight-grained spruce. The rungs shall be of straight-grained oak,
ash, or hickory, at least 1\1/8\ inches in diameter, with \7/8\ inch
tenons mortised into the side stringers at least \7/8\ inch. The
stringers shall be tied together with tie rods not less than \1/4\ inch
in diameter, passing through the stringers and riveted up tight against
washers on both ends. The flooring strips shall be spaced not more than
\5/8\ inch apart, except at the side rails where the space may be 1
inch. Ladder-type platforms shall be constructed in accordance with the
following table:
Schedule for Ladder-Type Platforms
----------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------
----------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------
Length of Platform............... 12 feet.................. 14 & 16 feet............ 18 & 20 feet.
Side stringers, minimum cross
section (finished sizes):
At ends...................... 1\3/4\ x 2\3/4\ in....... 1\3/4\ x 2\3/4\ in...... 1\3/4\ x 3 in.
At middle.................... 1\3/4\ x 3\3/4\ in....... 1\3/4\ x 3\3/4\ in...... 1\3/4\ x 4 in.
Reinforcing strip (minimum)...... A \1/8\ x \7/8\ inch steel reinforcing strip shall be attached to the side or
underside, full length.
Rungs............................ Rungs shall be 1\1/8\ inch minimum diameter with at least \7/8\ inch in
diameter tenons, and the maximum spacing shall be 12 inches to center.
Tie rods:
Number (minimum)............. 3........................ 4....................... 4
Diameter (minimum)........... \1/4\ inch............... \1/4\ inch.............. \1/4\ inch
Flooring, minimum finished size.. \1/2\ x 2\3/4\ in........ \1/2\ x 2\3/4\ in....... \1/2\ x 2\3/4\ in.
----------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------
Schedule for Ladder-Type Platforms
------------------------------------------------------------------------
------------------------------------------------------------------------
Length of Platform.......... 22 & 24 ft.......... 28 & 30 ft.
Side stringers, minimum
cross section (finished
sizes):
At ends................. 1\3/4\x3 in......... 1\3/4\ x 3\1/2\ in.
At middle............... 1\3/4\ x 4\1/4\ in.. 1\3/4\ x 5 in.
[[Page 301]]
Reinforcing strip (minimum). A \1/8\ x \7/8\-inch steel reinforcing
strip shall be attached to the side or
underside, full length.
Rungs....................... Rungs shall be 1\1/8\ inch minimum
diameter with at least \7/8\ inch in
diameter tenons, and the maximum spacing
shall be 12 inches to center. Tie rods.
Number (minimum)........ 5................... 6.
Diameter (minimum)...... \1/4\ in............ \1/4\ in.
Flooring, minimum finished \1/2\ x 2\3/4\ in... \1/2\ x 2\3/4\ in.
size.
------------------------------------------------------------------------
(4) Plank-Type Platforms. Plank-type platforms shall be composed of
not less than nominal 2 x 8 inch unspliced planks, connected together on
the underside with cleats at intervals not exceeding 4 feet, starting 6
inches from each end. A bar or other effective means shall be securely
fastened to the platform at each end to prevent the platform from
slipping off the hanger. The span between hangers for plank-type
platforms shall not exceed 10 feet.
(5) Beam-Type Platforms. Beam platforms shall have side stringers of
lumber not less than 2 x 6 inches set on edge. The span between hangers
shall not exceed 12 feet when beam platforms are used. The flooring
shall be supported on 2 x 6 inch cross beams, laid flat and set into the
upper edge of the stringers with a snug fit, at intervals of not more
than 4 feet, securely nailed to the cross beams. Floor-boards shall not
be spaced more than \1/2\ inch apart.
(q)(1) Multi-point adjustable suspension scaffolds and stonesetters'
multi-point adjustable suspension scaffolds. No specific guidelines or
tables are given for these scaffolds.
(2) Masons' multi-point adjustable suspension scaffolds. Maximum
intended load--50 lb/ft\2\. Each outrigger beam shall be at least a
standard 7 inch, 15.3 pound steel I-beam, at least 15 feet long. Such
beams shall not project more than 6 feet 6 inches beyond the bearing
point. Where the overhang exceeds 6 feet 6 inches, outrigger beams shall
be composed of stronger beams or multiple beams.
(r) Catenary scaffolds. (1) Maximum intended load--500 lbs.
(2) Not more than two employees shall be permitted on the scaffold
at one time.
(3) Maximum capacity of come-along shall be 2,000 lbs.
(4) Vertical pickups shall be spaced not more than 50 feet apart.
(5) Ropes shall be equivalent in strength to at least \1/2\ inch
(1.3 cm) diameter improved plow steel wire rope.
(s) Float (ship) scaffolds. (1) Maximum intended load--750 lbs.
(2) Platforms shall be made of \3/4\ inch plywood, equivalent in
rating to American Plywood Association Grade B-B, Group I, Exterior.
(3) Bearers shall be made from 2x4 inch, or 1x10 inch rough lumber.
They shall be free of knots and other flaws.
(4) Ropes shall be equivalent in strength to at least 1 inch (2.5
cm) diameter first grade manila rope.
(t) Interior hung scaffolds.
Bearers (use on edge): 2x10 in.
Maximum intended load: Maximum span
25 lb/ft.\2\: 10 ft.
50 lb/ft.\2\: 10 ft.
75 lb/ft.\2\: 7 ft.
(u) Needle beam scaffolds.
Maximum intended load: 25 lb/ft.\2\
Beams: 4x6 in.
Maximum platform span: 8 ft.
Maximum beam span: 10 ft.
(1) Ropes shall be attached to the needle beams by a scaffold hitch
or an eye splice. The loose end of the rope shall be tied by a bowline
knot or by a round turn and a half hitch.
(2) Ropes shall be equivalent in strength to at least 1 inch (2.5
cm) diameter first grade manila rope.
(v) Multi-level suspension scaffolds. No additional guidelines or
tables are being given for these scaffolds.
(w) Mobile Scaffolds. Stability test as described in the ANSI A92
series documents, as appropriate for the type of scaffold, can be used
to establish stability for the purpose of Sec. 1926.452(w)(6).
(x) Repair bracket scaffolds. No additional guidelines or tables are
being given for these scaffolds.
(y) Stilts. No specific guidelines or tables are given.
(z) Tank builder's scaffold.
(1) The maximum distance between brackets to which scaffolding and
guardrail supports are attached shall be no more than 10 feet 6 inches.
[[Page 302]]
(2) Not more than three employees shall occupy a 10 feet 6 inch span
of scaffold planking at any time.
(3) A taut wire or synthetic rope supported on the scaffold brackets
shall be installed at the scaffold plank level between the innermost
edge of the scaffold platform and the curved plate structure of the tank
shell to serve as a safety line in lieu of an inner guardrail assembly
where the space between the scaffold platform and the tank exceeds 12
inches (30.48 cm). In the event the open space on either side of the
rope exceeds 12 inches (30.48 cm), a second wire or synthetic rope
appropriately placed, or guardrails in accordance with Sec.
1926.451(g)(4), shall be installed in order to reduce that open space to
less than 12 inches (30.48 cm).
(4) Scaffold planks of rough full-dimensioned 2-inch (5.1 cm)x12-
inch (30.5 cm) Douglas Fir or Southern Yellow Pine of Select Structural
Grade shall be used. Douglas Fir planks shall have a fiber stress of at
least 1900 lb/in\2\ (130,929 n/cm\2\) and a modulus of elasticity of at
least 1,900,000 lb/in\2\ (130,929,000 n/cm\2\), while Yellow Pine planks
shall have a fiber stress of at least 2500 lb/in\2\ (172,275 n/cm\2\)
and a modulus of elasticity of at least 2,000,000 lb/in\2\ (137,820,000
n/cm\2\).
(5) Guardrails shall be constructed of a taut wire or synthetic
rope, and shall be supported by angle irons attached to brackets welded
to the steel plates. These guardrails shall comply with Sec.
1926.451(g)(4). Guardrail supports shall be located at no greater than
10 feet 6 inch intervals.
[44 FR 8577, Feb. 9, 1979, as amended at 77 FR 46950, Aug. 7, 2012]
Sec. (Non-mandatory) Appendix B to Subpart L of Part 1926--Criteria for
Determining the Feasibility of Providing Safe Access and Fall Protection
for Scaffold Erectors and Dismantlers [Reserved]
Sec. (Non-mandatory) Appendix C to Subpart L of Part 1926--List of
National Consensus Standards
ANSI/SIA A92.2-1990 Vehicle-Mounted Elevating and Rotating Aerial
Devices
ANSI/SIA A92.3-1990 Manually Propelled Elevating Aerial Platforms
ANSI/SIA A92.5-1990 Boom Supported Elevating Work Platforms
ANSI/SIA A92.6-1990 Self-Propelled Elevating Work Platforms
ANSI/SIA A92.7-1990 Airline Ground Support Vehicle-Mounted Vertical Lift
Devices
ANSI/SIA A92.8-1993 Vehicle-Mounted Bridge Inspection and Maintenance
Devices
ANSI/SIA A92.9-1993 Mast-Climbing Work Platforms
Sec. (Non-mandatory) Appendix D to Subpart L of Part 1926--List of
Training Topics for Scaffold Erectors and Dismantlers
This appendix D is provided to serve as a guide to assist employers
when evaluating the training needs of employees erecting or dismantling
supported scaffolds.
The Agency believes that employees erecting or dismantling scaffolds
should be trained in the following topics:
General Overview of Scaffolding
regulations and standards
erection/dismantling planning
PPE and proper procedures
fall protection
materials handling
access
working platforms
foundations
guys, ties and braces
Tubular Welded Frame Scaffolds
specific regulations and standards
components
parts inspection
erection/dismantling planning
guys, ties and braces
fall protection
general safety
access and platforms
erection/dismantling procedures
rolling scaffold assembly
putlogs
Tube and Clamp Scaffolds
specific regulations and standards
components
parts inspection
erection/dismantling planning
guys, ties and braces
fall protection
general safety
access and platforms
erection/dismantling procedures
buttresses, cantilevers, & bridges
System Scaffolds
specific regulations and standards
components
parts inspection
erection/dismantling planning
guys, ties and braces
fall protection
general safety
access and platforms
erection/dismantling procedures
buttresses, cantilevers, & bridges
Scaffold erectors and dismantlers should all receive the general
overview, and, in addition, specific training for the type of supported
scaffold being erected or dismantled.
[[Page 303]]
Sec. (Non-mandatory) Appendix E to Subpart L of Part 1926--Drawings and
Illustrations
This appendix provides drawings of particular types of scaffolds and
scaffold components, and graphic illustrations of bracing patterns and
tie spacing patterns.
This appendix is intended to provide visual guidance to assist the
user in complying with the requirements of subpart L, part 1926.
[GRAPHIC] [TIFF OMITTED] TR30AU96.000
[[Page 304]]
[GRAPHIC] [TIFF OMITTED] TR30AU96.001
HOISTS MUST BE ELECTRONICALLY ISOLATED FROM SCAFFOLD
[[Page 305]]
[GRAPHIC] [TIFF OMITTED] TR30AU96.002
[[Page 306]]
[GRAPHIC] [TIFF OMITTED] TR30AU96.003
[[Page 307]]
[GRAPHIC] [TIFF OMITTED] TR30AU96.004
[[Page 308]]
[GRAPHIC] [TIFF OMITTED] TR30AU96.005
[[Page 309]]
[GRAPHIC] [TIFF OMITTED] TR30AU96.006
[[Page 310]]
[GRAPHIC] [TIFF OMITTED] TR30AU96.007
[[Page 311]]
[GRAPHIC] [TIFF OMITTED] TR30AU96.008
[61 FR 46122, Aug. 30, 1996; 61 FR 59832, Nov. 25, 1996]
Subpart M_Fall Protection
Authority: Section 3704 of the Contract Work Hours and Safety
Standards Act (Construction Safety Act) (40 U.S.C. 3701); Sections 4, 6
and 8 of the Occupational Safety and Health Act of 1970 (29 U.S.C. 653,
655, 657); Secretary of Labor's Order Nos. 1-90 (55 FR 9033), 6-96 (62
FR 111), 3-2000 (65 FR 50017), and 5-2007 (72 FR 31159); and 29 CFR part
1911.
Source: 59 FR 40730, Aug. 9, 1994, unless otherwise noted.
Sec. 1926.500 Scope, application, and definitions applicable to this subpart.
(a) Scope and application. (1) This subpart sets forth requirements
and criteria for fall protection in construction workplaces covered
under 29 CFR part 1926. Exception: The provisions of this subpart do not
apply when employees are making an inspection, investigation, or
assessment of workplace conditions prior to the actual start of
construction work or after all construction work has been completed.
[[Page 312]]
(2) Section 1926.501 sets forth those workplaces, conditions,
operations, and circumstances for which fall protection shall be
provided except as follows:
(i) Requirements relating to fall protection for employees working
on scaffolds are provided in subpart L of this part.
(ii) Requirements relating to fall protection for employees working
on cranes and derricks are provided in subpart CC of this part.
(iii) Fall protection requirements for employees performing steel
erection work (except for towers and tanks) are provided in subpart R of
this part.
(iv) Requirements relating to fall protection for employees working
on certain types of equipment used in tunneling operations are provided
in subpart S of this part.
(v) Requirements relating to fall protection for employees engaged
in the erection of tanks and communication and broadcast towers are
provided in Sec. 1926.105.
(vi) Requirements relating to fall protection for employees engaged
in the construction of electric transmission and distribution lines and
equipment are provided in subpart V of this part.
(vii) Requirements relating to fall protection for employees working
on stairways and ladders are provided in subpart X of this part.
(3) Section 1926.502 sets forth the requirements for the
installation, construction, and proper use of fall protection required
by part 1926, except as follows:
(i) Performance requirements for guardrail systems used on scaffolds
and performance requirements for falling object protection used on
scaffolds are provided in subpart L of this part.
(ii) Performance requirements for stairways, stairrail systems, and
handrails are provided in subpart X of this part.
(iii) Additional performance requirements for personal climbing
equipment, lineman's body belts, safety straps, and lanyards are
provided in subpart V of this part.
(iv) Section 1926.502 does not apply to the erection of tanks and
communication and broadcast towers. (Note: Section 1926.104 sets the
criteria for body belts, lanyards and lifelines used for fall protection
during tank and communication and broadcast tower erection. Paragraphs
(b),(c) and (f) of Sec. 1926.107 provide definitions for the pertinent
terms.)
(v) Criteria for steps, handholds, ladders, and grabrails/
guardrails/railings required by subpart CC are provided in subpart CC.
Sections 1926.502(a), (c) through (e), and (i) apply to activities
covered under subpart CC unless otherwise stated in subpart CC. No other
paragraphs of Sec. 1926.502 apply to subpart CC.
(4) Section 1926.503 sets forth requirements for training in the
installation and use of fall protection systems, except in relation to
steel erection activities and the use of equipment covered by subpart
CC.
(b) Definitions.
Anchorage means a secure point of attachment for lifelines, lanyards
or deceleration devices.
Body belt (safety belt) means a strap with means both for securing
it about the waist and for attaching it to a lanyard, lifeline, or
deceleration device.
Body harness means straps which may be secured about the employee in
a manner that will distribute the fall arrest forces over at least the
thighs, pelvis, waist, chest and shoulders with means for attaching it
to other components of a personal fall arrest system.
Buckle means any device for holding the body belt or body harness
closed around the employee's body.
Connector means a device which is used to couple (connect) parts of
the personal fall arrest system and positioning device systems together.
It may be an independent component of the system, such as a carabiner,
or it may be an integral component of part of the system (such as a
buckle or dee-ring sewn into a body belt or body harness, or a snap-hook
spliced or sewn to a lanyard or self-retracting lanyard).
Controlled access zone (CAZ) means an area in which certain work
(e.g., overhand bricklaying) may take place without the use of guardrail
systems, personal fall arrest systems, or safety net systems and access
to the zone is controlled.
Dangerous equipment means equipment (such as pickling or galvanizing
[[Page 313]]
tanks, degreasing units, machinery, electrical equipment, and other
units) which, as a result of form or function, may be hazardous to
employees who fall onto or into such equipment.
Deceleration device means any mechanism, such as a rope grab, rip-
stitch lanyard, specially-woven lanyard, tearing or deforming lanyards,
automatic self-retracting lifelines/lanyards, etc., which serves to
dissipate a substantial amount of energy during a fall arrest, or
otherwise limit the energy imposed on an employee during fall arrest.
Deceleration distance means the additional vertical distance a
falling employee travels, excluding lifeline elongation and free fall
distance, before stopping, from the point at which the deceleration
device begins to operate. It is measured as the distance between the
location of an employee's body belt or body harness attachment point at
the moment of activation (at the onset of fall arrest forces) of the
deceleration device during a fall, and the location of that attachment
point after the employee comes to a full stop.
Equivalent means alternative designs, materials, or methods to
protect against a hazard which the employer can demonstrate will provide
an equal or greater degree of safety for employees than the methods,
materials or designs specified in the standard.
Failure means load refusal, breakage, or separation of component
parts. Load refusal is the point where the ultimate strength is
exceeded.
Free fall means the act of falling before a personal fall arrest
system begins to apply force to arrest the fall.
Free fall distance means the vertical displacement of the fall
arrest attachment point on the employee's body belt or body harness
between onset of the fall and just before the system begins to apply
force to arrest the fall. This distance excludes deceleration distance,
and lifeline/lanyard elongation, but includes any deceleration device
slide distance or self-retracting lifeline/lanyard extension before they
operate and fall arrest forces occur.
Guardrail system means a barrier erected to prevent employees from
falling to lower levels.
Hole means a gap or void 2 inches (5.1 cm) or more in its least
dimension, in a floor, roof, or other walking/working surface.
Infeasible means that it is impossible to perform the construction
work using a conventional fall protection system (i.e., guardrail
system, safety net system, or personal fall arrest system) or that it is
technologically impossible to use any one of these systems to provide
fall protection.
Lanyard means a flexible line of rope, wire rope, or strap which
generally has a connector at each end for connecting the body belt or
body harness to a deceleration device, lifeline, or anchorage.
Leading edge means the edge of a floor, roof, or formwork for a
floor or other walking/working surface (such as the deck) which changes
location as additional floor, roof, decking, or formwork sections are
placed, formed, or constructed. A leading edge is considered to be an
``unprotected side and edge'' during periods when it is not actively and
continuously under construction.
Lifeline means a component consisting of a flexible line for
connection to an anchorage at one end to hang vertically (vertical
lifeline), or for connection to anchorages at both ends to stretch
horizontally (horizontal lifeline), and which serves as a means for
connecting other components of a personal fall arrest system to the
anchorage.
Low-slope roof means a roof having a slope less than or equal to 4
in 12 (vertical to horizontal).
Lower levels means those areas or surfaces to which an employee can
fall. Such areas or surfaces include, but are not limited to, ground
levels, floors, platforms, ramps, runways, excavations, pits, tanks,
material, water, equipment, structures, or portions thereof.
Mechanical equipment means all motor or human propelled wheeled
equipment used for roofing work, except wheelbarrows and mopcarts.
Opening means a gap or void 30 inches (76 cm) or more high and 18
inches (48 cm) or more wide, in a wall or partition, through which
employees can fall to a lower level.
Overhand bricklaying and related work means the process of laying
bricks and
[[Page 314]]
masonry units such that the surface of the wall to be jointed is on the
opposite side of the wall from the mason, requiring the mason to lean
over the wall to complete the work. Related work includes mason tending
and electrical installation incorporated into the brick wall during the
overhand bricklaying process.
Personal fall arrest system means a system used to arrest an
employee in a fall from a working level. It consists of an anchorage,
connectors, a body belt or body harness and may include a lanyard,
deceleration device, lifeline, or suitable combinations of these. As of
January 1, 1998, the use of a body belt for fall arrest is prohibited.
Positioning device system means a body belt or body harness system
rigged to allow an employee to be supported on an elevated vertical
surface, such as a wall, and work with both hands free while leaning.
Rope grab means a deceleration device which travels on a lifeline
and automatically, by friction, engages the lifeline and locks so as to
arrest the fall of an employee. A rope grab usually employs the
principle of inertial locking, cam/level locking, or both.
Roof means the exterior surface on the top of a building. This does
not include floors or formwork which, because a building has not been
completed, temporarily become the top surface of a building.
Roofing work means the hoisting, storage, application, and removal
of roofing materials and equipment, including related insulation, sheet
metal, and vapor barrier work, but not including the construction of the
roof deck.
Safety-monitoring system means a safety system in which a competent
person is responsible for recognizing and warning employees of fall
hazards.
Self-retracting lifeline/lanyard means a deceleration device
containing a drum-wound line which can be slowly extracted from, or
retracted onto, the drum under slight tension during normal employee
movement, and which, after onset of a fall, automatically locks the drum
and arrests the fall.
Snaphook means a connector comprised of a hook-shaped member with a
normally closed keeper, or similar arrangement, which may be opened to
permit the hook to receive an object and, when released, automatically
closes to retain the object. Snaphooks are generally one of two types:
(1) The locking type with a self-closing, self-locking keeper which
remains closed and locked until unlocked and pressed open for connection
or disconnection; or
(2) The non-locking type with a self-closing keeper which remains
closed until pressed open for connection or disconnection. As of January
1, 1998, the use of a non-locking snaphook as part of personal fall
arrest systems and positioning device systems is prohibited.
Steep roof means a roof having a slope greater than 4 in 12
(vertical to horizontal).
Toeboard means a low protective barrier that will prevent the fall
of materials and equipment to lower levels and provide protection from
falls for personnel.
Unprotected sides and edges means any side or edge (except at
entrances to points of access) of a walking/working surface, e.g.,
floor, roof, ramp, or runway where there is no wall or guardrail system
at least 39 inches (1.0 m) high.
Walking/working surface means any surface, whether horizontal or
vertical on which an employee walks or works, including, but not limited
to, floors, roofs, ramps, bridges, runways, formwork and concrete
reinforcing steel but not including ladders, vehicles, or trailers, on
which employees must be located in order to perform their job duties.
Warning line system means a barrier erected on a roof to warn
employees that they are approaching an unprotected roof side or edge,
and which designates an area in which roofing work may take place
without the use of guardrail, body belt, or safety net systems to
protect employees in the area.
Work area means that portion of a walking/working surface where job
duties are being performed.
[59 FR 40730, Aug. 9, 1994, as amended at 60 FR 39255, Aug. 2, 1995; 66
FR 5265, Jan. 18, 2001; 75 FR 48133, Aug. 9, 2010]
Sec. 1926.501 Duty to have fall protection.
(a) General. (1) This section sets forth requirements for employers
to provide
[[Page 315]]
fall protection systems. All fall protection required by this section
shall conform to the criteria set forth in Sec. 1926.502 of this
subpart.
(2) The employer shall determine if the walking/working surfaces on
which its employees are to work have the strength and structural
integrity to support employees safely. Employees shall be allowed to
work on those surfaces only when the surfaces have the requisite
strength and structural integrity.
(b)(1) Unprotected sides and edges. Each employee on a walking/
working surface (horizontal and vertical surface) with an unprotected
side or edge which is 6 feet (1.8 m) or more above a lower level shall
be protected from falling by the use of guardrail systems, safety net
systems, or personal fall arrest systems.
(2) Leading edges. (i) Each employee who is constructing a leading
edge 6 feet (1.8 m) or more above lower levels shall be protected from
falling by guardrail systems, safety net systems, or personal fall
arrest systems. Exception: When the employer can demonstrate that it is
infeasible or creates a greater hazard to use these systems, the
employer shall develop and implement a fall protection plan which meets
the requirements of paragraph (k) of Sec. 1926.502.
Note: There is a presumption that it is feasible and will not create
a greater hazard to implement at least one of the above-listed fall
protection systems. Accordingly, the employer has the burden of
establishing that it is appropriate to implement a fall protection plan
which complies with Sec. 1926.502(k) for a particular workplace
situation, in lieu of implementing any of those systems.
(ii) Each employee on a walking/working surface 6 feet (1.8 m) or
more above a lower level where leading edges are under construction, but
who is not engaged in the leading edge work, shall be protected from
falling by a guardrail system, safety net system, or personal fall
arrest system. If a guardrail system is chosen to provide the fall
protection, and a controlled access zone has already been established
for leading edge work, the control line may be used in lieu of a
guardrail along the edge that parallels the leading edge.
(3) Hoist areas. Each employee in a hoist area shall be protected
from falling 6 feet (1.8 m) or more to lower levels by guardrail systems
or personal fall arrest systems. If guardrail systems, [or chain, gate,
or guardrail] or portions thereof, are removed to facilitate the
hoisting operation (e.g., during landing of materials), and an employee
must lean through the access opening or out over the edge of the access
opening (to receive or guide equipment and materials, for example), that
employee shall be protected from fall hazards by a personal fall arrest
system.
(4) Holes. (i) Each employee on walking/working surfaces shall be
protected from falling through holes (including skylights) more than 6
feet (1.8 m) above lower levels, by personal fall arrest systems,
covers, or guardrail systems erected around such holes.
(ii) Each employee on a walking/working surface shall be protected
from tripping in or stepping into or through holes (including skylights)
by covers.
(iii) Each employee on a walking/working surface shall be protected
from objects falling through holes (including skylights) by covers.
(5) Formwork and reinforcing steel. Each employee on the face of
formwork or reinforcing steel shall be protected from falling 6 feet
(1.8 m) or more to lower levels by personal fall arrest systems, safety
net systems, or positioning device systems.
(6) Ramps, runways, and other walkways. Each employee on ramps,
runways, and other walkways shall be protected from falling 6 feet (1.8
m) or more to lower levels by guardrail systems.
(7) Excavations. (i) Each employee at the edge of an excavation 6
feet (1.8 m) or more in depth shall be protected from falling by
guardrail systems, fences, or barricades when the excavations are not
readily seen because of plant growth or other visual barrier;
(ii) Each employee at the edge of a well, pit, shaft, and similar
excavation 6 feet (1.8 m) or more in depth shall be protected from
falling by guardrail systems, fences, barricades, or covers.
(8) Dangerous equipment. (i) Each employee less than 6 feet (1.8 m)
above
[[Page 316]]
dangerous equipment shall be protected from falling into or onto the
dangerous equipment by guardrail systems or by equipment guards.
(ii) Each employee 6 feet (1.8 m) or more above dangerous equipment
shall be protected from fall hazards by guardrail systems, personal fall
arrest systems, or safety net systems.
(9) Overhand bricklaying and related work. (i) Except as otherwise
provided in paragraph (b) of this section, each employee performing
overhand bricklaying and related work 6 feet (1.8 m) or more above lower
levels, shall be protected from falling by guardrail systems, safety net
systems, personal fall arrest systems, or shall work in a controlled
access zone.
(ii) Each employee reaching more than 10 inches (25 cm) below the
level of the walking/working surface on which they are working, shall be
protected from falling by a guardrail system, safety net system, or
personal fall arrest system.
Note: Bricklaying operations performed on scaffolds are regulated by
subpart L--Scaffolds of this part.
(10) Roofing work on Low-slope roofs. Except as otherwise provided
in paragraph (b) of this section, each employee engaged in roofing
activities on low-slope roofs, with unprotected sides and edges 6 feet
(1.8 m) or more above lower levels shall be protected from falling by
guardrail systems, safety net systems, personal fall arrest systems, or
a combination of warning line system and guardrail system, warning line
system and safety net system, or warning line system and personal fall
arrest system, or warning line system and safety monitoring system. Or,
on roofs 50-feet (15.25 m) or less in width (see appendix A to subpart M
of this part), the use of a safety monitoring system alone [i.e. without
the warning line system] is permitted.
(11) Steep roofs. Each employee on a steep roof with unprotected
sides and edges 6 feet (1.8 m) or more above lower levels shall be
protected from falling by guardrail systems with toeboards, safety net
systems, or personal fall arrest systems.
(12) Precast concrete erection. Each employee engaged in the
erection of precast concrete members (including, but not limited to the
erection of wall panels, columns, beams, and floor and roof ``tees'')
and related operations such as grouting of precast concrete members, who
is 6 feet (1.8 m) or more above lower levels shall be protected from
falling by guardrail systems, safety net systems, or personal fall
arrest systems, unless another provision in paragraph (b) of this
section provides for an alternative fall protection measure. Exception:
When the employer can demonstrate that it is infeasible or creates a
greater hazard to use these systems, the employer shall develop and
implement a fall protection plan which meets the requirements of
paragraph (k) of Sec. 1926.502.
Note: There is a presumption that it is feasible and will not create
a greater hazard to implement at least one of the above-listed fall
protection systems. Accordingly, the employer has the burden of
establishing that it is appropriate to implement a fall protection plan
which complies with Sec. 1926.502(k) for a particular workplace
situation, in lieu of implementing any of those systems.
(13) Residential construction. Each employee engaged in residential
construction activities 6 feet (1.8 m) or more above lower levels shall
be protected by guardrail systems, safety net system, or personal fall
arrest system unless another provision in paragraph (b) of this section
provides for an alternative fall protection measure. Exception: When the
employer can demonstrate that it is infeasible or creates a greater
hazard to use these systems, the employer shall develop and implement a
fall protection plan which meets the requirements of paragraph (k) of
Sec. 1926.502.
Note: There is a presumption that it is feasible and will not create
a greater hazard to implement at least one of the above-listed fall
protection systems. Accordingly, the employer has the burden of
establishing that it is appropriate to implement a fall protection plan
which complies with Sec. 1926.502(k) for a particular workplace
situation, in lieu of implementing any of those systems.
(14) Wall openings. Each employee working on, at, above, or near
wall openings (including those with chutes attached) where the outside
bottom edge of the wall opening is 6 feet (1.8 m) or more above lower
levels and the inside bottom edge of the wall opening is less than 39
inches (1.0 m) above the
[[Page 317]]
walking/working surface, shall be protected from falling by the use of a
guardrail system, a safety net system, or a personal fall arrest system.
(15) Walking/working surfaces not otherwise addressed. Except as
provided in Sec. 1926.500(a)(2) or in Sec. 1926.501 (b)(1) through
(b)(14), each employee on a walking/working surface 6 feet (1.8 m) or
more above lower levels shall be protected from falling by a guardrail
system, safety net system, or personal fall arrest system.
(c) Protection from falling objects. When an employee is exposed to
falling objects, the employer shall have each employee wear a hard hat
and shall implement one of the following measures:
(1) Erect toeboards, screens, or guardrail systems to prevent
objects from falling from higher levels; or,
(2) Erect a canopy structure and keep potential fall objects far
enough from the edge of the higher level so that those objects would not
go over the edge if they were accidentally displaced; or,
(3) Barricade the area to which objects could fall, prohibit
employees from entering the barricaded area, and keep objects that may
fall far enough away from the edge of a higher level so that those
objects would not go over the edge if they were accidentally displaced.
Sec. 1926.502 Fall protection systems criteria and practices.
(a) General. (1) Fall protection systems required by this part shall
comply with the applicable provisions of this section.
(2) Employers shall provide and install all fall protection systems
required by this subpart for an employee, and shall comply with all
other pertinent requirements of this subpart before that employee begins
the work that necessitates the fall protection.
(b) Guardrail systems. Guardrail systems and their use shall comply
with the following provisions:
(1) Top edge height of top rails, or equivalent guardrail system
members, shall be 42 inches (1.1 m) plus or minus 3 inches (8 cm) above
the walking/working level. When conditions warrant, the height of the
top edge may exceed the 45-inch height, provided the guardrail system
meets all other criteria of this paragraph.
Note: When employees are using stilts, the top edge height of the
top rail, or equivalent member, shall be increased an amount equal to
the height of the stilts.
(2) Midrails, screens, mesh, intermediate vertical members, or
equivalent intermediate structural members shall be installed between
the top edge of the guardrail system and the walking/working surface
when there is no wall or parapet wall at least 21 inches (53 cm) high.
(i) Midrails, when used, shall be installed at a height midway
between the top edge of the guardrail system and the walking/working
level.
(ii) Screens and mesh, when used, shall extend from the top rail to
the walking/working level and along the entire opening between top rail
supports.
(iii) Intermediate members (such as balusters), when used between
posts, shall be not more than 19 inches (48 cm) apart.
(iv) Other structural members (such as additional midrails and
architectural panels) shall be installed such that there are no openings
in the guardrail system that are more than 19 inches (.5 m) wide.
(3) Guardrail systems shall be capable of withstanding, without
failure, a force of at least 200 pounds (890 N) applied within 2 inches
(5.1 cm) of the top edge, in any outward or downward direction, at any
point along the top edge.
(4) When the 200 pound (890 N) test load specified in paragraph
(b)(3) of this section is applied in a downward direction, the top edge
of the guardrail shall not deflect to a height less than 39 inches (1.0
m) above the walking/working level. Guardrail system components selected
and constructed in accordance with the appendix B to subpart M of this
part will be deemed to meet this requirement.
(5) Midrails, screens, mesh, intermediate vertical members, solid
panels, and equivalent structural members shall be capable of
withstanding, without failure, a force of at least 150 pounds (666 N)
applied in any downward or outward direction at any point along the
midrail or other member.
[[Page 318]]
(6) Guardrail systems shall be so surfaced as to prevent injury to
an employee from punctures or lacerations, and to prevent snagging of
clothing.
(7) The ends of all top rails and midrails shall not overhang the
terminal posts, except where such overhang does not constitute a
projection hazard.
(8) Steel banding and plastic banding shall not be used as top rails
or midrails.
(9) Top rails and midrails shall be at least one-quarter inch (0.6
cm) nominal diameter or thickness to prevent cuts and lacerations. If
wire rope is used for top rails, it shall be flagged at not more than 6-
foot (1.8 m) intervals with high-visibility material.
(10) When guardrail systems are used at hoisting areas, a chain,
gate or removable guardrail section shall be placed across the access
opening between guardrail sections when hoisting operations are not
taking place.
(11) When guardrail systems are used at holes, they shall be erected
on all unprotected sides or edges of the hole.
(12) When guardrail systems are used around holes used for the
passage of materials, the hole shall have not more than two sides
provided with removable guardrail sections to allow the passage of
materials. When the hole is not in use, it shall be closed over with a
cover, or a guardrail system shall be provided along all unprotected
sides or edges.
(13) When guardrail systems are used around holes which are used as
points of access (such as ladderways), they shall be provided with a
gate, or be so offset that a person cannot walk directly into the hole.
(14) Guardrail systems used on ramps and runways shall be erected
along each unprotected side or edge.
(15) Manila, plastic or synthetic rope being used for top rails or
midrails shall be inspected as frequently as necessary to ensure that it
continues to meet the strength requirements of paragraph (b)(3) of this
section.
(c) Safety net systems. Safety net systems and their use shall
comply with the following provisions:
(1) Safety nets shall be installed as close as practicable under the
walking/working surface on which employees are working, but in no case
more than 30 feet (9.1 m) below such level. When nets are used on
bridges, the potential fall area from the walking/working surface to the
net shall be unobstructed.
(2) Safety nets shall extend outward from the outermost projection
of the work surface as follows:
------------------------------------------------------------------------
Minimum required horizontal
Vertical distance from working level to distance of outer edge of
horizontal plane of net net from the edge of the
working surface
------------------------------------------------------------------------
Up to 5 feet.............................. 8 feet.
More than 5 feet up to 10 feet............ 10 feet.
More than 10 feet......................... 13 feet.
------------------------------------------------------------------------
(3) Safety nets shall be installed with sufficient clearance under
them to prevent contact with the surface or structures below when
subjected to an impact force equal to the drop test specified in
paragraph (c)(4) of this section.
(4) Safety nets and their installations shall be capable of
absorbing an impact force equal to that produced by the drop test
specified in paragraph (c)(4)(i) of this section.
(i) Except as provided in paragraph (c)(4)(ii) of this section,
safety nets and safety net installations shall be drop-tested at the
jobsite after initial installation and before being used as a fall
protection system, whenever relocated, after major repair, and at 6-
month intervals if left in one place. The drop-test shall consist of a
400 pound (180 kg) bag of sand 30 2 inches (76
5 cm) in diameter dropped into the net from the
highest walking/working surface at which employees are exposed to fall
hazards, but not from less than 42 inches (1.1 m) above that level.
(ii) When the employer can demonstrate that it is unreasonable to
perform the drop-test required by paragraph (c)(4)(i) of this section,
the employer (or a designated competent person) shall certify that the
net and net installation is in compliance with the provisions of
paragraphs (c)(3) and (c)(4)(i) of this section by preparing a
certification record prior to the net being used as a fall protection
system. The certification record must include an identification of the
net and net installation for which the certification record is being
prepared; the date that it was determined that the identified net and
net installation were in compliance with paragraph (c)(3) of this
[[Page 319]]
section and the signature of the person making the determination and
certification. The most recent certification record for each net and net
installation shall be available at the jobsite for inspection.
(5) Defective nets shall not be used. Safety nets shall be inspected
at least once a week for wear, damage, and other deterioration.
Defective components shall be removed from service. Safety nets shall
also be inspected after any occurrence which could affect the integrity
of the safety net system.
(6) Materials, scrap pieces, equipment, and tools which have fallen
into the safety net shall be removed as soon as possible from the net
and at least before the next work shift.
(7) The maximum size of each safety net mesh opening shall not
exceed 36 square inches (230 cm \2\) nor be longer than 6 inches (15 cm)
on any side, and the opening, measured center-to-center of mesh ropes or
webbing, shall not be longer than 6 inches (15 cm). All mesh crossings
shall be secured to prevent enlargement of the mesh opening.
(8) Each safety net (or section of it) shall have a border rope for
webbing with a minimum breaking strength of 5,000 pounds (22.2 kN).
(9) Connections between safety net panels shall be as strong as
integral net components and shall be spaced not more than 6 inches (15
cm) apart.
(d) Personal fall arrest systems. Personal fall arrest systems and
their use shall comply with the provisions set forth below. Effective
January 1, 1998, body belts are not acceptable as part of a personal
fall arrest system. Note: The use of a body belt in a positioning device
system is acceptable and is regulated under paragraph (e) of this
section.
(1) Connectors shall be drop forged, pressed or formed steel, or
made of equivalent materials.
(2) Connectors shall have a corrosion-resistant finish, and all
surfaces and edges shall be smooth to prevent damage to interfacing
parts of the system.
(3) Dee-rings and snaphooks shall have a minimum tensile strength of
5,000 pounds (22.2 kN).
(4) Dee-rings and snaphooks shall be proof-tested to a minimum
tensile load of 3,600 pounds (16 kN) without cracking, breaking, or
taking permanent deformation.
(5) Snaphooks shall be sized to be compatible with the member to
which they are connected to prevent unintentional disengagement of the
snaphook by depression of the snaphook keeper by the connected member,
or shall be a locking type snaphook designed and used to prevent
disengagement of the snaphook by the contact of the snaphook keeper by
the connected member. Effective January 1, 1998, only locking type
snaphooks shall be used.
(6) Unless the snaphook is a locking type and designed for the
following connections, snaphooks shall not be engaged:
(i) directly to webbing, rope or wire rope;
(ii) to each other;
(iii) to a Dee-ring to which another snaphook or other connector is
attached;
(iv) to a horizontal lifeline; or
(v) to any object which is incompatibly shaped or dimensioned in
relation to the snaphook such that unintentional disengagement could
occur by the connected object being able to depress the snaphook keeper
and release itself.
(7) On suspended scaffolds or similar work platforms with horizontal
lifelines which may become vertical lifelines, the devices used to
connect to a horizontal lifeline shall be capable of locking in both
directions on the lifeline.
(8) Horizontal lifelines shall be designed, installed, and used,
under the supervision of a qualified person, as part of a complete
personal fall arrest system, which maintains a safety factor of at least
two.
(9) Lanyards and vertical lifelines shall have a minimum breaking
strength of 5,000 pounds (22.2 kN).
(10) (i) Except as provided in paragraph (d)(10)(ii) of this
section, when vertical lifelines are used, each employee shall be
attached to a separate lifeline.
(ii) During the construction of elevator shafts, two employees may
be attached to the same lifeline in the hoistway, provided both
employees are working atop a false car that is equipped with guardrails;
the strength
[[Page 320]]
of the lifeline is 10,000 pounds [5,000 pounds per employee attached]
(44.4 kN); and all other criteria specified in this paragraph for
lifelines have been met.
(11) Lifelines shall be protected against being cut or abraded.
(12) Self-retracting lifelines and lanyards which automatically
limit free fall distance to 2 feet (0.61 m) or less shall be capable of
sustaining a minimum tensile load of 3,000 pounds (13.3 kN) applied to
the device with the lifeline or lanyard in the fully extended position.
(13) Self-retracting lifelines and lanyards which do not limit free
fall distance to 2 feet (0.61 m) or less, ripstitch lanyards, and
tearing and deforming lanyards shall be capable of sustaining a minimum
tensile load of 5,000 pounds (22.2 kN) applied to the device with the
lifeline or lanyard in the fully extended position.
(14) Ropes and straps (webbing) used in lanyards, lifelines, and
strength components of body belts and body harnesses shall be made from
synthetic fibers.
(15) Anchorages used for attachment of personal fall arrest
equipment shall be independent of any anchorage being used to support or
suspend platforms and capable of supporting at least 5,000 pounds (22.2
kN) per employee attached, or shall be designed, installed, and used as
follows:
(i) as part of a complete personal fall arrest system which
maintains a safety factor of at least two; and
(ii) under the supervision of a qualified person.
(16) Personal fall arrest systems, when stopping a fall, shall:
(i) limit maximum arresting force on an employee to 900 pounds (4
kN) when used with a body belt;
(ii) limit maximum arresting force on an employee to 1,800 pounds (8
kN) when used with a body harness;
(iii) be rigged such that an employee can neither free fall more
than 6 feet (1.8 m), nor contact any lower level;
(iv) bring an employee to a complete stop and limit maximum
deceleration distance an employee travels to 3.5 feet (1.07 m); and,
(v) have sufficient strength to withstand twice the potential impact
energy of an employee free falling a distance of 6 feet (1.8 m), or the
free fall distance permitted by the system, whichever is less.
Note: If the personal fall arrest system meets the criteria and
protocols contained in appendix C to subpart M, and if the system is
being used by an employee having a combined person and tool weight of
less than 310 pounds (140 kg), the system will be considered to be in
compliance with the provisions of paragraph (d)(16) of this section. If
the system is used by an employee having a combined tool and body weight
of 310 pounds (140 kg) or more, then the employer must appropriately
modify the criteria and protocols of the appendix to provide proper
protection for such heavier weights, or the system will not be deemed to
be in compliance with the requirements of paragraph (d)(16) of this
section.
(17) The attachment point of the body belt shall be located in the
center of the wearer's back. The attachment point of the body harness
shall be located in the center of the wearer's back near shoulder level,
or above the wearer's head.
(18) Body belts, harnesses, and components shall be used only for
employee protection (as part of a personal fall arrest system or
positioning device system) and not to hoist materials.
(19) Personal fall arrest systems and components subjected to impact
loading shall be immediately removed from service and shall not be used
again for employee protection until inspected and determined by a
competent person to be undamaged and suitable for reuse.
(20) The employer shall provide for prompt rescue of employees in
the event of a fall or shall assure that employees are able to rescue
themselves.
(21) Personal fall arrest systems shall be inspected prior to each
use for wear, damage and other deterioration, and defective components
shall be removed from service.
(22) Body belts shall be at least one and five-eighths (1\5/8\)
inches (4.1 cm) wide.
(23) Personal fall arrest systems shall not be attached to guardrail
systems, nor shall they be attached to hoists except as specified in
other subparts of this part.
(24) When a personal fall arrest system is used at hoist areas, it
shall be rigged to allow the movement of the
[[Page 321]]
employee only as far as the edge of the walking/working surface.
(e) Positioning device systems. Positioning device systems and their
use shall conform to the following provisions:
(1) Positioning devices shall be rigged such that an employee cannot
free fall more than 2 feet (.6 m).
(2) Positioning devices shall be secured to an anchorage capable of
supporting at least twice the potential impact load of an employee's
fall or 3,000 pounds (13.3 kN), whichever is greater.
(3) Connectors shall be drop forged, pressed or formed steel, or
made of equivalent materials.
(4) Connectors shall have a corrosion-resistant finish, and all
surfaces and edges shall be smooth to prevent damage to interfacing
parts of this system.
(5) Connecting assemblies shall have a minimum tensile strength of
5,000 pounds (22.2 kN)
(6) Dee-rings and snaphooks shall be proof-tested to a minimum
tensile load of 3,600 pounds (16 kN) without cracking, breaking, or
taking permanent deformation.
(7) Snaphooks shall be sized to be compatible with the member to
which they are connected to prevent unintentional disengagement of the
snaphook by depression of the snaphook keeper by the connected member,
or shall be a locking type snaphook designed and used to prevent
disengagement of the snaphook by the contact of the snaphook keeper by
the connected member. As of January 1, 1998, only locking type snaphooks
shall be used.
(8) Unless the snaphook is a locking type and designed for the
following connections, snaphooks shall not be engaged:
(i) directly to webbing, rope or wire rope;
(ii) to each other;
(iii) to a Dee-ring to which another snaphook or other connector is
attached;
(iv) to a horizontal lifeline; or
(v) to any object which is incompatibly shaped or dimensioned in
relation to the snaphook such that unintentional disengagement could
occur by the connected object being able to depress the snaphook keeper
and release itself.
(9) Positioning device systems shall be inspected prior to each use
for wear, damage, and other deterioration, and defective components
shall be removed from service.
(10) Body belts, harnesses, and components shall be used only for
employee protection (as part of a personal fall arrest system or
positioning device system) and not to hoist materials.
(f) Warning line systems. Warning line systems [See Sec.
1926.501(b)(10)] and their use shall comply with the following
provisions:
(1) The warning line shall be erected around all sides of the roof
work area.
(i) When mechanical equipment is not being used, the warning line
shall be erected not less than 6 feet (1.8 m) from the roof edge.
(ii) When mechanical equipment is being used, the warning line shall
be erected not less than 6 feet (1.8 m) from the roof edge which is
parallel to the direction of mechanical equipment operation, and not
less than 10 feet (3.1 m) from the roof edge which is perpendicular to
the direction of mechanical equipment operation.
(iii) Points of access, materials handling areas, storage areas, and
hoisting areas shall be connected to the work area by an access path
formed by two warning lines.
(iv) When the path to a point of access is not in use, a rope, wire,
chain, or other barricade, equivalent in strength and height to the
warning line, shall be placed across the path at the point where the
path intersects the warning line erected around the work area, or the
path shall be offset such that a person cannot walk directly into the
work area.
(2) Warning lines shall consist of ropes, wires, or chains, and
supporting stanchions erected as follows:
(i) The rope, wire, or chain shall be flagged at not more than 6-
foot (1.8 m) intervals with high-visibility material;
(ii) The rope, wire, or chain shall be rigged and supported in such
a way that its lowest point (including sag) is no less than 34 inches
(.9 m) from the walking/working surface and its highest point is no more
than 39 inches (1.0 m) from the walking/working surface;
[[Page 322]]
(iii) After being erected, with the rope, wire, or chain attached,
stanchions shall be capable of resisting, without tipping over, a force
of at least 16 pounds (71 N) applied horizontally against the stanchion,
30 inches (.8 m) above the walking/working surface, perpendicular to the
warning line, and in the direction of the floor, roof, or platform edge;
(iv) The rope, wire, or chain shall have a minimum tensile strength
of 500 pounds (2.22 kN), and after being attached to the stanchions,
shall be capable of supporting, without breaking, the loads applied to
the stanchions as prescribed in paragraph (f)(2)(iii) of this section;
and
(v) The line shall be attached at each stanchion in such a way that
pulling on one section of the line between stanchions will not result in
slack being taken up in adjacent sections before the stanchion tips
over.
(3) No employee shall be allowed in the area between a roof edge and
a warning line unless the employee is performing roofing work in that
area.
(4) Mechanical equipment on roofs shall be used or stored only in
areas where employees are protected by a warning line system, guardrail
system, or personal fall arrest system.
(g) Controlled access zones. Controlled access zones [See Sec.
1926.501(b)(9) and Sec. 1926.502(k)] and their use shall conform to the
following provisions.
(1) When used to control access to areas where leading edge and
other operations are taking place the controlled access zone shall be
defined by a control line or by any other means that restricts access.
(i) When control lines are used, they shall be erected not less than
6 feet (1.8 m) nor more than 25 feet (7.7 m) from the unprotected or
leading edge, except when erecting precast concrete members.
(ii) When erecting precast concrete members, the control line shall
be erected not less than 6 feet (1.8 m) nor more than 60 feet (18 m) or
half the length of the member being erected, whichever is less, from the
leading edge.
(iii) The control line shall extend along the entire length of the
unprotected or leading edge and shall be approximately parallel to the
unprotected or leading edge.
(iv) The control line shall be connected on each side to a guardrail
system or wall.
(2) When used to control access to areas where overhand bricklaying
and related work are taking place:
(i) The controlled access zone shall be defined by a control line
erected not less than 10 feet (3.1 m) nor more than 15 feet (4.5 m) from
the working edge.
(ii) The control line shall extend for a distance sufficient for the
controlled access zone to enclose all employees performing overhand
bricklaying and related work at the working edge and shall be
approximately parallel to the working edge.
(iii) Additional control lines shall be erected at each end to
enclose the controlled access zone.
(iv) Only employees engaged in overhand bricklaying or related work
shall be permitted in the controlled access zone.
(3) Control lines shall consist of ropes, wires, tapes, or
equivalent materials, and supporting stanchions as follows:
(i) Each line shall be flagged or otherwise clearly marked at not
more than 6-foot (1.8 m) intervals with high-visibility material.
(ii) Each line shall be rigged and supported in such a way that its
lowest point (including sag) is not less than 39 inches (1 m) from the
walking/working surface and its highest point is not more than 45 inches
(1.3 m) [50 inches (1.3 m) when overhand bricklaying operations are
being performed] from the walking/working surface.
(iii) Each line shall have a minimum breaking strength of 200 pounds
(.88 kN).
(4) On floors and roofs where guardrail systems are not in place
prior to the beginning of overhand bricklaying operations, controlled
access zones shall be enlarged, as necessary, to enclose all points of
access, material handling areas, and storage areas.
(5) On floors and roofs where guardrail systems are in place, but
need to be removed to allow overhand bricklaying work or leading edge
work to take place, only that portion of the
[[Page 323]]
guardrail necessary to accomplish that day's work shall be removed.
(h) Safety monitoring systems. Safety monitoring systems [See
Sec. Sec. 1926.501(b)(10) and 1926.502(k)] and their use shall comply
with the following provisions:
(1) The employer shall designate a competent person to monitor the
safety of other employees and the employer shall ensure that the safety
monitor complies with the following requirements:
(i) The safety monitor shall be competent to recognize fall hazards;
(ii) The safety monitor shall warn the employee when it appears that
the employee is unaware of a fall hazard or is acting in an unsafe
manner;
(iii) The safety monitor shall be on the same walking/working
surface and within visual sighting distance of the employee being
monitored;
(iv) The safety monitor shall be close enough to communicate orally
with the employee; and
(v) The safety monitor shall not have other responsibilities which
could take the monitor's attention from the monitoring function.
(2) Mechanical equipment shall not be used or stored in areas where
safety monitoring systems are being used to monitor employees engaged in
roofing operations on low-slope roofs.
(3) No employee, other than an employee engaged in roofing work [on
low-sloped roofs] or an employee covered by a fall protection plan,
shall be allowed in an area where an employee is being protected by a
safety monitoring system.
(4) Each employee working in a controlled access zone shall be
directed to comply promptly with fall hazard warnings from safety
monitors.
(i) Covers. Covers for holes in floors, roofs, and other walking/
working surfaces shall meet the following requirements:
(1) Covers located in roadways and vehicular aisles shall be capable
of supporting, without failure, at least twice the maximum axle load of
the largest vehicle expected to cross over the cover.
(2) All other covers shall be capable of supporting, without
failure, at least twice the weight of employees, equipment, and
materials that may be imposed on the cover at any one time.
(3) All covers shall be secured when installed so as to prevent
accidental displacement by the wind, equipment, or employees.
(4) All covers shall be color coded or they shall be marked with the
word ``HOLE'' or ``COVER'' to provide warning of the hazard.
Note: This provision does not apply to cast iron manhole covers or
steel grates used on streets or roadways.
(j) Protection from falling objects. Falling object protection shall
comply with the following provisions:
(1) Toeboards, when used as falling object protection, shall be
erected along the edge of the overhead walking/working surface for a
distance sufficient to protect employees below.
(2) Toeboards shall be capable of withstanding, without failure, a
force of at least 50 pounds (222 N) applied in any downward or outward
direction at any point along the toeboard.
(3) Toeboards shall be a minimum of 3\1/2\ inches (9 cm) in vertical
height from their top edge to the level of the walking/working surface.
They shall have not more than \1/4\ inch (0.6 cm) clearance above the
walking/working surface. They shall be solid or have openings not over 1
inch (2.5 cm) in greatest dimension.
(4) Where tools, equipment, or materials are piled higher than the
top edge of a toeboard, paneling or screening shall be erected from the
walking/working surface or toeboard to the top of a guardrail system's
top rail or midrail, for a distance sufficient to protect employees
below.
(5) Guardrail systems, when used as falling object protection, shall
have all openings small enough to prevent passage of potential falling
objects.
(6) During the performance of overhand bricklaying and related work:
(i) No materials or equipment except masonry and mortar shall be
stored within 4 feet (1.2 m) of the working edge.
(ii) Excess mortar, broken or scattered masonry units, and all other
materials and debris shall be kept clear from the work area by removal
at regular intervals.
(7) During the performance of roofing work:
[[Page 324]]
(i) Materials and equipment shall not be stored within 6 feet (1.8
m) of a roof edge unless guardrails are erected at the edge.
(ii) Materials which are piled, grouped, or stacked near a roof edge
shall be stable and self-supporting.
(8) Canopies, when used as falling object protection, shall be
strong enough to prevent collapse and to prevent penetration by any
objects which may fall onto the canopy.
(k) Fall protection plan. This option is available only to employees
engaged in leading edge work, precast concrete erection work, or
residential construction work (See Sec. 1926.501(b)(2), (b)(12), and
(b)(13)) who can demonstrate that it is infeasible or it creates a
greater hazard to use conventional fall protection equipment. The fall
protection plan must conform to the following provisions.
(1) The fall protection plan shall be prepared by a qualified person
and developed specifically for the site where the leading edge work,
precast concrete work, or residential construction work is being
performed and the plan must be maintained up to date.
(2) Any changes to the fall protection plan shall be approved by a
qualified person.
(3) A copy of the fall protection plan with all approved changes
shall be maintained at the job site.
(4) The implementation of the fall protection plan shall be under
the supervision of a competent person.
(5) The fall protection plan shall document the reasons why the use
of conventional fall protection systems (guardrail systems, personal
fall arrest systems, or safety nets systems) are infeasible or why their
use would create a greater hazard.
(6) The fall protection plan shall include a written discussion of
other measures that will be taken to reduce or eliminate the fall hazard
for workers who cannot be provided with protection from the conventional
fall protection systems. For example, the employer shall discuss the
extent to which scaffolds, ladders, or vehicle mounted work platforms
can be used to provide a safer working surface and thereby reduce the
hazard of falling.
(7) The fall protection plan shall identify each location where
conventional fall protection methods cannot be used. These locations
shall then be classified as controlled access zones and the employer
must comply with the criteria in paragraph (g) of this section.
(8) Where no other alternative measure has been implemented, the
employer shall implement a safety monitoring system in conformance with
Sec. 1926.502(h).
(9) The fall protection plan must include a statement which provides
the name or other method of identification for each employee who is
designated to work in controlled access zones. No other employees may
enter controlled access zones.
(10) In the event an employee falls, or some other related, serious
incident occurs, (e.g., a near miss) the employer shall investigate the
circumstances of the fall or other incident to determine if the fall
protection plan needs to be changed (e.g. new practices, procedures, or
training) and shall implement those changes to prevent similar types of
falls or incidents.
Sec. 1926.503 Training requirements.
The following training provisions supplement and clarify the
requirements of Sec. 1926.21 regarding the hazards addressed in subpart
M of this part.
(a) Training Program. (1) The employer shall provide a training
program for each employee who might be exposed to fall hazards. The
program shall enable each employee to recognize the hazards of falling
and shall train each employee in the procedures to be followed in order
to minimize these hazards.
(2) The employer shall assure that each employee has been trained,
as necessary, by a competent person qualified in the following areas:
(i) The nature of fall hazards in the work area;
(ii) The correct procedures for erecting, maintaining,
disassembling, and inspecting the fall protection systems to be used;
(iii) The use and operation of guardrail systems, personal fall
arrest systems, safety net systems, warning line systems, safety
monitoring systems,
[[Page 325]]
controlled access zones, and other protection to be used;
(iv) The role of each employee in the safety monitoring system when
this system is used;
(v) The limitations on the use of mechanical equipment during the
performance of roofing work on low-sloped roofs;
(vi) The correct procedures for the handling and storage of
equipment and materials and the erection of overhead protection; and
(vii) The role of employees in fall protection plans;
(viii) The standards contained in this subpart.
(b) Certification of training. (1) The employer shall verify
compliance with paragraph (a) of this section by preparing a written
certification record. The written certification record shall contain the
name or other identity of the employee trained, the date(s) of the
training, and the signature of the person who conducted the training or
the signature of the employer. If the employer relies on training
conducted by another employer or completed prior to the effective date
of this section, the certification record shall indicate the date the
employer determined the prior training was adequate rather than the date
of actual training.
(2) The latest training certification shall be maintained.
(c) Retraining. When the employer has reason to believe that any
affected employee who has already been trained does not have the
understanding and skill required by paragraph (a) of this section, the
employer shall retrain each such employee. Circumstances where
retraining is required include, but are not limited to, situations
where:
(1) Changes in the workplace render previous training obsolete; or
(2) Changes in the types of fall protection systems or equipment to
be used render previous training obsolete; or
(3) Inadequacies in an affected employee's knowledge or use of fall
protection systems or equipment indicate that the employee has not
retained the requisite understanding or skill.
Note: The following appendices to subpart M of this part serve as
non-mandatory guidelines to assist employers in complying with the
appropriate requirements of subpart M of this part.
Sec. Appendix A to Subpart M of Part 1926--Determining Roof Widths
Non-mandatory Guidelines for Complying With Sec. 1926.501(b)(10)
(1) This appendix serves as a guideline to assist employers
complying with the requirements of Sec. 1926.501(b)(10). Section
1910.501(b)(10) allows the use of a safety monitoring system alone as a
means of providing fall protection during the performance of roofing
operations on low-sloped roofs 50 feet (15.25 m) or less in width. Each
example in the appendix shows a roof plan or plans and indicates where
each roof or roof area is to be measured to determine its width. Section
views or elevation views are shown where appropriate. Some examples show
``correct'' and ``incorrect'' subdivisions of irregularly shaped roofs
divided into smaller, regularly shaped areas. In all examples, the
dimension selected to be the width of an area is the lesser of the two
primary dimensions of the area, as viewed from above. Example A shows
that on a simple rectangular roof, width is the lesser of the two
primary overall dimensions. This is also the case with roofs which are
sloped toward or away from the roof center, as shown in Example B.
(2) Many roofs are not simple rectangles. Such roofs may be broken
down into subareas as shown in Example C. The process of dividing a roof
area can produce many different configurations. Example C gives the
general rule of using dividing lines of minimum length to minimize the
size and number of the areas which are potentially less than 50 feet
(15.25 m) wide. The intent is to minimize the number of roof areas where
safety monitoring systems alone are sufficient protection.
(3) Roofs which are comprised of several separate, non-contiguous
roof areas, as in Example D, may be considered as a series of individual
roofs. Some roofs have penthouses, additional floors, courtyard
openings, or similar architectural features; Example E shows how the
rule for dividing roofs into subareas is applied to such configurations.
Irregular, non-rectangular roofs must be considered on an individual
basis, as shown in Example F.
[[Page 326]]
Example A: Rectangular Shaped Roofs
[GRAPHIC] [TIFF OMITTED] TR09AU94.000
Example B: Sloped Rectangular Shaped Roofs
[GRAPHIC] [TIFF OMITTED] TR09AU94.001
Example C: Irregularly Shaped Roofs With Rectangular Shaped Sections
Such roofs are to be divided into sub-areas by using dividing lines
of minimum length to minimize the size and number of the areas which are
potentially less than or equal to 50 feet (15.25 meters) in width, in
order to limit the size of roof areas where the safety monitoring system
alone can be used [1926.502(b)(10)]. Dotted lines are used in the
examples to show the location of dividing lines. W denotes incorrect
measurements of width.
[[Page 327]]
[GRAPHIC] [TIFF OMITTED] TR09AU94.002
[[Page 328]]
Example D: Separate, Non-Contiguous Roof Areas
[GRAPHIC] [TIFF OMITTED] TR09AU94.003
Example E: Roofs With Penthouses, Open Courtyards, Additional Floors,
etc.
Such roofs are to be divided into sub-areas by using dividing lines
of minimum length to minimize the size and number of the areas which are
potentially less than or equal to 50 feet (15.25 meters) in width, in
order to limit the size of roof areas where the safety monitoring system
alone can be used [1926.502(b)(10)]. Dotted lines are used in the
examples to show the location of dividing
[[Page 329]]
lines. W denotes incorrect measurements of width.
[GRAPHIC] [TIFF OMITTED] TR09AU94.004
[[Page 330]]
Example F: Irregular, Non-Rectangular Shaped Roofs
[GRAPHIC] [TIFF OMITTED] TR09AU94.005
Sec. Appendix B to Subpart M of Part 1926--Guardrail Systems
Non-Mandatory Guidelines for Complying with Sec. 1926.502(b)
The standard requires guardrail systems and components to be
designed and built to meet the requirements of Sec. 1926.502 (b) (3),
(4), and (5). This appendix serves as a non-mandatory guideline to
assist employers in complying with these requirements. An employer may
use these guidelines as a starting point for designing guardrail
systems. However, the guidelines do not provide all the information
necessary to build a complete system, and the employer is still
responsible for designing and assembling these components in such a way
that the completed system will meet the requirements of Sec.
1926.502(b) (3), (4), and (5). Components for which no specific
[[Page 331]]
guidelines are given in this appendix (e.g., joints, base connections,
components made with other materials, and components with other
dimensions) must also be designed and constructed in such a way that the
completed system meets the requirements of Sec. 1926.502.
(1) For wood railings: Wood components shall be minimum 1500 lb-ft/
in\2\ fiber (stress grade) construction grade lumber; the posts shall be
at least 2-inch by 4-inch (5 cmx10 cm) lumber spaced not more than 8
feet (2.4 m) apart on centers; the top rail shall be at least 2-inch by
4-inch (5 cmx10 cm) lumber, the intermediate rail shall be at least 1-
inch by 6-inch (2.5 cmx15 cm) lumber. All lumber dimensions are nominal
sizes as provided by the American Softwood Lumber Standards, dated
January 1970.
(2) For pipe railings: posts, top rails, and intermediate railings
shall be at least one and one-half inches nominal diameter (schedule 40
pipe) with posts spaced not more than 8 feet (2.4 m) apart on centers.
(3) For structural steel railings: posts, top rails, and
intermediate rails shall be at least 2-inch by 2-inch (5 cmx10 cm) by
\3/8\-inch (1.1 cm) angles, with posts spaced not more than 8 feet (2.4
m) apart on centers.
Sec. Appendix C to Subpart M of Part 1926--Personal Fall Arrest Systems
Non-Mandatory Guidelines for Complying With Sec. 1926.502(d)
I. Test methods for personal fall arrest systems and positioning
device systems--(a) General. This appendix serves as a non-mandatory
guideline to assist employers comply with the requirements in Sec.
1926.502(d). Paragraphs (b), (c), (d) and (e) of this appendix describe
test procedures which may be used to determine compliance with the
requirements in Sec. 1926.502 (d)(16). As noted in appendix D of this
subpart, the test methods listed here in appendix C can also be used to
assist employers comply with the requirements in Sec. 1926.502(e) (3)
and (4) for positioning device systems.
(b) General conditions for all tests in the appendix to Sec.
1926.502(d). (1) Lifelines, lanyards and deceleration devices should be
attached to an anchorage and connected to the body-belt or body harness
in the same manner as they would be when used to protect employees.
(2) The anchorage should be rigid, and should not have a deflection
greater than 0.04 inches (1 mm) when a force of 2,250 pounds (10 kN) is
applied.
(3) The frequency response of the load measuring instrumentation
should be 500 Hz.
(4) The test weight used in the strength and force tests should be a
rigid, metal, cylindrical or torso-shaped object with a girth of 38
inches plus or minus 4 inches (96 cm plus or minus 10 cm).
(5) The lanyard or lifeline used to create the free fall distance
should be supplied with the system, or in its absence, the least elastic
lanyard or lifeline available to be used with the system.
(6) The test weight for each test should be hoisted to the required
level and should be quickly released without having any appreciable
motion imparted to it.
(7) The system's performance should be evaluated taking into account
the range of environmental conditions for which it is designed to be
used.
(8) Following the test, the system need not be capable of further
operation.
(c) Strength test. (1) During the testing of all systems, a test
weight of 300 pounds plus or minus 5 pounds (135 kg plus or minus 2.5
kg) should be used. (See paragraph (b)(4) of this section.)
(2) The test consists of dropping the test weight once. A new unused
system should be used for each test.
(3) For lanyard systems, the lanyard length should be 6 feet plus or
minus 2 inches (1.83 m plus or minus 5 cm) as measured from the fixed
anchorage to the attachment on the body belt or body harness.
(4) For rope-grab-type deceleration systems, the length of the
lifeline above the centerline of the grabbing mechanism to the
lifeline's anchorage point should not exceed 2 feet (0.61 m).
(5) For lanyard systems, for systems with deceleration devices which
do not automatically limit free fall distance to 2 feet (0.61 m) or
less, and for systems with deceleration devices which have a connection
distance in excess of 1 foot (0.3 m) (measured between the centerline of
the lifeline and the attachment point to the body belt or harness), the
test weight should be rigged to free fall a distance of 7.5 feet (2.3 m)
from a point that is 1.5 feet (.46 m) above the anchorage point, to its
hanging location (6 feet below the anchorage). The test weight should
fall without interference, obstruction, or hitting the floor or ground
during the test. In some cases a non-elastic wire lanyard of sufficient
length may need to be added to the system (for test purposes) to create
the necessary free fall distance.
(6) For deceleration device systems with integral lifelines or
lanyards which automatically limit free fall distance to 2 feet (0.61 m)
or less, the test weight should be rigged to free fall a distance of 4
feet (1.22 m).
(7) Any weight which detaches from the belt or harness has failed
the strength test.
(d) Force test--(1) General. The test consists of dropping the
respective test weight once as specified in paragraph (d)(2)(i) or
(d)(3)(i) of this section. A new, unused system should be used for each
test.
[[Page 332]]
(2) For lanyard systems. (i) A test weight of 220 pounds plus or
minus 3 pounds (100 kg plus or minus 1.6 kg) should be used. (See
paragraph (b)(4) of this appendix).
(ii) Lanyard length should be 6 feet plus or minus two inches (1.83
m plus or minus 5 cm) as measured from the fixed anchorage to the
attachment on the body belt or body harness.
(iii) The test weight should fall free from the anchorage level to
its hanging location (a total of 6 feet (1.83 m) free fall distance)
without interference, obstruction, or hitting the floor or ground during
the test.
(3) For all other systems. (i) A test weight of 220 pounds plus or
minus 3 pounds (100 kg plus or minus 1.6 kg) should be used. (See
paragraph (b)(4) of this appendix)
(ii) The free fall distance to be used in the test should be the
maximum fall distance physically permitted by the system during normal
use conditions, up to a maximum free fall distance for the test weight
of 6 feet (1.83 m), except as follows:
(A) For deceleration systems which have a connection link or
lanyard, the test weight should free fall a distance equal to the
connection distance (measured between the centerline of the lifeline and
the attachment point to the body belt or harness).
(B) For deceleration device systems with integral lifelines or
lanyards which automatically limit free fall distance to 2 feet (0.61 m)
or less, the test weight should free fall a distance equal to that
permitted by the system in normal use. (For example, to test a system
with a self-retracting lifeline or lanyard, the test weight should be
supported and the system allowed to retract the lifeline or lanyard as
it would in normal use. The test weight would then be released and the
force and deceleration distance measured).
(4) A system fails the force test if the recorded maximum arresting
force exceeds 1,260 pounds (5.6 kN) when using a body belt, and/or
exceeds 2,520 pounds (11.2 kN) when using a body harness.
(5) The maximum elongation and deceleration distance should be
recorded during the force test.
(e) Deceleration device tests--(1) General. The device should be
evaluated or tested under the environmental conditions, (such as rain,
ice, grease, dirt, type of lifeline, etc.), for which the device is
designed.
(2) Rope-grab-type deceleration devices. (i) Devices should be moved
on a lifeline 1,000 times over the same length of line a distance of not
less than 1 foot (30.5 cm), and the mechanism should lock each time.
(ii) Unless the device is permanently marked to indicate the type(s)
of lifeline which must be used, several types (different diameters and
different materials), of lifelines should be used to test the device.
(3) Other self-activating-type deceleration devices. The locking
mechanisms of other self-activating-type deceleration devices designed
for more than one arrest should lock each of 1,000 times as they would
in normal service.
II. Additional non-mandatory guidelines for personal fall arrest
systems. The following information constitutes additional guidelines for
use in complying with requirements for a personal fall arrest system.
(a) Selection and use considerations. (1) The kind of personal fall
arrest system selected should match the particular work situation, and
any possible free fall distance should be kept to a minimum.
Consideration should be given to the particular work environment. For
example, the presence of acids, dirt, moisture, oil, grease, etc., and
their effect on the system, should be evaluated. Hot or cold
environments may also have an adverse effect on the system. Wire rope
should not be used where an electrical hazard is anticipated. As
required by the standard, the employer must plan to have means available
to promptly rescue an employee should a fall occur, since the suspended
employee may not be able to reach a work level independently.
(2) Where lanyards, connectors, and lifelines are subject to damage
by work operations such as welding, chemical cleaning, and sandblasting,
the component should be protected, or other securing systems should be
used. The employer should fully evaluate the work conditions and
environment (including seasonal weather changes) before selecting the
appropriate personal fall protection system. Once in use, the system's
effectiveness should be monitored. In some cases, a program for cleaning
and maintenance of the system may be necessary.
(b) Testing considerations. Before purchasing or putting into use a
personal fall arrest system, an employer should obtain from the supplier
information about the system based on its performance during testing so
that the employer can know if the system meets this standard. Testing
should be done using recognized test methods. This appendix contains
test methods recognized for evaluating the performance of fall arrest
systems. Not all systems may need to be individually tested; the
performance of some systems may be based on data and calculations
derived from testing of similar systems, provided that enough
information is available to demonstrate similarity of function and
design.
(c) Component compatibility considerations. Ideally, a personal fall
arrest system is designed, tested, and supplied as a complete system.
However, it is common practice for lanyards, connectors, lifelines,
deceleration devices, body belts and body harnesses to be interchanged
since some components wear
[[Page 333]]
out before others. The employer and employee should realize that not all
components are interchangeable. For instance, a lanyard should not be
connected between a body belt (or harness) and a deceleration device of
the self-retracting type since this can result in additional free fall
for which the system was not designed. Any substitution or change to a
personal fall arrest system should be fully evaluated or tested by a
competent person to determine that it meets the standard, before the
modified system is put in use.
(d) Employee training considerations. Thorough employee training in
the selection and use of personal fall arrest systems is imperative.
Employees must be trained in the safe use of the system. This should
include the following: application limits; proper anchoring and tie-off
techniques; estimation of free fall distance, including determination of
deceleration distance, and total fall distance to prevent striking a
lower level; methods of use; and inspection and storage of the system.
Careless or improper use of the equipment can result in serious injury
or death. Employers and employees should become familiar with the
material in this Appendix, as well as manufacturer's recommendations,
before a system is used. Of uppermost importance is the reduction in
strength caused by certain tie-offs (such as using knots, tying around
sharp edges, etc.) and maximum permitted free fall distance. Also, to be
stressed are the importance of inspections prior to use, the limitations
of the equipment, and unique conditions at the worksite which may be
important in determining the type of system to use.
(e) Instruction considerations. Employers should obtain
comprehensive instructions from the supplier as to the system's proper
use and application, including, where applicable:
(1) The force measured during the sample force test;
(2) The maximum elongation measured for lanyards during the force
test;
(3) The deceleration distance measured for deceleration devices
during the force test;
(4) Caution statements on critical use limitations;
(5) Application limits;
(6) Proper hook-up, anchoring and tie-off techniques, including the
proper dee-ring or other attachment point to use on the body belt and
harness for fall arrest;
(7) Proper climbing techniques;
(8) Methods of inspection, use, cleaning, and storage; and
(9) Specific lifelines which may be used. This information should be
provided to employees during training.
(f) Rescue considerations. As required by Sec. 1926.502(d)(20),
when personal fall arrest systems are used, the employer must assure
that employees can be promptly rescued or can rescue themselves should a
fall occur. The availability of rescue personnel, ladders or other
rescue equipment should be evaluated. In some situations, equipment
which allows employees to rescue themselves after the fall has been
arrested may be desirable, such as devices which have descent
capability.
(g) Inspection considerations. As required by Sec. 1926.502(d)(21),
personal fall arrest systems must be regularly inspected. Any component
with any significant defect, such as cuts, tears, abrasions, mold, or
undue stretching; alterations or additions which might affect its
efficiency; damage due to deterioration; contact with fire, acids, or
other corrosives; distorted hooks or faulty hook springs; tongues
unfitted to the shoulder of buckles; loose or damaged mountings; non-
functioning parts; or wearing or internal deterioration in the ropes
must be withdrawn from service immediately, and should be tagged or
marked as unusable, or destroyed.
(h) Tie-off considerations. (1) One of the most important aspects of
personal fall protection systems is fully planning the system before it
is put into use. Probably the most overlooked component is planning for
suitable anchorage points. Such planning should ideally be done before
the structure or building is constructed so that anchorage points can be
incorporated during construction for use later for window cleaning or
other building maintenance. If properly planned, these anchorage points
may be used during construction, as well as afterwards.
(i) Properly planned anchorages should be used if they are
available. In some cases, anchorages must be installed immediately prior
to use. In such cases, a registered professional engineer with
experience in designing fall protection systems, or another qualified
person with appropriate education and experience should design an anchor
point to be installed.
(ii) In other cases, the Agency recognizes that there will be a need
to devise an anchor point from existing structures. Examples of what
might be appropriate anchor points are steel members or I-beams if an
acceptable strap is available for the connection (do not use a lanyard
with a snaphook clipped onto itself); large eye-bolts made of an
appropriate grade steel; guardrails or railings if they have been
designed for use as an anchor point; or masonry or wood members only if
the attachment point is substantial and precautions have been taken to
assure that bolts or other connectors will not pull through. A qualified
person should be used to evaluate the suitable of these ``make shift''
anchorages with a focus on proper strength.
(2) Employers and employees should at all times be aware that the
strength of a personal fall arrest system is based on its being attached
to an anchoring system which does not reduce the strength of the system
(such
[[Page 334]]
as a properly dimensioned eye-bolt/snap-hook anchorage). Therefore, if a
means of attachment is used that will reduce the strength of the system,
that component should be replaced by a stronger one, but one that will
also maintain the appropriate maximum arrest force characteristics.
(3) Tie-off using a knot in a rope lanyard or lifeline (at any
location) can reduce the lifeline or lanyard strength by 50 percent or
more. Therefore, a stronger lanyard or lifeline should be used to
compensate for the weakening effect of the knot, or the lanyard length
should be reduced (or the tie-off location raised) to minimize free fall
distance, or the lanyard or lifeline should be replaced by one which has
an appropriately incorporated connector to eliminate the need for a
knot.
(4) Tie-off of a rope lanyard or lifeline around an ``H'' or ``I''
beam or similar support can reduce its strength as much as 70 percent
due to the cutting action of the beam edges. Therefore, use should be
made of a webbing lanyard or wire core lifeline around the beam; or the
lanyard or lifeline should be protected from the edge; or free fall
distance should be greatly minimized.
(5) Tie-off where the line passes over or around rough or sharp
surfaces reduces strength drastically. Such a tie-off should be avoided
or an alternative tie-off rigging should be used. Such alternatives may
include use of a snap-hook/dee ring connection, wire rope tie-off, an
effective padding of the surfaces, or an abrasion-resistance strap
around or over the problem surface.
(6) Horizontal lifelines may, depending on their geometry and angle
of sag, be subjected to greater loads than the impact load imposed by an
attached component. When the angle of horizontal lifeline sag is less
than 30 degrees, the impact force imparted to the lifeline by an
attached lanyard is greatly amplified. For example, with a sag angle of
15 degrees, the force amplification is about 2:1 and at 5 degrees sag,
it is about 6:1. Depending on the angle of sag, and the line's
elasticity, the strength of the horizontal lifeline and the anchorages
to which it is attached should be increased a number of times over that
of the lanyard. Extreme care should be taken in considering a horizontal
lifeline for multiple tie-offs. The reason for this is that in multiple
tie-offs to a horizontal lifeline, if one employee falls, the movement
of the falling employee and the horizontal lifeline during arrest of the
fall may cause other employees to fall also. Horizontal lifeline and
anchorage strength should be increased for each additional employee to
be tied off. For these and other reasons, the design of systems using
horizontal lifelines must only be done by qualified persons. Testing of
installed lifelines and anchors prior to use is recommended.
(7) The strength of an eye-bolt is rated along the axis of the bolt
and its strength is greatly reduced if the force is applied at an angle
to this axis (in the direction of shear). Also, care should be exercised
in selecting the proper diameter of the eye to avoid accidental
disengagement of snap-hooks not designed to be compatible for the
connection.
(8) Due to the significant reduction in the strength of the
lifeline/lanyard (in some cases, as much as a 70 percent reduction), the
sliding hitch knot (prusik) should not be used for lifeline/lanyard
connections except in emergency situations where no other available
system is practical. The ``one-and-one'' sliding hitch knot should never
be used because it is unreliable in stopping a fall. The ``two-and-
two,'' or ``three-and-three'' knot (preferable) may be used in emergency
situations; however, care should be taken to limit free fall distance to
a minimum because of reduced lifeline/lanyard strength.
(i) Vertical lifeline considerations. As required by the standard,
each employee must have a separate lifeline [except employees engaged in
constructing elevator shafts who are permitted to have two employees on
one lifeline] when the lifeline is vertical. The reason for this is that
in multiple tie-offs to a single lifeline, if one employee falls, the
movement of the lifeline during the arrest of the fall may pull other
employees' lanyards, causing them to fall as well.
(j) Snap-hook considerations. (1) Although not required by this
standard for all connections until January 1, 1998, locking snaphooks
designed for connection to suitable objects (of sufficient strength) are
highly recommended in lieu of the nonlocking type. Locking snaphooks
incorporate a positive locking mechanism in addition to the spring
loaded keeper, which will not allow the keeper to open under moderate
pressure without someone first releasing the mechanism. Such a feature,
properly designed, effectively prevents roll-out from occurring.
(2) As required by Sec. 1926.502(d)(6), the following connections
must be avoided (unless properly designed locking snaphooks are used)
because they are conditions which can result in roll-out when a
nonlocking snaphook is used:
(i) Direct connection of a snaphook to a horizontal lifeline.
(ii) Two (or more) snaphooks connected to one dee-ring.
(iii) Two snaphooks connected to each other.
(iv) A snaphook connected back on its integral lanyard.
(v) A snaphook connected to a webbing loop or webbing lanyard.
(vi) Improper dimensions of the dee-ring, rebar, or other connection
point in relation to the snaphook dimensions which would allow the
snaphook keeper to be depressed by a turning motion of the snaphook.
(k) Free fall considerations. The employer and employee should at
all times be aware
[[Page 335]]
that a system's maximum arresting force is evaluated under normal use
conditions established by the manufacturer, and in no case using a free
fall distance in excess of 6 feet (1.8 m). A few extra feet of free fall
can significantly increase the arresting force on the employee, possibly
to the point of causing injury. Because of this, the free fall distance
should be kept at a minimum, and, as required by the standard, in no
case greater than 6 feet (1.8 m). To help assure this, the tie-off
attachment point to the lifeline or anchor should be located at or above
the connection point of the fall arrest equipment to belt or harness.
(Since otherwise additional free fall distance is added to the length of
the connecting means (i.e. lanyard)). Attaching to the working surface
will often result in a free fall greater than 6 feet (1.8 m). For
instance, if a 6 foot (1.8 m) lanyard is used, the total free fall
distance will be the distance from the working level to the body belt
(or harness) attachment point plus the 6 feet (1.8 m) of lanyard length.
Another important consideration is that the arresting force which the
fall system must withstand also goes up with greater distances of free
fall, possibly exceeding the strength of the system.
(l) Elongation and deceleration distance considerations. Other
factors involved in a proper tie-off are elongation and deceleration
distance. During the arresting of a fall, a lanyard will experience a
length of stretching or elongation, whereas activation of a deceleration
device will result in a certain stopping distance. These distances
should be available with the lanyard or device's instructions and must
be added to the free fall distance to arrive at the total fall distance
before an employee is fully stopped. The additional stopping distance
may be very significant if the lanyard or deceleration device is
attached near or at the end of a long lifeline, which may itself add
considerable distance due to its own elongation. As required by the
standard, sufficient distance to allow for all of these factors must
also be maintained between the employee and obstructions below, to
prevent an injury due to impact before the system fully arrests the
fall. In addition, a minimum of 12 feet (3.7 m) of lifeline should be
allowed below the securing point of a rope grab type deceleration
device, and the end terminated to prevent the device from sliding off
the lifeline. Alternatively, the lifeline should extend to the ground or
the next working level below. These measures are suggested to prevent
the worker from inadvertently moving past the end of the lifeline and
having the rope grab become disengaged from the lifeline.
(m) Obstruction considerations. The location of the tie-off should
also consider the hazard of obstructions in the potential fall path of
the employee. Tie-offs which minimize the possibilities of exaggerated
swinging should be considered. In addition, when a body belt is used,
the employee's body will go through a horizontal position to a jack-
knifed position during the arrest of all falls. Thus, obstructions which
might interfere with this motion should be avoided or a severe injury
could occur.
(n) Other considerations. Because of the design of some personal
fall arrest systems, additional considerations may be required for
proper tie-off. For example, heavy deceleration devices of the self-
retracting type should be secured overhead in order to avoid the weight
of the device having to be supported by the employee. Also, if self-
retracting equipment is connected to a horizontal lifeline, the sag in
the lifeline should be minimized to prevent the device from sliding down
the lifeline to a position which creates a swing hazard during fall
arrest. In all cases, manufacturer's instructions should be followed.
Sec. Appendix D to Subpart M of Part 1926--Positioning Device Systems
Non-Mandatory Guidelines for Complying With Sec. 1926.502(e)
I. Testing Methods For Positioning Device Systems. This appendix
serves as a non-mandatory guideline to assist employers comply with the
requirements for positioning device systems in Sec. 1926.502(e).
Paragraphs (b), (c), (d) and (e) of appendix C of subpart M relating to
Sec. 1926.502(d)--Personal Fall Arrest Systems--set forth test
procedures which may be used, along with the procedures listed below, to
determine compliance with the requirements for positioning device
systems in Sec. 1926.502(e) (3) and (4) of subpart M.
(a) General. (1) Single strap positioning devices shall have one end
attached to a fixed anchorage and the other end connected to a body belt
or harness in the same manner as they would be used to protect
employees. Double strap positioning devices, similar to window cleaner's
belts, shall have one end of the strap attached to a fixed anchorage and
the other end shall hang free. The body belt or harness shall be
attached to the strap in the same manner as it would be used to protect
employees. The two strap ends shall be adjusted to their maximum span.
(2) The fixed anchorage shall be rigid, and shall not have a
deflection greater than .04 inches (1 mm) when a force of 2,250 pounds
(10 kN) is applied.
(3) During the testing of all systems, a test weight of 250 pounds
plus or minus 3 pounds (113 kg plus or minus 1.6 kg) shall be used. The
weight shall be a rigid object with a girth of 38 inches plus or minus 4
inches (96 cm plus or minus 10 cm).
(4) Each test shall consist of dropping the specified weight one
time without failure of
[[Page 336]]
the system being tested. A new system shall be used for each test.
(5) The test weight for each test shall be hoisted exactly 4 feet
(1.2 m above its ``at rest'' position), and shall be dropped so as to
permit a vertical free fall of 4 feet (1.2 m).
(6) The test is failed whenever any breakage or slippage occurs
which permits the weight to fall free of the system.
(7) Following the test, the system need not be capable of further
operation; however, all such incapacities shall be readily apparent.
II. Inspection Considerations. As required in Sec. 1926.502 (e)(5),
positioning device systems must be regularly inspected. Any component
with any significant defect, such as cuts, tears, abrasions, mold, or
undue stretching; alterations or additions which might affect its
efficiency; damage due to deterioration; contact with fire, acids, or
other corrosives; distorted hooks or faulty hook springs; tongues
unfitted to the shoulder of buckles; loose or damaged mountings; non-
functioning parts; or wearing or internal deterioration in the ropes
must be withdrawn from service immediately, and should be tagged or
marked as unusable, or destroyed.
Sec. Appendix E to Subpart M of Part 1926--Sample Fall Protection Plan
Non-Mandatory Guidelines for Complying With Sec. 1926.502(k)
Employers engaged in leading edge work, precast concrete
construction work and residential construction work who can demonstrate
that it is infeasible or creates a greater hazard to use conventional
fall protection systems must develop and follow a fall protection plan.
Below are sample fall protection plans developed for precast concrete
construction and residential work that could be tailored to be site
specific for other precast concrete or residential jobsite. This sample
plan can be modified to be used for other work involving leading edge
work. The sample plan outlines the elements that must be addressed in
any fall protection plan. The reasons outlined in this sample fall
protection plan are for illustrative purposes only and are not
necessarily a valid, acceptable rationale (unless the conditions at the
job site are the same as those covered by these sample plans) for not
using conventional fall protection systems for a particular precast
concrete or residential construction worksite. However, the sample plans
provide guidance to employers on the type of information that is
required to be discussed in fall protection plans.
Sample Fall Protection Plans
Fall Protection Plan For Precast/Prestress Concrete Structures
This Fall Protection Plan is specific for the following project:
Location of Job_________________________________________________________
Erecting Company________________________________________________________
Date Plan Prepared or Modified__________________________________________
Plan Prepared By________________________________________________________
Plan Approved By________________________________________________________
Plan Supervised By______________________________________________________
The following Fall Protection Plan is a sample program prepared for
the prevention of injuries associated with falls. A Fall Protection Plan
must be developed and evaluated on a site by site basis. It is
recommended that erectors discuss the written Fall Protection Plan with
their OSHA Area Office prior to going on a jobsite.
I. Statement of Company Policy
(Company Name) is dedicated to the protection of its employees from
on-the-job injuries. All employees of (Company Name) have the
responsibility to work safely on the job. The purpose of this plan is:
(a) To supplement our standard safety policy by providing safety
standards specifically designed to cover fall protection on this job
and; (b) to ensure that each employee is trained and made aware of the
safety provisions which are to be implemented by this plan prior to the
start of erection.
This Fall Protection Plan addresses the use of other than
conventional fall protection at a number of areas on the project, as
well as identifying specific activities that require non-conventional
means of fall protection. These areas include:
a. Connecting activity (point of erection).
b. Leading edge work.
c. Unprotected sides or edge.
d. Grouting.
This plan is designed to enable employers and employees to recognize
the fall hazards on this job and to establish the procedures that are to
be followed in order to prevent falls to lower levels or through holes
and openings in walking/working surfaces. Each employee will be trained
in these procedures and strictly adhere to them except when doing so
would expose the employee to a greater hazard. If, in the employee's
opinion, this is the case, the employee is to notify the foreman of the
concern and the concern addressed before proceeding.
Safety policy and procedure on any one project cannot be
administered, implemented, monitored and enforced by any one individual.
The total objective of a safe, accident free work environment can only
be accomplished by a dedicated, concerted effort by every individual
involved with the project from management down to the last employee.
Each employee must understand
[[Page 337]]
their value to the company; the costs of accidents, both monetary,
physical, and emotional; the objective of the safety policy and
procedures; the safety rules that apply to the safety policy and
procedures; and what their individual role is in administering,
implementing, monitoring, and compliance of their safety policy and
procedures. This allows for a more personal approach to compliance
through planning, training, understanding and cooperative effort, rather
than by strict enforcement. If for any reason an unsafe act persists,
strict enforcement will be implemented.
It is the responsibility of (name of competent person) to implement
this Fall Protection Plan. (Name of Competent Person) is responsible for
continual observational safety checks of their work operations and to
enforce the safety policy and procedures. The foreman also is
responsible to correct any unsafe acts or conditions immediately. It is
the responsibility of the employee to understand and adhere to the
procedures of this plan and to follow the instructions of the foreman.
It is also the responsibility of the employee to bring to management's
attention any unsafe or hazardous conditions or acts that may cause
injury to either themselves or any other employees. Any changes to this
Fall Protection Plan must be approved by (name of Qualified Person).
II. Fall Protection Systems To Be Used on This Project
Where conventional fall protection is infeasible or creates a
greater hazard at the leading edge and during initial connecting
activity, we plan to do this work using a safety monitoring system and
expose only a minimum number of employees for the time necessary to
actually accomplish the job. The maximum number of workers to be
monitored by one safety monitor is six (6). We are designating the
following trained employees as designated erectors and they are
permitted to enter the controlled access zones and work without the use
of conventional fall protection.
Safety monitor:
Designated erector:
Designated erector:
Designated erector:
Designated erector:
Designated erector:
Designated erector:
The safety monitor shall be identified by wearing an orange hard
hat. The designated erectors will be identified by one of the following
methods:
1. They will wear a blue colored arm band, or
2. They will wear a blue colored hard hat, or
3. They will wear a blue colored vest.
Only individuals with the appropriate experience, skills, and training
will be authorized as designated erectors. All employees that will be
working as designated erectors under the safety monitoring system shall
have been trained and instructed in the following areas:
1. Recognition of the fall hazards in the work area (at the leading
edge and when making initial connections--point of erection).
2. Avoidance of fall hazards using established work practices which
have been made known to the employees.
3. Recognition of unsafe practices or working conditions that could
lead to a fall, such as windy conditions.
4. The function, use, and operation of safety monitoring systems,
guardrail systems, body belt/harness systems, control zones and other
protection to be used.
5. The correct procedure for erecting, maintaining, disassembling
and inspecting the system(s) to be used.
6. Knowledge of construction sequence or the erection plan.
A conference will take place prior to starting work involving all
members of the erection crew, crane crew and supervisors of any other
concerned contractors. This conference will be conducted by the precast
concrete erection supervisor in charge of the project. During the pre-
work conference, erection procedures and sequences pertinent to this job
will be thoroughly discussed and safety practices to be used throughout
the project will be specified. Further, all personnel will be informed
that the controlled access zones are off limits to all personnel other
than those designated erectors specifically trained to work in that
area.
Safety Monitoring System
A safety monitoring system means a fall protection system in which a
competent person is responsible for recognizing and warning employees of
fall hazards. The duties of the safety monitor are to:
1. Warn by voice when approaching the open edge in an unsafe manner.
2. Warn by voice if there is a dangerous situation developing which
cannot be seen by another person involved with product placement, such
as a member getting out of control.
3. Make the designated erectors aware they are in a dangerous area.
4. Be competent in recognizing fall hazards.
5. Warn employees when they appear to be unaware of a fall hazard or
are acting in an unsafe manner.
6. Be on the same walking/working surface as the monitored employees
and within visual sighting distance of the monitored employees.
[[Page 338]]
7. Be close enough to communicate orally with the employees.
8. Not allow other responsibilities to encumber monitoring. If the
safety monitor becomes too encumbered with other responsibilities, the
monitor shall (1) stop the erection process; and (2) turn over other
responsibilities to a designated erector; or (3) turn over the safety
monitoring function to another designated, competent person. The safety
monitoring system shall not be used when the wind is strong enough to
cause loads with large surface areas to swing out of radius, or result
in loss of control of the load, or when weather conditions cause the
walking-working surfaces to become icy or slippery.
Control Zone System
A controlled access zone means an area designated and clearly
marked, in which leading edge work may take place without the use of
guardrail, safety net or personal fall arrest systems to protect the
employees in the area. Control zone systems shall comply with the
following provisions:
1. When used to control access to areas where leading edge and other
operations are taking place the controlled access zone shall be defined
by a control line or by any other means that restricts access.
When control lines are used, they shall be erected not less than 6
feet (l.8 m) nor more than 60 feet (18 m) or half the length of the
member being erected, whichever is less, from the leading edge.
2. The control line shall extend along the entire length of the
unprotected or leading edge and shall be approximately parallel to the
unprotected or leading edge.
3. The control line shall be connected on each side to a guardrail
system or wall.
4. Control lines shall consist of ropes, wires, tapes, or equivalent
materials, and supporting stanchions as follows:
5. Each line shall be flagged or otherwise clearly marked at not
more than 6-foot (1.8 m) intervals with high- visibility material.
6. Each line shall be rigged and supported in such a way that its
lowest point (including sag) is not less than 39 inches (1 m) from the
walking/working surface and its highest point is not more than 45 inches
(1.3 m) from the walking/working surface.
7. Each line shall have a minimum breaking strength of 200 pounds
(.88 kN).
Holes
All openings greater than 12 in.x12 in. will have perimeter guarding
or covering. All predetermined holes will have the plywood covers made
in the precasters' yard and shipped with the member to the jobsite.
Prior to cutting holes on the job, proper protection for the hole must
be provided to protect the workers. Perimeter guarding or covers will
not be removed without the approval of the erection foreman.
Precast concrete column erection through the existing deck requires
that many holes be provided through this deck. These are to be covered
and protected. Except for the opening being currently used to erect a
column, all opening protection is to be left undisturbed. The opening
being uncovered to erect a column will become part of the point of
erection and will be addressed as part of this Fall Protection Plan.
This uncovering is to be done at the erection foreman's direction and
will only occur immediately prior to ``feeding'' the column through the
opening. Once the end of the column is through the slab opening, there
will no longer exist a fall hazard at this location.
III. Implementation of Fall Protection Plan
The structure being erected is a multistory total precast concrete
building consisting of columns, beams, wall panels and hollow core slabs
and double tee floor and roof members.
The following is a list of the products and erection situations on
this job:
Columns
For columns 10 ft to 36 ft long, employees disconnecting crane hooks
from columns will work from a ladder and wear a body belt/harness with
lanyard and be tied off when both hands are needed to disconnect. For
tying off, a vertical lifeline will be connected to the lifting eye at
the top of the column, prior to lifting, to be used with a manually
operated or mobile rope grab. For columns too high for the use of a
ladder, 36 ft and higher, an added cable will be used to reduce the
height of the disconnecting point so that a ladder can be used. This
cable will be left in place until a point in erection that it can be
removed safely. In some cases, columns will be unhooked from the crane
by using an erection tube or shackle with a pull pin which is released
from the ground after the column is stabilized.
The column will be adequately connected and/or braced to safely
support the weight of a ladder with an employee on it.
Inverted Tee Beams
Employees erecting inverted tee beams, at a height of 6 to 40 ft,
will erect the beam, make initial connections, and final alignment from
a ladder. If the employee needs to reach over the side of the beam to
bar or make an adjustment to the alignment of the beam, they will mount
the beam and be tied off to the lifting device in the beam after
ensuring the load has been stabilized on its bearing. To disconnect the
crane from the beam an employee will stand a ladder against the beam.
Because the use of ladders is not practical at heights above 40 ft,
beams
[[Page 339]]
will be initially placed with the use of tag lines and their final
alignment made by a person on a manlift or similar employee positioning
systems.
Spandrel Beams
Spandrel beams at the exterior of the building will be aligned as
closely as possible with the use of tag lines with the final placement
of the spandrel beam made from a ladder at the open end of the
structure. A ladder will be used to make the initial connections and a
ladder will be used to disconnect the crane. The other end of the beam
will be placed by the designated erector from the double tee deck under
the observation of the safety monitor.
The beams will be adequately connected and/or braced to safely
support the weight of a ladder with an employee on it.
Floor and Roof Members
During installation of the precast concrete floor and/or roof
members, the work deck continuously increases in area as more and more
units are being erected and positioned. Thus, the unprotected floor/roof
perimeter is constantly modified with the leading edge changing location
as each member is installed. The fall protection for workers at the
leading edge shall be assured by properly constructed and maintained
control zone lines not more than 60 ft away from the leading edge
supplemented by a safety monitoring system to ensure the safety of all
designated erectors working within the area defined by the control zone
lines.
The hollow core slabs erected on the masonry portion of the building
will be erected and grouted using the safety monitoring system. Grout
will be placed in the space between the end of the slab and face shell
of the concrete masonry by dumping from a wheelbarrow. The grout in the
keyways between the slabs will be dumped from a wheelbarrow and then
spread with long handled tools, allowing the worker to stand erect
facing toward the unprotected edge and back from any work deck edge.
Whenever possible, the designated erectors will approach the
incoming member at the leading edge only after it is below waist height
so that the member itself provides protection against falls.
Except for the situations described below, when the arriving floor
or roof member is within 2 to 3 inches of its final position, the
designated erectors can then proceed to their position of erection at
each end of the member under the control of the safety monitor. Crane
hooks will be unhooked from double tee members by designated erectors
under the direction and supervision of the safety monitor.
Designated erectors, while waiting for the next floor or roof
member, will be constantly under the control of the safety monitor for
fall protection and are directed to stay a minimum of six (6) ft from
the edge. In the event a designated erector must move from one end of a
member, which has just been placed at the leading edge, they must first
move away from the leading edge a minimum of six (6) ft and then
progress to the other end while maintaining the minimum distance of six
(6) ft at all times.
Erection of double tees, where conditions require bearing of one end
into a closed pocket and the other end on a beam ledge, restricting the
tee legs from going directly into the pockets, require special
considerations. The tee legs that are to bear in the closed pocket must
hang lower than those at the beam bearing. The double tee will be ``two-
lined'' in order to elevate one end higher than the other to allow for
the low end to be ducked into the closed pocket using the following
procedure.
The double tee will be rigged with a standard four-way spreader off
of the main load line. An additional choker will be attached to the
married point of the two-legged spreader at the end of the tee that is
to be elevated. The double tee will be hoisted with the main load line
and swung into a position as close as possible to the tee's final
bearing elevation. When the tee is in this position and stabilized, the
whip line load block will be lowered to just above the tee deck. At this
time, two erectors will walk out on the suspended tee deck at midspan of
the tee member and pull the load block to the end of the tee to be
elevated and attach the additional choker to the load block. The
possibility of entanglement with the crane lines and other obstacles
during this two lining process while raising and lowering the crane
block on that second line could be hazardous to an encumbered employee.
Therefore, the designated erectors will not tie off during any part of
this process. While the designated erectors are on the double tee, the
safety monitoring system will be used. After attaching the choker, the
two erectors then step back on the previously erected tee deck and
signal the crane operator to hoist the load with the whip line to the
elevation that will allow for enough clearance to let the low end tee
legs slide into the pockets when the main load line is lowered. The
erector, who is handling the lowered end of the tee at the closed pocket
bearing, will step out on the suspended tee. An erection bar will then
be placed between the end of the tee leg and the inside face of the
pocketed spandrel member. The tee is barred away from the pocketed
member to reduce the friction and lateral force against the pocketed
member. As the tee is being lowered, the other erector remains on the
tee which was previously erected to handle the other end. At this point
the tee is slowly lowered by the crane to a point where the tee legs can
freely slide into the
[[Page 340]]
pockets. The erector working the lowered end of the tee must keep
pressure on the bar between the tee and the face of the pocketed
spandrel member to very gradually let the tee legs slide into the pocket
to its proper bearing dimension. The tee is then slowly lowered into its
final erected position.
The designated erector should be allowed onto the suspended double
tee, otherwise there is no control over the horizontal movement of the
double tee and this movement could knock the spandrel off of its bearing
or the column out of plumb. The control necessary to prevent hitting the
spandrel can only be done safely from the top of the double tee being
erected.
Loadbearing Wall Panels: The erection of the loadbearing wall panels
on the elevated decks requires the use of a safety monitor and a
controlled access zone that is a minimum of 25 ft and a maximum of \1/2\
the length of the wall panels away from the unprotected edge, so that
designated erectors can move freely and unencumbered when receiving the
panels. Bracing, if required for stability, will be installed by ladder.
After the braces are secured, the crane will be disconnected from the
wall by using a ladder. The wall to wall connections will also be
performed from a ladder.
Non-Loadbearing Panels (Cladding): The locating of survey lines,
panel layout and other installation prerequisites (prewelding, etc.) for
non-loadbearing panels (cladding) will not commence until floor
perimeter and floor openings have been protected. In some areas, it is
necessary because of panel configuration to remove the perimeter
protection as the cladding is being installed. Removal of perimeter
protection will be performed on a bay to bay basis, just ahead of
cladding erection to minimize temporarily unprotected floor edges. Those
workers within 6 ft of the edge, receiving and positioning the cladding
when the perimeter protection is removed shall be tied off.
Detailing
Employees exposed to falls of six (6) feet or more to lower levels,
who are not actively engaged in leading edge work or connecting
activity, such as welding, bolting, cutting, bracing, guying, patching,
painting or other operations, and who are working less than six (6) ft
from an unprotected edge will be tied off at all times or guardrails
will be installed. Employees engaged in these activities but who are
more than six (6) ft from an unprotected edge as defined by the control
zone lines, do not require fall protection but a warning line or control
lines must be erected to remind employees they are approaching an area
where fall protection is required.
IV. Conventional Fall Protection Considered for the Point of Erection or
Leading Edge Erection Operations
A. Personal Fall Arrest Systems
In this particular erection sequence and procedure, personal fall
arrest systems requiring body belt/harness systems, lifelines and
lanyards will not reduce possible hazards to workers and will create
offsetting hazards during their usage at the leading edge of precast/
prestressed concrete construction.
Leading edge erection and initial connections are conducted by
employees who are specifically trained to do this type of work and are
trained to recognize the fall hazards. The nature of such work normally
exposes the employee to the fall hazard for a short period of time and
installation of fall protection systems for a short duration is not
feasible because it exposes the installers of the system to the same
fall hazard, but for a longer period of time.
1. It is necessary that the employee be able to move freely without
encumbrance in order to guide the sections of precast concrete into
their final position without having lifelines attached which will
restrict the employee's ability to move about at the point of erection.
2. A typical procedure requires 2 or more workers to maneuver around
each other as a concrete member is positioned to fit into the structure.
If they are each attached to a lifeline, part of their attention must be
diverted from their main task of positioning a member weighing several
tons to the task of avoiding entanglements of their lifelines or
avoiding tripping over lanyards. Therefore, if these workers are
attached to lanyards, more fall potential would result than from not
using such a device.
In this specific erection sequence and procedure, retractable
lifelines do not solve the problem of two workers becoming tangled. In
fact, such a tangle could prevent the lifeline from retracting as the
worker moved, thus potentially exposing the worker to a fall greater
than 6 ft. Also, a worker crossing over the lifeline of another worker
can create a hazard because the movement of one person can unbalance the
other. In the event of a fall by one person there is a likelihood that
the other person will be caused to fall as well. In addition, if
contamination such as grout (during hollow core grouting) enters the
retractable housing it can cause excessive wear and damage to the device
and could clog the retracting mechanism as the lanyard is dragged across
the deck. Obstructing the cable orifice can defeat the device's shock
absorbing function, produce cable slack and damage, and adversely affect
cable extraction and retraction.
3. Employees tied to a lifeline can be trapped and crushed by moving
structural members if the employee becomes restrained
[[Page 341]]
by the lanyard or retractable lifeline and cannot get out of the path of
the moving load.
The sudden movement of a precast concrete member being raised by a
crane can be caused by a number of factors. When this happens, a
connector may immediately have to move a considerable distance to avoid
injury. If a tied off body belt/harness is being used, the connector
could be trapped. Therefore, there is a greater risk of injury if the
connector is tied to the structure for this specific erection sequence
and procedure.
When necessary to move away from a retractable device, the worker
cannot move at a rate greater than the device locking speed typically
3.5 to 4.5 ft/sec. When moving toward the device it is necessary to move
at a rate which does not permit cable slack to build up. This slack may
cause cable retraction acceleration and cause a worker to lose their
balance by applying a higher than normal jerking force on the body when
the cable suddenly becomes taut after building up momentum. This slack
can also cause damage to the internal spring-loaded drum, uneven coiling
of cable on the drum, and possible cable damage.
The factors causing sudden movements for this location include:
(a) Cranes
(1) Operator error.
(2) Site conditions (soft or unstable ground).
(3) Mechanical failure.
(4) Structural failure.
(5) Rigging failure.
(6) Crane signal/radio communication failure.
(b) Weather Conditions
(1) Wind (strong wind/sudden gusting)--particularly a problem with
the large surface areas of precast concrete members.
(2) Snow/rain (visibility).
(3) Fog (visibility).
(4) Cold--causing slowed reactions or mechanical problems.
(c) Structure/Product Conditions.
(1) Lifting Eye failure.
(2) Bearing failure or slippage.
(3) Structure shifting.
(4) Bracing failure.
(5) Product failure.
(d) Human Error.
(1) Incorrect tag line procedure.
(2) Tag line hang-up.
(3) Incorrect or misunderstood crane signals.
(4) Misjudged elevation of member.
(5) Misjudged speed of member.
(6) Misjudged angle of member.
4. Anchorages or special attachment points could be cast into the
precast concrete members if sufficient preplanning and consideration of
erectors' position is done before the members are cast. Any hole or
other attachment must be approved by the engineer who designed the
member. It is possible that some design restrictions will not allow a
member to be weakened by an additional hole; however, it is anticipated
that such situations would be the exception, not the rule. Attachment
points, other than on the deck surface, will require removal and/or
patching. In order to remove and/or patch these points, requires the
employee to be exposed to an additional fall hazard at an unprotected
perimeter. The fact that attachment points could be available anywhere
on the structure does not eliminate the hazards of using these points
for tying off as discussed above. A logical point for tying off on
double tees would be using the lifting loops, except that they must be
cut off to eliminate a tripping hazard at an appropriate time.
5. Providing attachment at a point above the walking/working surface
would also create fall exposures for employees installing their devices.
Final positioning of a precast concrete member requires it to be moved
in such a way that it must pass through the area that would be occupied
by the lifeline and the lanyards attached to the point above. Resulting
entanglements of lifelines and lanyards on a moving member could pull
employees from the work surface. Also, the structure is being created
and, in most cases, there is no structure above the members being
placed.
(a) Temporary structural supports, installed to provide attaching
points for lifelines limit the space which is essential for orderly
positioning, alignment and placement of the precast concrete members. To
keep the lanyards a reasonable and manageable length, lifeline supports
would necessarily need to be in proximity to the positioning process. A
sudden shift of the precast concrete member being positioned because of
wind pressure or crane movement could make it strike the temporary
supporting structure, moving it suddenly and causing tied off employees
to fall.
(b) The time in manhours which would be expended in placing and
maintaining temporary structural supports for lifeline attaching points
could exceed the expended manhours involved in placing the precast
concrete members. No protection could be provided for the employees
erecting the temporary structural supports and these supports would have
to be moved for each successive step in the construction process, thus
greatly increasing the employee's exposure to the fall hazard.
(c) The use of a cable strung horizontally between two columns to
provide tie off lines for erecting or walking a beam for connecting work
is not feasible and creates a greater hazard on this multi-story
building for the following reasons:
[[Page 342]]
(1) If a connector is to use such a line, it must be installed
between the two columns. To perform this installation requires an
erector to have more fall exposure time attaching the cable to the
columns than would be spent to make the beam to column connection
itself.
(2) If such a line is to be installed so that an erector can walk
along a beam, it must be overhead or below him. For example, if a
connector must walk along a 24 in. wide beam, the presence of a line
next to the connector at waist level, attached directly to the columns,
would prevent the connector from centering their weight over the beam
and balancing themselves. Installing the line above the connector might
be possible on the first level of a two-story column; however, the
column may extend only a few feet above the floor level at the second
level or be flush with the floor level. Attaching the line to the side
of the beam could be a solution; however, it would require the connector
to attach the lanyard below foot level which would most likely extend a
fall farther than 6 ft.
(3) When lines are strung over every beam, it becomes more and more
difficult for the crane operator to lower a precast concrete member into
position without the member becoming fouled. Should the member become
entangled, it could easily dislodge the line from a column. If a worker
is tied to it at the time, a fall could be caused.
6. The ANSI A10.14-1991 American National Standard for Construction
and Demolition Operations--Requirements for Safety Belts, Harnesses,
Lanyards and Lifelines for Construction and Demolition Use, states that
the anchor point of a lanyard or deceleration device should, if
possible, be located above the wearer's belt or harness attachment. ANSI
A10.14 also states that a suitable anchorage point is one which is
located as high as possible to prevent contact with an obstruction below
should the worker fall. Most manufacturers also warn in the user's
handbook that the safety block/retractable lifeline must be positioned
above the D-ring (above the work space of the intended user) and OSHA
recommends that fall arrest and restraint equipment be used in
accordance with the manufacturer's instructions.
Attachment of a retractable device to a horizontal cable near floor
level or using the inserts in the floor or roof members may result in
increased free fall due to the dorsal D-ring of the full-body harness
riding higher than the attachment point of the snaphook to the cable or
insert (e.g., 6 foot tall worker with a dorsal D-ring at 5 feet above
the floor or surface, reduces the working length to only one foot, by
placing the anchorage five feet away from the fall hazard). In addition,
impact loads may exceed maximum fall arrest forces (MAF) because the
fall arrest D-ring would be 4 to 5 feet higher than the safety block/
retractable lifeline anchored to the walking-working surface; and the
potential for swing hazards is increased.
Manufacturers also require that workers not work at a level where
the point of snaphook attachment to the body harness is above the device
because this will increase the free fall distance and the deceleration
distance and will cause higher forces on the body in the event of an
accidental fall.
Manufacturers recommend an anchorage for the retractable lifeline
which is immovably fixed in space and is independent of the user's
support systems. A moveable anchorage is one which can be moved around
(such as equipment or wheeled vehicles) or which can deflect
substantially under shock loading (such as a horizontal cable or very
flexible beam). In the case of a very flexible anchorage, a shock load
applied to the anchorage during fall arrest can cause oscillation of the
flexible anchorage such that the retractable brake mechanism may undergo
one or more cycles of locking/unlocking/locking (ratchet effect) until
the anchorage deflection is dampened. Therefore, use of a moveable
anchorage involves critical engineering and safety factors and should
only be considered after fixed anchorage has been determined to be not
feasible.
Horizontal cables used as an anchorage present an additional hazard
due to amplification of the horizontal component of maximum arrest force
(of a fall) transmitted to the points where the horizontal cable is
attached to the structure. This amplification is due to the angle of sag
of a horizontal cable and is most severe for small angles of sag. For a
cable sag angle of 2 degrees the horizontal force on the points of cable
attachment can be amplified by a factor of 15.
It is also necessary to install the retractable device vertically
overhead to minimize swing falls. If an object is in the worker's swing
path (or that of the cable) hazardous situations exist: (1) due to the
swing, horizontal speed of the user may be high enough to cause injury
when an obstacle in the swing fall path is struck by either the user or
the cable; (2) the total vertical fall distance of the user may be much
greater than if the user had fallen only vertically without a swing fall
path.
With retractable lines, overconfidence may cause the worker to
engage in inappropriate behavior, such as approaching the perimeter of a
floor or roof at a distance appreciably greater than the shortest
distance between the anchorage point and the leading edge. Though the
retractable lifeline may arrest a worker's fall before he or she has
fallen a few feet, the lifeline may drag along the edge of the floor or
beam and swing the worker like a pendulum until the line has moved to a
position where the distance between the anchorage point and floor edge
is the shortest
[[Page 343]]
distance between those two points. Accompanying this pendulum swing is a
lowering of the worker, with the attendant danger that he or she may
violently impact the floor or some obstruction below.
The risk of a cable breaking is increased if a lifeline is dragged
sideways across the rough surface or edge of a concrete member at the
same moment that the lifeline is being subjected to a maximum impact
loading during a fall. The typical \3/16\ in. cable in a retractable
lifeline has a breaking strength of from 3000 to 3700 lbs.
7. The competent person, who can take into account the specialized
operations being performed on this project, should determine when and
where a designated erector cannot use a personal fall arrest system.
B. Safety Net Systems
The nature of this particular precast concrete erection worksite
precludes the safe use of safety nets where point of erection or leading
edge work must take place.
1. To install safety nets in the interior high bay of the single
story portion of the building poses rigging attachment problems.
Structural members do not exist to which supporting devices for nets can
be attached in the area where protection is required. As the erection
operation advances, the location of point of erection or leading edge
work changes constantly as each member is attached to the structure. Due
to this constant change it is not feasible to set net sections and build
separate structures to support the nets.
2. The nature of the erection process for the precast concrete
members is such that an installed net would protect workers as they
position and secure only one structural member. After each member is
stabilized the net would have to be moved to a new location (this could
mean a move of 8 to 10 ft or the possibility of a move to a different
level or area of the structure) to protect workers placing the next
piece in the construction sequence. The result would be the installation
and dismantling of safety nets repeatedly throughout the normal work
day. As the time necessary to install a net, test, and remove it is
significantly greater than the time necessary to position and secure a
precast concrete member, the exposure time for the worker installing the
safety net would be far longer than for the workers whom the net is
intended to protect. The time exposure repeats itself each time the nets
and supporting hardware must be moved laterally or upward to provide
protection at the point of erection or leading edge.
3. Strict interpretation of Sec. 1926.502(c) requires that
operations shall not be undertaken until the net is in place and has
been tested. With the point of erection constantly changing, the time
necessary to install and test a safety net significantly exceeds the
time necessary to position and secure the concrete member.
4. Use of safety nets on exposed perimeter wall openings and
opensided floors, causes attachment points to be left in architectural
concrete which must be patched and filled with matching material after
the net supporting hardware is removed. In order to patch these
openings, additional numbers of employees must be suspended by swing
stages, boatswain chairs or other devices, thereby increasing the amount
of fall exposure time to employees.
5. Installed safety nets pose an additional hazard at the perimeter
of the erected structure where limited space is available in which
members can be turned after being lifted from the ground by the crane.
There would be a high probability that the member being lifted could
become entangled in net hardware, cables, etc.
6. The use of safety nets where structural wall panels are being
erected would prevent movement of panels to point of installation. To be
effective, nets would necessarily have to provide protection across the
area where structural supporting wall panels would be set and plumbed
before roof units could be placed.
7. Use of a tower crane for the erection of the high rise portion of
the structure poses a particular hazard in that the crane operator
cannot see or judge the proximity of the load in relation to the
structure or nets. If the signaler is looking through nets and
supporting structural devices while giving instructions to the crane
operator, it is not possible to judge precise relationships between the
load and the structure itself or to nets and supporting structural
devices. This could cause the load to become entangled in the net or hit
the structure causing potential damage.
C. Guardrail Systems
On this particular worksite, guardrails, barricades, ropes, cables
or other perimeter guarding devices or methods on the erection floor
will pose problems to safe erection procedures. Typically, a floor or
roof is erected by placing 4 to 10 ft wide structural members next to
one another and welding or grouting them together. The perimeter of a
floor and roof changes each time a new member is placed into position.
It is unreasonable and virtually impossible to erect guardrails and toe
boards at the ever changing leading edge of a floor or roof.
1. To position a member safely it is necessary to remove all
obstructions extending above the floor level near the point of erection.
Such a procedure allows workers to swing a new member across the erected
surface as necessary to position it properly without worrying about
knocking material off of this surface.
[[Page 344]]
Hollow core slab erection on the masonry wall requires installation
of the perimeter protection where the masonry wall has to be
constructed. This means the guardrail is installed then subsequently
removed to continue the masonry construction. The erector will be
exposed to a fall hazard for a longer period of time while installing
and removing perimeter protection than while erecting the slabs.
In hollow core work, as in other precast concrete erection, others
are not typically on the work deck until the precast concrete erection
is complete. The deck is not complete until the leveling, aligning, and
grouting of the joints is done. It is normal practice to keep others off
the deck until at least the next day after the installation is complete
to allow the grout to harden.
2. There is no permanent boundary until all structural members have
been placed in the floor or roof. At the leading edge, workers are
operating at the temporary edge of the structure as they work to
position the next member in the sequence. Compliance with the standard
would require a guardrail and toe board be installed along this edge.
However, the presence of such a device would prevent a new member from
being swung over the erected surface low enough to allow workers to
control it safely during the positioning process. Further, these
employees would have to work through the guardrail to align the new
member and connect it to the structure. The guardrail would not protect
an employee who must lean through it to do the necessary work, rather it
would hinder the employee to such a degree that a greater hazard is
created than if the guardrail were absent.
3. Guardrail requirements pose a hazard at the leading edge of
installed floor or roof sections by creating the possibility of
employees being caught between guardrails and suspended loads. The lack
of a clear work area in which to guide the suspended load into position
for placement and welding of members into the existing structure creates
still further hazards.
4. Where erection processes require precast concrete stairways or
openings to be installed as an integral part of the overall erection
process, it must also be recognized that guardrails or handrails must
not project above the surface of the erection floor. Such guardrails
should be terminated at the level of the erection floor to avoid placing
hazardous obstacles in the path of a member being positioned.
V. Other Fall Protection Measures Considered for This Job
The following is a list and explanation of other fall protection
measures available and an explanation of limitations for use on this
particular jobsite. If during the course of erecting the building the
employee sees an area that could be erected more safely by the use of
these fall protection measures, the foreman should be notified.
A. Scaffolds are not used because:
1. The leading edge of the building is constantly changing and the
scaffolding would have to be moved at very frequent intervals. Employees
erecting and dismantling the scaffolding would be exposed to fall
hazards for a greater length of time than they would by merely erecting
the precast concrete member.
2. A scaffold tower could interfere with the safe swinging of a load
by the crane.
3. Power lines, terrain and site do not allow for the safe use of
scaffolding.
B. Vehicle mounted platforms are not used because:
1. A vehicle mounted platform will not reach areas on the deck that
are erected over other levels.
2. The leading edge of the building is usually over a lower level of
the building and this lower level will not support the weight of a
vehicle mounted platform.
3. A vehicle mounted platform could interfere with the safe swinging
of a load by the crane, either by the crane swinging the load over or
into the equipment.
4. Power lines and surrounding site work do not allow for the safe
use of a vehicle mounted platform.
C. Crane suspended personnel platforms are not used because:
1. A second crane close enough to suspend any employee in the
working and erecting area could interfere with the safe swinging of a
load by the crane hoisting the product to be erected.
2. Power lines and surrounding site work do not allow for the safe
use of a second crane on the job.
VI. Enforcement
Constant awareness of and respect for fall hazards, and compliance
with all safety rules are considered conditions of employment. The
jobsite Superintendent, as well as individuals in the Safety and
Personnel Department, reserve the right to issue disciplinary warnings
to employees, up to and including termination, for failure to follow the
guidelines of this program.
VII. Accident Investigations
All accidents that result in injury to workers, regardless of their
nature, shall be investigated and reported. It is an integral part of
any safety program that documentation take place as soon as possible so
that the cause and means of prevention can be identified to prevent a
reoccurrence.
In the event that an employee falls or there is some other related,
serious incident occurring, this plan shall be reviewed to determine if
additional practices, procedures,
[[Page 345]]
or training need to be implemented to prevent similar types of falls or
incidents from occurring.
VIII. Changes to Plan
Any changes to the plan will be approved by (name of the qualified
person). This plan shall be reviewed by a qualified person as the job
progresses to determine if additional practices, procedures or training
needs to be implemented by the competent person to improve or provide
additional fall protection. Workers shall be notified and trained, if
necessary, in the new procedures. A copy of this plan and all approved
changes shall be maintained at the jobsite.
Sample Fall Protection Plan for Residential Construction
(Insert Company Name)
This Fall Protection Plan Is Specific For The Following Project:
Location of Job_________________________________________________________
Date Plan Prepared or Modified__________________________________________
Plan Prepared By________________________________________________________
Plan Approved By________________________________________________________
Plan Supervised By______________________________________________________
The following Fall Protection Plan is a sample program prepared for
the prevention of injuries associated with falls. A Fall Protection Plan
must be developed and evaluated on a site by site basis. It is
recommended that builders discuss the written Fall Protection Plan with
their OSHA Area Office prior to going on a jobsite.
I. Statement of Company Policy
(Your company name here) is dedicated to the protection of its
employees from on-the-job injuries. All employees of (Your company name
here) have the responsibility to work safely on the job. The purpose of
the plan is to supplement our existing safety and health program and to
ensure that every employee who works for (Your company name here)
recognizes workplace fall hazards and takes the appropriate measures to
address those hazards.
This Fall Protection Plan addresses the use of conventional fall
protection at a number of areas on the project, as well as identifies
specific activities that require non-conventional means of fall
protection. During the construction of residential buildings under 48
feet in height, it is sometimes infeasible or it creates a greater
hazard to use conventional fall protection systems at specific areas or
for specific tasks. The areas or tasks may include, but are not limited
to:
a. Setting and bracing of roof trusses and rafters;
b. Installation of floor sheathing and joists;
c. Roof sheathing operations; and
d. Erecting exterior walls.
In these cases, conventional fall protection systems may not be the
safest choice for builders. This plan is designed to enable employers
and employees to recognize the fall hazards associated with this job and
to establish the safest procedures that are to be followed in order to
prevent falls to lower levels or through holes and openings in walking/
working surfaces.
Each employee will be trained in these procedures and will strictly
adhere to them except when doing so would expose the employee to a
greater hazard. If, in the employee's opinion, this is the case, the
employee is to notify the competent person of their concern and have the
concern addressed before proceeding.
It is the responsibility of (name of competent person) to implement
this Fall Protection Plan. Continual observational safety checks of work
operations and the enforcement of the safety policy and procedures shall
be regularly enforced. The crew supervisor or foreman (insert name) is
responsible for correcting any unsafe practices or conditions
immediately.
It is the responsibility of the employer to ensure that all
employees understand and adhere to the procedures of this plan and to
follow the instructions of the crew supervisor. It is also the
responsibility of the employee to bring to management's attention any
unsafe or hazardous conditions or practices that may cause injury to
either themselves or any other employees. Any changes to the Fall
Protection Plan must be approved by (name of qualified person).
II. Fall Protection Systems To Be Used on This Job
Installation of roof trusses/rafters, exterior wall erection, roof
sheathing, floor sheathing and joist/truss activities will be conducted
by employees who are specifically trained to do this type of work and
are trained to recognize the fall hazards. The nature of such work
normally exposes the employee to the fall hazard for a short period of
time. This Plan details how (Your company name here) will minimize these
hazards.
Controlled Access Zones
When using the Plan to implement the fall protection options
available, workers must be protected through limited access to high
hazard locations. Before any non-conventional fall protection systems
are used as part of the work plan, a controlled access zone (CAZ) shall
be clearly defined by the competent person as an area where a recognized
hazard exists. The demarcation of the CAZ shall be communicated by the
competent person in a recognized manner, either through signs, wires,
tapes, ropes or chains.
(Your company name here) shall take the following steps to ensure
that the CAZ is
[[Page 346]]
clearly marked or controlled by the competent person:
All access to the CAZ must be restricted to
authorized entrants;
All workers who are permitted in the CAZ shall be
listed in the appropriate sections of the Plan (or be visibly
identifiable by the competent person) prior to implementation;
The competent person shall ensure that all
protective elements of the CAZ be implemented prior to the beginning of
work.
Installation Procedures for Roof Truss and Rafter Erection
During the erection and bracing of roof trusses/rafters,
conventional fall protection may present a greater hazard to workers. On
this job, safety nets, guardrails and personal fall arrest systems will
not provide adequate fall protection because the nets will cause the
walls to collapse, while there are no suitable attachment or anchorage
points for guardrails or personal fall arrest systems.
On this job, requiring workers to use a ladder for the entire
installation process will cause a greater hazard because the worker must
stand on the ladder with his back or side to the front of the ladder.
While erecting the truss or rafter the worker will need both hands to
maneuver the truss and therefore cannot hold onto the ladder. In
addition, ladders cannot be adequately protected from movement while
trusses are being maneuvered into place. Many workers may experience
additional fatigue because of the increase in overhead work with heavy
materials, which can also lead to a greater hazard.
Exterior scaffolds cannot be utilized on this job because the
ground, after recent backfilling, cannot support the scaffolding. In
most cases, the erection and dismantling of the scaffold would expose
workers to a greater fall hazard than erection of the trusses/rafters.
On all walls eight feet or less, workers will install interior
scaffolds along the interior wall below the location where the trusses/
rafters will be erected. ``Sawhorse'' scaffolds constructed of 46 inch
sawhorses and 2x10 planks will often allow workers to be elevated high
enough to allow for the erection of trusses and rafters without working
on the top plate of the wall.
In structures that have walls higher than eight feet and where the
use of scaffolds and ladders would create a greater hazard, safe working
procedures will be utilized when working on the top plate and will be
monitored by the crew supervisor. During all stages of truss/rafter
erection the stability of the trusses/rafters will be ensured at all
times.
(Your company name here) shall take the following steps to protect
workers who are exposed to fall hazards while working from the top plate
installing trusses/rafters:
Only the following trained workers will be
allowed to work on the top plate during roof truss or rafter
installation:
________________________________________________________________________
________________________________________________________________________
________________________________________________________________________
Workers shall have no other duties to perform
during truss/rafter erection procedures;
All trusses/rafters will be adequately braced
before any worker can use the truss/rafter as a support;
Workers will remain on the top plate using the
previously stabilized truss/rafter as a support while other trusses/
rafters are being erected;
Workers will leave the area of the secured
trusses only when it is necessary to secure another truss/rafter;
The first two trusses/rafters will be set from
ladders leaning on side walls at points where the walls can support the
weight of the ladder; and
A worker will climb onto the interior top plate
via a ladder to secure the peaks of the first two trusses/rafters being
set.
The workers responsible for detaching trusses from cranes and/or
securing trusses at the peaks traditionally are positioned at the peak
of the trusses/rafters. There are also situations where workers securing
rafters to ridge beams will be positioned on top of the ridge beam.
(Your company name here) shall take the following steps to protect
workers who are exposed to fall hazards while securing trusses/rafters
at the peak of the trusses/ridge beam:
Only the following trained workers will be
allowed to work at the peak during roof truss or rafter installation:
________________________________________________________________________
________________________________________________________________________
________________________________________________________________________
Once truss or rafter installation begins, workers
not involved in that activity shall not stand or walk below or adjacent
to the roof opening or exterior walls in any area where they could be
struck by falling objects;
Workers shall have no other duties than securing/
bracing the trusses/ridge beam;
Workers positioned at the peaks or in the webs of
trusses or on top of the ridge beam shall work from a stable position,
either by sitting on a ``ridge seat'' or other equivalent surface that
provides additional stability or by positioning themselves in previously
stabilized trusses/rafters and leaning into and reaching through the
trusses/rafters;
Workers shall not remain on or in the peak/ridge
any longer than necessary to safely complete the task.
[[Page 347]]
Roof Sheathing Operations
Workers typically install roof sheathing after all trusses/rafters
and any permanent truss bracing is in place. Roof structures are
unstable until some sheathing is installed, so workers installing roof
sheathing cannot be protected from fall hazards by conventional fall
protection systems until it is determined that the roofing system can be
used as an anchorage point. At that point, employees shall be protected
by a personal fall arrest system.
Trusses/rafters are subject to collapse if a worker falls while
attached to a single truss with a belt/harness. Nets could also cause
collapse, and there is no place to attach guardrails.
All workers will ensure that they have secure footing before they
attempt to walk on the sheathing, including cleaning shoes/boots of mud
or other slip hazards.
To minimize the time workers must be exposed to a fall hazard,
materials will be staged to allow for the quickest installation of
sheathing.
(Your company name here) shall take the following steps to protect
workers who are exposed to fall hazards while installing roof sheathing:
Once roof sheathing installation begins, workers
not involved in that activity shall not stand or walk below or adjacent
to the roof opening or exterior walls in any area where they could be
struck by falling objects;
The competent person shall determine the limits
of this area, which shall be clearly communicated to workers prior to
placement of the first piece of roof sheathing;
The competent person may order work on the roof
to be suspended for brief periods as necessary to allow other workers to
pass through such areas when this would not create a greater hazard;
Only qualified workers shall install roof
sheathing;
The bottom row of roof sheathing may be installed
by workers standing in truss webs;
After the bottom row of roof sheathing is
installed, a slide guard extending the width of the roof shall be
securely attached to the roof. Slide guards are to be constructed of no
less than nominal 4'' height capable of limiting the uncontrolled slide
of workers. Workers should install the slide guard while standing in
truss webs and leaning over the sheathing;
Additional rows of roof sheathing may be
installed by workers positioned on previously installed rows of
sheathing. A slide guard can be used to assist workers in retaining
their footing during successive sheathing operations; and
Additional slide guards shall be securely
attached to the roof at intervals not to exceed 13 feet as successive
rows of sheathing are installed. For roofs with pitches in excess of 9-
in-12, slide guards will be installed at four-foot intervals.
When wet weather (rain, snow, or sleet) are
present, roof sheathing operations shall be suspended unless safe
footing can be assured for those workers installing sheathing.
When strong winds (above 40 miles per hour) are
present, roof sheathing operations are to be suspended unless wind
breakers are erected.
Installation of Floor Joists and Sheathing
During the installation of floor sheathing/joists (leading edge
construction), the following steps shall be taken to protect workers:
Only the following trained workers will be
allowed to install floor joists or sheathing:
________________________________________________________________________
________________________________________________________________________
________________________________________________________________________
Materials for the operations shall be
conveniently staged to allow for easy access to workers;
The first floor joists or trusses will be rolled
into position and secured either from the ground, ladders or sawhorse
scaffolds;
Each successive floor joist or truss will be
rolled into place and secured from a platform created from a sheet of
plywood laid over the previously secured floor joists or trusses;
Except for the first row of sheathing which will
be installed from ladders or the ground, workers shall work from the
established deck; and
Any workers not assisting in the leading edge
construction while leading edges still exist (e.g. cutting the decking
for the installers) shall not be permitted within six feet of the
leading edge under construction.
Erection of Exterior Walls
During the construction and erection of exterior walls, employers
shall take the following steps to protect workers:
Only the following trained workers will be
allowed to erect exterior walls:
________________________________________________________________________
________________________________________________________________________
________________________________________________________________________
A painted line six feet from the perimeter will
be clearly marked prior to any wall erection activities to warn of the
approaching unprotected edge;
Materials for operations shall be conveniently
staged to minimize fall hazards; and
Workers constructing exterior walls shall
complete as much cutting of materials and other preparation as possible
away from the edge of the deck.
[[Page 348]]
III. Enforcement
Constant awareness of and respect for fall hazards, and compliance
with all safety rules are considered conditions of employment. The crew
supervisor or foreman, as well as individuals in the Safety and
Personnel Department, reserve the right to issue disciplinary warnings
to employees, up to and including termination, for failure to follow the
guidelines of this program.
IV. Accident Investigations
All accidents that result in injury to workers, regardless of their
nature, shall be investigated and reported. It is an integral part of
any safety program that documentation take place as soon as possible so
that the cause and means of prevention can be identified to prevent a
reoccurrence.
In the event that an employee falls or there is some other related,
serious incident occurring, this plan shall be reviewed to determine if
additional practices, procedures, or training need to be implemented to
prevent similar types of falls or incidents from occurring.
V. Changes to Plan
Any changes to the plan will be approved by (name of the qualified
person). This plan shall be reviewed by a qualified person as the job
progresses to determine if additional practices, procedures or training
needs to be implemented by the competent person to improve or provide
additional fall protection. Workers shall be notified and trained, if
necessary, in the new procedures. A copy of this plan and all approved
changes shall be maintained at the jobsite.
[59 FR 40730, Aug. 9, 1994]
Subpart N_Helicopters, Hoists, Elevators, and Conveyors
Authority: Section 3704 of the Contract Work Hours and Safety
Standards Act (40 U.S.C. 3701); Sections 4, 6, and 8 of the Occupational
Safety and Health Act of 1970 (29 U.S.C. 653, 655, 657); Secretary of
Labor's Order Nos. 12-71 (36 FR 8754), 8-76 (41 FR 25059), or 9-83 (49
FR 35736), and 5-2007 (72 FR 31159).
Sec. 1926.550 [Reserved]
Sec. 1926.551 Helicopters.
(a) Helicopter regulations. Helicopter cranes shall be expected to
comply with any applicable regulations of the Federal Aviation
Administration.
(b) Briefing. Prior to each day's operation a briefing shall be
conducted. This briefing shall set forth the plan of operation for the
pilot and ground personnel.
(c) Slings and tag lines. Load shall be properly slung. Tag lines
shall be of a length that will not permit their being drawn up into
rotors. Pressed sleeve, swedged eyes, or equivalent means shall be used
for all freely suspended loads to prevent hand splices from spinning
open or cable clamps from loosening.
(d) Cargo hooks. All electrically operated cargo hooks shall have
the electrical activating device so designed and installed as to prevent
inadvertent operation. In addition, these cargo hooks shall be equipped
with an emergency mechanical control for releasing the load. The hooks
shall be tested prior to each day's operation to determine that the
release functions properly, both electrically and mechanically.
(e) Personal protective equipment. (1) Personal protective equipment
for employees receiving the load shall consist of complete eye
protection and hard hats secured by chinstraps.
(2) Loose-fitting clothing likely to flap in the downwash, and thus
be snagged on hoist line, shall not be worn.
(f) Loose gear and objects. Every practical precaution shall be
taken to provide for the protection of the employees from flying objects
in the rotor downwash. All loose gear within 100 feet of the place of
lifting the load, depositing the load, and all other areas susceptible
to rotor downwash shall be secured or removed.
(g) Housekeeping. Good housekeeping shall be maintained in all
helicopter loading and unloading areas.
(h) Operator responsibility. The helicopter operator shall be
responsible for size, weight, and manner in which loads are connected to
the helicopter. If, for any reason, the helicopter operator believes the
lift cannot be made safely, the lift shall not be made.
(i) Hooking and unhooking loads. When employees are required to
perform work under hovering craft, a safe means of access shall be
provided for employees to reach the hoist line hook and engage or
disengage cargo slings. Employees shall not perform work under hovering
craft except when necessary to hook or unhook loads.
[[Page 349]]
(j) Static charge. Static charge on the suspended load shall be
dissipated with a grounding device before ground personnel touch the
suspended load, or protective rubber gloves shall be worn by all ground
personnel touching the suspended load.
(k) Weight limitation. The weight of an external load shall not
exceed the manufacturer's rating.
(l) Ground lines. Hoist wires or other gear, except for pulling
lines or conductors that are allowed to ``pay out'' from a container or
roll off a reel, shall not be attached to any fixed ground structure, or
allowed to foul on any fixed structure.
(m) Visibility. When visibility is reduced by dust or other
conditions, ground personnel shall exercise special caution to keep
clear of main and stabilizing rotors. Precautions shall also be taken by
the employer to eliminate as far as practical reduced visibility.
(n) Signal systems. Signal systems between aircrew and ground
personnel shall be understood and checked in advance of hoisting the
load. This applies to either radio or hand signal systems. Hand signals
shall be as shown in Figure N-1.
[[Page 350]]
[GRAPHIC] [TIFF OMITTED] TC30OC91.015
(o) Approach distance. No unauthorized person shall be allowed to
approach within 50 feet of the helicopter when the rotor blades are
turning.
(p) Approaching helicopter. Whenever approaching or leaving a
helicopter with blades rotating, all employees shall remain in full view
of the pilot
[[Page 351]]
and keep in a crouched position. Employees shall avoid the area from the
cockpit or cabin rearward unless authorized by the helicopter operator
to work there.
(q) Personnel. Sufficient ground personnel shall be provided when
required for safe helicopter loading and unloading operations.
(r) Communications. There shall be constant reliable communication
between the pilot, and a designated employee of the ground crew who acts
as a signalman during the period of loading and unloading. This
signalman shall be distinctly recognizable from other ground personnel.
(s) Fires. Open fires shall not be permitted in an area that could
result in such fires being spread by the rotor downwash.
Sec. 1926.552 Material hoists, personnel hoists, and elevators.
(a) General requirements. (1) The employer shall comply with the
manufacturer's specifications and limitations applicable to the
operation of all hoists and elevators. Where manufacturer's
specifications are not available, the limitations assigned to the
equipment shall be based on the determinations of a professional
engineer competent in the field.
(2) Rated load capacities, recommended operating speeds, and special
hazard warnings or instructions shall be posted on cars and platforms.
(3) Wire rope shall be removed from service when any of the
following conditions exists:
(i) In hoisting ropes, six randomly distributed broken wires in one
rope lay or three broken wires in one strand in one rope lay;
(ii) Abrasion, scrubbing, flattening, or peening, causing loss of
more than one-third of the original diameter of the outside wires;
(iii) Evidence of any heat damage resulting from a torch or any
damage caused by contact with electrical wires;
(iv) Reduction from nominal diameter of more than three sixty-
fourths inch for diameters up to and including three-fourths inch; one-
sixteenth inch for diameters seven-eights to 1\1/8\ inches; and three
thirty-seconds inch for diameters 1\1/4\ to 1\1/2\ inches.
(4) Hoisting ropes shall be installed in accordance with the wire
rope manufacturers' recommendations.
(5) The installation of live booms on hoists is prohibited.
(6) The use of endless belt-type manlifts on construction shall be
prohibited.
(b) Material hoists. (1)(i) Operating rules shall be established and
posted at the operator's station of the hoist. Such rules shall include
signal system and allowable line speed for various loads. Rules and
notices shall be posted on the car frame or crosshead in a conspicuous
location, including the statement ``No Riders Allowed.''
(ii) No person shall be allowed to ride on material hoists except
for the purposes of inspection and maintenance.
(2) All entrances of the hoistways shall be protected by substantial
gates or bars which shall guard the full width of the landing entrance.
All hoistway entrance bars and gates shall be painted with diagonal
contrasting colors, such as black and yellow stripes.
(i) Bars shall be not less than 2- by 4-inch wooden bars or the
equivalent, located 2 feet from the hoistway line. Bars shall be located
not less than 36 inches nor more than 42 inches above the floor.
(ii) Gates or bars protecting the entrances to hoistways shall be
equipped with a latching device.
(3) Overhead protective covering of 2-inch planking, \3/4\-inch
plywood, or other solid material of equivalent strength, shall be
provided on the top of every material hoist cage or platform.
(4) The operator's station of a hoisting machine shall be provided
with overhead protection equivalent to tight planking not less than 2
inches thick. The support for the overhead protection shall be of equal
strength.
(5) Hoist towers may be used with or without an enclosure on all
sides. However, whichever alternative is chosen, the following
applicable conditions shall be met:
(i) When a hoist tower is enclosed, it shall be enclosed on all
sides for its entire height with a screen enclosure of
[[Page 352]]
\1/2\-inch mesh, No. 18 U.S. gauge wire or equivalent, except for
landing access.
(ii) When a hoist tower is not enclosed, the hoist platform or car
shall be totally enclosed (caged) on all sides for the full height
between the floor and the overhead protective covering with \1/2\-inch
mesh of No. 14 U.S. gauge wire or equivalent. The hoist platform
enclosure shall include the required gates for loading and unloading. A
6-foot high enclosure shall be provided on the unused sides of the hoist
tower at ground level.
(6) Car arresting devices shall be installed to function in case of
rope failure.
(7) All material hoist towers shall be designed by a licensed
professional engineer.
(8) All material hoists shall conform to the requirements of ANSI
A10.5-1969, Safety Requirements for Material Hoists.
(c) Personnel hoists. (1) Hoist towers outside the structure shall
be enclosed for the full height on the side or sides used for entrance
and exit to the structure. At the lowest landing, the enclosure on the
sides not used for exit or entrance to the structure shall be enclosed
to a height of at least 10 feet. Other sides of the tower adjacent to
floors or scaffold platforms shall be enclosed to a height of 10 feet
above the level of such floors or scaffolds.
(2) Towers inside of structures shall be enclosed on all four sides
throughout the full height.
(3) Towers shall be anchored to the structure at intervals not
exceeding 25 feet. In addition to tie-ins, a series of guys shall be
installed. Where tie-ins are not practical the tower shall be anchored
by means of guys made of wire rope at least one-half inch in diameter,
securely fastened to anchorage to ensure stability.
(4) Hoistway doors or gates shall be not less than 6 feet 6 inches
high and shall be provided with mechanical locks which cannot be
operated from the landing side, and shall be accessible only to persons
on the car.
(5) Cars shall be permanently enclosed on all sides and the top,
except sides used for entrance and exit which have car gates or doors.
(6) A door or gate shall be provided at each entrance to the car
which shall protect the full width and height of the car entrance
opening.
(7) Overhead protective covering of 2-inch planking, \3/4\-inch
plywood or other solid material or equivalent strength shall be provided
on the top of every personnel hoist.
(8) Doors or gates shall be provided with electric contacts which do
not allow movement of the hoist when door or gate is open.
(9) Safeties shall be capable of stopping and holding the car and
rated load when traveling at governor tripping speed.
(10) Cars shall be provided with a capacity and data plate secured
in a conspicuous place on the car or crosshead.
(11) Internal combustion engines shall not be permitted for direct
drive.
(12) Normal and final terminal stopping devices shall be provided.
(13) An emergency stop switch shall be provided in the car and
marked ``Stop.''
(14) Ropes: (i) The minimum number of hoisting ropes used shall be
three for traction hoists and two for drum-type hoists.
(ii) The minimum diameter of hoisting and counterweight wire ropes
shall be \1/2\-inch.
(iii) Safety factors:
Minimum Factors of Safety for Suspension Wire Ropes
------------------------------------------------------------------------
Minimum
Rope speed in feet per minute factor of
safety
------------------------------------------------------------------------
50.......................................................... 7.60
75.......................................................... 7.75
100......................................................... 7.95
125......................................................... 8.10
150......................................................... 8.25
175......................................................... 8.40
200......................................................... 8.60
225......................................................... 8.75
250......................................................... 8.90
300......................................................... 9.20
350......................................................... 9.50
400......................................................... 9.75
450......................................................... 10.00
500......................................................... 10.25
550......................................................... 10.45
600......................................................... 10.70
------------------------------------------------------------------------
(15) Following assembly and erection of hoists, and before being put
in service, an inspection and test of all functions and safety devices
shall be made under the supervision of a competent
[[Page 353]]
person. A similar inspection and test is required following major
alteration of an existing installation. All hoists shall be inspected
and tested at not more than 3-month intervals. The employer shall
prepare a certification record which includes the date the inspection
and test of all functions and safety devices was performed; the
signature of the person who performed the inspection and test; and a
serial number, or other identifier, for the hoist that was inspected and
tested. The most recent certification record shall be maintained on
file.
(16) All personnel hoists used by employees shall be constructed of
materials and components which meet the specifications for materials,
construction, safety devices, assembly, and structural integrity as
stated in the American National Standard A10.4-1963, Safety Requirements
for Workmen's Hoists. The requirements of this paragraph (c)(16) do not
apply to cantilever type personnel hoists.
(17) (i) Personnel hoists used in bridge tower construction shall be
approved by a registered professional engineer and erected under the
supervision of a qualified engineer competent in this field.
(ii) When a hoist tower is not enclosed, the hoist platform or car
shall be totally enclosed (caged) on all sides for the full height
between the floor and the overhead protective covering with \3/4\-inch
mesh of No. 14 U.S. gauge wire or equivalent. The hoist platform
enclosure shall include the required gates for loading and unloading.
(iii) These hoists shall be inspected and maintained on a weekly
basis. Whenever the hoisting equipment is exposed to winds exceeding 35
miles per hour it shall be inspected and put in operable condition
before reuse.
(iv) Wire rope shall be taken out of service when any of the
following conditions exist:
(a) In running ropes, six randomly distributed broken wires in one
lay or three broken wires in one strand in one lay;
(b) Wear of one-third the original diameter of outside individual
wires. Kinking, crushing, bird caging, or any other damage resulting in
distortion of the rope structure;
(c) Evidence of any heat damage from any cause;
(d) Reductions from nominal diameter of more than three-sixty-
fourths inch for diameters to and including three-fourths inch, one-
sixteenth inch for diameters seven-eights inch to 1\1/8\ inches
inclusive, three-thirty-seconds inch for diameters 1\1/4\ to 1\1/2\
inches inclusive;
(e) In standing ropes, more than two broken wires in one lay in
sections beyond end connections or more than one broken wire at an end
connection.
(d) Permanent elevators under the care and custody of the employer
and used by employees for work covered by this Act shall comply with the
requirements of American National Standards Institute A17.1-1965 with
addenda A17.1a-1967, A17.1b-1968, A17.1c-1969, A17.1d-1970, and
inspected in accordance with A17.2-1960 with addenda A17.2a-1965,
A17.2b-1967.
[44 FR 8577, Feb. 9, 1979; 44 FR 20940, Apr. 6, 1979, as amended at 52
FR 36382, Sept. 28, 1987]
Sec. 1926.553 Base-mounted drum hoists.
(a) General requirements. (1) Exposed moving parts such as gears,
projecting screws, setscrews, chain, cables, chain sprockets, and
reciprocating or rotating parts, which constitute a hazard, shall be
guarded.
(2) All controls used during the normal operation cycle shall be
located within easy reach of the operator's station.
(3) Electric motor operated hoists shall be provided with:
(i) A device to disconnect all motors from the line upon power
failure and not permit any motor to be restarted until the controller
handle is brought to the ``off'' position;
(ii) Where applicable, an overspeed preventive device;
(iii) A means whereby remotely operated hoists stop when any control
is ineffective.
(4) All base-mounted drum hoists in use shall meet the applicable
requirements for design, construction, installation, testing,
inspection, maintenance, and operations, as prescribed by the
manufacturer.
(b) Specific requirements. [Reserved]
[[Page 354]]
(c) This section does not apply to base-mounted drum hoists used in
conjunction with derricks. Base-mounted drum hoists used in conjunction
with derricks must conform to Sec. 1926.1436(e).
[44 FR 8577, Feb. 9, 1979 as amended at 75 FR 48134, Aug. 9, 2010]
Sec. 1926.554 Overhead hoists.
(a) General requirements. (1) The safe working load of the overhead
hoist, as determined by the manufacturer, shall be indicated on the
hoist, and this safe working load shall not be exceeded.
(2) The supporting structure to which the hoist is attached shall
have a safe working load equal to that of the hoist.
(3) The support shall be arranged so as to provide for free movement
of the hoist and shall not restrict the hoist from lining itself up with
the load.
(4) The hoist shall be installed only in locations that will permit
the operator to stand clear of the load at all times.
(5) Air hoists shall be connected to an air supply of sufficient
capacity and pressure to safely operate the hoist. All air hoses
supplying air shall be positively connected to prevent their becoming
disconnected during use.
(6) All overhead hoists in use shall meet the applicable
requirements for construction, design, installation, testing,
inspection, maintenance, and operation, as prescribed by the
manufacturer.
(b) Specific requirements. [Reserved]
Sec. 1926.555 Conveyors.
(a) General requirements. (1) Means for stopping the motor or engine
shall be provided at the operator's station. Conveyor systems shall be
equipped with an audible warning signal to be sounded immediately before
starting up the conveyor.
(2) If the operator's station is at a remote point, similar
provisions for stopping the motor or engine shall be provided at the
motor or engine location.
(3) Emergency stop switches shall be arranged so that the conveyor
cannot be started again until the actuating stop switch has been reset
to running or ``on'' position.
(4) Screw conveyors shall be guarded to prevent employee contact
with turning flights.
(5) Where a conveyor passes over work areas, aisles, or
thoroughfares, suitable guards shall be provided to protect employees
required to work below the conveyors.
(6) All crossovers, aisles, and passageways shall be conspicuously
marked by suitable signs, as required by subpart G of this part.
(7) Conveyors shall be locked out or otherwise rendered inoperable,
and tagged out with a ``Do Not Operate'' tag during repairs and when
operation is hazardous to employees performing maintenance work.
(8) All conveyors in use shall meet the applicable requirements for
design, construction, inspection, testing, maintenance, and operation,
as prescribed in the ANSI B20.1-1957, Safety Code for Conveyors,
Cableways, and Related Equipment.
Subpart O_Motor Vehicles, Mechanized Equipment, and Marine Operations
Authority: Section 107, Construction Work Hours and Safety Standards
Act (Construction Safety Act) (40 U.S.C. 333); Secs. 4, 6, 8,
Occupational Safety and Health Act of 1970 (29 U.S.C. 653, 655, 657);
Secretary of Labor's Order No. 12-71 (36 FR 8754), 8-76 (41 FR 25059),
9-83 (48 FR 35736), 1-90 (55 FR 9033), 6-96 (62 FR 111), or 5-2007 (72
FR 31159), as applicable. Section 1926.602 also issued under 29 CFR part
1911.
Sec. 1926.600 Equipment.
(a) General requirements. (1) All equipment left unattended at
night, adjacent to a highway in normal use, or adjacent to construction
areas where work is in progress, shall have appropriate lights or
reflectors, or barricades equipped with appropriate lights or
reflectors, to identify the location of the equipment.
(2) A safety tire rack, cage, or equivalent protection shall be
provided and used when inflating, mounting, or dismounting tires
installed on split rims, or rims equipped with locking rings or similar
devices.
(3) (i) Heavy machinery, equipment, or parts thereof, which are
suspended or held aloft by use of slings, hoists, or jacks shall be
substantially blocked or cribbed to prevent falling or shifting
[[Page 355]]
before employees are permitted to work under or between them. Bulldozer
and scraper blades, end-loader buckets, dump bodies, and similar
equipment, shall be either fully lowered or blocked when being repaired
or when not in use. All controls shall be in a neutral position, with
the motors stopped and brakes set, unless work being performed requires
otherwise.
(ii) Whenever the equipment is parked, the parking brake shall be
set. Equipment parked on inclines shall have the wheels chocked and the
parking brake set.
(4) The use, care and charging of all batteries shall conform to the
requirements of subpart K of this part.
(5) All cab glass shall be safety glass, or equivalent, that
introduces no visible distortion affecting the safe operation of any
machine covered by this subpart.
(6) All equipment covered by this subpart shall comply with the
following requirements when working or being moved in the vicinity of
power lines or energized transmitters, except where electrical
distribution and transmission lines have been deenergized and visibly
grounded at point of work or where insulating barriers, not a part of or
an attachment to the equipment or machinery, have been erected to
prevent physical contact with the lines:
(i) For lines rated 50 kV or below, minimum clearance between the
lines and any part of the crane or load shall be 10 feet;
(ii) For lines rated over 50 kV, minimum clearance between the lines
and any part of the crane or load shall be 10 feet plus 0.4 inch for
each 1 kV over 50 kV, or twice the length of the line insulator, but
never less than 10 feet;
(iii) In transit with no load and boom lowered, the equipment
clearance shall be a minimum of 4 feet for voltages less than 50 kV, and
10 feet for voltages over 50 kV, up to and including 345 kV, and 16 feet
for voltages up to and including 750 kV;
(iv) A person shall be designated to observe clearance of the
equipment and give timely warning for all operations where it is
difficult for the operator to maintain the desired clearance by visual
means;
(v) Cage-type boom guards, insulating links, or proximity warning
devices may be used on cranes, but the use of such devices shall not
alter the requirements of any other regulation of this part even if such
device is required by law or regulation;
(vi) Any overhead wire shall be considered to be an energized line
unless and until the person owning such line or the electrical utility
authorities indicate that it is not an energized line and it has been
visibly grounded;
(vii) Prior to work near transmitter towers where an electrical
charge can be induced in the equipment or materials being handled, the
transmitter shall be de-energized or tests shall be made to determine if
electrical charge is induced on the crane. The following precautions
shall be taken when necessary to dissipate induced voltages:
(A) The equipment shall be provided with an electrical ground
directly to the upper rotating structure supporting the boom; and
(B) Ground jumper cables shall be attached to materials being
handled by boom equipment when electrical charge is induced while
working near energized transmitters. Crews shall be provided with
nonconductive poles having large alligator clips or other similar
protection to attach the ground cable to the load.
(C) Combustible and flammable materials shall be removed from the
immediate area prior to operations.
(7) Rolling railroad cars. Derail and/or bumper blocks shall be
provided on spur railroad tracks where a rolling car could contact other
cars being worked, enter a building, work or traffic area.
(b) Specific requirements. [Reserved]
[44 FR 8577, Feb. 9, 1979; 44 FR 20940, Apr. 6, 1979, as amended at 58
FR 35183, June 30, 1993; 75 FR 48134, Aug. 9, 2010]
Sec. 1926.601 Motor vehicles.
(a) Coverage. Motor vehicles as covered by this part are those
vehicles that operate within an off-highway jobsite, not open to public
traffic. The requirements of this section do not apply to equipment for
which rules are prescribed in Sec. 1926.602.
(b) General requirements. (1) All vehicles shall have a service
brake system, an emergency brake system, and a
[[Page 356]]
parking brake system. These systems may use common components, and shall
be maintained in operable condition.
(2)(i) Whenever visibility conditions warrant additional light, all
vehicles, or combinations of vehicles, in use shall be equipped with at
least two headlights and two taillights in operable condition.
(ii) All vehicles, or combination of vehicles, shall have brake
lights in operable condition regardless of light conditions.
(3) All vehicles shall be equipped with an adequate audible warning
device at the operator's station and in an operable condition.
(4) No employer shall use any motor vehicle equipment having an
obstructed view to the rear unless:
(i) The vehicle has a reverse signal alarm audible above the
surrounding noise level or:
(ii) The vehicle is backed up only when an observer signals that it
is safe to do so.
(5) All vehicles with cabs shall be equipped with windshields and
powered wipers. Cracked and broken glass shall be replaced. Vehicles
operating in areas or under conditions that cause fogging or frosting of
the windshields shall be equipped with operable defogging or defrosting
devices.
(6) All haulage vehicles, whose pay load is loaded by means of
cranes, power shovels, loaders, or similar equipment, shall have a cab
shield and/or canopy adequate to protect the operator from shifting or
falling materials.
(7) Tools and material shall be secured to prevent movement when
transported in the same compartment with employees.
(8) Vehicles used to transport employees shall have seats firmly
secured and adequate for the number of employees to be carried.
(9) Seat belts and anchorages meeting the requirements of 49 CFR
part 571 (Department of Transportation, Federal Motor Vehicle Safety
Standards) shall be installed in all motor vehicles.
(10) Trucks with dump bodies shall be equipped with positive means
of support, permanently attached, and capable of being locked in
position to prevent accidental lowering of the body while maintenance or
inspection work is being done.
(11) Operating levers controlling hoisting or dumping devices on
haulage bodies shall be equipped with a latch or other device which will
prevent accidental starting or tripping of the mechanism.
(12) Trip handles for tailgates of dump trucks shall be so arranged
that, in dumping, the operator will be in the clear.
(13) (i) All rubber-tired motor vehicle equipment manufactured on or
after May 1, 1972, shall be equipped with fenders. All rubber-tired
motor vehicle equipment manufactured before May 1, 1972, shall be
equipped with fenders not later than May 1, 1973.
(ii) Mud flaps may be used in lieu of fenders whenever motor vehicle
equipment is not designed for fenders.
(14) All vehicles in use shall be checked at the beginning of each
shift to assure that the following parts, equipment, and accessories are
in safe operating condition and free of apparent damage that could cause
failure while in use: service brakes, including trailer brake
connections; parking system (hand brake); emergency stopping system
(brakes); tires; horn; steering mechanism; coupling devices; seat belts;
operating controls; and safety devices. All defects shall be corrected
before the vehicle is placed in service. These requirements also apply
to equipment such as lights, reflectors, windshield wipers, defrosters,
fire extinguishers, etc., where such equipment is necessary.
Sec. 1926.602 Material handling equipment.
(a) Earthmoving equipment; General. (1) These rules apply to the
following types of earthmoving equipment: scrapers, loaders, crawler or
wheel tractors, bulldozers, off-highway trucks, graders, agricultural
and industrial tractors, and similar equipment. The promulgation of
specific rules for compactors and rubber-tired ``skid-steer'' equipment
is reserved pending consideration of standards currently being
developed.
(2) Seat belts. (i) Seat belts shall be provided on all equipment
covered by
[[Page 357]]
this section and shall meet the requirements of the Society of
Automotive Engineers, J386-1969, Seat Belts for Construction Equipment.
Seat belts for agricultural and light industrial tractors shall meet the
seat belt requirements of Society of Automotive Engineers J333a-1970,
Operator Protection for Agricultural and Light Industrial Tractors.
(ii) Seat belts need not be provided for equipment which is designed
only for standup operation.
(iii) Seat belts need not be provided for equipment which does not
have roll-over protective structure (ROPS) or adequate canopy
protection.
(3) Access roadways and grades. (i) No employer shall move or cause
to be moved construction equipment or vehicles upon any access roadway
or grade unless the access roadway or grade is constructed and
maintained to accommodate safely the movement of the equipment and
vehicles involved.
(ii) Every emergency access ramp and berm used by an employer shall
be constructed to restrain and control runaway vehicles.
(4) Brakes. All earthmoving equipment mentioned in this Sec.
1926.602(a) shall have a service braking system capable of stopping and
holding the equipment fully loaded, as specified in Society of
Automotive Engineers SAE-J237, Loader Dozer-1971, J236, Graders-1971,
and J319b, Scrapers-1971. Brake systems for self-propelled rubber-tired
off-highway equipment manufactured after January 1, 1972 shall meet the
applicable minimum performance criteria set forth in the following
Society of Automotive Engineers Recommended Practices:
Self-Propelled Scrapers................... SAE J319b-1971.
Self-Propelled Graders.................... SAE J236-1971.
Trucks and Wagons......................... SAE J166-1971.
Front End Loaders and Dozers.............. SAE J237-1971.
(5) Fenders. Pneumatic-tired earth-moving haulage equipment (trucks,
scrapers, tractors, and trailing units) whose maximum speed exceeds 15
miles per hour, shall be equipped with fenders on all wheels to meet the
requirements of Society of Automotive Engineers SAE J321a-1970, Fenders
for Pneumatic-Tired Earthmoving Haulage Equipment. An employer may, of
course, at any time seek to show under Sec. 1926.2, that the uncovered
wheels present no hazard to personnel from flying materials.
(6) Rollover protective structures (ROPS). See subpart W of this
part for requirements for rollover protective structures and overhead
protection.
(7) Rollover protective structures for off-highway trucks. The
promulgation of standards for rollover protective structures for off-
highway trucks is reserved pending further study and development.
(8) Specific effective dates--brakes and fenders. (i) Equipment
mentioned in paragraph (a)(4) and (5) of this section, and manufactured
after January 1, 1972, which is used by any employer after that date,
shall comply with the applicable rules prescribed therein concerning
brakes and fenders. Equipment mentioned in paragraphs (a) (4) and (5) of
this section, and manufactured before January 1, 1972, which is used by
any employer after that date, shall meet the applicable rules prescribed
herein not later than June 30, 1973. It should be noted that, as
permitted under Sec. 1926.2, employers may request variations from the
applicable brakes and fender standards required by this subpart.
Employers wishing to seek variations from the applicable brakes and
fenders rules may submit any requests for variations after the
publication of this document in the Federal Register. Any statements
intending to meet the requirements of Sec. 1926.2(b)(4), should specify
how the variation would protect the safety of the employees by providing
for any compensating restrictions on the operation of equipment.
(ii) Notwithstanding the provisions of paragraphs (a)(5) and
(a)(8)(i) of this section, the requirement that fenders be installed on
pneumatic-tired earthmoving haulage equipment, is suspended pending
reconsideration of the requirement.
(9) Audible alarms. (i) All bidirectional machines, such as rollers,
compacters, front-end loaders, bulldozers, and similar equipment, shall
be equipped with a horn, distinguishable from the surrounding noise
level, which shall be operated as needed when the machine is moving in
either direction. The horn shall be maintained in an operative
condition.
[[Page 358]]
(ii) No employer shall permit earthmoving or compacting equipment
which has an obstructed view to the rear to be used in reverse gear
unless the equipment has in operation a reverse signal alarm
distinguishable from the surrounding noise level or an employee signals
that it is safe to do so.
(10) Scissor points. Scissor points on all front-end loaders, which
constitute a hazard to the operator during normal operation, shall be
guarded.
(b) Excavating and other equipment. (1) Tractors covered in
paragraph (a) of this section shall have seat belts as required for the
operators when seated in the normal seating arrangement for tractor
operation, even though back-hoes, breakers, or other similar attachments
are used on these machines for excavating or other work.
(2) For the purposes of this subpart and of subpart N of this part,
the nomenclatures and descriptions for measurement of dimensions of
machinery and attachments shall be as described in Society of Automotive
Engineers 1970 Handbook, pages 1088 through 1103.
(3) The safety requirements, ratios, or limitations applicable to
machines or attachment usage covered in Power Crane and Shovel
Associations Standards No. 1 and No. 2 of 1968, and No. 3 of 1969, shall
be complied with, and shall apply to cranes, machines, and attachments
under this part.
(c) Lifting and hauling equipment (other than equipment covered
under subpart N of this part). (1) Industrial trucks shall meet the
requirements of Sec. 1926.600 and the following:
(i) Lift trucks, stackers, etc., shall have the rated capacity
clearly posted on the vehicle so as to be clearly visible to the
operator. When auxiliary removable counterweights are provided by the
manufacturer, corresponding alternate rated capacities also shall be
clearly shown on the vehicle. These ratings shall not be exceeded.
(ii) No modifications or additions which affect the capacity or safe
operation of the equipment shall be made without the manufacturer's
written approval. If such modifications or changes are made, the
capacity, operation, and maintenance instruction plates, tags, or decals
shall be changed accordingly. In no case shall the original safety
factor of the equipment be reduced.
(iii) If a load is lifted by two or more trucks working in unison,
the proportion of the total load carried by any one truck shall not
exceed its capacity.
(iv) Steering or spinner knobs shall not be attached to the steering
wheel unless the steering mechanism is of a type that prevents road
reactions from causing the steering handwheel to spin. The steering knob
shall be mounted within the periphery of the wheel.
(v) All high lift rider industrial trucks shall be equipped with
overhead guards which meet the configuration and structural requirements
as defined in paragraph 421 of American National Standards Institute
B56.1-1969, Safety Standards for Powered Industrial Trucks.
(vi) All industrial trucks in use shall meet the applicable
requirements of design, construction, stability, inspection, testing,
maintenance, and operation, as defined in American National Standards
Institute B56.1-1969, Safety Standards for Powered Industrial Trucks.
(vii) Unauthorized personnel shall not be permitted to ride on
powered industrial trucks. A safe place to ride shall be provided where
riding of trucks is authorized.
(viii) Whenever a truck is equipped with vertical only, or vertical
and horizontal controls elevatable with the lifting carriage or forks
for lifting personnel, the following additional precautions shall be
taken for the protection of personnel being elevated.
(A) Use of a safety platform firmly secured to the lifting carriage
and/or forks.
(B) Means shall be provided whereby personnel on the platform can
shut off power to the truck.
(C) Such protection from falling objects as indicated necessary by
the operating conditions shall be provided.
(d) Powered industrial truck operator training.
Note: The requirements applicable to construction work under this
paragraph are
[[Page 359]]
identical to those set forth at Sec. 1910.178(l) of this chapter.
[44 FR 8577, Feb. 9, 1979; 44 FR 20940, Apr. 6, 1979, as amended at 58
FR 35183, June 30, 1993; 63 FR 66274, Dec. 1, 1998]
Sec. 1926.603 Pile driving equipment.
(a) General requirements. (1) Boilers and piping systems which are a
part of, or used with, pile driving equipment shall meet the applicable
requirements of the American Society of Mechanical Engineers, Power
Boilers (section I).
(2) All pressure vessels which are a part of, or used with, pile
driving equipment shall meet the applicable requirements of the American
Society of Mechanical Engineers, Pressure Vessels (section VIII).
(3) Overhead protection, which will not obscure the vision of the
operator and which meets the requirements of subpart N of this part,
shall be provided. Protection shall be the equivalent of 2-inch planking
or other solid material of equivalent strength.
(4) Stop blocks shall be provided for the leads to prevent the
hammer from being raised against the head block.
(5) A blocking device, capable of safely supporting the weight of
the hammer, shall be provided for placement in the leads under the
hammer at all times while employees are working under the hammer.
(6) Guards shall be provided across the top of the head block to
prevent the cable from jumping out of the sheaves.
(7) When the leads must be inclined in the driving of batter piles,
provisions shall be made to stabilize the leads.
(8) Fixed leads shall be provided with ladder, and adequate rings,
or similar attachment points, so that the loft worker may engage his
safety belt lanyard to the leads. If the leads are provided with loft
platforms(s), such platform(s) shall be protected by standard
guardrails.
(9) Steam hose leading to a steam hammer or jet pipe shall be
securely attached to the hammer with an adequate length of at least \1/
4\-inch diameter chain or cable to prevent whipping in the event the
joint at the hammer is broken. Air hammer hoses shall be provided with
the same protection as required for steam lines.
(10) Safety chains, or equivalent means, shall be provided for each
hose connection to prevent the line from thrashing around in case the
coupling becomes disconnected.
(11) Steam line controls shall consist of two shutoff valves, one of
which shall be a quick-acting lever type within easy reach of the hammer
operator.
(12) Guys, outriggers, thrustouts, or counterbalances shall be
provided as necessary to maintain stability of pile driver rigs.
(b) Pile driving from barges and floats. Barges or floats supporting
pile driving operations shall meet the applicable requirements of Sec.
1926.605.
(c) Pile driving equipment. (1) Engineers and winchmen shall accept
signals only from the designated signalmen.
(2) All employees shall be kept clear when piling is being hoisted
into the leads.
(3) When piles are being driven in an excavated pit, the walls of
the pit shall be sloped to the angle of repose or sheet-piled and
braced.
(4) When steel tube piles are being ``blown out'', employees shall
be kept well beyond the range of falling materials.
(5) When it is necessary to cut off the tops of driven piles, pile
driving operations shall be suspended except where the cutting
operations are located at least twice the length of the longest pile
from the driver.
(6) When driving jacked piles, all access pits shall be provided
with ladders and bulkheaded curbs to prevent material from falling into
the pit.